Kronos Op Guide E5

1
Operation Guide
5 E
iii
About this manual
The owners manuals and how to use them
References to the KRONOS and KRONOS X
ThesemanualsapplytoboththeKRONOSandthe
KRONOSX,collectivelyreferredtoastheKRONOS.
Thefrontpanelandrearpanelillustrationsshowthe
KRONOSX61keymodel,buttheyapplyidenticallyto
theothermodels.
Three manuals
TheKRONOSincludesthreeownersmanuals:
QuickStartGuide
OperationGuide
ParameterGuide
AllofthesemanualsareavailableasPDFsonAccessory
Disc2,andareincludedintheonboardHelpsystem.A
printedversionoftheQuickStartGuideisalsoincluded.
Quick Start Guide
Pleasereadthisfirst.Itintroducesallofthebasicfeatures
oftheKRONOS,andisdesignedtogetyouupand
runningquickly.
Operation Guide
Putsimply,theOperationGuideisdesignedtoanswer
thequestion,HowdoIdothis?
Itexplainsthenamesandfunctionsofeachpartofthe
KRONOS,basicoperation,anoverviewofeachmode,
howtoeditsounds,recordonthesequencer,sample,and
soon.Thisguidealsoexplainsthebasicsofeffects,
KARMA,DrumTrack,WaveSequences,andDrumKits.
Finally,italsocontainsatroubleshootingguideand
supplementalinformationsuchasspecifications.
Parameter Guide
TheParameterGuideisdesignedtoanswerthequestion,
Whatdoesthisdo?
Organizedbymodeandpage,theParameterGuide
includesinformationoneachandeveryparameterinthe
KRONOS.
PDF versions
TheKRONOSPDFmanualsaredesignedforeasy
navigationandsearching.TheyincludeextensivePDF
contentsinformation,whichgenerallyappearsonthe
sideofthewindowinyourPDFreaderandletsyoujump
quicklytoaspecificsection.Allcrossreferencesare
hyperlinks,sothatclickingonthemautomaticallytakes
youtothesourceofthereference.
On-board Help system*
TheHELPbuttongivesyoubuiltin,contextsensitive
accesstotheusermanuals,rightfromthefrontpanel.
Forinformationonanyfrontpanelbutton,knob,slider,
orrealtimecontroller,justholddownHELPandthen
pressthebuttonormovethecontrollerinquestion.
ForinformationonthecurrentLCDpage,pressand
releasetheHELPbutton.
FormoredetailsonusingtheHelpsystem,seeHELP
buttononpage 3.
*Englishlanguageonly.
Supplementary guides
Voice Name List
TheVoiceNameListlistsallofthesoundsandsetups
thatareintheKRONOSwhenitisshippedfromthe
factory,includingPrograms,Combinations,
Multisamples,DrumSamples,DrumKits,KARMAGEs,
WaveSequences,DrumTrackPatterns,TemplateSongs,
andEffectPresets.
Updating and restoring the KRONOS
Thisdocumentcontainsinformationonupdatingand
restoringtheKRONOSsoftware.Itsprovidedseparately
asaconvenience;allofitsinformationmayalsobefound
intheParameterGuide.
New features in KRONOS software version 1.5
Thisdocumentprovidesanoverviewofthenewfeatures
inKRONOSsoftwareversion1.5.Itsprovided
separatelyasaconvenience;allofitsinformationmay
alsobefoundintheOperationGuide.
Conventions in this manual
Abbreviations for the manuals: OG, PG, VNL
Inthedocumentation,referencestothemanualsare
abbreviatedasfollows.
QS:QuickStartGuide
OG:OperationGuide
PG:ParameterGuide
VNL:TheVoiceNameList
Symbols , , Note, Tips
Thesesymbolsrespectivelyindicateacaution,aMIDI
relatedexplanation,asupplementarynote,oratip.
Example screen displays
Theparametervaluesshownintheexamplescreensof
thismanualareonlyforexplanatorypurposes,andmay
notnecessarymatchthevaluesthatappearintheLCD
screenofyourinstrument.
MIDI-related explanations
CC#isanabbreviationforControlChangeNumber.
InexplanationsofMIDImessages,numbersinsquare
brackets[]alwaysindicatehexadecimalnumbers.
ThankyouforpurchasingtheKorgKRONOS/KRONOSX.Tohelpyougetthemostoutofyournewinstrument,
pleasereadthismanualcarefully.
iv
Contents
About this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
Introduction to KRONOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Front and rear panels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Frontpanel ................................. 1
Rearpanel.................................. 8
TouchViewuserinterface .................... 10
Basic information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
AbouttheKRONOSmodes.................. 13
AbouttheKRONOSPCMmemory ........... 16
Aboutpolyphony........................... 16
Basicoperations............................ 17
Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Turningthepoweron/off.................... 20
Connections................................ 20
Update information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Newfeaturesinsoftwareversion2.0.......... 25
Newfeaturesinsoftwareversion1.5.......... 25
Playing and editing Programs . . . . . . . . 27
Playing Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
SelectingPrograms.......................... 27
UsingControllers ........................... 31
UsingtheChordPads....................... 35
UsingChordmode.......................... 36
Easy Program Editing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Quickeditsusingtheknobs,sliders, and switches.
39
Detailed Program Editing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
EditingHD1Programs...................... 43
UsingLFOsandEnvelopes(EGs)............. 45
UsingAlternateModulation(AMS)
and the AMS Mixers ........................ 47
ControllingPitch........................... 48
UsingFilters ............................... 49
UsingtheAmpsection...................... 51
UsingEXi.................................. 53
UsingVectorSynthesis...................... 55
Effects..................................... 56
AutomaticallyimportingaProgram
into Sequencer mode ........................ 56
Playing and editing Combinations . . . . 57
Playing Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
SelectingCombinations...................... 57
Easy Combination editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
ChangingtheProgramswithinaCombi ....... 60
Adjustingthemix........................... 60
EasyKARMAediting....................... 61
Detailed Combination editing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Combinationoverview...................... 62
Layers,Splits,andVelocitySwitches.......... 63
MIDISettings...............................64
AlteringProgramstofitwithin a Combination..65
Effects .....................................66
AutomaticallyimportingaCombination
into Sequencer mode.........................67
Savingyouredits ............................67
Creating songs (Sequencer mode) . . . . 69
Sequencer overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
AbouttheKRONOSsequencer ...............69
Sequencermodestructure....................69
Playing Songs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Playback...................................72
ThecontrolsurfaceinSequencermode .........74
MIDI recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Preparationsforrecording ....................76
RecordingMIDIinrealtime..................78
MIDIsteprecording.........................81
RecordingthesoundofaCombinationor Program
82
RecordingmultipleMIDItracksfrom
an external sequencer........................84
RecordingSystemExclusiveevents............85
Recordingpatterns ..........................86
Otherwaystorecord.........................88
Audio recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Audiorecordingoverview....................89
Audioinputsettingsandrecordingsourceselection
90
Recordingprocedure.........................93
Othervariationsofaudiotrackrecording .......99
PlacingaWAVEfileinanaudiotrack.........101
Song editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Songs.....................................103
MIDITracks...............................103
CommontoMIDItracksandaudiotracks .....104
AudioTracks ..............................105
Using RPPR (Realtime Pattern Play/Record) . . 106
CreatingRPPRdata.........................106
RPPRplayback.............................107
RecordinganRPPRperformance.............107
Sampling in Sequencer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Saving your Song . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Other notes about Sequencer mode . . . . . . . . . 111
KRONOSsequencerfileformats..............111
TheComparefunction......................111
MemoryProtect ............................112
AboutMIDI ...............................112
Set Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Set List Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Selecting and playing sounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
SelectingSetLists...........................114
SelectingSlots..............................115
v
Editing Set Lists. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Selectingandrearrangingsounds........... 116
DetailedSetListediting.................... 117
SetListsandtheControlSurface............. 118
Smooth Sound Transitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Overview................................. 120
UsingSmoothSoundTransitions............ 120
Sampling (Open Sampling System) . . 123
Sampling overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
AboutsamplingontheKRONOS ............ 123
Preparations for sampling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
AudioSettings ............................ 126
Sampling and editing in Sampling mode . . . . 132
Creatingmultisampleindexesand sampling
P0: Recording............................. 133
Basicexamplesofsampling................. 135
Editingloops.............................. 139
UsingTimeSlice........................... 141
Samplewaveformediting................... 144
Multisampleediting ....................... 145
SamplingfromanAudioCD................ 145
Saving,convertingtoPrograms,andComparing..
146
Sampling in Program and Combination modes. . .
148
Overview................................. 148
ResamplingaKARMAphraseinProgrammode..
148
AutoSamplingSetup ...................... 149
MixingaKARMAdrumphrasewith
a live guitar input, and samplingtheresult.... 149
Samplingaguitarfromtheaudioinputs,
while listeningtoaKARMAdrumphrase .... 150
Sampling in Sequencer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
InTrackSampling ......................... 151
ResamplingasongtocreateaWavefile ...... 152
User Sample Banks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Global Settings, Wave Seq., Drum Kits . . .
157
Global mode overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Global Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
BasicSetup............................... 158
Globalaudiosettings....................... 160
MIDIsettings ............................. 160
Pedalandothercontrollersettings........... 161
Creatinguserscales ........................ 162
SettingCategoryNamesforPrograms,
Combinations,andKARMA................ 163
Automatically loading sample data . . . . . . . . . 164
UsingtheKSCAutoLoadlisttoselect
which samples to load...................... 164
Creatingandsaving.KSCfiles............... 165
Connecting to computers via USB Ethernet and
FTP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Using Wave Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
WaveSequenceOverview................... 168
ProgrammingBasics ........................ 168
Adjustingthesoundofanindividualstep..... 169
UsingrhythmicWaveSequences............. 171
Creatingsmooth,evolvingtimbres ........... 173
ModulatingWaveSequences ................ 174
SavingWaveSequences ..................... 175
Using Drum Kits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
DrumKitOverview ........................ 176
Beforeyoustartediting ................... 176
EditingDrumKits .......................... 177
SavingDrumKits .......................... 179
Loading & saving data, and creating CDs.
181
Saving data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Overview ................................. 181
Writingtointernalmemory.................. 182
Savingtodisks,CDs,andUSBmedia......... 186
Loading data from disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
LoadingSongs,sounds,samples,
and KARMA GEs together................... 190
Loadingindividualbanksfroma.PCGfile..... 193
Loadingdatabyindividualitemorbank...... 193
Creating and playing audio CDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
CreatingaudioCDs......................... 195
PlayingaudioCDs.......................... 197
Other disk operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Settingthedateandtime.................... 198
Using Effects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Effects overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Effectsbasics............................... 199
EffectI/O.................................. 200
Effectsineachmode........................ 200
Effects selection and routing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
UsingeffectsinPrograms ................... 202
UsingeffectsinCombinationsandSongs ...... 204
UsingeffectsinSamplingmode.............. 206
Usingeffectswiththeaudioinputs........... 207
Detailed effects editing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Dynamicmodulation(Dmod) ................ 209
MIDI/TempoSync .......................... 209
CommonFXLFO........................... 210
EffectPresets .............................. 211
Using KARMA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Overview - What is KARMA?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
ThestructureofKARMA.................... 213
Performing with KARMA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
PerformingwithKARMAinProgrammode... 217

vi
PerformingwithKARMAinCombinationmode..
220
Editing KARMA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
EditingKARMAinProgrammode........... 223
EditingKARMAinCombinationmode ....... 227
Using KARMA in Sequencer mode . . . . . . . . . . . 232
AutoSongSetup........................... 232
RecordingusingKARMA(singletrackrecording)
233
Multitrackrecordingusing
settings copied from a Combination .......... 234
Synchronizing KARMA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Synchronizationbasics ..................... 235
TheQuantizeTriggerparameter ........... 235
Slaveoperation............................ 236
Masteroperation .......................... 236
Using the Drum Track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
WhatistheDrumTrack? ................... 237
Performing with the Drum Track . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
UsingtheDrumTrackinProgrammode...... 238
UsingtheDrumTrackinCombinationmode .. 240
Drum Track settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
DrumTracksettingsinProgrammode ....... 241
DrumTracksettingsinCombinationmode.... 242
DrumTracksettingsinSequencermode...... 242
UsingKARMAandtheDrumTracktogether.. 243
SynchronizingtheDrumTrack.............. 244
Creating Drum Track patterns. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Preparingauserpattern.................... 245
ConvertingaSequencerpattern
to a Drum Track pattern.................... 245
Appendices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Powersupply............................. 247
LCDscreen............................... 247
Audioinputandoutput .................... 248
ProgramsandCombinations................ 249
Songs .................................... 250
SetLists .................................. 251
Sampling................................. 251
KARMA.................................. 252
DrumTrack............................... 253
Vector .................................... 253
DrumKits................................ 253
WaveSequences ........................... 253
Effects.................................... 254
MIDI ..................................... 254
Disks,CDs,andUSBMedia ................. 254
Otherproblems............................ 255
Error and confirmation messages . . . . . . . . . . . 256
A(ADCAreYouSure) ..................... 256
B(Buffer)................................. 256
C(CantcalibrateCompleted)............... 256
D(DestinationDisk) ....................... 257
E(ErrorExceeded) ........................ 258
F(FileFront) ..............................259
I(IllegalIndex) ............................260
H.........................................261
K.........................................261
M(MasterMultisample)....................261
N(NodataNotenoughsongmemory) .......262
O(ObeycopyrightrulesOscillator)...........264
P(PatternProgram)........................264
R(RearsampleRoot).......................265
S(SampleSource) ..........................265
T(TheclockTrack) .........................266
U(UnabletocreatedirectoryUSBHub).......266
W(Wave) .................................267
Y(You)....................................267
TypesofmediasupportedbytheKRONOS ....268
OperationsthattheKRONOS
can perform on media.......................268
Restoringthefactorysettings.................269
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
vii
1
Introduction to KRONOS
Front and rear panels
Front panel
1. MAIN VOLUME knob
ThisadjuststhevolumeofthemainL/Raudiooutputs,
aswellasthevolumeoftheheadphonejack.
Itdoesnotaffectanyoftheotheraudiooutputs,
includingS/P DIF,individualoutputs14,ortheUSB
output.
2. Control Surface
TheControlSurfaceisthesetof9sliders,8knobs,and
16switchestotheleftoftheLCDscreen.Itlookslikea
mixer,butcandoavarietyofthingssuchasediting
sounds,controllingKARMA,andsendingMIDI
messagestoexternaldevices.Youcanfreelychange
backandforthbetweenthedifferentfunctionswithout
losinganyofyouredits.
CONTROL ASSIGN buttons
Asexplainedbelow,youcanusethefrontpanel
CONTROLASSIGNbuttonstoswitchbetweenthe
variouscontrolsurfacefunctions.Youcanalsoview
andeditthecontrolsurfacesettingsontheLCDscreen
(P0ControlSurfacepageineachmode).
TIMBRE/TRACK
TIMBRE/TRACKletsyouusethecontrolsurfaceto
adjustthevolume,pan,EQ,andsendlevelsforOSC
1/2,EXi1/2,ortheDrumTrackinProgrammode,the
currentMultisampleinSamplemode,andeachofthe
16TimbresorTracksinCombiandSequencemodes.
TheLEDstotherightoftheswitchshowwhether
yourecurrentlyeditingTimbres(orTracks)18or916;
presstheTIMBRE/TRACKbuttontotogglebetween
thetwo.
9. Vector
Joystick
11. SW 1&2
12. Joystick
13. Ribbon
14. Headphone Jack
1. Volume 2. Control Surface 5. Mode
4. Disk Access Indicator
6. Utility 7. Bank Select
18. Sampling 16. Sequencer 15. Exit
17. Tempo
3. Data Entry
19. TouchView
Display
8. KARMA
10. Drum
Track
2
IfyouswitchtooneoftheotherControlAssignmodes,
andthengobacktoTIMBRE/TRACK,itwill
automaticallyreturntothepreviouslyselectedgroup
(18or916).
AUDIO
AUDIOletsyouusethecontrolsurfacetoadjustthe
volume,play/mutestatus,solo,pan,andsendlevelsof
theanalog,S/P DIF,andUSBaudioinputs.In
Sequencermode,youcanalsochoosetocontrolaudio
tracks18(HDR18)or916(HDR916).
AswithTIMBRE/TRACK,ifyouswitchtooneofthe
otherControlAssignmodes,andthengobackto
AUDIO,itwillautomaticallyreturntothepreviously
selectedgroup(Inputs,HDR18orHDR916).
EXT
EXT(External)letsyouusethecontrolsurfaceto
transmitMIDImessagestoexternalMIDIdevices.
RT KNOBS/KARMA
RTKNOBS/KARMAletsyoumodulatesoundsand
effectswiththeknobs,andcontrolKARMAwiththe
slidersandswitches.
TONE ADJ/EQ
TONEADJ(ToneAdjust)givesyouhandsonaccessto
soundediting,usingthesliders,knobs,andswitches.
InCombiandSequencemodes,italsoletsyouedit
ProgramswithinthecontextoftheCombiorSong,
withoutmakinganychangestotheoriginalProgram
data.
EQisavailableonlyinSetLists.Thisisanineband
graphicEQappliedtothesoundafterTFX2,which
tailorsthesoundfromthemainstereooutputs
(includingtheanalogL/Routputs,S/PDIF,andUSB).
YoucanusethisEQtocompensatefortheacoustic
environmentofaspecificcluborotherperformance
venue.Theslidersaremappedtotheninebandsofthe
EQ,forquickandintuitiveadjustments.
More information on the Control Surface
FormoreinformationonhowtheControlSurface
worksinthedifferentmodes,see:
Programmode:09:ControlSurfaceonpage 21
oftheParameterGuide
Combimode:09:ControlSurfaceonpage 428of
theParameterGuide
Sequencemode:09:ControlSurfaceonpage 534
oftheParameterGuide
MIXER KNOBS button
ThisappliesonlywhenCONTROLASSIGNissetto
TIMBRE/TRACKorAUDIO.Ittogglestheknobs
betweencontrollingthepanofallchannelsor
controllingthepan,EQ,andsendsofthecurrently
selectedchannel.
RESET CONTROLS button
ThisfeatureletsyouresettheVectorJoysticktothe
centerposition,orresetanyoftheControlSurface
sliders,knobs,orswitchestotheirsavedvalue.
Toresetasinglecontrol,holddownRESET
CONTROLSandthenmoveaControlSurfaceslideror
knob,pressoneofthecontrolsurfacebuttons,ormove
theVectorJoystick.
Toresetallofthesliders,knobs,andswitchesofthe
currentCONTROLASSIGNmodeatonce,holddown
RESETCONTROLSandthenpressthecurrentlylit
CONTROLASSIGNbuttonagain.
Youcanalsoresetalloftheslidersandswitchesinthe
KARMAModulebyholdingRESETCONTROLSand
thenpressingtheKARMAMODULECONTROL
button.Similarly,toresetasingleKARMAScene,hold
RESETCONTROLSandpressanyoftheSCENE
buttons.
Finally,youcanalsousethistoclearallsolos,by
holdingRESETCONTROLSandthenpressingthe
SOLObutton.
Formoreinformation,seeRESETCONTROLSon
page 22oftheParameterGuide.
SOLO button
ThisappliesonlywhenCONTROLASSIGNissetto
TIMBRE/TRACKorAUDIO.IttogglestheSELECT
buttonsbetweenselectingthecurrentOscillator,
Timbre,Track,orAudioInput(whenSOLOisoff)or
soloingthechannel(whenSOLOison).
FormoreinformationonSOLOinthevariousmodes,
see:
Programs:SOLOswitchandSELECTswitches13
onpage 24oftheParameterGuide
Combinations:SoloswitchandSelectswitches18
Sequencer:SoloswitchandSelectswitches1/98/16
3. Data entry
WhenyouveselectedaparameterontheTouchView
display,youcanedititusinganyofthefourfront
paneldataentrycontrols:
TheVALUEslider
TheInc andDec buttons
TheVALUEdial
Thenumerickeypad
Front and rear panels Front panel
3
VALUE slider
Usethistoedittheselectedparameters
value.Thiscontrolisconvenientformaking
largechangestothevalue,suchasmoving
quicklytotheminimumormaximum
setting.
YoucanalsousetheVALUEsliderasa
modulationsource,butonlywhenthe
followingaretrue:
YoureontheProgrammodeP0Main
page,andthebigProgramnameis
selected,or
YoureontheCombinationmodeP0
ProgSelect/Mixerpage,andthebig
Combinationnameisselected.
YoureontheSetListP0Playpage.
Inthesecasesonly,theVALUEslidersendsMIDI
CC#18,andcanbeusedasamodulationsource.
Inc and Dec buttons
Theseareusedtoincreaseordecreasetheparameter
valuebyindividualsteps.Theyreconvenientfor
makingfineparameteradjustments.
VALUE dial
Usethisdialtoedittheselectedparametersvalue.
Thiscontrolisconvenientwhenyouwanttoscroll
throughaverylonglistofselections.
0-9, , ., and ENTER buttons
Thesebuttonsareconvenientwhenyouknowthe
exactvaluethatyouwanttoenter.Usethe09,,and
decimal(.)buttonstoenterthevalue,andthenpress
theENTERbuttontoconfirmtheentry.
Thebuttoninvertsthesign(+/)oftheparameter
value;thedecimal(.)buttoninsertsadecimal,for
enteringfractionalvalues.
Special functions of the ENTER button
ENTERhasafewspecialfunctionswhenitispressed
incombinationwithotherbuttons.
Wheneveranonscreenparameterletsyouentera
musicalnote(suchasG4orC#2),oravelocitylevel,
youcanenterthenoteorvelocitydirectlybyholding
downENTERwhileplayinganoteonthekeyboard.
ByholdingdowntheENTERbuttonwhileyoupressa
numericbutton(09),youcanselectuptotenmenu
commandsfromthecurrentpage.
InProgramandCombinationmodes,youcanhold
downtheENTERbuttonandpresstheSEQUENCER
REC/WRITEbuttontousetheAutoSongSetup
function.ThisimportsthecurrentProgramorCombi
intoSequencemodeforquickandeasyrecording.
4. DISK access indicator
ThisLEDlightsupwhendataisbeingsavedtoorread
fromtheinternaldisk.
NeverturnoffthepowerwhilethisLEDislit.
Doingsocancauseallorpartofthedataonthedisk
tobelost,ormaycausemalfunctionssuchasdisk
damage.
5. MODE buttons
KRONOShassevendifferentoperationalmodes,each
oneoptimizedforaspecificsetoffunctions.These
buttonsselectthecurrentmode.
EachbuttonhasanLED,whichlightsuptoshowthe
modeyouveselected.
SET LIST button
ThisselectsSetListmode.SetListsmakeitsimpleto
playandorganizeanyofthesoundsloadedintothe
KRONOS,withoutregardforwhatbanktheyrestored
inorwhethertheyrePrograms,Combinations,oreven
Songs.
COMBI button
ThisselectsCombinationmode,forplayingand
editingcomplexsplitsandlayersofPrograms.
PROG button
ThisselectsProgrammode,forplayingandediting
basicsounds.
SEQ button
ThisselectsSequencermode,forrecording,playing,
andeditingaudioandMIDItracks.
SAMPLING button
ThisselectsSamplingmode,forrecordingandediting
audiosamplesandmultisamples.
GLOBAL button
ThisselectsGlobalmode,formakingoverallsettings,
editingWaveSequencesandDrumKits,andmore.
DISK button
ThisselectsDiskmode,forsavingandloadingdatato
andfromtheinternaldiskorexternalUSB2.0storage
devices.YoucanalsocreateaudioCDsusingaUSB
CDRdrive(notincluded).
6. UTILITY buttons
HELP button
TheHELPbuttongivesyoubuiltin,
contextsensitiveaccesstotheuser
manuals,rightfromthefrontpanel.
4
Forinformationonanyfrontpanelbutton,knob,
slider,orrealtimecontroller,justholddownHELP
andthenpressthebuttonormovethecontrollerin
question.
ForinformationonthecurrentLCDpage,pressand
releasetheHELPbutton.
Whilethehelppageisonthescreen,youcantouchany
oftheonscreenlinks(highlightedinbluetext)for
moreinformation.Youcanscrollthroughthetextby
usingtheonscreenscrollbars,pressingtheIncand
Decbuttons,orspinningtheValuedial.
ThetopoftheHelppagehasbreadcrumblinks,
whichshowthehierarchyofpagesabovethecurrent
one.Touchanyoftheselinkstojumptothe
correspondingpage.
Thebackwardsandforwardsbuttonsfunctionlikethe
similarbuttonsonastandardwebbrowser.Ifyouuse
linkstojumpbetweenpages,youcanthenusethe
backwardsandforwardsbuttonstomovethroughthe
pagesyouvealreadyviewed.
TheContentspageletsyouaccessanypartoftheHelp
system,includingalmostallofthetextandgraphicsin
boththeParameterandOperationGuides.TheIndex
containsashorterlistoflinkstoimportantarticles.
Toclosethehelpdisplay,justpresstheHELPbutton
again,presstheEXITbutton,orpresstheonscreen
Donebutton.
COMPARE button
UsethisbuttontocomparethesoundoftheProgram
orCombinationthatyouarecurrentlyeditingwiththe
saved,uneditedversionofthesound.Youcanalsouse
thisbuttontomakebeforeandaftercomparisons
whenrecordingoreditinginSequencermode.
7. BANK SELECT buttons
Usethesebuttonstochangebankswhenselecting
ProgramsorCombinations.TheLEDsinthebuttons
lightuptoshowthecurrentbank.
InProgrammode,thesebuttonsselecttheProgram
bank.TheyareactiveonlyonthePlaypages.
InCombinationmode,thesebuttonshavetwo
functions:
WhenyoureselectingCombinations,theychoose
theCombinationbank.
WhenyoureassigningaProgramtoatimbre
withintheCombi,theyselecttheProgrambank.
InSequencermode,whenatracksProgramnameis
selected,thesebuttonschangetheProgrambank.
General MIDI banks
SelectingGeneralMIDIProgrambanksisalittle
differentfromselectingotherbanks.Eachtimeyou
presstheINTGbutton,thebankwillsteptothenext
GM(2)bankorGMdrumbankinthefollowingorder:
G,g(1),g(2)g(8),g(9),g(d),G,g(1),etc.
Whats in each bank?
FordetailsonthecontentsoftheProgrambanks,see
Programbankcontentsonpage 27.Fordetailsonthe
Combibanks,seeCombinationbankcontentson
page 57.
8. KARMA buttons
KARMAstandsforKay
AlgorithmicRealtimeMusic
Architecture.Itsanimmensely
powerfulrecordingandlive
performancetool,whichcan
provideawiderangeofmusical
effectsincluding:
Arpeggiation
Drumandinstrumentgrooves
ComplexCCgestures(asifit
wasautomaticallymoving
knobsorjoysticksforyou)
Musicalphrasegeneration
Gatedandchoppeddanceproductioneffects
Anycombinationoftheabove
andmuchmore.
ON/OFF button
ThisswitchesKARMAonandoff.Aswiththeother
KARMAbuttons,thebuttonsLEDwilllightupto
showyouthatitisturnedon.
LATCH button
WhenLATCHisturnedon,KARMAwillcontinueto
playevenafteryouvestoppedholdingnotesonthe
keyboardorMIDIIn.
Thisisconvenientwhenyouwanttoplayontopofa
KARMAgeneratedgroove,forinstance.
MODULE CONTROL button
InCombiandSequencermodes,KARMAhasfour
independentModules,eachofwhichcanbegenerating
adifferentmusicaleffect.Whenusedtocontrol
KARMA,theControlSurfaceslidersandswitchesare
fivelayersdeep:oneforeachModule(AD),andthen
aMasterLayerwhichcontrolsselectedparameters
fromalloftheModulesatonce.
TheMODULECONTROLbuttonselectswhetherthe
KARMASLIDERS,SWITCHES,andSCENESwill
controleitherasingleModuleindependently,orthe
MasterLayer.InProgrammode,onlyasingleModule
isavailable,andtheMasterLayerisusedtocontrolit;
youcannotselectothersettings).
5
9. Vector Joystick
TheVectorJoystickisapowerfulrealtimecontroller.
DependingontheparticularProgram,Combi,orSong,
itmaymodulateProgramoreffectsparameters,or
adjustthevolumesofdifferentcomponentsofthe
sound.
FormoreinformationonhowVectorSynthesisworks,
seeUsingVectorSynthesisonpage 55.
10. Drum Track
TheDrumTrackisabuiltindrummachine,fueledby
theKRONOSshighqualitydrumsounds.Thisbutton
turnstheDrumTrackonandoff.
Dependingonvarioussettings,theDrumTrackmay
begintoplayimmediately,ormaywaituntilyoustart
toplayonthekeyboard.IfthebuttonsLEDisblinking
onandoff,itswaitingforyoutoplay.
LINKED LED
IfthefrontpanelLINKEDLEDandKARMAON/OFF
switchesarelit,KARMAwillstartandstoptogether
withtheDrumTrack.Formoreinformation,see
UsingKARMAandtheDrumTracktogetheron
page 243.
11. SW1 and SW2
Theseon/offswitchescanperformanumberof
differentfunctions,suchasmodulatingsoundsor
lockingthemodulationvaluesofthejoystick,ribbon,
oraftertouch.
Also,eachonemayworkeitherasatoggle,orasa
momentaryswitch.Intogglemode,eachpress
alternatesbetweenonandoff;inmomentarymode,the
switchonlychangesforaslongasyouholditdown.
EachswitchhasanLED,whichlightsupwhenthe
switchison.
EachProgram,Combination,andSongstoresitsown
settingsforwhattheswitcheswilldo,andwhether
eachswitchdefaultstobeingonoroff.
12. Joystick
Thejoystickmovesinfourdirections:left,right,
forwards(awayfromyourself),andbackwards
(towardsyourself).Eachofthefourdirectionscanbe
usedtocontroldifferentprogramoreffects
parameters.
Thespecificassignmentscanchangedependingonthe
currentProgram,Combi,orSong.Generally,though,
theywilldosomethinglikethefunctionsshown
below:
StandardJoystickfunctions
13. Ribbon controller
TheRibboncontrollerletsyoumodulateProgramor
effectsparametersbyslidingyourfingerleftandright
alongitstouchsensitivestrip.
Aswiththeothercontrollers,itsspecificfunctionwill
changedependingonthecurrentProgram,Combi,or
Song.
14. Headphone jack
Thisstereo1/4headphonejackcarriesthesamesignal
astheMainL/Routputs.
TheheadphonevolumeiscontrolledbytheMAIN
VOLUMEknob.
15. EXIT button
Thisbuttonmakesiteasytoreturntothemainpageof
thecurrentmode:
Pressitoncetogotothepreviouslyselectedtabon
themainP0page.
PressitagaintogotothefirsttabonthemainP0
page(suchasthemainProgramPlaypage).Ifyou
hadpreviouslyselectedaparameteronthispage,
thatparameterwillbeselected.
Pressitathirdtimetoselectthemainparameteron
theP0page,suchastheProgramnameinProgram
mode.
WhereveryouareinProgram,Combi,orSequencer
modes,pressingEXITthreetimes(orfewer)willtake
youbacktoProgram/Combination/SongSelect,where
youcanimmediatelyusethenumerickeysor /
switchestoselectaProgram,Combination,orSong.
Whenadialogboxisopen,thisbuttoncancelsthe
settingsmadeinthedialogboxandclosesthedialog
box,justlikepressingtheCancelbutton.Ifapopup
menuorpagemenuisopen,pressingEXITclosesthe
menu.
16. SEQUENCER buttons
Mostofthebuttonsinthissectionapplyonlyto
Sequencermodeand,inDiskandSamplingmodes,to
audioCDplaybackfromaconnectedUSBCDdrive.
REC/WRITEistheexception;ithasspecialfunctionsin
Program,Combination,andGlobalmodes,as
describedbelow.
Move the
joystick
Controller
Name
Normally controls
Left JSX Pitch bend down
Right JS+X Pitch bend up
Forwards
(away from yourself )
JS+Y Vibrato
Backwards
(towards yourself )
JSY Filter LFO (wah)
6
PAUSE button
InSequencermode,thisbuttonpausestheplaybackof
thesong.Whenpaused,thebuttonsLEDwilllightup.
PressPAUSEonceagaintoresumeplayback,andthe
LEDwillturnoff.
InDiskandSamplingmodes,thisbuttonpausesaudio
CDplayback.
<<REW button
InSequencermode,whentheSongisplayingor
paused,thisbuttonwillrewindthesong.Whenyou
pressandholdthisbutton,itsLEDwilllightup,and
theplaybackwillrewind.(Rewindisdisabledduring
recording,andwhiletheSongisstopped.)
InDiskandSamplingmodes,thisbuttonrewindsthe
audioCD.
FF>> button
InSequencermode,whentheSongisplayingor
paused,thisbuttonwillfastforwardthesong.When
youpressandholdthisbutton,thebuttonwilllight,
andtheplaybackwillfastforward.(Fastforwardis
disabledduringrecording,andwhiletheSongis
stopped.)
InDiskandSamplingmodes,thisbuttonfastforwards
theaudioCD.
LOCATE button
InSequencermode,thisbuttonwilladvanceorrewind
thesongtothespecifiedlocatepoint.Thisletsyou
jumpimmediatelytoanypointinthecurrentSong.
Thedefaultlocatepointisthefirstbeatofmeasure1.
Tosetthelocatepointtothecurrentposition,hold
downENTERandthenpressLOCATE.Youcanalso
settheLocatepointdirectlyviatheonscreenmenu.
REC/WRITE button
InSequencermode,pressingthisbuttonwillenter
recordreadymode.Onceyoureinrecordreadymode
(shownbythebuttonslitLED),youcanbegin
recordingbypressingtheSEQUENCER START/STOP
button.Formoreinformation,seeRecordingMIDIin
realtimeonpage 78.
InProgram,Combination,SetList,andGlobalmodes,
pressingREC/WRITEwillopentheSavedialogbox.
Formoredetails,seeWritingtointernalmemoryon
page 182,andUsingtheSEQUENCERREC/WRITE
buttononpage 182.
InProgramandCombinationmodes,youcanhold
downtheENTERbuttonandpresstheSEQUENCER
REC/WRITEbuttontousetheAutoSongSetup
function.ThisimportsthecurrentProgramorCombi
intoSequencemodeforquickandeasyrecording.For
moreinformation,seeAutoSongSetuponpage 2of
theParameterGuide.
START/STOP button
Thisstartsorstopsrecordingandplaybackin
Sequencermode.
InDiskandSamplingmodes,thisbuttonstartsand
stopsplaybackontheaudioCD.
17. TEMPO controls
TEMPO knob
Thisknobadjuststhetempoforthe
KRONOSasawhole,includingSongs,
KARMA,theDrumTrack,Tempo
syncedLFOsandBPMdelays,andEXi
StepSequencers.
TheLEDwillblinkatquarternote
intervalsofthecurrenttempo.
Note:IftheGLOBALMIDIpageMIDICLOCK
parameterissettoExternalMIDIorUSB,orifitisset
toAutoandaclockiscurrentlybeingreceived,then
neithertheTEMPOKnobnortheTAPTEMPObutton
willhaveanyeffect.
TAP TEMPO button
Thisbuttonletsyouentertempossimplybytapping
yourfingeronthebutton.Youcanusethis
interchangeablywiththeTEMPOknob,above.Two
tapsareenoughtochangethetempo;forgreater
accuracy,youcancontinuetapping,andthetempowill
beaveragedoverthemostrecent16taps.
Forexample,youcanuseTAPTEMPOtocontrolthe
KARMAtempo:
1. InProgrammodeorCombinationmode,start
KARMArunning.
TurnontheKARMAON/OFFswitch,andplayakey
orapad.IfyouturnontheLATCHswitch,KARMA
willcontinueplayingevenafteryouliftupyourhands.
2. LightlypresstheTAPTEMPOswitchseveral
timesatthedesiredtempo.
Noticethattheq=intheupperrightoftheLCD
screenwillchangetoshowthenewtempo.
IfyoupresstheTAPTEMPOswitchatshorter
intervals,theplaybacktempowillbecome
correspondinglyfaster.
Note:Youcanalsotaptemposusingafootswitch.For
moreinformation,seeFootSwitchAssignmentson
18. SAMPLING buttons
REC button
InSampling,Program,Combination,and
Sequencermodes,pressingthisbutton
enterstheinitialsamplingreadymode.
ThebuttonsLEDwilllightup.
Tocontinue,presstheSAMPLINGSTART/STOP
button,asdescribedbelow.
START/STOP button
InSampling,Program,Combination,andSequencer
modes,pressingthiswhentheSAMPLINGREC
buttonislitwilldooneofthreethings,dependingon
thesettingoftheTriggerparameter(ontheSampling
modeRecordingAudioInputpage):
IfTriggerissettoSamplingSTARTSW,sampling
willbeginimmediately.
7
IfTriggerissettoNoteOn,samplingwillbeginas
soonasyouplayanoteonthekeyboard.
IfTriggerissettoThreshold,samplingwillbegin
assoonastheselectedaudiosourcereachesa
presetvolumelevel.
OntheSamplingmodesP1:SampleEditpage,
pressingthisbuttonwillplaytheselectedsample.
ThisbuttonisalsousedtoplaybackWAVfilesfrom
thedisk.YoucanplaybackWAVfilesinthedirectory
windowofvariousDiskmodepages,intheDiskmode
MakeAudioCDpage,intheSequencermodeaudio
trackeditingdialogboxes,andintheSelect
Directory/FileforSampletoDiskmenucommandin
Program,Combination,Sequencer,andSampling
modes.
19. TouchView display
TheKRONOSfeaturesourexclusiveTouchView
graphicinterface,basedonatouchpanelLCDscreen.
BytouchingitemsontheLCDscreen,youcanselect
pages,tabs,andparameters,andsetparametervalues
viaonscreenmenusandbuttons.
Shortcuts
Thefrontpanelcontrolsofferanumberofshortcuts
forcommonlyusedfeatures,asdetailedbelow.
ENTER + numeric keys 09: Menu commands
Eachpagehasasetofmenucommands,which
provideaccesstodifferentutilities,commands,and
options,dependingonthepageyourecurrentlyon.
Youcanusethemenucommandsentirelyfromthe
touchscreen,bypressingthemenubuttoninthe
upperrighthandcornerofthescreenandthen
selectinganoptionfromthemenuthatappears.
Eventhougheachpagemayhaveitsownunique
menucommands,themenusarestandardizedasmuch
aspossible.Forinstance,WRITEisalmostalwaysthe
firstmenuiteminProgram,Combination,andGlobal
modes.
Youcantakeadvantageofthisstandardizationby
usingashortcuttoaccessanyofthefirsttenmenu
items:
1. HolddowntheENTERbutton.
2. Pressanumber(09)onthenumerickeypadto
selectthedesiredmenucommand,startingwith0.
Forinstance,press0forthefirstmenucommand,1for
thesecond,andsoon.
Ifthemenucommandjusttogglesanoptiononandoff
(suchasExclusiveSolo),thenyouredone.Ifthe
commandcallsupadialogbox,thedialogwillappear
ontheLCD,andyoucanproceedjustasifyoud
selectedthecommandfromthetouchscreen.
ENTER + REC/WRITE: Auto Song Setup
TheAutoSongSetupfeaturecopiesthecurrent
ProgramorCombinationintoaSong,andthenputs
theKRONOSinrecordreadymode.
Ifinspirationforaphraseorsongstrikesyouwhile
youreplaying,youcanusethisfunctiontostart
recordingimmediately.Todoso:
1. HolddowntheENTERkeyandpressthe
SEQUENCERREC/WRITEkey.
TheSetuptoRecorddialogboxwillopenandaskAre
yousure?
2. PressOK.
YouwillautomaticallyenterSequencermode,andwill
beintherecordreadystate.
3. PresstheSTART/STOPkeytostartthesequencer
andbeginrecording.
ENTER + keyboard: Enter note or velocity value
Generally,ifaparameterspecifiesanotenumberor
velocity,youcanenterthevaluebyplayingonthe
keyboard.Todoso:
1. SelectoneoftheKeyparameters.
3. WhileholdingENTER,playanoteonthe
keyboard.
YoucanusethisshortcutthroughouttheKRONOS,
suchasforsettingkeyboardandvelocityzones,or
selectingthenotetoeditinDrumKits,Multisamples,
orRPPRsetups.
ENTER + LOCATE: Set locate point
ThisshortcutsetstheSequencerslocatepointtothe
currentmeasure,beat,andtick,similartousingtheSet
Locationmenucommand(seeSetLocation(for
LocateKey)onpage 626oftheParameterGuide).
2. WhileholdingENTER,presstheLOCATEkey.
Afterthis,pressingLOCATEreturnstheSongtothe
newlysetmeasure,beat,andtick.
CONTROL ASSIGN RT KNOBS/KARMA switch (LED
ON) + KARMA MODULE CONTROL switch
InCombinationandSequencermodes,thissetsthe
ModuleControltoMaster.Thisisthesameassetting
ModuleControltoMinP0:ControlSurface
RT/KARMA.
CONTROL ASSIGN TONE ADJ/EQ switch
(LED ON) + SWITCH 116 switches
InCombinationandSequencermodes,youcanusea
shortcuttochangethecurrentTimbredirectlyfromthe
ControlSurface,withoutleavingToneAdjustmode:
1. PressandholdtheTONEADJ/EQbutton.
2. WhileholdingTONEADJ/EQ,pressa
PLAY/MUTEorSELECTbuttontoselectaTimbre.
ThePLAY/MUTEbuttonsselectTimbres18,andthe
SELECTbuttonsselectTimbres916.
ThisisthesameastheselectedTimbre/Trackin
TIMBRE/TRACKmode;changingonewillalsochange
theother.
3. ReleasetheTONEADJ/EQbutton.
TheControlSurfaceandscreenwillchangetoshow
theToneAdjustparametersforthenewlyselected
Timbre.
8
EXIT switch: Return to main page
Thisbuttonmakesiteasytoreturntothemainpageof
thecurrentmode:
Pressitoncetogotothepreviouslyselectedtabon
themainP0page.
PressitagaintogotothefirsttabonthemainP0
page.
Pressitathirdtimetoselectthemainparameteron
theP0page,suchastheProgramnameinProgram
mode.
WhereveryouareinProgram,Combi,orSequencer
modes,pressingEXITthreetimes(orfewer)willtake
youbacktoProgram/Combination/SongSelect,where
youcanimmediatelyusethenumerickeysor /
switchestoselectaProgram,Combination,orSong.
EXIT switch: Cancel in dialog boxes
Whenadialogboxisdisplayed,thishasthesame
functionastheCancel,Done,orExitbutton.
Rear panel
1. AC Power connector
Connecttheincludedpowercablehere.
Werecommendthatyoufirstconnectthepowercable
totheKRONOS,andthenconnecttheotherendofthe
cabletoanACoutlet(see1.Connectingthepower
cableonpage 20).
2. POWER switch
Thisswitchturnsthepoweronandoff.Beforeturning
KRONOSoff,makesurethatyouvesavedanyeditsto
yourPrograms,Combis,Songs,orotheruserdata.
Afterturningthepoweroff,pleasewaitforatleast
tensecondsbeforeyouturnthepoweronagain.
3. USB ports
USB A ports
Therearetwoexternal,highspeedUSB2.0ports.You
canusethesetoconnectstoragemediasuchashard
disks,flashmedia,etc,aswellasclasscompliantUSB
MIDIcontrollers.Formoreinformation,see5.
ConnectingUSBdevicesonpage 23.
USB B port
ThishighspeedUSB2.0portletsyouconnecttoaMac
orWindowsPC,forsendingandreceivingMIDIand
audio,andforconnectingtothecomputereditor
program.Formoreinformation,see7.Connectionto
acomputerviaUSBonpage 24.
4. Analog AUDIO INPUTS
Youcanusetheaudioinputsforrecording,sampling,
andrealtimemixingthroughthebuiltineffects.
Mic/Line Inputs 1 and 2
Inputs1and2provide1/4TRSbalancedconnectors.
Youcanusetheseforeithermicrophonelevelorline
levelsignals.Thetwoinputshaveidenticalsetsof
controls,asdescribedbelow.
MIC/LINE switches
Thesesettheinputsnominalsignallevel.Setthese
switchesaccordingtothetypeofdevicethatyoure
connecting,andthenusetheLEVELknobs(described
below)tooptimizethegain.
UsetheLINEsetting(buttonpressedin)when
connectingtomixers,computeraudiosystems,signal
processors,orothersynthesizers.Thenominallevelis
+4dBu,with12dBofheadroom.
UsetheMICsetting(buttonpoppedout)onlywhen
connectingamicrophone.
LEVEL knobs
Theseknobsletyoumakemorepreciseadjustmentsto
theinputlevel,aftersettingthebasiclevelswiththe
MIC/LINEswitches.
TheMINsettingisunitygain;theMAXsetting
providesabout40dBofgainaboveunity.
2. Power Switch
5. Analog
Audio Outputs
4. Analog
Audio Inputs
3. USB
8. Pedals 6. MIDI
1. AC Power
connector
7. S/PDIF
In & Out
Front and rear panels Rear panel
9
5. Analog AUDIO OUTPUTS
AlloftheanalogaudiooutputsusebalancedTRS1/4
phonejacks,referencedtoa+4dBusignallevel.
Connecttheseoutputstotheinputjacksofyouramp
ormixer.InadditiontotheL/MONOandRmain
stereoaudiooutputs,theKRONOSprovidesfour
individualaudiooutputs.
Thesoundfromeachoscillator,drum,timbre/track,or
inserteffectcanbefreelyroutedtoanyoutput.
Additionally,youcanroutethemetronomesoundto
anindividualoutput,toseparateitfromthestereo
mix.Formoreinformation,seeEffectsselectionand
routingonpage 202.
(MAIN) L/MONO, R
Thesearethemainstereooutputs;theirvolumeis
controlledbytheMAINVOLUMEknob.Allofthe
factoryProgramsandCombisareprogrammedtoplay
throughtheseoutputs.
Wheneditingsounds,orwhensettingupaSongin
Sequencermode,youcanaccessthemainoutputsby
settingBusSelecttoL/R.
IfnocableisconnectedtotheRoutput,L/MONOwill
carryamonosummationofthestereosignal.So,ifyou
areconnectingtoadevicewhichdoesnothavestereo
inputs(suchasasimplekeyboardamp),usethe
L/MONOoutput.
(INDIVIDUAL) 14
These4additionalaudiooutputsletyouisolate
sounds,audioinputs,oraudiotracksforrecordingor
complexlivesoundsetups.
Thesecanbeusedasstereoormonooutputs,inany
combination.YoucanalsousetheGlobalAudiopage
LRBusIndiv.Assignparametertomapthemain
stereooutputstoanyoftheseoutputpairs,ifyoulike.
Notethattheindividualoutputsarenotaffectedbythe
MAINVOLUMEknob.
6. MIDI
MIDIletsyouconnectKRONOStocomputersorother
MIDIdevices,forsendingandreceivingnotes,
controllergestures,soundsettings,andsoon.For
moreinformationonMIDIconnections,pleasesee
MIDIapplicationsonpage 1127oftheParameter
Guide.
MIDI THRU connector
MIDIdatareceivedattheMIDIINconnectorisre
transmittedwithoutchangefromtheMIDITHRU
connector.
YoucanusethistochainmultipleMIDIdevices
together.
MIDI OUT connector
ThisconnectortransmitsMIDIdata.Usethistocontrol
externalMIDIdevices,ortorecordintoanexternal
sequencer.
MIDI IN connector
ThisconnectorreceivesMIDIdata.Usethistoplaythe
KRONOSfromanotherMIDIdevice,orfroman
externalsequencer.
7. S/P DIF IN & OUT
Thesejacksprovide24bit,48kHzopticalS/P DIFinput
andoutput,forconnectingtocomputeraudiosystems,
digitalmixers,etc.
OpticalS/P DIFissometimescalledTOSLINK,and
formallynamed(holdyourbreath!)IEC60958,EIAJ
CP1201.Makesuretouseopticalcablesdesignedfor
digitalaudio.
Wheneveryouusedigitalaudioconnections,make
surethatallconnectedsystemsaresetsothatthereis
oneandonlyonewordclockmaster.Youcansetthe
wordclockfortheKRONOSusingtheGlobalpage
SystemClockparameter.Formoreinformation,see
SystemClockonpage 756oftheParameterGuide.
OUT(MAIN) jack
ThisopticalS/P DIFoutputcarriesadigitalversionof
themainL/Routputs.
NotethattheMAINVOLUMEknobdoesnotadjust
theS/P DIFoutputlevel.
IN jack
YoucanusethisopticalS/P DIFinputforrecording,
sampling,andrealtimemixingthroughthebuiltin
effects.
ItcanbeusedsimultaneouslywiththeanalogandUSB
audioinputs,ifyoulike.
8. Pedals
DAMPER jack
Forthedamperalsoknownasthesustainpedalyou
canconnecteitherastandardfootswitch,orKorgs
specialhalfdamperpedal,theoptionalDS1H.
TheDS1Hisacontinuouspedaldesignedspecifically
forpianostyledampercontrol,withthelookandfeel
ofanacousticpianossustainpedal.Itallowsmore
subtlecontrolofthedamperthanasimpleswitch;the
furtherdownyoupressthepedal,themorethatthe
10
soundsustains.Formoreinformation,seeHalf
DamperPedalandReleaseTimeonpage 40ofthe
ParameterGuide.
Youcanalsoconnectasimplefootswitch,whichwill
workasastandardon/offdamperpedal.
Inordertoensurethatthepedalfunctionscorrectly,
pleaseadjusttheswitchpolarity(seeDamper
Polarityonpage 781oftheParameterGuide)andthe
halfdampersensitivity(seeHalfDamper
Calibrationonpage 807oftheParameterGuide).
ASSIGNABLE SWITCH jack
Thisletsyouconnectasimpleon/offfootswitch,such
astheoptionalKorgPS1.Thefootswitchcanperform
awidevarietyoffunctions,suchasmodulatingsounds
andeffects,taptempo,sequencerstart/stop,etc.
TheswitchsfunctionissetinGlobalmode(onthe
ControllerstaboftheControllers/Scalespage),sothat
italwaysworksthesameregardlessofthecurrent
Program,Combi,orSong.Formoreinformation,
pleaseseeSettinguptheAssignableSwitchand
Pedalonpage 161.
ASSIGNABLE PEDAL jack
Thisletsyouconnectacontinuouscontrollerpedal,
suchastheKorgEXP2footcontrollerorKorgXVP10
EXP/VOLpedal,touseasanassignablemodulation
source.
LiketheASSIGNABLESWITCH,thepedalsfunction
issetinGlobalmode.Formoreinformation,pleasesee
SettinguptheAssignableSwitchandPedalon
page 161.
TouchView user interface
TheKRONOSusesKorgsTouchViewgraphicaluser
interface.BytouchingobjectsdisplayedintheLCD
screen,youcanselectpages,setparametervalues,
entertext,connectvirtualpatchcables,andmore.
a: Current page
Fromtheleft,thetopofthedisplayshowsthecurrent
mode,thenumberandnameofthepagegroup,and
finallythenameoftheindividualpage.
b: Category button
Whenyoupressthisbutton,atabbedpopupmenuwill
appear,allowingyoutoselectPrograms,
Combinations,orGEsorganizedbycategory.
Formoreinformation,seeTabbedpopupmenus,
below.
c: Popup button & menu
Whenthisbuttonispressed,apopupmenuwill
appear,showingthealistofoptions.Insomecases,
thesewillbeparametervalues.Inothers,theymaybe
listsofitems,suchasMultisamplesorFXPresets.
Toenteraparametervalue,touchthedesiredvalue.
h: Page group Tab
e: Knob
f: Slider
g: Page tab
a: Current page
d: Edit cell
b: Category popup button
c: Popup button
i: Check box j: Page menu button M od e na me Page name Page group number and name
Front and rear panels TouchView user interface
11
Pin
ManypopupmenushaveaPininthe
upperleft.Thiscontrolswhathappens
afteryouselectavalue.Touchthepin
graphictoswitchbetweenopen
(unlocked)andclosed(locked).
Whenlocked(pinclosed),thepopupmenuwillremain
displayedevenafteryouselectaparametervalue.To
closethepopup,eitherunlockthepin,orpressEXIT.
Whenunlocked(pinopen),thepopupmenuwillclose
immediatelywhenyoupressaparametervalue,or
whenyoutouchthescreenoutsidethemenu.
Tabbed popup menus
Somepopupshavealargenumberofitemsdivided
intogroups.Thegroupsarerepresentedbytabsonthe
lefthandsideofthescreen.Theseinclude:
Bank/ProgramSelectandBank/CombinationSelect:
SelectProgramsorCombinationsbybank
MultisampleSelect:SelectaMultisamplefora
Programoscillatorbycategory
WaveSequenceSelectandDrumKitSelect:Selecta
WaveSequencesorDrumKitforaProgram
oscillatorsbybank
EffectSelect:Selectaneffectbycategory
SelectauserSampleforauserMultisample
SelectaKARMAGE
Tocloseatabbedpopupmenu,presstheOKbuttonor
Cancelbutton.
Scroll bar
Whenalististoolongforallitemstofitonthescreen
atonce,thepopupincludesscrollbars.Youcantouch
intheemptyareasofthescrollbartomovebackand
forthinthelist,ortouchanddragthescrollhandle.
d: Edit cell
WhenyoutouchaparameterintheLCDscreen,the
parameterorparametervaluewillusuallybe
highlighted(displayedininversevideo).Thisiscalled
theeditcell,andthehighlighteditemisnowselected
forediting.
Theparametervalueoftheeditcellcanbemodified
usingtheVALUEcontrollers.Insomecases,youmay
alsouseapopupmenu,asdescribedbelow.
Forparametersthatacceptanotenumberoravelocity
value,youcanalsoholddowntheENTERswitchand
playanoteonthekeyboardtoenterthenotenumber
orvelocityvalue.
e & f: On-screen sliders and knobs
Tomodifythevalueofanonscreensliderorknob,first
touchtheobject,andthenusetheVALUEcontrollers
tomodifythevalue.
g & h: Page group tabs and Page tabs
Pressthelowerrowoftabstoselectthepagegroup,
andthenpresstheupperrowoftabstoselectthepage.
Thetopofthescreenshowsthenameofthecurrent
pageandgroup,asdescribedundera:Currentpage
onpage 10.
i: Page menu button
Whenthisbuttonispressed,alistofmenucommands
willappear.Theavailablecommandswillvary
dependingonthecurrentpage.Toselectacommand,
justtouchit.
ThepagemenuwillclosewhenyoupresstheLCD
screenatalocationotherthanthepagemenu,orwhen
youpresstheEXITswitch.
Eventhougheachpagemayhaveitsownunique
menucommands,themenusarestandardizedasmuch
aspossible.Forinstance,WRITEisalmostalwaysthe
firstmenuiteminProgram,Combination,SetList,and
Globalmodes.
Menu shortcut: ENTER + numeric keypad
Youcanuseashortcuttoaccessanyofthefirstten
menuitems:
1. HolddowntheENTERkey.
2. Pressanumber(09)onthenumerickeypadto
selectthedesiredmenucommand,startingwith0.
Forinstance,press0forthefirstmenucommand,1for
thesecond,andsoon.
Ifthemenucommandjusttogglesanoptiononandoff
(suchasExclusiveSolo),thenyouredone.Ifthe
commandcallsupadialogbox,thedialogwillappear
ontheLCD,andyoucanproceedjustasifyoud
selectedthecommandfromthetouchscreen.
Dialog box
Manymenucommandsusedialogboxestomake
additionalsettings.Thedialogboxthatappearswill
dependonthecurrentlyselectedmenucommand.
Toconfirmsettingsinadialogbox,presstheOK
button.Toexitwithoutmakingchanges,pressthe
Cancelbutton.AfterpressingeitherOKorCancel,the
dialogboxwillclose.
Pin
Press here and slide to left or right to
scroll to the desired location.
Press here to scroll to left or right.
Press here to scroll to the
corresponding location.
12
Text edit button
Pressingthisbuttonbringsupanonscreenkeyboard,
forchangingthenameofPrograms,Combis,Songs,
WaveSequences,DrumKits,etc.Formore
information,seeEditingnamesonpage 184.
Other objects
j: Radio button
Pressaradiobuttontoselectonevaluefromtwoor
morechoices.
k: Check box
Eachtimeyoupressacheckbox,italternatesbetween
thechecked(red)anduncheckedstates.
Theparameterwillbeactiveifitischecked,and
inactiveifitisunchecked.
Patch panel
TheMS20EXandMOD7useonscreenpatchpanels
torouteaudioandcontrolsignals.Tomakea
connectionbetweentwopatchpoints:
1. Touchoneofthetwojacks(eitherinputoroutput).
Ayellowsquarewillappeararoundtheselectedjack.
2. Touchthesamejackagain.
Theyellowsquarewillbegintoblink,showingthat
youreabouttomakeaconnection.Tocancelthisand
returntothenormalselectedstate,justtouchthesame
jackathirdtime.
3. Touchtheotherjack.
Thetwojackswillnowbeconnected.
Todeleteaconnectionbetweentwopatchpoints:
1. Touchtheinputjack.
Note:youcanalsoselecttheoutputjack.However,if
theoutputisconnectedtomorethanoneinput,allof
theconnectionsfromthatoutputwillbeaffected.
2. PresstheDisconnectbutton.
Theselectedconnectionwillbedeleted.
Program Play page Overview/Jump graphics
ThemainP0PlaypageinProgramModefeaturesan
interactiveoverviewofthemostimportantparameters,
suchasoscillators,filters,envelopes,LFOs,andsoon.
Justtouchanyoftheseoverviewareas,andyoulljump
tothecorrespondingeditpage.
Toggle buttons
Thistypeofbuttonwillchangeitsfunctionorswitch
on/offeachtimeitispressed.
Play/Rec/MutebuttonsinSequencermode:
SoloOn/OffbuttonsinSequencermode:
EffectsOn/Offbuttons:
Cancel button OK button
Text edit button
j: Radio button
k: Check box
Basic information About the KRONOS modes
13
Basic information
About the KRONOS modes
TheKRONOShasalargenumberoffeaturesthatlet
youplayandeditprogramsandcombinations,record
andplaysequencedata,recordandplaybacksamples,
andmanagedataondisk.Thelargestunitusedto
organizethesefeaturesiscalledamode.
TheKRONOShassevenmodes.
Set List mode
SetListsmakeitsimpletoplayandorganizeanyofthe
soundsloadedintotheKRONOS,withoutregardfor
whatbanktheyrestoredinorwhethertheyre
Programs,Combinations,orevenSongs.
Largeonscreenbuttonsmakesoundselectionfastand
foolproof,andtheProgramUporDownfootswitch
assignmentscanbeusedforhandsfreesound
changes.Cut,copy,paste,andinserttoolsmakere
orderingasnap.
SmoothSoundTransitions(SST)lettheprevioussound
anditseffectsringoutnaturally,makingiteasyto
changesoundsduringaliveperformance.SSTisactive
inalloftheKRONOSmodes,butSetListsgiveyou
greatercontroloverthetransitions.Youcanfinetune
theringouttimeforeachsound,sothat(forinstance)
onesoundfadesoutveryquickly,whileanother
soundsdelayscontinuetorepeatfortenortwenty
seconds.
SetListsaregreatforliveperformance,buttheyrealso
handyfororganizingsoundsingeneral.Forexample,
youcouldcreateaSetListwithallofyourfavorite
Stringsounds,includingbothProgramsand
Combinations.
Program mode
ProgramsarethebasicsoundsofKRONOS.In
Programmode,youcan:
SelectandplayPrograms
EditPrograms
Makedetailedsettingsforoscillators,filters,amps,
EGs,LFOs,effects,KARMA,vectorsynthesis,etc.
Thespecificparameterswillvarydependingonthe
synthesistype:HD1,AL1,CX3,STR1,MS20EX,
PolysixEX,MOD7,EP1,orSGX1.
Createdrumprogramsusingdrumkits(ascreated
inGlobalmode)
PlayandcontroloneKARMAmodule
Sampleandresample
Forexample,youcansampleanexternalaudio
sourcewhilelisteningtoaperformancegenerated
byKARMA,oryoucanplayaProgramand
resampleyourperformance.
Combination mode
Combinationsaresetsofupto16Programsthatcanbe
playedsimultaneously,lettingyoucreatesoundsmore
complexthanasingleProgram.InCombinationmode,
youcan:
SelectandplayCombinations
UseKRONOSasa16trackmultitimbraltone
generator
EditCombinations
AssignProgramstoeachofthe16Timbres,each
withseparatevolume,pan,EQ,andkeyboardand
velocityzones;makesettingsforeffects,vector
synthesis,DrumTrack,andKARMA.
ControlandplayuptofourKARMAmodules
Sampleorresample
Forexampleyoucansampleanexternalaudio
sourcewhilelisteningtotheperformanceofthe
KARMA,orresampleaperformanceyouplayusing
acombination.
Sequencer mode
Sequencermodeletsyourecord,playback,andedit
MIDItracksandaudiotracks.Youcan:
SelectandplaySongs
EditSongs
AssignProgramstoeachofthe16MIDITracks,
withseparatevolume,pan,EQ,andkeyboardand
velocityzones;makesettingsforeffects,vector
synthesis,DrumTrack,andKARMA
RecorduptosixteenMIDItrackssimultaneously
Recorduptofourofthesixteenaudiotracks
simultaneously,mixusingautomation,andimport
WAVEfiles.
ControlandplayuptofourKARMAmodules
Sampleorresample
Youcansampleanexternalaudioinputsource
whileplayingasong,anduseInTrackSamplingto
automaticallycreateanoteeventthattriggersthe
sampleatthesametimeasitwasrecorded.
Youcanalsoresampleanentiresong,andthenuse
DiskmodetocreateanaudioCD.
UseKRONOSasa16trackmultitimbraltone
generator
Recordpatternsandassignthemtoindividual
keys,usingRPPR(RealtimePattern
Play/Recording)
CreateyourownDrumTrackPatterns
14
Sampling mode
Samplingmodeletsyourecordandedityourown
SamplesandMultisamples.Forexample,youcan:
Recordsamplesfromexternalaudiosources,
includingsamplingthrougheffects
Edittherecordedsamples,orsamplesloadedfrom
disk;setlooppoints,truncate,timeslice,etc.
CreateandeditMultisamples,whichconsistofone
ormoreSamplesspreadoutacrossthekeyboard
QuicklyconvertMultisamplesintoPrograms
WithaUSBCDRdrive(notincluded),sample
directlyfromaudioCDs
Createmassivesoundsusingthegenerousinternal
RAM(uptoabout2GBfortheKRONOSX,orfor
theKRONOSwithmemoryexpansion)ifyou
like,asingleMultisamplecanusemorethan6
hoursofsamplingtime
Loadanumberofthese6hourMultisamplesat
once,viaUserSampleBanksandVirtualMemory
Global mode
Globalmodeletsyoumakeoverallsettingsforthe
entireKRONOS,andeditwavesequencesanddrum
kits.Forinstance,youcan:
MakesettingsthataffecttheentireKRONOS,such
asmastertuneandglobalMIDIchannel
Setupsampleautoloadingatstartup
Managecurrentlyloadedsamples
Createuserscales
CreateuserDrumKitsandWaveSequencesusing
samplesfromROM,EXs,UserSampleBanksor
SamplingMode
RenameProgram,Combination,andKARMAGE
categories
Setthefunctionoftheassignablepedalsand
assignableswitches
TransmitMIDISystemExclusivedatadumps
Disk mode
Diskmodeletsyousave,load,andmanagedatausing
theinternaldiskandexternalUSB2.0storagedevices.
Youcan:
SaveandloadPrograms,Combinations,Songs,
Samples,andGlobalsetupdata
Formatdisksandstoragemedia,copyandrename
files,etc.
LoadAKAI,SoundFont2.0,AIFF,andWAVE
samples,andexportRAMsamplesinAIFFor
WAVEformats
ExportandimportsequencestoandfromSMF
(StandardMIDIFiles)
UsetheDataFilerfunctiontosaveorloadMIDI
SystemExclusivedata
WithaUSBCDRdrive(notincluded),createand
playbackaudioCDs
Basic information About the KRONOS modes
15
DISK MODE
IFX 1
IFX 12
MFX 1
MFX 2
TFX 1
TFX 2
Insert / Master / Total Efect OSC 1
PITCH1 FILTER1
AMP1/
DRIVER1
OSC 2
PITCH2 FILTER2
AMP2/
DRIVER2
PROGRAM (HD-1)
TRACK 1
TRACK 8
TRACK 2
TRACK 3
TRACK 4
TRACK 5
TRACK 6
TRACK 7 PROGRAM
PROGRAM
PROGRAM
PROGRAM
PROGRAM
PROGRAM
PROGRAM
PROGRAM
SEQUENCER
TRACK 9
TRACK 16
TRACK 10
TRACK 11
TRACK 12
TRACK 13
TRACK 14
TRACK 15
KARMA Module D
COMBINATION
GLOBAL MODE
Key Assign
WAVE SEQUENCE
DRUM KIT
SAMPLINGMODE
Multisample
Sample
Sample
Sample
Sample
Sample
Sample
Sample
Multisample
AUDIO INPUT
1
S/P DIF IN
L
AUDIO INPUT
2
S/P DIF IN
R
USB CD-R/RW
DRIVE
Ripping
Resampling
Resampling
CD-ROM Write Audio CD
HARD DISK
PROGRAM
PROGRAM
PROGRAM
PROGRAM
PROGRAM
PROGRAM
PROGRAM
PROGRAM
KARMA Module C
KARMA Module B
KARMA Module A
IFX 1
IFX 12
MFX 1
MFX 2
TFX 1
TFX 2
Insert / Master / Total Efect
TIMBRE1
TIMBRE8
TIMBRE2
TIMBRE3
TIMBRE4
TIMBRE5
TIMBRE6
TIMBRE7 PROGRAM
PROGRAM
PROGRAM
PROGRAM
PROGRAM
PROGRAM
PROGRAM
PROGRAM TIMBRE9
TIMBRE16
TIMBRE10
TIMBRE11
TIMBRE12
TIMBRE13
TIMBRE14
TIMBRE15 PROGRAM
PROGRAM
PROGRAM
PROGRAM
PROGRAM
PROGRAM
PROGRAM
PROGRAM
KARMA Module D
KARMA Module C
KARMA Module B
KARMA Module A
IFX 1
IFX 12
MFX 1
MFX 2
TFX 1
TFX 2
Insert / Master / Total Efect MIDI TRACK 1...16
TRACK 1
TRACK 8
TRACK 2
TRACK 3
TRACK 4
TRACK 5
TRACK 6
TRACK 7 REGION
REGION
REGION
REGION
REGION
REGION
REGION
REGION TRACK 9
TRACK 16
TRACK 10
TRACK 11
TRACK 12
TRACK 13
TRACK 14
TRACK 15 REGION
REGION
REGION
REGION
REGION
REGION
REGION
REGION
AUDIO TRACK 1...16
MS MS MS MS
IFX 1
IFX 12
MFX 1
MFX 2
TFX 1
TFX 2
Insert / Master / Final Efect
WAVE FILES
IFX 1
IFX 12
MFX 1
MFX 2
TFX 1
TFX 2
Insert / Master / Total Efect
EXi 1
EXi 2
PROGRAM (EXi)
KARMA Module A
Hard Disk Recording
Multisample
DrumKit
Wave Seq.
PCG/ SNG PCG
KSC
Drum Track
KARMA Module A
Drum Track
Drum Track
Drum Track
Preset DrumTrack Pattern
User DrumTrack Pattern
DRUMTRACK PATTERN
EP-1 PolysixEX STR-1 AL-1
SGX-1 MOD-7 MS-20EX CX-3
EP-1 PolysixEX STR-1 AL-1
SGX-1 MOD-7 MS-20EX CX-3
MS1 (MS/WS)
DrumKit
MS5 (MS/WS)
MS2 (MS/WS) MS6 (MS/WS)
MS1 (MS/WS)
DrumKit
MS5 (MS/WS)
Drums Program
Drums Program
USB AUDIO IN
1
USB AUDIO IN
2
SET LIST
Multisample
Slot 127
Slot 001
Slot 000
Set List 000 ... 127
DS1 (DS/Sample) DS5 (DS/Sample)
16
About the KRONOS PCM memory
PCMisanotherwayofsayingsamples.The
KRONOShasseveraltypesofPCMbanks,as
describedbelow:ROM,EXs,UserSampleBanks,and
SamplingModedata
Formoreinformationonthecontentsoftheincluded
ROMandEXssampledata,seetheVoiceNameList
(VNL).
ROM
TheKRONOSROMcontainsthebasicmultisamples
andsamples,andisalwaysloadedandavailable.
EXs
EXsstandsforEXpansionSamples.Thesecanbe
loadedornot,asyouwish.TheKRONOScomeswitha
numberofEXslibraries,includingmultiplegigabytes
ofsamples.
User Sample Banks
UserSampleBanksmaybesoundsthatyoucreate
yourself,orloadfromimportedAkaiorSoundFont2.0
libraries,orWAVorAIFFfiles.
Sampling Mode data
SamplingModeisusedtocreateandeditsamples.
WhenyousaveSamplingModedata,itbecomes
availableasaUserSampleBank.
Using samples in your own sounds
Youcanuseanyofthesebanktypes,togetheror
separately,whenmakingyourownsounds.Simplyset
theBankasdesiredintheProgramorWaveSequence
StepsMultisampleSelectfields,ortheDrumKit
DrumSampleSelectfields.Formoreinformation,see:
Program:Bank(Multisample),onpage 58ofthe
ParameterGuide
WaveSequence:Bank(Multisample),onpage 793
oftheParameterGuide
DrumKit:Bank,onpage 798oftheParameter
Guide
Lossless compression
WhenEXsdataisloadedintoRAM,theKRONOSuses
alosslesscompressiontechnique.Thisyieldsamodest
reductioninsize;forinstance,EXs1uses284MBof
RAMfor313MBofdata.
Youllnoticethatthisismuchmilderthanthedramatic
sizereductionsofmp3,orthePCMcompression
sometimesfoundinothersynthesizers.Thereisa
strongadvantageovertheseothermethods,however:
theKRONOScompressioniscompletelylossless,and
causesabsolutelynodegradationinaudioquality.
Loading samples at startup
TheKRONOScanloadyourfavoritesamples
automaticallyatstartup.Formoreinformation,see
Automaticallyloadingsampledataonpage 164.
User sampling RAM capacity
TheKRONOScomeswith2GBofRAMpreinstalled;
theKRONOSXcomeswith3GBofRAM.
Approximately1GBofthisRAMisusedbythe
operatingsystemandROMsampledata.The
remainderissharedbetweenthesamplesinEXs,User
SampleBanks,andSamplingMode.
ThismeansthatthesizeofthecurrentlyloadedEXs
andUserSampleBankstradesoffagainstthememory
availableforSamplingMode.Themorespaceusedby
EXsandUserSampleBanks,thelessisavailablefor
SamplingMode.
UsingVirtualMemoryforEXsandUserSampleBanks
generallyletsyouloadmoresamplesatonce,butmay
stilluseasubstantialamountofRAM.
Note:TochecktheamountofsampleRAMavailable,
see01f:FreeSampleMemory/Locationson
Formoreinformation,seeFreeRAMand
approximatesamplingtimesonpage 123.
About polyphony
Mosthardwaresynthesizersofferasingle,fixed
methodofsynthesis,apredeterminednumberof
voices,andafixedamountofeffectsprocessingpower
foraspecificnumberofeffects.KRONOSisdifferent;it
hasnofixedsynthesismethod,itspolyphonyvaries
dependingonwhichsynthenginesarebeingused,
somesynthenginesprovideadditionaleffects
(augmentingthe16normaleffectsslots),andthereare
sometimestradeoffsofprocessingpowerbetween
voicesandeffects.
Thisflexibilitymeansthatthesystemcandeliver
powerwhereyouneeditthemost.Asyouplay
differentsoundsfromdifferentsynthengines,the
KRONOSautomaticallydividesitsprocessingpower
appropriately.
Unlikemostcomputerbasedsystems,KRONOSalso
monitorstheoverallprocessingpower,reducingthe
overallnumberofvoicesifnecessary,tomakesurethat
thereareneverproblemswiththeaudio.
Normally,youshouldntneedtothinkaboutthisatall;
itwilljusthappenautomatically.Sometimes,however,
itcanbeconvenienttoknowhowthesystemis
allocatingitsresources.ThePerformanceMeterspage
showsthisinformation;youcanfinditonthePerf
MeterstabofP0inProgram,Combination,and
Sequencermodes.Formoreinformation,see02:
PerformanceMetersonpage 7oftheParameter
Guide.
Basic information Basic operations
17
Basic operations
AfteryouveturnedontheKRONOS,hereshowto
performbasicoperationssuchasselectingmodesand
pages.
1. Selecting modes
InordertouseaparticularfunctionontheKRONOS,
youmustfirstselecttheappropriatemode.
Pressoneofthefrontpanelmodebuttonstoenterthe
correspondingmode.TheseincludeSETLIST,
COMBI(Combinationmode),PROG(Programmode),
SEQ(Sequencermode),SAMPLING,GLOBAL,and
DISK.
2. Selecting pages
Eachmodehasalargenumberofparameters,which
aregroupedintopages.Thesearefurthersubdivided
bytabsintouptoninetabpages.
1. Selectthedesiredmode,asdescribedabove.
WelluseProgrammodeasanexampleforour
explanation,sopressthePROGswitch.
2. Pressatabinthelowerline(pagegrouptabs).
Asanexamplehere,presstheBasic/Vectortab.The
currentpageindicationintheupperleftoftheLCD
screenwillindicatePROGRAMP1:Basic/Vector,
andthepagegroupwillchange.
WhenyoupresstheEXITswitch,youwillreturntoP0
fromanypage.
3. Pressatabintheupperline(pagetabs)toselecta
page.
Asanexamplehere,presstheVectorControltab.The
currentpageindicationintheupperleftoftheLCD
screenwillstaythesame,buttheupperright
indicationwillchangetoVectorControl.Youve
selectedtheVectorControlpage.
Note:Insomecases,theremaynotbeanytabsinthe
upperline.
3. Editing parameters
Theparametervalueintheeditcellcanbesetbyusing
thefrontpanelVALUEcontrollers(VALUEslider,
/ switches,VALUEdial,numerickeys09,
switch,ENTERswitch,and(.)switch).Asnecessary,
youcanalsousetheBANKswitchesandthe
COMPAREswitch.
Forsomeparameters,youcanusetheBANKSELECT
switchestoselectthebankofaprogrametc.,orpressa
popupbuttontoaccessapopupmenuwhereyoucan
specifythevalueoftheparameter.Insomecases,you
canholddowntheENTERswitchandplayanoteon
thekeyboardtospecifyanoteoravelocityvalue.
Page
group Tab
Page tab
Basic Vector tab
Vector Control tab
18
VALUE entry
VALUE slider
Usethiswhenyouwishtomakemajor
changesinthevalue.
InProgrammodeandCombinationmode,
thisslidercanalsobeusedasacontrol
sourceforalternatemodulationordynamic
modulation.(ThisisactiveinProgramor
CombinationP0:PlaywhentheProgram
SelectorCombinationSelect(thelarge
charactersintheupperpartoftheLCD)is
selected).
/ buttons
Usethesewhenyouwishtomakesmall
changesinthevalue.
VALUE dial
Usethiswhenyouwishtomakelarge
changesinavalue.
Numeric keys 09, ENTER, , (.)
Usethesewhenyouknowtheparametervaluethat
youwishtoinput.
Afterusingthenumerickeys09toinputanumber,
presstheENTERswitchtofinalizetheparameter
value.
Usetheswitchtoenternegativenumbers.
Usethe(.)switchtoenteradecimalpoint.
BANK IAG, UAG buttons
TheBANKIAG,UAGbuttonsareusedin
Programmodetoselecttheprogrambankandin
Combinationmodetoselectthecombinationbank.In
combination,andSequencermodes,theseswitchesare
usedtoselectthebankoftheprogramusedbyeach
timbre/track.
COMPARE switch
Usethiswhenyouwishtocomparetheeditsyouhave
madetoaprogramorcombinationssoundwiththe
uneditedoriginal(i.e.,thesoundthatiswritteninto
memory).
Wheneditingaprogramorcombination,pressthis
switch.TheLEDwilllight,andthelastwrittensettings
forthatprogramnumberorcombinationnumberwill
berecalled.WhenyoupresstheCOMPAREswitch
onceagain,theLEDwillgodarkandyouwillreturnto
thesettingsthatyouwereediting.
Ifyoueditthesettingsthatarerecalledbypressingthe
COMPAREswitch(i.e.,thesettingsthatarewritten
intomemory),theLEDwillgodark,anditwillnotbe
possibletoreturntothepreviouseditsbypressingthe
COMPAREswitchagain.
InSequencermode,youcanusetheCOMPAREswitch
tomakebeforeandaftercomparisonsimmediately
afterusingrealtimerecordingorsteprecordingto
recordasong,orafterperformingatrackedit
operation.
Forexample,thiscanbeusedeffectivelywhen
realtimerecordingatrackforasong.
1. RealtimerecordaMIDItrack.(Take1)
2. Onceagain,realtimerecordonthesametrack.
(Take2)
3. PresstheCOMPAREswitch.TheLEDwilllight,
andtake1willberecalled.
4. PresstheCOMPAREswitchonceagain.TheLED
willgodark,andtake2willberecalled.
5. Ifatstep3youonceagainrealtimerecordonthe
sametrack(take3),theobjectoftheCompare
functionwillnowbetake1.
Ifatstep4youonceagainrealtimerecordonthesame
track(take3),theobjectoftheComparefunctionwill
betake2.
Inthisway,theComparefunctionletsyourecallthe
previousrecordingorthepreviousstateofevent
editing.
TheComparefunctiondoesnotworkinGlobalmode,
withtheexceptionofSampling,Disk,WaveSequence,
andDrumKitediting.
Popup buttons and popup menus
Youcanpressapopupbuttontoaccessapopupmenu,
andthensetparametervalues.
Keyboard input
Whenenteringanotenumberoraspecificvelocityas
thevalueofaparameter,youcanusethekeyboardto
inputthesetting.HolddowntheENTERswitchand
playthenotethatyouwishtoenterasavalue.The
notenumberorvelocityvaluewillbeinput.
WhentheGlobalP5:DrumKitpageisdisplayed,you
canholddowntheENTERswitchandplayanoteto
recallthesettingsthathavebeenassignedtothatnote.
(Iftheparameteryouveselectedexpectsyoutoentera
velocityvalue,thevelocityyouplayedwillbeentered.)
InSamplingmode,youcanholddowntheENTER
switchandplayanotetorecalltheindexthatis
assignedtothatnote.
Basic information Basic operations
19
4. Selecting and executing menu
commands
Themenuprovidescommandsthatarespecifictoeach
page,suchWrite(save)orCopy.Theavailable
functionswilldependonthecurrentpage.
Forexample,theutilityfunctionsinProgrammodelet
youwrite(save)thesettings,performconvenient
editingoperationssuchascopyingsettingsbetween
oscillatorsoreffects,SyncEGssothatyoucanedit
twoofthematonce,andsoon.
1. Intheupperrightofthedisplay,pressthemenu
button.
Alistofmenucommandswillappear.
2. Selectamenucommandbypressingitwithyour
finger.
Adialogboxfortheselectedmenucommandwill
appear.Checktypecommandswillnotdisplaya
dialogbox;theirstatuswillbeswitches,andthelist
willclose.ByholdingdowntheENTERswitchand
pressinganumerickey09youcanaccessthedialog
boxforthefirsttenutilityfunctionswithoutgoing
throughthemenu.
Toclosethelistwithoutselectingacommand,press
thedisplaysomewhereotherthanthelist,orpress
theEXITswitch.
3. Foraparameterinadialogbox,selectitby
pressingitwithyourfinger,andusetheVALUE
controllers(e.g.,VALUEdialorInc/Decbuttons)to
enteritsvalue.
Whenselectingaprogramorcombinationnumberina
dialogbox,youcanalsousetheBANKSELECTswitch
toenterthebankasanalternativetousingtheVALUE
controllers.
4. Toexecute,presstheOKbuttonortheENTER
switch.Ifyoudecidenottoexecute,pressthe
CancelbuttonortheEXITbutton.
Thedialogboxwillclose.
5. Writing and saving
Afteryouedit,youshouldwriteorsaveyourchanges
asnecessary.Forexampleifyouveeditedaprogram,
yourchangedwillbelostifyouselectanotherprogram
orturnoffthepower.Thesameappliestoa
combination.SettingsyoueditinGlobalmodewillbe
rememberedaslongasthepowerison,butyour
changeswillbelostwhenyouturnoffthepower.
FordetailsontheWriteoperations,seethefollowing
pages.
Programs:seeSavingyoureditsonpage 42
Combinations:seeSavingyoureditsonpage 67
Effectpresets:seeSavingEffectPresetson
page 211
Globalsettings:seeWritingGlobalsettingson
page 185
WaveSequences:seeSavingWaveSequenceson
page 175
Drumkits:seeSavingDrumKitsonpage 179
UserDrumTrackpatterns:seeConvertinga
Sequencerpatternto a Drum Track patternon
page 245
Preset/userDrumTrackpatternsaresavedininternal
memoryevenwhenthepoweristurnedoff.Patterns
youcreateinSequencermodecanbeconvertedinto
userDrumTrackpatternsandsavedininternal
memory.
Usertemplatesongs:seeSavingyourown
TemplateSongsonpage 78
Preset/usertemplatesongsaresavedininternal
memoryevenwhenthepoweristurnedoff.Track
settingsandeffectsettingsofasongyoucreatecanbe
savedininternalmemorybythemenucommandSave
TemplateSong.
Formoreinformation,seeWritingtointernal
memoryonpage 182andSavingtodisks,CDs,and
USBmediaonpage 186.
20
Setup
Turning the power on/off
1. Connecting the power cable
1. SettheKRONOSsrearpanelPOWERswitchto
theoffposition.
2. Connecttheincludedpowercabletothe
KRONOSrearpanelACpowerinlet.
3. Connecttheotherendofthepowercabletothe
ACpoweroutlet.
Ifyourpowercableusesaseparategroundwire,
youmustconnectthisgroundwirebeforeinserting
theplugintotheACoutlet.Whendisconnecting,
youmustfirstdisconnecttheplugbeforeyou
disconnectthegroundwire.Ifyouareunsureof
howtomakeconnections,pleasecontactyourKorg
Distributor.
MakesurethatyourACoutletisthecorrectvoltage
foryourinstrument.
2. Turning the power on
1. PresstherearpanelPOWERswitchtoturnonthe
power.
2. Turnonyourpoweredmonitorsorstereoamp.
3. TurntheKRONOSsMAINVOLUMEknob
clockwisetoanappropriatelevel,andadjustthe
volumeofyourpoweredmonitorsorstereoamp.
Afteryouveturnedoffthepower,youmustwait
approximatelytensecondsbeforeturningthe
poweronagain.
Tip:YoucansetthePowerOnMode(GlobalP0:
SystemPreferencepage)sothatthemodeandpage
thathadbeenselectedwhenyouturnedthepoweroff
willappearwhenthepoweristurnedon.
Formoreinformation,seeRecallingthelastselected
modeandpageatpowerononpage 159.
3. Turning the power off
Whenyouturnoffthepower,theprogramsand
combinationsetc.willreverttotheiruneditedstate.
Ifyouwanttokeepyouredits,youllneedtoWrite
them.Formoreinformation,seeSavingdataon
page 181.
Similarly,Songsandusermultisamplesand
sampleswilldisappearwhenyouturnoffthe
power.Ifyouwanttousethesesongs,user
multisamples,andsamplesthenexttimeyouturn
onthepower,youllneedtoloadthemagain.
1. SetthefrontpanelMAINVOLUMEknobandthe
volumeofyourpoweredmonitororstereoampto
zero.
2. Turnoffthepowerofyourpoweredmonitoror
stereoamp.
3. PresstheKRONOSsPOWERswitchtoturnoff
thepower.
Neverturnoffthepowerwhiledataisbeingwritten
intointernalmemory.Thedisplaywillshowthe
messageNowwritingintointernalmemorywhen
thisisinprogress.
Neverturnoffthepowerwhilemediasuchasthe
internaldriveisbeingaccessed,suchaswhile
recordingorplayingaudiotracks,orsamplingto
diskforanextendedtime.Turningoffthepower
whilediskaccessisoccurringmayrenderthemedia
unusable.TheDISKLEDshowswhentheinternal
driveisbeingaccessed.
Connections
Connectionsmustbemadewiththepowerturned
off.Pleasebeawarethatcarelessoperationmay
damageyourspeakersystemorcausemalfunctions.
1. Analog audio output connections
HereshowtoconnecttheKRONOStoyouranalog
ampormixer.
Ifyoureusingahomestereosystem,beawarethat
playingathighvolumemaydamageyourspeakers.
Becarefulnottoraisethevolumeexcessively.
AUDIO OUTPUT (MAIN) L/MONO and R
Thesearethemainoutputs,accessedbysettingBus
SelecttoL/R.Allofthefactorysoundsusethese
outputs,andtheMasterandTotalEffectsarealways
routedhereaswell.
AlloftheKRONOSanalogoutputsuse1/4balanced
TRSjacks.Forbestresults,usebalancedconnectionsto
youraudiosystem.
1. ConnecttheAUDIOOUTPUT(MAIN)L/MONO
andRoutputstotheinputsofyourampormixer.
IfyoureusingKRONOSinstereo,useboththe
(MAIN)L/MONOandRjacks.Ifyoureusing
KRONOSinmono,useonlythe(MAIN)L/MONO
jack.
2. UsetheMAINVOLUMEknobtoadjustthe
volume.
TheMAINVOLUMEknobaffectsonlythemainstereo
outputsandtheheadphones;itdoesnotaffectthe
individualoutputs,theS/P DIFoutput,ortheUSB
output.
AUDIO OUTPUT (INDIVIDUAL) 14
Theseare4additionalanalogoutputs,whichcanbe
usedasindividualmonooutputs,stereopairs,orany
combinationofthetwo.Almostanysignalsourcecan
beroutedtotheseoutputs,including:
EachnoteinaDrumKit
Setup Connections
21
InsertEffectoutputs
IndividualProgramsinaCombinationorSong(or
thesumoftheProgramsoscillatorsinProgram
mode)
Audiotracks
Audioinputs
Youcanusethesetoisolateorgrouptogethersounds
forrecording,orforcomplexliveperformancesetups.
1. Connectthe(INDIVIDUAL)14outputstothe
yourampormixerinputs.
2. UsetheBusSelectparameterstosendthedesired
sounds,audiotracks,inputs,oreffectstothe
individualoutputs,aseithermono(14)orstereo
(1/2and3/4)signals.
Ifthesignalisgoingthroughoneormoreinserteffects,
theoutputissetatthelastIFXinthechain,viatheBus
SelectparameterontheP85InsertFXpage.
IfaProgram,Timbre,orTrackisnotgoingthroughany
inserteffects,theoutputissetusingtheBusSelect
parametersontheP81or82Routingpage.
Toassignaudioinputsdirectlytooutputs,useBus
SelectparametersintheP0AudioInput(Sampling)
page.
InGlobalmode,theAudiopageL/RBusIndiv.Assign
settingletsyoumirrortheMAINstereoL/Routputon
anypairofindividualoutputs.Youcanusethisto
createaprivatemonitoringsetupinliveandstudio
environments.Formoreinformation,seeL/RBus
Indiv.Assignonpage 761oftheParameterGuide.
Note:TheMAINVOLUMEknobdoesntaffectthe
volumeoftheindividualoutputs.
Headphones
1. Ifyoureusingheadphones,connectthemtothe
KRONOSheadphonejack.
2. UsetheVOLUMEslidetoadjustthevolumeofthe
headphones.TheKRONOSheadphonejack
outputsthesamesignalasthe(MAIN)L/MONO
andRjacks.
Tip:Tomonitorthesignalsfromtheindividual
outputs,useanexternalmixer.
AC power supply
to an AC outlet
Power cable (Included)
Power switch
1. Connecting the power cable
PHONES
MIC1
BAL OR UNBAL
LINE IN 1 LOW CUT 75Hz 18dB/OCT
TRIM +10dB -40dB 10 60
U
-10dBV MIC GAIN
LINE IN 7-8
L
R
BAL OR UNBAL
MONO
+4 -10 LEVEL
LINE IN 9-10
L
R
BAL OR UNBAL
MONO
+4 -10 LEVEL
LINE IN 11-12
L
R
BAL OR UNBAL
MONO
+4 -10 LEVEL
LINE IN 13-14
L
R
BAL OR UNBAL
MONO
+4 -10 LEVEL
STEREO AUX RETURNS 1
2
1
2
AUX SEND
LEFT(1/MONO) RIGHT ALL BAL/UNBAL
L
R
TAPE INPUT TAPE OUTPUT MAIN OUTS L
R
BAL/UNBAL
PHONES
MIC2
BAL OR UNBAL
TRIM +10dB -40dB 10 60
U
-10dBV MIC GAIN
MIC3
BAL OR UNBAL
TRIM +10dB -40dB 10 60
U
-10dBV MIC GAIN
MIC4
BAL OR UNBAL
TRIM +10dB -40dB 10 60
U
-10dBV MIC GAIN
MIC5
BAL OR UNBAL
TRIM +10dB -40dB 10 60
U
-10dBV MIC GAIN
MIC6
BAL OR UNBAL
TRIM +10dB -40dB 10 60
U
-10dBV MIC GAIN
60
U
+15 U
+15
AUX 1 MON/ EFX
2 EFX
U
+15 U
+12
-15
-12 U
+15 -15
PAN
SOLO
1 MUTE ALT 3 4
EQ HI 12kHz
MID 2.5kHz
LOW 80Hz
L R
dB 10
5
U
5
10
20
30
40 50 60
U
+15 U
+15
AUX 1 MON/ EFX
2 EFX
U
+15 U
+12
-15
-12 U
+15 -15
PAN
SOLO
2 MUTE ALT 3 4
EQ HI 12kHz
MID 2.5kHz
LOW 80Hz
L R
dB 10
5
U
5
10
20
30
40 50 60
U
+15 U
+15
AUX 1 MON/ EFX
2 EFX
U
+15 U
+12
-15
-12 U
+15 -15
PAN
SOLO
3 MUTE ALT 34
EQ HI 12kHz
MID 2.5kHz
LOW 80Hz
L R
dB 10
5
U
5
10
20
30
40 50 60
U
+15 U
+15
AUX 1 MON/ EFX
2 EFX
U
+15 U
+12
-15
-12 U
+15 -15
PAN
SOLO
4 MUTE ALT 34
EQ HI 12kHz
MID 2.5kHz
LOW 80Hz
L R
dB 10
5
U
5
10
20
30
40 50 60
U
+15 U
+15
AUX 1 MON/ EFX
2 EFX
U
+15 U
+12
-15
-12 U
+15 -15
PAN
SOLO
5 MUTE ALT 3 4
EQ HI 12kHz
MID 2.5kHz
LOW 80Hz
L R
dB 10
5
U
5
10
20
30
40 50 60
U
+15 U
+15
AUX 1 MON/ EFX
2 EFX
U
+15 U
+12
-15
-12 U
+15 -15
PAN
SOLO
6 MUTE ALT 3 4
EQ HI 12kHz
MID 2.5kHz
LOW 80Hz
L R
dB 10
5
U
5
10
20
30
40 50 60
U
+15 U
+15
AUX 1 MON/ EFX
2 EFX
U
+15 U
+12
-15
-12 U
+15 -15
PAN
SOLO
78 MUTE ALT 34
EQ HI 12kHz
MID 2.5kHz
LOW 80Hz
L R
dB 10
5
U
5
10
20
30
40 50 60
U
+15 U
+15
AUX 1 MON/ EFX
2 EFX
U
+15 U
+12
-15
-12 U
+15 -15
PAN
SOLO
910 MUTE ALT 34
EQ HI 12kHz
MID 2.5kHz
LOW 80Hz
L R
dB 10
5
U
5
10
20
30
40 50 60
U
+15 U
+15
AUX 1 MON/ EFX
2 EFX
U
+15 U
+12
-15
-12 U
+15 -15
PAN
SOLO
1112 MUTE ALT 3 4
EQ HI 12kHz
MID 2.5kHz
LOW 80Hz
L R
dB 10
5
U
5
10
20
30
40 50 60
U
+15 U
+15
AUX 1 MON/ EFX
2 EFX
U
+15 U
+12
-15
-12 U
+15 -15
PAN
SOLO
1314 MUTE ALT 3 4
EQ HI 12kHz
MID 2.5kHz
LOW 80Hz
L R
dB 10
5
U
5
10
20
30
40 50 60
dB 10
5
U
5
10
20
30
40 50 60
dB 10
5
U
5
10
20
30
40 50
U
+10
U
+20 U
+20
1
2 AUX1MASTER
PRE POST
NORMALLED
AUX1 SELECT EFXTO MONITOR AUX RETURNS
SOURCE
MAIN MIX
LEFT RIGHTCLIP +28 +10 +7
+4 +2
0 -2
-4 -7 -10 -20 -30 0dB=0dBu
RUDESOLOLIGHT
ALT 3-4
TAPE
ASSIGN TO MAIN MIX
NORMAL(AFL) LEVELSET(PFL) SOLO MODE
PHANTOM POWER CONTROL ROOM / PHONES MAINMIX
3. Analog audio input
connections
Mixer
Powered
monitors,
etc.
AUDIO INPUT
INPUT
Monitor
OUTPUT
AUDIO OUTPUT
4. Digital audio
input/output connections
Digital Recorder, etc.
DIGITAL OUT
S/P DIF
OUT IN
6. USB device connections
CD-R/RW, hard disk,
removable disks etc.
USB cable
USB A USB B
USB
Computer
7. Connections to computers
USB MIDI Controller
Mic
Guitar
Efect unit
2. Analog audio output connections
5. Pedal connections etc.
DAMPER
PEDAL
SWITCH
ASSIGNABLE
ASSIGNABLE
Synthesizer
7. Connections to MIDI equipment
22
2. Analog audio input connections
Youcanbringexternalanalogaudiosourcesintothe
KRONOSforsampling,recording,orprocessing
throughtheinternaleffects.
AUDIO INPUT 1, 2
Thesetwoinputsuse1/4TRSbalancedjacks,and
includepreampswithadjustablegain.Tosetupthe
audioinputs:
1. Connectyourmicsortheoutputjacksofyour
externalaudiosourcestotheINPUT1and2jacks.
2. SettheMIC/LINEswitchasappropriateforthe
deviceyouveconnected,andusetheLEVELknob
toadjustthegain.
ChoosetheLINEsetting(switchpressedinward)if
youveconnectedamixer,computer,audiosystem,
signalprocessor,oranothersynthesizer.Forbest
results,usebalancedlineconnections.
Note:Guitarswithactivepickupscanbeconnected
directly.Guitarswithpassivepickups(i.e.,guitarsthat
donothaveaninternalpreamp)canbeused,butthe
impedancemismatchwillcausebothachangeintone
andareductioninvolume.Forbestresults,routesuch
guitarsthroughapreamporeffectsunitbefore
connectingthem.
ChoosetheMICsetting(switchintheoutward
position)onlywhenconnectingamic.Notethatsome
microphones,suchascondensers,mayrequireexternal
phantompower,whichisnotsuppliedbythe
KRONOS.
3. Adjusttheoutputlevelonanyconnectedexternal
equipment.
4. Afterturningonthepower,usetheAudioInput
pagetosetupthevolume,pan,busrouting,and
sendlevelsfortheinputs,asdesired.
Formoreinformation,see08:Audio
Input/Samplingonpage 14oftheParameterGuide.
3. Digital audio input/output
connections
Digital audio output
TheKRONOSmainstereooutputcanbedigitally
transmittedtoanaudiosystem,digitalmixer,orother
devicethatcanacceptasamplingrateof48kHz.
UseanopticalcabletoconnecttheS/P DIFOUT
(MAIN)jacktotheopticaldigitalinputjackofyour
device.
ThiswillcarrythesameaudiosignalastheAUDIO
OUTPUT(MAIN)L/MONOandRjacks.
Note:TheMAINVOLUMEknobdoesntaffectthe
volumeofthedigitaloutput.
Digital audio input
Youcanrecordorsamplethedigitaloutputofa
S/P DIFdevicerunningat48kHz,suchasacomputer
audiosystemordigitalmixer.Youcanalsoroutethe
inputdirectlytotheKRONOSoutputs,orthroughthe
internaleffects.
1. Useanopticalcabletoconnecttheopticaldigital
outputofyourdigitalaudiodevicetotheS/P DIF
INjackoftheKRONOS.
2. SetSystemClock(ontheGlobalP0:BasicSetup
page)toS/P DIF.
3. Afterturningonthepower,usetheAudioInput
pagetosetupthevolume,pan,busrouting,and
sendlevelsfortheinputs,asdesired.
Formoreinformation,see08:Audio
Input/Samplingonpage 14oftheParameterGuide.
YoucanusetheS/P DIFinputssimultaneouslywith
theanalogandUSBinputs.
4. Connecting Foot Pedals and Switches
Connecting a damper pedal
Thedamperpedalisalsosometimescalledthesustain
pedal.Itactslikethesimilarlynamedpedalonan
acousticpiano;whenyouholddownthepedal,notes
willcontinuetosustainevenwhenyouliftyourhands
offofthekeyboard.
1. ConnectanoptionalDS1Hdamperpedaltothe
DAMPERjack.IfyouveconnectedaDS1H,
youllbeabletoobtainhalfdampereffects.
Afterturningthepoweron:
2. GototheGlobalP2:Controllers/Scalespage,and
usetheDamperPolarityparametertosetthe
damperpolarity.
3. GototheGlobalP0page,andusetheHalf
DamperCalibrationmenucommandtoadjustthe
sensitivityifdesired.
Formoreinformation,seeDamperPedal(Sustain)
onpage 34,andDamperPolarityonpage 781ofthe
ParameterGuide.
Connecting a foot switch
Youcanuseaconnectedfootswitchtoperform
functionssuchascontrollingsostenuto,softpedal
on/off,KARMAon/off,selectingPrograms,
Combinations,orSetListSlots,starting/stoppingthe
sequencer,andcontrollingtaptempo.
1. ConnectafootswitchsuchastheoptionalPS1to
theASSIGNABLESWITCHjack.
2. Afterturningthepoweron,useGlobalP2:Foot
SwitchAssignandFootSwitchPolarityto
assignthefunctioncontrolledbythefootswitch
andtospecifythepolarity.
Formoreinformation,see21a:FootSwitch&
Pedal/Damperonpage 781oftheParameterGuide.
Connecting a foot pedal
Youcanuseaconnectedfootpedaltocontrolvolume,
modulation,orotherfunctions.
1. ConnectanoptionalXVP10orEXP2etc.tothe
ASSIGNABLEPEDALjacks.
2. Afterturningthepoweron,useGlobalP2:Foot
PedalAssigntoassignthefunctioncontrolledby
thefootpedal.
Formoreinformation,seeFootPedalAssignon
Setup Connections
23
5. Connecting USB devices
TheKRONOSsupportshighspeedUSB2.0for
connectingtostoragedevices,suchasharddrives,
flashmedia,andCDR/RWdrives,aswellasclass
compliantUSBMIDIcontrollers.
USB storage devices
Youcansaveandloadsamples,sounds,sequences,
andotherdatatoandfromUSB2.0storagedevicesfor
backup,transferringtocomputers,etc.
NotethatHDRtracksmustbeplayedfromand
recordedontotheinternaldisk.Youcanbackthemup
toUSBdevices,however.
Themaximumsupportedcapacitydependsuponthe
formatoftheUSBdevice.WithFAT16format,the
maximumcapacityis4GB;withFAT32,themaximum
is2Terabytes(2,000GB).
1. UseaUSBcabletoconnectyourUSBstorage
devicetooneoftheKRONOSsUSBAports.
StandardUSBcableshaveadifferentconnectorateach
end.Plugtheflat,rectangularconnectorintothe
KRONOS,andplugthesquareishconnectorintothe
externalUSBstoragedevice.
Note:Ifthedeviceyouareusingdoesnotsupporthot
plugging,makeconnectionswiththedevicepowered
off,andthenturnonthepowerofyourdevice.
2. Waitafewsecondsforthedevicetoberecognized.
3. UsetheDiskmodeDriveSelectscreentocheck
theconnection.
Formoreinformation,seeLoading&savingdata,and
creatingCDsonpage 181.
USB MIDI controllers
YoucanconnectclasscompliantUSBMIDIcontrollers
directlytotheKRONOS,andusethemjustasyou
wouldcontrollersconnectedtothe5pinMIDIjacks.
Todoso:
1. UseaUSBcabletoconnectyourUSBMIDI
controllertooneoftheKRONOSsUSBAports.
IfthecontrollerissettoadifferentMIDIchannelthan
theKRONOSsGlobalMIDIChannel,youcanuseitto
playadifferentsoundthanthelocalkeyboardin
CombinationsorSongs,ascontrolledbytheTimbreor
TrackMIDIsettings.
YoucanalsoplaythechordpadsusingKorgUSB
MIDIcontrollersequippedwithdrumpads,including:
nanoPADandnanoPAD2
microKONTROL
padKONTROL
KONTROL49
Whenthesecontrollersareconnected,theKRONOS
willautomaticallydeterminetheMIDIassignmentsof
thecontrollerspads18,andmapthemdirectlytothe
KRONOSpads.
Formoreinformation,seeUSBMIDIcontrollerson
Hot-plugging
TheKRONOSsupportsUSBhotplugging.Thismeans
thatyoucanconnectordisconnecttheUSBcablewhile
thepowerison.
Note:Inordertousehotplugging,theUSBdeviceyou
areconnectingmustalsosupporthotplugging.
8 USB devices maximum
KRONOShastwoseparateUSB2.0ports,andcan
supportupto8USBdevicessimultaneously.Notethat
itdoesntmatterhowthedevicesareconnected;evenif
youusehubsordifferentports,themaximumis
always8devices.
USB Power
SomeUSBdevicesgettheirpowerfromtheUSB
connection.Thesearecalledbuspowereddevices,
andtheyaresupportedbytheKRONOS.
OtherUSBdevicesmayrequireaseparatepower
source,inadditiontotheUSBconnection;inthiscase,
youllneedtouseanappropriatepoweradaptorfor
thedevice.
Thereisalimitationtothetotalcurrentsuppliedtoall
connectedUSBdevices,asdefinedbytheUSB
specification.Ifthetotalcurrentconsumptionofthe
connecteddevicesexceedsthislimit,theKRONOS
maynotcorrectlyrecognizetheconnectedUSB
devices.Ifthishappens,anerrormessageofUSBHub
PowerExceeded!willappear.
Toavoidthisproblem,ifyouconnectmorethanone
USBdevice,pleaseuseaselfpoweredUSBhubinself
poweredmode.Fordetailsonconnectionsandsettings
foryourhub,pleaserefertoitsdocumentation.
Fordetailsontheelectricalcurrentusedbyaspecific
USBdevice,refertoitsownersmanual.
6. Connections to MIDI equipment &
computers
Connections to MIDI equipment
Thekeyboard,controllers,andsequenceretc.ofthe
KRONOScanbeusedtocontrolanexternalMIDItone
generator.Conversely,anotherMIDIkeyboardor
sequencercancontrolthetonegeneratorofKRONOS
toproducesound.
UseMIDIcablestoconnecttheMIDIconnectorsof
KRONOSwiththeMIDIconnectorsofyour
externaldevice.
CD-R/RW,
hard disk,
removable disk, etc.
Type A
Type A
Type B
Type B
USB cable
USB hub
USB MIDI Controller
24
Formoreinformation,seeConnectingMIDIdevices
&computersonpage 1127oftheParameterGuide.
Connections to a computer via MIDI
InconjunctionwithMIDIsoftwareonyourcomputer,
youcanusetheKRONOSasaMIDIcontroller,and
transmittheKRONOSsequencerplaybackasMIDI
data.YoucanalsoplaytheKRONOSsoundsfromthe
computer.Todoso:
UseaMIDIinterfacetoconnecttheMIDI
connectorsofKRONOStotheMIDIconnectorsof
yourcomputer.
Formoreinformation,seeConnectingMIDIdevices
&computersonpage 1127oftheParameterGuide.
Note:SomeUSBMIDIinterfacesmaynotbeableto
transmitorreceivetheKRONOSsMIDISystem
Exclusivemessages.
7. Connection to a computer via USB
TheKRONOSsUSBBportletsyouconnecttoaUSB
equippedMacorWindowsPC,forsendingand
receivingMIDIandaudio,andforconnectingtothe
KRONOSEditor.
Todoso:
1. InstalltheKorgUSBMIDIdriverfromthe
includedAccessoryDVD2,orasdownloaded
fromtheKorgwebsite.
OnAccessoryDisc2,theinstallersarelocatedinthe
followingdirectories.Doubleclickthedriverinstaller
tostarttheinstallation.
Windows:Windowsfolder/DrvTools
folder/DrvTools_e.exe
MacOSX:Macfolder/KORGUSBMIDIDriver
folder/KORGMIDIDriver.pkg
2. Followtheonscreeninstructionstocompletethe
installation.
ForbothWindowsandMacOSXtheKRONOSuses
thestandard,builtinUSBaudiodrivers,sono
additionalinstallationisnecessaryforaudio.
3. TurnontheKRONOS.
4. ConnecttheKRONOSsUSBBporttooneofyour
computersUSBports.
WhentheKRONOSisconnected,thecomputerwill
recognizeitasaUSBMIDIDeviceandUSBAudio
Device.
Formoreinformation,includingdetailsonsettingup
andusingtheKRONOSEditor/PlugInEditor,please
seetheKRONOSEditor/PlugInEditorManual
(PDF).
About the software
ThemostrecentversionsoftheKorgdriversand
Editor/PlugInEditorcanbedownloadedfromthe
Korgwebsite(http://www.korg.com/kronos).
Please note before use
Copyrighttoallsoftwareincludedinthisproductis
thepropertyofKorgInc.
Thelicenseagreementforthissoftwareisprovided
separately.Youmustreadthislicenseagreement
beforeyouinstallthissoftware.Yourinstallationofthis
softwarewillbetakentoindicateyouracceptanceof
thisagreement.
Windows System Requirements
Computer:USBportrequired(aUSBhostcontroller
madebyIntelisrecommended)
Operatingsystem:MicrosoftWindowsXPHome
Edition/ProfessionalServicePack2orlater;alleditions
ofMicrosoftWindowsVistaandMicrosoftWindows7
Macintosh System Requirements
Computer:USBportrequired
Operatingsystem:MacOSX10.4.11,10.5.8,orOSX
10.6.4orlater
Update information New features in software version 2.0
25
Update information
New features in software version 2.0
KRONOSsoftwareversion2.0addsanumberofnew
features,includingUserSampleBanks,supportfor
installingasecondinternalSSD,improvedAkaiand
SoundFont2.0import,andsupportforUSBethernet
adaptorsfortransferringfilesbetweentheKRONOS
andyourcomputer.
Inadditiontothesenewfeatures,theupdateincludes
variousimprovementsandresolutionstospecific
operationalissues.
Ifyoureusinganolderversion,youcandownloadthe
latestsoftwarefreeofchargefromtheKorgwebsite
(http://www.korg.com/kronos).
User Sample Banks
UserSampleBanksbringthebenefitsofEXstoyour
owncustomsamplelibraries.Youcanloadandplay
gigabytesofyourcustomorconvertedsamplesat
once,usingVirtualMemory.Diskandmemory
managementisimproved:youcancreatesubsetsof
UserSampleBanks,andmixandmatchpartsof
differentbanks,withoutduplicatingsamplesondisk.
Itsalsoeasytosharesoundswithfriendsand
collaborators,sinceProgramsmaintainlinkstoUser
SampleBanksevenwhensamplesaremovedondisk
orloadedontodifferentsystems.
Formoreinformation,seeUserSampleBankson
page 154.
Improved Akai and SoundFont 2.0
import
Version2.0featuressignificantlyimprovedAkaiand
SoundFont2.0importfunctionality.Mostnotably,up
to16stereovelocityzonesarenowsupportedwithina
singleHD1Program,byusingstereoMultisamples
andbothOSC1andOSC2.
Second Internal SSD support
TheKRONOSnowsupportsinstallationofasecond
internalSSD,formorestorageofsamples,audio
tracks,andprogramdata.Installationmustbedoneby
anauthorizedservicecenter;userinstallationisnot
supportedandmayvoidyourwarranty.Contactyour
KorgDistributorfordetailsonpurchaseand
installation.
USB Ethernet and FTP support
TheKRONOSnowsupportsUSBEthernetadaptors
andincludesabuiltinFTPserverforfast,easyfile
transferwithpersonalcomputers.Youcanbackup
filestoyourcomputer,transfersamplestothe
KRONOS,andorganizeandrenamefilesand
directoriesontheKRONOSinternaldisks.
TheKRONOSsupportsaspecificsetofofftheshelf
USBEthernetadaptors.SupporteddevicesasofMay
2012arelistedbelow.
AppleUSBEthernetAdapter(MC704ZM/A)
CiscoLinksysUSB300M
TRENDnetTU2ET100
BUFFALOLUA3U2AGT
BUFFALOLUA3U2ATX
BUFFALOLUAU2KTX
IODATAETX3US2
LogitecLANTX/U2B
LogitecLANTX/U2H3
PlanexUE100TXG3
Adaptorsotherthanthoselistedabovewillnot
functionproperly.
Formoreinformation,seeConnectingtocomputers
viaUSBEthernetandFTPonpage 167.
New features in software version 1.5
KRONOSsoftwareversion1.5addsanumberofnew
features,includingtheabilitytoloadmoresoundsand
samplesatonce,supportforinstallingadditional
RAM,andsupportforKorgUSBpadcontrollerssuch
asthenanoPAD2.
Version1.5alsosupportstheKRONOSEditorand
PluginEditorsoftware,providingeditor/librarian
capabilitiesforMacOSXandWindowsand
compatibilitywithpopularDAWsoftware.
Inadditiontothesenewfeatures,theupdateincludes
variousimprovementsandresolutionstospecific
operationalissues.
7 additional User Banks
KRONOSversion1.5adds7moreUserBankseachof
Programs,WaveSequencesandDrumKits,numbered
USERAAthroughUSERGG.Thesebanksare
initializedbydefault,freeforstoringeitheryourown
soundsorlibrariesfromKorgandthirdpartysound
developers.
ProgramBanksareeasilyaccessedfromthefront
panelhardwarebypressingboththeINTandUSER
buttonssimultaneously.Forinstance,toselectUSER
DD,pressbothINTDandUSERD.
26
Support for additional RAM
Installationofanadditional1GBofRAMisnow
supported,andcanbeperformedatanyauthorized
Korgservicecenter.Thisapproximatelydoublesthe
maximumavailablesampleRAM,uptoabout2GB.Of
course,whenloadingEXsusingVirtualMemory,the
totalsizeoftheloadedsampledatacanbemuch
greater.
TheKRONOSuseswidelyavailable,offtheshelf
DIMMs.InstallationbyanauthorizedKorgservice
centerisrequired;userinstallationisnotsupported
andmayvoidyourwarranty.Formoreinformationon
howtopurchaseandarrangeforinstallationofRAM,
pleasecontactyourcountrysKorgDistributor:
http://www.korg.co.jp/English/Distributors/index.html
ForcompatibilitywiththeKRONOS,RAMmust
complywiththefollowingspecification:
240PinPC26400CL5(orCL6)DDR2800nonECC
UnbufferedDIMM1GB
4x increase to Sampling Mode
Multisamples, Samples and Multisample
Indexes
ThemaximumnumberofMultisamplesinSampling
Modehasbeenincreasedfrom1,000to4,000,andthe
maximumnumbersofSamplesandMultisample
Indexeshaveeachbeenincreasedfrom4,000to16,000.
These4xincreaseswillbeespeciallyhelpfulwhen
loadinglibrarieswithlargenumbersofrelativelyshort
samples,suchasdrums.
NotethatEXsandUserSampleBankdatadoesnot
counttowardsthesemaximums;theyapplytothe
SamplingModedataonly.
Support for USB MIDI and Korg USB pad
controllers
Version1.5addssupportforconnectingUSBMIDI
classcompliantcontrollersdirectlytotheKRONOS.
Forinstance,youcanuseaKorgmicroKEYasan
auxiliarysynthactionkeyboardforaKRONOS73or
88.
Evenbetter,KorgUSBMIDIcontrollerswithpads
includingthenanoPAD,nanoPAD2,padKONTROL,
microKONTROL,andKONTROL49areautomatically
mappedtotheKRONOSchordpads,forplayingand
programmingdrums,triggeringchords,andselecting
andassigningchordsforChordMode.
Formoredetails,seeUSBMIDIcontrollerson
KRONOS Editor and Plug-In Editor
Version1.5addssupportfortheKRONOSEditorand
PlugInEditor,whichletyoueditandorganizesounds
fromyourMacOSXorWindowscomputer.Plugin
operationallowsyoutosavesettingsaspartofyour
projectwithanyVSTcompatibleWindowssoftware,
oranyVSTorAUcompatiblesoftwareonMacOSX.
TheKRONOSEditorandPlugInEditorwillbe
availableforfreedownloadatwww.korg.com/kronos.
27
Playing and editing Programs
Playing Programs
Whats a Program?
ProgramsarethebasicsoundsoftheKRONOS.You
canplaythembythemselves,layerthemtogetherin
Combinations,orplayadifferentProgramoneachof
the16MIDItracks,eitherfromtheinternalsequencer
orfromexternalcomputerbasedsequencers.
Thissectionofthemanualtakesaquicklookatplaying
Programs,includingtoursofthefrontpanel
controllersandbasiceditingtechniques.
Selecting Programs
ThereareseveraldifferentwaystoselectPrograms.
Eachoneisconvenientinadifferentway:
Usingthefrontpanelbuttons,valueslider,and
valueknob,youcanselectProgramsquicklyvia
physicalcontrols
SelectingbyBankandnumber(viathetouch
screen)letsyoubrowsethroughallofthePrograms
inmemory,tofindtheonethatyouwant
SelectingbyProgramcategory(viathetouch
screen)letsyoufilterProgramsbysoundtype,such
asPianosorDrums
UsingafootswitchletsyouchangeProgramseven
whilebothhandsarebusyplayingonthekeyboard
convenientforliveapplications
MIDIprogramchangemessagesletyouselect
Programsremotely,fromeitheraMIDIsequencer
oranexternalMIDIcontroller
Set Lists
ProgramscanalsobeselectedinSetLists,alongwith
CombinationsandSongs.Formoreinformation,see
SetListsonpage 113.
Overview: Program Banks
KRONOSshipsfromthefactorywithabout1,800
Programsloadedintomemory.Allofthefactory
Programscanbeoverwrittenwithyourownedits,if
desiredexceptfortheGMbanks.
HundredsofotherProgramslotsareleftopenforyour
ownprogrammingoradditionalsoundlibraries.The
exactcontentsmaydifferdependingontheKRONOS
model.
Programsareorganizedinto21Banks,asdescribed
below.YoucanalsostoremanymoreProgramsonthe
internaldisk(s),oronexternalUSB2.0devices.
Additionalbanksofsoundsmayalreadybeonthe
internaldiskasshippedfromthefactory.
USERGisthedefaultlocationforProgramscreated
byresampling.
Program Bank Contents
Asshippedfromthefactory,thecontentsofthe
ProgramBanksareasfollows:
Programbankcontents
*BankcontentsmaydifferdependingontheKRONOS
model.
Changing the Bank Type for USER banks
BankscancontaineitherHD1ProgramsorEXi
Programs,butnotboth.Thisassignmentisfixedfor
theInternalbanks,butcanbesetseparatelyforeachof
theUserbanks.
TochangethetypeofaUserbank:
1. PressthefrontpanelGLOBALbuttontoenter
Globalmode.
2. SelecttheBasictab.
3. Pressthepagemenubutton,andselectSet
ProgramUserBankType.
4. ChangetheTypeforthedesiredbanks.Leaveall
oftheotherbankssettoNoChange.
Bank Contents
Bank
Type
INTA
SGX-1, EP-1,
and best of all other EXi
EXi
INTBF HD-1 Programs HD-1
GM (I-G) GM2 main Programs
GM g(1)g(9) GM2 variation Programs
g(d) GM2 drum Programs
USERA
HD-1, including Ambient Drums
and Sound Effects
Bank type
can be set
to either
HD-1 or EXi
USERB AL-1
USERC AL-1 and CX-3
USERD STR-1
USERE MS-20EX & PolysixEX
USERF MOD-7
USERG Initialized HD-1 Programs
USERAACC Programs for EXs trial versions *
USERDDEE Initialized EXi Programs *
USERFFGG Initialized HD-1 Programs *
28
Important:Settingabankstypewilleraseallofthe
Programdatainthebanksomakesurethatyoure
noterasinganyProgramsyouwanttokeep!
5. PresstheOKbutton.
Anareyousure?dialogappears.
6. Ifyourecertainofthechange,pressOKagain.
Theselectedbankswillnowbeinitializedtousethe
newProgramtypes.
Selecting with the front-panel buttons
YoucanselectProgramsusingthefrontpanelbuttons,
withouttouchingthescreen.Todoso:
1. MakesurethatthefrontpanelPROGbuttonislit.
ThismeansthatyoureinProgrammode,inwhichyou
canselectandeditPrograms.Ifthebuttonisntlit,
pressitnow;itwilllightup,andthemainProgram
Playpagewillappear.
2. GotothemainProgramPlaypage.
ThemainPlaypageshowsanoverviewofthesound
structure,suchasoscillators,filters,etc.
3. MakesurethattheProgramnameisselected.
Ifitisnotselected,gotothePROGRAMP0:Playpage
andtouchtheProgramsname,sothatitshighlighted.
4. UsetheVALUEcontrollerstoselecttheprogram
numberthatyouwishtoplay.
Youcanusethefollowingmethodstoselectaprogram.
TurntheValuedial.
PresstheInc orDec buttons.
Usethenumerickeypad[0][9]tospecifythe
number,andpresstheENTERkey.
5. ToselectbanksINTAGorUSERAG,press
andreleasethecorrespondingBANKbutton.
Forexample,toselectbankINTB,presstheIBbutton
inthetoprowofBankbuttons.TheIBbuttonwill
light,andthenameINTBwillappearintheupperleft
oftheLCDscreen.
WhenyouselectaBank,thebuttonsLEDwilllight,
andtheselectedbankwillappearontheupperleftside
oftheLCDscreen.
6. ToselectbanksUSERAAGG,pressandholda
pairofIandUBANKbuttonstogether.
Forexample,toselectbankUSERCC,pressandhold
theICbutton,andthenpresstheUCbutton.Ifyou
prefer,youcanalsopressthemintheoppositeorder:
firstUC,andthenIC.
Selecting by bank and number
YoucanselectProgramsfromalistorganizedby
Programbank.
1. PresstheProgramSelectpopupbutton.
TheBank/ProgramSelectdialogappears.
Bank/ProgramSelectmenu
Inthisillustration,bankINTAisselected.Theliston
therightshowstheProgramscontainedinthatbank.
2. Pressthetabsontheleftsideofthedisplayto
selectabank.
Therearemorebanksthancanbeshownatonetime,
sothebanksaredividedintotwogroupsoftabs:INT
AUSERGandUSERAAUSERGG.
3. Ifnecessary,usetheMorebuttonsbelowthe
tabstoswitchbetweenshowingthetabsforINT
AUSERGandUSERAAUSERGG.
4. PressoneoftheProgramnamesinthelisttoselect
aProgram.
TheselectedProgramwillbehighlighted,andthe
keyboardwillimmediatelyswitchtothenewsound.
5. Ifyoulike,playafewnotestohearthenew
Program.
YoucanplaythenewProgramwhilethemenuisstill
showing,withoutneedingtopressOK.
6. WhenyouaresatisfiedwiththeselectedProgram,
presstheOKbuttontoclosethepopupmenu.
IfyoupresstheCancelbutton,theselectionyoumade
herewillbediscarded,andyouwillreturntothe
programthathadbeenselectedbeforeyouopenedthe
menu.
Playing Programs Selecting Programs
29
Selecting by Category
YoucanselectProgramsfromwithinacategory,such
askeyboard,organ,bass,anddrums.Whenshipped
fromthefactory,theProgramsareorganizedinto16
categories,eachwithseveralsubcategories.Thereare
also2morecategories,initiallynamedUser16and
User17,whichyoucanuseandrenameasdesired.
1. PresstheCategorypopupbutton.
TheCategory/ProgramSelectdialogappears.
Category/ProgramSelectmenu
Intheillustrationabove,theMotionSynthcategoryis
selected.ThelistontherightshowsthePrograms
whichbelongtothatcategory.
2. Pressthetabslocatedtotheleftsideofthedisplay
toselectadifferentcategory.
Thenameoftheselectedcategorywillbedisplayedin
fullinthelowerleftofthedisplay.
3. Optionally,focusonamorespecificgroupof
soundsbyselectingasubcategoryfromthe
secondcolumnoftabs.
Thefullnameofthesubcategoryalsoappearsinthe
lowerleftofthedisplay.
4. Pressoneofthenamesinthecenterareatoselecta
Program.
TheselectedProgramwillbehighlighted.
5. Whenyouaresatisfiedwiththeselectedprogram,
IfyoupresstheCancelbutton,yourselectionwillbe
discarded,andyouwillreturntotheProgramthathad
beenselectedwhenyouopenedthepopupmenu.
Using the Favorites check-box
TheBankandCategoryselectpopupsbothincludea
Favoritecheckboxatthebottomofthescreen.This
letsyoutrimthelisttoshowonlyProgramsyouve
markedasfavorites.
IftheselectedBankorCategorycontainsnoPrograms
markedasFavorites,thecheckboxwillbegrayedout
andunavailable.Whenshippedfromthefactory,no
Programswillbemarked(weleavethatuptoyou,
sincetheyshouldbeyourfavorites!).
TomarkaProgramasaFavorite:
1. GototheProgramP0:Playpage.
2. TouchtheFavoritebox,underneaththeTempo
parameter,sothattheboxisfilledinwithared
square(thisshowsthattheboxischecked).
3. WritetheProgram.
Thisisanimportantstep.Ifyoudontwritethe
Program,thechangetotheFavoritescheckboxwont
beretained.
FordetailsonhowtowritePrograms,seeSavingyour
editsonpage 42.
Using a footswitch to select Programs
YoucanassignafootswitchtostepthroughPrograms
onebyone,eithergoingup(0,1,2,3,etc.)orgoing
down(3,2,1etc.).ThisletsyouchangePrograms
withoutusingyourhandsgreatforquickProgram
changesinliveperformancesituations.
Therearetwowaysofdoingthis:byassigningthe
footswitchtoProgramUp/Down,ortoValueInc/Dec.
ProgramUp/Downisrecommendedfornormaluse,
whileValueInc/Decisaspecialpurposesetting,as
describedbelow.
Note:ThesesettingsapplytoSetListsand
Combinations,aswell.
Assigning the footswitch to Program Up/Down
AssigningthefootswitchtoProgramUporProgram
DownletsyoudirectlycontrolProgramchangesfrom
thefootswitch.
Tosetthisup:
1. Connectafootswitchtotherearpanel
ASSIGNABLESWITCHinput.
Useasimpleon/offfootswitch,suchastheoptional
KorgPS1.
2. PresstheGLOBALbuttontoenterGlobalmode.
3. GototheControllerstaboftheControllers/Scales
page.
4. SettheFootSwitchPolarityparametertomatch
theconnectedswitch.
5. Atthetopofthepage,settheFootSwitchAssign
parametertoProgramUp(orProgramDown).
Forthissettingtopersistafterpowerdown,youneed
towritetheGlobalsettings.
6. Openthemenu,andselecttheWriteGlobal
Settingcommand.
TheWriteGlobalSettingdialogwillappear.
7. PressOK,andthenOKagaintoconfirm.
Now,whenyoureturntoProgrammode,thefoot
switchwillstepthroughtheProgramsonebyone.
Assigning the footswitch to Value Inc/Dec
ThisletsyouusetheAssignableFootSwitchto
duplicatethefunctionsofthefrontpanelInc or
Dec buttons.
Thisisaspecialcasesetting,butitmaybeconvenient
ifyouliketokeeptheBankorCategoryselect
windowsopenasyouplay,sothatyoucanseethelist
ofavailableProgramsorCombinations.Inthisspecific
case,theProgramUp/Downassignmentswillnot
work(sinceProgramchangesareignoredwhilethe
30
windowisopen).However,assigningtheFootSwitch
totheIncorDecbuttonletsyoustepthroughtheitems
inthelist,onebyonejustlikepressingthefront
panelbuttons.
Tosetthisup:
1. Followsteps14underAssigningthefootswitch
toProgramUp/Down,above.
2. Atthetopofthepage,settheFootSwitchAssign
parametertoValueInc(orValueDec).
Forthissettingtopersistafterpowerdown,youneed
towritetheGlobalsettings.
3. Openthemenu,andselecttheWriteGlobal
Settingcommand.
TheWriteGlobalSettingdialogwillappear.
4. PressOK,andthenOKagaintoconfirm.
Now,thefootswitchwillactjustlikepressingthe
frontpanelIncorDecbutton.
Note:Thefootswitchwillworklikethisfortheentire
KRONOSnotjustwhentheProgramorCombination
Selectwindowisopen.
Selecting Programs via MIDI
YoucanselectanyProgramfromanybankbyusing
MIDIProgramChangemessagesinconjunctionwith
MIDIBankSelectmessages.WhenyouselectPrograms
fromthefrontpanel,theappropriateMIDImessages
aresentautomatically(unlessMIDIfiltersareactive;
seebelow).
IfyouareenteringtheMIDImessagesmanuallyintoa
sequencer,notethattheBankSelectmessageneedsto
comebeforetheProgramSelectmessage.
In Program mode, use the Global MIDI Channel
WiththeexceptionoftheDrumTrack,alltransmission
andreceptionofMIDIdatainProgrammodeis
performedontheGlobalMIDIChannel.Youcanset
thisontheGlobalmodeP1MIDIpage.
Bank Map
BankSelectmessagescanworkinoneoftwoways,as
controlledbytheBankMapparameterontheGlobal
P0BasicSetuppage.Thefactorydefaultsettingwill
workformoststandardapplications,andmostpeople
willneverneedtochangeit.IfyouuseGeneralMIDI
sequences,thealternativeGM(2)settingmaybe
helpful.Formoreinformation,seeBankMapon
MIDI filters
YoucanuseMIDIfilterstocontrolwhetherornot
ProgramChangeandBankSelectmessageswillbe
transmittedand/orreceived.Thefiltersaresetupon
theGlobalmodeP1MIDIpage.Formoreinformation,
see11c:MIDIFilteronpage 775oftheParameter
Guide.
KRONOS Plug-In Editor
TheKRONOSPlugInEditorincludessupportfor
patchlists,allowingyoutoselectPrograms,
Combinations,Songs,andSetListsSlotsbynamefrom
withinyourDAWsoftwareofchoice.
General MIDI Programs
InternalbankGcontainsafullsetofGeneralMIDI2
Programs,aswellassubbanksg(1)g(9)(GM2
variationprograms),andbankg(d)(drums).
WhenyouselectProgramsusingtheBankorCategory
windows,youllnoticethataVariationbuttonappears
whenyouselectbankINTG.Eachtimeyoupressthis
button,orrepeatedlypressthefrontpanelINTG
button,youllstepthroughtheGeneralMIDIbanksin
thefollowingorder:Gg(1)g(2)g(8)g(9)G
Playing Programs Using Controllers
31
Using Controllers
TheKRONOSprovidesalotofhandsonwaysto
controlthesoundthemodandpitchbendjoystick,
theVectorjoystick,theribboncontroller,twoswitches
(SW1andSW2),andtheControlSurfaceknobs,
sliders,andswitches.
Thesecontrolsletyoumodifythetone,pitch,volume,
effects,etc.inrealtimewhileyouplay.
Joystick
Thejoystickmovesinfourdirections:left,right,
forwards(awayfromyourself),andbackwards
(towardsyourself).Eachofthefourdirectionscanbe
usedtocontroladifferentfunction,suchas
modulatingProgramoreffectsparameters.These
assignmentscanbedifferentforeveryProgram,but
generally,theydothefollowing:
StandardJoystickfunctions
Joystick Lock
Thejoystickisspringloaded,sothatitautomatically
returnstothecenterpositionwhenyouletgo.
However,youcanuseeitherofthetwofrontpanel
switches(SW1orSW2),orafootswitch,tolockthe
currentpositionofthejoystick.Thisleavesyourhands
freetoplayonthekeyboard,ortouseother
controllers.Formoreinformation,pleaseseeUsing
theLockfunctiononpage 32.
Vector Joystick
TheVectorJoystickletsyou
controlthevolumebalance
betweenOSC1andOSC2,and
canalsogenerateCC
messagestomodulate
Programandeffects
parameters.
InCombiandSequencemodes,theVectorJoystickcan
doallofthis,plusbalancethevolumesofthedifferent
ProgramsintheCombi.
TheVectorJoystickdoesallofthisinconjunctionwith
theVectorEnvelope,whichisaflexible,multisegment
envelopewithafewinterestingtwists.Formore
information,seeUsingVectorSynthesisonpage 55.
Resetting the Vector Joystick to the center
YoucanusethefrontpanelRESETCONTROLSbutton
toresettheVectorJoysticksoutputvaluetoitsdefault
centerposition.Todothis:
1. HolddowntheRESETCONTROLSbutton.
2. WhileholdingRESETCONTROLS,movethe
VectorJoystick.
3. ReleasetheRESETCONTROLSbutton.
Thejoysticksoutputvaluewillnowberesettothe
centerposition.
Ribbon Controller
Moveyourfingertotheleftandrightontheribbon
controllertoapplyaneffect.
Normally,thisisusedtocontrolpitch,volumeorfilter
etc.
YoucanusetheLockfunctionofSW1orSW2keysto
holdtheeffectevenafteryoureleaseyourfingerfrom
theribboncontroller.Formoredetails,seeUsingthe
Lockfunctiononpage 32.
SW1 and SW2
Thesearethetwoswitches
abovethejoystickand
ribbon.YoucanuseSW1
andSW2tocontrolprogramparametersviaAMS
(AlternateModulation),oreffectparametersviaDMod
(DynamicModulation).
Theycanalsotransposethekeyboardbyoctaves,turn
portamentoon/off,orlockthemodulationvaluesof
theribboncontroller,joystick,oraftertouch.
Eachswitchmayworkaseitherasatoggleora
momentaryswitch.InTogglemode,eachpress
alternatesbetweenonandoff;inMomentarymode,
theswitchonlychangesforaslongasyouholdit
down.
Move the
joystick
Controller
Name
Normally controls
Left JSX Pitch bend down
Right JS+X Pitch bend up
Forwards
(away from yourself )
JS+Y Vibrato
Backwards
(towards yourself )
JSY Filter LFO (wah)
32
settingsforwhattheswitcheswilldo,andwhether
eachswitchisonoroff(basedontheircurrentstates
whentheProgram,Combination,orSongissaved).
YoucanalsomakesettingsforSamplingmodeasa
whole.
InProgrammode,youcanchecktheassignmentsof
SW1andSW2onthePlaypageAssignmenttab.
Inallmodes,youcanedittheassignmentsforSW1/2
ontheSetUpControllerspage.
WhenusingSW1/2forAMSorDmod,thedefault
settingsareSW1Mod.:CC#80andSW2Mod.:CC#81.
Foranexample,seeUsingDmodtochangethe
feedbacklevelviaSW1onpage 209.Foracomplete
listofthepossibleassignments,seeSW1/2
Assignmentsonpage 1104oftheParameterGuide.
Note:Ifyouwishtokeepthesesettingsafterthepower
isturnedoff,youmustsavetheProgram,
Combination,orSong.SettingsforSamplingmode
cannotbesaved.
AnexampleofsettingsinaProgram
Using the Lock function
Locking the Joystick
1. Usingthefactorysounds,selectProgramINT
B044:RealSuitE.Piano,andplaythekeyboard.
2. Movethejoystickawayfromyourself(the+Y
direction).
Thevibratoeffectwilldeepen.
3. Whileholdingthejoystickawayfromyourself,
presstheSW2switch.
Whenyoupresstheswitch,itsLEDwilllightup,
andthemodulationeffectatthispointwillbe
maintained.
4. Releasethejoystick,andplaythekeyboard.
Themodulationwillstaythesameasitwaswhen
SW2waspressed.Movingthejoystickawayfrom
yourselfwillnotaffectthesound.
5. PresstheSW2keyonceagaintoreleasetheLock
function.
Locking the Ribbon Controller
1. SelectProgramINTB044:RealSuitE.Piano.
2. PresstheSW2key.
TheLEDonSW2willlightup.
3. Touchtheribboncontroller,andmoveyourfinger
leftandright.
Movementinthe+Xdirectionwillbrightenthetone,
andmovementintheXdirectionwilldarkenthe
tone.
4. Liftyourfingerupfromtheribboncontroller.
Thesoundwillremainasitwaswhenyoulast
touchedtheribbon.
5. PresstheSW2keyonceagaintoreleasetheLock
function.
6. PressthetablabeledCntrl/ViewEffect,togotothe
Controller/ViewEffectpage.
Intheupperrighthandportionofthescreen,notice
thatSW2isassignedtoJSY&RibbonLock,andisset
toToggle.ThismeansthatSW2isassignedtocontrol
theLockfunctionforboththejoysticksYaxisandthe
ribboncontroller.ManyProgramsandCombinations
usethisassignment.
Youcanalsolockboththeribbonandthejoystickat
thesametime:
1. Movethejoystickinthe+Ydirection
2. PresstheSW2keytoturnontheLockfunction.
3. Moveyourfingerontheribboncontroller.
4. Releasethejoystick,andliftyourfingerupfrom
theribbon.
Theeffectsofboththeribbonandthejoystickwillbe
maintaineduntilyoupressSW2againtoreleasethe
lock.
Lockcanalsobeappliedtoaftertouch,byassigning
SW1orSW2toAfterTouchLock.
FordetailsonthefunctionsthatyoucanassigntoSW1
andSW2,pleaseseetheSW1/2Assignments,on
Programs (HD-1 and EXi) P1: Basic/Vector
Combinations and Songs P1: EQ/Vector/Controller
Sampling mode P4: EQ/Controller
Playing Programs Using Controllers
33
Control Surface knobs, sliders, &
switches
TheControlSurfacehas8knobs,8slidersplusa
masterslider,and16switches.Youcanusethesefor
manydifferenttasks:
Controllingmixer
features,including
volume,pan,EQ,FX
sends,mute,andsolo
Modulatingand
editingsounds
ControllingKARMA
Controllingexternal
MIDIdevices
Youcanswitchthe
ControlSurfacebetween
itsdifferentfunctions
usingeithertheon
screentabsonthe
ControlSurfacepage
(theleftmosttabonP0
Play),orthefrontpanel
ControlAssignswitches.
Thetabsandthefront
panelswitchesmirror
oneanother;whenyou
changeoneofthem,theotherchangesaswell.
InProgrammode,youcanselectoneoffivedifferent
functions:
TIMBRE/TRACKletsyouadjustthevolume,pan,and
sendlevelsforOscillators1and2,alongwiththe
ProgramEQ(plussimilarcontrolsfortheDrumTrack,
withtheexceptionofpan).InCombiandSequence
modes,youcanalsousethistoselecttwodifferent
banksofTimbresorTracks,asshownbytheLEDsto
therightoftheswitch.
AUDIO(INPUTS)letsyouadjustthevolume,pan,
andsendlevelsfortheanalog,S/P DIF,andUSBaudio
inputs.InSequencemode,youcanalsousethisto
selecttwobanksofharddiskrecordingtracks,as
shownbytheLEDstotherightoftheswitch.
EXT(External)letsyousendMIDImessagesto
externalMIDIdevices.
RTKNOBS/KARMA(RTstandsforRealtime)lets
youmodulatesoundsandeffectswiththeknobs,and
controlKARMAwiththeslidersandswitches.For
moredetails,seeEditingsounds&effectswiththe
RealtimeKnobs,onpage 39.
TONEADJ/EQ(ToneAdjust/EQ)givesyouhandson
accesstosoundediting,usingthesliders,knobs,and
switches.Formoredetails,seeUsingToneAdjust,
onpage 41
Youcanfreelychangebackandforthbetweenthe
differentfunctions,withoutlosinganyofyouredits.
Resetting controls to their saved values
ThefrontpanelRESETCONTROLSbuttonletsyou
recallthestoredordefaultsettingsforanyslider,knob,
orswitchonthecontrolsurface.
Toresetasingleknob,slider,orswitch:
2. WhileholdingdownRESETCONTROLS,movea
sliderorknob,orpressoneofthecontrolsurface
buttons.
Theslider,knob,orswitchwillberesettothevalue
storedintheProgram(or,ifapplicable,thedefault
value).
3. Whenyouredone,releasetheRESET
CONTROLSbutton.
Toresetagroupofcontrolsatonce:
1. MakesurethattheControlSurfaceisshowingthe
parametersyouwanttoreset.
Asasafetyprecaution,youcanonlyresetthe
parameterscurrentlydisplayedontheControlSurface.
ThistakesintoaccountboththecurrentControlAssign
setting,andtheMIXERKNOBSbutton.
Forinstance,ifyouwanttoresetthevolumeandpan
forbothOscillators,makesurethatControlAssignis
settoTIMBRE/TRACK,andthatMIXERKNOBSisset
toINDIVIDUALPAN.
3. WhileholdingdownRESETCONTROLS,press
thecurrentControlAssignbuttonagain.
Allofthesliders,knobs,andswitchesintheControl
Assigngroupwillberesettothevaluesstoredinthe
Program.
Youcanalsoresetallofthefadersandswitchesinthe
KARMAmodule,byholdingRESETCONTROLSand
thenpressingtheKARMAMODULECONTROL
button.Similarly,toresetasingleKARMAScene,hold
RESETCONTROLSandpressanyoftheSCENE
buttons.
Finally,youcanalsousethistoclearallsolos,by
holdingRESETCONTROLSandthenpressingthe
SOLObutton.
Formoreinformation,seeRESETCONTROLSon
VALUE slider
WhenaprogramnumberisselectedinProgramP0:
Playpage,orwhenacombinationnumberisselected
inCombinationmodepageP0:Playpage,youcanuse
theVALUEslidertomodulateProgramandeffects
parameters.
Keyboard
Velocity
Velocityisameasureofhowhardyouplayanoteon
thekeyboard.Thiscanbeusedtomodulatemany
differentaspectsofthesound,suchasvolume,
brightness,orthecharacteroftheattack.
After Touch
Thekeyboardcanalsomeasurehowhardyoupress
downafteryouplayanotehencethetermafter
touch.Youcanusethistoshapenotesovertime,
controlling(forinstance)volumeorvibratoamount.
34
Note Number
Soundscanbeprogrammedtochangeincharacter
basedonthenotebeingplayed.Asyouplayhigheror
loweronthekeyboard,thenotenumbercanmodulate
thetimbresuchasbecomingbrighterasyouplay
higher.Envelopesmayalsobecomefasterorslower;
thevolumemaychange;andsoon.
Foot Pedals and Switches
Damper Pedal (Sustain)
Thedamperpedalisalsosometimescalledthesustain
pedal.Itactslikethesimilarlynamedpedalonan
acousticpiano;whenyouholddownthepedal,notes
willcontinuetosustainevenwhenyouliftyourhands
offofthekeyboard.
Damper Switch vs. Half-Damper
Youcanuseeitherastandardfootswitch(suchasthe
KorgPS1)oraspecialhalfdamperpedal(suchasthe
KorgDS1H)astheDamper.
Ifyouuseafootswitch,itwillworklikeanormal
synthesizersustainpedal:noteswillsustainforever,as
longasthepedalishelddown.
Ahalfdamperpedalisaspecialtypeofcontinuous
footpedal(normalfootpedalswontworkproperlyfor
thisapplication).Itoffersmoresubtlecontrolof
sustain,whichcanbeespeciallyusefulforpiano
sounds.
Theoffandfullonpositionsofthehalfdamperwork
justlikethefootswitch,butintermediatepositions
modulatethereleasetimetoincreasesustainwithout
makingitinfinite.
TheKRONOSwillautomaticallysensewhenahalf
damperisconnectedtotherearpanelDAMPERinput.
Forproperoperation,youwillalsoneedtocalibrate
thepedal,usingtheCalibrateHalfDampercommand
intheGlobalpagemenu.
Damper and MIDI
TheDamperPedalissentandreceivedasMIDICC
#64.InCombiandSequencemodes,youcanfilter
CC#64sothatitonlyaffectssomeofthesoundsinthe
CombiorSong.
Assignable Foot Switch
Thisletsyouuseasimplefootswitch,suchastheKorg
PS1,asanassignablecontroller.Thefootswitchcan
performawidevarietyoffunctions,suchas:
Anassignablesourceformodulatingsoundsand
effects
Portamentoon/off
Programselectupordown
Sequencerstart/stoporpunchin/out
TapTempo
KARMAon/off,Latchon/off,orSceneselect
DrumTrackon/off
ChordSW
Duplicationofmanyfrontpanelcontrols,including
themodulationjoystick,ribbon,valueslider,Real
TimeKnobs,SW1/2,thepads,KARMAsliders,or
KARMAswitches
TheswitchsfunctionissetinGlobalmode(onthe
ControllerstaboftheControllers/Scalespage),sothat
italwaysworksthesameregardlessofthecurrent
Program,Combi,orSong.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeSettingupthe
AssignableSwitchandPedalonpage 161.
Assignable Foot Pedal
Thisletsyouuseacontinuouscontrollerpedal,suchas
theKorgEXP2footcontrollerorKorgXVP10
EXP/VOLpedal,asanassignablecontroller.
LiketheAssignableFootSwitch,describedabove,the
FootPedalcanbeusedformanydifferentfunctions,
including:
MasterVolume
ChannelVolume,Pan,orExpression
Assignablesoundmodulation,asseveraldifferent
AMSorDmodsources
EffectsSendlevelcontrol
Duplicationofmanyfrontpanelcontrols,including
themodulationjoystick,ribbon,valueslider,Real
TimeKnobs,orKARMAsliders
Thepedalsfunctionissetglobally(ontheControllers
taboftheControllers/Scalespage),sothatitalways
worksthesameregardlessofthecurrentProgram,
Combi,orSong.Formoreinformation,pleasesee
SettinguptheAssignableSwitchandPedalon
page 161.
Playing Programs Using the Chord Pads
35
Using the Chord Pads
Overview
Programs,Combinations,andSongsallhaveaPads
pageontheninthtabofP1:
Programs:Basic/Vector>Pads
CombinationsandSongs:EQ/Vector/Controller>Pads
Youcanusethesepadsfor:
StoringandselectingchordsforChordmode
Selectingandtriggeringchords,especiallyforuse
withKARMA
Playingdrumsounds,especiallyinconjunction
withacompatibleUSBMIDIpaddevice
Thepadscanplayuptoeightnotechordsandthey
evenrememberthevelocitiesoftheindividualnotes
withinthechord.
Inadditiontoplayingsoundsdirectly,thepadsare
alsousedtoselectchordsforChordmode.Formore
information,seeUsingChordmodeonpage 36.
Toavoiddamagingthedisplay,usecarewhen
playingtheonscreenpads.Donotpressstrongly
onthedisplayorstrikeforcefully;instead,usea
lightandprecisetouch.Velocityiscontrolledby
position,andnotbyforce.
Playing the pads
Playing the pads from the screen
Youcanplaythepadsdirectlyfromthescreen.
Velocityiscontrolledbywhereyoutouchthepad;
lowerissofter,andhigherislouder.(Youcanalso
enableFixedVelocitymode;seeFixedVelocityon
page 36.)
Ifindividualnotesinthechordhavedifferentstored
velocities,thesearescaledbytheoverallvelocity.
Note:fromthescreen,onlyonepadcanbeplayedata
time.
Playing the pads from MIDI or the keyboard
PadscanbetriggeredbyincomingMIDInotesorCCs,
orfromthelocalkeyboard.Todoso:
1. GototheGlobalP2:Controllerspage.
2. UnderMIDICC#AssignVectorJoystick/Pads,
setPads18tothedesiredMIDInotes.
YoucanalsouseMIDICCs,ifyouprefer.WithCCs,
thevalueoftheCCisusedasthepadsvelocity.
Itsassimpleasthat;thepadswillnowrespondtothe
specifiednotesorCCsontheGlobalchannel.
Beaware,however,thatthiswillcompletelydedicate
thesenotestotriggeringthepads;theywillnolonger
triggersoundsnormally.Forthisreason,youmaywish
toassignnoteseitherbeloworabovethestandard
keyboardrange(forinstance,C1throughG1).
AllofthisalsoappliestonotesplayedontheGlobal
Channelfromthelocalkeyboard,withthesame
restriction:theassignednotesbecomededicatedto
playingthepads.
Formoreinformation,see21c:MIDICC#Assign
VectorJoystick/Padsonpage 782oftheParameter
Guide.
Playing the pads from Korg USB MIDI controllers
YoucanalsoplaythepadsusingKorgUSBMIDI
controllersequippedwithdrumpads,including:
nanoPADandnanoPAD2
microKONTROL
padKONTROL
KONTROL49
TouseanyoftheseKorgcontrollers,simplyconnect
thecontrollertooneoftheKRONOSstwoUSBA
ports.TheKRONOSwillautomaticallydeterminethe
MIDIassignmentsofthecontrollerspads18,and
mapthemdirectlytotheKRONOSpads.
Formoredetails,seeUSBMIDIcontrollerson
Enable Pad Play button
Thepadsplayeverytimeyoutouchwithintheir
boundaries.Ifyoureeditingthestorednotesand
velocitiesmanually,youmaywishtotemporarily
disablethisfeature.Todoso:
1. TouchthePadPlaybuttonatthetopofthedisplay,
toturnitoff.
Thebuttonslightwillgodark,toshowthatitis
disabled.
Onceyourefinishedediting,turnitonagain:
2. TouchthePadPlaybuttonagain,toturniton.
Thebuttonslightwillgoon,toshowthatitisenabled.
Note:EnablePadPlayappliesonlytotheonscreen
pads,anddoesnotaffectpadtriggeringfromMIDI,
thelocalkeyboard,orUSBMIDIdevices.
36
Assigning notes and chords to pads
Youcanassignsinglenotesandchordstothepadsin
threedifferentways.
Play the notes, and then press Chord Assign
1. Playasinglenote,orachordofupto8notes.
2. PresstheChordAssignbutton.
3. Pressthepadtowhichyoudliketoassignthe
notes.
Thatsit!Thenotesarenowassignedtothepad.
Press Chord Assign, and then play notes
Thismethodletsyoucreateachordoutofwidely
spacednotes,evenifyoucantplayallofthenotes
simultaneously.
2. Playasinglenote,orachordofupto8notes.
Youcanplayasinglenote,orasimplechord.
Ifyoulike,youcanalsoplayupto8notesasalegato
phrase.Aslongasyoutakecarethatthenotesoverlap
eachother,theentirephrasewillberecordedasa
singlechord.Youcantakeaslongasyouliketoplay
thephrase.
3. Pressthepadtowhichyoudliketoassignthe
notes.
Afterpressingthepad,youredone!
Editing notes and velocities
Onceassigned,youcanedittherecordednotesand
velocities.Ifyoulike,youcanalsoenternewnotesthis
way,bymanuallyenteringthemasparametervalues.
Formoreinformation,pleasesee19:Padson
Copying pads
Copyingonepadtoanotherisjustlikeassigningnotes
fromthekeyboard.
Aswithassigningnotestothekeyboard,youcan
eitherplaythepadsfirst,orpressChordAssignfirst.
Intheinterestofsavingspaceandtime,onlythefirst
methodisdescribedbelow.
Copying notes from one pad to another
Tocopythenoteassignmentsfromonepadtoanother:
1. Pressandreleasethepadwhosenotesyouwantto
copy.
3. Pressthepadtowhichyoudliketocopythe
notes.
Thenewpadwillnowplaythesamenotesasthe
originalpad.
Merging two or more pads together
Usingtheonscreenpads,onlyonepadcanbeplayed
atatime.WhenusingMIDI,thekeyboard,oraKorg
USBMIDIpadcontroller,however,multiplepadscan
beplayedatonce.Youcanusethistomergetogether
theassignmentsfromtwoormorepads,aslongasthe
totalnumberofnotesis8orfewer.Todoso:
1. Playandholdallofthepadsthatyoudliketo
merge,sothattheyreallsoundingatthesame
time,andthenreleasethem.
Allofthepadsmustbehelddownatthesametime.
3. Pressthepadtowhichyoudliketocopythe
notes.
Youcanevenuseoneofthepadsthatwasbeing
merged,ifyoulike.Afterpressingthedestinationpad,
youredone.
Fixed Velocity
Eachpadstoresavelocitylevelforeachofits8notes.
TheFixedVelocitybutton,onthedisplayabovethe
pads,controlswhetherornotthepadsrespondtothe
touchlocation.
WhenFixedVelocityison,thepadsalwaysusetheir
storedvelocitysettings,regardlessofwhereyoutouch
thepad.
WhenFixedVelocityisoff,touchingthetopofthepad
producesthepresetvelocities.Whenyouplaylower
onthepad,thepresetvelocitiesarescaleddown
accordingly,maintainingthebalancebetweenthenotes
inthechord.
Using Chord mode
Overview
Chordmodeletsyouchooseoneofthechords
assignedtothepads,andthenplayitfromthe
keyboard.Thechordistransposedaccordingtothe
notethatyouplay;theplayednotespecifiesthelowest
noteofthechord,andthehighernotesaretransposed
tomatch.AswhenplayingchordsfromthePads
themselves,eachnoteinthechordcanhaveadifferent
storedvelocity,scaledbytheplayednote.
Inadditiontousingtheonscreenparameters,youcan
turnChordmodeonandoffviaSW1/2ortheFoot
Switch,andchangechordssimplybypressingthe
pads.InCombinationandSequencermodes,youcan
makethesesettingsforeachTimbreorTrack,as
desired.Naturally,youcancontrolallofthisviaMIDI
aswell.
Chordmodecanduplicatethewaythatsimilar
featuresworkedonclassicanalogsynths(suchasthe
originalPolysix),butitcanalsousealloftheVoice
Assignoptionstocreatedifferenteffectssuchasmono
legatochordswithfingeredportamento,orpoly
chordsthatoverlaponeanother.
Finally,notethatyoudonthavetouseChordmodeto
playfullchords;youcanalsouseittocreatemore
subtleeffects,suchasstackedoctavesorfifths.Youcan
evenadjusttherelativelevelsoftheseadditional
pitchesviathestoredvelocitiesoftheindividualchord
notes.
Playing Programs Using Chord mode
37
Chord Switch
TheChordSwitch(abbreviatedChordSW)letsyou
turnChordmodeonandoffviaSW1/2ortheFoot
Switch.
Important:ProgramswillonlyrespondtotheChord
SWiftheirChordparameterhasbeensettoeither
BasicorAdvanced.IfitssettoOff,thentheswitch
willhavenoeffect.
Assigning SW1/2 to control Chord on/off
WithinanyindividualProgram,Combi,orSong,you
canseteitherSW1orSW2toturnChordmodeonand
off.Todoso:
1. IntheProgram,Combi,orSong,gototheSetUp
Controllerspage.
2. SelectChordSWastheassignmentforSW1or
SW2.
Assigning the Foot Switch to control Chord on/off
YoucanalsoassigntheFootSwitchtoturnChord
modeonandoff,sothatyoudontneedtomoveyour
handsfromthekeyboardwhileperforming.This
settingwillapplyglobally,regardlessofthecurrent
Program,Combi,orSong.Todoso:
1. GototheGlobalFootSwitchAssignpage.
2. SelectChordSWfortheAssignableFootSwitch.
Enabling Chord mode
Program mode
ToenableChordmodeforaProgram:
1. GototheProgramBasicpage
2. SettheChordparametertoBasicorAdvanced.
OnceyouveselectedeitherBasicorAdvanced,Chord
modeisenabledimmediately.Optionally,youcanthen
turnChordmodeoffandonviatheChordSW,using
eitherSW1/2ortheAssignableFootSwitch.
IfyousetChordtoOff,thenitwillalwaysremainoff,
regardlessoftheChordSW.Thisisparticularlyuseful
inCombiandSequencermodes,sinceitallowsyouto
createsplitsandlayersinwhichsomeTimbres/Tracks
useChordmode,butothersdonot.
Combination and Sequencer modes
ToenableChordmodeforaTimbreinaCombi,ora
trackinaSong:
1. Gotopage22OSC(underTimbreParametersor
TrackParameters,respectively).
2. SettheTimbre/TracksChordparametertoBasic
orAdvanced.
Alternatively,youcansettheTimbre/TracktoPRG.
Thisisthedefault,whichusesthesettingfromthe
Program.NotethatiftheProgramsChordmodeisset
toOff,theTimbre/TrackwillnotrespondtotheChord
Switch.
What if Timbres/Tracks share the same channel,
but have different Chord settings?
IfTimbres/Trackssharethesamechannel,buthave
differentChordsettings,thentheChordSWaffects
eachTimbre/Trackindividually,asbelow:
Example setup: keyboard split
Tocreateasplitwithasinglenotebassinthelefthand,
andachordontheright:
1. SelectabassProgramforTimbre1,andapiano
ProgramforTimbre2.
2. SetTimbre1sChordtoOff,andTimbre2sChord
toBasic.
Now,theChordSWwillenable/disablethechordfor
therighthandonly.
Details: initial state of Chord on/off
Normally,whenyouselectaProgram,Combi,orSong,
ChordmodewillbeonoroffassetbytheChord
parameter.
TheexceptioniswhenSW1orSW2isassignedtothe
ChordSwitch.Inthiscase,thestoredon/offstateof
SW1/2controlswhetherChordmodewillbeonoroff
bydefault.
Notethatthisdefaultstateisslightlymorecomplexin
CombinationandSequencermodes:
InCombinationmode,SW1/2affectonlyTimbres
ontheGlobalchannel.Othertrackswillbeassetby
theirChordparameters.
InSequencermode,SW1/2affectonlytheTrackson
thesamechannelasthecurrentKeyboardTrack.
ThisdeterminestheinitialstatewhenaSongisfirst
selected,sincethecurrentKeyboardTrackisstored
withtheSong.Othertrackswillbeassetbytheir
Chordparameters.
Basic and Advanced modes
TherearetwoonsettingsforChordmode:Basic
(Bsc)andAdvanced(Adv).
BasicrecreatesthechordmodeoftheoriginalPolysix.
Eachtimeyouplayanewchord,itwillcutoffthe
previouschord.ThisoptionignorestheVoiceAssign
settings.
AdvancedusestheProgramsVoiceAssignparameters
tocreateavarietyofdifferenteffects,suchasmono
legatochordswithfingeredportamento,orpoly
chordsthatoverlaponeanother.TheVoiceAssign
settingsapplyasiftheentirechordwasasinglenote,
witheachpitchinthechordcreatedbyanadditional
transposedoscillator.
Poly,PolyLegato,SingleTrigger,Mono,Mono
Legato,MonoMode,LegatoOffset,MonoPriority,
andMonoandPolyUnisonallapply.
Stored Setting
Off Basic Advanced
Chord SW = On Off Basic Advanced
Chord SW = Off Off Off Off
38
YoucanachievethesameeffectasBasic,above,by
settingChordtoAdvanced,VoiceAssigntoMono,
PrioritytoLastNote,andLegatotoOff.
Creating and editing chords
Chordsareassignedtothepads,stored,andeditedas
describedunderUsingtheChordPadsonpage 35.
Selecting chords
TheChordfunctionusesthechordsassignedtothe
Pads.Toselectachordtoplayfromthekeyboard(or
viaMIDI):
1. SelectthedesiredpadfromtheSourcepopup
menu
or:
WhenChordisenabled,pressapad.
WhenChordmodeisenabled,pressingapadeditsthe
Sourceparameter.Thepadwillnotplayanysounds
byitself;itonlyselectsthechordtobeplayedfromthe
keyboard.
ChordmodeisenabledwhentheChordSWiseither
unassignedorturnedOn,and...
InProgrammode,ChordissettoBasicor
Advanced
InCombimode,ChordissettoBasicorAdvanced
onanyTimbre(withStatussettoINT)onthe
Globalchannel
InSequencermode,ChordissettoBasicor
AdvancedonanyTrack(withStatussettoINTor
BTH)onthesameMIDIchannelasthecurrent
KeyboardTrack
InCombimode,selectionviathePadsaffectsall
TimbresontheGlobalChannel.InSequencermode,
thisaffectsTracksonthesameMIDIchannelasthe
currentKeyboardTrack.
What if Timbres/Tracks share the same channel,
but have different Source settings?
IfTimbres/Trackssharethesamechannelbuthave
differentSourcesettings,theywillmaintainthe
differentsettingsaslongasthePadsarenotusedto
selectadifferentchord.AssoonasaPadisused,allthe
Timbres/Trackswillbesettothesamechordunless
theyaresettoPRG.
WhenSourceissettoPRG,theTimbre/Trackusesthe
SourcechordstoredintheProgram,insteadofanyof
thechordsfromthecurrentCombiorSong.This
makesiteasytouseChordmodeforsoundspecific
effects,suchasoctaves,stackedfifths,andsoon.
Playing chords
Thelowestnoteoftheselectedchordistransposedto
matchthenoteplayedonthekeyboard.Highernotes
aretransposedaccordingly.Forinstance,letssaythat:
ThestoredchordisF4,Bb4,andEb5
YouplayaD3onthekeyboard(orviaMIDI)
Inthiscase,theresultingchordwillbeD3,G3,andC4.
JustaswiththePads,thestoredvelocitiesarescaledby
thevelocityoftheplayednote.
InCombiandSequencermodes,aslongastheroot
noteofthechordiswithintheTimbre/Trackkeyboard
zone,theentirechordwillbeplayedinthat
Timbre/Trackevenifsomeofthenotesextendbeyond
theTimbre/Trackskeyzone.
Chords and MIDI
TheChordSWandSourcePadsettings(including
selectionsviathePads)aretransmittedandreceived
viaSysEx,whichcanberecordedandplayedbackvia
internalorexternalsequencers.
InCombiandSequencermodes,therearediscrete
SysExmessagesperTimbre/TrackforbothChordSW
andSourcePad,sothateachTimbre/Trackcanbeset
individuallyifdesired.Notethatthisallowsmore
flexibilitythanwhenusingthelocalkeyboardsChord
SWandPads.
WhentheChordSWorthefrontpanelPadsareused
tochangethechordstate,separatemessagesaresent
foreachaffectedTimbreorTrack,including:
InCombimode,eachTimbreontheGlobal
Channel
InSequencermode,eachTrackonthesameMIDI
channelastheKeyboardTrack
Easy Program Editing Quick edits using the knobs, sliders, and switches
39
Easy Program Editing
Quick edits using the knobs, sliders, and switches
YoucaneditanyoftheProgramsshippedwith
KRONOS,oryoucanstartwithaninitializedProgram
tocreatesoundsfromscratch.
Youcandomanybasiceditsdirectlyfromthefront
panelControlSurfaceknobs,switches,andsliders,
withouteverdelvingdeeperintotheLCDinterface.
Forinstance,youcanusetheknobstochangeattack
andreleasetimes,makesoundsbrighterordarker,
altereffectsdepths,modulateKARMAsphrase
generation,andsoon.
Theknobs,sliders,andswitches
willdodifferentthings,depending
oftheControlSurfaceCONTROL
ASSIGNsetting.Forediting
Programs,thethreeimportant
CONTROLASSIGNsettingsare
TIMBRE/TRACK,RT
KNOBS/KARMA,andTONE
ADJ/EQ.
TIMBRE/TRACKletsyouadjust
thevolume,pan,andsendlevels
forOscillators1and2andthe
DrumTrack,alongwiththe
ProgramEQ.
RTKNOBS/KARMAletsyou
modulatesoundsandeffectswiththeknobs,and
controlKARMAwiththeslidersandswitches.
TONEADJ/EQ(ToneAdjust)givesyouhandson
accesstomoredetailedsoundediting,usingthe
sliders,knobs,andswitches.
Note:EQisonlyavailableinSetListmode.Formore
information,seeGraphicEQonpage 119.
Adjusting volume, Pan, EQ, and FX sends
InTIMBRE/TRACKmode,theControlSurfaceputs
allofthebasicmixingcontrolsunderyourfingertips.
1. PresstheTIMBRE/TRACKbuttonunder
CONTROLASSIGN.
2. Optionally,gototheControlSurfacetabofthe
Playpage.
ThispagemirrorstheControlSurface.Often,itwill
showyoualittlemoreinformationabouttheknob
assignments,exactvalues,andsoon.
3. PresstheMIXERKNOBSbutton
untiltheINDIVIDUALPANLED
lightsup.
Thismakesknobs1&2controlpanfor
OSC1andOSC2,respectively.
4. Usesliders13toadjustthe
volumesofOSC1,OSC2,andtheDrumTrack.
5. Useknobs1&2toadjustthepanpositionsof
OSC1andOSC2.
TheDrumTrackspaniscontrolledseparately,inthe
DrumKititself.
untiltheCHANNELSTRIPLED
lightsup.
Thismakestheknobscontrolavirtual
channelstrip,includingpan,EQ,and
effectssends.
7. Useknobs26toadjustthePrograms3bandEQ.
TheEQaffectsbothOSC1andOSC2.Noticethatthe
displayshowsyouthegainvaluesindB,andtheMid
FrequencyinHz.Alsonotethatknob2,EQTrim,lets
youcompensateforgainchangescausedbytheEQ.
8. PressSELECTbutton1.
ThisselectsOSC1.WhentheknobsareinCHANNEL
STRIPmode,theselectedOscillatorisimportant.
WhileEQalwaysappliestobothOscillators,thePan
andEffectsSend1/2knobsaffectonlytheselected
Oscillator.
NoticethatPanisavailable,indifferentways,with
bothsettingsoftheMIXERKNOBSbutton.
9. Useknobs7and8toadjustEffectsSends1and2
forOSC1.
Internally,thesystemfiguresouthowtheOscillatoris
routedtotheMasterEffects,andautomaticallyadjusts
theappropriatesendparameters.
Editing sounds & effects with the
Realtime Knobs
TheRealtimeKnobsareatraditionalfeatureofKorg
workstations,combiningmodulation,quickedits,and
handsoncontrol.
InRTKNOBS/KARMAmode,knobs14have
dedicatedfunctions,asprintedonthefrontpanel:
FilterCutoff,FilterResonance,FilterEGIntensity,and
ReleaseTime.Allofthesecorrespondtostandard
MIDICCs.
Knobs58canbeassignedtoawidevarietyof
functions,manyofwhichalsohavecorresponding
MIDICCs.Often(butnotalways),knobs5and6
modulatesynthesisparameters,knob7controlsthe
depthofachorusorothermodulationeffect,andknob
8controlsreverbdepth.
40
RealTimeKnobfunctions
Whenyoumoveaknob,itsendsoutthecorresponding
MIDICC.Also,whentheCCisreceivedviaMIDIor
generatedbyKARMA,theknobvaluechangesto
matchtheCCvalue.
Generally,theknobsscaletheProgramsinternal
settings.Whentheknobisinthecenter,thesettingsare
asprogrammed.Tomovethesettingstotheir
maximumvalue,turntheknoballthewaytotheright;
tomovethemtotheirminimumvalue,turntheknob
allthewaytotheleft.
Knobscaling
Forexample:
1. SelectProgramINTB017,SmoothOperators.
Thisisanelectricpianosound;letsseewhatwecando
tomakeitsoundabitdifferent.
2. PresstheRTKNOBS/KARMAbuttonunder
CONTROLASSIGN.
TheTONEADJUSTLEDwilllightup.
3. Whileplayingthesound,turnknob1(Filter
Frequency)totheright,slowly,toabout3oclock.
Noticehowthepianobecomesasortofsynthsweep.
4. Next,turnknob2(FilterResonance)totheright,
alsotoabout3oclock.
5. Withknob2inthatposition,trymovingknob1
backandforthasyouplay.
Withtheresonanceincreased,itnowsoundslike
youreplayingthroughawahpedal.
Next,letssaythatyoudecidethatsnotreallywhat
youwantedso,wellsettheknobsbacktotheir
defaultvalues.Youcouldmovethembacktothe
straightup,12oclockposition,andthenadjustthem
sothattheyreexactlyinthemiddle,buttheresan
easierway
6. HoldtheRESETCONTROLSbutton.
7. WhileholdingRESETCONTROLS,
movefirstknob1,andthenknob2.
Asyoumovetheknobs,theirvalueswill
beresettothedefault,centerpositions.
8. ReleasetheRESETCONTROLS
button.
Now,yourebacktotheoriginalelectricpianosound.
Knob edits can be saved
TheRealTimeKnobsaregreatformodulatingsounds
inperformance,orforrecording.Ifyoulike,youcan
alsosavetheeditedversionofthesound,usingthe
normalWriteProgramcommand(seeSavingyour
editsonpage 42).
Internally,asingleknobusuallyaffectsseveral
differentparameters.WhenyouwriteaProgram,the
editsaresavedintotheindividualparameters,andnot
totheknobitself.AfterwritingtheProgram,youll
noticethattheknobshavereturnedtotheircenter
positionssincetheoldeditedvaluesarenowthe
newsavedvalues.
Assigning functions to REALTIME KNOBS 58
WhentheControlSurfaceCONTROLASSIGNisset
toRTKNOBS/KARMA,thefourknobsontheright
functionasRealtimeKnobs58(User14).Thesecan
performanumberofdifferentfunctions,suchas
modulatingsoundsoreffects,adjustingeffectssend
levels,andsoon.
settingsforwhattheknobswilldo.Youcanalsomake
settingsforSamplingmodeasawhole.
WhenusingtheknobsforAMSorDmod,its
importanttounderstandthatassignmentisatwostep
process.First,youassigntheknobtosendaMIDI
controller,suchasKnobMod.1(CC#17).Second,you
assignthatMIDIcontrollertomodulateoneormore
Programoreffectsparameters.
Forthefirstpartoftheabove,usethemodesSetUp
Controllerspage.Formoreinformation,SeeSW1and
SW2onpage 31.
Thedefaultassignmentsforknobs58areKnobMod.1
(CC#17),KnobMod.2(CC#19),KnobMod.3(CC#20),
andKnobMod.4(CC#21),respectively.Foracomplete
listofthepossibleassignments,seeRealtimeKnobs
58Assignmentsonpage 1105oftheParameter
Guide.
Heresanexampleofhowtosetupknob5(User1)to
controlaProgramsfilterandampEGattacktime:
1. PressthePROGswitchtoenterProgrammode.
2. PresstheBasic/Vectortab,andthenthe
Controllerstababoveit,togototheP1:
Basic/VectorSetUpControllerspage.
3. PresstheModulationKnobAssignKnob5
popupbutton,andchooseF/AAttack.
4. PressthefrontpanelRTKNOBS/KARMAbutton
(underCONTROLASSIGN).
5. Turnknob5(USER1)tocontrolthefilterandamp
EGattack.
Knob MIDI CC Normally controls
1 74 Filter Cutoff Frequency
2 71 Filter Resonance
3 79 Filter EG Intensity
4 72 EG Release Time
5-6 Varies for each Program
7 Often Chorus Depth - but can vary per Program
8 Often Reverb Depth - but can vary per Program
99
00
CC Value
Parameter
Value
As Programmed
64 0 127
Easy Program Editing Quick edits using the knobs, sliders, and switches
41
Note:Ifyouwishtokeepthesesettingsafterthepower
isturnedoff,youmustsavetheProgram,
Combination,orSong.Notethatthesettingsfor
Samplingmodecannotbesaved.
Using Tone Adjust
ToneAdjustletsyouuseallofthesliders,knobs,and
switchesontheControlSurfacetoeditProgram
parameters,liketheknobsonananalogsynth.Each
physicalcontrolcanbeassignedtoanyoneofa
numberofProgramparameters.
ThespecificparametersavailablethroughToneAdjust
willvarydependingonthetypeofProgram.HD1
Programssupportacertainsetofparameters;eachEXi
alsohasitsownsetofparameters.Formore
information,see:
CommonToneAdjustParametersonpage 32ofthe
ParameterGuide.
HD1ToneAdjustParametersonpage 33ofthe
ParameterGuide.
AL1:ToneAdjustonpage 222oftheParameter
Guide.
CX3:ToneAdjustonpage 244oftheParameter
Guide.
STR1:ToneAdjustonpage 292oftheParameter
Guide.
MS20EX:ToneAdjustonpage 319oftheParameter
Guide.
PolysixEX:ToneAdjustonpage 335oftheParameter
Guide.
MOD7:ToneAdjustonpage 385oftheParameter
Guide.
SGX1:Toneadjustonpage 393oftheParameter
Guide.
EP1:ToneAdjustonpage 413oftheParameter
Guide.
Editing HD-1 sounds
1. SelectProgramINTC115,SmoothOperators.
2. PresstheTONEADJ/EQbuttonunderCONTROL
ASSIGN.
3. GototheControlSurfacetabofthePlaypage.
ThispagemirrorstheControlSurface.Itsveryuseful
withToneAdjust,sinceitshowsyoutheparameter
4. Lookattheassignmentsforsliders5,6,and8.
Slider5isassignedtoAmpEGAttack;slider6is
assignedtoAmpEGDecay;andslider8isassignedto
AmpEGRelease.
5. Raiseeachofthethreesliderssothattheyare
about4/5ofthewaytothetop.
TheLCDshouldshowtheirvaluesasbetween+60and
+70.Inotherwords,youvejusteditedtheamp
envelopesothattheattack,decay,andreleaseareall
muchlongerthantheywerebefore.
6. Playafewnotes.
Noticethatthesoundhaschangedfromanelectric
pianointoasoftpad.Next,letsaddjustabitofpitch
modulation,tomakethesoundmorerich.
7. Lookattheassignmentsforknobs2and5.
Knob2isassignedtoPitchLFO1Intensityinother
words,theamountofpitchmodulationfromLFO1.
Knob5isassignedtoLFO1Speed.
8. Turnknob2eversoslightlytotheright,sothat
theLCDreads+01or+02.
9. Turnknob5totheright,untilabout2oclock,so
thattheLCDreadsabout40.
10.Playafewmorenotes.
Thepitchmodulationhasaddedsomeshimmertothe
sound.Now,maybeitcoulduseabitmoreedge
11.LookattheassignmentsforSELECTswitches1
and2.
TheseareprogrammedtoraisetheFilterFrequency
andFilterResonance,respectively.Switchesarejust
on/off,butyoucansetaspecificvaluefortheOn
position;noticethe+10and+40intheswitchsvalue
boxes.
12.Pressthetwoswitches,onebyone.
Thesoundnowhasamoreinterestingcharacter,due
tothefilters.Sinceitsbrighter,wevealsorestored
someoftheelectricpianocharacter.
Prettyeasy,huh?Notedependingontheparameter,
youmaysometimeshearglitchesinthesoundasyou
movethecontrol.
Changing parameter assignments
ThefactoryProgramsincludedefaultassignmentsof
ToneAdjustparameterstotheknobs,sliders,and
switches.Ifyoulike,youcanchangeanyofthe
assignments.Todoso:
Onthispage,youcanseetheparameterassignments
foreachcontroller,suchasFilterEGAttack,Pitch
Stretch,andsoon.
2. Pressthepopupbuttonnexttooneofthe
parameterassignments.
Apopupwindowwillappear,withalonglistof
parameters.Youcantellvariousthingsaboutthe
selections,justfromthewaytheyappearinthelist:
ParameterswhichaffectonlyOSC1orOSC2are
prefixedwith[OSC1]and[OSC2],respectively.
ParameterswhichaffectbothOscillators,butwhich
arespecifictoHD1Programs,areprefixedwith
[OSC1&2].
Theothergroupofparameters,atthebeginningof
thelist,areCommon.Thatis,youcanusethem
withmostEXiPrograms,aswellasHD1
Programs.
ParameterscanonlybeassignedtooneTone
Adjustcontrolatatime.Ifaparameterisalready
assigned,itsgrayedout.
3. Selectaparameterfromthelist.
Theparameterisnowassignedtothecontrol.Tocancel
outofthelistwithoutmakingachange,justtouchon
thescreenoutsideofthepopupwindow.
42
Editing EXi sounds
ThePolysixEXworksparticularlywellwithTone
Adjust,soletstakealookatitnow.
1. SelectProgramUSERE004PhunkyPowerBass.
ThisusesthePolysixEX.
2. UnderCONTROLASSIGN,presstheTONE
ADJ./EQbutton.
3. Playthekeyboardwhilemovingsliders14and
knobs12.
Noticeastheknobgraphicsonthedisplaymoveas
well.Sliders14controltheenvelopeshape;knobs12
controlthefiltercutoffandresonance.
4. Onthedisplay,presstheControlSurfacetab.
Thispageshowstheassignmentsandvaluesforallof
thesliders,knobs,andswitches.
5. PresstheMaintabtoreturntothemainPlaypage.
6. TouchthePolysixEXgraphicaroundtheCutoff
andResonanceknobs.
ThedisplayjumpstothePolysixEXMainpage.
7. ExperimentwithplayingwhileusingtheControl
Surfacesliders,knobs,andswitches.
Noticehowthegraphicsrespond,aswell.Youcanalso
selectagraphiccontrolonthescreenandedititsvalue
usinganyofthedataentrycontrols.
Using COMPARE
Whenyoureintheprocessofeditingasound,
pressingtheCOMPAREbuttonwillrecallthesaved
versionofthesound,asitwasbeforeyoustarted
editing.Toindicatethatyouarelisteningtothesaved
version,thebuttonsLEDwilllightup.
PressingCOMPAREagainreturnsyoutotheversion
youareediting,andtheLEDwillgooutagain.
IfyoueditwhiletheCOMPARELEDislit,thekeywill
againgodarkandyourpreviouseditswillbelost.
Resetting individual controls
TheRESETCONTROLSbuttonletsyourevertan
individualknob,slider,orswitchtoitssavedsetting.
Formoreinformation,seeResettingcontrolstotheir
savedvaluesonpage 33.
Saving your edits
Onceyouvetweakedthesoundtoperfection,youll
wanttosaveyourwork.Tosaveyouredits:
1. SelecttheWriteProgramcommandfromthepage
menu,attheupperrighthandcornerofthescreen.
Youcanalsocallupthismenucommandbyholding
ENTERandpressing0onthenumerickeypad.
Thisbringsupadialogboxwhichallowsyoutosave
theProgram.Optionally,youcanalsoselectanew
location,changetheProgramsname,andassignittoa
soundcategory(suchaskeyboard,guitar,etc.).
2. PresstheTbuttontobringupthetextedit
dialog.
YoucangivetheProgramadescriptivenameusingthe
onscreenkeyboard.
3. Afterenteringthename,pressOK.
Thetexteditwindowwilldisappear,returningyouto
themainWritedialog.
4. UnderToatthebottomofthedialog,pressthe
popupbuttonnexttoProgramtobringupthesave
locationdialog.
5. SelectalocationtosavetheeditedProgram.
YoucanwritetoanylocationinbanksINTAF,
USERAG,andUSERAAGG.Toavoid
overwritingthefactorysounds,itssafertouseaslotin
oneoftheemptyUserbanks.
Important:HD1Programscanonlybewrittento
HD1Banks,andEXiProgramscanonlybewritten
toEXiBanks.Formoreinformationonthedefault
Banktypes,andonhowtochangethem,pleasesee
ProgramBankContentsonpage 27,and
ChangingtheBankTypeforUSERbankson
page 27.
6. Afterselectingthelocation,pressOK.
7. PressOKagaintostartthewriteprocess.
8. Ifyouresureyouwanttowritetothislocation,
pressOKagain.
Afterthat,youredone!
Formoreinformation,seeWritingProgramsand
Combinationsonpage 182.
Donotturnoffthepowerforatleast10seconds
afterwritingtheProgram.Thisallowsthesystem
timetocompletetheprocess,whichincludessaving
abackupofthedatatotheinternaldisk.
Saving edits to GM Programs
YoucaneditGMPrograms,butyoumustthensave
themtoaBankotherthanINTG;theGMPrograms
themselvescannotbeoverwritten.
Shortcut: SEQUENCER REC/WRITE
YoucanalsousetheSEQUENCERREC/WRITEbutton
toquicklyupdatethecurrentProgram,usingthe
existingname,bank,number,andcategory.Todoso:
1. PresstheSEQUENCERREC/WRITEbutton.
TheUpdateProgramdialogwillappear.
2. PressOKtowritetheprogram.
Saving to disk
YoucanalsosaveandmanageProgramsonthe
internalharddrive,andonUSBstoragedevices.For
moreinformation,seeSavingtodisks,CDs,andUSB
mediaonpage 186.
Detailed Program Editing Editing HD-1 Programs
43
Detailed Program Editing
Editing HD-1 Programs
Creating your own Programs
YoucancreateyourownoriginalHD1soundsby
editingthefactoryPrograms,orbyinitializinga
Programandstartingfromscratch.Youcansavethese
ProgramsintoanybankotherthanINTA(whichis
reservedforEXiPrograms)andINTG(which
containsGeneralMIDIPrograms).
YoucanalsocreateProgramsusingyourown
Multisamples,eitherfromSamplingModeorUser
SampleBanks.Inaddition,youcanplayaProgram
andresampleyourperformance,orsampleanexternal
audiosourcewhilelisteningtothesoundofa
Program.
Overview of editing pages
P0:Playiswhereyouselectandplayprograms,make
quickeditsusingtheControlSurface,andadjustthe
KARMAsettings.Theotherpagesletyoumodifythe
soundinmoredetailedways.
Fordetailsonhowtoselectthedifferentpages,see
Basicoperationsonpage 17.
YoucansamplefromwithinProgrammode
includingresamplingtheProgramitself.Formore
information,seeSamplinginProgramand
Combinationmodesonpage 148.
Youcanalsomixinliveaudioinputs,andprocess
themthrougheffects.Formoreinformation,see
Usingeffectswiththeaudioinputsonpage 207.
NotethatthepageandparameterstructuresofEXi
ProgramsaredifferentthanthoseofHD1Programs.
Basic HD-1 Structure
Multisamples and Wave Sequences
ThesoundoftheHD1startswithoneormore
Multisamples.Thesecanberecordingsofinstruments
likepiano,bass,guitar,strings,organs,analogsynths,
andsoon,orpurelydigitallycreatedtimbres.
YoucanplaytheseMultisamplesdirectly,orusethem
throughWaveSequences,whichplayaseriesof
differentMultisamplesovertimetocreaterhythmsor
complex,evolvingtimbres.
Oscillator Mode
HD1SingleProgramshaveoneoscillator,andDouble
Programshavetwooscillators.Eachoscillatorincludes
acompletesynthesisvoice,withvelocityswitched
Multisamples,dualfilters,EGs,LFOs,andsoon.
SingleandDoubleDrummodesaresimilar,butuse
DrumKits(ascreatedinGlobalmode)insteadof
Multisamples.
SingleandSingleDrumProgramsuseoneoscillator,
foramaximumof140notepolyphony.
DoubleandDoubleDrumProgramsusetwo
oscillators,foramaximumof70notepolyphony.
A note about polyphony
Polyphonymeansthenumberofnotesthatyoucan
playatatime.Thisnumberwillvarydependingonthe
particularsoundbeingplayed,andhowthatsoundis
produced.Generallyspeaking:
DoubleProgramsusetwiceasmanyvoicesas
SinglePrograms.
WaveSequencesusetwiceasmanyvoicesas
Multisamples.
StereoMultisamplesusetwiceasmanyvoicesas
MonoMultisamples,andStereoWaveSequences
usetwiceasmanyvoicesasMonoWaveSequences.
IftheVectorEGisenabled,thenumberofvoices
usedincreasesslightly.
Page Main features
P0: Play
Select and play Programs
Perform easy edits using the Realtime Knobs,
KARMA sliders, and Tone Adjust
Adjust mix parameters including volume, pan,
EQ, and send levels
Quick sampling and re-sampling
P1:Basic/
Vector
Set the Program to Single, Double, Single
Drum, or Double Drum
Select Mono or Poly voice allocation
Select a scale (e.g., Equal Temperament)
Set up controllers
Set up Vector synthesis
Set up the Drum Track
On-screen pads
P2: Osc/Pitch
Select Multisamples, Wave Sequences. or
Drum Kits
Settings related to the pitch, including the
pitch EG.
P3: Filter
Settings related to the filter (tone), including
the filter EG.
P4: Amp/EQ
Settings related to the amplifier (volume),
including amp EG and pan.
Settings for the 3-band EQ
P5: Common
LFO
For each of the two LFOs provided for each
oscillator, select the LFO type and speed, etc.
(Settings in the pitch, filter, and amp pages
determine how much the LFOs affect the
sound.)
P6: AMS
Mixer/
Common Key
Track
Mix and modify AMS sources using the two
AMS mixers provided for each oscillator.
Set up how the Common Key Track output
changes as you play up and down the
keyboard
P7: KARMA Settings related to KARMA.
P8: Insert
Effects
Select insert effects and make settings for
them. Specify send levels to the Master effects
and routing to the outputs.
P9: Master/
Total Effects
Select Master send effects and Total effects,
and adjust their settings.
Page Main features
44
Voice Assign Mode
TheVoiceAssignModeselectswhethertheProgram
willplaypolyphonically(Poly)ormonophonically
(Mono).
WhenthisissettoPoly,youcanplaybothchordsand
melodylines.WhenthisissettoMono,onlyonenote
willsoundevenifyouplayachord.
NormallyyoullsetthistoPoly,butMonoisuseful
whenplayingsoundssuchassynthbasses,synth
leads,andothersoloinstruments.Tryswitching
betweenPolyandMono,andlistentotheresults.
Using Drum Kits
YoucancreateandeditDrumKitsinGlobalmode.For
eachnoteonthekeyboard,youcanselectuptoeight
velocitycrossfadeddrumsamples,makefilterand
ampsettings,andspecifyroutingtotheeffectsandto
theindividualaudiooutputs.
Formoreinformation,seeUsingDrumKitson
page 176.
InPrograms,onceyouvesettheOscillatorModeto
SingleorDoubleDrums,youcanselectbetweenthe
152userprogrammableDrumKits,plusanadditional
9GM2kits.Formoreinformationonthefactory
sounds,seetheVoiceNameList.
Copying settings between OSC1 & OSC2
ManyoftheProgramparameterscanbesetdifferently
forOSC1andOSC2.Theseincludeallofthe
parameterson:
AllofthetabsontheOSC/Pitchpage,exceptforthe
PitchEG
AllofthetabsontheFilterpage
AllofthetabsontheAmppage,exceptforEQ
AllofthetabsontheLFOpage,exceptfor
CommonLFO
TheAMSMixertabs
YoucanusethepagemenusCopyOscillator
commandtocopytheseparametersfromone
Oscillatortoanother.Youcanevencopyparameters
fromanOscillatorinadifferentProgram.
Thiscommandisusefulwhenyouwanttosetboth
Oscillatorstothesamesettings,orwhenyouwantto
duplicatesettingsyouveusedbefore.
Working with Multisamples
Asdescribedabove,thesoundoftheHD1startswith
oneormoreMultisamples.Youcanplaythese
Multisamplesdirectly,orusethemthroughWave
Sequences,whichplayaseriesofdifferent
Multisamplesovertimetocreaterhythmsorcomplex,
evolvingtimbres.
InSingleandDoublemodes,eachOscillatorcanplay
uptoeightMultisamplesorWaveSequences.InSingle
andDoubleDrumsmodes,eachOscillatorplaysa
DrumKit.
Multisamples, Wave Sequences, and Drum Kits
Multisamples,DrumKits,andWaveSequencesallow
youtoplaysamplesindifferentways.
Multisampleslayoutoneormoresamplesacross
thekeyboard.Forinstance,averysimpleguitar
Multisamplemighthavesixsamplesoneforeach
string.
WaveSequencesplaybackaseriesofdifferent
Multisamplesovertime.TheseMultisamplesmay
crossfadetocreatesmooth,evolvingtimbres,or
changeabruptlytocreaterhythms.
Asthenamesuggests,DrumKitsareoptimizedfor
playingdrumsamples.
Velocity splits, crossfades, and layers
Asmentionedabove,unlessyoureinSingleorDouble
Drummode,eachOscillatorhaseightvelocityzones,
namedMS1(thehighestvelocity)throughMS8(the
lowest).ThismeansthattheProgramcanplay
differentMultisamplesorWaveSequences,depending
onhowhardyouplay.
EachofthesezoneshasseparatesettingsforLevel,
StartOffset,andsoon.Also,eachofthezonescanfade
intothenext,tocreatesmoothvelocitytransitions.
Zonescanevenbelayeredtogether,twoatatime.
Selecting Multisamples
Letscreateasimplevelocitycrossfadebetweentwo
Multisamples,usingjustOSC1.
1. GototheOSC1BasictaboftheOSC/Pitchpage.
AUDIO OUTPUT
INDIVIDUAL 1, 2, 3, 4
OSC1 Basic: P2 - 1 Amp1/Driver1: P4 - 1
Pitch EG : P2 - 9
Filter1 EG: P3 - 4 Amp1 EG: P4 - 3
OSC1 LFO1: P5 - 1
OSC 1
OSC 2
Filter Key Track: P3 - 2
Filter1 Mod: P3 - 2
Filter1 LFO Mod: P3 - 3
OSC1 Pitch: P2 - 2
OSC1 LFO2: P5 - 2
Amp1 Mod: P4 - 2
Program Basic: P1 - 1
AUDIO OUTPUT
L/MONO, R
Master
Efects
1, 2: P9
Total
Efects
1, 2: P9
Insert
Efects
112: P8
Oscillator / Pitch Filter Amplifer Efects
3Band EQ
: P4 - 9
Filter1(A/B): P3 - 1
AMS Mixer: P6 - 1
Common KeyTrack: P6 - 9
OSC1, 2
Insert Efects
Master Efects
Individual Outputs
REC Bus
FX Control Bus
Routing: P8-1
EQ
Controllers: P1 - 8
Pads: P1 - 9
Vector: P1 - 5, 6
KARMA: P7
Drum Track: P1 - 3 Audio Input: P0 - 8
Tone Adjust: P0 - 9
Common LFO: P5 - 9
P11, P22, etc. indicate the on-screen pages and tabs used when editing on the KRONOS.
Detailed Program Editing Using LFOs and Envelopes (EGs)
45
2. SettheMS1andMS2Typeparametersto
Multisample.
3. SettheTypesforMS38toOff.
4. SelectROMStereoastheMultisampleBankfor
MS1andMS2.
TherearefourmaintypesofMultisampleBanks:
ROM,SamplingMode,EXs,andUserSampleBanks.
Foreachtype,youcanalsochoosebetweenlookingat
monoandstereoMultisamples.Notethatstereo
Multisampleswillrequiretwiceasmanyvoicesas
monoMultisamples.
ROMMultisamplesarethebuiltinfactorysounds,
andarealwaysavailable.Theseareorganizedby
category,suchaspianos,guitars,bells,etc.
SamplingMode(Smp)Multisamplesaretheonesthat
youcanseeandeditinSamplingMode.Thesemay
includeAkai,SoundFont2.0,AIFForWAVfilesloaded
fromdisk,ornativeKRONOSsamples(including
thirdpartysoundlibrariesandsamplesthatyoucreate
yourself).AnythingthatcanbeusedinSampling
ModecanalsobeloadedasaUserSampleBank.
EXsMultisamplebanksarePCMexpansionsets
createdespeciallyfortheKRONOS.Eachhasitsown
uniquenumber;forinstance,theROMExpansionis
EXs1,andtheConcertGrandPianoisEXs2.Onlythe
currentlyloadedEXsbankswillappearinthismenu.
ownsamplelibraries.Youcanloadandplaygigabytes
ofyourcustomorconvertedsamplesatonce,using
VirtualMemory.Theyareshownasapathtoafileon
aninternaldisk,includingthefilenameandthenames
ofallenclosingdirectories.Onlythecurrentlyloaded
UserSampleBankswillappearinthismenu.Formore
information,seeUserSampleBanksonpage 154of
theOperationGuide.
5. PresstheMultisamplepopupforMS1.
ThisbringsupalistofMultisamples,organizedby
category.Usethetabsattheleftofthescreentobrowse
throughthedifferentcategories.
6. SelectaMultisamplebytouchingitsnameinthe
list.
7. PresstheOKbuttontoconfirmyourselection.
8. DothesameforMS2.
NowthatyouveassignedMultisamplestoMS1and
MS2,letssetupthevelocityrangesandcrossfades.
9. SetMS2sBottomVelocityto001,anditsXfade
Rangeto0.
10.SetMS1sBottomVelocityto80.
Now,MS2willsoundwhenyouplaysoftly,at
velocitiesof79orlessandMS1willsoundwhenyou
playharder,withvelocitiesof80ormore.
Youcanalsoseethissplitvisually,inthegraphiconthe
rightsideoftheLCD.
11.Next,setMS1sXfadeRangeto20,anditsCurveto
Linear.
Noticethatthegraphicnowshowsthetworanges
taperingintooneanother.Between80and100,MS2
willfadeout,andMS1willfadein,creatingagradual
velocitytransitioninsteadofahardsplit.
12.Ifyoulike,adjusttheLevelsforthetwo
Multisamples.
Rev. (Reverse) check box
Rev.(Reverse)letsyouplaytheselectedMultisample
backwards,withoutlooping.Thiscanproduce
interestingresultsforsoundeffectsorotherunusual
timbres.ReverseappliesonlytoMultisamples;when
theTypeissetWaveSequence,thisisgrayedout.
Note:thisdoesnotapplytosamplesfromEXsorUser
SampleBankswhoseLoadMethodissettoVirtual
Memory.
Using LFOs and Envelopes (EGs)
Using LFOs
EachOscillatorhastwoLFOs:LFO1andLFO2.There
isalsoasingleCommonLFO,sharedbyboth
Oscillators.WhileLFO1andLFO2areseparatefor
eachvoice,theCommonLFOissharedbyallvoicesin
theProgram.Thismakesitusefulwhenyouwantallof
thevoicestohaveanidenticalLFOeffect.
YoucanusetheseLFOstomodulatemanydifferent
Programparameters,including:
Pitch(forvibrato)
Filters(forwaheffects)
Volume(fortremolo)
Pan(forautopanning)
TheLFOscanmodulatemanyotherparameters,in
additiontothoselistedabove.
Basic LFO programming
TheKRONOSLFOsareverypowerful,andofferlots
ofcontrolforthepoweruser.Itssimpletogetstarted
withthem,thoughandthegraphicsontheLCDshow
howtheparametersaffectthesound.Letstakeabrief
tour.
1. GototheOSC1LFO1taboftheLFOpage.
46
2. SelecttheWaveformparameter.
3. UsetheInc orDec buttonstoscrollthrough
thedifferentwaveforms,andlookattheirshapes
inthegraphicdisplay.
Thereareanumberofwaveformstochoosefrom.Each
aresuitedtodifferentapplications:
TriangleandSinearetheclassicLFOshapesfor
vibrato,tremolo,panning,andfilterwaheffects.
Squareisusefulforgatedfilterandampeffects,
andcreatesapolicesireneffectwhenmodulating
pitch.
TheGuitarwaveformisdesignedespeciallyfor
guitarvibrato,sinceitbendsonlyupwardsfrom
thebasevalue.
SawandExponentialSawDownaregoodfor
rhythmicfilterandampeffects.
Random1(S/H)createstheclassicsampleand
holdeffect,whichisgreatformodulatinga
resonantfilter.
4. Afterlookingatthedifferentwaveforms,select
Triangle.
5. SelecttheShapeparameter,andusetheVALUE
slidertomovethroughitsdifferentsettings,from
99to+99.
Noticehowtheshapeofthewaveformbecomesmore
curved,andhow99emphasizesthelowerpartofthe
shape,and+99emphasizestheupperpart.
6. SelecttheStartPhaseparameter,andusethe
VALUEslidertosweepthroughitsrangeof
values.
Noticehowthewaveformshiftsfromsidetoside.
Amongotherthings,thisletsyouoffsettheLFOsfrom
oneanotherintime,whichcancreateinteresting
organiceffects.
7. UsetheFrequencyparametertosetthespeedof
theLFO.
8. UsetheFadeandDelaysettingstocontroltheway
theLFOsoundsatthebeginningofthenote.
FormoreinformationonLFOs,seeProgramP5:LFO
onpage 92oftheParameterGuide.
AlloftheseparameterscontrolthewaythattheLFO
itselfworks.InorderfortheLFOtoactuallyaffectthe
sound,youcanusethededicatedLFOroutingsonthe
Filter,Pitch,andAmppages,orusetheLFOsasAMS
sourcesforawidevarietyofparameters.
Frequency Modulation
AMScanbeusedtovarytheLFOspeed.Thisletsyou
changetheLFOspeedbyoperatingacontroller,orby
theEGorKeyboardTracksettings.
MIDI/Tempo Sync.
IfMIDI/TempoSyncischecked,theFrequency
settingwillbeignored,andtheLFOwillsynchronize
tothesystemtempo,assetbytheTEMPOknobor
externalMIDIclocks.
Thisletsyouproducevibrato,wah,autopan,or
tremoloeffectsthatlocktotheDrumTrack,KARMA,
WaveSequences,theinternalsequencer,orexternal
MIDIsequencers.
EGs (Envelope Generators)
Anenvelopecreatesamodulationsignalbymoving
fromoneleveltoanotheroveraspecifiedtime,and
thenmovingtoanotherleveloveranotherperiodof
time,andsoon.
TheHD1includesthreeEGs,forPitch,Filter,and
Amp.Theseproducetimevaryingchangesinpitch,
tone,andvolumerespectively.Theycanalsobeusedto
modulateanumberofotherProgramparametersvia
AMS.
Level
Time
Attack Time
Decay Time Slope Time
Release Time
Attack Level
Start Level
Sustain Level
Break Level
note-on note-off
Release Level
Detailed Program Editing Using Alternate Modulation (AMS) and the AMS Mixers
47
Using Alternate Modulation (AMS) and the AMS Mixers
AMS(AlternateModulationSource)referstoanyof
theassignablemodulationsourcesinKRONOS,
including:
Builtinphysicalcontrollers,suchastheJoystick,
Ribbon,andRealTimeKnobs
IncomingMIDIcontrollers,orMIDIcontrollers
generatedbyKARMAortheVectorEG
ModulatorssuchastheFilter,Pitch,andAmpEGs,
theLFOs,ortheAMSMixers
Intensityisaparameterthatsetsthedegree(speed,
depth,amountetc.)towhichAMSwillcontrolthe
modulation.
Anumberoffrequentlyusedmodulationroutings,
suchasusingthejoysticktovarythepitch,are
providedasadditional,dedicatedroutings,separate
fromAMS.
NotethatnotallAMSsourcesmaybeavailablefor
somemodulationdestinations.
FordetailsonalternatemodulationandAMS,see
AlternateModulationSources(AMS),onpage 1089
oftheParameterGuide.
Using the AMS Mixers
TheAMSMixerscombinetwoAMSsourcesintoone,
orprocessanAMSsourcetomakeitintosomething
new.
Forinstance,theycanaddtwoAMSsourcestogether,
oruseoneAMSsourcetoscaletheamountofanother.
YoucanalsousethemtochangetheshapesofLFOs
andEGsinvariousways,modifytheresponseof
realtimecontrollers,andmore.
TheAMSMixeroutputsappearinthelistofAMS
sources,justliketheLFOsandEGs.
Thisalsomeansthattheoriginal,unmodifiedinputsto
theAMSMixersarestillavailableaswell.Forinstance,
ifyouuseLFO1asaninputtoaAMSMixer,youcan
usetheprocessedversionoftheLFOtocontrolone
AMSdestination,andtheoriginalversiontocontrol
another.
Finally,youcancascadethetwoAMSMixerstogether,
byusingAMSMixer1asaninputtoAMSMixer2.
Adding two AMS sources together
AMSmixerswilldodifferentthingsdependingon
theirTypesetting.TheA+BsettingmergestwoAMS
sourcesintoone.Thiscanbehandywhenyouneedto
addonemoremodulationsourcetoaparameter,but
youvealreadyusedupalloftheavailableAMSslots.
Forinstance,letssaythatyoureusinganLFOto
modulateFilterResonance,andthenyoudecidethatit
wouldbeinterestingtoscalethatparameterwithan
EGaswell.ResonancehasonlyasingleAMSinput,
butyoucaneasilymergetheLFOandtheEGtogether
usingtheA+BAMSMixer:
1. AssigntheLFOtoAMSA.
2. AssigntheEGtoAMSB.
3. AssigntheAMSMixerastheFilterResonance
AMSsource.
AMSMixerA+Bexample
Scaling one AMS source with another
WhentheTypeissettoAmtAxB,themixerusesthe
AMSBinputtoscaletheamountofAMSA.For
instance,youcancontroltheamountLFO1withthe
FilterEG,orcontroltheamountofthePitchEGwith
theribbon.
AMSMixerAmtAxBexample
Smoothing
TheSmoothingTypesmoothsouttheAMSinput,
creatingmoregentletransitionsbetweenvalues.You
haveseparatecontroloftheamountofsmoothing
duringtheattack(whenthesignalisincreasing)and
decay(whenitsdecreasing).
Lowsettingsprovidesubtlecontrollersmoothing,
creatingmoregradualaftertouch,forinstance.Higher
settingscreateautofadeeffects,transformingaquick
gestureintoalongerfadeinand/orfadeoutevent.
Smoothingcanalsobeusedtoaltertheshapeof
programmablemodsources,suchasLFOsandEGs.
Forinstance,youcanturnablipintoasimple
envelopeshape,asshownbelow.
AMS A: LFO
AMS B: EG
A+B Output
AMS A: LFO
AMS B: EG
Amt A*B Output
48
AMSMixerSmoothingexamples
More AMS Mixer features
TherearemoremixerTypes,includingOffset,Shape,
andQuantize,whichofferevenmorepossibilitiesfor
creativeprogramming.Formoredetails,seethese
sectionsintheParameterGuide:
61:OSC1AMSMixeronpage 98
UsingSW1/2toturnanAMSsourceonandoff
onpage 100
MutingindividualWaveSequencestepswith
SW1onpage 100
Convertingfrombipolartounipolaronpage 100
Convertingfromunipolartobipolaronpage 100
QuantizedRibbonPitchBendonpage 102
Selectivepitchbend,usingaswitchonpage 103
Selectivepitchbend,usingonlythejoystickon
page 104
Generatingastaticvalueonpage 104
Suggestions on using AMS
Whenmakingsettingsforalternatemodulation,think
oftheeffectthatyouwishtoproduce,whattypeof
modulationwillbenecessarytoproducethateffect,
andwhatparameteroftheoscillator,filter,oramplifier
needstobecontrolled.
Next,selectasource(AMS)andsettheIntensity.If
youproceedlogicallyinthisway,youwillachievethe
desiredeffect.
Forexample,ifyouwanttocontrolaguitarsoundso
thatitapproachesfeedbackwhenyoumovethe
joystick,youmightsetupthejoysticktomodulatethe
filterfrequencyandresonance.
Controller Setup page
Foreachprogram,thistabletsyoumakesettingsfor
theSW1andSW2key,andforRealTimeKnobs58.
Formoreinformation,seeSW1andSW2onpage 31,
and18:SetUpControllers,onpage 53ofthe
ParameterGuide.
Controlling Pitch
Pitch bend
TheJS(+X)andJS(X)settingsspecifytheamountof
pitchchange(insemitones)thatwilloccurwhenMIDI
pitchbendmessagesarereceivedorwhenthejoystick
ismovedtoleftorright.Asettingof+12allowsthe
pitchtobecontrolledamaximumofoneoctave
upward;asettingof12allowsthepitchtobe
controlledamaximumofoneoctavedownward.
Ribbonspecifiestheamountofpitchchange(in
semitones)thatwilloccurwhenMIDIcontrolchange
(CC)#16messagesarereceived,orwhenyoumove
yourfingerleftandrightontheribboncontroller.With
asettingof+12,thepitchwillberaisedoneoctaveat
thefarrightoftheribboncontroller,andwillbe
loweredbyoneoctaveatthefarleftoftheribbon
controller.
Creating Vibrato
YoucanuseanLFOtocreatevibrato.
LFO1/2Intensitysetsthedepthtowhichtheselected
LFOwillaffectthepitch.Withasettingof+12.00,
vibratowillproduceamaximumof1octaveofpitch
change.
JS+YIntspecifiestheamountofvibratothattheLFO
willproducewhenthejoystickispushedawayfrom
yourself.
Intensity(AMSIntensity)specifiesthedepthof
vibratothatwillbeappliedbytheLFOwhen
modulatedbytheselectedAMS(AlternateModulation
Source).Forexample,ifLFO1AMSissettoAfter
TouchandyousetanappropriatevalueforIntensity,
vibratowillbeappliedwhenyouapplypressuretothe
keyboardorwhenMIDIaftertouchmessagesare
received.
Pitch EG
WhentheIntensityvalueissetto+12.00,thepitchEG
specifiedinthePitchEGpagewillproducea
maximumof1octaveofpitchchange.
Torealisticallysimulatetheslightchangeinpitchthat
occurswhenastringispluckedorattheattackofa
brassorvocalsound,youcanusetheEGtocreatea
subtlechangeinpitchattheattack.
Portamento
Portamentomakesthepitchchangesmoothlywhen
youplaythenextnotebeforereleasingtheprevious
note.
TheTimeparametercontrolshowlongittakethepitch
tochange.Asthisvalueisincreased,thepitchwill
changeoveralongertime.Withavalueof000,there
willbenoportamento.
YoucanturnPortamentoonandoffviaSW1orSW2,
byassigningthemtoPorta.SWCC#65.
Original AMS A: Smoothing with Long Attack
and Short Release:
Smoothing with Short Attack & Long Release:
Detailed Program Editing Using Filters
49
Using Filters
Thefiltersallowsyoutodiminishoremphasize
specifiedfrequencyareasofthesound.
Thetoneofthesoundwilldependsignificantlyonthe
filtersettings.
Thebasicfiltersettings,includingtherouting,type,
cutofffrequency,andresonance,aresetontheP3:
Filterpage.
Filter Routing
Eachoscillatorhastwofilters,FilterAandFilterB.The
Routingparametercontrolswhetheroneorbothofthe
filtersareused,andifbothareused,itcontrolshow
theyareconnectedtoeachother.
TheSingleroutingusesonlyFilterAasasingle2pole,
12dB/octavefilter(6dBforBandPassandBandReject).
TheSerialroutingusesbothFilterAandFilterB.The
oscillatorfirstgoesthroughFilterA,andthenthe
outputofFilterAisprocessedthroughFilterB.
ParallelalsousesbothFilterAandFilterB.The
oscillatorfeedsbothfiltersdirectly,andtheoutputsof
thetwofiltersarethensummedtogether.
The24dB/4poleroutingmergesbothfilterstocreatea
single4pole,24dB/octavefilter(12dBforBandPass
andBandReject).IncomparisontoSingle,thisoption
producesasharperrolloffbeyondthecutoff
frequency,aswellasaslightlymoredelicate
resonance.Manyclassicanalogsynthsusedthis
generaltypeoffilter.
SerialandParallelRouting
Filter Types
Thisselectsthepartsofthesoundwhichwillbe
affectedbythefilter,asdescribedbelow.Withthe
SerialandParallelroutings,youcanindependentlyset
thetypesforFilterAandFilterB.
Thefilterswillproduceverydifferentresults
dependingontheselectedfiltertype.Theselections
willchangeslightlyaccordingtotheselectedFilter
Routing,toshowthecorrectcutoffslopeindBper
octave.
LowPass.Thiscutsoutthepartsofthesoundwhich
arehigherthanthecutofffrequency.LowPassisthe
mostcommontypeoffilter,andisusedtomakebright
timbressounddarker.
HighPass.Thiscutsoutthepartsofthesoundwhich
arelowerthanthecutofffrequency.Youcanusethisto
maketimbressoundthinnerormorebuzzy.
BandPass.Thiscutsoutallpartsofthesound,both
highsandlows,exceptfortheregionaroundthecutoff
frequency.Sincethisfiltercutsoutbothhighandlow
frequencies,itseffectcanchangedramatically
dependingonthecutoffsettingandtheoscillators
multisample.
Withlowresonancesettings,youcanusetheBand
Passfiltertocreatetelephoneorvintagephonograph
sounds.Withhigherresonancesettings,itcancreate
buzzyornasaltimbres.
BandReject.Thisfiltertypealsocalledanotchfilter
cutsonlythepartsofthesounddirectlyaroundthe
cutofffrequency.Trymodulatingthecutoffwithan
LFOtocreatephaserlikeeffects.
Filter A (Low Pass) Oscillator Filter B (High Pass)
Oscillator
Filter A (Low Pass)
Filter B (High Pass)
50
FilterTypesandCutoffFrequency
Resonance
Resonanceemphasizesthefrequenciesaroundthe
cutofffrequency,asshowninthediagrambelow.
Whenthisissetto0,thereisnoemphasis,and
frequenciesbeyondthecutoffwillsimplydiminish
smoothly.
Atmediumsettings,theresonancewillalterthetimbre
ofthefilter,makingitsoundmorenasal,ormore
extreme.Atveryhighsettings,theresonancecanbe
heardasaseparate,whistlingpitch.
Tomaketheresonancetrackthekeyboardpitch,see
KeyFollow,onpage 74oftheParameterGuide.
Modulating the filters
Youcanmodulatethefiltercutofffrequencyusingthe
FilterEG,theLFOs,keyboardtracking,andother
builtinandMIDIcontrollers.Thisisagreatwayto
addarichvarietyoftonalchangetothesound.
Filter EG
TheFilterEGisamultistageenvelope,whichyoucan
usetomodulatethefilter(naturally!)aswellasother
Programparameters.TheEGitselfissetuponthe
FilterEGtab;thewaythatitaffectsthefiltersis
controlledbytheparametersdescribedbelow,onthe
FilterModtab:
TheIntensitytoAandIntensitytoBsettingscontrol
thebasicamountofEGmodulationforfilter
frequenciesAandB,respectively,beforeother
modulation.
TheVelocitytoAandVelocitytoBsettingsletyouuse
velocitytoscaletheamountofEGmodulation.
TheAMSsettingselectsaAMSmodulationsourceto
scaletheamountoftheFilterEGappliedtoFiltersA
andB.ThetwofiltersshareasingleAMSsource,with
separateintensitysettings.
LFO modulation
YoucanmodulatethefilterviaLFO1,LFO2,andthe
CommonLFO.Amongotherapplications,LFO
modulationofthefiltercanproducetheclassicauto
waheffect.
TheFilterLFOModtabletsyousetupthefollowing
parametersseparatelyforeachLFO:
IntensitytoAandIntensitytoBspecifyhowmuch
theLFOchangesthetone.
JSYIntensitytoAandJSYIntensitytoBspecifythe
depthofthewaheffectproducedbytheLFOwhenthe
joystickismovedtowardyourself,orwhenCC#2is
received.
Low Pass
High Pass
Band Pass
Band Reject
Cutoff Frequency
Low resonance
High resonance
Detailed Program Editing Using the Amp section
51
TheAMSsettingselectsaAMSmodulationsourceto
scaletheamountoftheLFOappliedtoFiltersAandB.
ThetwofiltersshareasingleAMSsource,with
separateintensitysettings.
Forexampleif,AMSissettoAfterTouch,applying
pressuretothekeyboardproducesanautowah
effect.
Keyboard Track
Mostacousticinstrumentsgetbrighterasyouplay
higherpitches.Atitsmostbasic,keyboardtrackingre
createsthiseffectbyincreasingthecutofffrequencyof
alowpassfilterasyouplayhigheronthekeyboard.
Usually,someamountofkeytrackingisnecessaryin
ordertomakethetimbreconsistentacrosstheentire
range.
TheKRONOSkeyboardtrackingcanalsobemuch
morecomplex,sinceitallowsyoutocreatedifferent
ratesofchangeoveruptofourdifferentpartsofthe
keyboard.Forinstance,youcan:
Makethefiltercutoffincreaseveryquicklyoverthe
middleofthekeyboard,andthenopenmore
slowlyornotatallinthehigheroctaves.
Makethecutoffincreaseasyouplayloweronthe
keyboard.
Createabruptchangesatcertainkeys,forsplitlike
effects.
How Key Track works: Keys and Ramps
Thekeyboardtrackingworksbycreatingfourramps,
orslopes,betweenfivekeysonthekeyboard.The
bottomandtopkeysarefixedatthebottomandtopof
theMIDIrange,respectively.Youcansettheother
threekeysnamedLowBreak,Center,andHigh
Breaktobeanywhereinbetween.
ThefourRampvaluescontroltherateofchange
betweeneachpairofkeys.Forinstance,iftheLow
CenterRampissetto0,thevaluewillstaythesame
betweentheLowBreakkeyandtheCenterkey.
Youcanthinkoftheresultingshapeasbeingliketwo
foldingdoorsattachedtoahingeinthecenter.Atthe
Centerkey(themainhinge),thekeyboardtrackinghas
noeffect.Thetwofoldingdoorsswingoutfromthis
centerpointtocreatechangesinthehigherandlower
rangesofthekeyboard.
KeyboardTrackShapeandIntensity
IntensitytoAandIntensitytoBadjusttheeffectthat
keyboardtrackingwillhaveonfiltersAandB.For
moreinformation,see32a:KeyboardTrack,on
AMS Modulation
InadditiontotheEG,LFOs,andKeyTrack,youcan
usetwoAMSsourcestomodulatethefilters.For
instance,youcouldusetheribbontochangethe
brightness,orusetheAMSoutputofaWaveSequence.
Using the Amp section
TheAmpsectionincludescontrolsforvolume,pan,
andthedrivercircuit.Youcancontrolthevolume
usingtheAmpEG,LFO1/2,KeyTrack,andvelocity,
alongwithotherAMSsources.
EachOscillatorhasitsownAmpsection:Amp1for
OSC1,andAmp2forOSC2.
Background: what does Amp mean?
Differentsoundshavecharacteristicshapestotheir
volumelevels.
Forexample,thevolumeofapianonotebeginsata
highvolumetheinstantyouplaythenote,andthen
decreasesgradually.
Thevolumeofanorgannote,ontheotherhand,
remainsconstantaslongasyoucontinuepressingthe
key.
Thevolumeofanoteonaviolinorwindinstrument
canbevariedduringthenotebythemusician(i.e.,by
regulatingtheamountofpressureontheboworthe
forceofthebreath).
Intensity =+99 (Original Shape)
Intensity =99 (Inverted)
Intensity =+50 (Less Effect)
Intensity =0 (No Effect)
Volume
Time
Piano
Volume decays gradually
Volume
Time
Organ
Volume remains constant
until note is released
52
Pan
Pan
ThemainPanparametercontrolsthestereoposition
afterthesignalhaspassedthroughtheoscillator,filter,
andamp.NormallyyoullsetthistoC064,sothatthe
soundiscenteredequallybetweentheleftandright
speakers.
TocreateastereoeffectwhenOscillatorModeissetto
Double,settheAmp1/Driver1pagePantoL001,and
theAmp2/Driver2pagePanR127.Thiswillmake
OSC1gototheleftspeaker,andOSC2gototheright
speaker.
WithasettingofRandom,thepanwillchange
randomlyeachtimeyouplayanoteonKRONOS,
producinganinterestingeffect.
Pan AMS and Intensity
Intensityspecifiesthedepthofthepanmodulation
fromtheselectedAMSsource.
IfyousetAMStoNoteNumber,thepanwillchange
accordingtothekeyboardpositionofeachnote
played.WithasettingofLFO1or2,thesoundwill
sweepfromsidetoside,creatinganautopaneffect.
Othersettingsallowyoutomovetheoscillatorpanby
usingarealtimecontroller,anenvelope,orother
modulationsources.
Pan - Use DKit Setting
UseDKitSettingapplieswhenOscillatorModeisset
toDrums.Ifthisischecked,theProgramcanusea
differentpanpositionforeachdrumsound,as
specifiedbytheDrumKit.Ifthisisunchecked,all
drumsoundswillusetheProgramspanposition.The
factorypresetsandGMdrumkitsuseindividualpan
positionsforthedifferentdrums,sonormallyitsbest
toleavethischecked.
Amp modulation
ThebasicvolumelevelissetbytheAmpLevel
parameter.Youcanthenalterthisusingthe
modulationsourcesbelow:
Keyboard Track
Thisletsyouvarythevolumerelativetothenoteyou
play.Formoreinformation,seeKeyboardTrackon
page 51.
Amp Modulation
VelocityIntensityisusedbymostprogramsto
decreasethevolumeofsoftlyplayednotesand
increasethevolumeofstronglyplayednotes,andthe
AmpModulationparameteradjuststhedepthofthis
control.NormallyyouwillsetAmpModulationto
positive(+)values.Asthissettingisincreased,there
willbegreatervolumedifferencebetweensoftly
playedandstronglyplayednotes.
LFO1/2
SpecifieshowtheLFOswillproducecyclicchangesin
volume(tremoloeffect).
ThevolumewillbeaffectedbytheLFO(s)forwhich
yousetanLFO1Intensity,LFO2Intensityvalue.
Intensity(AMSIntensity)adjuststhedepthbywhich
thetremoloeffectproducedbytheLFOwillbeaffected
whenyouassignanAMS(LFO1AMS,LFO2AMS).
ForexampleifyousetAMStoJSY(CC#02),tremolo
willbeappliedwhenyoumovethejoystickof
KRONOStowardyourself,orwhenCC#02isreceived.
Amp EG
TheAmpEGletsyoucontrolhowthevolumechanges
overthecourseofanote.
Everyinstrumenthasitsowncharacteristicvolume
envelope.Thisispartofwhatgiveseachinstrumentits
identifiablecharacter.
Conversely,bychangingthevolumecontourfor
instance,applyingastringlikeAmpEGcurvetoan
organmultisampleyoucanproduceinterestingand
unusualsounds.
Detailed Program Editing Using EXi
53
Drive
TheDrivecircuitaddssaturationandoverdrivetothe
sound,foreverythingfromsubtlefatteningtodrastic
distortion.Unlikeanoverdriveeffect,Driveprocesses
eachvoiceindividually,sothetimbrestaysthesame
regardlessofhowmanyvoicesarebeingplayed.
Thetwomainparameters,DriveandLowBoost,work
togethertocreatetheoveralleffect.
Drivecontrolstheamountofedgeandbiteinthe
timbre.Lowsettingswillproducemildsaturation,and
highersettingscreatemoreobviousdistortion.
Often,itsusefultoincreasetheLowBoostalongwith
theDrive.
Note:evenwhentheDriveamountissetto0,the
Drivecircuitstillaffectsthetimbre.Ifyourgoalisa
completelypristinesound,usetheBypasscontrol
instead.
LowBoostisaspeciallowfrequencyEQwhich
controlsthebodycharacterofthesound.Thespecific
EQfrequenciesaffectedwillchangewiththeDrive
setting.
Higheramountsincreasethebassboost,andwillalso
intensifytheeffectoftheDriveparameter.
Using EXi
InEXiPrograms,youcanselectoneortwoEXitobe
splitorlayeredtogether.EachEXihasitsownsonic
characteranddifferentpagesofparameters.
ToselectdifferentEXi:
1. SelectanEXiProgram.
Note:EXiProgramsarestoredinEXiBanks,separate
fromHD1Programs.INTAisalwaysanEXiBank;
dependingonsettings,anyofUSERAGand
AAGGmayalsobeEXibanks.
2. PresstheCommonbutton.
3. PresstheBasic/Vectortab.
TheP4:Basic/VectorProgramBasicpageappears.
4. UnderEXi1InstrumentType,atthetopleftofthe
display,selectanyoftheEXi.
YoucanalsoselectasecondEXiunderEXi2
InstrumentType,butfornowletsconcentrateonEXi
1.
5. PresstheEXi1buttonatthebottomofthedisplay.
Thetabswillchangetoshowthepagesfortheselected
EXi.Timetoexplore!
SGX-1 Premium Piano
Redefining the workstation piano
Youveneverheardapianolikethisonaworkstation.
Everynoteissampledinstereoat8velocitylevelswith
noloops,forsmoothresponseandnaturaldecays
plusmultiplevelocitylayersoftruedamperresonance.
Subtleperformancenuancesintegrateseamlesslywith
theKRONOShardware,includingreleasevelocityand
damperpedalvelocity.
TheSGX1alsoprovidestheexceptionallyhigh
polyphonythatrealacousticpianosoundsrequire
upto100dualstereonotes,theequivalentof400mono
voices.
EP-1 MDS Electric Piano
New technology, classic sounds
TheEP1providesincrediblerecreationsofsixclassic
tineandreedelectricpianos,alongwithmodeled
vintageeffects.BasedonKorgsMultiDimensional
Synthesis(MDS),theEP1deliversnaturalrealtime
expressionwithoutthelimitationsofordinarysample
Piano
Organ
Strings
54
playback.Forinstance,youllappreciatethenatural
decayandastonishinglysmoothgradationof
dynamicsfrompptoff,withouttelltalesplitpoints
justliketherealinstruments.
Realtimecontrolovernoiseelements,including
mechanicalkeyoffnoisescontrolledbyrelease
velocity,givesyourperformancesevengreaterrealism
anddetail.
CX-3 Tonewheel Organ
Modeled organ with drawbar control
BasedonKorgsgroundbreakingCX3keyboard(with
additionalrefinements),theCX3isadetailedtone
wheelorganmodelwithlivedrawbarcontrol,
Perfecttonewheelphasecoherencymeanssolid,
powerfulsoundingchordsjustliketherealthing.A
choiceoftonewheeltypes,adjustableovertones,
leakage,noise,andkeyclickmodelingprovide
unparalleledrealism.
Ampmodeling,Vibrato/Chorus,andRotarySpeaker
effectsarebuiltin.EXmodeletsyouintroduce
additionaldrawbarandpercussionharmonics,fornew
timbresunavailableontraditionalorgans.
AL-1 Analog Modeling Synthesizer
Modern virtual analog synth
TheAL1isourfeaturepacked,modernvirtualanalog
synth.Itspatentedultralowaliasingoscillators(using
completelydifferenttechnologythantheHD1)
recreateallthepowerandgloryoftrueanalog
synthesiswithouttheartifactsthatcanplaguelesser
instruments.
Morphingwaveformsallowyoutochangethe
oscillatorshapesinrealtime.Resonancemodelinglets
youchoosebetweenclassicfiltersounds,andthe
extraordinarilyflexibleMultiFilterletsyoucreateyour
ownhybridfiltershapes.Hardsync,analogstyleFM,
drive,lowboost,andringmodulationofferplentyof
tonetwistingpower.
MS-20EX
Patch-panel synth with unique, aggressive tone
AdramaticexpansionofKorgsclassicMS20analog
synth,theMS20EXputsmodularpatchcablesunder
yourfingertips.Modulatefilterswithaudiorate
oscillators;turnaudioinputsintocontrolsignals;
controlalloftheoriginalknobswithmodsources
includingadditionalenvelopes,LFOs,andrealtime
controllers.
Itsatweakersdream,butevenwithoutthepatch
panel,theMS20EXwouldmakewaveswithits
unique,aggressivetonedueinlargeparttoits
unusualfilters,whicharecompletelydifferentfrom
thoseineithertheAL1orthePolysixEX.
PolysixEX
Rich-sounding, versatile, and easy-to-use synth
Withitsselfoscillatingfourpolefilter,smoothanalog
oscillatorandsuboscillator,andrich,builtinchorus
andensembleeffects,thePolysixEXprovesyoudont
havetobefancyinordertobegreat.
BasedontheclassicKorgPolysixanalogsynth,its
timbreisdistinctlydifferentfromtheAL1andthe
MS20EX,butwedidntstopthere;weadded
modulationofeverycontrolonthefrontpanel,fora
worldofsoundsimpossibleontheoriginal.
ItsalsoverywellsuitedtohandsoncontrolwithTone
Adjust,withaknob,slider,orswitchforalmostallof
theoriginalPolysixcontrols.Asabonus,itsalso
capableofextremelyhighpolyphonyupto180
voices!
STR-1 Plucked String
Physical modeling, from the real to the fantastic
Physicshasbroughtuslasers,cellphones,electric
carsandnowtheSTR1.Whatwoulditsoundliketo
playharmonicsonametalbarpluckedbyapiano,
ortosingintoaguitarstring?PlaywiththeSTR1and
discover.
Inadditiontounique,experimentaltimbres,theSTR1
isgreatfortraditionalinstrumentsfromguitars,
basses,harps,andworld/ethnicsoundstoclavinets,
harpsichords,bells,andelectricpianos.
Youcanalsoprocesssamplesandliveaudioinput
throughthephysicalmodelincludingaudio
feedbackfromanyoftheKRONOSeffects.
MOD-7 Waveshaping VPM Synthesizer
Patch-panel VPM/waveshaping/PCM processor
CombineVariablePhaseModulation(VPM),
waveshaping,ringmodulation,samples,and
subtractivesynthesiswithamodularpatchpanel
system,andyouhavetheMOD7.Exceptionally
versatile,itofferseverythingfromclassicFM
keyboards,bellsandbasses(includingtheabilityto
importsoundsfromvintageDXsynths)torhythmic
soundscapesandsparkling,epicpads.
Vastsamplemanglingcapabilities,withincredible
flexibilityandpower,letyoucreateincrediblyrich
processingenvironments:combinemultiplestagesof
filtering,waveshaping,andringmodulation,evenuse
samplesasFMmodulators,allpatchedtogether
howeveryoulike.
Detailed Program Editing Using Vector Synthesis
55
Using Vector Synthesis
VectorSynthesisletsyoucontrolProgramandEffects
parametersbymovingtheVectorJoystick,byusingthe
programmableVectorEnvelope,orbythecombination
ofthetwo.
What does Vector mean?
Modulationgenerallyworksbymovingasingle
control.likeaslider,inastraightline.Atoneendofthe
control,themodulationisatitsminimum;attheother
end,itsatitsmaximum.
VectorSynthesisisalittledifferent.Itworksby
movingaroundapointonatwodimensionalplane,
bothleftrightandupdown.
Youcanthinkofthispointasbeingpositionedontwo
differentlinesatonce:aleftrightline(theXaxis),and
anupdownline(theYaxis).
Inotherwords,insteadofjusthavingonevalue(likea
slider),eachVectorpointhastwovalues:oneforX,
andoneforY.Seethegraphicbelowforanexample.
VectorPointandXandYaxisvalues
Inadditiontomovingthepointdirectlywiththe
VectorJoystick,youcanalsousetheVectorEnvelope
tomoveitspositionautomaticallyovertime,asshown
below.
VectorEnvelopemovingtheVectorPoint
Vector Joystick and Vector Envelope
YoucanmovetheVectorpointusingthecombination
oftheVectorJoystickandtheVectorEnvelope.Thetwo
worktogether,althoughyoudontnecessaryhaveto
usethembothatthesametime.
WhentheVectorJoystickisinitscenterposition,the
VectorEnvelopehascompletecontroloverthepoints
position.Likewise,whentheVectorEnvelopeisinthe
center,theVectorJoystickhascompletecontrol.
WhentheVectorEnvelopeisinuse,theVectorJoystick
offsetsthepositionbyuptohalfwayacrosseitheraxis.
Forinstance,iftheEnvelopeisallthewaytotheright
oftheXaxis,andtheJoystickisallthewaytotheleft,
theactualVectorpositionwillbeinthecenteroftheX
axis.
Hint:toquicklyresettheVectorJoysticktoitscenter
value,holddownthefrontpanelControlResetbutton
andmovethejoystick.
Vector Volume Control and CC Control
TheVectordoestwomainthings:itcancontrolthe
relativevolumeofthetwoOscillatorsinProgram
mode(orofupto16ProgramsatonceinCombi
mode),anditcangenerateCCsforcontrolling
ProgramandEffectsparameters.
Vector and MIDI
TheVectorfeaturesinteractwithMIDIintwodifferent
ways:throughtheVectorJoystick,andthroughthe
VectorCCControl.
TheVectorJoysticksendsandreceivestwoMIDI
controllers:onefortheXaxis,andtheotherfortheY
axis.InGlobalmode,youcanassignthesetoanyMIDI
CCnumbersyoulike.ThedefaultsareCC#118forthe
Xaxis,andCC#119fortheYaxis.
TheVectorJoystickanditsCCscontroltheVector
position,inconjunctionwiththeVectorEG.
TheVectorCCControl,ontheotherhand,isgenerated
bytheVectorposition.Normally,thiswillonlyaffect
internalsoundsandeffects.Ifyoulike,however,you
canalsoenableaGlobalparametertosendthese
generatedCCstoexternalMIDIdevices.
FormoreinformationonVectorSynthesis,see15:
VectorControlonpage 46oftheParameterGuide.
+127
+127 127
Y-Axis
X-Axis
X value: 90
Vector Point
Y value: +50
0
0
+127
+127 127
Y-Axis
X-Axis
0
0
56
Effects
Effectsarecoveredintheirownsectionofthemanuals,
sowewontgointotoomuchdetailhere.Seethecross
referencesbelowformoreinformation.
Insert Effects
InsertEffectsletyousendeitherindividualOscillators
ortheentireProgramthroughupto12effects,in
series.Youcanuseanytypeofeffects,fromdistortions
andcompressorstochorusesandreverbs.TheInsert
Effectscanberoutedtothemainoutputs,ortoanyof
theindividualoutputs.
Formoreinformation,seeInserteffectsonpage 202.
Master Effects
TherearetwoMasterEffects,whichareaccessed
throughSends1and2.Thesearebestsuitedtoeffects
suchasreverbsanddelays,butyoucanusethemwith
anytypeofeffect.
Formoreinformation,seeMastereffectson
page 203.
Total Effects
ThetwoTotalEffectsarededicatedtoprocessingthe
mainL/Routputs.Theyreideallysuitedtooverallmix
effects,suchascompression,limiting,andEQbutas
withtheothereffectssections,youcanuseanytypeof
effectthatyoulike.
Formoreinformation,seeProgramP9:Master/Total
Effectonpage 143oftheParameterGuide.
Automatically importing a Program into Sequencer mode
TheAutoSongSetupfeaturecopiesthecurrent
ProgramorCombinationintoaSong,andthenputs
youreplaying,youcanusethisfunctiontostart
recordingimmediately.Todoso:
1. HolddowntheENTERkeyandpressthe
SEQUENCERREC/WRITEkey.
TheSetuptoRecorddialogboxwillopenandaskAre
yousure?
2. PressOK.
YouwillautomaticallyenterSequencermode,andwill
beintherecordreadystate.
3. PresstheSTART/STOPkeytostartthesequencer
andbeginrecording.
Vector CC Control
Vector CC MIDI Output
Vector Synthesis System
Vector Volume Control
Vector EG
Vector Joystick
Vector Joystick
MIDI In
VJS X and Y modes
Programswitch:
Enable CC control
Programswitch:
Enable Volume control
Global switch:
Vector MIDI Out
Vector Joystick
Vector CC Control
scale
X+/ and Y+/
CC Assignments
Vector CC Modulation of
Programand FX Parameters
Vector Modulation of
Oscillator Volume
Osc 1/ 2 Center Volume
and Equal Power settings
Vector CC MIDI Output
Global Controllers
MIDI CC Assignments
Defaults: X=118, Y=119
57
Playing and editing Combinations
Playing Combinations
Whats a Combination?
Combinations,orCombisforshort,letyousplitand
layerupto16Programsatonce.
ACombiismadeupof16Timbres.EachTimbrehasa
Program,alongwithparametersforkeyandvelocity
zones,mixersettings,MIDIchannelandcontroller
filtering,andsoon.
AswithPrograms,eachCombihas12InsertEffects,2
MasterEffects,and2TotalEffects,forshapingand
transformingthesoundsoftheindividualTimbres.
Finally,Combiscanuse4KARMAmodulesatonce,
forcomplexandlayeredgeneratedeffects.
Selecting Combinations
Thereareseveraldifferentwaystoselect
Combinations.Eachoneisconvenientinadifferent
way:
Usingthefrontpanelbuttons,valueslider,and
valueknob,youcanselectCombinationsquickly
viaphysicalcontrols
SelectingbyBankandnumber(viathetouch
screen)letsyoubrowsethroughallofthe
Combinationsinmemory,tofindtheonethatyou
want
SelectingbyCombinationcategory(viathetouch
screen)letsyoufilterCombinationsbysoundtype,
suchasPianosorDrums
UsingafootswitchletsyouchangeCombinations
evenwhilebothhandsarebusyplayingonthe
keyboardconvenientforliveapplications
MIDIprogramchangemessagesletyouselect
Combinationsremotely,fromeitheraMIDI
sequenceroranexternalMIDIcontroller
Set Lists
CombinationscanalsobeselectedinSetLists,along
withProgramsandSongs.Formoreinformation,see
SetListsonpage 113.
Overview: Combination Banks
KRONOSshipsfromthefactorywithhundredsof
factoryprogrammedCombinations.Youcancreate
yourownoriginalcombinationsbyeditingthese
factorysetcombinations,orbyinitializinga
combinationandstartingfromscratch.
Over1,400Combinationslotsareleftopenforyour
ownprogramming,oradditionalsoundlibraries.
TheseCombinationsareorganizedinto14Banksof128
Combinationseach,asdescribedbelow.Youcanalso
storemanymoreCombinationsontheinternaldrive,
oronexternalUSB2.0devices.
FormoredetailsonthefactoryCombinations,please
refertotheVoiceNameList.
YoucanplayaCombinationandresampleyour
performance,orsampleanexternalaudiosourcewhile
listeningtothesoundofaCombination.
Combinationbankcontents
1. MakesurethattheCOMBIbuttonislit.
ThismeansthatyoureinCombinationmode,inwhich
youcanselectandeditCombinations.Ifthebutton
isntlit,pressitnow;itwilllightup,andthemain
CombinationPlaypagewillappear.
2. GotothemainCombinationPlaypage.
ThemainPlaypageshowstheselectedProgram,
status,pan,andvolumefortimbres116.
3. MakesurethattheCombinationnameisselected.
Ifitisnotselected,gototheCombinationP0:Play
pageandtouchtheCombinationsname,sothatits
highlighted.
4. UsetheVALUEcontrollerstoselectthe
Combinationnumberthatyouwishtoplay.
Youcanusethefollowingmethodstoselecta
Combination.
TurntheValuedial.
5. PressaBANKbutton(INTorUSERAG)to
switchbanks.
WhenyouselectadifferentBank,thebuttonsLEDwill
light,andtheselectedbankwillappearontheupper
leftsideoftheLCDscreen.
Forexample,toselectbankINTB,presstheIBbutton
inthetoprowofBankbuttons.TheIBbuttonwill
light,andthenameINTBwillappearintheupperleft
oftheLCDscreen.
Bank No. Description
INTAC 000127
Factory Combinations
INT-D 000095
INT-D 096127
User Combinations
INTEG,
USERAG
000127
58
Selecting by Bank and number
YoucanselectCombinationsfromalistorganizedby
Combinationbank.
1. PresstheCombinationSelectpopupbutton.
TheBank/CombinationSelectdialogappears.
Bank/CombinationSelectmenu:
Inthisillustration,bankINTAisselected.Theliston
therightshowstheCombinationscontainedinthat
bank.
2. Pressthetabsontheleftsideofthedisplayto
selectabank.
3. Pressoneofthenamesinthelisttoselecta
Combination.
TheselectedCombinationwillbehighlighted,andthe
keyboardwillimmediatelyswitchtothenewsound.
4. Ifyoulike,playafewnotestohearthenew
Combination.
YoucanplaythenewCombinationwhilethemenuis
stillshowing,withoutneedingtopressOK.
5. Whenyouaresatisfiedwiththeselected
Combination,presstheOKbuttontoclosethe
popupmenu.
IfyoupresstheCancelbutton,theselectionyoumade
herewillbediscarded,andyouwillreturntothe
Combinationthathadbeenselectedbeforeyouopened
themenu.
Selecting by Category
YoucanselectCombinationsfromwithinacategory,
suchaskeyboard,organ,bass,anddrums.When
shippedfromthefactory,theCombinationsare
organizedinto16categories,eachwithseveralsub
categories.Therearealso2morecategories,initially
namedUser16andUser17,whichyoucanuseand
renameasdesired.
1. PresstheCategorypopupbutton.
TheCategory/CombinationSelectdialogappears.
Category/CombinationSelectmenu
Intheillustrationabove,theSynthcategoryisselected.
ThelistontherightshowstheCombinationswhich
belongtothatcategory.
Combination Select Favorite Category (Category/Combination) Popup button
Category (Category/Program)
Popup button
Combination Select
Popup button
Status
Play/Mute
Solo On/Of
Pan
Volume
Bank/Program Select Popup button
Program Select
Timbre 01
Playing Combinations Selecting Combinations
59
2. Pressthetabslocatedtotheleftsideofthedisplay
toselectadifferentcategory.
Thenameoftheselectedcategorywillbedisplayedin
fullinthelowerleftofthedisplay.
3. Optionally,focusonamorespecificgroupof
soundsbyselectingasubcategoryfromthe
secondcolumnoftabs.
Thefullnameofthesubcategoryalsoappearsinthe
lowerleftofthedisplay.
4. PressoneoftheCombinationnamesinthecenter
areatoselectaCombination.
TheselectedCombinationwillbehighlighted.
5. Whenyouaresatisfiedwiththeselected
Combination,presstheOKbuttontoclosethe
popupmenu.
IfyoupresstheCancelbutton,yourselectionwillbe
discarded,andyouwillreturntotheCombinationthat
hadbeenselectedwhenyouopenedthepopupmenu.
Using the Favorites check-box
TheBankandCategoryselectpopupsbothincludea
Favoritecheckboxatthebottomofthescreen.This
letsyoutrimthelisttoshowonlyCombinations
youvemarkedasfavorites.Formoreinformation,see
UsingtheFavoritescheckboxonpage 29.
Using a footswitch to select
Combinations
Youcanassignafootswitchtostepthrough
Combinationsonebyone,eithergoingup(0,1,2,3,
etc.)orgoingdown(3,2,1etc.).Thisletsyouchange
Combinationswithoutusingyourhandsgreatfor
quickProgramchangesinliveperformancesituations.
Formoreinformation,seeUsingafootswitchtoselect
Programsonpage 29.
Selecting Combinations via MIDI
YoucansendMIDIProgramChangemessagesto
KRONOSfromexternalMIDIdevices,suchas
computersequencersorotherMIDIcontrollers.In
conjunctionwithMIDIBankSelect,youcanusethese
toselectanyCombinationfromall14Banks.
Formoreinformation,seeSelectingcombinations,
Using controllers to modify the sound
Youcanusethejoystick,ribboncontroller,SW1,SW2,
VectorJoystick,VALUEslider,keyboard,footpedals
andswitches,andtheControlPanelknobs,sliders,and
switchestocontrolthesound.
Formoreinformation,seethecorresponding
explanationforPrograms:UsingControllerson
page 31.
Drum Track
TheDrumTrackintegrateswithalltheotherfeatures
ofCombinationmode,includingKARMA.Fordetails,
seeUsingtheDrumTrackinCombinationmodeon
page 240.
60
Easy Combination editing
Changing the Programs within a Combi
ChangingtheProgramsassignedtothe16Timbresisa
quickwaytodramaticallyalterthesoundofthe
Combination.
TherearetwowaystoselectProgramsforaTimbre:
SelectingProgramsfromthefrontpanelandLCD,
eitherbyBankorbyCategory
SelectingProgramsviaMIDIprogramchange
messages
Note:MIDIprogramchangesonlyworkforTimbres
whoseStatusissettoINT.
Selecting Programs for Combi Tracks
TochangetheProgramassignedtoaTimbre:
1. GototheProgSelect/MixertabofthePlaypage.
Thispageshowsall16Timbresatonce,includingtheir
Programassignments,volume,pan,play/mute,solo,
andmore.
2. TouchthepopupbuttonatthetopofTimbre1.
ThisistheCategoryselectbutton.Itbringsupa
windowwhichallowsyoutoselectaProgramby
Category,identicaltothesimilarfunctioninProgram
mode.
3. SelectaProgram,andpressOK.
TheCategorySelectwindowwilldisappear.Notethat
thenewProgramisnowselectedforTimbre1.
4. Pressthepopupbuttondirectlyunderthe
Categorybutton.
ThisistheBank/Numberselectbutton.Itbringsupa
windowwhichletsyouselectProgramsbyBank
again,justlikethesimilarwindowinProgrammode.
5. SelectadifferentProgram,andpressOK.
TheProgramintheTimbreisnowchangedtotheone
youjustselected.Also,theBank/Numberparameteris
nowhighlighted,whichmeansthatwecanusethe
frontpanelbuttonstoselectBanksandPrograms.
6. PressoneofthefrontpanelBankbuttons.
or:
ToselectbanksUSERAAGG,pressandholda
pairofIandUBANKbuttonstogether.For
example,toselectbankUSERCC,pressandhold
theICbutton,andthenpresstheUCbutton.
NoticethatTimbre1sBankandProgramchangeto
matchtheselectedBank.
7. UseInc/Dec,theVALUEdial,orthenumeric
keypadtoselecttheProgram.
Adjusting the mix
YoucanuseboththeControlSurfaceandtheLCDto
setthevolume,pan,andEQsettingsforeachTimbre,
aswellastheirPLAY/MUTEandSoloOn/Offstates.
Setting mix parameters from the LCD
1. GototheProgSelect/MixertabofthePlaypage.
Thispageshowsthevolume,pan,play/mute,solo,and
Programassignmentsforall16Timbres.
2. SelecttheonscreenVolumesliderforTimbre1.
3. UseInc/Dec,theVALUEdial,orthenumeric
keypadtosetthevolumeasdesired.
4. SelecttheonscreenPanknobforTimbre1,and
edititsvalueasdesired.
Timbrepaninteractswiththepanstoredinthe
Program.AsettingofC064reproducesthePrograms
oscillatorpansettings.AdjustingtheTimbrePanwill
movethesoundtoleftorrightwhilepreservingthe
panrelationshipbetweentheoscillators.Asettingof
L001isfarleft,andR127isfarright.
Using the Control Surface for the mix
Youcanalsoeditthemixerparametersdirectlyfrom
theControlSurface,eightTimbresatatime.
1. PresstheTIMBRE/TRACKbuttonunder
CONTROLASSIGN,sothatthe18LEDlightsup.
ThebuttonhastwoLEDs:oneforTimbres18,andthe
otherforTimbres916.Pressthebuttontoswitch
betweenthetwo.
2. Optionally,gototheControlSurfacetabofthe
Playpage.
untiltheINDIVIDUALPANLED
lightsup.
Thismakesknob1controlTimbre1s
pan,andknob2controlTimbre2span,
andsoon.
4. Usesliders18toadjustthevolumesofTimbres1
8,respectively.
5. Useknobs18toadjustthepanpositionsof
Timbres18.
untiltheCHANNELSTRIPLED
lightsup.
effectssends.
7. PressMIXSELECTbutton1.
TheChannelStripnowcontrolsthePan,EQ,andFX
SendsforTimbre1.
8. Useknobs26toadjusttheTimbress3bandEQ,
andknobs7and8tocontroltheTimbresEffects
Sends1and2.
Easy Combination editing Easy KARMA editing
61
Internally,thesystemfiguresouthowtheOscillatoris
routedtotheMasterEffects,andautomaticallyadjusts
theappropriateeffectssendparameters.
9. PressMIXSELECTbutton2.
TheChannelStripnowcontrolsthePan,EQ,andFX
SendsforTimbre2.EachTimbrehasitsown,
dedicatedstereo3bandEQ.
10.EdittheChannelStripforTimbre2asdesired.
NoticethatPanisavailable,indifferentways,with
bothsettingsoftheMIXERKNOBSbutton.
Easy KARMA editing
KARMAstandsforKayAlgorithmicRealtimeMusic
Architecture.Itsanimmenselypowerful
performancetool,andcanprovideawiderangeof
musicaleffectsincluding:
Arpeggiation
Drumandinstrumentgrooves
ComplexCCgestures(asifitwasautomatically
movingknobsorjoysticksforyou)
Musicalphrasegeneration
Anycombinationoftheabove
andmuchmore.
YoucancontrolmanyKARMAparametersdirectly
fromthefrontpanel.
Turning KARMA on and off
TheoverallcontrolforKARMAistheON/OFFbutton.
Turnthebuttonon(LEDlit)toenableKARMA;turn
thebuttonoff(LEDoff)todisableKARMA.
LATCH button
WhenLATCHisturnedon,KARMAwillcontinueto
playevenafteryouvestoppedplayingonthe
keyboard,drum/chordpads,orMIDIIn.
Thisisconvenientwhenyouwanttoplayontopofa
KARMAgeneratedgroove,forinstance.
Selecting KARMA Scenes
EachCombicanhaveupto8KARMAScenes,which
arepresetsfortheKARMAparameters.Different
Scenesmayproducedramaticallydifferenteffects.You
canselectScenesdirectlyfromtheControlSurface:
CONTROLASSIGN.
TheControlSurfacewillswitchtoRealTimeKnobs
andKARMAmode.
2. SelectScenesbypressingthetoprowofControl
Panelswitches.
NotethatnotallCombiswillnecessarilyhave8
differentScenes.
Editing KARMA parameters via the
sliders
YoucanalsoeditvariousKARMAparametersinreal
time,usingtheControlSurfacesliders.Thespecific
parameterswillvarydependingontheCombi,soit
maybehelpfultolookattheLCD:
CONTROLASSIGN.
TheLCDwillnowshowtheKARMAparameters
assignedtotheslidersandswitches.
3. MovethesliderstochangetheKARMA
parameters.
FormoreinformationonKARMA,seeUsing
KARMAonpage 213.
62
Detailed Combination editing
YoucaneditanyoftheCombinationsshippedwith
KRONOS,oryoucanstartwithaninitialized
Combinationtocreatesoundsfromscratch.
Naturally,youcanusethefactoryProgramstocreate
newCombis,oruseyourowncustomPrograms.If
youreintheprocessofeditingaPrograminProgram
mode,andyouusethePrograminaCombi,youllhear
theeditedversioninCombimodeaswell.
AswithPrograms,youcandomanybasicedits
directlyfromthefrontpanelControlSurfaceknobs,
switches,andsliders,withouteverdelvingdeeperinto
theLCDinterface.Forinstance,youcanusetheknobs
tochangeattackandreleasetimes,makesounds
brighterordarker,altereffectsdepths,modulate
KARMAsphrasegeneration,andsoon.Fordetailson
howtheseworkinProgrammode,seeQuickedits
usingtheknobs,sliders, and switchesonpage 39.
A suggested approach for editing
First,selectaProgramforeachTimbre,ontheProgram
Select/MixertaboftheP1:Playpage.(Notethatyou
donthavetouseall16Timbres!)
Next,createanydesiredkeyboardorvelocitysplits,
layers,orcrossfadesbetweenthedifferentTimbres.
YoucandothisontheKeyboardZonesandVelocity
ZonestabsoftheP3:MIDIFilter/Zonespage.
Afterthis,adjustthevolumesoftheTimbres(backon
theProgramSelect/Mixertab),andsetupanyother
Timbreparametersasdesired.
Toaddfinishingtouchestothesound,setuptheInsert,
Master,andTotalEffectsasdesired(ontheP8:Insert
EffectsandP:9Master/TotalEffectspages,respectively.)
Theseeffectscanbedifferentfromthoseofthe
individualProgramsinProgrammode,ifdesired.
Inaddition,youcanmakeKARMAsettings(ontheP7:
KARMApage)andcontrollersettings(ontheP3:MIDI
Filter/Zonespage)tocreatethefinishedCombination.
Soloing timbres
YoucanusetheControlSurfaceSolofunctiontolisten
totheCombisindividualTimbres.Formore
information,seeSoloswitchandSelectswitches18
onpage 430.
Using COMPARE
Whenyoureintheprocessofeditingasound,
pressingtheCOMPAREbuttonwillrecallthesaved
versionofthesound,asitwasbeforeyoustarted
editing.Toindicatethatyouarelisteningtothesaved
version,thebuttonsLEDwilllightup.
PressingCOMPAREagainreturnsyoutotheversion
youareediting,andtheLEDwillgooutagain.
IfyoueditwhiletheCOMPARELEDislit,thekeywill
againgodarkandyourpreviouseditswillbelost.
Resetting individual controls
TheRESETCONTROLSbuttonletsyourevertan
individualknob,slider,orswitchtoitssavedsetting.
Formoreinformation,seeResettingindividual
controlsonpage 42.
Combination overview
Combination page structure
ThemainP0:Playpageoffersaccesstothemost
importantaspectsofCombis,including:
SelectingandplayingCombinations
SelectingindividualPrograms
MakingbasicsettingsforKARMA
Editingmixersettingsandsoundparametersvia
theControlSurface
Quicksamplingandresampling
Thedetailededitingpages,P1throughP9,giveyou
moreindepthaccesstotheCombispowerfulkeyand
velocityzones,MIDIfiltering,VectorSynthesis,
KARMA,DrumTrack,andEffects.
Page Main features
P0: Play
Select and play Combinations
Perform easy edits using the Realtime
Knobs, KARMA sliders, and Tone Adjust
Adjust mix parameters including
volume, pan, EQ, and send levels
Select a Program for each timbre
Quick sampling and re-sampling
P1:EQ/Vector/
Control
Adjust EQ settings for each Timbre
Assign functions to SW1/2 and Real-Time
knobs 5-8
Set up Vector synthesis
Set up the Drum Track
Set up the on-screen pads
P2: Timbre Params
Set various parameters for each timbre,
such as MIDI channel, OSC select, Pitch
etc.
P3: MIDI
Filter/Zone
Set up MIDI transmission/reception
filters for each Timbre.
Set up keyboard and velocity zones for
each Timbre.
P4: ---
P5: ---
P6: ---
P7: KARMA Make detailed KARMA settings.
P8: Insert Effects
Select insert effects and make settings
for them. Specify send levels to the
Master effects and routing to the
outputs.
P9: Master and
Total Effects
Select Master send effects and Total
effects, and adjust their settings.
Page Main features
Detailed Combination editing Layers, Splits, and Velocity Switches
63
Fordetailsonhowtoaccesseachmodeandpage,
pleaseseeBasicoperationsonpage 17.
YoucansamplefromwithinCombinationmode
includingresamplingtheCombinationitself.Formore
Combinationstructureandcorrespondingpages
Layers, Splits, and Velocity Switches
WithinaCombination,youcanusenotenumberand
velocitytodeterminewhichTimbreswillsound.
TheProgramsassignedtoeachTimbrecansoundin
threeways:aspartofalayer,asplit,oravelocity
switch.ACombinationcanbesettouseanyoneof
thesemethods,ortousetwoormoreofthesemethods
simultaneously.
Layer
LayerscausetwoormoreProgramstosound
simultaneouslywhenanoteisplayed.
Split
SplitscausedifferentProgramstosoundondifferent
areasofthekeyboard.
Velocity Switch
VelocitySwitchescausedifferentProgramstosound
dependingonthevelocity(howhardyouplaythe
notes).
OnKRONOS,youcanuseadifferentProgramforeach
ofuptosixteenTimbres,andcombinetwoormoreof
theabovemethodstocreateevenmorecomplex
setups.
Asanadditionalpossibility,youcansettheslopefora
keyzoneorvelocityzonesothatthevolume
diminishesgradually.Thisletsyouchangeasplitintoa
keyboardcrossfade,oravelocityswitchintoavelocity
crossfade.
Parameters
Parameters
Parameters
Parameters Timbre2
Timbre3
Timbre16
Timbre4
Timbre1 Parameters
Program
Program
Program
Program
Program
P11, P22, etc. indicate the KRONOS on-screen pages and tabs.
AUDIO OUTPUT
INDIVIDUAL 1,2,3,4
AUDIO OUTPUT
L/MONO, R
Master
Efects
1, 2: P9
Total
Efects
1, 2: P9
Insert
Efects
112: P8
Controllers: P1 - 8
Pads: P1 - 9
Vector: P1 - 5,6,7
KARMA: P7
Timbre
Insert Efects
Master Efects
Individual Outputs
REC Bus
FX Control Bus
Routing: P8-1, 2
Drum Track: P1 - 3 Audio Input: P0 - 8
Tone Adjust: P0 - 9
3Band EQ
3Band EQ
3Band EQ
3Band EQ
3Band EQ
Progra m B
Progra m A
Layer:
Two or more programs sound
simultaneously.
Progra m B Progra m A
Split:
Different programs will sound in
different areas of the keyboard.
Progra m A
Progra m B
Keyboard playing
dynamics
Strong
Soft
Velocity Switch:
Keyboard playing dynamics
(velocity) switches between
different programs.
Progra m C
Progra m D
Progra m B
Progra m A
Keyboard playing
dynamics
Strong
Soft
Example:
B and C/ D are split. In the lower
keyboard range, A and B are
layered. In the higher keyboard
range, C and D are switched by
velocity and layered with A.
Progra m A Progra m B
Keyboard X-Fade (keyboard
crossfade):
As you play fromlow notes to
high notes, the volume of A
will fade out, and the volume
of B will fade in.
64
Creating Key Splits and Layers
LetscreateaCombiwhichcombinesbothsplitsand
layers,likethediagrambelow:
1. GototheProgSelect/Mixerpage.
2. SelectapianosoundforTimbre1,abrasssound
forTimbre2,andastringssoundforTimbre3.
3. GototheMIDItaboftheP2:TimbreParameters
page.
4. ForTimbres13,setStatustoINTandMIDI
ChanneltoGch(theGlobalChannel).
5. GototheKeyboardZonestaboftheMIDI
Filter/Zonespage.
6. SetTimbre1sTopKeytoG9,anditsBottomKey
toC4.
7. SetTimbres2and3toaTopKeyofB3,anda
BottomKeyofC1.
Youcanalsoenterthesevaluesbyselectingthe
parameter,andthenholdingdowntheENTERkey
andplayinganoteonthekeyboard.
Key Zone Slope
Inadditiontohardsplits,inwhichthesound
changesabruptly,youcanusetheSlopeparametersto
graduallyfadeasoundinoroutoverarangeofkeys.
Intheexampleabove,youcouldsettheBottomKeyof
timbre1toG3,andsettheTopKeyoftimbre2toG4,
sothatthesetwotimbresoverlap.
Next,ifyousettheBottomSlopeoftimbre1to12,and
settheTopSlopeoftimbre2to12,thesoundwill
changegraduallyinsteadofchangingsuddenly.
Creating Velocity Switches
Next,letscreateasimplevelocityswitched
Combination,likethediagrambelow:
1. GototheProgSelect/Mixerpage.
2. SelectabrasssoundforTimbre1,andastrings
soundforTimbre2.
3. GototheMIDItaboftheP2:TimbreParameters
page.
4. ForTimbres1and2,setStatustoINTandMIDI
ChanneltoGch(theGlobalChannel).
5. GototheVelocityZonestaboftheMIDI
Filter/Zonespage.
6. SetTimbre1sTopVelocityto127,anditsBottom
Velocityto64.
7. SetTimbre2toaTopVelocityof63,andaBottom
Velocityof1.
Velocity Zone Slope
SimilartoKeyZoneSlopes,asdescribedabove,these
letyoufadeinandfadeoutsoundsgraduallyovera
velocityrange,insteadofasimplehardswitch.
Inthecaseoftheaboveexample,youcouldsetthe
velocityzonesofthetwoTimbressothattheypartially
overlap.Then,settheTopSlopeandBottomSlopeso
thatthesoundchangesgradually,insteadofchanging
suddenlybetweenvelocityvaluesof63and64.
MIDI Settings
Timbre Parameters MIDI page
Status
ThiscontrolsthestatusofMIDIandtheinternaltone
generatorforeachTimbre.Normally,ifyoureplaying
aninternalProgram,thisshouldbesettoINT.
IfthestatusissettoOff,EXT,orEX2,thatinternal
soundswillnotbeplayed.Offsimplydisablesthe
Timbreentirely.TheEXTandEX2settingsallowthe
TimbretocontrolanexternalMIDIdevice.Formore
information,seeStatusonpage 454oftheParameter
Guide.
Bank Select (when status=EX2)
WhentheStatusissettoEX2,theseparametersallow
youtotransmitMIDIBankSelectmessagesfor
changingbanksonexternalMIDIdevices.
MIDI Channel
TimbresthatyouwishtoplayfromKRONOSs
keyboardmustbesettotheglobalMIDIchannel.Your
playingonthekeyboardistransmittedontheglobal
MIDIchannel,andwillsoundanytimbrethatmatches
thischannel.NormallyyouwillsetthistoGch.When
thisissettoGch,theMIDIchannelofthetimbrewill
alwaysmatchtheglobalMIDIchannel,evenifyou
changetheglobalMIDIchannel.
Onsomepreloadedcombinations,Timbresusedby
KARMAmayhavetheirMIDIChannelssetto
somethingotherthanGch.Thesewillbetimbres
thatplayonlywhenKARMAisonaveryuseful
techniqueforcreatingKARMAlized
combinations.
Formoreinformation,see71c:MIDII/Oon
page 471oftheParameterGuide.Inparticular,notethe
relationshipsbetweenKARMAassignmentsandMIDI
Channel.
C1 C4 G9 B3
Piano Timbre 1
Brass Timbre 2
Strings Timbre 3
127
64
63
1
Strings
Velocity
switch
Timbre 1
Timbre 2
Brass
Detailed Combination editing Altering Programs to fit within a Combination
65
MIDI filter settings
ForeachMIDIFilteritem,youcanspecifywhetheror
notthecorrespondingMIDImessagewillbe
transmittedandreceived.Thecheckeditemswillbe
transmittedandreceived.
TheMIDIfiltersdontturnthefunctionsthemselveson
oroff.Instead,thefilterjustcontrolswhetherornot
thatMIDImessagewillbetransmittedandreceived.
Forexample,ifportamentoison,portamentowillbe
appliedtotheinternalKRONOSsoundevenif
PortamentoSWCC#65isunchecked.
Asanotherexample,letssaythatyouveselecteda
bassProgramforTimbre1,andapianoProgramfor
Timbre2,withthegoalofcreatingabass/pianosplit.
Youcouldmakethefollowingsettingssothatpressing
thedamperpedalaffectsonlyTimbre2spianosound:
1. GototheMIDIFilter1taboftheMIDI
Filter/Zonespage.
2. ChecktheEnableDamperboxforTimbre1.
3. UnchecktheEnableDamperboxforTimbre2.
Altering Programs to fit within a Combination
YoucanmakevariouschangestoProgramswithinthe
contextofaparticularCombination,tomakethemfit
betterwithotherPrograms,ortocreateparticular
soniceffects.Thesechangesdonotaffecttheoriginal
Programs,orhowthoseProgramssoundinother
Combinations.
Timbre Parameters: OSC
Force OSC Mode
NormallythisshouldbesettoPRG,sothatthesound
willplayassetbytheoriginalProgram.
Ifyouwishtoforceapolyphonicprogramtosound
monophonically,setthiseithertoMN(Mono)orLGT
(Legato).Conversely,setthistoPolyifyouwishto
forceamonophonicprogramtoplaypolyphonically.
Formoreinformation,seeForceOSCMode,on
OSC Select
Normally,thisshouldbesettoBTH(Both).
IfthetimbreisusingaprogramwhoseOscillator
ModeisDoubleorDoubleDrums,andyouwantonly
OSC1orOSC2(notboth)tosound,setthistoOSC1
(onlyOSC1willsound)orOSC2(onlyOSC2will
sound).
Portamento
Normally,thisshouldbesettoPRG.
IftheProgramusesportamento,butyoudliketo
disablethisforthecurrentCombination,setthis
parametertoOff.
Conversely,ifyouwanttoforcetheportamentotobe
on,orjusttochangetheportamentotime,setthistoa
valueof001127.Theportamentowillchangetouse
thenewlyspecifiedtime.
66
Timbre Parameters: Pitch
Transpose, Detune (BPM Adjust)
Theseparametersadjustthepitchofthetimbre.
Inalayertypecombination,youcansettwoor
moretimbrestothesameprogram,andcreatea
richersoundbyusingTransposetoshifttheirpitch
apartbyanoctaveorbyusingDetunetocreatea
slightdifferenceinpitchbetweenthetwo.
Insplittypecombinations,youcanuseTranspose
toshiftthepitch(insemitoneunits)ofthe
programsspecifiedforeachkeyzone.
Ifyouwishtochangetheplaybackpitchofadrum
program,useDetune.IfyouchangetheTranspose
setting,therelationshipbetweennotesanddrum
soundswillchange.
Adjusting the BPM of multisamples or
samples created in Sampling mode
Ifatimbresprogramusesmultisamplesorsamples
thatyoucreatedinSamplingmode(orloadedinDisk
mode)ataspecificBPMvalue,youcanusethepage
menucommandDetuneBPMAdjusttocallupanew
BPMvalue.ThischangestheBPMbyadjustingthe
playbackpitch.
Formoreinformation,seeDetuneBPMAdjust,on
Use Programs Scale, Scale
Thisspecifiesthescaleforeachtimbre.Ifyoucheck
UseProgramsScale,thescalespecifiedbythe
programwillbeused.Timbresforwhichthisisnot
checkedwillusetheScalesetting.
Delay
YoucansetsomeTimbressothattheydontsound
immediatelyatnoteon.Thiscancreatecooleffects,
andmoredramaticlayers.
YoucanspecifythedelayforeachTimbreeitherin
milliseconds(ms),orinrhythmicvalueswhichsyncto
thesystemtempo.
IfyousettheDelaytoKeyOff,theTimbrewillsound
whenthenoteisreleased.
Editing Programs with Tone Adjust
UsingToneAdjust,youcanmakedetailededitsto
ProgramswithinthecontextoftheCombi.Theseedits
willnotaffecttheoriginalProgram,oranyother
CombiswhichusetheProgram.ToeditaProgram
withToneAdjust:
1. PresstheTONEADJ/EQbuttonunderCONTROL
ASSIGN.
TheTONEADJUSTLEDwilllightup.
ThispagemirrorstheControlSurface.Itsveryuseful
withToneAdjust,sinceitshowsyoutheparameter
3. SelecttheTimbrewhoseparametersyoudliketo
adjust.
ThiscorrespondstotheTimbreselectedin
TIMBRE/TRACKmode.Youcansetthisusingthe
TimbreparameterontherightsideoftheLCD,orby
holdingdowntheTONEADJ/EQbuttonandpressing
anyoftheControlPanelswitches.Thetoprowselects
Timbres18,andthebottomrowselectsTimbres916.
4. Editthecontrolsasdesired.
Inadditiontoeditingthevalues,youcanalsochange
theassignmentsofToneAdjustparameterstothe
sliders,knobs,andswitches.Formoreinformation,see
UsingToneAdjustonpage 41.
Effects
Effectsarecoveredintheirownsectionofthemanuals,
sowewontgointotoomuchdetailhere.
Insert Effects
InsertEffectsletyousendeitherindividualOscillators
ortheentireProgramthroughupto12effects,in
series.Youcanuseanytypeofeffects,fromdistortions
andcompressorstochorusesandreverbs.TheInsert
Effectscanberoutedtothemainoutputs,ortoanyof
theindividualoutputs.
Formoreinformation,seeInserteffectsonpage 202.
Master Effects
TherearetwoMasterEffects,whichareaccessed
throughSends1and2.Thesearebestsuitedtoeffects
suchasreverbsanddelays,butyoucanusethemwith
anytypeofeffect.
Formoreinformation,seeMastereffectson
page 203.
Detailed Combination editing Automatically importing a Combination into Sequencer mode
67
Total Effects
ThetwoTotalEffectsarededicatedtoprocessingthe
mainL/Routputs.Theyreideallysuitedtooverallmix
effects,suchascompression,limiting,andEQbutas
withtheothereffectssections,youcanuseanytypeof
effectthatyoulike.
Automatically importing a Combination into Sequencer mode
TheAutoSongSetupfeatureautomaticallyappliesthe
settingsofthecurrentCombinationtoasong.
youreplayingaprogramorcombination,youcanuse
thisfunctiontostartrecordingimmediately.
HolddowntheENTERkeyandpressthe
SEQUENCERREC/WRITEkey.TheSetuptoRecord
dialogboxwillopenandaskAreyousure?.Press
OK.YouwillautomaticallyenterSequencermode,
andwillbeintherecordreadystate.Pressthe
START/STOPkeytostartthesequencerandbegin
recording.
Saving your edits
Onceyouvetweakedthesoundtoperfection,youll
wanttosaveyourwork.Tosaveyouredits:
1. SelecttheWriteCombinationcommandfromthe
pagemenu,attheupperrighthandcornerofthe
screen.
theCombination.Optionally,youcanalsoselectanew
location,orchangetheCombinationsname.
dialog.
YoucangivetheCombinationadescriptivename
usingtheonscreenkeyboard.
themainSavedialog.
popupbuttonnexttoCombinationtobringupthe
savelocationdialog.
5. SelectalocationtosavetheeditedCombination.
YoucanwritetoanylocationinbanksINTandUSER
AG.Toavoidoverwritingthefactorysounds,itssafer
touseaslotinoneoftheemptyUserbanks.
pressOKagain.
Formoreinformation,seeWritingProgramsand
Combinationsonpage 182.
afterwritingtheCombination.Thisallowsthe
systemtimetocompletetheprocess,whichincludes
savingabackupofthedatatotheinternaldisk.
Saving to disk
YoucanalsosaveandmanageCombinationsonthe
internaldiskandUSBstoragedevices.Formore
information,seeSavingtodisks,CDs,andUSB
mediaonpage 186.
68
69
Creating songs (Sequencer mode)
Sequencer overview
About the KRONOS sequencer
TheKRONOSsequencercanholdupto200songsand
400,000MIDIeventsor300,000audioevents.Itconsists
ofa16trackMIDIsequenceranda16trackaudio
recorder,givingyouatotalof32tracks.
ViaMIDI,youcanrecordfromandplaythrough
externalMIDIdevices,aswellastheKRONOS
keyboard,physicalcontrollers,andinternalsounds.
The24bit,48kHzaudiorecordersupports16tracksof
playbackandfoursimultaneouschannelsofrecording.
Audiotrackscanrecordexternalaudiosourcessuchas
guitarsandvocalsaswellastheKRONOSinternal
sounds.Youcanevenrecordmixautomationfor
volumeandpan.
Whenyouvecompletedasong,youcanresampleitto
aWAVEfileanduseDiskmodetoburnyourWAVE
filestoanaudioCDonaUSBCDR/RWdrive(not
included).
WithitsbroadrangeofcapabilitiessuchasIntrack
Sampling,TimeStretch/Slice,KARMA,highquality
effects,andphysicalcontrollers,theKRONOSisthe
idealenvironmentformusicproductionorlive
performance.
Sequencer edits must be saved to disk
Whenyouturnoffthepower,thesettingsmadein
Sequencermodeandthesongdata,andanyuser
patterndatathatyourecordedwillnotbebacked
up.Ifyouwishtokeepthisdata,youmustsaveitto
theinternaldriveoranexternalUSBdevicebefore
turningoffthepower.(YoucouldalsodoaMIDI
datadumptoanexternaldatafiler,ifyouprefer.)
Immediatelyafterthepoweristurnedon,the
KRONOSwillnotcontainanysongdata.Ifyouwish
toplayasongonthesequencer,youmustfirstload
datafromdisk.(Alternatively,youcouldsend
KRONOSaMIDIdatadumpwithSongdata).For
moreinformation,seeLoadingdatafromdiskon
page 190,andReceivingSysExdatadumpson
Sequencer mode structure
Songs
AsongconsistsofMIDItracks116,amastertrack,
audiotracks116,songparameterssuchasthesong
name,Vector,KARMA,DrumTrack,effects,andRPPR
settings,and100userpatterns.
Amaximumof200songscanbeloadedintothe
KRONOSmemoryatonce.Thousandscanbestored
ontheinternaldisk,oronUSBstoragemedia.
MIDItracks116andaudiotracks116eachconsistof
setupparameterslocatedatthestartlocation,and
musicaldatawithinthetrack.Themastertrack
consistsoftempoandtimesignaturedata.
Formoreinformation,seeSetupparameters&
Musicaldataonpage 511oftheParameterGuide.
Song recording and editing
Songrecordingisperformedontracks.Youcanrecord
MIDItracksineitheroftwoways;realtimerecording
orsteprecording.Forrealtimerecordingyoucan
chooseoneofsixrecordingmodes.
Audiotrackscanberecordedinrealtime,orcreated
byaddingWAVEfiles.
YoucaneditMIDItracksbyusingEventEdit
operationstomodifytherecordeddataorinsertnew
data,andbyusingTrackEditoperationssuchas
CreateControlData,whichinsertspitchbend,
aftertouch,orcontrolchangedata.
Youcanalsoeditaudiotracksinavarietyofways
includingEventEditingoperationsthatletyouinsert
ordeleteaudioevents,andRegionEditingoperations.
RegionEditingallowsyoutoselectWAVEfilesandto
editthestart/endaddressesofaWAVEfileinsingle
sampleunits.
Patterns
Therearetwotypesofpatterns:presetpatternsand
userpatterns.
Presetpatterns:Patternssuitablefordrumtracks
arepresetininternalmemory,andcanbeselected
foranysong.
Userpatterns:Eachsongcanhaveupto100
patterns.Whenusingapatterninadifferentsong,
usetheUtilitymenucommandsCopyPatternor
CopyFromSongetc.tocopythepattern.Youcan
setthepatternlengthtooneormoremeasures,as
desired.
70
Patternsalwayscontainonlyasingletrackofmusical
data.Ifyouwanttousepatternsonmultipletracks,
youllneedtouseaseparatepatternforeachtrack.
TousepatternsinaSong,eitherplacetheminaMIDI
trackusingthePuttoMIDITrackmenucommand,or
copythemusingtheCopytoMIDITrackmenu
command.
YoucanalsousepatternswiththeRPPR.Formore
information,seeUsingRPPR(RealtimePattern
Play/Record)onpage 106.
Sequencer patterns and Drum Track patterns
PresetpatternsaredirectlyavailableforuseasDrum
Trackpatterns.
UserpatternscanalsobeusedwiththeDrumTrack,
buttheymustfirstbeconvertedintouserDrumTrack
patterns(viatheConverttoDrumTrackPatternmenu
commandonP5:Pattern/RPPR).
Whenyouconvertauserpattern,itwillbestoredin
internalmemory,andwillnotdisappearevenwhen
youturnoffthepower.
Sequencermodepagestructure
AUDIO OUTPUT
L/MONO, R
AUDIO OUTPUT
INDIVIDUAL 1...4
(Routing: P8)
MIDI Routing 1,2
Audio Routing 1,2
Track
Insert Efects
Master Efects
Individual Outputs
(FX Ctrl BUS)
(REC BUS)
Master Track
Resampling (L/R 2ch Mix)
Tempo and time signature data
Insert Efect 1...12
(P8)
Master Efect 1, 2
(P9)
Total Efect 1, 2
(P9)
Pattern U00...U99
RPPR Setup (P5)
KARMA
(P7)
Vector, Controllers,
Drum Track Setup (P1)
Song
Audio recording function
Parentheses such as (P7) indicate the KRONOS page used for editing.
This is a conceptual diagram of Sequencer mode including the hard disk recording function.
Audio Track 01..16
Setting
parameters
Perfor-
mance
Setting
parameters
Perfor-
mance
Setting
parameters
Perfor-
mance
Setting
parameters
Perfor-
mance
Setting
parameters
Perfor-
mance
Automation events
Automation events
Automation events
Automation events
A utoma ti on events
Audio events Region
Audio events
Audio events
Audio events
Audio events Region
Region
Region Region
Region
MIDI Track 01..16
Setting
parameters
Perfor-
mance data
Setting
parameters
Perfor-
mance data
Setting
parameters
Perfor-
mance data
Setting
parameters
Perfor-
mance data
Setting
parameters
Perfor-
mance data
Internal disk
Sampling memory
(RAM)
Make Audio CD WAVE (Stereo)
WAVE (Mono)
Sample
Sample
Page Explanation
P0: Play/REC
Song playback/recording
Easy editing using the realtime knobs,
KARMA sliders, and Tone Adjust
Edit mix parameters such as volume, pan,
Play/Mute, and Solo On/Off
Select programs for MIDI tracks
Choose the recording mode
Make settings for sampling, resampling,
and audio
P1: EQ/Vector/
Controller
EQ adjustments for each track
Function assignments for the SW1 and
SW2 switches and realtime knobs 58
Vector Synthesis settings
Drum Track settings
Assignments for the on-screen pads
P2: Track
Parameters
Parameter settings for each track (MIDI
channel, OSC selection, pitch settings,
etc.)
P3: MIDI
Filter/Zone
MIDI receive/transmit filter settings for
each track
Keyboard zone and velocity zone settings
for each track
P4: Track Edit Track editing
P5: Pattern/RPPR
Pattern recording and editing
RPPR settings
Convert User patterns to User Drum Track
patterns
P6:
P7: KARMA Detailed KARMA settings
Page Explanation
Sequencer overview Sequencer mode structure
71
Fordetailsonhowtoaccesseachmodeandpage,see
Basicoperationsonpage 17.
YoucansamplefromwithinSequencermode
includingresamplingtheSongitself.Formore
Set Lists
SongscanalsobeselectedinSetLists,alongwith
ProgramsandCombinations.Formoreinformation,
seeSetListsonpage 113.
P8: Insert Effect
Insert effect selection, settings, send level
to master effects, output routing
P9: Master/Total
Effect
Master effect and total effect selection
and settings
Page Explanation
72
Playing Songs
Playback
InordertoplaybackaSonginthesequencer,youmust
firsteitherloadtheSongfromdisk,sendtheSongto
theKRONOSviaMIDISysEx,orrecordanewSong.
Letsstartbyloadingandplayingthedemosongdata.
1. Followtheinstructionsforloadingandplaying
thedemosongsunderListeningtothedemo
songsonpage 1347oftheQuickStartGuide.
Now,letsexperimentwiththedifferentcontrols.
2. PresstheSEQUENCERSTART/STOPbutton.
Pressingthisoncestartsplayback;pressingitagain
stopsplayback.Pressingitathirdtimeresumes
playbackfromwhereitstopped.
Note:SEQUENCERSTART/STOPhasaspecial
functiononP5:Pattern/RPPR.Onthispage,insteadof
playingtheSong,START/STOPplaystheselected
pattern.
3. PresstheLOCATEbuttontoreturntothestartof
theSong.
ThelocatepointdefaultstothestartoftheSong.You
canchangethisasdesired;seeLOCATEsettingson
page 73.
4. PressthePAUSEbuttontopauseplayback.
PressthePAUSEswitchonceagaintoresume
playback.
5. Pressthe<<REWorFF>>buttonstorewindorfast
forward.
Youcanuse<<REWandFF>>duringplaybackor
whilestopped.
Ifyoulike,youcanadjusttherewind
andfastforwardspeedsusingthe
FF/REWSPEEDpagemenucommand.
6. Tosetthetempo,turntheTEMPO
knoborpresstheTAPTEMPO
switchatthedesiredinterval.
Mute and Solo
MuteletsyousilenceanyoftheMIDItracks116,
audiotracks116,oranyoftheaudioinputs(analog1,
2,USB1,2,S/P DIFL/R).Sololetsyouhearanyofthese
tracksorinputsbyitself.Thesefunctionscanbeused
invariousways.Forexample,youcanlistenonlyto
therhythmsectionofthepreviouslyrecordedtracks
whileyourecordnewtracks.LetstryouttheMuteand
Solofunctions.
1. UseSongSelecttoselectthesongthatyouwant
toplayback.
2. PresstheSEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitch.
3. Presstrack1Play/Rec/Mute.
ThedisplaywillchangefromPlaytoMute,andthe
playbackoftrack1willnolongerbeheard.Inthis
way,themutefunctionallowsyoutosilencea
specifiedtrackuntilthetrackisunmuted.
Presstrack2Play/Rec/Mute.Thedisplaywill
change,andtheplaybackoftrack2willalsobe
Popup
Song Select
Meter Tempo
Program Select
Category
Track 1
Pan
Solo
Play/Mute/Rec
Volume
Track 2
Playing Songs Playback
73
muted.Tocancelmuting,pressPlay/Rec/Muteonce
again.
Tip:Play/Rec/Mutecanbecontrolledfromthefront
panelmixersection,orfromtheP0ControlSurface
pageoftheLCDscreen.(SeeThecontrolsurfacein
Sequencermodeonpage 74.)
4. Presstrack1SoloOn/Off.
Solowillbehighlighted,andthistime,onlytrack
1willbeheard.Thisisknownassoloingthe
track.
IfbothMuteandSoloareused,theSolofunction
willbegivenpriority.
Presstrack2SoloOn/Off.
Thedisplaywillchange,andyouwillhearthe
playbackoftracks1and2.
Note:Solo(on)appliestoalltracks,includingMIDI
tracks116,audiotracks116,andallaudioinputs
(analog,USB,andS/P DIF).If,asinthisexample,
youveturnedSoloonforonlyMIDItracks1and2,
youwillnothearMIDItracks316,audiotracks1
16,oranyoftheaudioinputs.
5. ToswitchSolooff,pressSoloOn/Offonceagain.
PressSoloOn/OffforbothMIDItracks1and2.
Thedisplaywillchange,andtheplaybackoftracks
1and2willbemuted.IftheSolofunctionisturned
offforalltracks,playbackwillbeaccordingtothe
Play/Rec/Mutesettings.
Tip:Play/Rec/Mutecanbecontrolledfromthefront
panelmixersection,orfromtheP0ControlSurface
pageoftheLCDscreen.(SeeThecontrolsurfacein
Sequencermodeonpage 74)
Exclusive Solo
Normally,SoloworksinExclusiveSolooffmode,in
whichyoucansolomorethanonetrackatatime(asin
theexampleabove).Incontrast,ExclusiveSoloon
modeallowsonlyonetracktobesoloedatatime,
makingiteasytoswitchbetweensoloedtracks.
UsetheExclusiveSolopagemenucommandto
specifyhowtheSolofunctionwilloperate.
ExclusiveSolooff:Youwillbeabletosolomorethan
onetrackatatime.Thestatusofatrackwillchange
eachtimeyoupressitsSoloOn/Offbutton.
ExclusiveSoloon:WhenyoupressaSoloOn/Off
button,onlythattrackwillbesoloed.
TheSOLOsettingisnotstoredwhenyousavethe
song.
Tip:YoucanturnExclusiveSoloon/offbyholding
downtheENTERswitchandpressingnumerickey1
(whennotinP4orP5).
LOCATE settings
YoucanpresstheLOCATEswitchtomovetothe
registeredlocation.Initially,thiswillmoveto
001:01.000.
Tochangetheregisteredlocation,usetheSetLocation
pagemenucommand.Alternatively,youcanregistera
locationduringplaybackbyholdingdowntheENTER
switchandpressingtheLOCATEswitch.
Whenyouselectasong,theLOCATEsettingis
automaticallyinitializedto001:01.000.
Formoreinformation,seeSetLocation(forLocate
Key)onpage 626oftheParameterGuide.
Loop playback
Whenrecordingorplayingbackasong,youcan
individuallylooptheMIDItracksthatareplaying.
IntheP0:Play/RECMIDITrackLooppage,check
TrackPlayLoopfortheMIDItracksyouwanttoloop,
anduseLoopStartMeasureandLoopEndMeasure
tospecifythestartingandendingmeasureofthe
regionthatwillplaybackasaloop.
IfPlayIntroischecked(enabled),themeasures
precedingtheloopwillbeplayedbackasan
introductionbeforetheloopbegins.
Ifyouplaybackfromthefirstmeasurewiththe
settingsshowninthescreenshotbelow,thespecified
regionofmeasureswillrepeatasfollows.Notethat
PlayIntroisenabledforTrack1,butdisabledforTrack
2.
IfPlayIntroisdisabled(unchecked)forTrack1,the
specifiedregionofmeasureswillrepeatasfollows.
Measure 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
Track 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 5 6 7 8 5
Track 2 9 10 9 10 9 10 9 10 9 10 9 10 9
Measure 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
Track 1 5 6 7 8 5 6 7 8 5 6 7 8 5
Track 2 9 10 9 10 9 10 9 10 9 10 9 10 9
Loop Start
Measure
Track Play
Loop
Play Intro
Loop End
Measure
74
The control surface in Sequencer mode
InSequencermode,youcanusetheninesliders,eight
knobs,andsixteenswitchesofthecontrolsurfaceto
editthesoundofeachtrackduringplayback,tocontrol
KARMA,ortotransmitMIDImessagestoexternal
devices.
Ifyouusethecontrolsurfacetocontrolthemixer
duringrecording,yourmoveswillberecorded,and
willbereproducedduringplayback.Ifyouwantto
adjust(andrecord)mixersettingsformultipletracks,
usemultitrackrecording.
Asexplainedbelow,youusethefrontpanel
CONTROLASSIGNswitchestoselectthefunctions
thatwillbecontrolledbythesliders,knobs,and
switches.
Youcanalsoviewthecontrolsurfacesettingsinthe
LCDscreen,andeditthemthere.Youmayfindit
convenienttodisplaytheP0:Play/RECControl
Surfacepagefirst,sothatyoucanwatchthesettings
youremakingfromthecontrolsurface.
CONTROL ASSIGN
TIMBRE/TRACK
WhenTIMBRE/TRACKisselected,thecontrolsurface
willeditthepan,EQ,effectsend,Play/Rec/Mute
status,SoloOn/Offstatus,andvolumeofeachMIDI
track.
TheLEDsattherightoftheTIMBRE/TRACKswitch
indicatewhetherMIDItracks18or916arecurrently
selected.Thesliders,knobs,andswitcheswillcontrol
therespectivesetoftracks.
KNOBS:IfyouwanttoviewandeditthePansetting
foralleighttracksatonce,presstheMIXERKNOBS
switchtomaketheINDIVIDUALPANLEDlight,and
usetheknobstoeditthePansettings.Converselyif
youmaketheCHANNELSTRIPlight,theknobswill
controlthepan,EQ,andeffectsendsforasingletrack.
UsetheMIXSELECTswitchestoselectthetrackyou
wanttoedit,andusetheknobstocontrolit.
MIXPLAY/MUTE:Theseswitchescontrolthe
Play/Rec/Mutestatus.RecisavailableifMultiRECis
turnedon.
MIXSELECT:Pressthesebuttonstoselectthecurrent
track.Thiscurrenttrackappliestothechannelstrip
(whenMIXERKNOBSissettoCHANNELSTRIP),
andtoToneAdjust.
Youcanalsousethesebuttonstochangethe
Keyboard/Rectrack,sothatyoucanswitchbetween
tracksdirectlyfromtheControlSurface.Todothis:
1. GototheControlSurfacetaboftheP0:Playpage.
2. SetCONTROLASSIGNtoTIMBRE/TRACK,
usingeitherthefrontpanelbuttonortheon
screentab.
3. Checktheboxontherighthandsideofthescreen,
labeledLinkKBD/RECTrktoCtrlSurface.
Now,youllbeabletochangetheKeyboard/Rectrack
directlyfromtheControlSurface.
IfyoupresstheSOLOswitch,theMIXSELECT
buttonswillcontroltheSoloOn/Offstatus.TheSolo
behaviorwilldependontheExclusiveSolosetting.
Note:IfanyMIDItrack,Audiotrack,oraudioinputis
soloed,theSOLOswitchLEDwillblink.
Tip:ToturnSolooffforalltracks,holddownthe
RESETCONTROLSbuttonandpresstheSOLO
button.
Tip:ToturnMuteoffforalltracks,holddownthe
RESETCONTROLSbuttonandpressthe
TIMBRE/TRACKbutton.
AUDIO
WhenAUDIOisselected,thecontrolsurfacewilledit
thepan,EQ,effectsend,Play/Rec/Mutestatus,Solo
On/Offstatus,andvolumeoftheaudioinputsoraudio
tracks.
Playing Songs The control surface in Sequencer mode
75
TheLEDsattherightoftheAUDIOswitchindicate
whetheraudioinputs,audiotracks18,oraudiotracks
916arecurrentlyselected.Thesliders,knobs,and
switcheswillcontroltherespectivesetofinputsor
tracks.
KNOBS:IfyoupresstheMIXERKNOBSswitchto
maketheINDIVIDUALPANLEDlight,theknobswill
controlthePansettingofthesixinputs,tracks18,or
tracks916.IftheCHANNELSTRIPLEDislitandIN
isselected,theknobswillcontrolthepanandeffect
sendsforasingleinput.If18or916areselected,the
knobswillcontrolthepan,EQ,andeffectsendsfora
singletrack.
UsetheMIXSELECTswitchestoselecttheinput/track
youwanttocontrol,andusetheknobstocontrolthem.
MIXPLAY/MUTE,MIXSELECT:Theseswitcheswork
inthesamewayastheydoforTIMBRE/TRACK,as
describedabove.
EXTERNAL
WhenEXTERNALisselected,thecontrolsurfaceis
usedtotransmitMIDImessagestoanexternalMIDI
device.Formoreinformation,see09e:Externalon
RT KNOBS/KARMA
WhenRTKNOBS/KARMAisselected,theslidersand
switchesofthecontrolsurfaceareusedtocontrol
KARMA.Formoreinformation,see09f:RT(Real
TimeKnobs)/KARMAonpage 541oftheParameter
Guide.
TONE ADJ/EQ
WhenTONEADJ/EQ(ToneAdjust)isselected,the
controlsurfaceisusedtotemporarilyadjustthe
programusedbyeachMIDItrack.Forexamplewhile
yourecreatingasong,youcanusethiscapabilityto
adjustthesoundappropriatelyforyoursongwithout
goingbacktoProgrammode;youmightsoftenthe
toneofthebassorspeeduptheattackofastrings
program,andmakethesechangeshappeninrealtime
whilethesongplays.
UseTrackintherightsideoftheLCDtoselectthe
MIDItrackyouwanttoadjust.
Formoreinformation,see09g:ToneAdjuston
Note:EQisonlyavailableinSetListmode.Formore
information,seeGraphicEQonpage 119.
76
MIDI recording
Youcanrecordupto400,000events(e.g.,notes),up
to200songs,andupto999measuresineachsong.
Themaximumtimingresolutionis1/480partsper
quarternote.
TherearesixteentracksforMIDIperformancedata,
andamastertrackwhichcontrolsthetime
signatureandtempo.
YoucanperformandrecordusingKARMAandthe
DrumTrack.
YoucanperformandrecordusingRPPR(Realtime
PatternPlay/Recording).
Thereare697builtinpresetpatternsidealfordrum
tracks,andinadditionyoucancreateupto100
userpatternsforeachsong.Thesepatternscanbe
usedasperformancedataforasong,orwiththe
RPPRfunction.
Preparations for recording
Beforeyoubeginrecording,makesurethatthe
Globalmodememoryprotectsettingisturnedoff.
Formoreinformation,seeMemoryprotecton
page 185.
Selecting a Song
Beforewecanbeginthisexample,weneedtoselectan
emptysongwherewecanrecord.
1. PresstheSEQbuttontoenterSequencermode.
2. GotothefirsttaboftheP0:Play/RECpage.
ThefullpagenameisMIDITrackProgSelect/Mixer.
3. PresstheSongSelectPopupbutton.
TheSongselectionpopupwillappear.
4. Chooseanew,emptySongfromthelist,andpress
theOKbutton.
Tip: Set Song Length
Bydefault,newsongsare64measureslong.Ifyoud
liketorecordmorethan64measures,gotothep4:
TrackEditpage,andusetheSetSongLength
commandinthepagemenu.Formoreinformation,see
SetSongLengthonpage 642oftheParameterGuide.
Track settings
Sinceweregoingtorecordanewsonginthisexample,
wewillstartbyexplaininghowtoassignaprogramto
eachMIDItrack,andmakebasicsettingssuchas
volume.
Fordetailsonaudiotracks,refertoAudiorecording
onpage 89.
1. AssignaprogramtoeachMIDItrack.
UseProgramSelect(P0:Play/RECMIDITrack
ProgSelect/Mixerpage)toassignaprogramtoeach
MIDItrack.
AtthistimeyoucanpresstheCategorypopup
andselectprogramsbycategory.
YoucancopyvarioussettingsfromProgramsor
Combinations,includingeffects,KARMAsettings,
ToneAdjust,andsoon.
Whenassigningaprogram,youcanuseTrack
Selecttoselectthetrackforwhichyouaremaking
assignments,andtryplayingthesound.
2. SetthepanandvolumeofeachMIDItrack.
Pansetsthepanofeachtrack,andVolumesetsthe
volumeofeachtrack.
3. SpecifythetonegeneratorandMIDIchannelthat
willbeplayedbyeachMIDItrack.
IntheP2:TrackParametersMIDIpage,Status
specifieswhethereachtrackwillsoundtheinternal
tonegeneratororanexternaltonegenerator.MIDI
ChannelspecifiestheMIDIchannelforeachtrack.
NormallywhenusingtheKRONOSasa16timbre
soundmodule,youwillselectINTorBTH.
Ingeneral,youshouldsetMIDIChannelto
differentchannels116foreachtrack.Tracksthat
aresenttothesameMIDIchannelwillsound
simultaneouslywheneitherisrecordedorplayed.
StatusINT:Duringplayback,theKRONOS
internaltonegeneratorwillplaytheMIDIdata
recordedonthattrack.Whenyouoperatethe
KRONOSkeyboardorcontrollers,youwillbe
playingandcontrollingthetrackselectedbyTrack
Select.MIDIdatawillnotbetransmittedtoan
externaldevice.
StatusEXT,EX2,BTH:Duringplayback,theMIDI
datarecordedonthattrackwillbetransmittedfrom
MIDIOUTtoplayanexternalsoundmodule.When
youoperatetheKRONOSkeyboardorcontrollers,
MIDIdatawillbetransmittedtoplayandcontrol
theexternalsoundmoduleselectedbyTrack
Select.(TheMIDIchanneloftheexternaltone
generatormustbesettomatchtheMIDIChannel
ofKRONOStracksthataresettoEXT,EX2orBTH.)
IfStatusissettoBTH,boththeexternaltone
generatorandinternaltonegeneratorwillbe
soundedandcontrolled.
4. Adjusttheeffectsettings.
MakesettingsforeacheffectinP8:InsertEffectand
P9:Master/TotalEffect.
MIDI recording Preparations for recording
77
Formoreinformation,seeUsingeffectsin
CombinationsandSongsonpage 204,Sequencer
P8:InsertEffectonpage 609oftheParameter
Guide,andSequencerP9:Master/TotalEffecton
5. Setthetempoandtimesignature.
Tosetthetempo,youcanturntheTEMPOknobor
presstheTAPTEMPOswitchatthedesired
interval.Alternatively,youcanselectq(Tempo)in
theP0:Play/RECMIDITrackProgSelect/Mixer
page(orsimilarpage),andusetheVALUE
controllerstosetthetempo.SetTempoModeto
Manual.
Nextyouwillsetthetimesignature.Inthis
example,wellexplainhowtosetthetimesignature
usingtheMeterfield.Normally,youspecifythe
timesignaturebeforerecordingthefirsttrack,and
thenbeginrecording.
a)PresstheSEQUENCERREC/WRITEswitch,and
setMeterto**/**.
b)Press**/**tohighlightit,andusetheVALUE
controllerstosetthetimesignature.
c)PresstheSEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitchto
beginrecording.Whentheprecounthasendedand
Locatereaches0001:01:000,presstheSEQUENCER
START/STOPswitchtostoprecording.Thetime
signatureyouspecifiedhasbeenrecordedonthe
Mastertrack.
IfyoupresstheSEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitch
duringtheprecount,thetimesignaturewontbe
recorded.
6. SettheRECResolutionasdesired.
WhenyourecordMIDIinrealtime,thisparameter
controlstimingcorrection,alsoknownas
quantization.Thisalsoapplieswhenrecording
audioautomationdata.
ThisonlyaffectsnewlyrecordedMIDI;itdoesnot
changeanypreviouslyrecordedtracks.
Forexample,letssupposethatyourecordedsome
eighthnotesbutyourtimingwasnotquiteperfect,
asshowninpart1oftheillustrationbelow.IfREC
Resolutionweresettoewhenyourecorded,the
timingwouldautomaticallybecorrectedasshown
inpart2oftheillustration.IfRECResolutionis
settoHi,thenoteswillberecordedwiththetiming
atwhichyouplaythem.
7. Makeothersettingsasnecessary.
MakesettingsforKARMA(P7:KARMA),MIDI
filtering(P3:MIDIFilter/Zone),etc.
YoumayalsowishtouseToneAdjusttoadjustthe
sound.(SeeTONEADJ/EQonpage 75)
Whenyouarefinishedmakingthesesettings,thebasic
setupiscomplete.Youcannowrecordasdescribed
underRecordingprocedureonpage 93
Saving your song parameter settings
AlloftheabovesettingscanbesavedasaTemplate
Song.Ifyoufrequentlyusethesamesettings,thiscan
bearealtimesaver.Formoreinformation,see
TemplateSongs,below.
Template Songs
TemplateSongsstoreprettymucheverythinginthe
SongexceptfortheMIDIandaudiodataitself.This
includesProgramselections,trackparameters,effects
andKARMAsettings,andtheSongsnameandtempo.
ThefactorypresetTemplateSongsletyougetupand
runningquicklywithmatchedsetsofsoundsand
effectsforvariousstylesofmusic.Youcanalsocreate
yourownTemplateSongswithyourfavoritesounds
andsetups.
NotethatTemplateSongsdonotincludetheMIDI
dataforsongtracksandpatterns,audiodata,or
settingsthatgovernhowthemusicaldataisplayed
back,includingMeter,Metronome,PLAY/MUTE,and
TrackPlayLoop(includingStart/Endmeasure).
WhileloadingaTemplateSong,youcanalso
optionallyloadoneormoreDrumTrackpatterns.
1. IntheP0:Play/RECpage,pressthepagemenu
buttonandselecttheLoadTemplateSong
command.
Adialogboxwillappear.
2. IntheFromfield,choosetheTemplateSongyou
wanttoload.
3. ChecktheCopyPatterntoMIDITracktoo?
checkbox.
Whenthisboxischecked,adialogboxforcopyinga
patternwillautomaticallyappearafterLoadTemplate
Songiscomplete.
Ifthisisnotchecked,onlytheselectedTemplateSong
willbeloaded.
4. PresstheOKbuttontoloadthetemplatesong,or
presstheCancelbuttontoexitwithoutmaking
changes.
WhenyoupressOK,theTemplateSongssettingswill
becopiedintothecurrentSong.

78
IfCopyPatterntoMIDITracktoo?wascheckedin
step3,theCopyPatternToMIDITrackdialogbox
willappear.
Thisisthesamedialogboxastheonethatappearsfor
theCopyToMIDITrackmenucommand.
5. InthePatternfield,selectapatterntocopy.
6. IntheToMIDITrackfield,selectthetracktouse
fortheDrumTrackpattern.
7. IntheMeasurefield,setthemeasureonwhich
youdlikethepatterntostart.
Note:IneachoftheeighteenpresetTemplateSongs,
track1isalwaysassignedtoaDrumProgram.(In
somecases,othertracksmayalsohaveDrum
Programs.)
Followingthenamesforeachofthepresetpatterns,
themusicalstyleandthenameofthemostsuitable
DrumProgramsarepartiallydisplayed.(Refertothe
VNLforacompletelistofDrumPrograms.)
Byloadingadrumtrackandthecorrespondingpreset
pattern,youcaninstantlysetupaDrumTrackto
matchtheTemplateSong.
8. ToloadtheDrumpattern,presstheOKbutton.
Afterthepatternisloaded,theMeasurewillcountup
automatically.Youcanthencopyanotherpatternif
desired.Forinstance,youcanusedifferentpatterns
oneaftertheothertobuildupasong,withdifferent
patternsforverse,chorus,andbridge.
Afteryouvefinishedaddingpatterns,presstheExit
button,andyouredone!
Saving your own Template Songs
YoucanalsosaveyourownTemplateSongs:
1. SetupaSongtoyourtaste,includingPrograms,
effects,KARMAsettings,theSongname,andso
on.
2. IntheP0:Play/RECpage,pressthepagemenu
buttonandselecttheSaveTemplateSong
command.
3. IntheTofield,selectoneofthe16userTemplate
Songlocations,U0015.
4. PressOKtosavetheTemplateSong.
Formoreinformation,seeSaveTemplateSongon
page 625oftheParameterGuide
Recording MIDI in real-time
WhenyouvefinishedwithPreparationsfor
recording,asdescribedabove,youcanstart
recording!
Realtimerecordingletsyourecordyourperformance
ontheKRONOS,includingthenotesthatyouplay,
joystickandknobmovements,andsoon.Thisisin
contrasttosteprecording,whichisdescribedinalater
section.
Thedefaultistorecordontoasingletrackatatime.As
analternative,multitrackrecordingallowsyouto
simultaneouslyrecordmultiplechannelsofdataonto
multipletracks.Thisishandyforusewhenrecording
RPPR,KARMA,ortheDrumTrack,orforrecording
theoutputofanexternalsequencerinasinglepass.
Recording setup
InP0:Play/RECPreferencepageRecordingSetup,
selecttherealtimerecordingmethodyouwanttouse.
Location
Track Select
MIDI recording Recording MIDI in real-time
79
Overwrite
Withthismethod,themusicaldatapreviously
recordedonatrackisoverwrittenbythenewly
recordeddata.Whenyouperformoverwriterecording
onapreviouslyrecordedtrack,itsmusicaldatawillbe
deletedandreplacedbythenewlyrecordeddata.
Normallyyouwillusethismethodtorecord,andthen
modifytheresultsbyusingothertypesofrealtime
recordingorMIDIeventediting.
1. UseTrackSelecttoselectthetrackthatyouwant
torecord.
2. SettheRecordingSetuptoOverwrite.
3. InLocation,specifythelocationatwhichyou
wishtobeginrecording.
4. PresstheSEQUENCERREC/WRITEswitch,and
thenpresstheSEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitch.
IftheMetronomeSetupisstillsettothedefault
settings,themetronomewillsoundforatwo
measureprecount,andthenrecordingwillbegin.
Playthekeyboardandmovecontrollerssuchasthe
joysticktorecordyourperformance.
5. Whenyoufinishplaying,presstheSEQUENCER
START/STOPswitch.
Recordingwillend,andthelocationwillreturnto
thepointatwhichyoubeginrecording.
IfyoupressthePAUSEswitchinsteadofthe
SEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitch,recordingwill
pause.WhenyoupressthePAUSEswitchonce
again,recordingwillresume.Whenyouare
finished,presstheSEQUENCERSTART/STOP
switchtostoprecording.
Overdub
Withthismethod,thenewlyrecordedmusicaldatais
addedtotheexistingdata.
Whenyouperformoverdubrecordingonapreviously
recordedtrack,thenewlyrecordeddatawillbeadded
tothepreviouslyrecordeddata.
Itisbesttoselectthismodeifyouwillberecording
additionalcontroldata,recordingadrumpattern,or
recordingthetempointhemastertrack.Withthis
mode,datacanbeaddedwithouterasingtheexisting
performancedata.
torecord.
2. SettheRecordingSetuptoOverdub.
3. Fortherestoftheprocedure,refertosteps35of
Overwrite.
Manual punch-in
Whilethesongisplaying,youcanpressthe
SEQUENCERREC/WRITEswitchoraconnected
pedalswitchatthedesiredlocationtostartorstop
recording.Withthismethod,themusicaldata
previouslyonthetrackisoverwrittenbythenewly
recordeddata.
torecord.
2. SettheRecordingSetuptoManualPunchIn.
3. InLocation,specifyalocationseveralmeasures
earlierthanthepointatwhichyouwishtobegin
recording.
Playbackwillbegin.
5. Atthepointatwhichyouwishtobeginrecording,
presstheSEQUENCERREC/WRITEswitch.
Recordingwillbegin.Playthekeyboardand
operatecontrollerssuchasthejoysticktorecord
yourperformance.
6. Whenyoufinishrecording,pressthe
SEQUENCERREC/WRITEswitch.
Recordingwillend(playbackwillcontinue).
Note:InsteadofpressingtheSEQUENCER
REC/WRITEswitchinsteps5and6,youcanusea
footswitchconnectedtotheASSIGNABLE
SWITCHjack.
SettheGlobalP2:Controllers/ScalespageFoot
SwitchAssigntoSongPunchIn/Out.
Playbackwillstop,andyouwillreturntothe
locationthatyouspecifiedinstep3.
Auto punch-in
Firstyoumustspecifytheareathatwillbererecorded.
Thenrecordingwilloccurautomaticallyatthe
specifiedarea.Withthismethod,themusicaldata
previouslyonthetrackisoverwrittenbythenewly
recordeddata.
torecord.
2. SettheRecordingSetuptoAutoPunchIn.
3. InM(AutoPunchInStartMeasure),M(Auto
PunchInEndMeasure)specifytheareathatyou
wishtorecord.
ForexampleifyouspecifyM005M008,recording
willoccuronlyfrommeasure5tomeasure8.
recording.
80
Playbackwillbegin.
Whenyoureachthestartinglocationyouspecified
instep3,recordingwillbegin.Playthekeyboard
andoperatecontrollerssuchasthejoysticktorecord
yourperformance.Whenyoureachtheending
locationyouspecifiedinstep3,recordingwillend.
(Playbackwillcontinue.)
locationyouspecifiedinstep4.
Loop All Tracks
Thismethodletsyoucontinuerecordingasyouadd
musicaldata.
Thespecifiedregioncanberecordedrepeatedly.Thisis
idealwhenrecordingdrumphrases,etc.
torecord.
2. SettheRecordingSetuptoLoopAllTracks.
IfMultiRECischecked,itwillnotbepossibleto
selectLoopAllTracks.
3. InM(LoopStartMeasure),M(LoopEnd
Measure)specifytheareathatyouwishtorecord.
ForexampleifyouspecifyM004M008,recording
willoccurrepeatedly(asaloop)frommeasure4to
measure8.
recording.
Playbackwillbegin.Whenyoureachthestarting
locationyouspecifiedinstep3,recordingwill
begin.Playthekeyboardandoperatecontrollers
suchasthejoysticktorecordyourperformance.
Whenyoureachtheendinglocationyouspecified
instep3,youwillreturntothestartinglocation,and
continuerecording.
Themusicaldatathatislooprecordedwillbe
addedtothepreviouslyrecordeddata.
6. Youcanalsoerasespecificdataevenwhileyou
continuelooprecording.
IfyoupresstheSEQUENCERREC/WRITEswitch
duringlooprecording,allmusicalwillberemoved
fromthecurrentlyselectedtrackaslongasyou
continuepressingtheswitch.
BycheckingtheRemoveDatacheckboxyoucan
eraseonlythespecifieddata.Duringloop
recording,pressthenotethatyouwishtodelete,
andonlythedataofthatnotenumberwillbe
deletedfromthekeyboardaslongasyoucontinue
pressingthatnote.
Similarly,benderdatawillbedeletedaslongasyou
tiltthejoystickintheX(horizontal)direction,and
aftertouchdatawillbedeletedaslongasyouapply
pressuretothekeyboard.
Whenyouareonceagainreadytorecordmusical
data,unchecktheRemoveDatacheckbox.
Playbackwillend,andyouwillreturntothe
recordingstartlocationthatyouspecifiedinstep4.
IfLoopAllTracksisselected,normalplaybackwill
beloopedaswell.
Multi (multitrack recording)
Multitrackrecordingallowsyoutosimultaneously
recordontomultipletracks,eachwithadifferent
channel.
1. IntheupperrightoftheLCDscreen,checkMulti
REC.
2. MakethedesiredRecordingSetupsettings.
YoucanrecordusingOverwrite,Overdub,Manual
PunchIn,orAutoPunchIn.
3. UseLocationtospecifythemeasureatwhich
recordingwillbegin.
4. PresstheSEQUENCERREC/WRITEswitch.
5. Forthetrackyouwanttorecord,press
Play/Rec/MutetomakeitindicateRec.
WiththedefaultsettingsforMetronomeSetup,the
metronomewillsoundforatwomeasurepre
count,andthenrecordingwillbegin.Nowyoucan
performonthekeyboardandcontrollers,anduse
theKARMAorRPPRfunctionsifdesired.
locationspecifiedinstep4.
An example of realtime recording
Inthisexample,wellassignadrumprogramtoMIDI
Track01andcreatethefollowingonemeasuredrum
phrase.
1. Createanewsong,andspecifyadrumprogram
forMIDITrack01.UseTrackSelecttoselect
MIDITrack01,andverifythatyouhearadrum
program.
2. GototheP0:Play/RECPreferencepage.In
RecordingSetup,specifyLoopAllTracksand
setittoM001M001.
Formoreinformation,seeLoopAllTrackson
page 80.
Bass drum: C3
Snare: E3
Hi hat: F#3
MIDI recording MIDI step recording
81
Withthissetting,measure1willberecorded
repeatedly.Thenewlyrecordeddatawillbeadded
ateachpass.
3. SetRECResolutiontox.
4. PresstheSEQUENCEREC/WRITEswitch,and
thentheSTART/STOPswitch.
Themetronomewillsoundatwomeasurecount
down,andthenrecordingwillbegin.
5. Asshowninthemusicalexampleprintedabove,
startbyplayingtheC3noteofthekeyboardto
recordthebassdrumforonemeasure.
6. Next,playtheE3noteofthekeyboardtorecord
thesnareforonemeasure,andthentheF#3noteto
recordthehihat.
7. PresstheSEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitchto
stoprecording.
8. Playbacktheresult,andlistentothedrum
performanceyourecorded.
PresstheSEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitch.When
youvefinishedlistening,presstheSTART/STOP
switchonceagaintostopplayback.
9. Ifyourenotsatisfiedwiththeresult,pressthe
COMPAREswitchtoreturntothestatepriorto
recording,andthenrerecordfromstep4.
Note:Whenyourefinishedrecording,changethe
RecordingSetupbacktothenormallyused
Overwrite(P0:Play/RECPreferencepage).
Inaddition,accesstheP0:Play/RECMIDITrack
Looppage,checkTrackPlayLoopforMIDITrack
01,andsettheLoopStartMeasureandLoop
EndMeasureto001.Whenyouplayback,MIDI
track01willrepeatedlyplaythefirstmeasure.
MIDI step recording
Steprecordingistherecordingmethodinwhichyou
specifythedurationandstrengthofeachnote,anduse
thekeyboardtospecifythepitchofeachMIDInote.
YoucanusetheRestbuttonandTiebuttonofthe
dialogboxtoinputrestsandties.
Steprecordingisusefulwhenyouwanttocreate
mechanicallyprecisebeats,orwhenyouneedto
recordaphrasethatwouldbedifficulttoplaybyhand
inrealtime,orwhenyoufinditdifficulttoplay
extremelycomplicatedorrapidpassages.
An example of step recording
Inthisexample,wellassignabassprogramtoMIDI
Track02andsteprecordthefollowingtwomeasure
bassphrase.
1. SpecifyabassprogramforMIDITrack02.Use
TrackSelecttoselectMIDITrack02,andverify
thatyouhearabassprogram.
2. GototheP4:TrackEditTrackEditpage.
3. SetFromMeasureto001.
Withthissetting,steprecordingwillbeginfrom
measure1.
4. Pressthepagemenubutton,andpresspagemenu
commandMIDIStepRecording.
5. InStepTime,useSelecttospecifythebasic
timingvalueatwhichyouwillinputnotesand
rests.
InputthefirstC3notease.(adottedeighthnote).
Usetheradiobuttonatthelefttoselecte.
Youcanchoosefromtherangeofw(awholenote)r
(a32ndnote).
Inputadottednotebyselecting.withtheradio
buttonsatright.
Youcanspecify3toenteratriplet.Ifyouwantto
usetheunmodifiedlengthofthenotethatsselected
attheleft,choose.
NoteDurationindicatesthelengththatthenote
itselfwillsound.Smallervalueswillproducea
staccatonote,andlargervalueswillproducea
legatonote.Forthisexample,leavethissetting
unchanged.
NoteVelocityisthevelocity(playingstrength),
andlargervalueswillproducealoudervolume.Set
thistoKey.
IfyouselectKeyforthisparameter,thevelocity
withwhichyouactuallyplaythekeyboardwillbe
input.
6. Onthekeyboard,pressandthenreleasethefirst
C3notethatyouwanttoinput.
ThedatayouinputwillappearintheLCDscreenas
numericalvalues.Intheupperright,Measure001
82
BeatTick01.000willchangetoMeasure001Beat
Tick01.360.Thenextnoteyouinputwillbeplaced
atthislocation.
7. Inputtheremainingnotesasdescribedinsteps5
and6.(YouvealreadyinputthefirstC3note.)
Inadditiontothemethodsdescribedinsteps5and
6,youcanalsousethefollowinginputmethods.
Toinputarest,presstheRestbutton.Thiswill
inputarestoftheStepTimevalue.
Tomodifythelengthofanote,youcanmodifythe
Steptimevaluebeforeyouinputthenote.
Howeverifyouwanttoextendthelength(tie)of
thenote,presstheTiebutton.Atthistime,the
previouslyinputnotewillbeextendedbytheStep
timelength.
Todeleteanoteorrestthatyouinput,pressthe
StepBackbutton.Thepreviouslyinputnotewillbe
deleted.
Toinputachord,simultaneouslypressthenotesof
thedesiredchord.Evenifyoudonotpressthem
simultaneously,notesthatarepressedbeforeyou
fullyremoveyourhandfromallkeysonthe
keyboardwillbeinputatthesamelocation.
Ifyouwanttoverifythepitchofthenotethatyou
willinputnext,pressthePAUSEswitch.Inthis
state,playingakeywillproduceasound,butwill
notinputanote.PressthePAUSEswitchonce
againtocanceltherecordpausestate,andresume
inputtingnotes.
8. Whenyouarefinishedrecording,presstheDone
button.
PresstheSEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitchtoplay
back.
GototheP0:Play/RECMIDITrackLooppage,
checkTrackPlayLoopforMIDITrack02,setLoop
StartMeasureto001,andLoopEndMeasureto
002.MIDItrack02willplaymeasures12
repeatedly.
9. Ifyourenotsatisfiedwiththeresult,pressthe
COMPAREswitchtoreturntothestatepriorto
recording,andthenrerecordfromstep4.
Whenyoubeginsteprecording,alldataintheMIDI
trackthatfollowsthemeasurewhereyoubegan
recordingwillbeerased.Youneedtobeawareof
thisifyoubeginsteprecordingfromameasure
midwaythroughthesong.
Ifyouwanttocopydataintoameasurethatalready
containsdata,performsteprecordinginanempty
MIDItrack,andusetheMoveMeasureorCopy
Measuremenucommands.Formoreinformation,
seeCopyMeasureonpage 646oftheParameter
Guide,andMoveMeasureonpage 647ofthe
ParameterGuide.
Ifyouwanttoeditoraddtotherecordeddata,you
canusetheMIDIEventEditfunction.Formore
information,seeEventEditonpage 654ofthe
ParameterGuide.
Recording the sound of a Combination or Program
Hereshowyoucaneasilycopythesettingsofa
CombinationorProgram,andthenrecordusingthat
sound.
WhenyoureperforminginProgramorCombination
mode,youcanusetheAutoSongSetupfunctionto
automaticallythecurrentProgramorCombination
intoasong.Alternatively,youcanusetheSequencer
modesCopyFromCombiandCopyfromProgram
menucommands.
Auto Song Setup
YoucanuseAutoSongSetupwithbothProgramsand
Combinations.Inthisexample,wellusea
Combination.
1. SaveanyeditstotheCombination.
Ifyouvemadeanyeditsevensimplethingslike
changingpanandvolumefortheTimbresmustsave
thenewsettingsusingUpdateCombinationorWrite
Combinationbeforeproceeding.
Note
Step
Time:
Select
Step
Time:
. 3 -
Key,
Button
Measure/
Beat Tick
C3 . C3 key 001 / 01.000
G3 - G3 key 001 / 01.360
- Rest button 001 / 02.000
C4 - C4 key 001 / 02.240
- Rest button 001 / 03.000
C4 - C4 key 001 / 03.120
D3 - D3 key 001 / 03.240
Eb3 - Eb3 key 001 / 04.000
E3 - E3 key 001 / 04.240
F3 - F3 key 002 / 01.000
- Rest button 002 / 01.120
C3 - C3 key 002 / 01.360
- Rest button 002 / 02.000
F2 - F2 key 002 / 02.240
Tie - Tie button 002 / 03.000
F2 - F2 key 002 / 03.240
- Rest button 002 / 03.360
A2 - A2 key 002 / 04.000
A3 - A3 key 002 / 04.240
- Rest button 002 / 04.360
Note
Step
Time:
Select
Step
Time:
. 3 -
Key,
Button
Measure/
Beat Tick
MIDI recording Recording the sound of a Combination or Program
83
2. HolddowntheENTERswitchandpressthe
SEQUENCERREC/WRITEswitch.
TheSetuptoRecorddialogboxwillappear.
3. PresstheOKbuttontoperformtheAutoSong
Setup.
TheKRONOSwillautomaticallyswitchtoSequencer
mode,andtheCombinationssettingswillbeapplied
tothefirstunusedsong.
4. Youwillautomaticallyenterrecordreadymode,
andthemetronomewillbeginsoundingaccording
tothesettingsinP0:Play/RECPreferencepage.
Formoreinformation,see05d:MetronomeSetup
5. PresstheSEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitch,and
realtimerecordingwillbegin.
Whenyourefinishedrecording,pressthe
START/STOPswitchonceagain.
Auto Song Setup and Combinations: Details
WithCombinations,AutoSongSetupisessentiallya
shortcutforusingtheCopyFromCombimenu
commandwiththefollowingsettings:
IFXsAll,MFXsandTFXschecked
MultiRECchecked
Formoreinformation,seeCopyfromCombination
Auto Song Setup and Programs: Details
WithPrograms,AutoSongSetupisessentiallya
shortcutforusingtheCopyFromProgrammenu
commandwiththefollowingsettings:
IFXsAll,MFXsandTFXschecked
withKARMAchecked
TosettoMIDITrack01
KARMAModulesettoA
WithDrumTracksettoTrack10
Additionally,severalSongparametersarechanged:
MultiRECchecked
MIDITracks1and10aresettoREC
Formoreinformation,seeCopyFromProgramon
Setup in Sequencer mode
(Copy From Combination and Copy From
Program)
InSequencermode,youcanusetheCopyFrom
CombiandCopyFromProgrampagemenu
commandstosetupaSongbasedonaCombinationor
Program.Inthisexample,wellexplainhowtosetupa
songbasedonacombination.
Note:MakesurethattheglobalMIDIchannel(Global
P1:MIDIMIDIpage,MIDIChannel)issetto01.
1. Selectanew,emptysong.
2. SelectthepagemenucommandCopyFrom
Combi.
Selecttheprogramorcombinationthatyouwantto
copy(i.e.,thecopysource).
Wewillcopytheeffectsettingsofthecombination
aswell,sochecktheIFXsAll,MFXsandTFXs
checkboxes.
CheckMultiRECStandby.TheStatuswillbe
automaticallysettoRECfortheMIDItracksneeded
torecordthatcombination.
PresstheOKbuttontoexecutethecopy.
Noticethatwhenyouexecutethiscommand,the
Play/Rec/Mutesettingofeachtrackwillbeset
automatically.TheMultiRECcheckboxwillbe
checked.
3. Beginrecording.
PresstheLOCATEswitchtosetthelocationto
001:01.000.
PresstheSEQUENCERREC/WRITEswitch,and
Note:Ifyouplaythekeyboardduringtheprecount
beforerecording,KARMAandtheDrumTrackwill
startplayingthemomentrecordingbegins.
4. Recordyourperformance.
5. Whenyouarefinishedperforming,pressthe
SEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitch.
Ifyoumadeamistakeorwanttorerecord,youcan
usetheComparefunction(presstheCOMPARE
switch)torerecordasmanytimesasyouwant.
(TheMultiRECcheckboxwillbeuncheckedwhen
youuseCompare,soyouwillneedtocheckit
again.)
84
Recording multiple MIDI tracks from an external sequencer
1. MakesurethattheMIDIOUTofyourexternal
sequencerisconnectedtotheMIDIINofthe
KRONOS.
Ifitisnotconnected,turnoffthepower,makethe
connection,andthenturnthepoweron.
Formoreinformation,seeMIDIapplicationson
2. IntheGlobalP1:MIDIMIDIpage,setMIDI
ClocktoExternalMIDI.Withthissetting,the
KRONOSwillsynchronizetoMIDIclock
messagesfromyourexternalsequencer.
MakesurethatReceiveExt.RealtimeCommandsis
checked.
3. CreateanewsonginSequencermode,andinthe
P0:Play/RECPreferencepage,checktheMulti
RECcheckbox.SetRecordingSetuptoOverwrite.
4. PressPlay/Rec/MutetoselectRECforthetracks
youwanttorecord.
Forthetracksyoudontwanttorecord,selectPlay
orMute.
Tip:YoucanalsocontrolthePlay/Rec/Mutesetting
fromthefrontpanelmixersection,orfromtheP0
ControlSurfacepageoftheLCDscreen.(SeeThe
controlsurfaceinSequencermodeonpage 74.)
5. IntheP2:TrackParametersMIDIpage,useMIDI
ChanneltospecifytheMIDIchannelofeach
track.
SettheMIDIchannelofeachKRONOStrackto
matchtheMIDIchannelofeachexternalsequencer
track.Dataofthematchingchannelwillberecorded
oneachKRONOStrack.
MakesurethatStatusissettoINTorBTH.
6. PresstheLOCATEswitchtosetthelocationto
001:01.000.
7. PresstheSEQUENCERREC/WRITEswitchto
enterrecordstandbymode.
8. Startyourexternalsequencer.
TheKRONOSsequencerwillautomaticallybegin
recordingwhenitreceivestheMIDIStartmessage
transmittedbyyourexternalsequencer.
9. Whenplaybackhasended,stopyourexternal
sequencer.
TheKRONOSsequencerwillautomaticallystop
recordingwhenitreceivestheMIDIStopmessage
transmittedbytheexternalsequencer.Youcanalso
stoprecordingbypressingtheSEQUENCER
START/STOPswitchoftheKRONOS.
Afterthis,youcanplaybackthenewlyrecorded
sequence:
10.IntheGlobalP1:MIDIpage,setMIDIClockto
Internal.
11.SetTempoModetoAuto.
12.PresstheSEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitchto
playback.
Note:Ifthecorrectsoundsarenotselectedwhenyou
startplayingback,youmaybeabletosolvethe
problembyusingthepagemenucommandMIDI
EventEdit(P4:TrackEdit)torespecifythe
ProgramChangedata.
MIDI recording Recording System Exclusive events
85
Recording System Exclusive events
ExclusivemessagesreceivedfromanexternalMIDI
deviceortheparameterchangesproducedwhenyou
editaMIDItrackparameter,audiotrackparameteror
effectparametercanberealtimerecordedonanyMIDI
track.
Duringplayback,theexclusivemessagesyourecorded
willcontrolthetrackparametersandeffectparameters
ofthesong,andcanbesenttoexternalMIDIdevices.
Note:YoucanusethepagemenucommandPutEffect
SettingtoMIDITracktoinsertanexclusiveevent
containingtheparametersettingsforaninserteffect,
mastereffectortotaleffectintothedesiredlocationof
atrack,sothatthesesettingswillautomaticallyswitch
duringplayback.
GM,XG,andGSexclusivemessagescanbe
recordedonatrack,buttheKRONOSstone
generatorwillnotrespondtothesemessages.
Recording internal parameter changes
YoucanuseSysExforautomationofinternalKRONOS
effectsandProgramparameters.
Asanexample,letsrecordashortphraseontrack1,
addaninserteffect,andthenrecordparameter
changesforthateffectonanunusedtrack.
Note:Inordertorecordsystemexclusivemessages,
makesurethattheGlobalP1:MIDIMIDIsetting
EnableExclusiveischecked.
1. SelectthedesiredprogramforMIDItrack1,and
routeittoIFX1.Thenrecordaphraseofabout
sixteenmeasures.
IntheP0:Play/RECMIDITrackProgSelect/Mixer
page,useProgramSelecttoselectthedesired
programforMIDITrack01.
IntheP8:InsertEffectMIDIRouting1page,route
theMIDITrack01BusSelect(IFX/Indiv.Out
Assign)toIFX1.ThenintheP8:InsertEffectInsert
FXpage,selectthedesiredeffectforIFX1.
SelectMIDITrack01inTrackSelect.Thenpress
theSEQUENCERREC/WRITEswitchandthenthe
START/STOPswitch,andrecordaphraseofabout
sixteenmeasures.
2. SelectMIDITrack09inTrackSelect,andrecord
parameterchangesasdesired.
Note:Forthisexample,selectanemptytrack.Ifyou
wanttorecordontoaMIDItrackthatalready
containsdata,settheP0:Play/RECPreferencepage
RecordingSetuptoOverdub,asdescribedon
page 79.
SelectMIDITrack09inTrackSelect.Thenpress
theSEQUENCERREC/WRITEswitchandthenthe
START/STOPswitch,andbeginrecording.
Attheappropriatetimewhilerecording,adjustthe
parameter(s)thatyouwanttorealtimerecord.
SelectanothereffectforIFX1intheP8:InsertEffect
InsertFXpage,andedittheeffectparametervalues,
orusetheP0:Play/RECControlSurfacepageTone
Adjustcontrolstoeditthesoundinrealtime.
Note:Fordetailsontheeffectsparametersthatyou
canrecordinrealtime,pleaseseeSystem
86
Exclusiveeventssupportedin Sequencer modeon
3. Stoprecording.
Note:Exclusivemessagesarealwaysrecordedon
thecurrenttrackselectedbyTrackSelect.Inthis
example,theyarerecordedonMIDItrack9.
Note:IntheMIDIeventeditscreenyoucanviewthe
recordedexclusiveeventsandtheirlocation.
ExclusiveeventsaredisplayedasEXCL.
Toviewtheseevents,gototheP4:TrackEditTrack
Editpage,andselectthepagemenucommand
MIDIEventEdit.ThenintheSetEventFilters
dialogbox,checkExclusiveandpresstheOK
button.
Exclusiveeventscannotbechangedtoadifferent
typeofevent.Norcanothereventsbechangedinto
exclusiveevents.
4. Ifyougotothepage(e.g.,P8:InsertEffect)that
showstheparametersyouadjustedinrealtime,
youcanwatchtherecordedchangesbereproduced
whilethesongplaysback.
Exclusive messages that can be recorded in real-
time
Thefollowingexclusivemessagescanberecordedin
realtime:
ExclusivemessagesreceivedfromanexternalMIDI
device
ParameterchangesinSequencermode(seeSystem
Exclusiveeventssupportedin Sequencer modeon
page 661oftheParameterGuide)
MasterVolumeuniversalexclusivemessages
assignedtothefootpedaloraknob
Recording patterns
Recording and editing patterns
Youcanrecordpatternsineitheroftwoways;realtime
recordingorsteprecording.However,patternrealtime
recordingdiffersfromsongrealtimerecordinginthat
youcanuseonlyLooptyperecording.
YoucaneditpatternsbyusingEventEditoperationsto
modifytherecordeddataorinsertnewdata.Youcan
alsousetheGetFromMIDITrackpagemenu
commandtoconvertadesiredregionofperformance
datafromaMIDItrackintoapattern.Conversely,you
canusethePuttoMIDITrackorCopytoMIDITrack
pagemenucommandstoplaceorcopythe
performancedatafromapatternintoaMIDItrack.
YoucanalsouseyourpatternswiththeDrumTrack,
viatheConverttoDrumTrackPatternmenu
commandonP5:Pattern/RPPR.
Recording patterns in real-time
Hereshowyoucanuserealtimerecordingtocreatea
pattern.UserpatternscanbeaccessedbytheRPPR
functioninthesamewayaspresetpatterns,andcanbe
copiedtoorplacedinasong.Playbackdatafroma
trackcanalsobecopiedtoapattern.
Whenrealtimerecordingapattern,apatternofthe
specifiednumberofmeasureswillplayback
repeatedly,allowingyoutocontinueaddingmusical
datatoit.
1. Createanewsong,andasdescribedin
Preparationsforrecordingonpage 76,setthe
tracktotheprogramthatwillbeusedbythe
pattern.
2. GototheP5:Pattern/RPPRPatternEditpage(See
thediagrambelow).
3. UseTrackSelecttoselectthetrackthatyouwill
usetorecordthepattern.
Thepatternwillsoundwiththeprogramandother
settingsoftheselectedtrack.
4. SetPattern(PatternBank)toUser,andset
PatternSelecttoU00.
UserpatternsU00U99canbecreatedforeachsong.
5. SelectthepagemenucommandPattern
Parameter.
6. Setthenumberofmeasuresinthepatterntoa
Lengthof04(fourmeasures),andsetMeterto
atimesignatureof4/4.PresstheOKbutton.
7. Asnecessary,setRECResolutiontoapply
realtimequantization.
Location Event display
MIDI recording Recording patterns
87
8. Beginrealtimerecording.
Youcanrecordinthesamewayasyoudidwhen
recordingtrackswithLoopAllTracks.(SeeLoop
AllTracksonpage 80.)
PresstheSEQUENCERREC/WRITEswitch,and
Aftertheprecount,patternrecordingwillbegin.
Playthekeyboardandoperatethejoystickand
othercontrollerstorecordyourperformance.
Whenyoureachtheendofthepattern,the
sequencerwillreturntothebeginningofthepattern
andcontinuerecording.Ifyoucontinuerecording,
thenewlyrecordeddatawillbeaddedtothe
previouslyrecordeddata.
9. Ifyouwanttodeletespecificdatawhileyou
continuepatternrecording,youcanpressthe
SEQUENCERREC/WRITEswitchorcheckthe
RemoveDatacheckbox.
Fordetailsrefertostep6ofLoopAllTrackson
page 80.
stoprecording.
Ifyoumadeamistakeordecidetorerecord,press
theSEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitchtostop
recording,andpresstheCOMPAREswitch.Then
beginthepatternrecordingprocedureagainasin
step8.
Control data in pattern recording
Torecordcontroldatainapattern,youshouldrestore
thecontroldatatoitsnormalvaluewithinthepattern.
Ifyoufailtorestorethenormalvalue,unnecessary
controldatamayremaininastuckpositionwhen
youplacethepatterninasongorusetheRPPR
functiontoplaythepattern.However,thefollowing
controldatawillbeautomaticallyresettothe
followingvalueswhenthesongorRPPRfunction
finishesplayingthepattern,orwhenplaybackis
halted.
Using KARMA for pattern recording
IfKARMAissettooperateforthetrackthatisselected
forTrackSelect,andrecordtheperformanceof
KARMAintothepattern.
Pattern Select
Controller Reset value
Modulation 1 (CC#01) 00 (zero)
Modulation 2 (CC#02) 00 (zero)
Expression (CC#11) 127 (max)
Ribbon controller (CC#16) 64 (center)
Damper switch (CC#64) 00 (zero)
Sostenuto switch (CC#66) 00 (zero)
Soft switch (CC#67) 00 (zero)
EG sustain level (CC#70) 64 (center)
Resonance level (CC#71) 64 (center)
EG release time (CC#72) 64 (center)
EG attack time (CC#73) 64 (center)
Low pass filter cutoff (CC#74) 64 (center)
EG decay time (CC#75) 64 (center)
LFO1 speed (CC#76) 64 (center)
LFO1 depth (pitch) (CC#77) 64 (center)
LFO1 delay (CC#78) 64 (center)
Filter EG intensity (CC#79) 64 (center)
SW1 modulation (CC#80) 00 (zero)
SW2 modulation (CC#81) 00 (zero)
Channel after touch 00 (zero)
Pitch bender 00 (zero)
Controller Reset value
88
Other ways to record
Multi-track recording with KARMA and
the Drum Track
Youcanrecordmultitrackperformancesgeneratedby
KARMAand/ortheDrumTrack.Formore
information,seeUsingKARMAinSequencermode
onpage 232.
Multi-track recording with RPPR
Youcanrecordmultitrackperformancesgeneratedby
RPPR.Formoreinformation,seeUsingRPPR
(RealtimePatternPlay/Record)onpage 106.
Using the control surface to record
changes in the pan, EQ, volume, or Tone
Adjust parameters of a MIDI track
Duringrealtimerecording,youcanusethecontrol
surfacetocontrolthepan,EQ,volume,orToneAdjust
parameters,andrecordthesechangessothattheywill
bereproducedduringplayback.
Ifyouwillbeadjustingmorethanonetrack
simultaneously,youllneedtousemultitrack
recording.
Note:Changesyoumakeusingthecontrolsurfaceare
transmittedascontrolchangesorsystemexclusive
messages.Inordertorecordthesechanges,theGlobal
P1:MIDIMIDIEnableControlChangeandEnable
Exclusiveitemsmustbechecked.MovetoGlobal
modeandmakesurethattheseitemsarechecked.
Audio recording Audio recording overview
89
Audio recording
Audio recording overview
Therearesixteenaudiotracks.Theyallow16or24
bitlinearPCMrecordingwithamaximumtimeof
80minutes.
Automationdata(volume,pan,EQ,send1/2)can
berecordedforeachtrack.
Uptosixteentrackscanbeplayedback
simultaneously,anduptofourtrackscanbe
recordedsimultaneously.
TheStereoPairfunctionletsyouassigntwotracks
asapairforrecording,control,andediting.
Youcanchoosefromabroadrangeofinternal
busesastherecordingsource;AudioInput12,
S/P DIF,USB,RECBus14,themainL/Routputs,
orindividualoutputs14(yes,youcandirectly
recordfromtheoutputs,allinthedigitaldomain).
Youcanalsoroutethesignalveryflexibly,for
examplebyinsertingeffectsintoexternalaudio
sourcesandrecordingtheresult.
Whenyourecord,anaudioeventandregiondata
arecreatedandassignedtothetrack.Theregion
datacontainsalinktotheWAVEfile(audiodata)
thatsrecordedonthedisk.Youcaneditina
varietyofways,forexamplebychangingthe
locationoftheaudioevent,orbyediting/replacing
theregiondataorWAVEfile.
Autoormanualpunchin/outareprovided.
TheRehearsalfunctionletsyoupracticeapunch
in/outwithoutactuallyrecording.
Youcanusethecontrolsurfacemixertoadjustthe
panandvolumeetc.oftheaudiotracks,andrecord
theseoperationsasautomationeventssothatthe
panandvolumechangeswillbereproducedduring
playback.
Whenrecordingaudiotracks,theMIDIClockmust
besettoInternal.Formoreinformation,seeMIDI
Clock(MIDIClockSource)onpage 772ofthe
ParameterGuide.
Audio events and regions in an audio
track
Whenyourecordonanaudiotrack,theactualaudio
dataisrecordeddirectlyontheinternaldriveasa
WAVEfile.Atthistime,aregionisalsocreated;this
containsinformationspecifyingwhatportionofthat
WAVEfileistobeactuallyplayedback.Inaddition,an
audioeventwhichassignsthatregioniscreated;this
specifiesthelocationinthesongatwhichtheaudio
willplay.
Whenplaybackreachesapointinthesongwherean
audioeventislocated,theWAVEfileonthediskwill
beplayedasspecifiedbytheaudioeventandthe
region.Inotherwords,theaudiowillnotplayifeither
theaudioevent,theregion,ortheWAVEfileare
missing.
Pleasenotethataudioeventsandregionscanbe
deletedbyaudioeventeditingorregionediting,
andcanalsobeeasilylostifyouturnoffthepower
beforesavingtothedisk.IfonlytheWAVEfileis
leftonthedisk,thiswilloccupydiskcapacityforno
purpose;werecommendthatyouexecuteDelete
UnusedWAVFilestofreeupanysuchwasted
space.
Audio Track 01
SONG00
Setting
parameters
Region
Performance
data
Automation Events
Volume, Pan, Send, EQ
Audio events
Start, Volume, Region No.
Region00 Region01
0000: Guitar1
0001: Guitar2
0002: Voice1
Song No.: Song00
Track No.: Track01
Allow Tempo: On
Tempo: 120
Start: 000
End: 95999
Anchor Point: 0
Wave Name: GUITAR1.WAV
Setting
parameters
Performance
data
Automation Events
Volume, Pan, Send, EQ
Audio events
Start, Volume, Region No.
Hard Disk
NEWFILE.SNG NEW SONG Tracks
PATTERN 00
Regions TRK01_00
TRK01_01
TRK02_00
NEWFIL_A SONG000 ATRACK01 GUITAR1.WAV
VOICE1.WAV
GUITAR2.WAV
Region02
Audio Track 02
ATRACK02
90
How audio data is stored on the disk
WhenyousaveSongstodisk,theyrestoredinan
.SNGfile.This.SNGfilecontainsallofthedatafrom
Sequencermode,includingalloftheSongsinmemory,
exceptfortherelatedaudiofiles.
Whenyousavean.SNGfile,itsrelatedaudiofilesare
storedinaseparatedirectory.Thisdirectoryiscreated
automatically,withinthesamedirectoryasthe.SNG
file.(Itsalsocreatedifyouloadapreexisting.SNGfile
whichdoesnthaveamatchingaudiodirectory.)The
directorysnameconsistsofthe.SNGfilename
followedby_A(forAudio).
Forinstance,ifthe.SNGfileisnamed
WAMOZART.SNG,itsaudiodirectorywillbenamed
WAMOZART_A.
Thismaindirectorycontainssubdirectoriesforeach
song,namedSONG000,SONG001,etc.Theseinturn
containsubdirectoriesforeachaudiotrack,named
ATRACK01,ATRACK02,andsoon.Withineachofthe
tracksubdirectories,eachindividualaudiotakeis
storedasaWAVEfile.
Move or re-name audio and .SNG files together
Ifyoumoveorrenameanexisting.SNGfile,make
suretomoveorrenameitscorrespondingaudio
directoryaswell.Themainaudiodirectorymustbein
thesamefolderasthe.SNGfile,andmustbenamedas
describedabove.
Temporary audio files
Ifyourerecordinganewsong,andhaventyetsavedit
asan.SNGfile,theaudiofilesarestoredina
temporarylocationondisk.Thedirectorystructureis
thesameasdescribedabove,exceptthatthemain
audiodirectoryisnamedTEMP.
Onceyousavethesong(s)toan.SNGfile,these
directoriesandaudiofileswillbecopiedtothenew
_Afolderautomatically.Ontheotherhand,iffor
somereasonyoudontorcantsavebeforeturningoff
thepower,youllbegiventhechancetorestorethese
audiofilesthenexttimethatyoustartupthe
instrument,asdescribedbelow.
Recovering temporary audio files
Iftherearetemporaryaudiofilesfromtheprevious
session,youllseethefollowingdialogthenexttime
youstartuptheKRONOS:
Thereareunsavedaudiofilesfromyourprevious
recordingsession.
Doyouwanttorestorethesefiles,ordeletethem
fromthedisk?
[Restore][Delete]
IfyoudontintendtousetheWAVEfiles,we
recommendthatyoudeletethemsotheydontwaste
spaceontheinternaldisk.Todeletethem,pressthe
Deletebutton.
Ifyouwanttosavethesefiles,presstheRestorebutton
tokeepthem.
Notethatwhiletheaudiofilescanberecoveredthis
way,therestofthesequencerdatacannotberestored.
Audio input settings and recording source selection
Use Global Setting
Youcanconfiguretheaudioinputsseparatelyforeach
Song,ifdesired.Alternatively,youcanusetheGlobal
setting,asmadeontheGlobalP0:BasicSetupAudio
page.
IfUseGlobalSettingisenabled,theSongwilluse
theseGlobalsettings,andalloftheothersettings
underAudioInputwillbegrayedout.
Audio Input settings
JustasinProgramandCombinationmodes,Sequencer
modeincludesamixerfortheaudioinputs,including
analog,USB,andS/P DIF.Youcanusethistomixand
processtheinputspriortorecording,ifyoulike.For
instance,youcanmixseveralinputstogetherandsend
themtothesameRECbus,orprocessaninputthrough
effectsandthenrecordtheresult.
Asanalternative,youcanignorethemixersettings
andjustrecorddirectlyfromtheinputs.
Input1&2aretheanalogaudioinputsfromthe
INPUT1&2jacks.Formoreinformation,seeAnalog
AUDIOINPUTSonpage 8.
Audio recording Audio input settings and recording source selection
91
USB1&2aretheleftandrightchannelsoftheUSB
audioinput.Formoreinformation,seeUSBportson
page 8.
S/P DIFL&S/P DIFRaretheleftandrightchannels
oftheopticalS/P DIFinput.Formoreinformation,see
S/P DIFIN&OUTonpage 9.
Bus Select (IFX/Indiv.)
Thisspecifiestheoutputbusforeachaudiosignal.
Off:Theexternalaudioinputsignalwillnotbesentto
anybus.However,youcanstillrecordtheexternal
audiosignaldirectlybyusingtheP0:Play/RECAudio
TrackMixerpageRECSourcesettingtochoosean
externalinput(AudioInput1/2,S/P DIFL/R,USB1/2)
forrecording.
L/R:Theexternalaudioinputsignalwillbesenttothe
L/Rbus.Choosethiswhenyouwantothersignalssuch
theKRONOSinternaltonegeneratortoberecorded
alongwithanexternalaudiosource.SetRECSourceto
L/R.
IFX112:Theexternalaudioinputsignalwillbesent
totheIFX112bus.Choosethiswhenyouwantto
applyaninserteffectwhilerecording.SetRECSource
tomatchthepostIFXBusSelectsetting.
14:Theexternalaudioinputsignalwillbesentin
monototheselectedindividualoutput.
1/2and3/4:Theexternalaudioinputsignalwillbesent
viaPaninstereotoINDIVIDUAL1/2or3/4.SetREC
SourcetothecorrespondingINDIV.setting.
BeawarethatifyouchangeBusSelect(IFX/Indiv.)
fromOfftoL/RorIFX,thevolumelevelfrom
AUDIOOUTL/MONOandRjacksorfromthe
headphonejackmayincreaseabruptly.Pleaseuse
caution.
FX Ctrl Bus (FX Control Bus)
ThissendstheexternalaudioinputsignaltotheFX
Controlbus(stereotwochannel(FXCtrl1,2)).For
moreinformation,seeFXControlBusesonpage 860
REC Bus
ThissendstheexternalaudioinputsignaltotheREC
buses(fourmonochannels:1,2,3,4).
TheRECbusesarededicatedinternalrecordingbuses
thatyoucanuseforrecordingorsamplingaudio
tracks.
RecordingbecomespossibleifyouchooseaRECbus
astheSourceBus.Forexample,youcanusetheREC
busesifyouwanttorecordonlyanaudioinputsource
thatisbeingplayedalongwiththesongbeingoutput
fromtheL/Rbus(i.e.,recordtheinputsource,butnot
thesongplayback).Youcanalsomixseveralaudio
inputstotheRECbuses,ormixthedirectsignalfrom
audioinputstoRECbusesalongwithpostIFXsound
andrecordtheresult.
Off:ThesignalwillnotbeoutputtotheRECbuses.
NormallyyouwillleavethisOff.
1,2,3,4:Theexternalaudioinputsignalwillbesentto
thespecifiedRECbus.ThePansettingisignored,and
thesignalissentinmonaural.
1/2,3/4:Theexternalaudiosignalwillbeoutputtothe
RECbusesinstereo.AccordingtothePansetting,it
willbesentinstereotobuses1and2,or3and4.
Send1 (to MFX1), Send2 (to MFX2)
Thesespecifythelevelatwhichtheexternalaudio
inputsignalwillbesenttothemastereffects.
Send1(toMFX1)sendsthesignaltomastereffect1.
Send2(toMFX2)sendsthesignaltomastereffect2.
IfBusSelect(IFX/Indiv.)issettoIFX112,thesend
levelstothemastereffectsarespecifiedbytheSend1
andSend2settingsthatfollowIFX112.
PLAY/MUTE
Theseindicatewhethereachexternalaudioinput
signalisinPlayorMutecondition.
UsetheMIXPLAY/MUTE16switchestochangethe
status.
SOLO On/Off
ThisindicatestheSOLOstatusofeachexternalaudio
inputsignal.UsetheMIXSELECT16switchesto
changethesolostatus.
SoundwillbeoutputonlyfromchannelswhoseSOLO
isOn.Otherchannelswillbemuted.Solooperation
includesbothMIDItracksandaudiotracks.
Pan
Thisspecifiesthepanningofeachexternalaudioinput
signal.Ifyouareinputtingastereoaudiosource,you
willnormallypantheinputstoL000andR127
respectively.
Level
Thiscontrolstheleveloftheexternalaudiosignal.The
defaultis127.
Note:theanalogaudiosignalsfromAUDIOINPUTS1
&2areconvertedintodigitalformbyanA/D
converter.Thisparametersetsthelevelofthesignal
immediatelyafterthisconversion.
Ifthesoundisdistortedeventhoughthislevelsetting
isverylow,seeTipsforeliminatingdistortionwhen
usingtheanaloginputsonpage 95.
Avoiding extraneous noise
Ifcablesareconnectedtoanyoftheaudioinputs
(analog,S/P DIF,orUSB),anynoisecarriedbythe
cableswillenterintotheKRONOSmixerstructure.
Thismayincludehiss,hum,andotheraudionoise.
Toavoidnoisefromunusedaudioinputs,either:
SettheinputsLevelto0
or
SetallofthebusassignmentstoOff,includingBus
Select(IFX/Indiv.OutAssign),RECBus,andFX
ControlBus
Ifnoaudiocablesareconnectedtotheanalogaudio
inputs,theinputsignalsareforcedtozero,
preventinganyadditionalnoise.
92
Audio Track Mixer
Youcanspecifytheaudiosourcetorecordfrom,and
changethePlay/Mutestatus,SOLOstatus,pan,and
volumeforplayback.
REC Source
Thisselectsthesourcethatwillberecordedonthe
track.Thesignalofthebuslineyouspecifyherewillbe
recorded.Seebelowforadiagramofbuseswhen
recordingfromtheaudioinputs;formoredetailed
diagrams,seeunder02:AudioTrackMixeron
IfyousettheTrackSelectfieldtoAudioTrack,you
willbeabletomonitortheRECSourceofthattrack.
Theoptionswilldifferslightlydependingonwhether
ornotStereoPairisenabled.
AudioInput1,2,1/2,USB1,2,1/2,orS/P DIFL,R,
L/R:Choosethesetodirectlyrecordtheaudioinput
fromtheanalog,S/PDIF,orUSBinputs.Theinputs
willberecordeddirectlywithoutpassingthroughthe
L/Rbus,RECbuses,orIndividualbuses.Noneofthe
AudioInputsettingswillaffecttherecordedsignal;
thisincludesBus(IFX/Indiv),Pan,Level,Solo,and
Play/Mute.SeethediagramRECSource=Audio
Input1,2,1/2.
IfStereoPairisonandAudioInput1/2isselected,
AUDIOINPUT1willbeinputtotheoddnumbered
track,andAUDIOINPUT2willbeinputtotheeven
numberedtrack.Similarly,USB1/2.andS/P DIFL/R
willbeinputtotheoddnumberedandeven
numberedtracksrespectively.
L,R,L/R:TheL/RbusafterpassingthroughTFX1and
2willberecorded.Choosethisifyouwanttorecordan
externalaudiosignalbeingsenttotheL/Rbus,orthe
soundbeingproducedbytheKRONOS(andsentto
theL/Rbus)inresponsetosequencerplayback,
keyboardplaying,orMIDIinput.
IfStereoPairison,Lissenttooddnumberedtracks,
andRissenttoevennumberedtracks.
REC1,2,1/2,REC3,4,3/4:TheREC1/2orREC3/4
buseswillberecorded.Choosethisifyouwantto
recordonlytheaudioinputwhilehearingthe
sequencerplaybackandyourkeyboardplayingfrom
theL/Routputs.Youcanalsomixseveralaudioinputs
totheRECbuses,orusetheRECbusestomixthe
directsoundfromtheaudioinputswiththesound
processedbyinserteffects,andrecordtheresult.
IfStereoPairison,RECbus1(3)issenttoodd
numberedtracks,andRECbus2(4)issenttoeven
numberedtracks.
Indiv.14,Indiv.1/2and3/4:Thisallowsyoutorecord
thesignalattheindividualoutputsdirectly,without
theneedforanexternalcable.Similarlytousingthe
RECbuses,youcanchoosethiswhenyouwantto
monitortheL/Routputwhilerecordingadifferent
signal.
IfStereoPairisonandyouveselectedIndiv.1/2,the
Indiv.bus1willbesenttooddnumberedtracks,and
Indiv.bus2willbesenttoevennumberedtracks.
Play/Rec/Mute
Usethistomuteanaudiotrack,ortoselectthe
recordingtracksformultitrackrecording.During
playback,orforsingletrackrecording(normal
recording),itispossibleonlytoselectPlayorMutefor
tracks(playbacktracks)otherthantherecordingtrack.
Formultitrackrecording,trackscanbesettoPlay,
Mute,orRec.Thesettingwillalternateeachtimeyou
pressthePlay/Rec/Mutebutton.
Solo On/Off
ThisturnstheSolofunctionon/off.
Pan
Thisspecifiesthepanofaudiotrack.
Track: REC (Mono)
Track: REC (Mono)
Stereo
Level Pan
Insert
Efects
CLIP !
L/MONO
R
AUDIO OUTPUT
HEADPHONES
Insert
Efects
L/R
BUS
REC
1/2
REC
3/4
Indiv.
1/2
Sequencer Playback
Keyboard
Level Pan
Insert
Efects
Audio Input 1
Audio Input 2
REC Source =
Audio Input 1, 2, 1/2
[x] Source Direct Solo
Total
Efects
Master
Efects
Recording
Monitor
BUS = L/R or IFX1-12
3/4
Audio recording Recording procedure
93
Volume
Setsthevolumeofaudiotracks116.
Recording procedure
Recording Setup
Theseparametersspecifyhowaudiotrackswillbe
recorded.
Fordetailsoneachrecordingmethod,refertothe
examplesforMIDItracks.(SeeRecordingsetupon
page 78)
However,thisdiffersfromMIDItrackrecordingas
follows.
Overwrite
Whenrecordingforthefirsttime,youwillnormally
selectthismethod.
Tobeginrecording,presstheSEQUENCERREC/
WRITEswitchandthentheSEQUENCERSTART/
STOPswitch.Tostoprecording,pressthe
SEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitchonceagain.
AudioTrackAudioEvents:Onlythemeasuresyou
recordedwillbeoverwritten;thedatainsubsequent
measureswillremainunchanged.
AudioTrackAutomationEvents:Alldatafollowing
themeasureatwhichyoubeginrecordingwillbe
erased.
Overdub
SelectthismethodwhenyouwishtoaddAudioTrack
AutomationEventdatatoapreviouslyrecordedtrack.
Tobeginrecording,presstheSEQUENCER
REC/WRITEswitchandthentheSEQUENCER
START/STOPswitch.Tostoprecording,pressthe
SEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitchonceagain.
AudioTrackAudioEvents:AswithOverwrite,only
themeasuresyourecordedwillbeoverwritten;the
datainsubsequentmeasureswillremainunchanged.
AudioTrackAutomationEvents:Thepreviously
recordeddatawillremain,andthenewlyrecorded
datawillbeaddedtoit.
Manual Punch In
Selectthismethodwhenyouwishtousethe
SEQUENCERREC/WRITEswitchorafootswitchto
rerecordselectedportionsofapreviouslyrecorded
track.
Auto Punch In
Selectthismethodwhenyouwishtoautomaticallyre
recordselectedportionsofapreviouslyrecorded
track.
ForbothManualPunchInandAutoPunchIn,
recordingwilloccurasfollows.
AudioTrackAudioEvents,AudioTrackAutomation
Events:Onlythemeasuresyourecordedwillbe
overwritten;thedatainsubsequentmeasureswill
remainunchanged.
Loop All Tracks
Choosethismethodifyouwanttorepeatedlyrecord
trackautomationeventsoveraspecifiedregionof
measures,addingdataateachpass.Onlyautomation
eventscanberecorded.YoucanuseRemoveDatato
removeaudiotrackautomationevents.
Audioeventscannotberecorded.Thismeansthatif
yousetTrackSelecttoAudioTrack,andturn
AutomationOnlyOff,youwillbeunabletostart
recording.
Recording Setup (Audio Track)
HDR Bit Depth
Youcanchoosetorecordeither16bitor24bitdata.
24bityieldshigherfidelity,butusesmorespaceon
disk.
Automation Only
Normallyyouwillrecordwiththisunchecked.Both
audiotrackautomationeventsandaudioeventswill
berecorded.
Ifthisischecked,onlyaudiotrackautomationevents
willberecorded.Usethissettingifyouwanttorecord
automationafterrecording.
Auto Input
Thisparametercontrolsmonitoringduringrecording.
Itautomaticallyswitchesallrecordenabledtracks
betweenmonitoringtherecordinputandthetrack
playback,accordingtowhetherornotrecordingis
active.
Thisletsyoulistentoaudioyouvealreadyrecorded
whenpunchingin,andalsomeansthatyoudonthave
todisabletrackrecordenablesinordertolistento
playback.
94
Thisappliesonlytorecordenabledtracks.IfMulti
RECisoff,thisistheRECTrack(asselectedinthe
TrackSelectmenu).IfMultiRECison,thismeansto
alltrackswhosePlay/Rec/MutebuttonissettoRec.
Normally,AutoInputshouldbeenabled(checked).
Whenenabled,recordenabledtrackswillbe
monitoredasfollows:
Whenstopped,themonitorcarriestheinputsignal.
Whenplayingbutnotrecording,themonitor
carriesthetrackplayback.
Whenrecording,themonitorcarriestheinput
signal.
Foraudiotrackswhicharenotrecordenabled,youll
alwaysbemonitoringthetrackplayback.
Audiotrackmonitoring
(Input:RECSource,Track:trackplayback)
Source Direct Solo
Ifthisisunchecked,theL/R(postTFX)andbusline
signal(s)specifiedbyRECSourcewillbesentfromthe
L/Rjacksandtheheadphonejackasspecifiedbythe
AudioInputBusSelect(IFX/Indiv.)andpostIFXBus
Sel.settings.Thisisthenormalstate.
Normallyyouwillleavethisunchecked,andCheck
thisifyouwanttomonitoronlythesoundthatsbeing
recorded.Onlythesignalofthebuslinespecifiedby
RECSourcewillbeoutputtotheL/Rjacksandthe
headphonejack.WhenusingMultiREC,youllhear
thesoundfromtheRECSourcebuseswhose
Play/Rec/MutesettingissettoREC.
Note:IftheRECSourceisL/R,thissettingisignored;
theL/R(postTFX)signalisoutputfromtheL/Rjacks
andtheheadphonejack.
Rehearsal
Checkthisifyouwanttorehearsebeforeactually
recordingonanaudiotrack.(recordingwillnot
actuallyoccur).
Audio Track Recording Level
Thisindicatestheinputleveltotheaudiotrack
selectedforTrackSelect(whenusingsingletrack
recording),ortheinputleveltotheaudiotrackswhose
Play/Rec/MutesettingisREC(whenusingmultitrack
recording:maximum4tracks).
Recording Level 1, 2, 3, 4
Level Meter 1, 2, 3, 4
ThisadjuststhefinalstagesignallevelofeachREC
Sourcebeingrecordedtotheaudiotracks.
Theupperpartofthelevelmeter/slidershowsthe
correspondingaudiotracknumber.
Ifyoureusingsingletrackrecording,RecordingLevel
1andLevelMeter1bothapply.
Ifyoureusingmultitrackrecording,thesettingsfor
trackswhosePlay/Rec/MuteisRECwillbevalid.
Whenusingsingletrackrecording,thelevelmeterwill
showtherecordinglevelifyousetTrackSelectto
AudioTrack.Whenusingmultitrackrecording,press
theSEQUENCERREC/WRITEswitchtoenterrecord
standbymode,andthelevelmeterwillshowthe
recordinglevel.
Note:Thesettingsuptothispointarethesameasif
youexecutedthepagemenucommandAuto
HDR/SamplingSetupwiththeHDR(AudioTrack
Recording)setting,tomakethesetupautomatically.
AudioInput,RECSource,TrackSelect,and
Overwritearesetautomatically.Formoreinformation,
seeAutoHDR/SamplingSetuponpage 629ofthe
ParameterGuide.
Setting levels
Forthebestresults,setthelevelsasdescribedbelow:
1. IfMultiRECisoff,setTrackSelecttoanAudio
Track.
or
IfMultiRECisOn,recordenablethedesired
Tracks,andthenpresstheSEQUENCER
REC/WRITEswitch.
TheLevelMeter(s)willnowshowtherecording
level(s).
2. Initially,settheRecordingLevel(s)to0.0dB.
3. Adjustthelevel(s)oftheinputsignal(s)sothatit
isashighaspossiblewithoutactivatingtheCLIP!
orADCOVERLOAD!messages.
IfyoureusingAUDIOINPUTS1and/or2,adjustthe
volumeusingrearpanelMIC/LINEswitchesand
LEVELknobs.
IfyoureusingtheUSBorS/P DIFinputs,adjustthe
outputlevelofyourexternalaudiosource.
Ifyouresamplingexternalaudiothroughtheinternal
effects,youmayalsoneedtoadjusttheindividual
effectsinputand/oroutputlevelparameters.
Ifyoureusinginternalsounds,adjustthelevelsusing
thecontrolsurface,effectsinput/outputtrim,etc.
4. Ifthelevelisstillnothighenough,increasethe
RecordingLevelusingtheonscreenslider.
Again,thegoalistogetthelevelashighaspossible
withoutactivatingtheCLIP!orADCOVERLOAD!
messages.
A
u
t
o

I
n
p
u
t
D
u
r
i
n
g

S
t
o
p
D
u
r
i
n
g

P
l
a
y
D
u
r
i
n
g

R
e
c
During Punch Rec
I
n
I
n
O
u
t
O
u
t
Record
Tracks
On Input Track Input Track Input Track*
Off Input
Other
Tracks
On
Track Playback
Off
95
Tips for eliminating distortion when using the
analog inputs
Ifsoundfromtheanaloginputsisdistorted,butthe
CLIP!messagedoesntappear,itspossiblethat
distortionisoccurringattheanaloginputstage,orthat
distortionisbeingcausedbythesettingsoftheinternal
effects.
IftheADCOVERLOAD!messageappearsabovethe
RecordingLevelmeters,thedistortionisdueto
excessivelevelsattheinput.Inthiscase,eitherlower
theoutputleveloftheexternalaudiosource,oradjust
theMIC/LINEgainselectswitchandLEVELknobso
thatthismessagedoesnotappear.
Ifthereisdistortion,buttheADCOVERLOAD!
messagedoesnotappear,itspossiblethatthe
distortionisbeingcausedbythesettingsoftheinternal
effects.Tosolvethisproblem,eitherlowertheinput
Level,oradjusttheeffectssettings(suchaschanging
theindividualeffectInputTrimparameters).
Examples of audio track recording
Recording an external input on audio track 1
Inthisexample,wellexplainhowaguitarconnected
totheAudioInput1jackcanberecordedonaudio
track1.
Recordingandplaybackonanaudiotrackcanoccur
untiltheendofthemastertrack.Youcannotrecord
forlongerthan80minutes.
Connect your guitar
1. ConnectyourguitartotherearpanelAUDIO
INPUT1jack.
PresstheAUDIOINPUTMIC/LINEswitchinward
toselecttheLINEposition,andsettheLEVELknob
ataboutthecenter.
Ifyouconnectaguitarwithpassivepickups(i.e.,a
guitarthatdoesnotcontainapreamp),youwillbe
unabletosampleitatthecorrectlevelbecauseofthe
impedancemismatch.Suchguitarsshouldbe
routedthroughapreamporaneffectunitfirst,and
thenconnectedtotheKRONOS.
Setup
2. IntheP0:Play/RECAudioInputSamplingpage,
settheAudioInputparametersasdescribed
below.
Thefollowingsettingsaremadebydefault,soyou
dontneedtomakethemyourself:
UseGlobalsettingOff
INPUT1
BusSelect(IFX/Indiv.):Off
Pan:L000
Level:127
RECBus:Off
IntheP0:Play/RECAudioTrackMixerpage,use
RECSourcetoselectAudioInput1(In1),sothat
thesignalfromAudioInput1willberecorded
directlyonaudiotrack1.
AudioTrack1RECSource:AudioInput1(In1)
GototheP8:InsertEffectAudioRouting1page.
SettheoutputforAudioTrack1asfollows.
BusSelect(IFX/Indiv.OutAssign):L/R
Send1(MFX1)andSend2(MFX2):000
LINE
Guitar
Efect unit
96
3. IntheP0:Play/RECPreferencepage,setTrack
SelecttoAudioTrack01.
AUDIOTRK01(LevelMeter1,RecordingLevel1,
Name1,Take,TakeNo.)willappear.
UsetheName1fieldtospecifyanameforthe
regionandWAVEfilethatwillbecreated.
Ifyouintendtorecordseveraltakesonthesame
track,checktheTakeoptionbox.
4. SpecifytherecordingmethodinRecordingSetup
andRecordingSetup(AudioTrack).
Overwrite:selected
AutomationOnly:unchecked
SourceDirectSolo:unchecked
AutoInput:checked
Rehearsal:unchecked
Note:Ifyouwanttorecordfromthebeginningof
thesongorfromthemeasurespecifiedbyLocation,
youshouldselectOverwrite.
Note:IfTakeisunchecked,youwillbeabletoenter
upto24charactersasthefilename.Ifitischecked,
youwillbeabletoinputupto22characters.
Note:Ifyouwantthemetronometosoundduring
recording,useMetronomeSetuptomake
metronomesettings.Formoreinformation,see0
5d:MetronomeSetuponpage 528oftheParameter
Guide.
Set the recording level
5. Playyourguitaratthevolumeyouintendto
record.
IftheADCOVERLOAD!(ADconverterinput
overload)indicationappears,turntherearpanel
LEVELknobtowardMINtoadjustthelevel
appropriately.
Forthebestsound,adjustthelevelashighas
possiblewithoutallowingtheADCOVERLOAD !
indicationtoappear.
6. Thelevelmeterwillshowthevolumeoftheguitar
signalthatwillberecorded.
IftheCLIP!indicationappears,usetheVALUE
controlleretc.tolowertheRecordingLevelslider
(locatedintherightsideofthedisplay)from+0.0
downtoanappropriatelevel.
backthesong,andcheckthevolumebalance.Ifyou
wanttomonitoronlytheguitarsoundduring
playback,checkSourceDirectSolo.
Record
7. IntheP0:Play/RECPreferencepage,use
Locationtospecifythelocationatwhich
recordingwillbegin.
Ifyouwanttostartrecordingfromthebeginningof
thesong,setthisto001:01.000.
8. PresstheSEQUENCERREC/WRITEswitch
TheKRONOSwillbeinrecordreadymode.If
youvemademetronomesettings,themetronome
willsoundthecount.
Recordingwillstartfromthelocationyouspecified
inLocation.
Ifyouhavespecifiedametronomeprecount
(Precount[Measure]),recordingwillbeginafter
theprecount.Ifaperformancehasalreadybeen
recordedonaMIDItrack,thatMIDItrackwillalso
playback.
10.Tostoprecording,presstheSEQUENCER
START/STOPswitch.
Listen to the recorded result
11.GototheP0:Play/RECAudioTrackMixerpage.
InAudioTrack1,setthepanandvolumeetc.for
audiotrack1.
Play/Rec/Mute:Play
SoloOn/Off:Off
Pan:C064
Volume:100
playbackthesong.
Track Select Location
97
Note:YoucanusefunctionssuchasComparewhen
recordingaudioevents,justasyoucanwhen
recordingMIDItracks.
Note:Ifyouwanttoapplyaninserteffectonan
audiotrack,setBusSelect(IFX/Indiv.OutAssign)
toIFX1IFX12.
ThenselectL/RastheBusSelectsetting(P8:Insert
EffectInsertFXpage)thatfollowstheinserteffect
youused.
Note:Ifyouwanttoapplymastereffectstoanaudio
track,useSend1(MFX1)andSend2(MFX2)toset
thesendlevelstothemastereffect.Ifyoureusing
aninserteffect,adjusttheSend1andSend2settings
thatfollowthatinserteffect.
Recording an external input source on audio
track 2 while you listen to the previously-
recorded audio track 1
Inthisexample,wellrecordanotherguitar
performanceonaudiotrack2whilemonitoringthe
performanceyoupreviouslyrecordedonaudiotrack1
asdescribedinRecordinganexternalinputonaudio
track1.
1. IntheP0:Play/RECAudioTrackMixerpage,set
theAudioInput2RECSourcetoAudioInput1(In
1).
AUDIOTRACK2RECSource:AudioInput1(In1)
2. SetTrackSelecttoAudioTrack02.
3. Recordasdescribedinstep8andfollowingofthe
precedingsection.
Applying an insert effect while you
record
Inthisexample,wellapplyaninserteffecttothe
guitarthatsconnectedtoAudioInput1,andrecord
theeffectprocessedsoundonaudiotrack1.
Connect your guitar
1. Connectyourguitar.
Fordetailedinstructions,seeRecordinganexternal
inputonaudiotrack1onpage 95.
Setup
2. IntheP0:Play/RECAudioInput/Samplingpage,
settheAudioInputparametersasshownbelow
thatthesignalfromtheAUDIOINPUT1jackis
senttoIFX1.
UseGlobalSetting:Off
BusSelect(IFX/Indiv.):IFX1
INPUT1Level:127
INPUT1Pan:L000
INPUT1RECBus:Off
3. IntheP8:InsertEffectInsertFXpage,selectthe
desiredeffectandrouteittoRECbus1.
IFX1On/Off:On
IFX1:thedesiredeffect
BusSel.:Off
RECBus:1
RECSourcetoREC1sothatthesignaloftheREC
buswillberecordedonaudiotrack1.
AudioTrack1RECSource:REC1
98
5. IntheP0:Play/RECPreferencepage,setTrack
SelecttoAudioTrack01.
Theremainingstepsarethesameasstep3and
followingoftheprecedingsectionRecordingan
externalaudiosourceonaudiotrack1.Pleaserefer
tothatsectionfordetails.
Punch-in recording an external input
source on an audio track
Inthisexample,wellshowhowtopunchinrecorda
portionofthetrackyourecordedinRecordingan
externalinputonaudiotrack1.
DontchangetheP0:Play/RECAudioInput/
SamplingpageAudioInputsettings,theP0:Play/
RECPreferencepageRecordingSetup(Audio
Track)settings,ortheP0:Play/RECAudioTrack
MixerpageRECSourcesettings.Wewillusethese
settingsastheyare.
Setup
1. IntheP0:Play/RECPreferencepage,makesure
thatAudioTrack01isselectedfortheTrack
Selectparameter.
2. UseRecordingSetuptospecifyhowrecording
willstart.
Inthisexample,choosepunchinrecording.
AutoPunchIn:on
M***M***:Specifytherangeofmeasuresfor
whichyouwanttorecord.
AUDIOTRK01Name,Take,TakeNo.:Specifythe
regionandwavefilenamethatyouwanttorecord.
Note:IfyousetRecordingSetuptoAutoPunchIn
andsetM***M***tothedesiredrangeof
measures,playbackwilloccuruntilthatrangeof
measures,andthenonlythespecifiedrangeof
measureswillberecorded.
IfyousetRecordingSetuptoManualPunchIn,the
measuresyouspecifybypressingtheSEQUENCER
REC/WRITEswitchorfootswitchwillberecorded.
Inthiscase,presstheSEQUENCERSTART/STOP
switchtoplaybackthesong.Whenyoureachthe
measureatwhichyouwanttostartrecording,press
theSEQUENCERREC/WRITEswitchorthefoot
switchtobeginrecording.Whenyoureachthe
measureatwhichyouwanttostoprecording,press
theREC/WRITEswitchorfootswitchonceagain;
recordingwillend.
Rehearse
Ifdesired,youcansimulatetheactionofrecording
withoutactuallyrecording.Thiswillfunctionjustasif
youwererecording,butnoaudioevent,region,or
WAVEfilewillbecreated.
3. InRecordingSetup(AudioTrack),checkthe
Rehearsaloption.
4. UseLocationtospecifythelocationatwhich
youwanttostartrecording.Setthisseveral
measuresearlierthantheregionyouspecifiedfor
M***M***.
Youwillenterrecordreadymode.
OnceyoupresstheSEQUENCERREC/WRITE
switch,youwillbeunabletochangetheaudiotrack
selectioninTrackSelect.
Playbackwillbeginfromthemeasurespecifiedby
Location,andsimulatedrecordingwilloccuronly
intherangeofmeasuresspecifiedbyM***M***.
Thenplaybackwillresume,andwillcontinuetothe
endofthesong.
Note:IftheRecordingSetup(AudioTrack)
parameterAutoInputisOff,youwillalwaysbe
abletoheartheRECSource.Formoreinformation,
seeAutoInputonpage 527oftheParameter
Guide.
stoprecording.
8. InRecordingSetup(AudioTrack),uncheckthe
Rehearsaloption.
Record
9. UseLocationtospecifythelocationatwhich
youwanttostartrecording.Setthisseveral
measuresearlierthantheregionyouspecifiedfor
M***M***.
10.PresstheSEQUENCERREC/WRITEswitch.
Youwillenterrecordreadymode.
11.PresstheSEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitch.
Playbackwillbeginfromthemeasurespecifiedby
Location,andrecordingwilloccuronlyinthe
rangeofmeasuresspecifiedbyM***M***.Then
playbackwillresume,andwillcontinuetotheend
ofthesong.
Note:IftheRecordingSetup(AudioTrack)
parameterAutoInputisOff,youwillalwaysbe
abletoheartheRECSource.
stoprecording.
Audio recording Other variations of audio track recording
99
playbackthesong.
Makeoutputsettingsfortheaudiotrackas
describedunderListentotherecordedresulton
page 96.
stopplayback.
Compare the recorded result
PresstheCOMPAREswitch(theCOMPAREswitch
LEDwilllight),andplayback.
Theaudiotrackpriortopunchinrecordingwill
playback.
OnceagainpresstheCOMPAREswitch(the
COMPARELEDwillgodark),andplayback.
Theaudiotrackfollowingpunchinrecordingwill
playback.
Other variations of audio track recording
Bouncing audio tracks
Bouncingletsyoucombinetwoormoretracksinto
eitherasinglemonotrack,orastereopair.
Inthisexample,wellshowhowaudiotracks1and2
canbebouncedtoaudiotrack3.
Beforeyouproceed,youllneedtorecordontoaudio
tracks1and2.Torecordonaudiotrack2,make
settingsasdescribedunderRecordingSetupon
page 93,butintheP0:Play/RECAudioTrackMixer
page,setAudioTrack2RECSourcetoREC1,andin
theP0:Play/RECPreferencepage,setTrackSelect
toAudioTrack02.
Setup
upbothaudiotracks1and2asshownbelow:
Play/Rec/Mute:Play
SoloOn/Off:On
Pan:L000
Volume:127
Note:ByturningonSoloforbothAUDIO1and
AUDIO2,youarespecifyingthatonlytheseaudio
trackswillbeheardandrecorded.
2. IntheP8:InsertEffectAudioRouting1page,set
upbothaudiotracks1and2asshownbelow:
BusSelect(IFX/Indiv.OutAssign):L/R
Send1(MFX1)andSend2(MFX2):000
Note:Ifyouwanttoapplyinserteffectstotheaudio
tracks,setBusSelect(IFX/Indiv.OutAssign)to
yourchoiceofIFX1IFX12.ThenchooseL/Rforthe
BusSelectsetting(P8:InsertEffectInsertFXpage)
thatfollowstheinserteffectyoureusing.
Note:Ifyouwanttoapplymastereffectstoanaudio
track,useSend1(MFX1)andSend2(MFX2)to
adjustthesendlevelstothemastereffects.Ifyouare
usinganinserteffectontheaudiotrack,adjustthe
Send1andSend2thatfollowtheinserteffectyoure
using.
playbackthesong,andadjustthebalanceofthe
audiotrack1and2outputlevels.
Theoutputlevelofeachaudiotrackisadjustedin
theP0:Play/RECAudioTrackMixerpagebythe
audiotrack1andaudiotrack2Volumesetting.
Whenyouvefinishedmakingadjustments,stop
playback.
4. IntheP0:Play/RECPreferencepage,useTrack
SelecttoselectAudioTrack03.
5. InRecordingSetup,RecordingSetup(Audio
Track),specifythedesiredrecordingmethod.
RecordingSetup
Overwrite:on
RecordingSetup(AudioTrack)
AutomationOnly:unchecked
SourceDirectSolo:unchecked
AutoInput:checked
Rehearsal:unchecked
AudioTRK03
Name,Take,TakeNo.:Specifythedesiredregion
andWAVEfilenametoberecorded.
RECSourcesothatLwillberecordedonaudio
track3.
Audiotrack3RECSource:L
Note:Thesettingsuptothispointarethesameasif
youusedthepagemenucommandAuto
HDR/SamplingSetuptoexecuteBounceAudio
Trackwiththefollowingsettings.Formore
information,seeBounceAudioTrackonpage 631
Mode:Mono
From:AudioTrack01:checked
AudioTrack02:checked
To:AudioTrack03
Whenbouncerecordingaudiotracks,turnthe
metronomeoff(MetronomeSetupSound:Off).
Record
7. SetLocationtothebeginningofthesong(001:
01.000).
Youwillbeinrecordreadymode.
Playbackwillbegin,andbouncerecordingwillalso
beginsimultaneously.
Whentheaudiotrackshavefinishedplayingback,
recordingwillalsoend.Songplaybackwillalsoend
automatically.
100
10.IntheP0:Play/RECAudioTRACKMixerpage,
mutetheplaybackofbothaudiotracks1and2.
Play/Rec/Mute:Mute
SoloOn/Off:Off
playbackthesong.
Makeoutputsettingsforaudiotrack3asdescribed
inListentotherecordedresultonpage 96.
stopplayback.
IfyouwanttocreateaWAVEfileonthediskfroma
songthatincludesaudiotracks,seeResamplinga
songtocreateaWavefileonpage 152.
Recording automation events for pan,
EQ, and volume etc. on an audio track
Allaudiotrackparameters(Pan,Volume,Send1/2,
andEQ)canberecordedinrealtime.Inthisexample,
wellrecordPanandVolumechangesonaudiotrack3.
GototheP0:Play/RECAudioTrackMixerpage,and
useTrackSelecttoselectAudioTrack03asthetrack
toberecorded.YoucouldusetheVALUEcontrollerto
operateadesiredparameter,butusingthecontrol
surfaceletsyoumixuptoeighttrackssimultaneously.
Setup
1. GototheP0:Play/RECPreferencepage.
2. InRecordingSetup,RecordingSetup(Audio
Track),choosethedesiredrecordingmethod.
Inthisexample,wellchooseoverdubrecordingso
thatwecanrecordrepeatedpasses,addingmore
automationdataoneachpass.
RecordingSetup
Overdub:on
RecordingSetup(AudioTrack)
AutomationOnly:checked
IfyourecordwithoutcheckingAutomationOnly,
audioeventswillalsoberecorded.Notethatthis
willeraseandoverwritetheaudioeventsthat
alreadyexist.
3. GototheP0:Play/RECControlSurfacepage.
4. PresstheCONTROLASSIGNAUDIOswitch
severaltimessothattheHDR18LEDlocatedat
therightoftheswitchislit.
5. InthecenteroftherightedgeoftheLCD,check
LinkKBDRECTrktoCtrlSurface.
IfyoucheckthisandpresstheMIXSELECT3
switch,eachknobwillcontrolaudiotrack3,andat
thesametimeTrackSelectwillswitchtoAudio
Track03.
back,andoperatetheknobsandslidersetc.to
rehearseyourmix.
IfMIXERKNOBissettoCHANNELSTRIP,knob1
willcontrolpan,knobs26willcontrolEQ,and
knobs7and8willcontrolthesendlevels.Useslider
3toadjustthevolumeofaudiotrack3.
Whenyouvefinishedrehearsing,pressthe
SEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitchtostop.
PresstheLOCATEswitch.
Record
Themetronomewillbeginsounding,andyouwill
beinrecordreadymode.
Afteratwomeasurecount,recordingwillbegin.
Usetheslidersetc.tocontrolthevolume.
Note:Whenrecordingautomationevents,youcan
usequantization,theresolutionsetting,andthe
comparefunctioninthesamewayasforaMIDI
track.
8. Whenyourefinishedrecording,pressthe
SEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitchtostop
recording.
9. Listentotherecordedresult.
back.
Ifyouwanttorecordagain,usetheCompare
function(presstheCOMPAREswitch)torerecord.
10.Ifyouwanttocontinueaddingautomationevents,
repeattherecordingprocedurefromstep6.
Audio recording Placing a WAVE file in an audio track
101
Placing a WAVE file in an audio track
YoucanplaybackaWAVEfilebyimportingitintoa
regionofanaudiotrack.
Important:YoucanonlydirectlyimportWAVEfiles
fromtheinternaldisk.TousefilesfromCDsor
externalUSBdevices,youmustfirstcopythemtothe
internaldisk,andthenimportthecopiedfileintothe
Song.
Note:Tobeimported,WAVEfilesmustbeat44.1kHz
or48kHzsamplerate,andlessthan80minuteslong.
1. GototheP4:TrackEditpage.
2. UseTrackSelecttoselecttheaudiotrackin
whichyouwanttoplacetheWAVEfile.
3. ChoosetheAudioEventEditpagemenu
commandtoopenthedialogbox.
4. Selecttheeventatwhichyouwanttoinserta
region,andpresstheInsertbuttonlocatedatthe
lowerleft.Adialogboxwillopen.
5. Selecttheregionintowhichyouwanttoimport
theWAVEfile,andpresstheImportbutton
locatedbelow.Adialogboxwillopen.
6. UseDriveSelect,Open,andUptonavigate
tothedesireddirectory,selecttheWAVEfileyou
wanttoimport,andpresstheOKbuttontoimport
thefileintotheregion.
WhenselectingaWAVEfile,youcanpressthePlay
buttontoauditionthefilestohelpyoufindthe
desiredone.
YoucanalsousetheNamefieldlocatedaboveto
assignanametotheregion.EdittheNameafter
youveselectedafile.
Note:TheOKandPlaybuttonsareavailableonlyif
youveselecteda44.1kHzor48kHzWAVEfile.
Otherwise,thebuttonwillbegrayedoutandyou
wontbeabletopressit.
Editingaregionwillaffecttheaudiotrackforthe
entiresong.Usecautionwheneditingaregionthats
alreadyusedinanaudiotrack.
Event
102
7. PresstheOKbutton,theselectedregionwillbe
placedintheaudiotrack.
8. Selecttheeventthatyouwanttoedit,andusethe
locationparametersMeasureandBeatTickto
editthelocationoftheevent.
Youcantplacetwoormoreeventsatthesame
location.
9. PresstheDonebutton.
10.PresstheSEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitch,and
makesurethattheWAVEfileplaysback.
YoucanpresstheCOMPAREswitchtoreturntothe
statepriortotheedityoujustperformed.
Wevekeptthisexamplesimple,butyoucanalso
performeditingoperationssuchaschangingthe
playbackpositionoftheWAVEfileinstepsofasingle
sample,changingthelocationrelativetoananchor
point,orcrossfadingtwoaudioevents.Formore
information,seeAudioAutomationEditonpage 641
Song editing Songs
103
Song editing
YoucanapplyavarietyofeditingoperationstoSongs,
MIDITracks,andAudioTracks,asdescribedbelow.
Songs
InitializeSong:Thiscommanderasesalldatainthe
currentsong,andrestoresallparameterstotheir
defaultstates.Formoreinformation,seeInitialize
Song,asdescribedonpage 624oftheParameter
Guide.
CopyFromSong:Thiscommandcopiesallofthe
settingdataandmusicaldatafromthespecifiedsong
tothecurrentlyselectedsong.Formoreinformation,
seeCopyFromSongonpage 624oftheParameter
Guide.
FF/REWSpeed:Thisallowsyoutosetthespeedat
whichfastforwardorrewindwilloccurwhenyou
presstheFForREWbuttons.Formoreinformation,
seeFF/REWSpeedonpage 625oftheParameter
Guide.
GMInitialize:ThiscommandtransmitsaGMSystem
OnmessagetotheSequencermode,resettingallMIDI
trackstotheGMsettings.Formoreinformation,see
GMInitializeonpage 626oftheParameterGuide.
BounceAllTracksToDisk:Thiscommandrecordsall
tracksinthesongtoasinglestereoWAVEfile.For
moreinformation,seeBounceAllTracksToDiskon
SetSongLength:Thiscommandchangesthelengthof
thespecifiedsong.Whenitisexecuted,thelengthof
themastertrackwillchange,andthenumberof
measuresplayedwillchange.Formoreinformation,
seeSetSongLengthonpage 642oftheParameter
Guide.
Auto HDR/Sampling Setup
Thiscommandwalksyouthroughmakingthe
appropriatesettingsforvariouscommonoperations,
includingdiskrecording,audiotrackbouncing,
sampling/resampling(intracksampling,etc.),and
creatinganaudioCD.Formoreinformation,seeAuto
HDR/SamplingSetuponpage 629oftheParameter
Guide.
Initialize:Setsaudiorecordingandsampling
parameterstotheirdefaultvalues.
HDR(AudioTrackRecording):Makesthenecessary
settingsforrecordingexternalaudio,suchasguitarsor
vocals.
BounceAudioTrack:Makesthenecessarysettingsfor
bouncerecordingaudiotracks.
2chMixtoDisk:Makessettingsforresamplinga
completedsongtoastereoWAVEfile.Youcanthen
burnthesefilestoaCDonaUSBCDR/RWdrive(not
included),usingtheDiskmodeMakeAudioCDpage.
ResampleSEQPlay:Makessettingsforresampling.
InTrackSampling:Makessettingsforsampling
externalaudiousingInTrackSampling.
MIDI Tracks
Track editing
MIDIStepRecording:Itallowsyoutospecifythe
lengthandvelocityofeachnotenumerically,andto
inputMIDIdata,thepitches,fromthekeyboard.You
canusetheRestbuttonandTiebuttontoenterarestor
tie.Formoreinformation,seeMIDIStepRecording
MIDIEventEdit:Hereyoucaneditindividualevents
ofMIDIdata.Formoreinformation,seeMIDIEvent
Editonpage 637oftheParameterGuide.
BounceTrack:Thiscommandcombinesthemusical
dataofthebouncesourceandbouncedestination
tracks,andplacesthecombineddatainthebounce
destination.Allmusicaldatainthebouncesourcewill
beerased.Formoreinformation,seeBounceTrack
CreateControlData:Thiscommandcreatescontrol
change,aftertouch,pitchbend,ortempodatainthe
specifiedregionofaMIDItrackorthemastertrack.
Formoreinformation,seeCreateControlDataon
EraseControlData:Thiscommanderasesdatasuchas
controlchanges,aftertouch,pitchbend,ortempoin
thespecifiedrange.Formoreinformation,seeErase
ControlDataonpage 648oftheParameterGuide.
Quantize:ThiscommandcorrectsthetimingofMIDI
dataofthetypeyouspecify(notedata,controlchange,
aftertouch,pitchbend,programchange,etc.)inthe
track.Formoreinformation,seeQuantizeon
Shift/EraseNote:Thiscommandshifts(moves)or
erasesthespecifiednotenumbersinaspecifiedMIDI
trackandrangeofmeasures.Formoreinformation,see
Shift/EraseNoteonpage 649oftheParameter
Guide.
ModifyVelocity:Thiscommandmodifiesthevelocity
valuesofnotesinthespecifiedareasothattheywill
changeovertimeaccordingtoaselectedcurve.For
moreinformation,seeModifyVelocityonpage 650
104
Pattern editing
StepRecording(LoopType):Hereyoucanperform
steprecordingintoapattern.Formoreinformation,
seeStepRecording(LoopType)onpage 654ofthe
ParameterGuide.
EventEdit:Hereyoucaneditindividualeventsofthe
musicaldatainapattern.Formoreinformation,see
EventEditonpage 654oftheParameterGuide.
PatternParameter:Thiscommandspecifiesthe
numberofmeasuresandthetimesignatureofthe
selectedpattern.Formoreinformation,seePattern
Parameteronpage 655oftheParameterGuide.
ErasePattern:Thiscommanderasesthedatafromthe
selectedpattern.Formoreinformation,seeErase
Patternonpage 655oftheParameterGuide.
CopyPattern:Thiscommandcopiesthesettingsand
musicaldataoftheselectedpatterntoanotherpattern.
Formoreinformation,seeCopyPatternonpage 655
BouncePattern:Thiscommandcombinesthemusical
dataofthebouncesourcepatternandbounce
destinationpattern,andplacesthecombinedmusical
datainthebouncedestination.Formoreinformation,
seeBouncePatternonpage 655oftheParameter
Guide.
GetFromMIDITrack:Thiscommandtakesmusical
datafromaMIDItrackandloadsitintothespecified
pattern.Formoreinformation,seeGetFromMIDI
Trackonpage 656oftheParameterGuide.
PutToMIDITrack:Thiscommandplacesapattern
intoaMIDItrack.Formoreinformation,seePutTo
MIDITrackonpage 656oftheParameterGuide.
CopyToMIDITrack:Thiscommandcopiesthe
specifiedareaofmusicaldatafromthespecified
patterntoaMIDItrackasmusicaldata.Formore
information,seeCopyToMIDITrackonpage 656of
theParameterGuide.
ConverttoDrumTrackPattern:Thiscommand
convertsauserpatternintoauserdrumtrackpattern,
whichcanthenbeusedwiththeDrumTrackinany
mode.Formoreinformation,seeConverttoDrum
TrackPatternonpage 657oftheParameterGuide.
LoadDrumTrackPattern:Thiscommandloadsauser
DrumTrackpatternintoauserpattern.Formore
information,seeLoadDrumTrackPatternon
EraseDrumTrackPattern:Thiserasesthespecified
DrumTrackpattern.Formoreinformation,seeErase
DrumTrackPatternonpage 635oftheParameter
Guide.
Common to MIDI tracks and audio tracks
EraseTrack:Thiscommanderasesthedatafromthe
specifiedtrack.Itisnotpossibletoerasethemaster
trackbyitself.Formoreinformation,seeEraseTrack
CopyTrack:Thiscommandcopiesmusicaldatafrom
thecopysourcetracktothespecifiedtrack.Formore
information,seeCopyTrackonpage 642ofthe
ParameterGuide.
EraseMeasure:Thiscommanderasesthespecified
type(s)ofmusicaldatafromthespecifiedrangeof
measures.TheEraseMeasurecommandcanalsobe
usedtoremoveonlyaspecifictypeofdata.Unlikethe
DeleteMeasurecommand,executingtheErase
Measurecommanddoesnotcausethesubsequent
measuresofmusicaldatatobemovedforward.For
moreinformation,seeEraseMeasureonpage 643of
theParameterGuide.
DeleteMeasure:Thiscommanddeletesthespecified
measures.WhentheDeleteMeasurecommandis
executed,themusicaldatafollowingthedeleted
measureswillbemovedtowardsthebeginningofthe
sequence.Formoreinformation,seeDeleteMeasure
InsertMeasure:Thiscommandinsertsthespecified
numberofmeasuresintothespecifiedtrack.Whenyou
executetheInsertMeasurecommand,themusicaldata
followingtheinsertlocationwillbemovedbackward.
Formoreinformation,seeInsertMeasureon
RepeatMeasure:Thiscommandrepeatedlyinsertsthe
specifiedmeasuresforthespecifiednumberoftimes.
WhenyouexecutetheRepeatMeasurecommand,the
measureswillbeinsertedfollowingthemeasure
specifiedbyToEndofMeasure,andmusicaldata
followingtheinserteddatawillbemovedbackward.
Formoreinformation,seeRepeatMeasureon
CopyMeasure:Thiscommandcopiesthemeasuresof
musicaldataspecifiedastheFromsourcetothe
beginningofthemeasurespecifiedastheTo
location.WhenyouexecutetheCopyMeasure
command,theexistingtrackdataatthecopy
destinationwillberewritten.Formoreinformation,
seeCopyMeasureonpage 646oftheParameter
Guide.
MoveMeasure:Thiscommandmovesthespecified
measuresofperformancedatatoanothermeasure.
WhenyouexecutetheMoveMeasurecommand,the
performancedatafollowingthemovesourcemeasures
willmoveforwardbythecorrespondingnumberof
measures,andtheperformancedatafollowingthe
movedestinationwillmovebackward(i.e.,laterinthe
song)bythesamenumberofmeasures.Formore
information,seeMoveMeasureonpage 647ofthe
ParameterGuide.
Song editing Audio Tracks
105
Audio Tracks
AudioEventEdit:Thiscommandletsyouedit
individualaudioeventsthathavebeenrecorded,or
trim(i.e.,makeadjustmentsinstepsofasinglesample
to)theregionusedbyaudioevents.Formore
information,seeAudioEventEditonpage 638ofthe
ParameterGuide.
AudioAutomationEdit:Thisletsyoueditindividual
automationdataevents.Formoreinformation,see
AudioAutomationEditonpage 641ofthe
ParameterGuide.
RegionEdit:Hereshowtoedittheregionsusedinan
audiotrack.InadditiontoImportingorPastinga
region,youcanusetheTrimdialogboxtospecifythe
rangeinwhichaWAVEfilewillplayback.Formore
information,seeRegionEditonpage 651ofthe
ParameterGuide.
VolumeRamp:Thiscommandmodifiesthedata
values(volume)ofthespecifiedarea.Youcan
graduallyincrease(FadeIn)ordecrease(FadeOut)the
volumebetweenthestartandendpoints.Formore
information,seeVolumeRamponpage 653ofthe
ParameterGuide.
CopySongsTempotoRegion:Thiscommand
changesthetempousedbythespecifiedregionsof
audioeventssothattheaudioeventtempowillmatch
thetempoofthelocationinwhichthoseregionsplay
back.
Ifthetempoofanaudiotrackmatchesthetempoofthe
MIDItracks,executingthiscommandtomatchthe
regiontempowillensurethattheAdjustRegionto
SongsTempo(TimeStretch)orAdjustSongsTempo
toRegioncommandscanbeexecutedcorrectly.For
moreinformation,seeCopySongsTempotoRegion
AdjustSongsTempotoRegion:Thiscommand
createstempoeventsinthemastertracktomatchthe
tempooftheregionsusedbytheaudioeventsinthe
specifiedrange.
Thisisusefulifyoucreateaudiotracksinapreviously
recordedregion,andwantalltracks(includingMIDI
tracks)tomatchthatregion.Formoreinformation,see
AdjustSongsTempotoRegiononpage 653ofthe
ParameterGuide.
AdjustRegiontoSongsTempo(TimeStretch):Ifthe
tempoofregionsusedbyaudioeventsinthespecified
rangediffersfromthetempooftherangeinwhich
thoseregionsplayback,youcanexecuteTimeStretch
(Sustaining)tocreatenewWAVEfilesandregions.
Audioeventsthatusethenewlycreatedregionswill
alsobecreatedautomatically.
Ifyouwanttomodifythetempoofanexistingsong,it
isconvenienttofirstspecifythedesiredtempointhe
mastertrack,andthenexecutethiscommandsothat
theaudiotrack(s)willbecreatedaccordingtothenew
tempo.Formoreinformation,seeAdjustRegionto
SongsTempoonpage 654oftheParameterGuide.
106
Using RPPR (Realtime Pattern Play/Record)
ThissectionexplainshowtoassignapatterntoRPPR,
andhowtoplayandrecordusingRPPR.
Creating RPPR data
1. Createanewsong,andchooseadrumprogramfor
MIDItrack1.
2. SelecttheRPPRSetuptaboftheP5:Pattern/RPPR
page.Inthispage,theRPPRfunctionis
automaticallyturnedon.
3. Selectthekeytowhichthepatternwillbe
assigned.
SelectC#2.HolddowntheENTERswitchandplay
akey,orusethescrollbarlocatedattherighttofind
thekey.
Note:C2andlowerkeysareusedtostopplayback,
andcannotbeassigned.
4. CheckAssignforC#2.
5. SetBanktoPreset,andsetPatternNameto
P00.
6. SetTrackNametoT01.
Theselectedpatternwillbeplayedaccordingtothe
settings(program,etc.)ofthetrackyouselecthere.
7. WiththeC#2parameterselected,presstheCopy
button.
8. Assignpatternstootherkeys.
SelecttheD2parameter,andpressthePastebutton.
TheAssign,Bank,PatternName,Track
Name,Mode,Shift,andSyncsettingsyou
madeinsteps5and6willbecopiedautomatically.
9. ModifyonlythePatternName.SelectPattern
Name,andpressthe switchtoselectP01.
10.SelecttheD#2parameter,andpressthePaste
button.
TheAssign,Bank,PatternName,Track
Name,Mode,Shift,andSyncsettingsyou
madeinsteps5and6willbecopiedautomatically.
Asyoudidinstep9,setPatterntoP02.
Note:WhenmakingRPPRsettings,youcanusethe
CopybuttonandPastebuttoninthiswayto
efficientlyassigntheBank,PatternName,and
TrackNameetc.toeachkey.
11.Asdescribedabove,assignseveralotherpatterns
suchasP03andhigher.
12.PresstheC#2key.Theassignedpatternwillplay.
TakeyourfingerofftheC#2key,andpresstheD2
key.Thepatternwillchange,andplaybackwill
begin.Atthistime,thepatternoperationwill
dependontheSyncandModesetting.
SetKEYtoC#2,andsetSynctoMeasure.Make
thesamesettingforD2(Seethediagramabove).
Nowpressthenotesconsecutively.Noticethatthe
patternsoperateinadifferentway.
WiththeMeasuresetting,patternswillbe
handledinonemeasureunits.Thesecondand
Using RPPR (Realtime Pattern Play/Record) RPPR playback
107
subsequentpatternswillstartinsyncwiththeend
ofpreviouslyplayedpattern.
IfyouchangetheModesettingtoOnce,theentire
patternwillplaybacktotheendevenifyourelease
yourfingerfromthekeyboardimmediately.
13.Tostopplayback,eitherpressthesamekeyonce
again,orpresstheC2orlowerkey.
RPPR playback
LetsusetheRPPRyoucreatedtoperformintheP0:
Play/RECMIDITrackProgSelect/Mixerpage.
1. SelecttheP0:Play/RECMIDITrackProgSelect/
Mixerpage(Seethediagrambelow).
2. ChecktheRPPRcheckbox.
TheRPPRfunctionwillbeturnedon.Settheon/off
foreachsong.
3. Playthekeyboard,andpatternswillbeginplaying
accordingtotheRPPRsettings.
PatternplaybackforakeywithaSyncsettingof
BeatorMeasurewillsynctotheplaybackofthe
firstpattern.Formoreinformation,seeSyncon
Ifyouareplayingthepatterninsynchronization
(whenSyncisBeat,Measure,orSEQ),thepattern
willstartaccuratelyifyouplaythenoteslightly
earlierthanthetimingofthebeatormeasure.Even
ifyouplaythenoteslightlylaterthanthebeator
measure(butnolaterthana32ndnote),itwillbe
consideredtohavestartedatthebeatormeasure,
andthebeginningofthepatternwillbe
compressedsothattheremainderoftheplayback
willbecorrect.
IfyouwishtotriggertheRPPRfunctionfroman
externalMIDIdevice,usetheMIDIchannelthatis
selectedforTrackSelect.
4. ToturnofftheRPPRfunction,unchecktheRPPR
checkbox.
Play RPPR while a Song plays back
RPPRcanbeplayedinsynchronizationwiththe
playbackofasong.
PatternplaybackforakeywithaSyncsettingofSEQ
willsynchronizetotheplaybackofthesong.(See
Synconpage 592oftheParameterGuide.)Startthe
songplayback,andthenpressthekey.Thepattern
playbackwillstartinsynchronizationwiththe
measuresofthesong.
Synchronizationwillbelostifyouusethe<<REW
orFF>>switcheswhileasongisplaying.
Note:IfyouwantRPPRpatternplaybacktobeginat
themomentthatsongplaybackbegins,itisagood
ideatoinsertanemptymeasurecontainingnomusical
databeforethesongplaybackbegins.
Note:Ifthesongisstopped,thepatternwill
synchronizetothetimingofKARMA.
Recording an RPPR performance
YoucanrecordRPPRperformancesinrealtime.
Ifyouareusingonlyonetrack(suchasMIDITrack01),
setTrackSelecttothedesiredtrack,anduncheck
MultiRec.
Ontheotherhand,evenifRPPRusesonlyonetrack,
usemultitrackrecordingifyouwillbeselecting
anothertrackinTrackSelectandrecordingits
performanceatthesametime.
Youshouldalsoselectmultitrackrecordingifyou
specifiedtheRPPRdatausingmultipletracksrather
thanjustasingletrack,andwanttosimultaneously
recordtheperformanceofmultipletracks.
Note:TheRPPRpatternwillberecordedas
performancedataonthetracksusedbythepattern.
Inthisexample,wellexplainhowyoucanrecordan
RPPRperformanceandakeyboardperformanceatthe
sametime.Beforeyoucontinue,usetheP0:Play/REC
RPPR On
108
MIDITrackProgSelect/Mixerpagetoassignadrum
programtoMIDItrack1,andabassprogramtoMIDI
track2.
1. AssignseveralkeysstartingwithC#2topreset
patterns.
ChecktheC#2Assignsetting,andsetBankto
PresetandPatternNametothedesiredpreset
pattern.ForTrackName,selectMIDItrack1(T01)
towhichyouassignedadrumprogram.
2. ForeachRPPRpattern,setSynctoSEQ(Seethe
diagramabove).
WithasettingofSEQ,patternsplayedbytheRPPR
functionwhilethesequencerisplayingorrecording
willstartinsynchronizationwiththemeasuresof
thesequencer.
3. SelecttheP0:Play/RECMIDITrackProg
Select/Mixerpage.
4. ChecktheRPPRcheckbox,andsetTrack
SelecttoMIDITrack02.
WhentheRPPRfunctionison,pressingakeyto
whichapatternisassignedwillcausetheassigned
patterntostartplaying,regardlessofthetrackthats
selectedinTrackSelect.
Keystowhichpatternsarenotassignedcanbe
playedintheusualway.Youcanplaytheprogram
thatsassignedtotheMIDItrackyouselecthere.
5. SinceyouwantthetracksyouplayviaRPPRand
thetrackyouplayfromthekeyboardtobe
recordedatthesametime,checktheMultiREC
checkbox.
Note:IfRecordingSetupissettoLoopAllTracks,
itwillnotbepossibletoselectMultiREC.Setthe
RecordingSetuptoOverwrite.
6. PresstheSEQUENCERREC/WRITEswitchto
enterrecordreadymode.
7. Forthetracksyouwillberecording(MIDITrack1,
2),pressPlay/Rec/Mutetomakethemindicate
REC.
Makesurethatthetracksyourenotrecordingare
indicatedasPlayorMute.
8. PresstheLOCATEswitchtosetthelocationto
001:01.000.
9. PresstheSEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitch,and
thenpressakeythatplaysanRPPRpattern.
If,duringtheprecountbeforerecording,youpress
akeythatsassignedtoanRPPRpattern,thepattern
willbeginplaying(andbeingrecorded)themoment
thatrecordingbegins.
RecordtheRPPRpatternplaybackandkeyboard
performance.
Whenrecordingtheplaybackofpatternstriggered
byRPPR,thetimingoftherecordedeventsmaybe
slightlyskewed.Ifthisoccurs,trysettingREC
ResolutiontoasettingotherthanHi.
10.Whenyouarefinishedperforming,pressthe
SEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitch.
Recordingwillend,andthesequencerwillreturnto
thelocationatwhichrecordingbegan.
Ifyoumadeamistakeduringyourperformanceor
wouldliketorerecord,youcanusetheCompare
function(presstheCOMPAREswitch)torerecord
asmanytimesasyouwish.
11.Ifyouwanttorecordothertracks,uncheckthe
MultiREC(Seestep5)orRPPR(Seestep4)
checkboxesasnecessary.
Sync: Off
Sync: Beat
Sync: Measure
Sync: SEQ
Key 1 on
Song
Key 2 on Key 1 off
Sync settings
Patterns 1 and 2 are set to
Mode=Manual, and have
identical Sync settings
Pattern 1
Pattern 2
Pattern 1
Pattern 2
Pattern 1
Pattern 2
Pattern 1
Pattern 2
Sampling in Sequencer mode Recording an RPPR performance
109
Sampling in Sequencer mode
SamplingisstillavailableinSequencermodewhich
canbeveryconvenient.Themainareasoffunctionality
aresummarizedbelow.Formoreinformation,see
SamplinginSequencermodeonpage 151.
Multisampleetc.youcreatecanbeplayedbackin
Sequencermodetogetherwithinternalprograms.
TimeSlice(inSamplingmode)letsyoudivideupa
rhythmloopsample,andcreateplaybackdatathat
triggersthedividedsamplesattheappropriate
timing.Youcanplaybackthisperformancedatain
Sequencermode,andadjusttheplaybacktempo
withoutaffectingthepitchoftherhythmloop
sample.Youcanevenexchangethenotenumbers
oftheperformancedataorchangeitstimingto
transformtheoriginalrhythmloopsampleintoa
completelynewrhythmloop.
InTrackSamplingletsyousampleanexternal
audiosourcethatsplayingalongwiththesong,
andautomaticallycreatenotedatainthetrackto
playthissampleatthecorrecttime.
YoucanresampleyourcompletedsongstoWAVE
files,andcreateanaudioCDbyburningthose
WAVEfilesinDiskmode.
110
Saving your Song
Thissectionexplainshowtosaveyoursongonthe
internaldisk.
Toensurethatyourdatawillbereproducedperfectly,
werecommendthatyouuseSaveAlltosaveyour
song.Thissavesyoursounds,samples,andSongatthe
sametime,withnamestotiethemtogether:
Programs,Combinations,globalsettings,Drum
Kits,WaveSequences,userDrumTrackpatterns,
andSetLists
Songs,includinganyaudiodata
SamplingModeMultisamplesandsamples
LinkstoloadedEXsandUserSampleBankdata
Note:WAVEfilescreatedbyrecordingaudiotrackswill
bemovedtoadifferentdirectory.Fordetails,seeHow
audiodataisstoredonthediskonpage 90.
Whenyouturnoffthepower,theSequencermode
settings,recordedsongs,anduserpatternswillbe
lost.Userdrumpatternswillberetained,however.
Tosaveyourdata,proceedasfollows.
1. Makesurethatthemediaisabletosavedata.
(Settingupmedia)
2. PresstheDISKbuttontoenterDiskmode.
3. SelecttheDiskSavepagebypressingtheFiletab,
andthentheSavetab.
4. MakesurethatDriveSelectissetto
HDD:INTERNALHD.
5. Ifthedrivecontainsdirectories,selectthe
directoryinwhichyouwanttosavethedata.
PresstheOpenbuttontomovetoalowerlevelof
thedirectorystructure,ortheUpbuttontomoveto
ahigherlevel.
Ifyouwanttocreateanewdirectory,movetothe
levelatwhichyouwanttocreatethedirectory,and
executetheUtilitypagemenucommandCreate
Directory.
6. Pressthepagemenubuttontoopenthepage
menu,andselectSaveAll.
7. Usethetexteditbuttontoenterafilename.
8. PresstheOKbuttontostarttheSaveoperation.
9. Whensavingiscompleteandyoureturntothe
Savepage,theLCDscreenwillshowtheresulting
files.
Formoredetails,seeSavingmemorycontentsto
diskonpage 187.
Other notes about Sequencer mode KRONOS sequencer file formats
111
Other notes about Sequencer mode
KRONOS sequencer file formats
TheKRONOSsequencersupportsboththeinternal
KRONOSSongformat,andStandardMIDIFiles.
Ifyoulike,youcanconvertdatabetweenthetwo
formats,simplybyloadingthedatainoneformatand
thensavingitintheother.
Formoreinformation,seeSavetoStandardMIDI
Fileonpage 849oftheParameterGuide,andSave
SEQonpage 847oftheParameterGuide.
KRONOS Song format
ThisisthenativeKRONOSsequencerformat,whichis
requiredtoensurethatallKRONOSspecificdatais
savedcorrectly.
Standard MIDI Files
YoucanalsoloadandsaveStandardMIDIFiles(SMF),
forcompatibilitywithothersequencers.Notethat
someKRONOSspecificdatamaynotbemaintained
wheninSMFfiles.
GM, XG, and GS System Exclusive Data
TheKRONOSsequencercanrecordSystemExclusive
messages,includingXGorGSdata.Formore
information,seeSystemExclusiveeventssupported
in Sequencer modeonpage 661oftheParameter
Guide.
NotethatGM,XG,andGSexclusivemessagesdo
notaffecttheKRONOSwhentheyareplayedback.
OASYS Song Format
TheKRONOSsequencercanloadandplaytheOASYS
songformat,withthefollowingcaveats:
TheKRONOSpreloadedProgramsarenotthe
sameasthoseoftheOASYS.PleaseloadthePCG
filesavedwiththeSong.
TheresolutionoftheKRONOSsequencerishigher
thanthatoftheOASYS(480ppqvs.192ppq).
Playbacktimingmaybesubtlydifferent.
Audiodirectorynamesmustbeeditedslightly.
OASYSfileswerelimitedto8characters,andsothe
nameoftheaudiofiledirectorywastypically
abbreviated.Forinstance,ifthe.SNGfilewas
namedWAMOZART.SNG,theOASYSaudio
folderwouldbenamedWAMOZA_A.
TheKRONOSsupportslongfilenames,andexpects
toseetheentire.SNGnameintheaudiofolder
name.BeforeyouloadanOASYS.SNGfile,editthe
nameoftheaudiodirectorysothatitmatchesthe
KRONOSstandard:thesamenameasthe.SNGfile,
followedby_A(forAudio).Inthecaseabove,
youdrenameWAMOZA_Ato
WAMOZART_A.
The Compare function
Whenyouperformrealtimerecording,steprecording,
ortrackediting,thisfunctionallowsyoutomake
beforeandaftercomparisons.
IfyoucontinueeditingwhentheCOMPAREswitchis
lit,thekeywillgodark.Thisnowbecomesthemusical
datathatwillbeselectedwhentheCOMPAREswitch
isdark.Anypreviousunsavededitswillbelost.
Operations for which Compare is
available
Ingeneral,MIDItrack,audiotrackandpatternevent
datacannotbereturnedtoitsoriginalstate.
Comparingsongparametersispossibleonlyduring
songediting(whenexecutingapagemenucommand).
RecordingtoaMIDItrack
Recordingtoaaudiotrack
TrackEdit
Allcommandsexceptforthepagemenucommands
MemoryStatus,FF/REWSpeedandSet
LocationoftheP4:TrackEditTrackEditpage.
Recordingtoapattern
PatternEdit
Allcommandsexceptforthepagemenucommands
MemoryStatusandFF/REWSpeedoftheP5:
Pattern/RPPRPatternEditpage.
SongEdit
P0P3andP7P9pages:Pagemenucommands
DeleteSongandCopyFromSong
Comparing after sampling
TheConverttoProgramandConverttoSeqEvent
optionsintheSelectSampleNo.dialogaffecttheway
thatCompareworkswithsamplinginSequencer
mode.Ifbothareenabled,Compareaffectssequencer
eventsandreturnsMultisamplesandSamplestothe
statepriortosampling;unwantedsampleswillnot
remain.IfonlyConverttoSeqEventisenabled,
Compareaffectsonlysequencerevents.Ifneitherare
enabled,Comparehasnoeffectonthesampling
process.
Formoreinformation,seeSelectSampleNo.on
TheProgramwillnotbeaffectedbytheCompare,
andwillnotreturntoitspriorstate.
112
WAVEfilesarenotdeletedwhenyoucompareedits
toaudiotracks.TodeleteaWAVEfileyounolonger
need,usethemenucommandDeleteUnusedWAV
Files,asdescribedonpage 852oftheParameter
Guide.
Operations for which Compare is not
available
Editingsongparameters
Pagemenucommandsotherthanthoselisted
underOperationsforwhichCompareis
available,above.
Memory Protect
Beforeyourecordatrackorpattern,oreditthemusical
data,youwillneedtoturnoffthememoryprotect
settinginGlobalmode.Formoreinformation,see
Memoryprotectonpage 185.
About MIDI
Track status
Youcanspecifywhethereachtrackwillusethe
internalKRONOSsounds,oruseanexternalMIDI
tonegenerator.
WhentheTrackStatus(P2MIDIpage)issettoINTor
BTH,operatingKRONOSskeyboardandcontrollers
willsoundandcontrolKRONOSsowntonegenerator.
WhenStatusissettoEXT,EX2orBTH,operating
KRONOSskeyboardandcontrollerswillsoundand
controltheexternaltonegenerator.(TheMIDIchannel
oftheexternaltonegeneratormustmatchtheMIDI
ChannelofthetrackthatissettoEXT,EX2orBTH.)
IfyouwishtousetheSequencermodeofthe
instrumentasa16trackmultitimbraltonegenerator,
selectINTorBTH.Formoreinformation,seeStatus
Synchronizing the sequencer with an
external MIDI device
Therecord/playbacktempoofKRONOSssequencer
canbesynchronizedtoanexternalMIDIdevicesuch
asasequencerorrhythmmachine.Formore
information,seeSynchronizingtheplaybackof
KARMAorsequenceronpage 1138oftheParameter
Guide.
113
Set Lists
Set List Overview
SetListsmakeitsimpletoplayandorganizeanyofthe
soundsloadedintotheKRONOS,withoutregardfor
whatbanktheyrestoredinorwhethertheyre
Programs,Combinations,orevenSongs.
Largeonscreenbuttonsmakesoundselectionfastand
foolproof,andtheProgramUporDownfootswitch
assignmentscanbeusedforhandsfreesound
changes.Cut,copy,paste,andinserttoolsmakere
orderingasnap.
SmoothSoundTransitions(SST)lettheprevioussound
anditseffectsringoutnaturally,makingiteasyto
changesoundsduringaliveperformance.SSTisactive
inalloftheKRONOSmodes,butSetListsgiveyou
greatercontroloverthetransitions.Youcanfinetune
theringouttimeforeachsound,sothat(forinstance)
onesoundfadesoutveryquickly,whileanother
soundsdelayscontinuetorepeatfortenortwenty
seconds.
Longcomments(upto512characters)letyoustore
lyricsorperformancenoteswiththesound.
SetListsaregreatforliveperformance,buttheyrealso
handyfororganizingsoundsingeneral.Forexample,
youcancreateaSetListwithallofyourfavoriteString
sounds,includingbothProgramsandCombinations.
Set Lists and Slots
ASetListhas128Slots,eachofwhichcanbeassigned
toanyProgram,Combination,orSong.16Slotsare
shownatonce,aslargeonscreenbuttons.Youcan
have128SetListsinmemoryatonce.Onewayof
thinkingaboutthisisthataSetListisabankofSlots.
Set Lists
114
Selecting and playing sounds
SetListPlaypage
Selecting Set Lists
ThelargenameintheSetListdisplayisthenameof
thecurrentSlot,sothatyoucaneasilyseethesound
thatyoureplaying.TheSetListnameisinsmallertext
atthetoplefthandcornerofthescreen.
YoucanselectSetListsusingthefrontpanelbuttons,
withouttouchingthescreen.Todoso:
1. PresstheSETLISTbuttontoenterSetListmode.
2. PressthePlaytabtogototheSetListP0:Play
page.
ThemainPlaypageshowsthe16Slotbuttons,the
commentsforthecurrentSlot,andanoverviewofthe
EQ.
3. TouchtheSetListnametoselectit.
TheSetListnamewillbecomehighlighted.
4. UsetheVALUEcontrollerstoselectthedesiredSet
List.
Youcandoanyofthefollowing:
TurntheValuedial.
TheVALUEsliderisreservedformodulation,and
sendsCC#18whentheSlotcontainsaProgramor
Combination.
OnceyouveselectedaSetList,youcanselectSlots
withinthelist.Formoreinformation,seeSelecting
Slots,below.
Selecting via the touch-screen
YoucanselectSetListsfromanonscreenlist,aswell.
1. PresstheSetListpopupbutton(totheleftofthe
SetListname).
TheSetListSelectdialogappears.
2. PressoneofthenamesinthelisttoselectaSet
List.
TheselectedSetListwillbehighlighted,andthe
keyboardwillimmediatelyswitchtothefirstSlotin
theSetList.
3. Ifyoulike,playafewnotestohearthesoundof
thefirstSlotintheSetList.
4. WhenyouaresatisfiedwiththeselectedSetList,
Alternately,youcanpresstheCancelbuttontoreturn
tothepreviouslyselectedSetList.
Set List Name
Selected Slot
Previous
button
Next button
Slot Name
Slot Comments
Selecting and playing sounds Selecting Slots
115
Selecting Slots
Selecting within the current group of 16
Toselectoneofthe16Slotsshownonthedisplay:
1. Pressthedesiredbutton.
Thebuttonbecomeshighlighted,andthelargeSlot
number/nameatthetopofthescreenareupdated
accordingly.
Alsonoticethatthecommentsarea,abovetheSlot
buttons,updatestoshowthecontentsfortheselected
Slot.
Selecting outside the current group of 16
ToselectanewSlotwhichisnotwithinthecurrent
groupof16:
1. Usethenextandpreviousarrowbuttonsatthe
bottomofthescreentobrowsethroughthegroups
of16.
Thelabelsfornext/previouswillvarydependingon
thecurrentgroupof16;forinstance,ifthecurrent
groupis015,thebuttonswillshow112127and1631,
respectively.
Asyoubrowse,thecurrentselectiondoesnotchange
untilyouactuallypressoneofthe16buttons.
2. Whenthedesiredgroupof16isdisplayed,press
thebuttonforthedesiredSlot.
Thebuttonbecomeshighlighted,andthecomments
andlargeSlotnumber/nameatthetopofthescreenare
updatedaccordingly.
Selecting using data entry controls
Inadditiontousingthetouchscreenbuttons,youcan
selectSetListandSlotsusingthestandarddataentry
controls,includingthenumerickeypad,rotary
encoder,andInc/Dec.
TheVALUEsliderisreservedformodulation,and
sendsCC#18whentheSlotcontainsaProgramor
Combination.
Returning to the current group of 16
Slots
Ifyouhavenavigatedawayfromthecurrentgroupof
16,youcanreturneasily:
1a.Touchthenameofthecurrentitem,atthetopof
thescreen(e.g.SGX1/PRGIA000KRONOS
GermanGrand).
Thedisplaychangestoshowthegroupof16
containingthecurrentselection.
Stepping through Slots in order
InadditiontoselectingSlotsviatheonscreenbuttons,
youcanuseInc/Decorafootswitchassignedto
ProgramUporProgramDowntostepthroughthe
Slotsinorder,onebyone.
Selecting with Inc/Dec
1. Touchoneofthe16onscreenSlotbuttons.
OnceaSlotisselected,youcanusetheIncandDec
buttonstostepthroughthelistofsounds.
Ifyoureonthe16thSlotonthecurrentpage,pressing
IncwilladvanceyoutothefirstSlotofthenextgroup
of16.
Program Up/Down footswitch
TheProgramUp(orProgramDown)footswitch
alwaysstepsthroughthelist,regardlessofwhetheror
notoneofthebuttonshastheUIfocus.
TheassignablefootswitchcanbeassignedtoProgram
UporProgramDownontheGlobalmodeControllers
page.
Wrapping between Set Lists
Inc/DecandProgramUp/DownwrapbetweenSet
Lists.Forinstance:
1. SelectSlot127inSetList5.
2. PressInc,ortheProgramUpfootswitch.
Slot0ofSetList6isselected.
NotethatwhenchangingtoadifferentSetList,any
editstotheSetListwillbelost.
Selecting Slots and Set Lists via MIDI
MIDI In
ProgramChangemessagesontheGlobalChannel
selecttheSlot,andBankSelectmessagesontheGlobal
ChannelselecttheSetList.
MIDI Out
SelectingaSlotsendsProgramChangeandBankSelect
messages,asabove.
Whenselected,CombinationsandSongscantransmit
otherProgramChangeandBankSelectmessageson
otherchannels,astheydoinCombinationand
Sequencermodes.
Global P0 Bank Map
TheGlobalP0BankMap(Korg,GM(2))parameter
doesnotaffectthereceptionortransmissionofSetList
ProgramandBankSelectmessages.
Set Lists
116
Editing Set Lists
SetListEditpage
Overview
ForeachSlot,youcan:
AssignanyProgram,Combination,orSong
NametheSlot
Enteratextcomment(suchaslyricsorperformance
notes),whichisshownwhentheSlotisselectedon
themainscreen
Setthevolume,holdtime,andkeyboardtrack(for
Songs).
YoucanalsoeasilyrearrangetheSlotsusingtheCut,
Copy,Paste,andInsertbuttons.
Selecting and re-arranging sounds
Choosing a sound for a Slot
1. GototheSetListEditpage.
2. SelecttheSlotthatyoudliketoedit.
Noticetheparameterswhichappearabovethe16Slot
buttons.TheseletyousetupthecurrentSlot.
3. Atthetopleftoftheparameterbox,selectthe
desiredType:Program,Combination,orSong.
EachSlotcanplayeitheraProgram,aCombination,or
aSong.WhenyouchangetheType,theBank&
NumberandCategoryorTrackparameterswill
updateaccordingly.
CategoryappearsforProgramsandCombinations;
KeyboardTrackappearsforSongs.
4. UsingeithertheBank&NumberorCategory
popupmenus,selectthedesiredProgram,
Combination,orSong.
Formoreinformation,seeSelectingbybankand
numberonpage 28,SelectingbyCategoryon
page 29,andSongSelectonpage 515.
NotethatyoucanusethesamesoundinmultipleSlots
withinthesameSetList.Forinstance,youmighthave
afavoritepianosoundwhichyouuseinanumberof
differentsongs.YoucancreateanynumberofSlots
whichusethissamepianosound,eachwithdifferent
namesandcomments
Setting the MIDI Track for Songs
WithSongs,youcanassignthelocalkeyboardtoplay
anyofthe16MIDITracks.Ifyoulike,youcanhavethe
sameSonginmultipleSlots,eachwithadifferent
Set List Name
Selected Slot
Previous
button
Slot Name
Sound Type
Category Select
or
Keyboard Track
Bank & Number Select
Editing Set Lists Detailed Set List editing
117
Track.YoucanthenswitchbetweentheSlots,changing
thesoundassignedtothekeyboard,astheSong
continuestoplay.
ThisparameterappliestoSongsonly.IfthecurrentSlot
isaProgramorCombination,itdoesnotappear.
Adding items to the Set List from other
modes
Program,Combination,andSequencermodeseach
haveacommandintheirP0pagemenus:AddtoSet
List.
WhenyouusetheAddtosetlistcommand,the
currentProgram,Combination,orSongisinsertedat
thecurrentSlotofthecurrentSetList,similartousing
theSetListEditpagesInsertcommand.
TheparametersoftheSlotaresetasfollows:
ThenameoftheProgram,Combination,orSongis
copiedintotheSlotname.Youcanchangethislater
ifdesired.
Iftheitembeingcopiedisasong,thecurrent
KeyboardTrackiscopiedintotheSlotsKeyboard
Trackparameter.
Re-arranging Slots
TheCut,Copy,Paste,andInsertbuttonsmakeit
simpletorearrangetheSlots.
Copying a Slot to another location
TocopyoneSlottoanother(forinstance,ifyouhavea
soundthatyoudliketouseinmultipleSlots):
1. SelecttheSlotyoudliketocopy.
2. PresstheCopybutton.
3. SelecttheSlotyoudliketoreplace.
4. PressthePastebutton.
TheselectedSlotwillbereplacedbythecopiedSlot.
Inserting a Slot in the middle of a Set List
YoucanalsoinsertacopiedSlotinthemiddleofaSet
List,whileleavingtherestofthelistintact.Todothis:
1. SelecttheSlotyoudliketocopy.
3. SelecttheSlottospecifytheinsertpoint.
ThecopiedSlotwillbeplacedinfrontoftheselected
Slot,andtherestoftheSetListwillmovetomake
room.
4. PresstheInsertbutton.
Removing a Slot from a Set List
YoucanremoveaSlotfromthemiddleofaSetList,
whileleavingtherestofthelistintact.Todoso:
1. SelecttheSlotyoudliketoremove.
2. PresstheCutbutton.
ThisremovestheSlotfromthelist,andmovestherest
ofthelisttofillinthenowemptyspace.
Ifyoulike,youcanPasteorInserttheSlotthatwas
removedviaCut,similartotheCopyoperations
describedabove.
Detailed Set List editing
Naming a Slot
YoucannameaSlotseparatelyfromthenameofthe
Program,Combination,orSongitcontains.For
instance,ifyourecreatingaSetListforagig,youcan
nametheSlotsafterthesectionofmusicinwhich
theyreused,suchasMontanaIntro.Todoso:
dialog.
2. Enterthenameasdesired,andthenpressOK.
Slotnamescanhaveupto24characters.
Controlling Slot volume
YoucancontrolthevolumeseparatelyforeachSlot.
Forinstance,youmightsetthevolumesofterforaSlot
playinganaccompanimentpart,andlouderforaSlot
withaleadsound.Todoso:
1. AdjusttheVolumeparameter.
NotethatthestoredMasterVolumesettingoftheSlots
Program,Combination,orSongstillappliesaswell.
YoucaneditthisfromtheControlSurface,ifdesired.
SeethegraphicbelowfordetailsonhowtheSetList
volumeinteractswithothervolumecontrols.
SetListSlotVolume
Entering comments
EachSlotcanhaveacommentofupto512characters,
forlyrics,performancenotes,andsoon.Todoso:
1. PresstheEditCommentbuttontobringupthetext
editdialogbox.
2. Enterthecommentasdesired,andthenpressOK.
Youcanreadtheentirecomment,evenwithmultiple
lines,ontheSetListPlaypage.
TFX 2
& EQ
Set List Slot Volume
Front Panel
Analog Volume
Knob
Universal Exclusive
Master Volume
(Fom Knobs, Pedals,
MIDI, or Sequencer)
Headphone
& Main L/R
Outputs
S/PDIF
Output
Program,
Combination,
or Song
Master Volume
Set Lists
118
Saving your edits
OnceyouvemadeaSetList,youllwanttosaveyour
work.Todoso:
1. SelecttheWriteSetListcommandfromthepage
theSetList.Optionally,youcanalsoselectanew
location,orchangetheSetListsname.
dialog.
YoucangivetheSetListadescriptivenameusingthe
onscreenkeyboard.
themainWritedialog.
popupbuttonnexttoSetListtobringupthesave
locationdialog.
5. SelectalocationtosavetheeditedSetList.
pressOKagain.
afterwritingtheSetListdata.Thisallowsthe
Editing a Slots Program, Combination, or
Song
Whenyoureinarehearsalorsoundcheck,youmay
needtomakequickeditstoasoundintheSetList.
Withthisinmind,youcan:
JumptotheeditingpagesfortheselectedProgram,
Combination,orSong
Makethedesirededits
Savetheedits
ReturneasilytotheoriginalSetListpage
Todoso:
1. SelectthedesireditemintheSetList.
Next,fromanyoftheSetListpages:
2a.Inthemenu,selecttheEdit[Type]command.
TheactualnameofthecommandwillbeeitherEdit
Program,EditCombination,orEditSong,depending
ontheselectedSlot.
or:
2b.HoldthefrontpanelENTERbutton,andtouch
theSlotsbutton.
ThemodewillchangetoProgram,Combination,or
Sequenceasappropriate,andthesystemwilldisplay
theP0pagefortheselecteditem.
TheProgram,Combination,orSequencemode
buttonsLEDwillblink,andtheSetListLEDremains
solidlyon,toshowthatyouareeditinganiteminaSet
List.TheSetListsettings,includingEQandvolume,
continuetoaffectthesound.
3. Editasdesired.
4. Writeyouredits.
Formoreinformation,seeSavingyoureditson
page 42(forPrograms),Savingyoureditsonpage 67
(forCombinations),orSavingyourSongon
page 110.
5. PresstheSETLISTbuttontoreturntotheSetList.
SetListmodewillbeasyouleftit,withthesameSet
ListandSlotselected.
Set Lists and the Control Surface
Overview
TheControlSurfaceisthegroupofknobs,buttons,and
sliderstotheleftofthedisplay.Youcanuseitfor
handsoncontrolofmixing,KARMA,andexternal
devices,aswellassynthmodulationandediting.Itsa
prettydeepandpowerfulpartoftheKRONOS;foran
indepthlookatsomeofwhatitcando,seeQuick
editsusingtheknobs,sliders, and switcheson
page 39.
Inthispartofthemanual,welljustlookattheunique
waysthattheControlSurfaceworksinSetListmode.
Ingeneral,theControlSurfaceworksverysimilarlyfor
Program,Combination,andSongs.However,thereare
somesmalldifferencesbetweenthem,matchingtheir
differentcapabilities.Forinstance,Programshave
threemixerchannels(forthetwooscillatorsorEXi,
plusDrumTrack),whileCombinationsandSongs
havesixteenchannels.TheSetListsControlSurface
pagewillchangetomatchthecurrentSlottype.
FormoreinformationonhowtheControlSurface
worksinthedifferentmodes,see:
Programs:ControlSurfaceknobs,sliders,&switches
onpage 33,andQuickeditsusingtheknobs,
sliders, and switchesonpage 39
Combinations:Adjustingthemixonpage 60,Easy
KARMAeditingonpage 61,andEditingPrograms
withToneAdjustonpage 66
Songs(Sequencermode):Thecontrolsurfacein
Sequencermodeonpage 74
Editing Set Lists Set Lists and the Control Surface
119
Most Control Surface edits not stored in the Set
List
Important:OnlytheGraphicEQsettingsarestored
withtheSetList.AllotherControlSurfaceeditsarenot
storedwiththeSetList.Instead,theymustbestored
withtheoriginalProgram,Combination,orSong.For
moredetails,seeSavingControlSurfaceedits,
below.
Saving Control Surface edits
AnychangesthatyoumakeviatheControlSurface
editingmixerlevels,forinstance,ortweakingthereal
timeknobsaretemporaryunlesstheyaresaved,just
astheyareintheothermodes.
However,ifyoumakechangesthatyoudliketokeep,
youcansaveyoureditstoProgramsorCombinations
directlyfromSetListmode.Todoso:
1. MakeyoureditsusingtheControlSurface.
2. Inthepagemenu,selectthecommandUpdate
ProgramorUpdateCombination.
Theactualnamewilldependonwhetherthecurrent
SlotisaProgramorCombination.
Songsworkslightlydifferently,sincetheydonthavea
Writecommand(andmustbesavedtodisk).Alledits
madeinSetListmodeapplydirectlytotheSongsin
memory,andcanbesavedtodiskasdesired.
Using the Control Assign From setting
TheControlAssignsettingdeterminesthefunctions
assignedtotheControlSurface,suchasthemixer,
ToneAdjust,KARMAandRealTimeKnobs,andso
on.
ControlAssignFromsetswhethertheControlAssign
appliestotheSetListasawhole,andstaysthesame
regardlessofwhichSlotisselected,orinsteadchanges
accordingtothesavedvaluefortheProgram,
Combination,orSonginthecurrentSlot.
Forinstance,youmaywishtohavetheControlSurface
stayassignedtotheSetListEQallthetime.Inthis
case,setControlAssignFromtoSetList.
Or,youmaywishtohavetheControlSurfaceupdate
tomatchthecurrentProgram,Combination,orSong.
Forinstance,youmightwanttouseToneAdjustfor
drawbarsonanorganProgram,andthenonthenext
SlotusethesliderstocontrolKARMAina
Combination.Inthatcase,setControlAssignFromto
Slot.
Graphic EQ
SetListshaveanadditionalControlSurfaceoption,not
availableintheothermodes:EQ.Thisisanineband
graphicEQappliedtothesoundafterTFX2,which
tailorsthesoundfromthemainstereooutputs
(includingtheanalogL/Routputs,S/PDIF,andUSB).
YoucanusethisEQtocompensatefortheacoustic
environmentofaspecificcluborotherperformance
venue.Theslidersaremappedtotheninebandsofthe
EQ,forquickandintuitiveadjustments.
Allbandsarepeaking,includingthehighandlow
bands.
ThereisasinglegraphicEQsettingforeachSetList,
whichappliestoallSlotsinthelist.
Using the Control Surface with the Graphic EQ
ThelastbuttonintheControlAssignsection,TONE
ADJ,hasanadditionaloptioninSetListmode;
pressingthebuttontogglestheControlSurface
betweenToneAdjustandEQ.
SimilartotheTimbre/TrackandAudiobuttons,the
settingisindicatedbyLEDstotherightofthebutton.
TosettheControlSurfacetocontroltheGraphicEQ:
1. PresstheTONEADJ/EQbuttonuntiltheEQ
buttonislit.
IfyoupressanotherControlAssignbutton,andthen
pressTONEADJ/EQagain,theControlSurfacereturns
tothefunctionlastselectedforthebutton.For
instance,ifyoulastuseditforEQ,thenEQwillbe
selected.
Asashortcut,youcanalsotouchtheEQgraphiconthe
SetListPlaypage.ThiswilljumptotheControl
Surfacepage,andsetControlAssigntoEQ.
Reset Controls
WhenontheEQpage,RESETCONTROLS+TONE
ADJ/EQresetsallEQparameters,includingBypass,to
thevaluesstoredintheSetList.
RESETCONTROLS+Sliderresetstheslidersbandto
thestoredvalue.
Set Lists
120
Smooth Sound Transitions
Overview
SmoothSoundTransitions(SST)helptoavoidjarring
discontinuitieswhenchangingbetweenPrograms,
Combinations,andSongs,byallowingtheprevious
soundanditseffectstoringoutnaturallyasyouplay
thenewlyselectedsound.Youcanevencontinueto
holdnotesontheoldsound(onthekeyboardorwith
thesustainpedal)asyouplaythenewsound.
SSTappliestoallmodesnotjusttheSetList.For
instance,notesandeffectsaresustainedwhen
changingfromoneCombinationtoanotherin
Combinationmode,orfromaProgram(inProgram
mode)toaCombination(inCombinationmode).
ThereareonlytwoparametersthatrelatetoSST:the
GlobalHoldTime,andtheHoldTimeforeachSlotin
aSetList.Underthehood,though,theresalotgoing
on.Welltalkaboutsomeofthisindetailbelow,butif
youreinahurry,herearethemainthingsthatyou
needtoknow:
SSTworksbetweentwosoundsatatime:the
currentsoundandtheprevioussound.Ifyouselect
anewsoundwhiletwooldersoundsarestill
overlapping,theoldestsoundstops.
SSTrequiresthattheeffectsforboththeoldand
newsoundsfitintotheavailableprocessingpower.
Forfactorysounds,thisshouldalmostneverbea
problem.Intheunlikelyeventthattheeffectsdont
fit,theoldersoundwillbesilenced,includingallof
itsnotesandeffects.
TheHoldTimeparameterscontrolhowlongthe
oldsoundringsoutafterallofitsnoteshavebeen
released.
KARMAandtheDrumTrackstopwhenyou
changesounds.Theirnoteswillcontinuetoring
outnaturally.
Using Smooth Sound Transitions
Using Hold Time
TheKRONOShastwoHoldTimeparameters.As
notedabove,thesecontrolhowlongtheoldsound
ringsoutafterallofitsnoteshavebeenreleased.
OneoftheseparametersisontheGlobalBasicpage,
anditcontrolstheholdtimeforeverythingoutsideof
theSetList,includingProgram,Combination,and
Sequencermodes.Theother,intheSetListSlot
parameters,controlstheholdtimeforeachindividual
Slot.Letslookathowthisoneworks.
1. GototheSetListEditpage.
2. SelectSetList127.
Thishasbeenleftinitializedforyourownuse.
3. SelectSlot1,andsetitsProgramtoUE075
CX3/MS20LeadSplit.
Thissoundhasalongdelayontheleadsound,which
willhelptodemonstratetheeffectofHoldTime.
4. SetSlot1sHoldTimeto10seconds.
5. WithSlot1stillselected,presstheCopybutton.
6. SelectSlot3.
WellleaveSlot2settothedefaultpianosound.
7. PressthePastebutton.
Slot3becomesacopyofSlot1,withthesameProgram
setting.
8. SetSlot3sHoldTimeto0seconds.
9. Playabriefphraseontheleadsynthsoundonthe
righthandsideofthekeyboard,andthenpauseto
listen.
Noticehowthedelayrepeatsforalongtime,asthe
soundgraduallyfadesaway.HoldTimedoesntaffect
thesoundaslongasyoustayonthesameSlot.
10.Playthephraseagain,andthistimeimmediately
switchtoSlot2.
Thistime,thesounddisappearsveryquickly.The
HoldTimecomesintoplaywhenyouchangebetween
differentsounds.NotethatitstheoldSlotsHoldTime
(Slot3inthiscase)thatdeterminesthespeedofthe
fade.
Also,noticethateventhoughHoldTimeissetto0
seconds,itsstillasmoothfade;aftertheHoldTime
haselapsed,theresalwaysahalfsecondorsofadeto
silence.
11.SelectSlot1.
Remember,thisSlotsHoldTimeissetto10seconds.
12.Playthephraseagain,andimmediatelyswitchto
Slot2.
Noticehowthedelayrepeatsforalongtime.
13.PlaysomethingbrieflyonSlot2spianosound,
andthenpausetolisten.
NoticehowthedelayfromSlot1isstillfadingout,
alongsidethepianosound.
So,whywouldyouwanttochangethisinthefirst
place?Eventhoughthedefaultof5secondsworkswell
tosmoothtransitionsingeneral,theremaybetimesin
liveperformancewhenyoudeitherliketheeffectsand
decayingnotestoringoutforalongtime,orfadeaway
immediately.TheperSlotHoldTimegivesyouthis
control.
Hold Time starts after notes are released
TheHoldTimestartsonlyafteryoureleaseanynotes
beingplayedontheoldsound.Continuingfromthe
exampleabove:
1. SelectSlot3.
Smooth Sound Transitions Using Smooth Sound Transitions
121
2. Playandholdanoteontheleadsynthsoundon
therighthandsideofthekeyboard.
3. Whileholdingthenote,switchtoSlot2.
Noticehowthenotecontinuestoplay.
4. Afterholdingthenoteforawhile,releasethenote.
Afteryoureleasethenote,theHoldTimestarts,and
thesoundfadesawayquickly.
Global Hold Time
TheGlobalHoldTimeparameterisontheGlobal
Basicpage.Asmentionedabove,itcontrolsthehold
timeforeverythingoutsideoftheSetList,including
Program,Combination,andSequencermodes.The
defaultsettingis5seconds,whichshouldworkwellin
mostcases,butyoucanchangeitifyoulike.
Stopping sustaining or held notes
Sometimes,youmaywanttostopsoundingvoices
immediatelyforinstance,ifasoundissettohold
indefinitely.Todoso:
1. Selectadifferentsound,includinganyProgram,
Combination,Song,orSetListSlot.
2. Selectadifferentsoundagain.
Forinstance,withinaSetListwithSlot1selected,
selectSlot2andthenreturntoSlot1.Or,onProgram
A000,pressthefrontpanelCOMBIbutton(which
selectsaCombination)andthenpressthefrontpanel
PROGbutton(toreselectthepreviousProgram).At
thesecondchange,allnotesheldfromtheoriginal
soundwillbestolen.
Other details
Controllers
Mostcontrollers(Joystick+/Y,Aftertouch,realtime
knobs,etc.)affectonlythenewsound,andnottheold.
Sustain,Sostenuto,JoystickX(pitchbend),andNote
Gatecontinuetoaffecttheoldsound,aswellasthe
new.YoucanusetheCombinationandSongMIDI
FiltersforadditionalcontrolovertheseMIDI
messages,ifdesired.
Effects
Internally,theKRONOShastwoseparatesetsof
effects,liketworacksofeffects.Oneoftheseracksis
usedbythecurrentsound;theotherisusedbythe
previoussound.Thisallowsthetwosetsofeffectsto
worksimultaneously;forinstance,theprevious
soundsdelayscancontinuetoringoutwhileyoure
playingthenewsound.
Thereareonlytwooftheseeffectsracks,however.
Everytimethatyouselectanewsound,theolderof
thetwoeffectsracksissilencedandreconfiguredfor
thenewsound.
Also,itspossibleforthecombinedrequirementsofthe
twoeffectsrackstoexceedtheavailableprocessing
power.Ifthishappens,theoldeffectsrackissilenced
immediately.
Note:Whentheoldeffectsrackissilenced,allofthe
noteswhichwereplayingthroughitaresilencedas
well.
Limitations
Whenyouselectanewsound,theprevioussounds
KARMAandDrumTrackpatternsstop.Anynotes
beingplayedbytheDrumTrackorKARMA
(includingthosegeneratedbyKARMAsThruInand
ThruOutZones)arereleased,andthendecay
normally.
Similarly,thePolysixEXarpeggiatorstopsplayingon
soundchange.
WheneditingEXiPrograms,changingtheEXimodel
ofthecurrentProgramwillsilenceanyvoicesfromthe
previoussound.Notethatthishappensonlywhen
actuallyeditingtheProgram,andnotsimplywhen
changingfromoneProgramtoanother.
Resourcelimitationsmaypreventtheprevioussound
fromringingoutuntilsilence.Forinstance:
Notesmaybestolen.
Ifthereisnotenoughprocessingpowerfortheold
andneweffectsrackstocoexist,boththeoldeffects
rackandalloldvoiceswillbesilenced.
Set Lists
122
123
Sampling (Open Sampling System)
Sampling overview
About sampling on the KRONOS
Overview
TheKRONOScansampleexternalaudiofromthe
analog,S/P DIF,orUSBinputs,at48 kHz16bit
resolution(or24bitwhensamplingtodisk),inmono
orstereo.YoucanrecordsamplesintoRAM,orsample
directlytodisk.
Youcanalsodigitallyresamplethecompletesoundof
aProgram,Combi,orSong,playedliveorsequenced,
includinganyeffectsandKARMAgeneratedevents.
UsinganexternalUSBCDdrive(notincluded),you
canalsosample(orrip)directlyfromanaudioCD,
inthedigitaldomain.
Finally,youcanprocesstheinputsthroughtheIFX,
MFX,andTFX,orthroughthesynthesisfunctionsof
EXisuchastheMS20EXandMOD7.
Youcancombineanyandallofthesefeaturesatonce.
Forinstance,youcansamplealiveguitarrifffromthe
audioinputs,processedthroughKRONOSeffects,
whilelisteningtoandeitherrecordingornotrecording
aKARMAgeneratedphrase.
YoucanuseyoursamplesdirectlyinDrumKits,or
makethemintoMultisamplesandusethemanywhere
thatyouuseROMMultisamples,suchasinHD1
ProgramsorWaveSequences.
KSC Files and User Sample Banks
KSCstandsforKorgSampleCollection.KSCfiles
groupyourSamplesandMultisamplestogether,and
letyouloadthemasUserSampleBanks.UserSample
BanksmaybeloadedeitherintoRAM,ormayuse
VirtualMemory,justlikeEXs.Theyhaveotherbenefits
aswell.Formoreinformation,seeCreatingand
saving.KSCfilesonpage 165.
Sampling and RAM
TheKRONOScomeswith2GBofRAMpreinstalled;
theKRONOSXcomeswith3GBofRAM.
Approximately1GBofthisRAMisusedbythe
operatingsystemandROMsampledata.The
remainderissharedbetweenthesamplesinEXs,User
SampleBanks,andSamplingMode.
ThismeansthatthesizeofthecurrentlyloadedEXs
andUserSampleBankstradesoffagainstthememory
availableforSamplingMode.Themorespaceusedby
EXsandUserSampleBanks,thelessisavailablefor
SamplingMode.
UsingVirtualMemoryforEXsandUserSampleBanks
generallyletsyouloadmoresamplesatonce,butmay
stilluseasubstantialamountofRAM.
Note:TochecktheamountofsampleRAMavailable,
Theamountofsamplingtimedependsontheamount
offreeRAM,asshownbelow.
FreeRAMandapproximatesamplingtimes
Installing additional RAM
Anadditional1GBDIMMcanbeinstalledintothe
KRONOSatanyauthorizedKorgservicecenter,
bringingthetotalphysicalRAMto3GB.(The
KRONOSXshipsfromthefactorywith3GBalready
installed,andcannotbeexpandedfurther.)
Thisapproximatelydoublesthemaximumavailable
sampleRAM,uptoabout2GB.Ofcourse,when
loadingEXsorUserSampleBanksusingVirtual
Memory,thetotalsizeoftheloadedsampledatacanbe
muchgreater.
TheKRONOSuseswidelyavailable,offtheshelf
DIMMs.InstallationbyanauthorizedKorgservice
centerisrequired;userinstallationisnotsupported
andmayvoidyourwarranty.Formoreinformationon
howtopurchaseandarrangeforinstallationofRAM,
pleasecontactyourcountrysKorgDistributor:
http://www.korg.co.jp/English/Distributors/index.html
ForcompatibilitywiththeKRONOS,RAMmust
complywiththefollowingspecification:
240PinPC26400CL5(orCL6)DDR2800nonECC
UnbufferedDIMM1GB
Sampling to disk
Youcansampledirectlytodisk(includingtheinternal
diskandUSBstoragedevices),creatingaWAVEfile.
Thisletsyourecordupto80minutescontinuously,in
eithermonoorstereo(mono:approximately440MB,
stereo:approximately879 MB).
AslongastheyfitintotheavailableRAM,theseWAVE
filescanthenbeloadedintoSamplingModeandused
inDrumKits,HD1ProgramsorWaveSequences.
(NotethatafterloadingthemintoSamplingMode,
youllneedtosavethemagain;theWAVEfilescantbe
useddirectlyforPrograms,etc.)
Free RAM
Approximate Sampling Time (min:sec)
Mono Stereo
16 MB 2:54 1:27
64 MB 11:39 5:49
128 MB 23:18 11:39
256 MB 46:36 23:18
512 MB 93:12 46:36
124
WAVEfilescanalsobeusedinaudiotracksofthe
sequencer,orusedtocreateanaudioCD.Formore
information,seeAudiorecordingonpage 89,and
CreatingandplayingaudioCDsonpage 195.
aftersamplingtodisk.Thisallowsthesystemtime
tocompletetheprocess.
24-bit sampling to disk
Whensamplingtodisk,youcanchooseeither16bitor
24bitresolution.Both16and24bitWAVEfilescanbe
useddirectlyinSequencermodeaudiotracks.When
loadedasRAMsamples,24bitWAVEfilesare
automaticallyconvertedto16bitresolution.
Sampling in Sampling mode
InSamplingmode,youcansampleanalogaudiofrom
connectedmicrophonesorlineinputs,ordigitalaudio
fromS/P DIForUSB.Ifyoulike,youcanalsosample
throughtheKRONOSeffects.
YoucanevensampledirectlyfromaudioCDsinan
externalUSBCDR/RW.
Samplescanbeprocessedthrougheffectsand
internallysampledagain(resampled).Youcanuse
eitherAutomodewhichautomaticallyappliesthe
specifiedeffectprocessingtotheselectedsample,or
Manualmodewhichletsyouplaythesample
manuallywitheffectsappliedandresampleyour
performance.
Program, Combination, Sequencer
modes
InProgram,Combination,andSequencermodes,you
canresampleacompleteliveperformanceincluding
filters,effects,KARMA,andevensequencerplayback.
Youcanalsosampleexternalaudiosources,mixthe
KRONOSsoundswiththeexternalaudioandsample
thecombinedresult,orevenmonitortheperformance
oftheKRONOSwhilesamplingonlytheexternal
source.
In-Track Sampling in Sequencer mode
InSequencermode,youcansamplewhileplaying
alongwithaSong,andautomaticallycreatenotedata
totriggerthenewsamplesattheappropriatemoment
intheSong.Youcanthenmanipulatethesesamples
usingthesynthesisabilitiesoftheHD1,forcreative
alternativestoHDR.ThisiscalledInTrack
Sampling.
Sampling frequency and bit resolution
Asshowninthediagram,samplingreadsthelevelof
theanalogsignalatfixedintervalsalongthetimeaxis,
andstoresthelevelsinmemoryasdigitaldata.
Thetimebetweentheseintervalsiscalledthe
samplingfrequency.48kHz(kiloHertz)meansthat
samplingisperformed48,000timeseachsecond,so
thattheintervalsare1/48,000ofasecondapart
approximately0.02083ms(milliseconds).
Thehigherthesamplingfrequency,theclosertothe
originalanalogsignalthewaveforminmemorywill
be.
Eachlevelisreadandconvertedintodigitaldata.The
accuracyofthelevelmeasurementisdeterminedby
thebitresolution.Thisprocessconvertsananalog
signalwithinfiniteresolutionintoadigitalsignalwith
finiteresolution.With16bitresolution,eachlevelis
indicatedin65,536steps(thesixteenthpoweroftwo).
Thegreaterthebitresolution,theclosertotheoriginal
analogsignalthewaveforminmemorywillbe.
48kHz16bitsamplingisthesamequalityasinaudio
devicessuchasDATs.CDsuse44.1kHz16bit
sampling,whichisaslightlylowersampling
frequency.
Samples and Multisamples
Samples
Thedatathatisrecorded(sampled)intointernal
memoryorloadedfromafileisreferredtoasasample
orsamplefile.Samplesconsistoftheactualwaveform
data,andparametersthatspecifyhowthedatawillbe
playedback,suchasStart,LoopStart,andEnd
Address.Samplescanbeusedinmultisamplesand
drumkits.
SamplingModesupportsamaximumof16,000
Samplesatonce.SamplesinEXsandUserBanksdo
notcounttowardsthismaximum.
TheKRONOScanshareasinglewaveformamong
multiplesamples.Thisallowsyoutocreatemultiple
sampleswithdifferentplaybackaddressesfromthe
samewaveformwithoutwastinginternalmemory.For
example,supposethatyouhavewaveformdatathat
recordsavoicesayingOneTwoThree.Thissingle
pieceofwaveformdatacouldbesharedbythree
samples,withtheplaybackofsampleAproducing
OneTwoThree,sampleBproducingOneTwo,
andsampleCproducingTwoThree.
Formoreinformation,seeCopyonpage 735ofthe
ParameterGuide.
Multisamples
MultisampleslayoutoneormoreSamplesacrossthe
keyboard.Forinstance,averysimpleguitar
MultisamplemighthavesixSamplesoneforeach
string.
Sampled digital
waveform
Time
Level
Level
Time
Analog waveform
16 bit
=65,536 levels
of data
48 kHz
=48,000 times every second
=0.0208 mS cycle
Sampling overview About sampling on the KRONOS
125
EachSampleiscontainedinanIndex,whichincludes
parametersforthekeyrange,originalSamplepitch,
tuning,level,andsoon.
Multisamplescaneachhaveupto128Indexes.
Using multisamples
Whensamplinganinstrumentthatisabletoproducea
widerangeofpitches,suchasapiano,recordingjust
onesampleandapplyingit(playingitback)overthe
entirepitchrangewillnotproduceanaturalsounding
result.Byusingamultisampleyoucanrecordseparate
samplesforeachpitchrange,andassignthesesamples
totheirrespectivepitchrangestoavoidanyunnatural
soundsduringplayback.
AlloftheinstrumentalsoundsintheKRONOSs
internalpresetmultisamplesareconstructedinthis
way.Forexample,youmightrecordonesampleper
octave,andassigneachofthesesamplestoanindex
coveringaoneoctaverangeonthekeyboard.
Byassigningmultiplesamplessuchasphrasesamples
orrhythmloopstodifferentindexeswithina
Multisample,youcanplaymultiplesamples
simultaneously.Youcanassigndifferentphrasesto
eachkey.Alternatively,thesesamplescouldbe
assignedatoneoctaveintervals,andplayedasphrase
variationswithdifferentplaybackpitchesandtempos.
SamplingModesupportsamaximumof4,000
Multisamplesatonce.MultisamplesinEXsandUser
Banksdonotcounttowardsthismaximum.
MultisamplesmaybeuseddirectlyinPrograms,or
withinWaveSequences.Theycanbeusedwith
KARMAtoproduceinterestingresults(forexample,
byusingKARMAtoautomaticallyplaysoundeffects
orspokensamples).
USB CD-R/RW Drive (Audio CD)
(Ripping)
ADC Sample 0000 ... 15999
RAM (memory):
DAC
Insert Efects
(Master Efects)
Disk
Multisample 0000 ... 3999
AUDIO INPUTS
S/P DIF INPUT
Analog/digital
convertor
Analog signal
Digital signal
Digital signal
Digital signal
Digital signal
Used by Combinations
and Songs
Resampling
Programs, Combinations
and Songs
AUDIO
OUTPUTS
RAM (internal memory)
WAVE File
Digital/analog
convertor
Analog signal Digital signal
Program
USB Audio
ConceptualdiagramoftheOpenSamplingSystem
Multisample
Index 001 Index 002 Index 003 Index 004
Index001
Top Key
Index002
Top Key
Index003
Top Key
Index004
Top Key
0000:
Sample A
0001:
Sample B
0002:
Sample C
0003:
Sample D
Program OSC (Single/Double)
Program OSC (Single/Double)
Multisample
Drum Kit
Wave Seq.
Sample Program OSC (Drums/Double Drums)
126
Preparations for sampling
Audio Settings
Audio input settings
The Audio Input page
ThispageisavailableinProgram,Combination,
Sequencer,andSamplingmodes,andletsyouadjust
thevolume,pan,effectssends,andbussingforthe
audioinputs,includinganaloginputs1&2,USB1&2,
andS/P DIFL&R.OutsideofSamplingmode,thisis
themainpageforsamplingrelatedsettings.
PageswithAudioinputsettingsinclude:
Using the control surface with the Audio Inputs
Youcanusethecontrolsurfacetoadjustmostofthe
AudioInputmixerparameters,includingPlay/Mute,
Solo,Pan,Level,andSends1and2.
Formoreinformation,andAdjustingvolume,Pan,
EQ,andFXsendsonpage 39.
Global audio input settings
EachProgram,Combination,andSongcaneitheruse
thesingle,Globalaudioinputmixersetup,orhaveits
owncustomsettings.Samplingmode,ontheother
hand,hasitsown,separatesettingsfortheaudio
inputs.
ForPrograms,Combinations,andSongs,thechoiceof
whetherornottousetheGlobalsetupiscontrolledby
theUseGlobalSettingparameter.
WhenUseGlobalSettingisOn,theProgram,
Combination,orSongusestheGlobalsettings.Thisis
thedefault,andletsyouchangefreelybetween
differentsoundswithoutaffectingtheaudioinputs.
Also,anyeditsmadeonAudioInputpagewillaffect
theGlobalsetting,alongwithanyotherPrograms,
Combis,orSongswhichusetheGlobalsetting.
Ontheotherhand,itmaysometimesbeconvenientto
saveaparticularmixersetupwithanindividual
Program,Combi,orSong,tosetupspecialsubmixer
settingsoreffectsprocessingforparticularinputs.For
example,youcansetupaProgramtouseamicinput
withavocoder,asdescribedunderVocoder(Program
mode)onpage 861.
Inthiscase,setUseGlobalSettingtoOff,andthe
audioinputswillusetheProgramscustomsettings.
Sampling can bypass the mixer entirely
Whensampling,youllusetheSourceBusparameter
toselectthesourceoftheaudiotosample.Depending
ontheselectedSourceBus,youmayormaynotneed
tousetheAudioInputmixeratall.
Forinstance,ifyouresamplingthroughtheKRONOS
effects,youllneedtousetheAudioInputmixerto
sendthedesiredaudioinputtotheeffects.
However,ifyousimplywanttosampletheinput
directly,youcanjustsettheSourceBustothedesired
input,andyouredonewithnoneedtodoanysetup
intheAudioInputmixer.
Audio Input mixer
Input 1 & 2, USB 1 & 2, S/P DIF L & R
Input1&2:Thesearetheanalogaudioinputs,for
eithermicrophonesorlinelevelsignals.Formore
information,seeAnalogAUDIOINPUTSonpage 8.
USB1&2:ThesearetheUSBaudioinputs,for
samplingfromaconnectedcomputer.
S/P DIFL&R:Thesearetheinputsettingsfordigital
inputfromaninstrumentorDATplayeretc.connected
totheS/P DIFINjack.TheKRONOSsupportsS/P DIF
inputandoutputat48kHz.
WhenusingS/P DIF,makesurethattheSystem
Clockissetcorrectly.Formoreinformation,see
SystemClockonpage 756oftheParameter
Guide.
Bus Select (IFX/Indiv.)
Thissetstheoutputbusfortheexternalaudioinput
signal.Youcansendtheaudiodirectlytophysical
outputs,ortotheinserteffects.
L/R:Theexternalaudioinputsignalwillbesenttothe
L/Rbus.Choosethisifyouwanttosamplethe
performanceoftheKRONOSitselfalongwiththe
othersignalsoftheL/Rbus.SetSourceBustoL/R.
IFX112:Theexternalaudioinputsignalwillbesent
totheIFX112bus.Chooseoneofthesesettingsifyou
wanttoapplyaninserteffectwhilerecording.Setthe
SourceBustomatchtheBusSelectthatfollowsthe
inserteffect.
14:Theexternalaudioinputsignalwillbesentto
INDIVIDUAL14outputsinmono.Pandoesnot
applyinthiscase.
1/2,3/4:Theexternalaudioinputsignalwillbesentto
theselectedpairofoutputsinstereo,withthestereo
positioncontrolledbythePanparameter.SetSource
BustothecorrespondingIndiv.input.
Off:Theexternalaudiosignalwillnotbesenttoabus.
InSamplingmode,ifyouwanttosampleanexternal
audiosignaldirectlywithoutroutingitthroughabus,
gototheP0:RecordingAudioInputpage,andchoose
theexternalinputyouwanttosample(AudioInput1
2,S/P DIFLR,USB12)astheSourceBus.
Mode Page
Sampling P0: Recording Audio Input
Combination P0: Play Audio Input/Sampling
Program P0: Play Audio Input/Sampling
Sequencer P0: Play/REC Audio Input/Sampling
Global P0: Basic Setup Audio
Preparations for sampling Audio Settings
127
PleasenotethatwhenyouchangeBusSelect
(IFX/Indiv.)fromOfftoL/RorIFX,thevolumelevel
totheAUDIOOUTL/MONOandRjacksortothe
headphonesmaydramaticallyincrease.
FX Ctrl Bus (FX Control Bus)
TheFXControlBusesletsyoucreateeffects
sidechains.Sidechainsletyoucontrolaneffectwith
oneaudiosignal(thesidechain),whiletheeffect
processesacompletelydifferentaudiosignal.Thisis
convenientforusewithvocoders,compressorsand
limiters,gates,etc.
KRONOSincludestwotruestereoFXControlBuses.
Formoreinformation,seeFXControlBuseson
REC Bus
ThissendstheexternalaudioinputsignaltotheREC
buses(fourmonochannels;1,2,3,4).
TheRECbusesarededicatedinternalbusesusedfor
samplingorforrecordingaudiotracksinSequencer
mode.
Ifyouwanttosamplethesebuses,setSourceBustoa
RECbus.
InSamplingmode,youcanmixseveralaudioinputsto
aRECbusforsampling,oryoucanmixthedirect
soundofaudioinputswiththesoundprocessedby
inserteffectsandsamplethecombinedresultfromthe
RECbus.
Inothermodes(e.g.,Programmode),youcanusethe
RECbusestosamplejustanaudioinputthatsplaying
alongwithaKARMAperformancebeingoutputtothe
L/Rbus.
Off:Theexternalaudiosignalwillnotbesenttothe
RECbuses.Thisisthedefault.
1,2,3,4:Theexternalaudioinputsignalwillbesentto
thespecifiedRECbusinmono.ThePansettingis
ignored.
1/2,3/4:Theexternalaudioinputsignalwillbesentin
stereotothespecifiedpairofRECbuses.ThePan
settingsendsthesignalinstereotobuses1and2or
buses3and4.
Send1 (to MFX1), Send2 (to MFX2)
Theseadjustthelevelsatwhichtheexternalaudio
inputsignalissenttothemastereffects.
Send1(toMFX1):Sendthesignaltomastereffect1.
Send2(toMFX2):Sendthesignaltomastereffect2.
levelstothemastereffectsaresetbythepostIFX112
Send1andSend2.
PLAY/MUTE
Thisindicateswhethertheexternalaudiosignalbeing
inputisinPLAYorMUTEstatus.
YoucancontrolthisusingthefrontpanelMIX
PLAY/MUTE16switches.
SOLO On/Off
ThisindicatestheSOLOstatusofeachexternalaudio
signalinput.YoucanusetheMIXSELECT16
switchestochangethis.
Soundwillbeoutputonlyfromchannelsforwhich
SOLOisOn.Otherchannelswillbemuted.Thesolo
functionincludestheoscillatorsofthetonegenerator.
Pan
Thisspecifiesthepanningoftheexternalaudioinput
signal.Wheninputtingastereoaudiosource,youwill
normallysettheinputstoL000andR127respectively.
Level
Specifiestheleveloftheexternalaudiosignalthatwill
beinput.Normallyyouwillsetthisat127.
Theaudiosignalsfromtheanaloginputsare
convertedbyanA/Dconverterfromanalogto
digitalsignals.Thisparametersetsthelevelofthe
signalimmediatelyafterithasbeenconvertedinto
digitalform.Ifthesoundisdistortedeventhough
thislevelsettingisverylow,itispossiblethatthe
soundisdistortingearlierthantheA/Dconverter.
YoullneedtoadjusttheMIC/LINEgainselect
switch,theLEVELknob,ortheoutputlevelofyour
externalaudiosource.
IfBusSelect(IFX/Indiv.)isntOff,raisingtheLevel
willbringtheexternalinputsignalintothe
KRONOSaudiosystem.Anynoisefromtheinputs
(evenifnoactualsignalispresent)maybeheardat
theKRONOSoutputs.
Mic
Digital recorder, efect, etc.
Guitar
Efect unit
USB B
Computer
LINE MIC
128
Topreventthis,ifyourenotusinganinput,turnits
BusSelect(IFX/Indiv.)off,orsetitsLevelto0.REC
BusandFXControlBusshouldalsobeturnedoffif
yourenotusingthem.
ThesameistruefortheRECSourceparameter.If
RECSourceissettoaninput,thatinputwillbe
passedthroughdirectlytotheoutputsevenifthe
inputsBusSelectisOff,oritsLevelis0.
Finally,forthesamereason:ifyourenotusingthe
analoginputs,turntherearpanelLEVELknobsto
theminimum,andsettheMIC/LINEswitchesto
LINE.
Setting the recording level
TheRecordingLevelLandRparametersadjuststhe
signallevelatthefinalstageofsampling.Forthebest
qualitysampling,setthelevelashighaspossible
withoutallowingthelevelmetertoindicateCLIP!
PresstheSAMPLINGRECswitchtoenterrecord
standbymode;thelevelmeterswillindicatethe
recordinglevelofthesignalfromthebuslineyou
selectedinSourceBus.Youcanusetheslidertoadjust
thesignallevel.Startwiththesliderat0.00,andadjust
thelevelashighaspossiblewithoutallowingthebar
indicatortoexceed0dB.
Thedefaultsettingis0.0dB.
Specifying the recording method
(Recording Setup)
Source Bus
TheSourceBusparameterscontrolswhataudiowillbe
capturedduringsampling.
L/R:TheL/RbusfollowingTFX1and2willbe
sampled.TheaudiosignalssenttotheL/Rbusand
soundsplayedontheKRONOSfromthekeyboardor
viaMIDIINandsenttotheL/Rbuswillbesampled.
NormallyyouwillusetheL/Rsetting.(Seethe
diagrambelow)
REC1/2,REC3/4:TheREC1/2orREC3/4buseswillbe
sampled.UsetheRECbuseswhenyouwanttoplay
thekeyboardorplaybackanaudioCDwhilesampling
onlytheaudioinput.Youcanalsomixseveralaudio
inputsourcestotheRECbuses,ormixthedirectsound
ofanaudioinputwithsoundprocessedbyaninsert
effectandmixthemtotheRECbusesforsampling.
IfyouchooseREC1/2,RECbus1isinputtotheL
channelandRECbus2isinputtotheRchannel.Ifyou
chooseREC3/4,RECbus3isinputtotheLchanneland
RECbus4isinputtotheRchannel.
AudioInput1/2,S/P DIFL/R,USB1/2:Choosethese
settingsifyouwanttodirectlysamplefromtheanalog,
S/P DIF,orUSBinputs.Theinputwillbesampled
directlywithoutbeingroutedthroughtheL/Rbus,
RECbuses,orIndividualbuses.Theinputswillbe
connecteddirectly,regardlessoftheAudioInput
settingsforBusSelect(IFX/Indiv),Pan,andLevel.
IfyouchooseAudioInput1/2,AUDIOINPUT1is
inputtotheleftchannelandAUDIOINPUT2isinput
totherightchannel.
Indiv.1/2and3/4:TheIndiv.1/2Indiv.3/4buseswillbe
sampled.Choosethesesettingsifyouwanttosample
onlytheaudioinputswhilemonitoringtheL/R
outputs,similarlytowhenusingtheRECbuses.
IfyouchooseIndiv.1/2,Indiv.bus1isinputtotheL
channelandIndiv.bus2isinputtotheRchannel.
SimilarlyforIndiv.3/4,thebusesareinputtotheLand
Rchannelsrespectively.
Source Direct Solo
Ifthisisunchecked,theL/R(postTFX)signalandthe
signalofthebuslinespecifiedforSourceBuswillbe
outputfromtheL/Rjacksandtheheadphonejack
accordingtotheAudioInputBusSelect(IFX/Indiv.)
settingandthepostIFXBusSel.setting.
Normallyyouwillleavethisunchecked,sothatSource
BusandL/Rarebothheard.Checkthisifyouwant
tomonitoronlythesoundthatsbeingrecorded.Only
thesignalofthebuslineselectedforSourceBuswill
beoutputfromtheL/Rjacksandtheheadphonejack.
Note:IfSourceBusisL/R,thissettingisignored,and
theL/R(postTFX)signalwillalwaysbeoutputfrom
theL/Rjacksandheadphonejacks.
Trigger
Thiscontrolshowsamplingwillbeinitiated.
Thetriggersyoucanselectwilldifferdependingonthe
mode.
InProgramandCombinationmodes,youcanselect
eitherSamplingSTARTSWorNoteOn.
InSamplingmode,youcanselecteitheroftheabove,
plusThreshold.
L-Mono
R-Mono
Stereo
Level Pan
Insert
Efects
CLIP !!
L/MONO
Source BUS = L/R
R
AUDIO OUTPUT
HEADPHONES
Insert
Efects
L/R
BUS
REC
1/2
REC
3/4
Indiv.
1/2 3/4
BUS = L/R or IFX1-12
USB CD-R/RW Drive
Audio Input
OSC
Total
Efects
Master
Efects
Sampling
Monitor
129
InSequencermode,youcanselectanyoftheabove,
plustheSequencerSTARTSW.
Forthetriggermodethatsmostappropriateinvarious
situations,refertothevariousexamplesofsampling
laterinthischapter.
SamplingSTARTSW:Whenyoupressthe
SAMPLINGREC,youwillentersamplingstandby
mode;samplingwillbeginwhenyoupressthe
SAMPLINGSTART/STOPswitch.
NoteOn:PresstheSAMPLINGRECswitchandthen
presstheSAMPLINGSTART/STOPswitchtoenter
samplingstandbymode.Samplingwillbeginwhen
youplaythekeyboard.
Threshold:Samplingwillbeginautomaticallywhen
theinputlevelexceedsthespecifiedLevelvalue.
SequencerSTARTSW:PresstheSAMPLINGREC
switchandthentheSAMPLINGSTART/STOPswitch
toentersamplingstandbymode.Thenpressthe
SEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitchtobeginsampling.
Usethiswhenyouwanttoresamplethesong
playback.
Tostopsampling,presstheSAMPLINGSTART/STOP
switchonceagain.Samplingwillalsoendifyoukeep
samplinguntilthetimespecifiedbySampleTime.
Making settings for the sample to be
recorded
(REC Sample Setup/Sampling Setup)
Nextwewillspecifythelocationintowhichthedata
willbesampled,selectmonoorstereosampling,and
specifythesamplingtime.
InSamplingmode,thesesettingsaremadeinREC
SampleSetup.InCombination,Program,and
Sequencermodes,thesesettingsaremadeinSampling
Setup.Thesesettingsapplyonlyineachrespective
mode.
The Recording Setup page in each mode
Samplingmode
Recording Level [dB]
Metronome Setup
Input
Sampling Setup
Mode Page
Sampling Sampling P0 Recording
Combination Combination P0 Audio Input/Sampling
Program Program P0 Audio Input/Sampling
Sequencer Sequencer P0 Audio Input/Sampling
Save to
Mode
Sample Time
Free Sample
Memory /
Free Number
130
Programmode
Save to
Specifiesthedestinationtowhichthedatawillbe
writtenduringsampling.
RAM:ThesamplewillbewrittentoRAMmemory.
SampleswrittenintoRAMmemorycanbeheard
immediatelyinSamplingmode.
Disk:ThesoundwillberecordedtodiskasaWAVE
file.Youcanselectadisk,directory,andfilenamefor
therecordedfileusingtheSelectDirectory/Filefor
SampletoDiskmenucommand.
UseDriveSelecttoselectthedesireddrive,whichcan
beeitheraninternaldiskoraUSBstoragedevice.
Then,usetheOpenorUpbuttonstomovetothe
desiredfolderlevel,andusetheNameparameterat
thetopofthewindowtospecifyanameforthesample
file.PresstheDonebuttontoconfirmthesettings
youvemade.
Whilethisdialogisopen,youcanalsoauditionthe
selectedWAVEfilebypressingtheonscreenPlay
buttonorthefrontpanelSAMPLINGSTART/STOP
switch.Tostopplayback,eitherpresstheSAMPLING
START/STOPswitchagain,ortouchtheonscreen
Stopbutton.
Mode
Specifiesthechannel(s)thatyouwanttosample,and
specifywhetheramonoorstereosamplewillbe
created.
TheLandRchannelsofthebusspecifiedbySource
Buswillbesampled.
LMono:TheLchannelofthebusspecifiedbySource
Buswillbesampledinmono.
RMono:TheRchannelofthebusspecifiedbySource
Buswillbesampledinmono.
Stereo:TheLandRchannelsofthebusspecifiedby
SourceBuswillbesampledinstereo.Thiswillcreatea
stereomultisampleandsamples.
Sample Time
Specifiestheamountoftimethatyouwishtosample.
Thiscanbesetin0.001secondincrements.Ifyou
recordasampleinthiscondition
([REC][START][STOP]),thechangeintimewillbe
displayedautomatically.
IfSavetoissettoDisk,themaximumvalueis
calculatedfromtheamountofremainingspaceonthe
diskspecifiedbySelectDirectory/FileforSampleto
Disk.Themaximumsampletimeis80minutes.
Whensamplingtodisk,bitresolutionmayalsoaffect
themaximumsamplingtime.24bitdatauses50%
morespacethan16bitdata.
Auto +12 dB On
Ingeneral,theRecordingLevelshouldbesetto0(dB).
Formoreinformation,seeSettingtherecordinglevel
onpage 128.
Inordertomaintainheadroom,theKRONOS
generallyplaysbacksamples12dBsofterthanthe
originalvolume(if+12dBisoff).Thisisappropriate
forsoundswhichwillbeplayedbackpolyphonically,
suchassamplesofacousticinstruments.
Fordrumloopsandsimilarmaterial,ontheother
hand,youmaywishtoplaybackthedataatthesame
levelatwhichitwassampled.Inthiscase,turnonthe
+12dBparameter(SamplingP2LoopEditpage).
IfyousamplewiththeAuto+12dBOnsetting
checked,+12dBwillautomaticallybeturnedon,and
therecordedsamplewillplaybackatthesamelevelat
whichitwassampled.
Sample to Disk (Bit Depth)
WhenSaveToissettoDisk,youcanchoosetorecord
ateither16bitor24bitresolution.
WhenSaveToissettoRAM,theresolutionisfixedat
16bit.
Optimizing RAM memory
Optimizationrearrangesanyunusedmemoryareasso
thatalloftheremainingmemorycanbeused,which
mayincreasetheamountofRAMavailablefor
sampling.Thisoptimizationcanhappeneither
manuallyorautomatically.
AutomaticoptimizationisenabledviatheAuto
OptimizeRAMparameterontheGlobalmodeP0:
BasicSetuppage.Whenthisisturnedon,RAMwill
automaticallybeoptimizedwhensamplingends.
Save to
Mode
Sample Time
Drive Select Done Open Up Play
131
ThisoptionwillkeepthegreatestamountofRAMfree
forsampling.However,itrequiresalittletimetowork,
andsothesoundwillstopforatimeaftersampling
ends.Also,ifasongisplayinginSequencermode,the
playbackwillstop.
Becauseofthis,ifyoureplayingbackasongor
recordingmultiplesamplesatonce,itsprobablybetter
toleaveAutoOptimizeRAMturnedoff.Onceyoure
finishedsampling,orifyounoticethattheamountof
availableRAMisgettinglow,usetheOptimizeRAM
menucommandtodotheoptimizationmanually.You
canfindthiscommandonthemenusoftheSampling
pagesinProgram,Combination,andSequencer
modes,aswellasonpagesP04inSamplingmode.
Youcancheckontheremainingamountofmemoryin
SamplingmodeontheP0:Recordingpage,underFree
SampleMemory/Locations.Formoreinformation,see
01f:FreeSampleMemory/Locationsonpage 684of
theParameterGuide.
Using the metronome
Themetronomecanbehelpfulwhenyouwanttoplay
aProgramorCombinationataspecifictempoand
sampleyourperformance.
YoucanmakemetronomesettingsinMetronome
Setup,inProgramorCombinationP0:PlayAudio
Input/Sampling.Youmightfinditconvenienttoset
Bus(OUTPUT)SelecttooneoftheIndiv.14outputs,
connectthe(INDIVIDUAL)14jackstoamixer,and
monitorthemetronomeviayourmixer.
Automatically setting-up for the desired
sampling method (Auto Sampling Setup)
Ineachmode,AutoSamplingSetupautomatically
makestheappropriatesettingsforthesampling
relatedparameters.ForexampleinProgrammodeyou
canusethistomakethenecessarysettingsfor
resamplingyourplayingonaprogram,ortomake
settingsforsamplingonlyanexternalaudiosource
whileyoumonitoryourplayingonaprogram.
However,theseautomaticsettingsassumetypical
situations,soyoullneedtoadjusttheparametersto
meetyoursituation.
Thisfunctionisavailableinthefollowingpages:
Mode Page
Sampling Sampling P0: Recording
Combination Combination P0: Play Audio Input/Sampling
Program Program P0: Play Audio Input/Sampling
Sequencer
Sequencer P0: Play/REC Preference, Audio
Input/Sampling
132
Sampling and editing in Sampling mode
InSamplingmode,youcanrecordsamples,andedit
sampledatathatyousampledorloadedfrommedia
(includingWAVEandAIFFformats).Youcanalso
assigntheeditedsamplestoindexes(zones)tocreatea
multisample.
Samplingmodepagestructure
Fordetailsonhowtoaccesseachmodeandpage,refer
toBasicoperationsonpage 17.
SamplingcanbeperformedinanypageP0P9of
SamplingmodebyusingtheREC/WRITEswitchand
theSTART/STOPswitch.Recordingrelatedsettings
suchasinputlevelaremadebytheparametersofP0:
Recording,andthesesettingsarevalidfortheother
pagesaswell.
Theselectedmultisampleorsamplecanbeplayed
fromthekeyboardinanypage,allowingyoutohear
theresultsofyoureditingineachpage.
Page Explanation
P0: Recording
Sampling and resampling
Various settings for sampling
Edit using the control surface
P1: Sample Edit Sample waveform editing
P2: Loop Edit
Sample playback parameter settings
Start, loop start, and end address settings
Loop and reverse playback on/off
Editing operations such as Time Slice and
Time Stretch
P3: Multisample
Edit
Assign samples to multisamples, and
specify the zone and original key
P4: EQ/
Controller
EQ adjustments for multisample playback
Assign functions to controllers
P5: Audio CD
Play back audio CDs
Rip audio CDs
P6: ---
P7: ---
P8: Insert Effect
Select and edit insert effects, adjust send
levels to the master effects, and specify the
routing to the outputs
P9: Master,
Total Effects
Select and edit master send effects and
total effects
Sampling and editing in Sampling mode Creating multisample indexes and samplingP0: Recording
133
Creating multisample indexes and samplingP0: Recording
Hereshowtocreateindexesinamultisample,and
assignasampletoeachindex.
1. PresstheSAMPLINGbuttontoenterSampling
mode.
2. SelecttheP0:RecordingRecordingpage.
3. SelectMultisampleSelect,andcreatea
multisample.
Tocreateanewmultisample,pressthe
MultisampleSelectpopupbutton.Thenpressa
MultisampleNo.inthelistforwhichnonamehas
beenentered,orusethenumerickeys09toinputa
numberandthenpresstheENTERswitch.
Ifyouwanttocreateastereomultisample,checkthe
Stereobox,andpresstheOKbutton.
Ifyouwanttocreateamonauralmultisample,
unchecktheStereobox,andpresstheOKbutton.
4. PresstheCreatebuttontocreateanindex.
Immediatelyafterthepoweristurnedon,Index
willshow001/008.Thisindicatesthatthereareeight
indexes,andthatthefirstindexisselected(seethe
illustrationbelow).
PresstheCreatebuttonseveraltimes.Eachtimeyou
pressit,anindexwillbecreated.Thekeyboard
displaywillindicatethezoneandoriginalkey
locationofeachindex.
Note:Theindexthatiscreatedwhenyoupressthe
CreatebuttonwillbecreatedaccordingtotheP0:
RecordingRecordingpageCreateZonePreference
settings.(ThesesettingscanalsobemadeinP3:
MultisampleEditpage,CreateZonePreference)
Immediatelyafterthepoweristurnedon,Position
willbeRight(toselectedindex),ZoneRangewillbe
1Keys,andOriginalKeyPositionwillbeBottom,
sothatindexeswillbecreatedasshownbelow.This
isconvenientwhenyouwanttosamplemultiple
takesofaphraseorrhythmloopinasingle
operation.
IfyousetZoneRangeto12Keys,indexeswillbe
createdatintervalsofoneoctave.
5. SelectIndex.
YoucanalsoselectIndexbyholdingdownthe
ENTERswitchandplayingapadoranoteonthe
keyboard.Forthisexample,select001.
6. AssignasampletotheIndex.
IfRAMmemoryalreadycontainssamples,use
SampleSelecttoselectthesampleandassignit.
Ifyouwanttorecordanewsample,youcansample
itnow.
Thesampleyourecordwillbeautomatically
assignedtotheindexyouselectedinstep4.
Theassignedsamplewillsoundwhenyouplaythe
keyboardintherangeoftheindextowhichthe
sampleisassigned.
7. Repeatsteps5and6toassignasampletoeach
index.
Thenumberandorderoftheindexesina
multisample,therangeofeachindex,andthe
originalkeypositioncanbefreelychangedlaterif
desired.(SeeMultisampleeditingonp.145)
Popup
Keyboard & Pad
Multisample Select
Index
Create Sample Select
Create Zone
Preference
134
Creating multiple samples
Intheexampleproceduredescribedabove,several
indexeswerecreated(bypressingtheCreatebutton
severaltimes),andthensampleswereassignedtoeach
Index.
Asanalternativemethod,itisalsopossibletocreate
oneindex,sampleintoit,andthenrepeatthesetwo
steps.
1. PresstheCreatebuttononcetocreateanindex.
2. Recordasample.
Therecordedsamplewillautomaticallybeassigned
totheindexyoucreatedinstep1.
3. Repeatsteps1and2.
Thisisanefficientwaytorecordmultiplesamples.
Assigning samples to the pads
InSamplingmode,youcanusethepadstoplay
samplesdirectly.Theonscreenpadsareavailableon
theP4:EQ/Controlspage.USBcontrollers,MIDIinput,
andthelocalkeyboardcanallcontrolthepadsaswell;
formoredetails,seePlayingthepadsonpage 35.
Bydefault,pads18correspondtotheC2G2keys.For
example,thedefaultIndexsettingfor001/008sets
OrigKeyandTopKeytoC2.Theassignedsamplewill
soundwhenyouplaytheC2key.Thesamesample
willalsosoundwhenyouplaypad1.
Similarly,ifyouassignsamplestoIndex002008,the
samplesthatsoundwhenyouplaytheC#2G2keys
willalsosoundwhenyouplaypads28.
Foreachpad,youcanchangethenotenumbersused
toplaysamples.
Forexample,youmightassigntheinfrequentlyplayed
highesteightnotesofthekeyboardtocorrespondto
thepads.Tomakethesetting,selectthenotenumber
field,andplaythedesiredkeywhileholdingdownthe
ENTERswitch.
OnscreenpadsinSamplingmode
Assigningsamplestothepads
Keyboard range
C4 key
Index02 Index03...Index08 Index01
By holding down the ENTER switch and playing a note, you can select the corresponding
index, and the specified key will be the base key and will be shown in blue.
Pads 1...8 correspond to C2...G2.
On-screen Pads are available on the P4:EQ/Control page.
Original Key (currently selected
Original Key is displayed in red)
Index zone (currently
selected Index is reversed)
Sampling and editing in Sampling mode Basic examples of sampling
135
Basic examples of sampling
Sampling your voice from a mic, and
playing it back as a one-shot sample
Inthisexample,welluseamicconnectedtoAUDIO
INPUT1tosampleyourvoice.
Connect a mic
1. ConnectamictotherearpanelAUDIOINPUT1
jack.
2. PresstheAUDIOINPUTMIC/LINEswitchsothat
itsintheMIC(outward)position,andsetthe
LEVELknobnearthecenter.
Formoredetails,seeAudioinputsettingson
page 126.
Sampling Setup
1. GototheSamplingP0:RecordingAudioInput
page.
PresstheSAMPLINGbuttontoenterSampling
mode.MakesurethattheSamplingP0:Recording
pageisdisplayed.
Ifitisnot,presstheEXITswitch,andthenpressthe
AudioInputtab.
2. ChoosethemenucommandAutoSampling
Setup.
Adialogboxwillappear.AutoSamplingSetup
automaticallysetsmanyoftheparameters
necessaryforsampling.Youcanusethesesettings
asaguidelinewhensampling.
3. SelectRECAudioInput.
Thiswillmakesettingsforsamplinganexternal
audiosource.
4. SetSourceAudiotoAudioInput1/2.
Thismeansthatyoullbesamplingtheinstrument
orotherexternalaudioinputsourceconnectedto
AUDIOINPUT1and2.
5. TotherightofSourceAudio,selectMonoL.
Withthissetting,theinputfromtheINPUT1jack
willbesenttotheinternalLchannelandsampled
monaurally.
6. FortheSavetofield,selectRAM.
ThesampleddatawillbewrittenintoRAM
memory.
7. TurnIFXOff.
Youwillbesamplingwithoutapplyinganinsert
effect.
8. PresstheOKbuttontoexecutethecommand.
Youhavenowmadethesettingsnecessaryfor
sampling.
Note:Takealookatthesettingsthathavebeenmade.
AudioInput:Inputs1and2havebeenroutedtothe
L/Rbus,withtheirPansethardleftandhardright
respectively,andinputlevelssetto127.
SourceBUS:L/R
Thesound(s)senttotheL/Rbuswillbesampled.With
thesettingsabove,thisincludesInputs1and2.
Trigger:SamplingSTARTSW
SamplingwillstartwhenyoupresstheSAMPLING
START/STOPswitch.
RecordingLevel:+0.0
Thisisthedefaultsettingforrecordinganexternal
input.
Saveto:RAM
YouwillbesamplingtoRAMmemory.
9. PresstheRecordingtabtogototheP0:Recording
Recordingpage.
Mic
MIC
136
UnderRECSampleSetup.notethatSamplingMode
hasbeensettoLMono.Thismeansthatthesoundof
theinternalLchannelwillbesampledinmono.
Next,letschangetheTriggersetting.Thiscontrols
howsamplingwillstart.Currently,itssettostartwhen
youpresstheSamplingSTART/STOPbutton.Well
changeittomakesamplingstartwhentheaudioinput
exceedsaspecifiedvolume.
10.GobacktotheSamplingP0:RecordingAudio
Inputpage.
11.Makethefollowingsettings.
Trigger:Threshold
Withthissetting,samplingwillstartwhentheinput
exceedsaspecificvolume.
ThresholdLevel:30dB
Fromtherecordreadystate,recordingwillstart
automaticallywhentheaudioinputexceeds30dB.
PreTriggerREC:005ms
Recordingwillbeginimmediately(5ms)before
samplingisstarted,sothattheattackofthesoundis
notlost.
Set the recording level
12.Speakorsingatthevolumeyouintendtorecord.
IftheADCOVERLOAD!(ADconverterinput
overload)indicationappears,turntherearpanel
LEVELknobtowardMINtoadjustthelevel
appropriately.
indicationtoappear.
13.PresstheSAMPLINGRECswitch.
Speakintothemic,andnoticethatthelevelmeter
indicatesthevolumeofthesoundthatwillbe
recorded.
controllertolowertheRecordingLevelslider
(shownintherightofthedisplay)fromthe+0.0
settingtoanappropriateposition.
14.Whenyouvefinishedmakingadjustments,press
theSAMPLINGRECswitch.
Record
TheKRONOSwillbeinrecordreadymode.
16.Speakintothemic,sayingtheword(s)youwantto
sample.
(Example:Its)
Recordingwillstartwhenthelevelexceedsthe
Level30dBsetting.
17.Whenyouvefinishedsayingtheword(s),press
theSAMPLINGSTART/STOPswitch.
Thiscompletesthesamplingoperation.Thenew
samplewillbeautomaticallyassignedtoSample
(SampleSelect).
Hear the sampled result
18.Thesampleyoujustrecordedwill(bydefault)be
assignedtoIndex001.Whenyoupressthe
OrigKeykey(C2)forIndex001,youwillhear
thesoundyoujustsampled.
Noticethatthesamplewillloop(playrepeatedly)if
youholddownthekey.Weregoingtoturnlooping
off.
Turn looping off
19.PresstheLoopEdittabtogototheP2:LoopEdit
page.
UncheckLoop.Nowthesamplewillnotloopeven
ifyouholddowntheC2key.
Sampling and editing in Sampling mode Basic examples of sampling
137
Next,wellspecifythatloopingwillbeturnedoff
foreachnewlyrecordedsample.
20.PressthelowerRecordingtabandthentheupper
RecordingtabtogototheP0:Recording
Recordingpage.
21.UncheckAutoLoopOn.
IfAutoLoopOnischecked,theLoopsettingwill
automaticallybeturnedonwhenyousample,so
thatthesamplewillloop.
Record the next sample
22.IntheP0:Recording,Recordingpage,select
Indexandpressthe switchtoselect002.
23.PresstheSAMPLINGRECswitchandthenthe
Speakintothemic,sayingtheword(s)youwantto
sample.
(Example:So)
Whenyouvefinishedspeaking,pressthe
24.Repeatsteps14and15severaltimesmoreto
recordafewmoresamples.
(Example:Easy,To,Sample,With,
KRONOS)
25.Playthekeysoneafteranother.
PlaythekeysstartingatC2insemitonesteps.The
samplesyoujustrecordedwillplayoneafter
another.
(Forexampleifyousequentiallyplaythekeysfrom
C2throughF#2,youwillhearItsSoEasyTo
SampleWithKRONOS.)
Themultisampleyoucreatedcanbeusedasa
programorcombination.(SeeConvertinga
MultisampletoaProgramonpage 146)
Sampling external audio through insert
effects
Inthisexample,wellapplyaninserteffecttothe
soundfromamicconnectedtotheAUDIOINPUT1
jack,andsampletheprocessedsoundinstereo.
Connect a mic
1. ConnectyourmictotherearpanelAUDIOINPUT
1jack.(SeeSamplingyourvoicefromamic,and
playingitbackasaoneshotsampleonpage 135)
Setup
2. IntheP0:RecordingAudioInputpage,makethe
followingsettings.
INPUT1
BusSelect(IFX/Indiv.):IFX1
Pan:C064
Level:127
ThisspecifiestheinputlevelandpanoftheINPUT
1jack,andassignsIFX1busasthedestination.
SamplingSetup
SourceBus:L/R
Trigger:Threshold
ThresholdLevel:30dB
PreTriggerREC:005ms
FordetailsonRecordingSetup,refertostep3of
Samplingyourvoicefromamic,
3. GototheP8:InsertEffectInsertFXpage.
PresstheIFXtab,andthentheInsertFXtab.
4. SelectIFX1,usethenumerickeystoinput1,0,1,
andpresstheENTERswitchtoselect101:Reverb
Hall.
PressIFX1On/Offtoturniton.
5. Speakintothemic,andverifythatreverbis
applied.
YoucanusetheIFX1page(IFX1tab)toeditthe
effectsettings.
6. MakesurethattheBusSel.thatfollowsIFX1isset
toL/R.
7. PresstheEXITswitch,andthenpressthe
RecordingtabtogototheP0:Recording
Recordingpage.
138
8. SettheRECSampleSetupModetoStereo.
Withthissetting,thesoundoftheinternalL/R
channelscanbesampledinstereo.
9. SelectIndex.
Ifyouwanttocreateanewindex,presstheCreate
button.
10.Samplethesound.
PresstheSAMPLINGRECswitch,andthenthe
SAMPLINGSTART/STOPswitchtoenterrecord
readymode.
Speakthewordyouwanttosample.
Recordingwillstartwhenthelevelexceedsthe
Level30dBsetting.
PresstheSAMPLINGSTART/STOPswitchtostop
sampling.
11.Playthekeyboard.
PresstheOrigKeykeytohearthesoundyou
sampled.
Sampling from the S/P DIF input
Ingeneral,samplingfromtheS/P DIFinputsisvery
similartosamplingfromtheanaloginputs.For
instance,torecordastereosamplefromtheS/P DIF
inputs,setupthesamplingparametersasbelow:
SourceBus:S/P DIFL/R
Resample:Manual
RecordingLevel[dB]:asdesired
Mode:Stereo
Important:Wheneverusingthedigitalinputsand
outputs,makesurethattheGlobalSystemClock
parameterissetcorrectly.Formoreinformation,see
SystemClockonpage 756oftheParameterGuide.
Applying an insert effect to a sample and
resampling the result
Theprocessofapplyinganinserteffectetc.toa
sampledsoundandthensamplingitonceagainis
calledresampling.
1. IntheP0:RecordingRecordingpage,assignthe
samplethatyouwanttoresampletoSample
Select.
Whenthepowerisfirstturnedon,theassigned
samplewillbesettoOrig.KeyC2.
2. Makethefollowingsettings.
INPUT1
Turnoffthebussesforallsixaudioinputs.
SamplingSetup
SourceBus:L/R
ThesoundsenttotheL/Rwillbesampled.
AfteryouvepressedtheSAMPLINGRECswitch
toentersamplingreadymode,resamplingwill
beginwhenyoupresstheSAMPLING
START/STOPswitch.
Resample:Auto
Thesampleassignedtotheindexwillberesampled
automatically.
Key:C2
UseKeytospecifythesamplethatwillbe
resampled.
RecordingLevel:0.0
Thisisthedefaultsettingforresampling.
Saveto:RAM
ThedatawillbewrittentoRAMmemory.
SamplingMode:Stereo
ThesoundoftheinternalL/Rchannelswillbe
sampledinstereo.
Auto+12dBOn:On
The+12dBsettingwillautomaticallybeturnedon
forthesamplesyourecord.
Sampling and editing in Sampling mode Editing loops
139
BeawarethatifyouchangetheBussettingfromOff
toL/RorIFX112,thevolumelevelsenttothe
AUDIOOUTL/MONOandRjacksandthe
headphonesmayriseexcessively.
3. InP2:LoopEdit,checkthe+12dBsetting.
4. IntheP8:InsertEffectRoutingpage,setBus
SelecttoIFX1.
5. IntheP8:InsertEffect,InsertFXpage,setIFX1to
101:ReverbHall,andturnIFXOn/OffON.
PresstheC2key,andverifythatreverbisapplied.
AlsomakesurethattheBusSel.followingIFX1is
settoL/R.
6. PresstheSAMPLINGRECswitch,andthenthe
ThesampleassignedtoC2willplayautomatically,
andresamplingwillbegin.
Whenthesamplefinishesplaying,resamplingwill
end.
Thesamplethatwascreatedbyresamplingwill
automaticallybeassignedtoSampleSelect.
Note:InSamplingmode,theP8RoutingpageBus
SelectparameterwillautomaticallybesettoL/R
whenresamplingends.Thispreventsaninsert
effectfrombeingappliedinduplicatewhenyou
monitortheresultsofresamplingthroughaninsert
effect.
Ifyouwanttoapplyaninserteffectonceagain,re
selectIFX1.
Note:Asanalternativetoautomaticallyresampling
asdescribedabove(ResampleAuto),youcan
simplysamplethesoundsthatyouplayfromthe
keyboard(ResampleManual).
InSampleSelect,assignthesamplethatyouwill
resample,andsetResampletoManual.SetTrigger
toNoteOn,andsetSampleModetoStereoas
desired.Thensetthebusandeffectasdescribedin
steps2and7,presstheSAMPLINGRECandthen
theSTART/STOPswitch,andthenpresstheC2key
tostartresampling.Whenyouwanttostop
resampling,presstheSAMPLINGSTART/STOP
switch.
Editing loops
Youcanedittheplaybackaddressatwhichthesample
willbelooped.TheP2:LoopEditpageletsyoudothe
followingthings.
Youcanspecifytheloopingaddressesbyediting
Start,End,andLoopStartwhilewatchingthe
waveform.FunctionslikeZoomIn/Out,UseZero,
andGridmakeeditingeasy.
Youcanturnloopingon/off,adjustthetuningof
theloopplayback,applya+12dBplaybackboost,
orreversetheplayback.
YoucanusetheTimeSlicefunctionto
automaticallydetecttheattacksofkickandsnare
notesetc.inarhythmloopsample(alooped
samplecontainingadrumpattern),and
automaticallyslicethesampleattheappropriate
locations.Thisfunctioncanautomaticallycreate
performancedata(notes)toplaythedivided
samplesattheappropriatemoments,lettingyou
playthisphraseinSequencermodeatthedesired
tempowithoutaffectingthepitchoftheindividual
notes.Youcanalsodothingslikechangingthe
pitchofjustthesnaredrum,replacingitwithan
entirelydifferentsample,orchangingtheplayback
140
timingofthephraseinthesequencertotransform
theoriginalrhythmloopintoanentirelydifferent
rhythmloop.(Stereosamplesaresupported.)
YoucanusetheTimeStretchfunctiontomodifythe
tempowithoutchangingthesamplespitch.When
executingTimeStretch,youcanchooseeither
Sustaining(suitableforloopsofsustainedsounds
suchasstringsorvocal)orSlice(suitablefor
loopsofdecaytypesoundssuchasdrums).(Stereo
samplesaresupported.)
Sometimeswhenloopingasampleofpitched
instrumentssuchasstringsorwinds,thelooped
portionmayplaybackinanunnaturalway.By
executingtheCrossfadeLoopfunctionyoucan
eliminatethisproblemsothattheloopsounds
right.
Loop settings
1. Selectthesampleforwhichyouwishtomakeloop
settings.
Toselectthesample,usetheSampleSelectorIndex
parametersofP2:LoopEditpageoroftheP0:
Recording,Recordingpage.
IfyouuseSampleSelecttoselectthesample,be
awarethattheassignmenttotheindexwillalso
change.
2. IntheP2:LoopEditpage,usetheLoopcheck
boxtoturnloopplaybackon/offforthesample.
Loopingwillbeturnedoniftheboxischecked.
Thiswilloperatebetweentheaddressesyouspecify
instep3.
LoopOn:StartEndLoopStartEnd(Loop
StartEndisrepeated)
LoopOff:StartEnd
Toplaythesample,pressthekeytowhichthe
sampleisassigned(thekeyrangethatishighlighted
inKeyboard&Pad).
AsamplewaveformthatwassampledwithSample
ModesettoStereowillbedisplayedintwolevels.
TheupperlevelistheLchannel,andthelowerlevel
istheRchannel.
3. SetthestartaddressinStart,theloopstart
addressinLoopStart,andtheendaddressin
End.
SelectLoopStart(highlighted),andusethe
[VALUE]dialorotherVALUEcontrollerstomodify
thevalue.Thecorrespondingverticallinewill
move.SetStartandEndinthesameway.Inthe
exampleshownbelow,Startissetimmediately
beforethefirstwaveform,LoopStartisset
immediatelybeforethesecondwaveform,andEnd
issetasdesired.
ZOOM
4. ByusingtheZOOMbuttonyoucanchangethe
rangethatisdisplayed.WhenStartis
highlighted,zoomwillbeperformedfromthe
startaddress.
Areaashownintheillustrationdisplaysthe
entiresample.Areabindicatestheregionwithin
theentiresamplethatisshowninareac.Asyou
zoominonthetimeaxis,thisshowsyouwherethe
zoomedregionislocatedwithintheentiresample.
UsetheZoombuttonstospecifyhowareacwill
showamagnified(zoomin)orreduced(zoomout)
viewofthewaveform.
Use Zero
IftheUseZerocheckboxischecked,onlythose
addresseswherethewaveformdatacrossesthezero
levelwillbefoundautomaticallywhensearching,
andcanbeset.Thisletsyoueasilymakeaddress
settingswherenoiseislesslikelytooccurwhen
looping.
Truncate
5. Ifnecessary,usethepagemenucommand
Truncatetodeleteunwanteddatathatfalls
outsidethestart(orloopstart)andendaddresses.
SelecttheFront&Endradiobutton.
Inthisexample,wewillnotchangethesettingsof
theSavetoNo.andOverwritecheckboxes,so
presstheOKbuttontoexecute.
Start (Red) Loop Start (Green) End (Blue)
b a c
Sampling and editing in Sampling mode Using Time Slice
141
Whenyouexecutethisoperation,thetruncated
sampledatawillautomaticallybeassignedtothe
index.
Inthedialogboxesofsomepagemenuitems,there
isaSavetoNo.settingthatletsyouspecifythe
samplenumbertowhichtheeditedsamplewillbe
saved.Atthistime,avacantsamplenumberwillbe
selectedautomatically,soyouwillchangethe
settingonlyifyouwanttospecifythesave
destinationnumber.
IfyoucheckOverwriteinthedialogboxofthe
command,thedatapriortoeditingwillbedeleted
andoverwrittenbytheediteddata.Normally,you
willexecutetheWriteoperationwithoutchecking
this,sothattheunediteddataispreserved.When
youarecompletelyfinishedwithyourediting,you
canusethepagemenucommandDeleteSampleto
deleteunneededsamples.
Using the grid to make loop settings
Gridoverlaysagridonthewaveformdisplayto
indicatethetempoBPM.Thishelpsyoumakeloop
settingsthatmatchthetempo.
YoucanalsoviewthegridintheP1:SampleEditpage,
andusethegridtoeditthewaveformtomatchthe
tempo.
1. CheckGrid.
Thegridwillappearinthewaveformdisplay.
SetResolutionasdesired,andspecifythetempo
BPMvalue.
Thegridisdisplayedaccordingtotheplayback
pitchatthebasekey(thekeyshowninbluefor
Keyboard&Pad).Youcanselectthebasekeyby
holdingdowntheENTERswitchandplayingakey.
Pressthebasekeytoplaythesample,andpressthe
TAPTEMPOswitchatquarternoteintervalsalong
withthephrase.ThiswillenableTapTempoand
specifythetempo.
2. SettheendaddressEndsothatitcoincideswith
agridline.
ThiswillmakethelooplengthmatchtheBPM.
Ifloopingison,thegridisdisplayedbeginningat
theLoopStart.Ifloopingisoff,thegridisdisplayed
beginningattheStart.
3. Ifyouwanttohidethegriddisplay,uncheckthe
Gridoption.
Using Time Slice
TimeSliceisafunctionthatdetectstheattackofthe
kickorsnareetc.inarhythmloopsample(asample
consistingofaloopedpatternofdrumsetc.),and
automaticallydividesitintoseparateinstrumental
sounds.Eachofthedividedinstrumentalsoundsis
madeintoasampleofitsown,andthenautomatically
expandedintoamultisampleandprogram.Pattern
playbackdatafortheSequencermodeusingthe
dividedsamplesisalsocreatedautomatically.
Thetimeslicessamplecanbeusedinthefollowing
waysbythesongofSequencermode.
Multiplerhythmloopsamplesofdifferingtempo
canbematchedtothesametempowithout
changingtheirpitch.
Youcanchangethetempoinrealtimewithout
affectingthepitch.
Asanexample,wewilldescribehowarhythmloop
samplecanbetimeslicedinSamplingmode,andthen
howtherhythmloopsamplecanbeplayedin
Sequencermode.
Youwillneedtoproviderhythmloopsamplesof
drumsetc.Youcaneitherrecordtheseonthe
KRONOS,orloadtheminDiskmode.Initially,you
shouldtrythisusingaonemeasurepatternin4/4time
withafairlysimplebeat,andrecordthepatternasa
monorhythmloopsample.
1. UseSampleSelecttoselectthesampledatathat
youwanttotimeslice.
Playbackthesample,andverifythatthebeatsthat
youwanttoloopareplayedcleanly.
Iftheyarenotplayedcleanly,maketheappropriate
settingsforthestartaddressStartandendaddress
End,andexecutethepagemenucommand
Truncate(SeeLoopsettingsonpage 140).
142
2. GototheP2:LoopEditpage.Selectthepagemenu
commandTimeSlice.
TheSetSampleTempodialogboxwillappear.
3. Specifythenumberofquarternotebeatsinthe
sample,anditstempo.
IfyouknowthetempoinBPM,settheSourceBPM
accordingly.
IfyoudonotknowtheBPM,useBeattoenterthe
totalnumberofbeats,andtheBPMwillbe
calculatedautomatically.
Thesamplewillautomaticallybesliced,anda
dialogboxwillappear.
Whenyouplaythekeyboard,C2willplaythe
originalsample(Source),andD2andsubsequent
keyswillplaythedividedsamples.
Whilelisteningtoeachdividedsample,adjust
Sensitivitysothateachdrumstrikeorotherrhythm
instrumentsoundisdividedintoitsownsample.In
somecases,itmaynotbepossibletoslicethe
samplecleanlyevenifyouadjustSensitivity.Ifthe
attackofthenextsoundisincludedintheendofthe
precedingsample,orifonesamplecontainstwo
notes,youwillneedtoeditthesamples.
Ifyouwanttoedit,holddowntheENTERswitch
andselecttheIndexthatisassignedtothenotethat
youwanttoedit.(Thisportionofthewaveform
displaywillbehighlighted.)Thenyoucanmake
adjustmentsbyadjustingStartorEnd,andbyusing
DividetoseparateorLinktocombine.
Formoreinformation,seeTimeSliceonpage 740
5. PresstheSavebutton.
TheSaveSamples&MSdialogboxwillappear.
Hereyoucansavethetimeslicedsamplesandthe
multisample.
Atthistime,settheitemsintheSaveWithareato
specifytheconversiondestinationfortheprogram
thatwillusethesamplesandmultisample,andfor
theperformancedata(trackorpattern)thatwillbe
usedinSequencermodetorecreatetherhythm
loopsample.
Ifyouwanttocreatetheperformancedataina
track:
TurnProgramandSeq.EventOn(checked)
Program:asdesired(forinstance,UG000)
Track:On
Song:000,Track:01,Meter:4/4
StartMeasure:001,Time:008
PresstheSavebuttontosavethedata.
Youwillreturntothedialogboxofstep4.
Ifyouwanttocreatetheperformancedataina
pattern:
Inordertoauditiontheperformancedataasit
wouldbeifcreatedasapattern,presstheSave
buttononceagaintogototheSaveSamples&MS
dialogbox.
TurnProgramandSeq.EventOn(checked)
Program:asdesired(forinstance,UG001)
Pattern:On
Song:001,Pattern:U00,Meter:4/4
RPPR:On(checked),Key:C#2,Track:01
PresstheSavebuttontosavethedata.
Youwillreturntothedialogboxofstep4.
6. PresstheExitbutton.
Sampling and editing in Sampling mode Using Time Slice
143
7. PresstheSEQbuttontoenterSequencermode,
andselect000forSongSelect.
Thefollowingsongdatahasbeenset/created
automaticallyasyouspecifiedinstep5.
P0:Play/RECpage
Song:000,Meter:4/4,Tempo:112
P0:Play/RECMIDITrackProgSelect/Mixerpage
Track01Program:asdesired(forinstance,UG000)
P5:TrackEdit,TrackEditpage
Track01:trackdata:8measures(D2)
PresstheSEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitchtostart
playback.
Asanexample,setq (Tempo)to100.Noticethat
thepitchdoesnotchangewhenyouplaybackata
differenttempo.
Ifthebeatoftheoriginalrhythmloopsampleisnot
reproducedcorrectlywhenyouchangethetempo,
orifobtrusivenoiseisheard,thisisbecausethe
samplewasnotslicedappropriatelyinstep4.The
wayinwhichthepercussioninstrumentsounds
weredividedwillhaveamajorimpactonthe
qualityoftheplaybackwhenthetempoischanged.
Youwillneedtoadjustthewayinwhichthe
samplesaredividedinstep4.
Thesilencebetweensamplesmaybecomeobtrusive
ifyouplaybackataslowertempo,ornoisemay
occurbetweensamplesifyouplaybackatafaster
tempo.Toavoidsuchproblems,youcansetStretch
NewBPMorRatioinstep5tothetempoat
whichyouwanttoplayback,andexecutetime
stretchtoadjustthelengthofeachsample.Formore
information,seeTimeStretchonpage 745ofthe
ParameterGuide.
8. InSongSelect,choose001.
Thefollowingsongdatahasbeenset/created
automaticallyasyouspecifiedinstep5.
P0:Play/RECpage
Song:001,Meter:4/4,Tempo:112,RPPR:On
P0:Play/RECMIDITrackProgSelect/Mixerpage
Track01Program:asdesired(forinstance,UG001)
P5:Pattern/RPPR,RPPRSetuppage
Key:C#2,Assign:On,
Pattern:User,U00,Track:Track01
Patterndata:1measure(D2)
IntheP0:Play/RECMIDITrackProgSelect/Mixer
page,presstheC#2key.TheRPPRfunctionwill
beginplayingpatternU00.
IntheP5:Pattern/RPPR,PatternEditpage,pressthe
SEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitchtostartplayback
ofpatternU00.
WhenyoupresstheC#2keyintheP5:
Pattern/RPPR,RPPRSetuppage,theRPPRfunction
willstartplayingpatternU00.
Inthesamewayasinstep7,changingtheplayback
tempowillnotaffectthepitch.
144
Sample waveform editing
IntheP1:SampleEditscreenyoucandothefollowing
things.
YoucansettheEditRangeStartandEndwhile
watchingthewaveform.Youcanusefunctions
suchasZoomIn/Out,UseZero,andGridtoedit
thewaveformefficiently.
Youcaneditthesamplewaveformusingavariety
ofcommandssuchascut,copy,mix,insert,
normalize,volumeramp,andreverse.
ARateConvertfunctionletsyoulowerthe
samplingfrequencyofthesampledatainarangeof
2/3to1/6,producingdownsampledeffects.
TheLinkfunction(Link:withcrossfade)letsyou
connecttwosamplesintoone.Whendoingso,you
canapplyacrossfadesothatthesustainedportion
ofthesampleswillchangegraduallytocreatea
naturaltransitionbetweenthetwosamples.
1. Selectthesamplethatyouwishtoedit.
UseSampleSelectorIndexintheP1:SampleEdit
pageortheP0:Recording,Recordingpagetoselect
thesample.
IfyouuseSampleSelecttoselectthesample,be
awarethattheindexassignmentwillalsochange.
2. SelecttheP1:SampleEditpage.
Thewaveformdataofthecurrentlyselectedsample
willbedisplayed.
SamplewaveformsrecordedwithSamplingMode
settoStereowillbeshownintwolines.Theupper
lineistheLeftchannelwaveform,andthelowerline
istheRightchannelwaveform.
3. UseEditRangeStartandEndtospecifythe
rangethatyouwishtoedit.
Theselectedrangewillbehighlighted.
Ifyouwanttoauditiontheselectedregion,pressthe
PlaybuttonintheLCDortheSAMPLING
START/STOPswitch.Theselectedregionwillplay
atthepitchofthebasekey(thebluekeyinthe
keyboarddisplay).Youcanspecifythebasekeyby
holdingdowntheENTERswitchandplayinganote
onthekeyboard.
Whenyouplayakeytowhichthesampleis
assigned(thehighlightedrangeofthekeyboard
displayedinKeyboard&Pad),thesamplewillbe
playedbackaccordingtoitsloopsettings.
TheprocedureforusingtheZOOMandUseZero
checkboxesisthesameasforP2:LoopEdit.
4. Fromthelistofpagemenu,selectthedesired
editingcommand.Maketheappropriatesettings
inthedialogbox,andpresstheOKbuttonto
execute.
Fordetailsonthemanysampleeditingfeatures,see
Sampling:PageMenuCommandsonpage 726of
theParameterGuide.
Sampling and editing in Sampling mode Multisample editing
145
Multisample editing
Editingamultisampleisaccomplishedwithanumber
ofoperationsi.e.creatingindexesforthemultisample
andassigningasampletoeachindex,editing
operationssuchasdeleting,copying,andinserting
indexes,anddetailedsettingssuchassampleleveland
pitchforeachindex.
MultisampleeditingisperformedinP3:Multisample.
YoucanalsodosomebasiceditsintheP0:Recording
Recordingpage.
Editing the indexes
Tochangethenumberororderoftheindexes,usethe
Insert,Cut,Copy,andCreatebuttons.
1. SelecttheP3:MultisampleEditpage.
2. UseMultisample(MS)toselectthemultisample
thatyouwishtoedit.
3. SelecttheIndex.
Youcanalsoselectanindexbyholdingdownthe
VALUEcontrollerorENTERswitchandplayinga
noteonthekeyboard.
4. Pressthebuttonstomodifythenumberororderof
theindexes,andeditthem.
Todeletetheselectedindex,presstheCutbutton.
TheInsertbuttonisusedinconjunctionwiththe
CutandCopybuttons.Thecontentsoftheindex
thatwasCutorCopiedwillbeinserted.
TheCreatebuttonhasthesamefunctionasthe
CreatebuttoninP0:Recording(seeCreating
multisampleindexesand samplingP0: Recording
onpage 133).
Modifying the settings of an index
1. Makethesettingsdescribedinsteps13of
Editingtheindexes.
2. Setparametersfortheselectedindex.
UseSampletospecifythesamplefortheselected
index.Youcanalsoselectasamplehere.
UseOrig.Key(OriginalKey)tospecifytheoriginal
keyofthesample.
ChangingtheTopKeywillchangetheupperlimit
ofthezone.Simultaneously,thelowerlimitofthe
nextnumberedindexwillalsochange.Range
indicatesthezonedeterminedbytheTopKey
setting.
Leveladjuststheplaybacklevelofthesample.You
canusethistoensurethatallsamplesina
multisamplehaveaconsistentlevel.
IfyoucheckConstantPitch,allnotesintheindex
zonewillsoundthesampleatitsoriginalpitch.
Pitchadjuststhesamplepitchforeachindex.You
canusethePitchBPMAdjustpagemenu
commandtosettheloopintervaltothedesired
tempo.Formoreinformation,seePitchBPM
Adjustonpage 750oftheParameterGuide.
EQ and controllers
TheP4:EQ/Controllerpageletsyouuseamid
sweepablethreebandEQtoadjustthesound.Youcan
alsousethecontrolsurfacetocontroltheEQ.Notethat
thisisfortemporaryuseinSamplingmodeonly;it
doesnotaffectthesampledataitself.
HereyoucanalsoassignthefunctionsofSW1/2,Real
TimeKnobs58,andthenotenumbersandvelocities
playedbypads18.
Sampling from an Audio CD
TheKRONOSallowsyoutoripdigitalaudiodata
fromanaudioCDinsertedinaconnectedUSBCD
drive.Todoso:
1. GototheSamplingP5:AudioCDpage.
PresstheSAMPLINGbutton,andthenpressthe
AudioCDtabintheLCDscreen.
2. InsertanaudioCDintotheconnectedUSBCD
R/RWdrive.
Next,makeafewsettingssothatyoucanmonitor
theCDR/RWDriveAudioInput.Thesesettings
dontaffecttherippingprocessitself.
3. Forboththeleftandrightchannels,setBusSelect
(IFX/Indiv.)toL/R,andLevelto127.
4. SettheleftchannelsPantoL000,andtheright
channelsPantoR127.
5. InDrive(DriveSelect),choosethedrivethat
containstheaudioCD.
6. RaisetheVolume.
7. UseTracktoselectthetrackthatyouwanttorip.
playbacktheaudioCDtrack.
9. Duringplayback,presstheENTERswitchatthe
pointswhereyouwantrippingtobeginandend.
146
ThiswillsetRangeStartandRangeEnd.
IfyoupresstheENTERswitchthreeormoretimes,
RangeStartandRangeEndwillrespectivelybeset
Themethodgivenaboveapplieswhensomething
otherthanRangeStartorRangeEndisselected
(highlighted).
IfRangeStartorRangeEndareselected
(highlighted),thesettingwillbeupdatedeachtime
youpresstheENTERswitch.
IfRangeStartorRangeEndareselected
(highlighted),thisregionwillplayback.
Whenyoufinishmakingsettings,pressthe
SEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitchtostopplayback
oftheaudioCD.
10.Verifytheregionthatwillberipped.
SelecteitherRegionStartorRegionEnd(the
displaywillbehighlighted),andpressthe
SEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitch.TheCDwill
playfromRangeStarttoRangeEndandthenstop.
Ifyouwanttoadjustthelocation,usetheVALUE
controllerstomodifytheRangeStartorRangeEnd
settings,ormovethecursortoaparameterother
thanRangeStartandRangeEndandrepeatstep8
tomakethesettingonceagain.
Ifyouwanttomovethetrackplaybackstart
locationtothebeginningofthetrack,pressthe
LOCATEswitch.
11.WhenyouhavefinishedsettingRangeStartand
RangeEnd,selectthepagemenucommand
Destination.
Specifythedestinationtowhichtherippedsample
willbewritten.
SelectRAMifyouwanttoripthesampleintoRAM
memory.Inthiscase,youcanalsosetSampleNo.
(L),(R)tospecifythesamplenumberthatwillbe
written.Normallyyoucanleavethisunchanged.
SelectDISKifyouwanttoripthesampletomedia.
UseDriveSelecttoselectthedrive,andusethe
OpenandUpbuttonstoselectthedirectoryin
whichthedatawillbesaved.Alsospecifyaname
fortheWAVEfilethatwillbesaved.
12.PresstheOKbuttontoexecuteripping,orpress
theCancelbuttontocancelwithoutexecuting.
WhenyoupresstheOKbutton,theObey
CopyrightRulesdialogboxwillappear.
13.CarefullyreadtheCOPYRIGHTWARNINGin
theQuickStartGuide,andifyouconsenttothe
terms,presstheOKbuttontobeginripping.Ifyou
donotconsenttotheterms,presstheCancel
buttontocanceltheoperation.
Saving, converting to Programs, and Comparing
Saving Samples and Multisamples
AnySamplesandMultisamplesthatyoucreateor
editinSamplingModemustbesavedinDisk
mode,ortheyllgoawaywhenyouturnoffthe
power.ThisisdifferentfromProgramsand
Combinations,whichcanbewrittentomemory.For
moreinformation,seeSometypesofdatamustbe
savedtodiskonpage 186.
TosaveonlytheSamplesandMultisamples,usethe
SaveSampleDatamenucommandontheDiskSave
page.
Ifyouwanttocreateanarchiveofthecurrentsetup,
includinganyPrograms,WaveSequences,orDrum
Kitswhichusethesampledata,werecommendthat
youuseSaveAllinordertoensurethatthesounds
willbereproducedcorrectlythenexttimeyouload
them.
Formoreinformation,seeSavingtodisks,CDs,and
USBmediaonpage 186.
KSC Files and User Sample Banks
KSCstandsforKorgSampleCollection.KSCfilesare
savedtoandloadedfromdisk;theygroupyour
SamplesandMultisamplestogether,andletyouload
themasUserSampleBanks.
UserSampleBanksmaybeloadedeitherintoRAM,or
mayuseVirtualMemory,justlikeEXs.Theyhave
otherbenefitsaswell.Formoreinformation,see
Creatingandsaving.KSCfilesonpage 165.
Converting a Multisample to a Program
InpagesP0:RecordingP4:EQ/Controller,youcanuse
theConvertMSToProgrampagemenucommand.
Whenyouexecutethiscommand,thesettingsofthe
currentlyselectedMultisamplewillbeconvertedintoa
Program.InProgrammodeyoucanmakefilter,amp
andeffectsettingsetc.,andplaythesampleasa
program.TheresultingProgramcanbeusedina
combinationorsong.
IfyouwanttouseaMultisamplecreatedinSampling
modeasaProgram,gototheProgramP2:OSCPitch
pageandselectRAMMonoorRAMstereoastheBank
forOSC1Multisample/WaveSequenceorOSC2
Sampling and editing in Sampling mode Saving, converting to Programs, and Comparing
147
Multisample/WaveSequenceBank(whenTypeisset
toMultisample).Inthiscase,theMultisamplewill
soundaccordingtothesettingsoftheprogram
parameters.
1. UseMultisampleSelect(MS)toselectthe
Multisamplethatyouwanttoconverttoa
Program.
2. ChooseConvertMSToProgramtoopenthe
dialogbox.
3. Pressthetexteditbuttontoopenthetextedit
dialogbox,andinputanewprogramname(upto
24characters).Bydefault,thiswillbethenameof
themultisample.
4. EnableordisableUseDestinationProgram
Parametersasdesired.
UseDestinationProgramParametersunchecked:
Whenyouexecutethecommand,themultisample
ofthedestinationProgramwillbereplacedbythe
multisampleyouselecthere,andtheotherProgram
parameterswillbeinitializedsothatitreproduces
thesoundheardinSamplingmode.
TheprogramwillbeconvertedwithanOscillator
Mode(Program11a)ofSingle.
UseDestinationProgramParameterschecked:
Whenyouexecutethecommand,themultisample
oftheconversiondestinationprogramwillbe
replacedbythemultisampleyouselecthere,butthe
otherprogramparameterswillnotbeinitialized.
Choosethisifyouwanttousetheparameter
settingsofanexistingprogram.
IfyoucheckUseDestinationProgramParameters,
pleasebeawareofthefollowingpoint.
ThedestinationprogramsOscillatorModemustbe
Single.Ifthisisnotthecase,themessageOscillator
Modeconflictswillappearwhenyouattemptto
executethecommand.Tosolvethis,changethe
OscillatorModesettingofthedestinationProgram.
5. UsetheToProgramfieldtospecifythe
conversiondestinationprogram.
WerecommendthatyouuseProgrambanksUSER
GorAAGGforsavingProgramscreatedin
Samplingmode.
6. PresstheOKbuttontoexecute.
7. PressthePROGRAMbuttontoenterProgram
mode,selecttheconvertedprogram,andtryitout.
Compare
InSamplingmode,thereisnoComparefunctionthat
letsyoureturntothestatepriortoediting.
Ifyouwanttopreservethestatepriortoediting,usea
functionsuchasCopySampleorCopyMStocopythe
multisampleorsamplebeforeyoubeginediting.For
moreinformation,seeCopySampleonpage 727of
theParameterGuide,andCopyMS(Copy
Multisample)onpage 729oftheParameterGuide.
InsomeofthepagemenucommandsontheSample
EditandLoopEditpages,youcanexecutewiththe
Overwriteoptionuncheckedinthedialogbox,sothat
thesampledatapriortoeditingwillbepreserved.
148
Sampling in Program and Combination modes
Overview
InadditiontousingSamplemode,youcanalsosample
bothexternalaudiosourcesandinternalsoundsin
Program,Combination,andSequencermodes.
Forinstance,youcanresampleaperformancethatuses
theKRONOSsfullrangeoffeatures,includingfilters,
effects,DrumTrack,andKARMA.Youcaneven
sampleafull,multitimbralsequence,playedeither
fromtheinternalsequenceroranexternalMIDI
sequencer.
YoucanalsosampletheKRONOSsperformance
togetherwithaudiofromanexternalinputsource,or
monitortheperformanceoftheKRONOSsKARMA
functionandsequenceretc.whileyousampleonlythe
externalaudiofromtheinputjacks.
Resampling a KARMA phrase in Program mode
Youcanresamplethesoundofaprogramor
combinationbeingplayedbyyourselforbyKARMA.
Inthisexample,wellexplainhowtosamplea
KARMAgeneratedphraseinProgrammode.Youcan
sampleinasimilarwayinCombinationorSequencer
modesaswell.
mode,andselecttheprogramthatyouwantto
resample.
2. TurnonKARMA(KARMAON/OFFswitchlit),
playthekeyboard,andverifythataphraseis
generated.
3. PresstheAudioIn/SamplingtabtogototheP0:
PlayAudioInput/Samplingpage.
Makethefollowingsettings.
AudioInput
TurnallexternalinputsOff.
RECORDINGLEVEL
RecordingLevel:0.0
SamplingSetup
SourceBus:L/R
ThesoundsenttotheL/Rbuswillberesampled.
Trigger:NoteOn
Samplingwillstartthemomentyouplaythe
keyboard.
Saveto:RAM
SamplingwilloccurtoRAMmemory.
Mode:Stereo
sampledinstereo.
Tip:TheKRONOSwillautomaticallymakethe
abovesettingsforyouifyouexecutetheAuto
SamplingSetupResampleProgramPlaypage
menucommand.Inaddition,itwillalsoassignthe
MultisampletoanewProgramafteryouvefinished
resampling.Formoreinformation,seeAuto
SamplingSetuponpage 149.
4. Adjusttherecordinglevel.
PresstheSAMPLINGRECswitchandusethe
RecordingLevelslidertoadjustthelevel.
PlaywithKARMAturnedon,andusetheVALUE
slidertoadjusttheRecordingLevelsliderashigh
aspossiblewithoutallowingtheCLIP!indication
toappear.
Whenyouvefinishedmakingadjustments,press
theSAMPLINGRECswitch.
PresstheKARMAON/OFFswitchtoturnKARMA
off.
5. Sample.
PresstheKARMAON/OFFswitchtoturniton.
PresstheSAMPLINGRECswitch.
PresstheSAMPLINGSTART/STOPswitchtoput
Playthekeyboard.
Recordingwillstartthemomentyouplaythe
keyboard.
Whilerecordingcontinues,allthesoundyou
produceusingthekeyboardorcontrollerswillbe
recorded.
PresstheSAMPLINGSTART/STOPswitchtostop
recording.
6. Listentothesoundyouresampled.
GototheSamplingP0:RecordingRecordingpage.
PresstheSAMPLINGbutton,thentheEXITswitch,
andthentheRecordingtabintheupperlineofthe
LCDscreen.
UseMultisampleSelecttoselectthemultisample
thatyouresampled.
PlaytheC2keytoheartheresampledsound.
7. Ifyouwanttoconvertthismultisampleintoa
program,choosetheConvertMSToProgram
pagemenucommand,selectthedesiredprogram,
andexecutetheconversion.
Formoreinformation,seeConvertinga
MultisampletoaProgramonpage 146.
Sampling in Program and Combination modes Auto Sampling Setup
149
Auto Sampling Setup
TheKRONOSprovidesalotofflexibilityin
samplingwhichmeansthattherearesometimesalot
ofparameterstobesetup.TheAutoSamplingSetup
menucommandprovidesshortcutstosetupallofthe
parametersforvariouscommonsamplingtasks,
includingresampling,samplingfromtheaudioinputs,
andrestoringinitializedsettings.
InthisexamplewellexplainhowyoucanuseAuto
SamplingSetuptomakethesettingsdescribedunder
ResamplingaKARMAphraseinProgrammodeon
page 148.
1. Carryoutsteps1and2ofResamplingaKARMA
phraseinProgrammodeonpage 148.
2. PresstheAudioInput/Samplingtabtogotothe
P0:PlayAudioInput/Samplingpage.
3. ChoosetheAutoSamplingSetuppagemenu
command.Adialogboxwillopen.
4. Makethefollowingsettingsinthedialogbox.
ResampleProgramPlay:On
Thismakestheappropriatesettingsforresampling
yourplayingonaprogram.
Saveto:RAM
TheresampleddatawillbewrittenintoRAM
memory.
ConverttoProgram:On
Program:asdesired
Afterresampling,thedatawillautomaticallybe
convertedintotheprogramnumberyouspecifiedin
Program.
TheKRONOSwillmaketheappropriatesettingsfor
resampling.
6. Resampleyourplayingasdescribedinsteps4and
5oftheprecedingsection.
7. Listentothesoundyouresampled.
GototheProgramP0:PlayMainpage.Pressthe
PROGRAMbutton,thentheEXITswitch,andthen
theMaintabintheupperlineoftheLCDscreen.
SelecttheprogramyouspecifiedforProgramin
thedialogbox.
PlaytheC2keyandyouwillhearthesoundyou
resampled.
Mixing a KARMA drum phrase with a live guitar input, and sampling
the result
HereshowyoucanresampleKARMAtogetherwith
anexternalaudioinputsource.
Inthisexample,wewillexplainhowaguitar
connectedtotheAUDIOINPUTjackcanbeplayed
alongtoadrumphraseplayedbytheKRONOS,and
howbothcanbesampledtogether.
Samplingcanbeperformedinasimilarwayin
CombinationandSequencermodesaswellasin
Programmode.
mode,andselectthedrumprogramthatyouwant
toresample.
2. TurnKARMAon(KARMAON/OFFswitchlit),
playthekeyboard,andverifythatthedrum
phraseplays.
TurnLATCHon.PresstheLATCHswitchtomakeit
light.
Alsoadjustthetempoqasdesired.
3. PresstheKARMAON/OFFswitchtoturnoff
KARMA.
INPUT1jack.
ataboutthecenter.
routedthroughapreamporaneffectunit.
5. PresstheAudioIn/SamplingtabtogototheP0:
PlayAudioInput/Samplingpage.
Makethefollowingsettings.
AudioInput
INPUT1
BusSelect(IFX/Indiv.):L/R
Pan:asdesired
Level:127
RECBus:Off
TheinputfromAUDIOINPUT1willbesenttothe
L/Rbus.
LINE
Guitar
Efect unit
150
RECORDINGLEVEL
RecordingLevel:0.0
SamplingSetup
SourceBus:L/R
ThesoundsenttotheL/Rbuswillbesampled.
standbymode.ThenpresstheSAMPLING
START/STOPswitchtostartsampling.
MetronomePrecount:4
WhenyoupresstheSAMPLINGRECswitchto
enterrecordstandbymodeandthenpressthe
SAMPLINGSTART/STOPswitchtostartsampling,
afourbeatcountwillsound,andthenrecording
willbegin.(Themetronomewillnotsoundduring
recording.)
Saveto:RAM
ThesamplewillberecordedtoRAMmemory.
Mode:Stereo
sampledinstereo.
MetronomeSetup
Bus(Output)Select:L/R
Level:asdesired
TheoutputofthemetronomewillbesenttotheL/R
bus.
6. Playyourguitaratthevolumethatyouwillbe
recording.
IfthedisplayindicatesADCOVERLOAD!(AD
converterinputoverload),turntherearpanel
[LEVEL]knobtowardMINtoadjustthelevel
appropriately.
Thebestaudioqualitywillbeobtainedatthe
highestpossiblelevelthatdoesnotcausean
overload;i.e.,alevelthatisslightlybelowthepoint
whereADCOVERLOAD!isdisplayed.
7. PresstheSAMPLINGRECswitch.
Playyourguitar,andthelevelmeterwillindicate
thevolumeatwhichtheguitarwillbesampled.
PresstheKARMAON/OFFswitchtoturniton,
playthekeyboardtostartthedrumphrase,and
playyourguitarwhileadjustingthefinalvolume.
controllertolowertheRecordingLevelslider
(locatedintherightsideofthedisplay)below+0.0
toanappropriatelevel.
Ifthebalancebetweeninstrumentsisnottoyour
liking,usetheLEVELknobortheperformance
editorAmpLeveltoadjustthebalance.
8. Whenyouhavefinishedmakingadjustments,
presstheSAMPLINGRECswitch.
PresstheKARMAON/OFFswitchtoturnoff
KARMA.
9. PresstheKARMAON/OFFswitchtoturniton,
andthenpresstheSAMPLINGRECswitchto
enterrecordreadymode.
WhenyoupresstheSAMPLINGSTART/STOP
switch,acountdownwillbegin.Playthekeyboard
duringthecountdown.
Afterafourbeatcountdown,recordingwillstart.
Playyourguitar.KARMAwillalsostartafterthe
countdown.
10.PresstheSAMPLINGSTART/STOPswitchtostop
recording.
11.PresstheKARMAON/OFFswitchtoturnitoff.
12.Listentothesoundthatwassampled.
GototheSamplingP0:RecordingRecordingpage.
PresstheSAMPLINGbutton,thentheEXITswitch,
andthentheRecordingtabintheupperlineofthe
LCDscreen.
UseMultisampleSelecttoselectthemultisample
thatyouresampled.
PlaytheC2key,andyouwillhearthesoundthat
wasresampled.
13.Ifyouwanttoconvertthismultisampleintoa
program,choosetheConvertMSToProgram
pagemenucommand,selectthedesiredprogram,
andexecute.(SeeConvertingaMultisampletoa
Programonpage 146)
Sampling a guitar from the audio inputs, while listening to a KARMA
drum phrase
Herewellexplainhowyoucansamplejustthesound
ofanexternalinputsourcewhilelisteningtoa
performancegeneratedbyKARMA.
Youcandothisbymodifyingthesettingsinstep5of
theprecedingMixingaKARMAgenerateddrum
phrasetochangethemasfollows.
INPUT1
RECBus:1
TheinputfromAUDIOINPUT1willbesenttoREC
bus1.
SamplingSetup
SourceBus:REC1/2
ThesoundsenttoRECbus1/2willbesampled.The
soundoftheinternaltonegeneratorsenttotheL/R
buswillnotbesampled.
Mode:LMono
ThesoundoftheinternalLchannelwillbesampled
inmonaural.
Modifythesettingsasshownabove,sampleyour
playing,andthenlistentothesample.
Sampling in Sequencer mode In-Track Sampling
151
Sampling in Sequencer mode
InSequencermode,youcansamplejustlikein
ProgramandCombinationmodes,buttheresan
additionaloptionuniquetoSequencermode:InTrack
Sampling.
InTrackSamplingletsyousampleanaudiosource
thatsbeingplayedalongwiththesong.Duringthe
samplingprocess,thesystemwillautomaticallycreate
aProgramtoholdthenewsample,andMIDInotesto
playitinsyncwiththesong.Youmightusethisto
recordavocalorguitarpart,forinstance.
In-Track Sampling
Inthisexample,wellshowthesoundofaguitar
connectedtotheAUDIOINPUT1jackcanbeaddedto
yoursong.
1. InSequencermode,selectthesongtowhichyou
wanttoaddtheguitarsound.
Youcaneithercreateasong,oruseDiskmodeto
loadapreviouslycreatedsong.
INPUT1jack.
ataboutthecenter.
routedthroughapreamporaneffectunit.
3. GototheSequencerP0:Play/RECAudio
Input/Samplingpage.
4. WewillbemodifyingtheAudioInputsettings,so
turntheInputUseGlobalSettingoff.
5. ChoosetheAutoHDR/SamplingSetuppagemenu
command.
Thedialogboxwillappear.
6. ChooseInTrackSampling.
7. MakethefollowingsettingsforInTrack
Sampling.
SourceAudio:AudioInput1/2
TheinputfromtheAUDIOINPUT1and2jacks
willbesampled.
MonoL/MonoR/Stereo:MonoL
Thesoundwillbesampledinmono.
To:asdesired
ThetrackyouwanttouseforInTrackSampling.
MIDInotedatatotriggerthesamplewillbe
recordedinthetrackyouselected.
Program:asdesired
Theconvertdestinationprogramnumber.When
samplingiscompleted,anewmultisamplewillbe
automaticallycreated,convertedtoaprogram,and
assignedastheprogramforthetrack.
PreparationsforInTrackSamplingarenow
completed.
Letstakealookatthesettingsthatweremade.
AudioInput
INPUT1
Pan:L000
Level:127
RECBus:1/2
TheinputfromAUDIOINPUT1willbesenttoREC
bus.
RECORDINGLEVEL
RecordingLevel:0.0
Thisisthedefaultsettingforsampling.
SamplingSetup
SourceBus:REC1/2
ThesoundsenttoREC1/2buswillbesampled.
standbymode.ThenpresstheSAMPLING
START/STOPswitchtostartsampling.
Saveto:RAM
ThesamplewillberecordedtoRAMmemory.
Mode:LMono
Thesoundoftheinternalleftchannelwillbe
sampledinmono.
9. Forthisexample,changethesettingsasfollows.
Pan:C64
Trigger:Threshold,ThresholdLevel:asdesired
SampleTime:asdesired
152
10.Playyourguitaratthevolumethatyouwillbe
recording.
IfthedisplayindicatesADCOVERLOAD!(AD
converterinputoverload),turntherearpanel
[LEVEL]knobtowardMINtoadjustthelevel
appropriately.
indicationtoappear.
Whenyouplayyourguitar,thelevelmeterwill
indicatethevolumeatwhichtheguitarwillbe
sampled.
IfthedisplayindicatesCLIP!,usetheVALUE
controllerstolowertheRecordingLevelslider(in
therightofthedisplay)below+0.0toan
appropriatelevel.
12.Whenyouhavefinishedmakingadjustments,
presstheSAMPLINGRECswitch.
13.PresstheSAMPLINGRECswitch,andthenthe
SAMPLINGSTART/STOPswitchtoenter
recordingstandbymode.
PresstheLOCATEswitchtoresetthesongplayback
locationtothebeginningofthesong,andpressthe
SEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitchtoplayback.
Beginplayingatthepointwhereyouwantto
record.
SamplingwillbeginwhentheThresholdLevel
volumeisexceeded.
14.Atthepointwhereyouwanttostopsampling,
presstheSEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitch.
Songplaybackandsamplingwillend.
SamplingwillalsostopifthespecifiedSample
Timeisreached.
15.PresstheLOCATEswitchtoreturntothe
beginningofthesong,andpresstheSEQUENCER
START/STOPswitch.Noticethatthesampled
audioisplayedbackalongwiththesong.
FordetailsonhowtheComparefunctionworksfor
InTrackSampling,refertoInTrackSamplingon
page 151.
Resampling a song to create a Wave file
YoucanrecordacompletedSongtoastereoWAVE
file,andthenburnthatWAVEfiletoanaudioCD
usingaconnectedUSBCDR/RWdrive.Formore
information,seeCreatingandplayingaudioCDson
page 195.
1. InSequencermode,selectthesongfromwhich
youwanttocreateaWAVEfile.
Eithercreateasong,oruseDiskmodetoloada
previouslycreatedsong.
Amaximumof80minutesforeithermonoorstereo
canbewrittentomediainonesamplingoperation
(mono:approximately440MB,stereo:
approximately879MB).
2. GototheSequencerP0:Play/RECAudio
Input/Samplingpage.
3. WewillbemodifyingtheAudioInputsettings,so
turntheInputUseGlobalSettingoff.
4. ChoosetheAutoHDR/SamplingSetuppagemenu
command.
TheAutoHDR/SamplingSetupdialogboxwill
appear.
5. Choose2chMixtoDisk.
PreparationsforInTrackSamplingarenow
complete.
AudioInput
INPUT1&2,USB1&2,S/P DIFL&R
RECBus:Off
Turnoffthebussesforallsixaudioinputs.
RECORDINGLEVEL
RecordingLevel:0.0
SamplingSetup
SourceBus:L/R
ThesoundsenttoL/Rbuswillbesampled.
Sampling in Sequencer mode Resampling a song to create a Wave file
153
Trigger:SequencerSTARTSW
PresstheSAMPLINGRECswitchandSTART/STOP
switchtoenterrecordstandbymode.Thenpress
theSEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitchtostart
recording.
Saveto:Disk
Thesamplewillbesavedtothedisk,directory,and
filenamespecifiedinSelectDirectory/Filefor
SampletoDisk.
Mode:Stereo
sampledinstereo.
7. UsethepagemenucommandSelectDirectory/File
forSampletoDisktosetthedisk.directory,and
filenamefortheWAVEfile.
UseDriveSelectandtheOpenandUpbuttonsto
selectthedirectoryinwhichtheWAVEfilewillbe
saved.
Pressthetexteditbuttontogotothetexteditdialog
box,andenterafilename.
LeaveTakeNo.checked.Thenumberattherightof
TakeNo.willbeinputasthelasttwocharactersof
thefilename.
Thisnumberwillincrementeachtimeyousample,
ensuringthatthefilenamewillnotbethesameeven
ifyousamplerepeatedly.
Afteryouhavemadethesettings,presstheDone
buttontoclosethedialogbox.
8. SetSampleTimetothelengththatyouwantto
sample.
Setthistoavalueslightlygreaterthanthelengthof
thesong.
9. SettheSampletoDiskparametertothedesired
bitdepth.
Youcansampletodiskateither16bitor24bit
resolution.
10.Settherecordinglevel.
PresstheSAMPLINGRECswitch.
Note:Itwilltakebetweenseveralsecondstonearlya
minutefromthemomentyoupresstheSAMPLING
RECswitchuntiltheKRONOSentersstandbymode
(i.e.,untiltheSAMPLINGRECswitchchangesfrom
blinkingtolit).Thistimeisrequiredinorderto
allocatesufficientspaceonthedisk.
backthesong,andadjustthesamplingvolume
whileyouwatchthelevelmeters.Thedefault
settingis0.0dB.Ifthelevelistoolow,usethe
VALUEcontrollertoraisethelevelashighas
possiblewithoutcausingtheCLIP!indicatorto
appear.
Whenyoufinishmakingadjustments,pressthe
SAMPLINGRECswitch.
PresstheSEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitchtostop
thesongplayback.ThenpresstheLOCATEswitch.
11.Startsampling.
PresstheSAMPLINGRECswitchandthenthe
SAMPLINGSTART/STOPswitchtoenter
recordingstandbymode.
backthesong.Samplingwillbeginatthesametime.
Whenthesongfinishesplayingback,pressthe
SAMPLINGSTART/STOPswitchtostopsampling.
UsethepagemenucommandSelectDirectory/File
forSampletoDisktoverifythattheWAVEfilewas
created.SelectthefileandpresstheSAMPLING
START/STOPswitchtolistentothesoundthatwas
sampled.
154
User Sample Banks
Overview
ownsamplelibraries.Youcanloadandplaygigabytes
ofyourcustomorconvertedsamplesatonce,using
VirtualMemory.Diskandmemorymanagementis
easy:youcancreatesubsetsofUserSampleBanks,and
mixandmatchpartsofdifferentbanks,without
duplicatingsamplesondisk.
Itsalsoeasytosharesoundswithfriendsand
collaborators,sinceProgramsmaintainlinkstoUser
SampleBanksevenwhensamplesaremovedondisk
orloadedontodifferentsystems.
Sampling Mode and User Sample Banks
SamplingModeandUserSampleBanksaretwo
differentwaystoworkwithyoursampledata,andyou
canswitchbackandforthbetweenthetwoas
necessary.
SamplingModeletsyoucreateandeditSamplesand
Multisamples.However,itdoesnthaveaccessto
VirtualMemory.WhenloadedasaUserSampleBank,
thesamplesaremorelikeEXs;theycanaccessVirtual
Memory,buttheycantbeedited.
UseSamplingModetocreateandedityour
SamplesandMultisamples,ortoimportsounds
fromAkaiandSoundFont2.0formats.
Whenyouredoneediting,loadthedataasaUser
SampleBankinordertoaccessVirtualMemory.
Atanytime,youcanloadthesampledatainto
SamplingModeagain,toedittheexistingdataor
addmoreSamplesorMultisamples.
Programs,WaveSequences,andDrumKitswill
rememberwhichMultisamplesandSamplestheyuse,
regardlessofwhetherthedataisloadedintoSampling
ModeorasaUserSampleBank.(Formore
information,seeUserSampleBankIDsonpage 156.)
.KSC files
KSCstandsforKorgSampleCollection..KSCfiles
containlinkstoSamplingMode,EXs,and/orUser
SampleBankdata,includingMultisamples,Samples,
andDrumSamples.Loadinga.KSCfileloadsallofthe
linkeddata.
Ifa.KSCincludeslinkstoSamplingModedata,other
.KSCfilescanlinktothat.KSCasaUserSampleBank.
Formoreinformation,seeCreatingandsaving.KSC
filesonpage 165.
Freeing up space in RAM
TocreateandeditdataforUserSampleBanks,youll
useSamplingMode.Ifyoureworkingwithavery
largesetofsamples,youmaywishtofreeupRAMby
temporarilyunloadingallothersampledata.
Important:thiswillclearalldatafromSampling
Mode,aswellasunloadingallEXsandUserSample
Bankdata.Ifyouhaveanyunsavededitstodatain
SamplingMode,makesurethatyousavetodisk
beforeproceeding!
TofreeallRAMforusebySamplingMode:
1. GotheKSCAutoLoadpage.
2. UncheckallselectedKSCfiles.
3. PresstheDoAutoLoadNowbutton.
Aconfirmationdialogappears.
4. PressOKtoconfirm.
Allsampledatawillbeunloaded,exceptfortheROM
banks.
Saving User Sample Banks
SavingaKSCfilewhichincludesSamplingModedata
automaticallycreatesaUserSampleBank.Todoso:
1. CreateyourownsetofsamplesinSampling
Mode,loadpreviouslycreatedsamples,orload
samplesfromAkaiorSoundFont2.0formats.
2. InDiskmode,gototheSavepage.
3. Selecttheinternaldisk(ifyouhavetwointernal
disksinstalled,selecteitherone).
YoucanalsosavetoaUSBstoragedevice,butinorder
toworkasaUserSampleBank,thefilesmustbeonan
internalSSD.
4. Inthemenu,selecttheSaveSamplingData
command.
5. SettheIncludeparametertoSamplingModeData.
ThissaveseverythingfromSamplingMode,andkeeps
theKSCfilecleanbynotsavinglinkstoEXsorother
UserSampleBanks.
6. SetSamplingModeDataOptionstoAll.
7. GivetheKSCfileadescriptivename.
8. PressOKtosavethefile.
Thatsit!YouvenowsavedaUserSampleBanktothe
disk.Touseit,youllneedtoloaditasdescribedbelow.
Saving creates two KSC files
WhenyousaveaKSCwhichincludesSamplingMode
data,twoKSCfilesarecreated:
AKSCwiththenameyouvespecified,which
includestheactualSamplesandMultisamplesfrom
SamplingMode.
AsecondKSCwhichincludeslinkstothefirst
KSCsSamplingModeData,withLoadMethodset
toVirtualMemory.ThenameforthisKSCisthe
nameyouvespecifiedfollowedbythetext
User Sample Banks Resampling a song to create a Wave file
155
_UserBank.Forinstance,ifthefirstKSCisnamed
BillGig.KSC,thesecondwillbe
BillGig_UserBank.KSC.Thisisthefilethatyoull
loadtoaccessthesampledataasaUserSample
Bank.
BothfilesmaycontainreferencestootherEXsorUser
SampleBanks,dependingonthesettingoftheInclude
parameterintheSavedialog.
Loading User Sample Banks
Oncesavedtodisk,UserSampleBankscanbeused
muchlikeEXs.ToloadaUserSampleBank:
1. GotothefolderinwhichyouvesavedyourKSC
fromSavingUserSampleBanks,above.
2. Selectthe[name]UserBank.KSCfile.
3. PresstheLoadbutton.
TheLoadKSCdialogwillappear.
4. IfyouvejustsavedtheKSCthatyouwanttoload,
set.KSCAllocationtoClearSamplingModeData.
ThiswillunloadthedatafromSamplingMode.Data
inUserSampleBankscanbeloadedeitherinto
SamplingMode(forediting),orasaUserSampleBank
(forplaybackwithVirtualMemory),butnotbothat
thesametime.
5. Fornow,leavetheLoadMethodsettothedefault
of.KSCSetting.
Theautomaticallycreated[name]_UserBank.KSCfile
willbesettouseVirtualMemory.
6. PressOKtoloadtheUserSampleBank.
Thatsit!AnyPrograms,WaveSequences,orDrum
KitswhichusedthedatafromSamplingModewill
automaticallyusethesamedatafromtheUserSample
Bank.
YoucanalsousetheKSCAutoLoadsettingstoloadit
automaticallyatstartup,asdescribedin
Automaticallyloadingsampledataonpage 164.
Editing User Sample Banks
Atanytime,youcanloadaUserSampleBanksdata
intoSamplingModeandedittheSamplesor
Multisamplesasdesired,oraddnewSamplesor
Multisamples.Todoso:
1. GotothefolderinwhichyouvesavedyourKSC
fromSavingUserSampleBanks,above.
2. Selectthe[name].KSCfiletheonewithout
UserBankinthename.
TheLoadKSCdialogwillappear.
4. Set.KSCAllocationtoClearSamplingModeData.
Thisisimportant,inordertopreservetheUserSample
BankID.Formoreinformation,seeUserSampleBank
IDs,below.
5. PressOKtoloadthedata.
6. Editasdesired,butdontchangethenumberingof
existingMultisamples(orSamples,ifyouveused
themforDrumKits).Ifyouaddnew
MultisamplesorSamples,addthemattheendof
thelist.
Programs,WaveSequences,andDrumKitsreferto
MultisamplesandSamplesbytheirnumberinthe
bank.Tomakesurethatexistingsoundscontinueto
workproperly,keepthatnumberingthesame.
7. SavetheKSC.
Fordetails,seeSavingUserSampleBanks,above.
Converting older sounds
OlderPCGandKSCfileswillcontinuetoworkjustas
theydidpreviously:RAMsampledatawillloadinto
SamplingMode,andPrograms,WaveSequences,and
DrumKitswillplaythatsampledata.UserSample
Banksoffermanyadvantages,however,anditseasyto
convertyouroldPCGsandKSCswithRAMsamples
tothenewformat.Todoso:
1. LoadtheoldformatKSCfile,andthePCG(s)
whichusetheKSCssamples.
2. FollowalloftheinstructionsunderSavingUser
SampleBanksonpage 154.
3. GotoProgramMode,andselectaProgramwhich
usestheKSCssamples.
4. IfitsanHD1Program,gototheP2:OSC/Pitch
page;forSTR1orMOD7Programs,gotothe
PCMOscpage.
5. Openthemenu,andselecttheRemap/MSSample
Bankscommand.
TheRemap/MSSampleBanksdialogappears.
6. SettheInparameterappropriately.
156
IfalloftheloadedsoundsusejustthisoneKSC,select
AllPrograms,WaveSequences,andDrumKits.
IfoneentirebankusesjustthisKSC,butotherbanks
usedifferentKSCs,selecttheappropriatebank.
IfsoundswithinasinglebankusemultipleKSCs,
selecttheCurrentProgramoption.Forinstance,some
userskeepallsamplerelatedProgramsinBankUSER
G,butProgram000usesFriday.KSC,Program001uses
Saturday.KSC,andsoon.TheCurrentProgramoption
letsyoudealwitheachProgramindividually.There
aresimilarcommandsforindividualWaveSequences
andDrumKits.
7. SettheFromparametertoSmp:OldRAM.
8. SettheToparametertoSmp:[filename],
matchingthenewnamefortheKSC.
Thisisthenameyoucreatedinstep7underSaving
UserSampleBanksonpage 154.
9. PressOK.
AllreferencestotheoldRAMbankwillbechangedto
usethenewUserSampleBank.
10.IfyouusedtheCurrentProgramoption,repeat
theindividualremappingsasnecessary.
11.SaveaPCGfilewiththenewlyconverted
Program,WaveSequence,andDrumKitdata.
User Sample Bank IDs
Underthehood,theKRONOSkeepstrackofUser
SampleBanksbyaspecialIDsavedintheKSCfile.
ThisletsthesystemfindandrecognizetheUser
SampleBankifyouchangethenameorlocationonthe
disk,andevenifitsusedonanotherKRONOS
altogether.
AnIDisinitiallyassignedwhenthesamplesare
createdinSamplingMode.ThisIDstayswiththedata
aslongasyouloadandsaveusingKSCsevenifyou
savetoadifferentlocation,orwithadifferentname.It
alsostayswiththedataregardlessofwhetherits
loadedasaUserSampleBank,orloadedinto
SamplingModeforediting.
Itwillnotbepreserved,however,ifyouloadorsave
individualSamplesorMultisamples.
Iftherearemultiplefilesoninternaldiskswiththe
sameID,theonewiththemostrecentmodification
dateonewillbeused.KSCsonUSBstoragedevicesare
ignoredforthispurpose.
WhenyoulookatthebanknameinPrograms,Drum
Kits,andWaveSequences,youllseethefullfilepath
oftheassociatedKSCfile.
What triggers a change to the User Sample Bank
ID?
SamplingModeisgivenanewIDunderthefollowing
circumstances:
Atsystemstartup
IftheClearSamplingModeDataoptionisused
whenloadingaKSCwhichdoesnotinclude
SamplingModedata.
WhentheGlobalSampleManagementpages
UnloadAllcommandisusedforSamplingMode
Data
WhentheGlobalKSCAutoLoadpagesDoAuto
loadNowcommandisused(unlessoneoftheauto
loadedfilesincludesSamplingModeData,as
describedbelow)
Onsave,ifForcenewUserSampleBankIDis
selected(seeForcenewUserSampleBankID,
below)
SamplingModeassumestheIDofanexistingKSC
underthefollowingcircumstances:
WhenaKSCwithSamplingModedataisloaded
usingtheClearSamplingModeDataorClearAll
options,orwhenSamplingModehasnotbeenused
sincestartup
Similartotheabove,butwhenloadingtheentire
folderofSamplingModedatawhenbrowsing
withinaKSC
SamplingModekeepsitscurrentIDunderthe
followingcircumstances:
IfSamplingModehasbeenusedsincestartup,and
aKSCisloadedintoSamplingModewith
allocationsettoAppend
WhenindividualSamplesand/orMultisamplesare
loaded
Force new User Sample Bank ID
ThisoptionisavailableintheSaveSamplingData
dialog,butnotintheSaveAlldialog.Itshouldbeused
onlyinspecialcases.
Forinstance,youmightuseForcenewUserSample
BankIDifyouhaveloadedaUserSampleBank,
editeditsubstantially,andwishtosavetheresultasa
totallynewUserSampleBank.Afterdoingso,youll
alsoneedtousetheRemapMS/SampleBank
ReferencesmenucommandtoassignPrograms,Wave
Sequences,orDrumKitstousethenewbankinstead
oftheoldone.
Limitations: KARMA Wave Sequencing
and Tone Adjust
KARMA Wave Sequencing
Duetotechnicallimitations,KARMAWave
SequencingselectionofMultisampleandDrum
SampleBankssupportsonlyROM,thecurrent
SamplingModedata,andEXs1EXs125.
IfyouneedtouseKARMAWaveSequencingwith
yourownsampledata,youmustloaditintoSampling
Mode.
Tone Adjust MS Bank
Similarly,theToneAdjustMSBankmetaparameter
supportsonlyROM,thecurrentSamplingModedata,
andEXs1EXs125.ToneAdjustMS/WS/DKitSelect
canstillbeusedtoselectdifferentMultisamplesor
DrumSamplesfromwithinthecurrentbank,
includingEXsabove125andUserSampleBanks,as
longasMSBankisnotused.
157
Global Settings, Wave Seq., Drum Kits
Global mode overview
InGlobalmodeyoucanmakeoverallsettingsthat
applytotheentireKRONOS,suchasmastertune,key
transpose,effectglobalswitch,globalMIDIchannel,
andsystemclock.
Inaddition,youcancreateuserDrumKits,Wave
Sequence,andScales,makesettingsforthedamper
pedalandassignablefootswitches/pedals,andspecify
categorynamesforprogramsandcombinations.
Globalmodepagestructure
Note:Fordetailsonhowtoaccesseachmodeandpage,
pleaseseeBasicoperationsonpage 17.
To save changes, you must use the Write
command
EditstoGlobalmodeparameterswillnotbe
preservedafterthepoweristurnedoffunlessyou
firstsaveyoursettings.Threetypesofdataare
handledinGlobalmode:WaveSequences(Global
P4),userDrumKits(GlobalP5),andallotherglobal
settings(GlobalP0P3).Eachtypeofdataisstored
separately,andcanalsobesavedtointernalor
externaldrivesinDiskmode.
Formoreinformation,seeWritingGlobalsettings
onpage 185,Savingtodisks,CDs,andUSB
mediaonpage 186.
NotethatComparecantbeusedinGlobalmode,
exceptwheneditingWaveSequencesandDrum
Kits.
Page Features
P0: Basic Setup
Basic settings for the entire KRONOS
Sample management
P1: MIDI
MIDI settings for the entire KRONOS
MIDI controller settings in External mode
P2: Controllers
/Scales
Footswitch and pedal setup
MIDI settings for the KARMA sliders,
on-screen pads, and VJS
User scales
P3: Category
Name
Edit category/sub category names for
Programs, Combinations and KARMA
P4: Wave
Sequence
Edit Wave Sequences
P5: Drum Kit Edit Drum Kits
P6: Options Info
View system information
Authorize options
158
Global Settings
Basic Setup
Tuning and Transposing
Tuning to another instrument
Toadjustthetuninginfineincrements,inorderto
matchotherinstrumentsorrecordedmusic:
2. PresstheBasictabtogototheBasicSetuppage.
3. AdjusttheMasterTunetothedesiredpitch.
TheMasterTuneisadjustableoverarangeof50cents
(onesemitone=100cents).WhenMasterTuneisat0,
middleAistunedto440Hz.
Transposing the keyboard
Youcanalsotransposethekeyboardinsemitones,for
quickkeychanges(forinstance,ifthebanddecidesto
playasonginFratherthanE).Todoso:
1. InGlobalmode,gototheBasicSetuppage.
2. AdjusttheKeyTransposeasdesired.
Youcanadjustthetranspositionoverarangeof1
octave.
3. IfyoureusingMIDIortheinternalsequencer,
presstheMIDItabtogotothemainMIDIpage.
4. SettheConvertPositionaccordingtowhetheror
notyoureusinganexternalMIDIcontrollerto
playtheKRONOS.
PreMIDIisthenormalsetting.Thisappliesthe
transposition(aswellasthevelocityandaftertouch
curves,describedbelow)tobothMIDIoutputfromthe
KRONOSkeyboard,andtheinternalsounds.Thisis
alsorequiredinordertorecordtheoutputofthe
curvesintotheinternalsequencer.
PostMIDIappliesthetranspositionandcurvesto
incomingMIDI,foradjustingtheKRONOSresponse
toanexternalMIDIcontroller.
Whensimplyplayingtheinternalsoundsfromthe
KRONOSkeyboard,bothsettingsworkthesame.
Velocity and after touch curves:
adjusting the keyboard response
Velocityandaftertouchcurvesletyouadjusttheway
theKRONOSrespondstohowyouplayonthe
keyboard.Thedefaultsettingsshouldworkformost
players,buttherearemanyotherchoicestoletyou
customizetheresponsetomatchyourownstyle.
Tosetthevelocityandaftertouchcurves:
1. IfyoureusingMIDIortheinternalsequencer,
presstheMIDItabtogotothemainMIDIpage.
2. SettheConvertPositionaccordingtowhetheror
notyoureusinganexternalMIDIcontrollerto
playtheKRONOS.
SeeTransposingthekeyboard,above,fordetailson
ConvertPosition.
3. PresstheBasictabtogototheBasicSetuppage.
4. SettheVelocityCurvetosuityourplayingstyle.
VelocityCurve4isthedefault,andshouldworkfor
mostplayers.
Curve9isdesignedspecificallyforplayingpiano
soundsfromtheweightedRH3keyboardsinthe73
noteand88notemodels.
Fordetailsontheothercurves,seethegraphicbelow,
aswellasVelocityCurveonpage 754ofthe
ParameterGuide.
Velocitycurves
5. SettheAfterTouchCurvetosuityourplaying
style.
AfterTouchCurve3isthedefault,andshouldwork
formostplayers.
Curve1requiresgreateramountsofpressure,while
Curve5produceseffectswithonlylightpressure.
Curves68areforspecialpurposes;formoredetails,
seeAfterTouchCurveonpage 754oftheParameter
Guide.
AfterTouchcurves
Bypassing the effects
Inserteffects,mastereffects,andtotaleffectscanbe
bypassedglobally.ThisappliestotheentireKRONOS
regardlessofthemode.Forexample,ifyouve
connectedtheKRONOSsoutputstoanexternalmixer
1
MAX
127
1
8
6
5
4
3
2
7
Soft
127
Strong
1
1
2
3
8
6
5
4
7
Curve 4
Curve 19
Curve 19
Pre
Global Convert Position
Keyboard
MIDI
Curve 4
Sound
Post
9
9
Velocity (MIDI In to sound engines) Velocity (Keyboard to MIDI Out)
Convert Position = PostMIDI Convert Position = PreMIDI
Velocity
efect
Received Table Transmitted Table
3
4
5
7
2
1
6
Soft
127
Strong
0
8:RANDOM
1
0
MAX
127
3
4
5
7
2
6
8:RANDOM
For a setting of PreMIDI
After Touch (KBDMIDI Out)
For a setting of PostMIDI
Aftertouch
effect
After Touch (MIDI InTG)
Global Settings Basic Setup
159
andareusinganexternaleffectprocessortoapply
reverborchorustothesound,youcanturnoffthe
KRONOSsmastereffectsandtotaleffects.
IftheEffectGlobalSWIFX112Off,MFX1&2Off,
andTFX1&2Offitemsarechecked,theinserteffects,
mastereffect,willrespectivelybebypassed.
Linking KARMA to Programs and
Combinations
YoucanspecifywhethertheKARMAsettingswritten
toaprogramorcombinationwillalsobeselectedwhen
youselectthatprogramorcombination,orwhetherthe
KARMAsettingswillnotchangewhenyouswitchthe
programorcombination.
WhentheKRONOSisshippedfromthefactory,the
formersettingisselected.Youcanusethelattersetting
ifyouwanttousethesameKARMAsettingsto
generatephrasesandpatternswhileyouselectandtry
outdifferentprogramsandcombinations.
IftheLoadKARMASettingsWhenChanging
ProgramorCombinationboxesareselected,selecting
aprogramorcombinationrespectivelywillalsoselect
theKARMAsettingsthatarewritteninthatprogram
orcombination.
Globally disabling KARMA and the
Drum Track
IfAllKARMA/DTOffischecked,allKARMAand
DrumTrackfunctionalitywillbeturnedoff.KARMA
willnotstarteveniftheKARMAON/OFFswitchison,
andtheDrumTrackwillnotstarteveniftheDRUM
TRACKON/OFFswitchison.
Recalling the last-selected mode and
page at power-on
ThestateofKRONOSwhenthepoweristurnedon
willdependonthesettingofPowerOnMode.
IfPowerOnModeissettoReset(factorysetting),
KRONOSwillautomaticallyselecttheSetListmode
P0:Playpage.
IfPowerOnModeissettoMemorize,KRONOSwill
poweronusingthesamemodeandpagethatwere
selectedwhenthepowerwasturnedoff.
Sounding a beep when you press the LCD
screen
IfBeepEnableisselected,abeepwillsoundwhenyou
pressanobjectintheLCDscreen.Uncheckthisitemif
youdontwantabeeptosound.
Protecting the memory
IfoneormoreoftheMemoryProtectcheckboxesare
checked,operationssuchaswriting,loading,orsong
recordingwillbeprohibitedforthecorresponding
typeofmemory.
Adjusting the brightness of the LCD
YoucanadjusttheappearanceoftheLCDdisplayby
usingtheLCDSetupmenucommand,ontheGlobal
BasicSetuppage.Todoso:
1. PresstheGLOBALswitchtoenterGlobalmode.
2. PresstheBasictabinthelowerline,andthenthe
Basictablocatedaboveit.
TheGlobalBasicSetuppagewillappear.
3. Fromthepagemenulocatedintheupperrightof
theLCD,chooseLCDSetup.
TheLCDSetupdialogwillappear.
4. Setthebrightnessasdesired
5. PresstheOKbuttontoconfirmthechanges,or
presstheCancelbuttontoreverttotheprevious
settings.
Tuning and transpose
settings
Velocity/aftertouch curve
settings
Efect bypass settings
KARMA &
Drum Track settings
Memory protect
settings
Select the mode that is
selected at power-on
Beep setting
160
Global audio settings
Making default audio input settings
TheGlobalAudioInputpagecontrolsthedefault
mixersettingsfortheaudioinputs,includinglevel,
pan,effectsbussing,andsoon.Italsoletsyouroute
themainL/Routputstoapairofindividualoutputs,
forspecificapplicationsinliveperformanceand
recording.
EachProgram,Combination,andSongcaneitheruse
theseGlobalaudioinputmixersettings,orhaveits
owncustomsettings.ThisiscontrolledbytheUse
GlobalSettingparameter,ontheProgram,
Combination,orSongsAudioInput/Samplingpage.
ThedefaultforUseGlobalSettingisOn(checked).
Thisletsyouchangefreelybetweendifferent
Programs,Combis,andSongswithoutaffectingthe
audioinputs.
Also,anyeditsmadeinthemodesAudio
Input/SamplingpagewillaffecttheGlobalsetting,and
viceversa.
Ontheotherhand,itmaysometimesbeconvenientto
saveaparticularmixersetupwithanindividual
Program,Combi,orSong,tosetupspecialsubmixer
settingsoreffectsprocessingforparticularinputs.For
example,youcansetupaProgramtouseamicinput
withavocoder,asdescribedunderVocoder(Program
mode)onpage 861oftheParameterGuide.
Inthiscase,settheProgram,Combi,orSongsUse
GlobalSettingtoOff(unchecked),andtheaudio
inputswillusethecustomsettings.
Withthisinmind,theGlobalsettingsapplyinthe
followingsituations:
Whenthispage(GlobalAudioInput)isopen.
InProgram,Combination,andSequencermodes,if
theAudioInput/SamplingpagesUseGlobal
SettingcheckboxisOn(checked).Thiscanbeset
independentlyforeachProgram,Combination,and
Song.
InotherpagesofGlobalmode,ifyouswitchto
GlobalmodefromaProgram,Combi,orSongwith
UseGlobalSettingsettoOn(checked).
Similarly,inDiskmode,ifyouswitchtoDiskmode
fromaProgram,Combi,orSongwithUseGlobal
SettingsettoOn(checked).
MIDI settings
Global MIDI Channel
TheGlobalMIDIChannelisthemostimportantMIDI
relatedsettingintheKRONOS.Itdeterminesthemain
MIDIchannelusedforbothProgramandCombination
modes,forinstance.TosettheGlobalMIDIChannel:
1. GototheGlobalP1:MIDIpage.
2. IntheMIDISetupsection,settheMIDIChannel
asdesired.
MIDI Clock synchronization
TheKRONOScanuseitsowninternaltempo,or
synchronizetoexternalclocksfromeitherMIDIor
USB.
ThetwobestgeneralpurposesettingsareAutoMIDI
andAutoUSB.Thesecombinethefunctionalityof
InternalandExternalMIDI/USB,sothatyoudont
havetomanuallyswitchbetweenthetwo:
Ifexternalclocksarebeingreceived,theycontrol
theKRONOStempo.
Ifexternalclocksarenotbeingreceived,the
KRONOSusesitsinternaltempoinstead.
Synchronizing to a USB-connected computer
IfyouwanttosynchronizetheKRONOStempotoa
computerconnectedviaUSB:
2. IntheMIDISetupsection,settheMIDIClockto
AutoUSB.
3. UsetheWriteGlobalSettingmenucommandto
savetheMIDIClocksetting.
Formoreinformation,seeWritingGlobalsettingson
page 185.
Synchronizing to a MIDI-connected computer
IfyouwanttosynchronizetheKRONOStempotoa
computerconnectedviaMIDI:
2. IntheMIDISetupsection,settheMIDIClockto
AutoMIDI.
savetheMIDIClocksetting.
page 185.
External Controllers
YoucanusethecontrolsurfacetotransmitMIDICC
messagestoexternalMIDIdevices.Eachslider,knob,
andswitchcanbeassignedtoaseparateMIDI
controllerandMIDIchannel.
Youcancreateupto128differentExternalSetups.For
instance,youmightmakeonesetupforcontrolling
severaldifferentpiecesofMIDIgearonstage,another
forcontrollingasoftwaresynthesizer(suchasoneof
KorgsLegacyCollectionsynths),andsoon.
Global Settings Pedal and other controller settings
161
Creating an External Setup
TocreateanewExternalSetup:
1. GototheGlobalP1:MIDIpage,andpressthe
External1tab.
TheExternal1pageappears,withMIDIchanneland
CCassignmentsforeachoftheControlSurfacesliders,
knobs,andswitches.
2. Atthetopofthepage,settheExternalModeSetup
parametertotheExternalSetupthatyoudliketo
edit.
3. Setupeachslider,knob,andswitchasdesired.
SlidersandknobssendthefullrangeofCCvalues,
from0to127.Switchesjustsendavalueof0when
theyreturnedoff,and127whentheyreturnedon.
GchmeansthatthesliderwilltransmitontheGlobal
MIDIChannel.
savethenewExternalSetup.
page 185.
Selecting External Setups
OnceyouvecreatedoneormoreExternalSetups,
yourereadytouseittocontrolexternaldevices.First,
youllwanttoselectthesetup.
1. OntheGlobalExternal1page,settheExternal
ModeSetupparametertotheExternalSetupthat
youdliketouse.
2. PressthePROGbuttontoenterProgrammode.
3. UnderCONTROLASSIGN,presstheEXTbutton.
ThisputstheControlSurfaceintoExternalmode.
4. GototheControlSurfacepage.
LookattheSetupparameterontherighthandsideof
thedisplay.NoticethattheExternalSetupyouselected
instep1isstillactive.
5. UsetheSetupparametertoselectadifferent
ExternalSetup.
6. PresstheCOMBIbuttontoenterCombination
mode.
7. UnderCONTROLASSIGN,presstheEXTbutton.
8. GototheControlSurfacepage.
LookattheSetupparameterontherighthandsideof
thedisplay.NoticethattheExternalSetupyouselected
inProgrammodeisstillactive.Theselectionstays
activeuntilyouchangeit,regardlessofwhatsound
youselectorwhichmodeyourein.Thismakesiteasy
toselectdifferentKRONOSsoundswithoutdisrupting
anyexternalMIDIcontrol,andviceversa.
Pedal and other controller settings
TheControllerstaboftheControllers/Scalespagelets
youcontrolhowthefootswitchesandfootpedalwill
work,aswellassettingupcontrollermappingsforthe
KARMAcontrolsandthechordpads.
Setting up the Assignable Switch and
Pedal
Assignable Switch
FootSwitchAssignletsyouassignafunctiontoa
footswitch(suchastheoptionalKorgPS1)connected
totherearpanelASSIGNABLESWITCHjack.
Youcanchoosefromthefollowingfunctions:
AMS(AlternateModulation)sourceforcontrolling
sounds
Dmod(dynamicmodulation)sourceforcontrolling
effects
Portamentoon/off
Sostenuto
Softpedal
Stepupordownthroughsounds,including
Programs,Combinations,andSetListSlots
Start/stopthesequencer
Punchin/outonthesequencer
Taptempo
KARMAon/off
DrumTrackon/off
ChordModeon/off
Selectminandmaxvaluesforcontrollers,including
thejoystick,ribbon,knobs,andKARMAsliders.
Triggerchordsfromtheonscreenpads
Assignable Pedal
Youcanspecifythefunctionthatwillbeperformedby
anassignablepedal(theoptionalXVP10EXP/VEL
pedalorEXP2footcontroller)connectedtothe
ASSIGNABLEPEDALjack.
ThisiscontrolledbytheFootPedalAssignparameter.
Youcanchoosefromthefollowingfunctions:
Mastervolume
Alternatemodulationsource
Effectdynamicmodulationsource
Portamentopitchchangespeed
162
Volume
Pan
Pan(followinginserteffects)
Sendlevelstothemastereffects
Duplicatethefunctionofanothercontroller,suchas
thejoystickorribbon
Note:Youcanusethisasasourceforalternate
modulationoreffectdynamicmodulation,anduseit
tocontrolprogramparametersoreffectparameters.In
thiscase,setFootSwitchAssigntoFootSW(CC#82),
andFootPedalAssigntoFootPedal(CC#04).
Changing Programs and Combinations with the
foot switch
1. PresstheFootSwitchAssignpopupbutton,and
selecteitherProgramUporProgramDown.
ProgramUpwillcausethenexthigherprogram
numbertobeselectedeachtimeyoupressthefoot
switch.
ProgramDownwillcausethenextlowerprogram
numbertobeselectedeachtimeyoupressthefoot
switch.
2. SettheFootSwitchPolaritytothepolarityofthe
footswitchyouhaveconnected.
IfyouhaveconnectedaKorgPS1pedalswitch,set
thisto()KorgStandard.Ifthepolarityisnotset
correctly,thepedalwillnotfunctionappropriately.
3. EitherpressthePROGswitchtoenterProgramP0:
Play,orpresstheCOMBIswitchtoenter
CombinationP0:Play.
Whenyoupressthefootswitch,theprogram/
combinationwillchange.
KARMA, Pad, Vector
Youcanassigncontrolchangemessagestothe
KARMAswitchesandsliders,andtothevector
joystickXaxisandYaxis.
Youcanalsoassigneithercontrolchangemessagesor
notenumberstopads18.Formoredetailsonpads
andMIDI,seePlayingthepadsfromMIDIorthe
keyboardonpage 35and21c:MIDICC#Assign
VectorJoystick/Padsonpage 782oftheParameter
Guide.
Thedefaultsettingsshouldworkwellinmostcases.To
restorethedefaultsettings,usetheResetController
MIDIAssignpagemenucommandandchoose
DefaultSetting.
Creating user scales
Creating an original scale, and assigning
it to a Program
OntheUserScalepage,youcancreateyourown
originalscales.TheseincludesixteendifferentUser
OctaveScales,inwhichthepitchofeachnoteofthe
octaveisrepeatedforalloctaves,andoneUserAll
NoteScale,inwhichthepitchofeachofthe128notes
canbespecifiedindependently.
Byadjustingthepitchofeachkeyintherangeof99
cents,youcanraiseorloweritbyapproximatelyone
semitonerelativetothenormalpitch.
Theuserscalesyoucreateherecanbeusedby
specifyingthescaleforaprogram,foreachtimbreofa
combination,orforeachtrackofasong.
Youcanchoosethesescalesfromthefollowingpages.
Hereishowtosetthescaletypeforeachtimbrein
Sequencermode.
1. Createauseroctavescaleorauserallnotesscale.
Selectakey,andusetheVALUEcontrollerstoadjust
thepitch.Therangeof99raisesorlowersthepitch
approximatelyonesemitoneaboveorbelowthe
standardpitch.
Note:Youcanalsoselectakeybyholdingdownthe
ENTERswitchandplayingthedesirednoteonthe
keyboard.
Note:Youcancopyoneofthepresetscalesandeditit
tocreateanoriginalscale.Todoso,usethepagemenu
commandCopyScale.
2. PresstheSEQbuttontoenterSequencermode.
3. PresstheTrackParametertabandthenthePitch
tabtogototheP2:TrackParametersPitchpage.
4. IfyouwanttheTracktousethescalesavedwith
itsindividualProgram,checkthetracksUse
ProgramsScalecheckbox.
Tracksthatarenotcheckedwillusethescalespecified
byScaleType(SongsScale).
5. SetType(SongsScale)toselectthescaleforthe
currentlyselectedsong.
Mode Page
Program P1 Program Basic: Scale
Combination P2 Pitch: Scale, Use Programs Scale
Sequencer P2 Pitch: Scale, Use Programs Scale
Global Settings Setting Category Names for Programs, Combinations, and KARMA
163
Setting Category Names for Programs, Combinations, and KARMA
Program, Combination, KARMA Category
TheCategoryNamepagesletyouassignnamestothe
Program,Combination,andKARMAcategoriesand
subcategories.
EditingtheCategorynamesisverysimple:
1. PresstheT(Text)buttonnexttothenameyoud
liketoedit.
Thetexteditingdialogwillappear.
2. Enterthenewname,andpressOK.
ToeditaSubCategoryname:
1. ChoosetheMainCategoryfromthepopupmenu.
2. EdittheSubCategorynamesasdescribedabove.
164
Automatically loading sample data
Using the KSC Auto-Load list to select which samples to load
Whats a KSC?
KSCstandsforKorgSampleCollection.KSCfiles
containlinkstoSamplingMode,EXs,and/orUser
SampleBankdata,includingMultisamples,Samples,
andDrumSamples.LoadingaKSCfileloadsallofthe
linkeddata.
YoucanloadKSCfilesinDiskmode,andthe
KRONOScanalsoautomaticallyloadoneormoreKSC
filesatstartup.TheGlobalKSCAutoLoadpagelets
youkeepalistofyourfavoriteKSCfiles,andselect
whichonesfromthelistareloadedautomaticallyat
startup.YoucanalsoloadKSCfilesimmediately,
withoutrestarting,directlyfromthispage.
Notethatyoucankeepfilesinthelistwithoutloading
them.Forinstance,youmighthaveoneKSCfilefora
recordingproject,andadifferentKSCfileforalive
band.Thelistletsyoukeepthemathandforeasy
loadingwhendesired,andmayoftenbemore
convenientthanusingDiskmode.
Note:TheKSCAutoLoadsettingsaresaved
automatically,andarenotpartoftheGlobalPCGfile.
aftermakinganychangestotheAutoLoadsettings.
Thisallowsthesystemtimetocompletetheprocess,
whichincludessavingthesettingstotheinternal
disk.
Adding a KSC to the list
ToaddaKSCtothelist:
1. GototheGlobalBasicKSCAutoLoadpage.
2. PresstheAddKSCbutton.
TheAddKSCfiledialogappears,allowingyouto
selectKSCfilesfromdisk.
3. SelectthedesiredKSCfiles.
YoucanuseMultipleselecttochoosemorethanone
file,ifdesired.
4. PressAdd.
TheselectedKSCfileswillbeaddedtothelist.
Note:WhenyouloadaKSCinDiskmode,its
automaticallyaddedtothelistonatemporarybasis.If
youthenchecktheKSCsAutoloadcheckbox,the
KSCisaddedtothelistjustasifithadbeenaddedby
usingAddKSC.Otherwise,anyautomaticallyadded
KSCsareclearedfromthelistatthenextstartup.
Removing a KSC from the list
YoucanalsoremoveKSCsfromthelist.Notethatthis
onlyaffectsthecontentsofthelist;itdoesnotaffectthe
filesthemselves.Todoso:
1. SelecttheKSCfilethatyoudliketoremove.
2. PresstheRemoveKSCbutton.
3. PressOK.
TheKSCfilewillberemovedfromthelist.
Selecting which KSC will be loaded
ToselectwhetherornotaKSCwillbeloaded:
1. CheckorunchecktheAutoloadboxnexttothe
KSCnameinthelist.
Thatsit!Thenexttimethatthesystempowerson,the
checkedKSCfileswillbeloaded.Youcanalsoload
themimmediately,asdescribedbelow.
Applying changes immediately
Normally,changestheautoloadsettingsonlytake
affectafterthenextrestart.Youcanalsoloadandun
loadKSCsimmediately.
Important:thiswillclearallRAMandEXsdatain
memory.IfyouhaveanyunsavededitstoRAM
SampleorMultisampledata,makesurethatyousave
youreditsbeforeproceeding!
1. PresstheDoAutoloadNowbutton.
2. PressOK.
AnychangesyouvemadebyaddingorremovingKSC
fileswillbeapplied,withsampledataloadedandun
loadedasnecessary.Notethatthismaytakesometime
tocomplete.
TheDoautoloadnowbuttonisgrayedoutifthe
selectedsamplesexceedthemaximumavailableRAM,
#ofMS,#ofSamples,or#ofMSIndexes.
Loading into RAM or Virtual Memory
TheLoadMethodsetsthepreferredwaytoloadthe
KSCssamples:loadthementirelyintoRAM,oruse
VirtualMemory.
Automatically loading sample data Creating and saving .KSC files
165
Notethatifthedataisextremelylarge,andwouldnot
fitintoRAMregardlessofwhichothersampleswere
loaded,thedatawilluseVirtualMemoryregardlessof
thissetting.
ThesesettingsapplyonlytoEXsandUserSample
Bankdata;SamplingModedataisalwaysloadedinto
RAM.
RAM:ThesampleswillbeloadedintoRAM.Thishas
theadvantageofallowingreversesampleplayback.
VirtualMemory:ThesampleswilluseVirtual
Memory.Thisgenerallyallowsyoutoloadmorelarge
samplesatonce.Notethatthesamplesmaystill
requireasignificantamountofRAM.
KSCSettings:KSCscanstoreseparateloadmethod
settingsforeachMultisampleorDrumSample,based
onthesettingswhentheKSCwassaved.SettingLoad
methodtoKSCSettingsusestheseindividualsettings.
Memory usage graphic
Thisshowstheamountofmemoryusedbythe
differenttypesofsamples,alongwiththeslotsusedfor
SamplingModeMultisamples,Samples,and
MultisampleIndexes(keyzoneswithinMultisamples).
Show Current or Selected Auto-Load
Thisselectswhetherthegraphicshowsthecurrent
stateofmemory,orthestateofmemoryasitwouldbe
afterdoinganautoloadusingthecurrentsettings.
ItspossiblefordifferentKSCfilestorefertothesame
sampledata;forinstance,twoKSCfilesmaypointto
thesamesetofGrandPianomultisamples.Thesystem
takesnoteofthis,sothattheredundantdataiscounted
onlyonce.
EXS/USRBANKshowstheamountofmemoryused
forsamplesinEXsandUserSampleBanks.
SAMPLINGshowstheamountofmemoryusedfor
samplesinSamplingMode.
Freeshowstheamountofmemorystillavailable.
ThenextsectionshowsthenumbersofMultisamples,
Samples,andMultisampleIndexescurrentlyusedin
SamplingMode,outoftheavailablemaximum.Data
inEXsandUserBanksdoesnotcounttowardsthese
maximums.
Multisamplesshowsthecurrentnumberof
MultisamplesinSamplingMode,outofthemaximum
of4,000.
SamplesshowsthenumberofSamplesinSampling
Mode,outofthemaximumof16,000.
MSIndexesshowsthetotalnumberofIndexesinall
MultisamplesinSamplingMode,outofthemaximum
of16,000.
Memory capacity exceeded
IfthesizeofthesampledatainMBaddsuptogreater
thanthetotalavailablememory,thenthereareseveral
indicationsinthegraphic:
TheFreeboxturnsred,andshowstheamountby
whichtheselecteddataexceedstheavailable
memory,asanegativenumber
ThewordOVERappearsinredtotherightofthe
Freebox,withthreeexclamationpointsonasecond
line
Max numbers exceeded for Sampling Mode
Multisamples, Samples, or Multisample Indexes
Asnotedabove,SamplingModecanhaveupto4,000
Multisamples,16,000Samples,and16,000Multisample
Indexes.Ifanyoftheselimitswouldbeexceededby
theselectedautoload,thentherearetwoindicationsin
thegraphic:
Thenumbersfortheaffecteddatatype(e.g.,
numberofSamples)areshowninred
Thebargraphforthedatatypeturnsred,instead
ofblue,andextendstofilltheentirelength
Creating and saving .KSC files
Creating a subset of PRELOAD.KSC
Youmaydecidethatyouwanttoremovesomeofthe
factoryloadedsamplesfrommemory,inordertomake
roomforoptionalKorgorthirdpartyEXs,orforyour
ownsamples.Thisiseasytodo.Youcanunloadan
entireEXs,ifyouwish,orunloadindividual
MultisamplesorDrumSamples.
Unloadingdoesnotaffectthedatastoredondisk;it
onlychangeswhatiscurrentlyloadedintomemory.
Unloading an entire bank of data
Tounloadanentirebankofdataatonce:
1. GototheGlobalP0:SampleManagementpage.
Thispageofferstoolsformanagingthesampledata
currentlyloadedintotheKRONOS.
2. Inthemenu,selecttheUnloadallinbank
command.
TheUnloadalldatafromselectedbankdialogwill
appear.
3. Selectthedesiredbank(suchasanEXs).
4. PresstheOKbuttontoconfirm,orCanceltoexit
thedialogwithoutmakingchanges.
5. ProceedtotheinstructionsunderSavingaKSC
file,below.
Unloading individual items
TounloadindividualMultisamples,DrumSamples,or
Samples:
1. GototheGlobalSampleManagementpage.
2. Abovethelistofsampledata,selectthedesired
BankandType.
ForEXsandUserSampleBanks,thepossibleTypesare
MultisampleorDrumSample.ForSamplingMode,the
possibleTypesareMultisampleorSample.
3. Selectthedesireditems(Multisamplesor
Samples)fromthelist.
166
Toselecttwoormoreitemsatonce,enablethe
MultipleSelectcheckbox.
4. PresstheUnloadbutton.
Aconfirmationdialogwillappear.
5. PresstheOKbuttontoconfirm,orCanceltoexit
thedialogwithoutmakingchanges.
Sampledatamaybesharedbytwoormore
MultisamplesorDrumSamples.IfaSampleisused
onlybytheMultisampleorDrumSamplebeing
unloaded,theSamplewillbeunloadedaswell.Ifthe
Sampleisusedelsewhere,itwillstayloaded.
Creating a new KSC by loading individual
Multisamples
YoucanalsoloadafewMultisamplesfromanexisting
KSC,andthensaveouttheresultasanewKSC.
Important:thisexamplewilldeleteanySamplesor
MultisamplesinSamplingMode!Makesurethatyou
saveanydatathatyouwanttokeep.
1. GototheDiskLoadpage.
2. Selecta.KSCfileondisk.
3. PresstheOpenbutton.
Yourenowlookinginsidethe.KSCfile.Eventhough
the.KSCfileisjustalist,pointingtootherfiles,you
canbrowsethroughitonthediskasifitcontained
directories.AtthetopleveloftheKSCfile,youllsee
oneormorefolders,dependingontheKSC:onefor
SamplingModeData,andoneforeachreferenced
UserSampleBankorEXs.Ifthe.KSCfiledoesnthave
atypeofdata,therewontbeafolderforit.
4. Selecttheoneofthefolders,andpressOpento
lookinside.
UserSampleDatawillcontainoneortwofolders,for
MultisamplesandSamples.Usually,therewillbeboth.
EXsandUserSampleBankfolderswillcontainoneor
twofolders,forMultisamplesandDrumSamples.
5. SelectafolderofMultisamples,andpressOpento
lookinside.
6. TouchtheMultipleSelectcheckboxatthebottom
ofthescreen,sothatitschecked.
7. TouchafewMultisamplestoselectthem.
9. AnAreYouSuremessageappears,toconfirmthat
youwanttoloadmultiplefiles;pressOK.
TheLoaddialogappears.
10.SetSample&MSAllocationtoClearAll.
Whenwesavethe.KSCfile,wellbeincludingallof
theloadedsamples.Thisoptionletsusstartwitha
cleanslate.
11.IfyoureloadingEXsorUserSampleBankdata,
settheLoadMethodasdesired.
SeeLoadingintoRAMorVirtualMemoryon
page 164.
12.PressOKtoloadtheMultisamples.
Now,onlytheselectedMultisamplesareloaded.
13.UnchecktheMultipleSelectcheckbox.
Inordertonavigatebackoutofthe.KSCfile,thismust
bedisabled.
14.PresstheUpbuttonseveraltimes,untilyoure
backattherootlevelofthedisk.
15.ProceedtotheinstructionsunderSavingaKSC
file,below.
Saving a KSC file
1. InDiskmode,gototheSavepage.
2. Inthemenu,selecttheSaveSamplingData
command.
Adialogappears.Therearemanyoptionshere;you
cansaveeitherSamplingModeData,LinkstoEXsand
UserSampleBanks,orboth.Therearealsovarious
optionsforsavingonlyasingleMultisampleorSample
fromtheuserdata.Inthiscase,weregoingtosave
everything.
3. SetIncludetoBothSamplingMode&Links.
4. SetSamplingModeDataOptionstoAll.
5. GivetheKSCfileadescriptivename.
6. PressOKtosavethefile.
Thatsit!Youvenowcreatedandsavedyourown.KSC
file.Youcannowloadthislater,orsetitto
automaticallyloadatstartup.
Ifyouvecreatedthis.KSCfileasasubsetof
PRELOAD.KSCtomakeroomforothersamples,make
suretodisableautoloadforPRELOAD.KSCas
describedunderSelectingwhichKSCwillbeloaded
onpage 164.
Toreloadyourprevioussetofautoloadedsamples,
followtheinstructionsunderApplyingchanges
immediatelyonpage 164.
Connecting to computers via USB Ethernet and FTP Creating and saving .KSC files
167
Connecting to computers via USB Ethernet and FTP
Overview
YoucanuseaseparatelypurchasedUSBEthernet
adaptorandtheKRONOSsbuiltinFTPserverforfast,
easyfiletransferwithpersonalcomputers.For
instance,youcan:
backupfilestoyourcomputer
transfersamplestotheKRONOS
organizeandrenamefilesanddirectoriesonthe
KRONOSinternaldisks
Important: compatible USB ethernet adaptor
required
TheKRONOSsupportsaspecificsetofofftheshelf
USBEthernetadaptors.Foracompletelist,seeUSB
EthernetandFTPsupportonpage 25.
Whats FTP?
FTPstandsforFileTransferProtocol,andisa
standardwaytoaccessfilesovernetworks.Youcan
useFTPtotransferfilesbetweentheKRONOSinternal
disk(s)andanymoderncomputersystem.
TheKRONOSisanFTPserver,andyourcomputer
willbetheFTPclient.FreeFTPclientsoftwareis
availableforallmodernoperatingsystems;somemay
includebuiltinFTPsupport.Ifyoudontalreadyhave
FTPclientsoftware,trysearchingforfreeftpclient
foryouroperatingsystem(e.g.,WindowsorMac).
Connecting to the KRONOS via FTP
OntheKRONOS:
1. ConnectacompatibleUSBethernetadaptor.
2. Connectanethernetcablefromtheadaptortoyour
localnetwork.
Forconnectiontoawirelessnetwork,youllneedto
useawirelesstoethernetbridge.
3. GototheGlobal05Networkpage.
ThispageletsyousetuptheUSBethernetconnection
andconfiguretheFTPserver.
4. SettheUserNameandPasswordasdesired.
Theusernamemustbeatleastonecharacter,andcan
beupto32characters,includingletters,numbers,and
dashes.Thepasswordmaybeleftblank,ifyouarenot
concernedaboutsecurity;liketheusername,itcanbe
upto32characters.
5. Leavetheotherparameterssettotheirdefaults.
6. NotetheIPaddressshownintheTCP/IPsection.
Thiswillbesomethinglike10.0.1.2,or192.168.1.2.
YourenowreadytoconnecttotheKRONOSfrom
yourcomputer.
Onyourcomputer:
7. Ifyouhaventalreadydoneso,installFTPclient
software.
8. IntheFTPclientsoftware,connecttotheIP
addressfromstep6above,withthenameand
passwordfromstep4.
Ifyouneedmoreinformationabouthowtoconfigure
yourFTPsoftware,seeitsdocumentation.
Afterconnecting,youshouldbeabletoseetheinternal
disk(s)ofyourKRONOS.YoucanthenuseyourFTP
clientsoftwaretotransferfilesbetweentheKRONOS
andyourcomputer.
Network Troubleshooting
TheStatusparametershowsthecurrentstateofthe
KRONOSnetworkconnection.Normalstatesare
showninblacktext,anderrorsareshowninred.
IftheStatusshowsanerror,trythefollowing:
1. PresstheConfigurebuttontoopentheConfigure
TCP/IPdialog.
2. PressOKtoclosethedialog.
ThiswillmakeKRONOSattempttoreconnecttothe
network;watchtheStatusparametertoseeits
progress.
3. Makesurethatallethernetcablesareconnected
properly.
Ifpossible,itssometimeshelpfultoswapthecables
themselves.
Networktroubleshootingisoutsidethescopeofthis
manual,buthereareafewotherthingstotry:
4. Ifpossible,useDHCPinsteadofmanual
addressing.
5. TryrestartingtheDHCPserver(usually,thiswill
bethenetworkrouter).
168
Using Wave Sequences
Wave Sequence Overview
Whats a Wave Sequence?
WaveSequencesplaybackaseriesofdifferent
Multisamplesovertime.Youcanusethistocreatea
varietyofuniquetimbralandrhythmiceffects,as
describedbelow.
WaveSequencesaresimilartoDrumKits,inthatyou
createandedittheminGlobalmode,andthenuse
theminPrograms.InHD1Programs,youcanuse
WaveSequencesjustasyouwouldnormal
Multisamples,includingvelocityswitchesor
crossfades,layeringdifferentWaveSequencesonthe
twoOscillators,andsoon.
Alsolikedrumkits,whenyouplayaWaveSequence
inGlobalmode,itwillusethesettingsfromthe
previouslyselectedProgramorCombi.
Youcancreatemanydifferenteffectswithwave
sequences,fromsubtletoextreme.Hereare
descriptionsofthreecommonuses:rhythmicWave
Sequences,crossfadingWaveSequences,andvelocity
switchedWaveSequences.
Rhythmic Wave Sequences
RhythmicWaveSequencesuseshortorabrupt
crossfades,sothattransitionsbetweenthedifferent
Multisamplescreatearhythmicphrase.Flexibleswing
amount,rests,andtiesletyoubuildcomplexpatterns,
whichyoucanthensynctoKARMAandthesystem
tempo.
Crossfading Wave Sequences
Byusinglongdurationsandcrossfadetimes,Wave
Sequencescanproducecomplex,evolvingtimbres.
ModulatingtheStartStep,Position,andDuration
makesthesoundevenmoreorganic,sothateverynote
canplaytheWaveSequencealittledifferently.
Velocity-Switching Wave Sequences
BysettingeachstepsdurationtoGATE,andthen
modulatingtheStartStepbyvelocity,youcancreatea
soundwithupto64velocityswitches.Forinstance,
youcanusethistoswitchbetweenalargenumberof
differentattacktransients.
Wave Sequence banks
TherearebuiltinfactorysoundsintheInternalbank
(I000throughI139)aswellassomeoftheuserbanks,
asshownbelow.Youcanoverwritethemifyouwish,
butdoingsomaychangethesoundsofthefactoryHD
1Programs,aswellastheCombiswhichusethem.
USERBthroughUSERGGareemptywhenshipped
fromthefactory.Youcanusetheseforstoringsounds
thatyoucreateyourself,optionalsoundbanksfrom
Korg,orthirdpartysoundlibraries.Eachuserbank
contains32WaveSequences.
WaveSequencebankcontents
Programming Basics
TheWaveSequenceparametersarespreadovertwo
pages.TheSeqParameterspagehascontrolsforthe
WaveSequenceasawhole,suchasthestartandend
steps,looping,andmodulation.
TheStepParameterspagegoesdeeperintothe
structureoftheWaveSequence,allowingyoutoedit
eachofthe64Steps.
Programs,Combinations,andSongsalsohavea
handfulofWaveSequencerelatedparameters,tomake
iteasiertofitWaveSequencesinwithothersounds
andrhythmiccomponents(suchasKARMA).
TheWaveSequencegraphic,shownonboththeSeq
ParametersandStepParameterspages,givesyoua
quickoverviewofthesequence,ataglance:
Thecurrentstepismarkedbyaredarrow.
RedboxesareMultisamplesteps.
GreenboxesareTiesteps.
WhiteboxesareReststeps.
ThelengthoftheWaveSequence,fromtheStart
SteptotheEndStep,isshownbyarectangular
outline.
TheLoopishighlightedinblue.
OntheStepParameterspage,thehorizontalscroll
baratthetopofthegraphicshowsyoutheeight
stepscurrentlydisplayedonthescreen.
AtthebottomrightofthegraphicisaSolobutton.
Whenthisisturnedon,theWaveSequencewill
playonlythecurrentstep,includingitsfadeinand
fadeout.
Bank Contents
INT 000139 Factory Wave Sequences
INT 140149 Initialized Wave Sequences
USERA 0024 Factory Wave Sequences
USERA 2531
USERB00G31
USERBB00GG31
Initialized Wave Sequences
Using Wave Sequences Adjusting the sound of an individual step
169
WaveSequencegraphic
Whats in a step?
WaveSequenceshave64steps(althoughyoudont
havetouseallofthemseeSettingthelengthofthe
sequenceonpage 169).Eachstepincludes:
Atypesetting,whichmakesthestepeitherplaya
Multisample,continuetheprevioussteplikeatied
note,orplayonlysilencelikeamusicalrest.
AselectedMultisample,whichsetsthebasicsound
ofthestep.
MultisampleReverseandStartOffsetparameters,
whichmodifythebasicsoundoftheMultisample.
Volume,coarsetuning,andfinetuningforthe
Multisample.
Aduration,whichcontrolshowlongthesteplasts.
Youcansetthedurationineithermillisecondsor
musicalbeats.
Acrossfadetime,whichsetshowlongittakesto
fadeintothenextstep.
Fadeinandfadeoutshapesforthecrossfade,for
subtlecontrolofthetransitionbetweenthisstep
andthenextstep.
TwoAMSoutputvalues,whichcanbeusedto
controlotherProgramparameters.
Setting the length of the sequence
Youcanuseanythingfrom1to64stepsinaWave
Sequence.Youalsodonthavetostartonstep1.Toset
thelengthofthesequence:
1. GototheSeqParameterspage.
2. SettheStartStepasdesired.
YoucanalsomodulatetheStartStepinrealtime;for
moreinformation,seeStartStepmodulationon
page 174.Modulatingthestartstepdoesnotchange
theEndStep.
3. SettheEndStepasdesired.
ThereadonlyLengthparameterwillshowyouthe
totalnumberofstepsbetweenthetwopoints.
Setting up the loop
WaveSequencescanloop,sothatsomeorallofthe
stepsareplayedrepeatedlylikeadrumloop,oraloop
inasequencer.
Youcansetthestartandendoftheloopseparately
fromthestartandendoftheWaveSequenceitself.The
loopcaneitherplayforaslongasthenoteisplayed,or
repeataspecifiednumberoftimes.Finally,youcan
choosewhethertheloopplaysforwards,plays
backwards,oralternatesbetweenbackwardsand
forwards.
Tosetuptheloop:
1. SettheLoopStartandEndStepsasdesired.
2. SettheLoopDirection.
ForwardsplaysfromtheStartSteptotheLoopEnd,
andthenskipsbacktotheLoopStart.
Backwards/ForwardsplaysfromtheStartSteptothe
LoopEnd,thenbackwardsfromtheLoopEndtothe
LoopStart,andthenforwardsagaintotheLoopEnd,
andsoon.
BackwardsplaysfromtheStartSteptotheLoopEnd,
thenbackwardsfromtheLoopEndtotheLoopStart,
andthenskipsbacktotheLoopEnd,andsoon.
3. SettheLoopRepeats.
Youcansetthelooptorepeataspecificnumberof
times,between1and127.Youcanalsomaketheloop
keepplayingforaslongasthenoteisheld(theINF
setting),ornotrepeatatall(theOffsetting).
Adjusting the sound of an individual step
Youcanmakesomebasicadjustmentstothesoundof
eachstepsMultisample,includingchangingits
volumeandpitch,makingitplayinreverse,and
changingthesamplestartpoints.
YoucanalsousetheAMSOutputstomodulateother
ProgramparametersoutsideoftheWaveSequence,
suchasFilterFrequency,Pan,andsoon.
Toeditsteps:
1. GototheStepParameterspage.
Thispageshowstheparametersforeightstepsata
time.Usethescrollbarattherightofthescreento
changewhichstepsareinview.
2. Inorderforasteptomakeasound,setitsTypeto
Multi(Multisample).
3. SelectaMultisampleusingtheBankand
Multisamplepopupmenus.
170
MonoandstereoMultisamplesarestoredindifferent
Banks.Eachstepcanbeeithermonoorstereo.Note
thatevenifonlyonestepusesastereoMultisample,
theentireWaveSequencebecomesstereo,anduses
twiceasmanyvoicesitsthepricethatyoupayfor
power!
4. SettheLevel(volume)asdesired.
Thiscanbeusefulforeveningouttheperceivedlevels
ofdifferentMultisamples,orforaccentingstepsin
rhythmicsequences.
5. SettheTransposeandTuneasdesired.
TransposesetstheMultisamplescoarsetuning,in
semitones.Youcanusethistochangetheoctavefor
individualsteps,tocreatemelodies,ortocreate
interestingvariationsonpercussionsoundsbyextreme
transposition.
Tunecontrolsthefinetuning,incents(1/100ofa
semitone).Smallvariationsintuningcancreatean
interesting,organicfeel.
6. UseReverseandStartOffsettochangetheway
thattheMultisampleplays.
ReverseplaystheselectedMultisamplebackwards,
withoutlooping.(Ifindividualsampleswithinthe
MultisamplearealreadysettoReverse,theywillstill
playinreverse,regardlessofthissetting.)
StartOffsetletsyouselectfromupto8pre
programmedsamplestartpoints(forROMandEXs),
orbetweenthenormalstartpointandtheloopstart
(forSamplingModeandUserSampleBanks).
Using Insert/Cut/Copy/Paste
YoucanusetheInsert,Cut,Copy,andPastebuttonsto
copyalloftheparametersfromonesteptoanother,or
tomoveasteptoadifferentpositioninthesequence.
Toinsertacopyofastepintothesequence:
1. Selectthestepyoudliketocopy.
Youcandothisbytouchinganyofthesteps
parameters,orbydirectlyeditingtheStepparameter
undertheWaveSequencegraphic.Theselectedstepis
shownbyaredarrowontheleftsideofthescreen,as
wellasaredarrowinthegraphic.
Yourenowreadytoinsertorpastethestep.
3. Selectthestepwhichyoudliketofollowthenew
step.
4. PresstheInsertbutton.
Thecopiedstepisinsertedattheselectedposition.The
previouslyselectedstep,andallstepsfollowingit,
movedowntomakeroomfortheinsertedstep.
Toremoveastepfromthesequence:
1. Selectthestepyoudliketoremove.
2. PresstheCutbutton.
Theselectedstepwillberemovedfromthesequence,
andallfollowingstepswillshiftuptofillinthespace.
Modulating Program parameters per
step
EachstephastwoAMSOutputvalues.Theseactkind
oflikestepsequencers,allowingyoutomodulateany
AMSdestinationintheProgram.Inotherwords,
virtuallyanyProgramlevelparametercanhavea
differentsettingforeachstepoftheWaveSequence.
Forinstance,toadjusttheFilterFrequencyseparately
foreachstep:
1. SelecttheProgramthatyoullusefortheWave
Sequence.
2. GototheFilterMod1taboftheFilterpage.
Thispagehasthefiltermodulationparametersfor
OSC1.
3. UnderFilterAModulation,setoneoftheAMS
sourcestoWaveSeqAMSOut1.
4. SettheIntensityasdesired.
ThismeansthattheAMS1outputwillmodulatethe
FilterFrequency.Now,youjustneedtosetupthe
WaveSequencetosendvaluesout:
5. GototheWaveSequenceStepParameterspage.
6. Foreachstep,enterthedesiredvalueforAMS
Out1.
8. SetMS1tousetheWaveSequenceyoueditedin
step5.
TheFilterFrequencywillnowchangewitheverystep.
YoumaywonderwhatiftheProgramusesmorethan
oneWaveSequence,andeachissendingoutdifferent
AMSvalues?Nottoworry.Underthehood,eachWave
Sequenceactuallyhasitsowncompletevoice
structure,whichallowstheAMSvaluestobedifferent
foreachone.
Modulating individual steps with the AMS Mixer
YoucancombinetheWaveSequenceAMSOutputs
withtheAMSMixertomodulateindividualsteps.For
instance,youcansetupSW1tomuteaparticularstep.
WellstartbyassumingthatyouhavealreadysetOSC1
toplaytheWaveSequence.Then:
1. OntheWaveSequenceStepParameterspage,set
step1sAMSOut1to127.
2. SetAMSOut1forallotherstepsto0.
3. GototheAMSMix1taboftheAMS
Mix/CommonKTrackpage.
Using Wave Sequences Using rhythmic Wave Sequences
171
4. OnAMSMixer1,settheTypetoAmtAxB.
5. ForAMSA,selectWaveSeqAMSOut1.
6. SettheAMSAAmountto00.
7. ForAMSB,selectSW1Mod(CC#80).
8. SettheAMSBAmountto+99.
9. GototheAmp1ModtaboftheAmp/EQpage.
10.UnderAmpModulation,settheAMSsourceto
AMSMixer1.
11.UndertheAMSsourceselection,settheIntensity
to99.
SW1willnowmuteandunmutestep1.Youcanuse
thissametechniqueforanyperstepmodulation.
WaveSequencestepDurations,Crossfadetimes,andFadeInandFadeOutshapes
Using rhythmic Wave Sequences
Creating rhythmic Wave Sequences
TocreatearhythmicWaveSequence:
1. OntheSeqParameterspage,settheModeto
Tempo.
ThismakestheWaveSequencesynchronizetothe
systemtempo,assetbyeithertheTempoknoborMIDI
Clock.
2. SetRuntoOn.
Thisisthedefaultsetting;theWaveSequencewill
movefromsteptostepautomatically.
3. SelecttheMultisamplesthatyoudliketouse,and
settheStart,End,andLoopStart/Endstepsas
desired.
4. SettheLoopRepeatstoINF.
Thiswillmakethesequencerepeataslongasyouhold
thenote.
5. OntheStepParameterspage,usetheBaseNote
andMultiply(x)parameterstosettherhythmic
valuesforeachstep.
Forinstance,tocreateadottedeighthnote,settheBase
Noteto1/16,andMultiply(x)to3.
6. SettheStepXfadetimestorelativelyshortvalues,
suchas05ms.
Thispreservestheinitialtransientsofthesamples.
7. Tocreatepausesintherhythm,settheStepType
toRest.
Doubling or halving the rhythmic pulse
Youmaysometimeswanttoslowdowna16thnote
rhythmsothatitbecomes8thnotesinstead,orvice
versa.The/2andx2buttonsmakethiseasy.
Pressthe/2buttontocuttheBaseNoteand/or
Multiplysettingsinhalf,sothat1/4notesbecome1/8
notes,1/8notesbecome1/16notes,andsoon.
Pressthex2buttontomultiplytheBaseNoteand/or
Multiplysettingsbytwo,sothat1/8notesbecome1/4
notes,1/4notesbecome1/2notes,andsoon.
Note:thesebuttonsonlyappearwhentheModeisset
toTempo.
Setting the tempo
EachProgram,Combi,andSonghasitsowntempo
setting.Youcanchangethetemposimplybyadjusting
thefrontpanelTEMPOknob,orbytappinginquarter
notesontheTAPTEMPObutton.
TheresalsoaGlobalmodeparameterwhichletsyou
switchbetweenusingtheinternaltempoortempo
fromanexternalMIDIsource(suchasacomputer
basedsequencer).TosynctoanexternalMIDIsource:
2. SelecttheMIDItab.
3. UnderMIDISetup,settheMIDIClockparameter
asdesired.
InternalusesthetempostoredwiththeProgram,
Combi,orSong,andsetbytheTEMPOknob.
Volume
Time
Step 1
Duration
Step 1
Crossfade
Step 2
Crossfade
Step 2
Duration
Step 3
Duration
Step 4
Duration
Step 3
Crossfade
Step 4
Crossfade
Xfade In =Log Xfade Out =Exp Xfade In =Off
Xfade In =Lin Xfade Out =Log
Xfade Out =Off
172
ExternalMIDIsyncstoincomingMIDIclocks,and
ignorestheTEMPOknob.
Autoisacombinationoftheabove.Whenclocksare
receivedviaMIDI,itsyncstotheincomingclocks;
whennoclocksarebeingreceived,itdefaultstothe
storedtemposettings.
Using Swing
Swingaddsahumanfeeltotherhythm,andprovides
aneasywaytoturnasquarerhythmintoashuffle
groove.
Thisworksbyadjustingthepositionoftheupbeats,
relativetotheWaveSequencesSwingResolution
setting.Forinstance,iftheSwingResolutionissetto
1/8,Swingaffectseveryother8thnote.
WhiletheSwingResolutionisstoredintheWave
Sequence,theSwingamountissetintheProgram,
CombiTimbre,orSongTrack.Thisletsyouuseasingle
WaveSequenceindifferentPrograms,Combis,and
Songs,eachwithdifferentamountsofswing.
Forinstance,toturnan8thnoterhythmintoashuffle:
1. CreateorselectaWaveSequencewithan8thnote
rhythm.
2. OntheSeqParameterspage,makesurethat
SwingResolutionissettoan8thnote.
3. CreateorselectthePrograminwhichyoudliketo
usetheWaveSequence.
5. SetMS1tousetheWaveSequenceyouselectedin
step1.
6. GototheProgramBasictaboftheBasic/Vector
page.
7. UnderWaveSequence,settheSwingparameterto
+100%.
Thismakesthe8thnotesintoatriplet,shufflepattern.
Positivevaluesmaketheupbeatslater,andnegative
valuesmakethemearlier.WhenSwingissetto+300%,
upbeatswillbemovedallthewaytothenextdown
beat.Atthispoint,thenotesontheupbeatswillnotbe
heardatall.
IfyouareusingtheWaveSequenceinconjunction
withKARMA,youmaywishtoadjustKARMAs
swingamountaswell.
Swing with multiple Wave Sequences
IfaProgramcontainsmultipleWaveSequenceswith
differentSwingResolutionsettings,theProgramwill
usethefinestvalue.Forinstance,ifoneWaveSequence
issetto1/8andtheotherissetto1/16,theProgramwill
use1/16.
WaveSequenceSwing
Keeping notes in sync
Bydefault,theWaveSequencesforeachnoterun
independentlyfromoneanother,sothateachnote
soundsasanindividualvoice.
WithrhythmicWaveSequences,however,youmay
sometimeswantalloftheWaveSequencesinachord
tostarttogetherandsynctogether,inlockstep.
KRONOSgivesyoutwotoolstomakethishappen:
KeySyncOff,andQuantizeTriggers.
Key Sync Off
EachProgram,eachCombiTimbre,andeachTrackina
SonghasitsownKeySyncsetting.ThenameKey
SynccomesfromthesimilarsettingforLFOs,
meaningrestartseparatelyforeachnoteon.
WhenKeySyncisOn,eachnotesWaveSequence(s)
willprogressindependently,sothateachonecanbeon
adifferentstep,ormovingatadifferentrate.
WhenKeySyncisOff,ontheotherhand,allofthe
WaveSequenceswillbesynchronizedonthesame
step.Thereisoneexceptiontothis,however:if
Durationismodulatedwithvelocityornotenumber,
theWaveSequencescanstillprogressatdifferentrates.
ToturnKeySyncOffinaProgram:
page.
2. MakesurethattheKeySyncparameterisnot
checked.
ToturnKeySyncOffinaCombiorSong:
1. GototheWaveSequence/KARMAtabofthe
TimbreParameterspage(forCombis),orTrack
Parameterspage(forSongs).
Eachofthe16TimbresorTrackshasitsownKeySync
parameter.Ifyoulike,youcansetthemallseparately.
2. SettheKeySynccheckboxesasyoulike.
Remember,tosynchronizeallofthenotes,turnKey
Syncoff.
Quantize Triggers
QuantizeTriggersallowsyoutoforcemostTempo
modeWaveSequencenoteonstobeinsync,makingit
easiertoplayalongwithotherrhythmicelements.
WhenQuantizeTriggerisOn,noteonsarequantized
to8thnotesusingthecurrenttemporeference.(See
belowforafewmoredetails.)
Thetemporeferencecancomefromdifferentsources,
dependingonthecurrentmode,andwhetherornot
KARMAison:
Swing Resolution =
Swing =0%
Swing =+100%
Swing =100%
Swing =+200%
Swing =+300%
+300
Beat 1 Beat 2
3 3 3 3
+100
100
+200
Using Wave Sequences Creating smooth, evolving timbres
173
InProgramandCombimodes,ifKARMAisoff,
noteonsaresynchronizedwiththesounding
TempomodeWaveSequence,ifany.
InProgramandCombimodes,ifKARMAison,
noteonsaresynchronizedwithKARMA.
InSequencemodeduringplaybackorrecording,
noteonsaresynchronizedwiththesequence.
InSequencemode,whilethesequencerisstopped,
noteonsaresynchronizedwithRPPRand
KARMA.
EachProgram,eachCombiTimbre,andeachTrackina
SonghasitsownQuantizeTriggerssetting.
ToturnonQuantizeTriggersinaProgram:
page.
2. ChecktheQuantizeTriggersbox.
ToturnonQuantizeTriggersinaCombiorSong:
1. GototheWaveSequence/KARMAtabofthe
TimbreParameterspage(forCombis),orTrack
Parameterspage(forSongs).
Eachofthe16TimbresorTrackshasitsownQuantize
Triggersparameter.Ifyoulike,youcansetthemall
separately.
2. SettheQuantizeTriggerscheckboxesasyoulike.
QuantizeTriggers
How Quantize Triggers works
TheQuantizeTriggersfeaturetriestomakeagood
guessatwhereyouintendedthenotetobe.Ifyouplay
thenotejustabitlatewithina32ndnoteofthe8th
noteitwillassumethatyoumeantthenotetosound
onthebeatthatjustpassed.Inthiscase,thenotewill
playimmediately.
Ontheotherhand,ifyouplaythenoteuptothree
32ndnotesearly,itwillassumethatyoureintending
thenotetosoundonthenextbeat.Inthiscase,the
noteonisdelayeduntilthenext8thnote.
Creating smooth, evolving timbres
Crossfaded Wave Sequences
Tocreateasmooth,crossfadingWaveSequence:
1. OntheSeqParameterspage,settheModetoTime.
Thisturnsofftemposynchronization,sothatyoucan
setWaveSequencedurationsinmilliseconds.
2. SetRuntoOn.
Thisisthedefaultsetting;theWaveSequencewill
movefromsteptostepautomatically.
3. SelecttheMultisamplesthatyoudliketouse,and
settheStart,End,andloopstepsasdesired.
4. OntheStepParameterspage,settheDurationsto
relativelylongvalues,500msormore.
5. SettheXfadeparameterstolongvaluesaswell.
Tocrossfadecontinually,withoutpausingtoheara
singlesteponitsown,settheXfadetimesthesameas
theDurations.
Note:InTimemode,theactualcrossfadetimecannot
exceedthetotaldurationofthetwostepsbeing
crossfaded.IftheXfadesettingwouldexceedthis
limit,thecrossfadetimewillbeclippedinternally.
6. AdjustthestepLevelstosmoothoutperceived
volumedifferencesbetweendifferent
Multisamples.
7. AdjusttheFadeInandFadeOutshapestotaste.
Theshapescanhelpyoutofinetunethetransitions
betweenthesteps.
Stretching or compressing the sequence
Ifyouliketheproportionsofthestepdurationsand
crossfades,butwantthewholesequencetogofasteror
slower.TheExp/Comp(Expand/Compress)button
makesthiseasy:
1. OntheStepParameterspage,presstheExp/Comp
button.
2. Inthedialogbox,settheExpand/Compress%
parameterasdesired.
100%meansthecurrentdurationandcrossfadetimes.
Values99andbelowmakethetimesshorter,and
values101andabovemakethemlonger.
Thestepdurationsandcrossfadetimeswillbe
adjustedbytheselectedpercentage.
Note:theExp/Compbuttonappearsonlywhenthe
ModeissettoTime.
YoucanalsostretchandcompressWaveSequencesin
realtime,viaAMS.Formoreinformation,see
Durationmodulationonpage 174.
Quantize
Triggers

Quantize
Triggers
Quantize
Triggers

Quantize
Triggers
Note-On
Note-On
Wave Sequence Rhythm
174
Modulating Wave Sequences
Position modulation
PositionmodulationletsyouoffsettheWaveSequence
fromthecurrentstep.IfRunisturnedOn,TheWave
Sequencewillcontinuetoprogressthroughitssteps
duringmodulation,kindoflikefastforwardingwhile
playingatapeorCD.
Tosweepthroughasequencemanually,creatingthe
distinctivesoundofafamousGermansynthesizer:
1. SetRuntoOff.
ThismeansthattheWaveSequencewillstayonthe
currentstep,untilyoumodulatetheposition.
2. UnderModulationandPosition,selectanAMS
source,suchastheribbonoranEG.
3. SettheIntensitytoapositivevaluetomove
forwardthroughthesteps,oranegativevalueto
movebackwards.
Forinstance,ifIntensityissetto+14,themaximum
amountofmodulationwillmove14stepsforwardin
theWaveSequence.
Position modulation and loops
PositionAMSaffectsonlythecurrentstep,anddoes
notchangetheloopstartorloopend.Thismeansthat
PositionAMScanmaketheWaveSequencejumpinto
themiddleoftheloop,orjumpbackoutoftheloop
again.
Duration modulation
Durationmodulationletsyoudynamicallycontrolthe
stepdurationandcrossfadetimes.Youcanspeedupor
slowdowntheWaveSequencesothatitrunsbetween
1%and400%oftheoriginalrate.
ByusingVelocity,keytracking,ornotenumberasthe
AMSsource,youcanmaketheWaveSequenceson
everynotehaveslightlydifferenttiming(or
dramaticallydifferenttiming,forthatmatter!)Thiscan
beveryusefulformakingacrossfadedWave
Sequencesoundmoreorganic.Forinstance,tomake
theWaveSequencemovefasterwhenyouplayat
highervelocities:
1. GototheSequenceParameterspage.
2. UnderModulationandDuration,selectVelocity
astheAMSsource.
3. SettheIntensitytoavaluelessthan100%,suchas
90%.
Valuesbelow100%makethedurationsshorter,sothe
WaveSequencemovesmorequickly.Valuesabove
100%makethedurationslonger,sothesequence
movesmoreslowly.
Start Step modulation
YoucanuseaMIDIcontroller,suchasVelocity,to
selectadifferentstartstepforeachnote,tointroduce
morevarietyintothetimbre.Youcanmovethestart
stepeitherforwardsorbackwards.Forinstance:
1. MakesurethatNoteOnAdvanceisOff.
WhenNoteOnAdvanceisOn,StartStepmodulation
isdisabled.
2. SettheStartStepto10,andtheEndStepto25.
3. SettheLoopStartandLoopEndtothesame
points10and25.
Thesequencewillnowloopthrough16steps,from10
to25.
4. SettheStartStepAMS(totherightoftheStart
Stepparameter)toVelocity.
5. SettheIntensityto9.
Playingatthehighestvelocitieswillnowstartthe
sequenceatstep1(movingitforwardby9steps);at
thelowestvelocities,thesequencewillstillstartatstep
10.
Ingeneral,negativemodulationmovestheStartStep
earlierinthesequence,tothelimitofStep1.Positive
modulationmovestheStartSteplaterinthesequence,
tothelimitoftheEndStep.
Note-On Advance
Thisfeatureletsyouadvancethestartpointofthe
WaveSequencebyonestepwitheachnewnoteon.If
LoopRepeatsisnotsettoOff,NoteOnAdvancewill
stepthroughtheloop,payingattentiontotheloop
directionandnumberofrepeats.
Forinstance,letssaythattheWaveSequenceStart
Stepis2,andtheEndStepis6.Also,theLoopStartis
setto3,theLoopEndissetto5,andtheLoop
DirectionissettoForward.
IfRepeatTimesisOff,NoteOnAdvancewillmake
theWaveSequenceplayasfollows:
1stnote:2,3,4,5,6
2ndnote:3,4,5,6
3rdnote:4,5,6
4thnote:5,6
5thnote:6
6thnote:2,3,4,5,6
7thnote:3,4,5,6
8thnote:4,5,6
9thnote:5,6
10thnote:6
11thnote:2,3,4,5,6
etc
IfRepeatTimesis1,NoteOnAdvancewillmakethe
WaveSequenceplayasfollows:
firstnote:2,3,4,5,3,4,5,6
2ndnote:3,4,5,3,4,5,6
3rdnote:4,5,3,4,5,6
4thnote:5,3,4,5,6
5thnote:3,4,5,6
6thnote:4,5,6
Using Wave Sequences Saving Wave Sequences
175
7thnote:5,6
8thnote:6
9thnote:2,3,4,5,3,4,5,6
10thnote:3,4,5,3,4,5,6
11thnote:4,5,3,4,5,6
12thnote:5,3,4,5,6
13thnote:3,4,5,6
14thnote:4,5,6
15thnote:5,6
etc
Finally,ifRepeatTimesisINF,NoteOnAdvancewill
maketheWaveSequenceplayasfollows.Notethatthe
WaveSequenceneverreturnstothestartstep,sinceits
outsideoftheloop:
firstnote:2,3,4,5,3,4,5,3,4,5,3,4,5
2ndnote:3,4,5,3,4,5,3,4,5,3,4,5
3rdnote:4,5,3,4,5,3,4,5,3,4,5
4thnote:5,3,4,5,3,4,5,3,4,5
5thnote:3,4,5,3,4,5,3,4,5
6thnote:4,5,3,4,5,3,4,5
7thnote:5,3,4,5,3,4,5
8thnote:3,4,5,3,4,5
9thnote:4,5,3,4,5,3,4,5
10thnote:5,3,4,5,3,4,5
etc
Note-On Advance and Key Sync
NoteOnAdvanceisalsoaffectedbythesettingofthe
KeySyncparameter.
IfKeySyncisOn,thestartpointwilladvancebyone
stepforeachnote.
IfKeySyncisOff,thestartpointwilladvancebyone
stepforeachnewphrase.Formoreinformation,see
KeySynconpage 788oftheParameterGuide.
Saving Wave Sequences
Onceyouvespentallthistimeediting,youllwantto
saveyourwork.TosaveyourWaveSequenceedits:
1. SelecttheWriteWaveSequencecommandfrom
thepagemenu,attheupperrighthandcornerof
thescreen.
theWaveSequence.Optionally,youcanalsoselecta
newlocation,orchangedetheWaveSequencesname.
dialog.
YoucangivetheWaveSequenceadescriptivename
usingtheonscreenkeyboard.
themainSavedialog.
4. PressthepopupbuttonnexttoWaveSeqtobring
upthesavelocationdialog.
5. SelectalocationtosavetheeditedWave
Sequence.
Toavoidoverwritingthefactorysounds,itssaferto
useaslotinoneofthesevenUserbanks.
pressOKagain.
afterwritingtheWaveSequencedata.Thisallows
thesystemtimetocompletetheprocess,which
includessavingabackupofthedatatotheinternal
disk.
TheWaveSequenceTempo,KeySync,Swing,and
QuantizeTriggersettingsarestoredwitheach
Program,Combination,orSong.Theseparameters
areprovidedontheWaveSequencepagesforuse
duringediting,butarenotactuallysavedwiththe
WaveSequence.IfyouvemovedfromProgramor
Combinationmodeandeditedtheseparameters,
returntothepreviousmodeandwriteyouredits.
176
Using Drum Kits
Drum Kit Overview
Whats a Drum Kit?
DrumKits,asthenameimplies,areoptimizedfor
creatingdrumsounds.Theyofferanumberofspecial
features,suchas:
Eachnotecanplayadifferentsound
InsteadofselectingMultisamples(whichspanthe
entirekeyboard),youcanselectDrumSamples
(whichcontainasingledrumsound).Thesecanbe
fromtheROM,RAM,orEXsbanks.
Oneachnote,youcanuseuptoeightDrum
Samples,withvelocitycrossfades
Eachnotehasseparatesettingsforthemost
importantsoundparameters,includingvolume,
filtercutoffandresonance,envelopeattackand
decay,pitch,driveandlowboost,andgainforeach
bandoftheProgramEQ.
Forinstance,youcouldcombinehighdriveand
lowcutofffrequencytocreatealofieffectononlya
fewsounds,whiletherestofthesoundsremained
clearandpristine.
EachnotecanberoutedtodifferentInsertEffects,
orhaveseparateFXSendamounts.Forinstance,
youcansendasnaresoundthroughadedicated
compressor.
YoucanuseDrumKitsonlyinProgramswhose
OscillatorModeissettoSingleorDoubleDrums.
Drum Kit memory structure
TheKRONOShasover270DrumKits,dividedinto
Internal,User,andGM(GeneralMIDI)groupsas
shownbelow.Youcaneditorwriteintoanyofthe
locationsexceptfortheGMbank,whichcannotbe
erased.
FordetailsonthefactoryprogrammedDrumKits,
pleaseseetheVoiceNameList.
DrumKitbankcontents
The9DrumKitsintheGMbankarecompatiblewith
theGM2soundmap.TheotherDrumKitsmayuse
differentmappings,whereappropriate.
Drum Kit Programs and Oscillator Mode
TheProgramsOscillatorModesetting,onthe
ProgramBasictaboftheBasic/Vectorpage,sets
whethertheProgramisusedtoplayDrumKitsorto
playnormalMultisamples(suchaspianos,strings,
etc.).
YoullseetheresultsofthissettingontheOSC1/Basic
taboftheOSC/Pitchpage.IftheOscillatorModeisset
toSingleorDouble,youcanselectuptoeight
MultisamplesforeachOscillator,withvelocity
switchesorcrossfades.
IftheOscillatorModeissettoSingleDrumsor
DoubleDrums,youllbeabletoselectaoneortwo
DrumKits.Therearestilleightlevelsofvelocity
switchesandlayersbutthesearewithintheDrumKit
itself,andnotstoredoreditedintheProgram.
Before you start editing
First, select a Drum Program
DrumKitsareeditedinGlobalMode.Whileyourein
GlobalMode,youllplaythekitthatyoureeditingasif
youwereplayingitfromwithintheProgram,Combi,
orSongwhichwasselectedbeforeyouenteredGlobal
mode.
So,beforeyouenterGlobalmode,itsbesttoselecta
Programwhichisalreadysetupfordrums,withthe
appropriateEGsettings,effects,andsoon.Justusethe
ProgramCategoryselectpopup,andchooseadrum
ProgramsuchasStudioStandardKit.
Working with Double Drum Programs
IfyouselectaDoubleDrumsProgrambeforeentering
Globalmode,theDrumKitfromOscillator1willbe
selectedandreadyforediting.WheneditinginGlobal
mode,theselectedDrumKitwillalwaysplayasifit
wereintheProgramsOscillator1.
TheDrumKitinOscillator2willcontinuetosoundas
well,althoughyoucantedititdirectly.Youcancontrol
thevolumebalancebetweenthetwokitsusingthe
controlsurface,withoutleavingGlobalmode.Todo
so:
1. PresstheCONTROLASSIGN[TIMBRE/TRACK]
button.
TheControlSurfacewillthencontrolthevolumesof
thetwoOscillators.
2. UsetheMIXVOLUMES[1][2]sliderstoadjust
thevolumesofthedrumkits.
Bank Contents
INT0039,
USERA00USERC05
Factory Drum Kits
GM 08 GM2 Drum Kits
USERC06USERG15
USERAA00USERGG15
User Drum Kits
Using Drum Kits Editing Drum Kits
177
OSC1/Basic Octave setting
Inorderforthenotemappingstomatchthekeyboard,
theOscillatorsOctavesettingneedstobe+0[8].All
DrumKitProgramsshouldhavethissettingalready.If
youreunsure,youcancheckthisyourself:
1. GototheOSC1/BasictaboftheOSC/Pitchpage.
2. CheckthattheOctaveparameter(nearthetopof
thepage)issetto+0[8].
Withasettingotherthan+0[8],therelationship
betweenthekeysandtheDrumKitsoundmapwillbe
incorrect.
Make sure that Memory Protect is
disabled
Beforeyoustartediting,gototheGlobalBasicpage,
andlookintheMemoryProtectsection.Makesure
thatDrumKitisnotcheckedifso,youwontbeable
tomakeanyedits.
Drum Kits may be used by more than one
Program
WhenyoueditaDrumKit,allProgramsthatusethat
DrumKitwillbeaffected.Toavoidchangingthe
factoryvoicing,youmaywishtocopyDrumKitsto
emptylocationsintheUSERbanksbeforeediting.
Editing Drum Kits
Basic Editing
1. SelecttheProgramthatyouwishtousewhile
editingtheDrumKit.
Formoreinformation,seeFirst,selectaDrum
Program,above.
2. PressthefrontpanelGLOBALbuttontoenter
Globalmode.
3. GototheSampleSetuptaboftheDrumKitpage.
4. UsetheDrumKitparameter,atthetopofthe
screen,toselecttheDrumKitthatyouwishto
edit.
Youcansavethistoadifferentmemorylocationafter
editing,ifyoulike.
5. UsetheKeyparametertoselectthenotethatyou
wishtoedit.
Toselectakey,youcanuseanyofthestandardVALUE
controllers(theslider,dial,numerickeypadetc.).Asa
shortcut,youcanalsoholddowntheENTERkeyand
playanoteonthekeyboard.
ThisKeyselectionappliestoallthreeDrumKitediting
tabs.
6. UsetheAssigncheckboxtospecifywhetherthe
keywillhaveitsownsettings,orusethesame
settingsasthenexthighernote.
IfAssignischecked,thekeywillhaveitsownsettings.
Thisisthedefault.
IfAssignisnotchecked,thekeywonthaveitsown
settings.Instead,itwillusethesamesettingsasthe
nexthighernoteexceptthatthedrumsampleswillbe
playedatalowerpitch.Theamountofpitchchange
dependsonthePitchSlopeparameter,ontheOSC1
PitchtaboftheOSC/Pitchpage.
Usethissettingwhenyouwantonlytochangethe
pitch,suchaswithtomorcymbalsounds.
Creating a velocity crossfade
Forthiskey,letscreateasimplevelocitycrossfade
betweentwostereodrumsamples.
1. Ontheleftsideofthescreen,makesurethatDS1
andDS2areturnedOn.
JustpresstheOn/Offbuttonstotogglethem,if
necessary.
2. Similarly,makesurethatDS38areturnedOff.
Whentheyareturnedoff,mostoftheirparameterswill
begrayedout.
3. SelectROMStereoastheBankforDS1andDS2.
TherearethreemaintypesofDrumSampleBanks:
ROM,RAM,andEXs.Foreachtype,youcanalso
choosebetweenlookingatmonoandstereoDrum
Samples.NotethatstereoDrumSampleswillrequire
twiceasmanyvoicesasmonoDrumSamples.
ROMDrumSamplesarethebuiltinfactorysounds,
andarealwaysavailable.Theseareorganizedby
category,suchasbassdrums,snares,hats,etc.
RAMDrumSamplesincludeAkai,SoundFont2.0,
AIFForWAVfilesloadedfromdisk,andsamples
createdinSamplingmode.
EXsDrumSamplebanksarePCMexpansionsets
createdespeciallyfortheKRONOS.Eachhasitsown
uniquenumber;forinstance,theROMExpansionis
EXs1,andtheConcertGrandPianoexpansionisEXs2.
OnlythecurrentlyloadedEXsbankswillappearon
thismenu.
4. PresstheDrumSamplepopupforDS1.
ThisbringsupalistofDrumSamples,organizedby
category.Usethetabsattheleftofthescreentobrowse
throughthedifferentcategories.
ForalistoftheDrumSamplenames,pleaseseethe
VoiceNameList.
5. SelectaDrumSamplebytouchingitsnameinthe
list.
6. PresstheOKbuttontoconfirmyourselection.
7. DothesameforDS2.
NowthatyouveassignedDrumSamplestoDS1and
DS2,letssetupthevelocityrangesandcrossfades.
178
8. SetDS2sBottomVelocityto001,anditsXfade
Rangeto0.
9. SetDS1sBottomVelocityto80.
Now,DS2willsoundwhenyouplaysoftly,at
velocitiesof79orlessandDS1willsoundwhenyou
playharder,withvelocitiesof80ormore.
Youcanalsoseethissplitvisually,inthegraphiconthe
rightsideoftheLCD.
10.Next,setDS1sXfadeRangeto20,anditsCurveto
Linear.
Noticethatthegraphicnowshowsthetworanges
taperingintooneanother.Between80and100,DS2
willfadeout,andDS1willfadein,creatingagradual
velocitytransitioninsteadofahardsplit.
Fine-tuning the sound of each sample
1. Ifyoulike,adjusttheLevelsforthetwoDrum
Samples.
Thiscanbeveryusefulincreatingasmoothvelocity
splitorcrossfade.
2. SetthetuningandEGparametersasdesired.
ForeachDrumSample,youcancontroloffsetstothe
Programssettingsfortransposition,tuning,andEG
attackanddecaytimes.
3. GototheSampleParametertab.
Thispageletsyoumakeevenmoreadjustmentstothe
sound.ForeachDrumSample,cancontroloffsetsto
theProgramssettingsforfiltercutoffandresonance,
drive,andlowboost.Additionally,youcancontrolthe
gainforeachbandoftheEQ.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeGlobalP5:Drum
Kitonpage 796oftheParameterGuide.
4. Repeatsteps13tosetupeachkeyoftheDrum
Kit.
Youcanalsocopysettingsfromonekeytoanother,
usingtheCopyKeySetupmenucommand.
Using Exclusive Groups
1. SelecttheVoice/Mixertab.
2. UsetheExclusiveGroupstomakeonedrum
soundcutoffanotherdrumsoundsuchasclosed
andopenhihats.
Forexample,letssaythatyouveassignedanopenhi
hatandaclosedhihattothesameexclusivegroup:
Playtheopenhihatsound.
Whileitsstillringing,playtheclosedhihat.
Theopenhihatsoundwillbecutoffsimulating
theactionofaphysicalhihat.
Using Hold
TheProgramHoldparametercanbeespeciallyuseful
fordrumprograms,sinceitletsthesamplesringout
naturallyregardlessofhowlongyouholddownthe
note.Thewaythatthisworksdependsonsettingsin
boththeProgramandtheDrumKit,asdescribed
below.
ToenableHold:
1. InProgrammode,gototheProgramBasictabof
theBasic/Vectorpage.
2. UnderKeyZone,makesurethattheHoldcheck
boxischecked.
OnceyouveturnedonHoldfortheProgram,the
functioniscontrolledonanotebynotebasis
accordingtosettingswithintheDrumKit.
3. InGlobalmode,gototheVoiceMixertabofthe
DrumKitpage.
4. Foreachkey,settheEnableNoteOffReceive
parameterasdesired.
Ifthisparameterisunchecked,thekeywillbeheld.
Ifitischecked,thekeywillnotbeheld.
IfyouturnoffHoldintheProgram,nokeyswillbe
heldregardlessoftheirEnableNoteOffReceive
setting.
Controlling effects for each key
DrumKitshavetheirown,builtinmixers.Foreach
key,youcancontroltheInsertEffectsbussing,Master
Effectssends,andpan.
Touseseparatebussettingsforeachkey:
1. InProgrammode,gototheRoutingtaboftheIFX
page.
2. MakesurethattheUseDKitSettingcheckboxis
checked.
WhenUseDKitSettingison,theProgramwillusethe
BusSelectandEffectsSendsettingsforeachkeyofthe
DrumKit.
WhenUseDKitSettingisoff,theProgramwillignore
theDrumKitsBusSelectandEffectsSendsettings.
DrumKitpage.
4. UsetheBusSelect(IFX/Indiv.OutAssign)
parametertosenddrumsoundsthroughtheirown
Inserteffects,ortotheindividualoutputs.
Ifyoulike,youcansendeachnotetoitsownInsert
effect,ortotheindividualaudiooutputs,inadditionto
themainL/Routputs.
Forexample,youmightsendallsnaresoundstoIFX1,
allkicksoundstoIFX2,andtheremainingsoundsto
L/R.
5. UseSend1(MFX1)andSend2(MFX2)tosetthe
sendlevelstothemastereffects.
Using Drum Kits Saving Drum Kits
179
Controlling pan for each key
Touseseparatepansettingsforeachkey:
1. InProgrammode,gototheAmp1/Driver1tabof
theAmp/EQpage.
2. UnderPan,makesurethattheUseDKitSetting
checkboxischecked.
WhenUseDKitSettingison,theProgramwillusethe
pansettingsforeachkeyoftheDrumKit.
DrumKitpage.
4. UsethePanparametertospecifythekeysstereo
outputposition.
Double Drum Programs
DoubleDrumProgramsletyoulayertwoDrumKits
together.Mostoften,thesewillbeclosemicdand
ambientversionsofthesameacousticdrums,sothat
youcancontrolthebalancebetweenthetwo.You
couldalsousethisforcreativelayeringandspecial
effects,ofcourse!
EverythingelseaboutDoubleDrumProgramsisthe
sameasforSingleDrumPrograms.
Saving Drum Kits
Onceyouvespentallthistimeediting,youllwantto
saveyourwork.TosaveyourDrumKitedits:
1. SelecttheWriteDrumKitcommandfromthepage
theDrumKit.Optionally,youcanalsoselectanew
location,orchangetheDrumKitsname.
dialog.
YoucangivetheDrumKitadescriptivenameusing
theonscreenkeyboard.
themainSavedialog.
4. PressthepopupbuttonnexttoDrumKittobring
upthesavelocationdialog.
5. SelectalocationtosavetheeditedDrumKit.
Toavoidoverwritingthefactorysounds,itssaferto
useaslotinoneofthesevenUSERbanks.
NotethatalthoughyoucaneditGeneralMIDIkits,you
canonlysavetheseeditstolocationsintheINTor
USERbanks.TheoriginalGMkitscannotbeover
written.
pressOKagain.
afterwritingtheDrumKitdata.Thisallowsthe
180
181
Loading & saving data, and creating CDs
Saving data
Overview
Therearethreewaystosavedata;youcanwriteitinto
internalmemory,saveittodisk(ontheinternaldiskor
externalUSBstoragemedia,includingCDR/RW),or
transmititasaMIDIdatadump.Youcanalsouse
WAVEfilestocreateanaudioCDthatcanbeplayedby
CDplayers.
Writing to internal memory
Thefollowingtypesofdatacanbewrittenintothe
internalmemory.
Programs
Programs000127inbanksINTAF,USER
AGandAAGG
Combinations
Combinations000127inbanksINTAG,USER
AG
Globalsettings
(GlobalP0:BasicP3:CategoryName)
UserWaveSequences
BanksINT:000149,BanksUSERAGG:0031
UserDrumKits
BanksINT:0039,BanksUSERAGG:0015
UserDrumTrackPatterns
User000999
FXPresets
Preset0015andUser0015foreacheffect
UserTemplateSongs
User015.Theseincludetheprogramselections,
trackparameters,effectsettings,KARMAsettings,
andthenameandtempoofthecurrentsongasa
reusabletemplate.Formoreinformation,seeSave
TemplateSongonpage 625oftheParameter
Guide.
Sample data must be saved to disk
SamplingModeMultisamplesandSamplesmustbe
savedtoandloadedfromdisk;theycannotbe
writtenintointernalmemory.
Thismeansthatifyouturnthepoweroffandthenon
onceagain,butdonotreloadthenecessary
MultisamplesorSamplesintoSamplingMode,any
datathatusesthoseMultisamplesorSampleswillnot
soundasintended.ThiscanincludeCombinations,
Programs,DrumKits,WaveSequences,and
Multisamples.
Oncetheyvebeensavedtodisk,youcansetthe
KRONOStoautomaticallyloadthematstartup.For
details,seeAutomaticallyloadingsampledataon
page 164.
Songs must be saved to disk
AswithSamplingModedata,Songsmustbesavedto
disk;theycannotbesavedininternalmemory.
Saving to disk, CDs, and USB media
Thefollowingfiletypescanbesavedtodisk:
.PCGfiles
SetLists,Programs,Combinations,globalsettings,
DrumKits,UserDrumTrackPatterns,andWave
Sequences.(Youcanchoosewhichdatatypesare
included,viaoptionsintheSavedialog.)
.SNGfiles
Songandregiondata.
.KMPfiles
TheseareKorgformatMultisamples.
.KSFfiles
TheseareKorgformatSamples.
.KSCfiles
ThesestorecollectionsofEXsMultisamplesand
DrumSamples,and/orUserMultisamplesand
Samples.
.KFXfiles
Effectpresetdata.
.KGEfiles
KARMAGEdata.
.MIDfiles
SavesaSequencermodesonginStandardMIDI
File(SMF)format.
.EXLfiles
Systemexclusivedatafromanexternaldevicethat
wassavedontheKRONOS.(Thisallowsthe
KRONOStobeusedasadatafiler.)
.WAVand.AIFfiles:
UsersamplescanbeexportedasWAVEorAIFF
files.
.KCDfiles:
ThesearetracklistsforaudioCDs.
MIDI data dump
Thefollowingtypesofdatacanbetransmittedasa
MIDIdatadumpandsavedonanexternaldatafileror
otherdevice.
SetLists,Programs,Combinations,globalsettings,
DrumKits,DrumTrackPatterns,andWave
Sequences
Songs
Formoreinformation,seeDumpProgramon
182
About preload data and preset data
Preloaddatareferstothesoundsandotherdata
loadedintheKRONOSwhenitisshippedfromthe
factory.Youarefreetorewritethisdata,andwiththe
exceptionofthedemosongs,thedatawillbewrittento
thelocationlistedinWritingtointernalmemory.All
ofthisdataisstoredintheinternaldisk,andbackups
areprovidedontheincludedAccessoryDiscs.
ProgramsINTAFandUSERAF
CombinationsINTACandINTD000095
DrumKitsINT:0039,A00B15,andC0005
WaveSequencesINT:000139andUSERA0024
Demosongs
Presetdataisdatathatcannotberewrittenbythe
Writeoperation.Thisincludesthefollowingdata:
TheGeneralMIDIProgrambanks,includingG,
g(1)g(9),andg(d):001128
PresetDrumKits144(GM)152(GM)
PresetTemplateSongsP00P17
PresetpatternsP000P697
Writing to internal memory
Writing Programs and Combinations
EditstoProgramsandCombinationscanbesavedto
theinternalmemory,whichwellrefertoasWriting.
Ifyouwanteditstobepreservedafterthepoweris
turnedoff,youmustwritethem.
TherearetwowaystowriteProgramsand
Combinations,asdescribedbelow:usingtheWrite
menucommands,andusingtheSEQUENCER
REC/WRITEbutton.
afterusinganyoftheWritecommands.Thisallows
thesystemtimetocompletetheprocess,which
includessavingabackupofthedatatotheinternal
disk.
Beforeyouwritedataintomemory,youmustturn
offtherelatedmemoryprotectsetting(s)inGlobal
mode.(SeeMemoryprotectonpage 185.)
CombinationsrelyonProgramstomakesounds,
buttheydontcontaintheactualProgram
parameters.Instead,theysimplyrememberthe
Programbanksandnumbers.IfyoueditaProgram
thatsusedbyaCombination,orloadadifferent
Programintothesamebankandnumber,thesound
oftheCombinationwillalsochange.
Using the Write commands
1. AnywhereinProgramorCombinationmodes,
selectthepagemenucommandWriteProgram
orWriteCombination.
TheWriteProgramorWriteCombinationdialogbox
willappear.
Note:Youcanalsoreachthesamedialogboxby
holdingdowntheENTERbuttonandpressing0onthe
numerickeypad.(SeeShortcutsonpage 7.)
ThescreenshownisforProgrammode
2. Checktheprogram/combinationnamedisplayed
intheupperline(thewritingsource).
3. Ifyouwishtochangethenameoftheprogram/
combination,pressthetexteditbutton.
Thetextdialogboxwillappear.Enterthenameofthe
program/combination.SeeEditingnameson
page 184.
Afteryouhaveenteredthename,presstheOKbutton
toreturntotheWriteProgram/WriteCombination
dialogbox.
4. InCategory,specifythecategoryoftheProgram/
Combination.
5. SelectaSubCategoryaswell.
BothCombinationsandProgramscanbeselectedby
Category,inadditiontobankandnumber.Formore
informationaboutCategoriesandPrograms,see
SelectingbyCategoryonpage 29;forsimilar
informationaboutCombinations,seeSelectingby
Categoryonpage 58.
YoucanalsoselectProgramsbyCategoryfromwithin
CombinationsandSongs.Formoreinformation,see
SelectingProgramsforCombiTracksonpage 60.
6. UseTotospecifythebankandnumberofthe
writingdestinationprogram/combination.
UsetheVALUEcontrollersortheBANKswitchesto
makeyourselection.
7. ToexecutetheWriteoperation,presstheOK
button.Tocancelwithoutexecutingpressthe
Cancelbutton.
WhenyoupresstheOKbutton,thedisplaywillask
Areyousure?WhenyoupresstheOKbuttononce
again,thedatawillbewritten.
Using the SEQUENCER REC/WRITE button
InProgramandCombinationmodes,pressingthe
SEQUENCERREC/WRITEbuttonopenstheUpdate
dialogbox.
Thisisashortcutmethodwhichsaveschangestothe
currentbank/numberlocation,overwritingtheold
versionoftheProgramorCombination.(Ifyouwantto
savechangestoadifferentbankand/ornumber,use
theWritemenucommandinstead.)
ToupdateaProgramorCombination:
1. PresstheSEQUENCERREC/WRITEbutton.
Saving data Writing to internal memory
183
TheUpdateProgram/UpdateCombinationdialog
boxwillappear.
2. Towritethedata,presstheOKbutton.Tocancel
withoutwriting,presstheCancelbutton.
Saving Tone Adjust edits
ToneAdjusteditsaresavedindifferentways
dependingonwhethertheparameterisRelativeor
Absolute,andwhetheryouresavingaProgram,
Combination,orSong.
Relativeparameterstypicallyadjusttwoormore
Programparameterssimultaneously.Forinstance,
Filter/AmpEGAttackTimeaffectsatotalofsix
Programparameters.ThevalueoftheRelative
parametershowstheamountofchangetothese
underlyingProgramparameters.
Absoluteparametersusuallycontrolasingle
Programparameter,suchasOscillator1
Transpose.TheProgramandToneAdjust
parametersmirroroneanother;whenyouchange
one,theotherwillchangetomatch.
Programmode:
EditstoRelativeparametersaffectthesound
immediately,butdontchangetheunderlying
ProgramparametersettingsuntiltheProgramis
saved.WhentheProgramissaved,theKRONOS
calculatesthecombinedeffectsofToneAdjustand
dedicatedCCmodulation(fromtheRealTime
Knobs,forinstance),andsavestheresultsintothe
Programparametersdirectly.Atthatpoint,allof
theRelativeparametersareresetto0.
EditstoAbsoluteparametersareimmediately
reflectedinthecorrespondingonscreen
parameters,andviceversa.
CombinationandSequencermodes:
EditstobothRelativeandAbsoluteparametersare
writtenandpreservedastheToneAdjustsettings
fortheTimbreorTrack.
Writing Drum Kits and Wave Sequences
FordetailsonhowtowriteWaveSequenceeditsto
memory,seeSavingWaveSequencesonpage 175.
FordetailsonhowtowriteDrumKiteditstomemory,
seeSavingDrumKitsonpage 179.
The Edit Buffer, Write, and Compare
Editbuffersaretemporaryareasinmemoryusedfor
storingedits.Therearefiveseparateeditbuffers,one
foreachofthefollowingdatatypes:
SetLists
Programs
Combinations
WaveSequences
DrumKits
EachtimeyouselectoneoftheseitemsaSetList,
Program,etc.itscopiedintothedatatypesedit
buffer.Whenyoumakeedits,thechangesareapplied
toversionintheeditbuffer,andnottothestored
version.
UsingthemenucommandWritecopiestheeditbuffer
backtothestoredversion,makingtheedits
permanent.
Notethatthereisonlyoneeditbufferforeachdata
type.Forinstance,ifyoustarttoeditProgramINT
A000,andthenchangetoProgramUSERG127,the
editstoINTA000willbelost.
Changingtoadifferentdatatypedoesnotclearthe
editbuffer,however.Forinstance,youcanedita
Program,switchtoCombimodetohearhowthe
ProgramsoundsinaCombination,andthenswitch
backtoProgrammodewithoutlosingyoureditsto
eithertheProgramortheCombination.
Compare
TheCOMPAREbuttonletsyougobackandforth
betweenthestoredversionofthesoundandthe
versionintheeditbuffer.TheLEDontheCOMPARE
buttonletsyouknowwhichversionyourelisteningto.
Forinstance:
1. SelectaCombination.
2. ChangeTimbre1toplayadifferentProgram.
3. PresstheCOMPAREbutton.
TheCOMPARELEDlightsup,andTimbre1returnsto
theoriginalProgram.
4. PresstheCOMPAREbuttonagain.
TheCOMPARELEDturnsoff,andTimbre1switches
backthenewProgram.
Edit Buffer
Write Select
Internal Memory
Edit
Program
INTA 0...127
Combination
INTA 0...127
Wave Seq
INT 0...149
DrumKit
INT 0...39
When you write, the
programor combination
settings will be saved in
internal memory.
When you select a program
or combination, its data is
called frominternal memory
into the edit buffer.
Editing applies to the data in the edit
buffer. Programs or combinations will
play according to the data in the edit
buffer.
184
Compareoperatesonthetypeofdatayourecurrently
workingwith.Forinstance,whenyoureinSetList
mode,itactsontheSetList;whenyoureintheWave
SequenceeditpagesonGlobalP4,itactsontheWave
Sequence.
Editing names
YoucanchangethenamesofSetLists,Programs,
Combinations,Songs,UserPatterns,DrumKits,Wave
Sequences,Multisamples,Samples,andmore,as
showninthetablebelow.Youcanalsochangethe
namesofProgram,Combination,andKARMA
CategoriesandSubCategories.
Asanexample,hereshowtochangethenameofa
ProgramtoPiano01usingtheWritepagemenu
command:
1. Pressthetexteditbutton toopenthetextedit
dialogbox.(SeethegraphicTexteditdialog,
below.)
2. PresstheClearbuttontodeletethepreviousname.
3. PresstheShiftbuttontoswitchtouppercase
characters,andpressthecharacterP.
4. PresstheShiftbuttonagaintoswitchtolowercase
characters,andpressthecharactersi,a,n,o.
ThetextwillnowreadPiano.
5. PresstheSpacebuttontoenteraspace,andthen
pressthecharacters0,1.
ThetextwillnowreadPiano01.
6. PresstheOKbuttontoclosethedialogbox.
Ifyoudontneedtomakeanycorrections,pressthe
OKbuttonagaintocompletetheWritecommand,
includingtheeditedname.
Texteditdialog
Where can names be changed?
Namescanbechangedonthefollowingpages.
Cursor
Character Set
Selects the type of
character.
Character buttons
Shift button
Switches between
uppercase and
lowercase characters.
Delete button
Deletes the character
to the left of the
cursor.
Cursor buttons
Move the cursor to
left or right.
Space button
Insert a space at the
cursor location.
Clear button
Delete all characters of
the text.
Text
Cancel button, OK button
If you are satisfed with the text that
you input, press the OK button. If you
wish to discard your input and exit
the text edit box, press the Cancel
button.
Set Lists
Set List P09 page menu command:
Write Set List
Set List Slots Set List P1: Slot Name parameter
Programs
Program P09 page menu command:
Write Program
Combinations
Combination P09 page menu command:
Write Combination
Wave Sequences
Global P4 page menu command:
Write Wave Sequence
Drum Kits
Global P5 page menu command:
Write Drum Kit
Effect Presets
Program, Combination, Sequencer, and
Sampling modes P8 & P9 page menu
command: Write FX Preset
Songs
Sequencer P0, 1, 2, 3 page menu command:
Rename Song
Regions P4: Track Edit Edit Region
Tracks Sequencer P4: Track Name
Patterns Sequencer P5: Pattern Name
Sampling Mode
Multisamples
Sampling P04 page menu command:
Rename MS
Sampling Mode
Samples
Sampling P04 page menu command:
Rename Sample
Categories &
sub categories
Global P3: Program, Combination, and
KARMA Category tabs
Files
Disk Save: Save AllSave Audio CD Track
List, Disk Utility page menu command:
Rename
Saving data Writing to internal memory
185
Memory protect
MemoryProtectletsyoupreventcertaintypesofdata
frombeingoverwrittenaccidentally.Thereare
individualcheckboxestoenableMemoryProtectfor
differentpartsofthesystem,asdescribedbelow.
ForPrograms,Combinations,Songs,SetLists,Drum
Kits,WaveSequences,andKARMAGEs,Memory
Protectprevents:
UsingtheWritecommandtosaveedits
Loadingthedatatypefromdisk
ReceivingdumpsofthedatatypeviaMIDISysEx
WhenenabledforSongs,MemoryProtectalso
preventsrecordinginSequencermode.
WhenenabledforInternalHDDSave,MemoryProtect
preventssavinganydatatotheinternaldisk.
Beforesavingedits,loadingdata,andsoon,usethe
followingproceduretoturnthememoryprotectoff.
1. PresstheGLOBALswitchtoenterGlobalmode.
2. GototheGlobalP0:BasicSetupBasicpage,and
selecttheBasicpage.
PresstheBasictabatthebottom,andthenpressthe
Basictababoveit.
3. PresstheMemoryProtectcheckboxforeach
typeofdatayouwishtowriteorsave,sothatthe
boxisunchecked.
Writing Global settings
AnyeditsinGlobalpagesP0P3aretemporaryuntil
youusetheWritecommandtostoretheminthe
internalmemory.IfyoudontusetheWritecommand,
yourchangeswillbegonewhenyouturnoffthe
power.
(NotethatWaveSequencesandDrumKitsarestored
separatelyfromtheotherGlobalparameters.)
Therearetwowaystowriteglobalsettings.
Using the Write page menu command
1. Towriteglobalsettings(thevarioussettingsin
GlobalP0P3),pressthepagemenucommand
WriteGlobalSettinginGlobalP0P3.
TheWriteGlobalSettingdialogboxwillappear.
Note:Thesamedialogboxwillalsoappearif,ineachof
theabovepages,youholddowntheENTERswitch
andpressthe0switch.(SeeShortcutsonpage 7)
button.Tocancel,presstheCancelbutton.
WhenyoupresstheOKbutton,thedisplaywillask
Areyousure?PresstheOKbuttononceagainto
writethedata.
Using the (SEQUENCER) REC/WRITE switch to
write
1. IntheGlobalP0P3pages,presstheSEQUENCER
REC/WRITEswitch.
button.Tocancel,presstheCancelbutton.
afterwritingtheGlobaldata.Thisallowsthesystem
timetocompletetheprocess,whichincludessaving
abackupofthedatatotheinternaldisk.
Memory Area
Write Power On
Internal Memory
Edit
Global Setting
P0...P3
Editing will affect the data that has
been called into the memory area.
When you Write, the
various Global mode
P0P3 settings will be
saved in internal memory.
When the power is
turned on, the settings
are called into the
memory area.
186
Saving to disks, CDs, and USB media
Some types of data must be saved to disk
Everythingthatyoucreateoreditwithinthe
KRONOSsounds,songs,samples,etc.canbesaved
todisk,andbackeduponexternalmedia.
AsdescribedunderWritingtointernalmemoryon
page 182,sometypesofdatacanbewritteninto
internalmemory,withoutusingtheDiskmodeSave
commands.
Othertypesofdatamustbesavedtodiskbeforethe
poweristurnedoff,oranychangeswillbelost.This
includesSongandregiondatafromSequencermode,
aswellasSamplingModeMultisamplesandSamples.
Inordertokeepthisdata,youmustwriteittothe
internaldiskortoanexternalUSBstoragedevice(hard
disks,flashmedia,CDR/RWdrive,etc.).Whenyouve
comeupwithsettingsyoulike,itsagoodideatosave
them,sothatyoullalwaysbeabletoreloadthemif
desired.
aftersavingdata.Thisallowsthesystemtimeto
completetheprocess,whichmaycontinueinthe
backgroundevenafterthediskoperationappearsto
becomplete.
Types of media you can use
Internal SSD
Theinternaldiskisa30GBsolidstatedrive,providing
fast,quietoperationandshockresistance.
USB storage media (hard drives, flash media, etc.)
TheKRONOSsupportsMSDOSFAT16andFAT32
formattedUSBstoragedevices,includingharddisks,
removabledisks,andflashmedia.
Capacityrecognized:
FAT32:upto2terabytes=2,000Gigabytes(GB)
FAT16:upto4GB
USB CD-R/RW and DVD drives
KRONOSsupportsthreeCDR/RWformats:UDF,CD
DA(audioCDs)andISO9660(level3).
StandardsavingandloadingfromCDR/RWdrives
usestheUDFformat,whichallowsyoutotreatCDs
muchasyouwouldaharddrive.Formore
information,seeCDR/RWdisksontheKRONOS:
UDF and packetwritingonpage 1153ofthe
ParameterGuide.
YoucanloaddatafromISO9660(level3)discs,but
KRONOSdoesnotwritedirectlytoISO9660format.
Youcan,however,convertaUDFformattedCDR/RW
toISO9660format,foreasierloadingonothersystems.
Formoreinformation,seeConverttoISO9660
Formatonpage 853oftheParameterGuide.
YoucanalsoloaddatafromUDFformattedDVD
ROMs.
Finally,youcansampleaudiofromCDDA(audioCD)
discs,andcanalsorecordyourownmusictoaudio
CDs.Formoreinformation,seeSamplingfroman
AudioCDonpage 145,andCreatingaudioCDson
page 195.
USB Floppy disks
MSDOSformat3.5inch2HDand2DDfloppydisks
canbeused.Theformattedcapacityofthefloppydisks
willbe1.44MB(18sectors/track)for2HD,and720KB
(9sectors/track)for2DD.
Media setup
Beforesavingorloadingdata,makesurethatthe
desireddiskorUSBstoragemediaisselected.
Setup for saving data on the internal disk
2. UseDriveSelecttoselectHDD:INTERNALHD.
Setup for using a USB device
1. UseaUSBcabletoconnecttheUSB2.0connector
oftheKRONOStotheUSBconnectorofyourUSB
device(harddisk,removabledisk,CDR/RW).
Note:TheKRONOSsUSB2.0connectorssupporthot
plugging;youcanconnectordisconnecttheUSBcable
whilethepowerison.Howeverinordertodoso,your
USBdevicemustalsosupporthotplugging.
2. Turnonthepower.
3. IfyouareusingaUSBharddisk,removabledisk,
orCDR/RWdrive,turnonthepowerofyourUSB
deviceanduseaUSBcabletoconnectittothe
KRONOSsUSB2.0connector.
Note:TheabovestepassumesthatyourUSBdevice
supportshotplugging.Ifyouareusingadevicethat
doesnotsupporthotplugging,connectitwiththe
powerturnedoff.Afterpluggingitin,turnonthe
power.
WhiletheKRONOSisaccessingtheUSBdevice,do
notconnectanotherUSBdeviceordisconnectthe
connecteddevice.Doingsomaydamageyourdata.
Drive Select
Saving data Saving to disks, CDs, and USB media
187
5. WaitafewsecondstoallowUSBdevicestobe
recognized.
6. UseDriveSelecttoselectthedesireddevice.
Ifyouareusingaremovabledisk,insertthemedia.
AfteryouexchangemediainyourUSBdevice,press
theLCDscreentomaketheKRONOSdetectthe
media.Whenthemediahasbeendetected,theLCD
screenwilldisplayinformationaboutthemedia.
7. Ifthemedianeedstobeformatted,executethe
Formatoperation.
Mediarequiringformattingisindicatedas
UnformattedinDriveSelect.Formoreinformation,
seeFormattingmediaonpage 188.
Saving memory contents to disk
Youcansavevarioustypesofdataindividually,as
listedunderSavingtodisk,CDs,andUSBmediaon
page 181.However,youcanalsosaveallofthemost
importantcontentsofmemoryatonce,including:
SetLists,Programs,Combinations,DrumKits,
WaveSequences,UserDrumTrackPatterns,and
globalsettings
Songsandrecordedaudio
SamplingModeMultisamplesandSamples
LinkstoloadedEXsandUserSampleBankdata
Ifyousavethisdatatolowcapacitymedia,you
mayneedmorethanonedisk.
Tosavealloftheabovedataatonce:
1. Preparethemediaonwhichyouwanttosavethe
data.(SeeMediasetuponpage 186.)
2. PressthefrontpanelDISKswitchtoenterDisk
mode.
3. SelecttheDiskSavepage.PresstheFiletab,and
thentheSavetab.
4. PressDriveSelecttoselectthesavedestination
drive.
5. Ifthemediacontainsdirectories,selectthe
directoryinwhichyouwanttosavethedata.
PresstheOpenbuttontomovetoalowerlevel,or
presstheUpbuttontomovetoanupperlevel.
Note:Ifyouaresavingdataonhighcapacitymedia,we
recommendthatyoucreatedirectoriestoorganizethe
mediaintosections.
Tocreateanewdirectory,movetothelevelatwhich
youwanttocreatethedirectory,andusetheUtility
pagemenucommandCreateDirectory.
6. SelecttheSaveAllcommandfromthepagemenu.
SaveAllwillsavethesounds,songs,andsampledata,
andKARMAGEsatthesametime.
Adialogboxwillappear.Thecontents,settings,and
operationsforthedialogboxwilldependonthetype
ofdatathatyouaresaving.
7. Pressthetexteditbuttonandenteranameforthe
files.(SeeEditingnamesonpage 184.)
AllofthefilescreatedbySaveAllwillsharethisname,
butwithdifferentfileextensions.Ifyouloadoneof
thesefileslater,youllbegiventheoptionto
automaticallyloadalloftheotherrelatedfilesas
wellahandytimesaver.
8. Fornow,leavealloftheboxescheckedinthe
Selectionbuttondialogs.
Thereareindividualcheckboxesforeachbankof
ProgramsandCombis,andforvariousothertypesof
data.Leavingallofthesecheckedensuresthatyoure
savingeverythingyoullneed.
9. PresstheOKbuttontoexecutetheSaveoperation.
Allofthedatawillbesaved,creatingahandfulof
differentfiles.Fordetails,seeFiletypesincludedin
SaveAll,below.
Whenthesaveiscomplete,thesystemreturnstothe
Savepage,andthedisplaywillshowtheresulting
file(s).Theamountoftimerequiredwilldependonthe
amountofdatabeingsaved.
Ifafilewiththesamenamealreadyexistsonthe
media,youwillbeaskedwhetheryouwantto
overwrite.Ifyouwishtooverwrite,presstheOK
button.Ifyouwishtosavewithoutoverwriting,press
theCancelbutton,redotheoperationfromstep6,and
renamethedatainstep7beforesavingit.
Split files
Ifthedatadoesnotfitontotheselectedvolume,the
Nospaceavailableonmediumdialogboxwill
appear.YoucanpresstheOKbuttontodividethefile
willbedividedandsaveittomultiplevolumesof
media(suchasmultipleUSBsticks).Ifyoudontwant
todividethefile,presstheCancelbutton,andsavethe
filetolargercapacitymedia.
Formoreinformation,seeSaveAll(PCG,SNGand
KSC)onpage 846oftheParameterGuide.
188
File types included in Save All
Thevarioustypesofdataaresavedasthefollowing
files.
.PCGfile:ThiscontainsallofthePrograms,
Combinations,Drumkits,WaveSequences,andglobal
settingsfromtheinternalmemory.
.SNGfile:ThiscontainsalloftheSongsfrom
Sequencermode.
Note:Iftheaudiotrackscontainrecordeddata,region
datawillalsobesavedatthistime.TheWAVEfilesare
storedinadirectorynamedafterthe.SNGplus_A
attheend,inthesamedirectoryasthe.SNGfileitself.
.KSCfile:ThislistsalloftheMultisamplesand
SamplesinSamplingMode,alongwithallofthe
loadedEXsandUserSampleBankMultisamplesand
DrumSamples.
Directory:AdirectorycontainingtheUser
Multisamples(.KMPfiles)andSamples(.KSFfiles)
thatarelistedinthe.KSCfile.
Data dependencies
WhenusingSaveAll,SavePCG&SNG,andSave
PCGtosaveCombinations,youshouldalsoremember
tosavetheProgramsusedbyeachtimbre(ortheDrum
KitsandWaveSequencesusedbythePrograms)atthe
sametime.
SimilarlywhensavingPrograms,youshouldalso
remembertosavetheDrumKitsandWaveSequences
usedbytheprograms.
Note:Ifyourprogramsordrumkitsusemultisamples
andsamplesthatwerecreatedinonKRONOS,we
recommendthatyouuseSaveAlltosavethedata.
WhenyouuseSavePCGorSaveSamplingDatato
individuallysaveaprogramordrumkit,ora
multisampleorsamplethatyoucreated,we
recommendthatyousavethemunderthesame
filenameinthesamedirectory.WhenyouuseLoad
PCGtoloada.PCGfile,theidenticallynamed.KSC
filewillalsobeloadedsothatthecorrect
multisamples/sampleswillcorrespondautomatically.
Saving only a single bank of sounds
Youcanalsochoosetosaveonlyasinglebankof
sounds,orjustafewbanks,withoutsavinganyother
data.Todoso:
1. GototheSavepage,andselectthediskand
directoryintowhichyoudliketostorethe
sounds.
Fordetails,seesteps1through5underSaving
memorycontentstodiskonpage 187.
2. SelecttheSave.PCGcommandfromthepage
menu.
TheSavePCGDatadialogappears.
3. PresseachSelectionbutton,andinthedialogbox
thatappears,selectonlythebanksthatyoudlike
tosave.
Remembertosaveanydependentdata!Forinstance,if
ProgramsuseWaveSequences,youneedtosavethe
WaveSequencesaswell.SeeDatadependencies,
above.
4. UnchecktheGlobalSettingandSetListcheck
boxes.
Ifyouresavingjustoneortwobanksofsounds,you
dontneedtosavethese.
5. IfthesoundsrelyonuserDrumTrackpatterns,
leaveDrumTrackPatternchecked.
6. Pressthetexteditbuttonandenteranameforthe
file.(SeeEditingnamesonpage 184.)
7. PressOKtosavethesounds.
Using the KRONOS as a data filer
TheKRONOScanreceiveMIDISystemExclusivedata
sentbyanexternaldevice,andsavethisdatatomedia.
(ThisissometimesreferredtoasDataFiler
functionality.)Formoreinformation,seeSave
Exclusiveonpage 850oftheParameterGuide)
Formatting media
Newlypurchasedmediaormediathathasbeenused
byanotherdevicemaynotbeabletobeusedasis.In
thiscase,youmayneedtoformatthemediabeforeyou
canuseitwiththeKRONOS.
TheKRONOSisshippedwiththeinternaldisk
alreadyformatted.
WhencreatingaudioCDs,youdontneedtoformat
theCDR/RWmedia.
Whenyouformat,alldatasavedonthatmediawill
beerased.Ifyouhadusedacomputeretc.tosetup
thatdrivesothatitcanbeusedasmultipledrives
(partitions),thisdatawillalsobeerased.Besureto
doublecheckbeforeyouformat.
Afterformatting,itisnotpossibletopressthe
COMPAREswitchtoreturntothepreviousstate.
1. Makesurethatthemediayouwanttoformatis
inserted.
(SeeMediasetuponpage 186)
3. SelecttheDiskUtilitypage.PresstheFiletab,
andthentheUtilitytab.
4. PressDriveSelect,andchoosethedrivethatyou
wanttoformat.
Saving data Saving to disks, CDs, and USB media
189
5. Pressthepagemenubuttontoaccessthepage
menu,andpressFormattoopenthedialogbox.
6. InVolumeLabel,usethetexteditbuttonto
accessthetexteditdialogbox,andspecifythe
volumelabel.
Thepreviouslyspecifiedvolumelabelwillbe
displayed.Ifnovolumelabelhadbeenspecifiedfor
themedia,orifanonDOSmediawasinserted,this
willindicateNEWVOLUME.
7. Specifytheinitializationformat.
QuickFormat:NormallyyoushoulduseQuick
Formattoinitializethemedia.
Selectthisifthemediahasalreadybeenphysically
formatted,orifyouwanttoformatmediathathas
beenUDFformattedbytheKRONOS.Sinceonlythe
systemareaofthemedianeedbeformatted,thiswill
requirelesstime.
Note:FortheinternaldiskyoucanonlyselectQuick
Format.
FullFormat:Selectthiswhenformattingmediathat
hasnotbeenphysicallyformatted,ormedia(CDRW)
thathasnotbeenUDFformatted.
Note:Normally,itisnotnecessarytoperformaFull
Formatonmediathathasbeenphysicallyformattedat
512bytes/block.ExecutetheQuickFormatforsuch
media.
Note:YouwillnormallyselectFullFormatforCDRW
mediaetc.thathasnotbeenUDFformatted.Ifanerror
messageofMedianotformattedappears,execute
FullFormat.
Dependingonthecapacityofthemedia,executingFull
Formatmayrequireasubstantiallengthoftime.
8. Specifythefilesystem.
UseFAT16toformatmediaof4GBorless(suchas
flashmedia),anduseFAT32toformatlargermedia
(theoretically,upto2Terabytes).
9. PresstheOKbuttontoformat,orpresstheCancel
buttonifyoudecidetocancel.
WhenyoupresstheOKbutton,amessagewillaskyou
forconfirmation.PresstheOKbuttononceagainto
executetheFormatoperation.
YoumustformataCDR/RWdiscifyouwanttouse
itforpacketwriting,orifithaspreviouslybeen
usedbyanotherdevice.
YoudonotneedtoformataCDR/RWdiscthatyou
willusetocreateanaudioCD.
YoumustusetheKRONOStoformatthemedia.
TheKRONOSwillnotcorrectlyrecognizemedia
thathasbeenformattedbyanotherdevice.
190
Loading data from disk
Thetypesofdatathatcanbeloadedfrommediaare
showninthediagramSupportedfiletypeson
page 192.(Formoredetails,seeLoadselectedon
page 828oftheParameterGuide.)
TheDiskmodeLoadpageletsyouloaddatafromthe
internaldiskoranyUSB2.0MassStorageDevice,such
asharddrives,flashmedia,CDR/RWdrives,etc.
Loading Songs, sounds, samples, and KARMAGEs together
Asanexamplehere,wellexplainhowtoloadasong
whichusesProgramsthatyouveedited,Multisamples
thatyouvecreated,andcustomKARMAGEs.Insuch
cases,itisbesttoloadalldata.
Whenloadingdata,makesurethattheGlobalmode
memoryprotectsettingisunchecked.Formore
information,seeMemoryprotectonpage 185.
1. MakesurethatthediskorUSBstoragemediais
readyforyoutoloaddata.(SeeMediasetupon
page 186.)
3. SelecttheDiskLoadpage.PresstheFiletab,and
thentheLoadtab.
PressDriveSelectandselectthemediafromwhich
youwanttoload.
4. Navigatetothedirectorythatcontainsthefileyou
wanttoload,andselectthe.SNGfile.
PresstheOpenbuttontomovetoalowerlevel,or
presstheUpbuttontomovetoahigherlevel.
Theselected.SNGfilewillbehighlighted.
Alternatively,youcanusetheLoadSelectedcommand
inthepagemenu.
Note:Thecontentsandsettingsofthedialogboxwill
differdependingonthetypeoffilethatyouare
loading.
AsdescribedunderSavingmemorycontentstodisk
onpage 187,theKRONOSassumesthatif.SNG,.PCG,
.KSC,and.KGEfilessharethesamename,theyre
associatedwithoneanother.Thenextfewoptionslet
youloadthesesimilarlynamedfiles,iftheyexist.
6. ChecktheLoad********.PCGtoocheckbox.
ThisloadsthePrograms,WaveSequences,DrumKits,
etc.alongwiththe.SNGfile.
7. Use.PCGContentstospecifythedatathatyou
wanttoloadfromthe.PCGfile.
Youcanloadonlyasinglebank,ifyoulike.Forthis
example,wewanttoallthedatainthe.PCGfile,so
wellselectAll.
8. ChecktheLoad********.KGEtoocheckbox.
ThisloadstheuserKARMAGEsalongwiththe.SNG
file.
9. ChecktheLoad********.KSCtoocheckbox.
ThisloadstheMultisamples,Samples,etc.alongwith
the.SNGfile.
10.Use.SNGAllocationtospecifywhetherornot
toeraseanySongscurrentlyinmemory.
Appendwillloadthesongintothesongnumberthat
followsthesong(s)currentlyexistingininternal
memory,withoutleavingavacantnumber.
Clearwilleraseallsongsfrominternalmemory,and
loadthesongsintothenumbersfromwhichtheywere
saved.
11.Use.KSCAllocationtospecifywhetherornotto
eraseanysamplescurrentlyinmemory.
Loading data from disk Loading Songs, sounds, samples, and KARMA GEs together
191
AppendwillleaveallcurrentlyloadedSampling
Mode,EXs,andUserSampleBankdataintact.
SamplingModeMultisamplesandSampleswillbe
loadedintothenextavailablevacantnumbers
followingtheexistingdata.
ClearSamplingModeDatawilleraseall
MultisamplesandSamplesfromSamplingMode,and
loadthedatainthesameconfigurationwithwhichit
wassaved.ExistingEXsandUserSampleBankdatais
leftintact.
ClearAllissimilartoClearSamplingModeData,
above,butalsounloadsexistingEXsandUserSample
Bankdatabeforeloadingthenew.KSCfile.Thisfrees
upthemostmemoryforthenew.KSC.
Youcanusetheinformationatthebottomofthedialog
box,includingMemoryRequired,(Memory)
Available,andEnoughslotsforSamples&MS,to
determinewhetherornotyouneedtofreeuproomfor
thenew.KSC.
12.SettheLoadMethodasdesired.
ThissetsthepreferredwaytoloadtheEXsandUser
SampleBankdataintheKSC:loaditintoRAM,oruse
VirtualMemory.Notethatifthedataisextremely
large,andwouldnotfitintoRAMregardlessofwhich
othersampleswereloaded,thedatawilluseVirtual
Memoryregardlessofthissetting.
ThesesettingsapplyonlytoEXsandUserSample
Banks;SamplingModedataisalwaysloadedinto
RAM.
RAM:ThesampleswillbeloadedintoRAM.Thishas
theadvantageofallowingreverseplayback.
VirtualMemory:ThesampleswilluseVirtual
Memory.Thisgenerallyallowsyoutoloadmorelarge
samplesatonce.Notethatthesamplesmaystill
requireasignificantamountofRAM
KSCSettings:KSCscanstoreseparateloadmethod
settingsforeachMultisampleorDrumSample,based
onthesettingswhentheKSCwassaved.SettingLoad
methodtoKSCSettingsusestheseindividualsettings.
13.PresstheOKbuttontoloadthedata.
NeverremoveordisconnectUSBstoragedevices
whiledataisbeingloaded.
Loading multiple files at once
Youcanusewildcardstospecifymultiple.KMP,
.KSF,.AIF,.WAV,SoundFont2,AkaiProgram,and
AkaiSamplefiles,andloadthemsimultaneously.For
moreinformation,seeLoadingmultiplefilesatonce
192
Supportedfiletypes
DOS directory
Undefned DOS fle
DOS fle
.PCG fle All programs
All combinations
All drum kits
(User)
All wave
sequences
1 program
bank I-A...F, U-A...GG
1 program
1 combination
bank I-A...G, U-A...G
1 combination
All set lists 1 set list
All drum track
patterns
1 drum track
pattern
1 slot
1 drum kit
bank INT, U-A...GG
1 drum kit
1 wave sequence
bank INT, U-A...GG
1 wave sequence
Global settings
DOS directory (created by Save SEQ on the KRONOS)
DOS directory
(created by Save Sampling Data on the KRONOS)
(Grey)
(Blue)
(Red)
(Purple)
(Grey)
.SNG fle 1 song
(000-199)
Track
User pattern
(U00...99)
All regions Region (Red)
.KFX fle
.KGE fle
All efects
All presets (U)
All efects
All presets (P)
1 efect
All presets (P)
1 efect
All presets (U)
1 efect
1 preset (P)
1 efect
1 preset (U)
All Template
All GEs 1 GE Bank
USER-A...USER-L
1 GE bank Template
USER-A...USER-D
1 GE
(Grey)
AKAI S1000/S3000
(Purple)
.KMP fle
.KSF fle
Sound font
fle
.KSC fle
.WAV fle (16bit)
.WAV fle (24bit)
.AIF fle
.MID fle
.EXL fle
.KCD fle
.SYX fle
.exsins
DOS fle
UserBank
.KSC fle
Partition Volume AKAI format
Program fle
AKAI format
Sample fle
All multisamples 1 multisample
All drumsamples 1 drumsample
EXs and User
Sample Bank data
All multisamples
All un-referenced samples
1 multisample
.KMP fle
1 sample
.KSF fle
1 sample
.KSF fle
Sampling mode
data
Loading data from disk Loading individual banks from a .PCG file
193
Loading individual banks from a .PCG file
1. Selectthe.PCGfilecontainingthedatayouwant
toload.
Refertosteps14ofLoadingSongs,sounds,samples,
and KARMA GEs togetheronpage 190.Selectthe
.PCGfileinstep5.
Youcanloadindividualbanksbyusing.PCG
Contentsinthedialogboxtoselecttheloadsource
bank,andTotoselecttheloaddestinationbank.
WhenyoupressOK,thesourcebanksPrograms,
Combinations,DrumKits,andWaveSequenceswillbe
loadedintothedestinationbank.Globalsettingdata
willnotbeloaded.
Ifyouset.PCGContentstoBankINTA,andToto
BankINTA,datawillbeloadedasfollows.
Programs
BankINTA:loadedintoBankINTA
Combinations
BankINTA:loadedintoBankINTA
DrumKits
INT:loadedintoBankINT
WaveSequences
INT:loadedintoBankINT
Whendataisloadedintoabankthatisdifferentthan
itsoriginalbank,thedata(bank,program,pattern,and
kitnumbers,etc.)willautomaticallybereconfiguredso
thatafterloading,thevarioustypesofdatawill
correspondcorrectlyineachmode.
Thefollowingdatawillalsobereconfigured
automaticallyifyouhavecheckedLoad.SNGtoo(so
thatsongdataisloadedatthesametime),the
followingdatawillalsobereconfiguredautomatically
inordertoensurethatthesongdataplaysback
correctly.
Thebankofeachprogramusedbycombinations
Thebankofeachdrumkitandwavesequenceused
byeachprogram
Thebankoftheprogramusedbyeachtrackofthe
song
Ifthesongcontainstrack/patternevents,the
programbankswithintheseevents
Loading data by individual item or bank
TheKRONOSletsyouloadprograms,combinations,
drumkits,andwavesequencesindividuallyorby
individualbanks.
Thisisaconvenientwaytorearrangecombinationsin
theorderinwhichyouwillusethemduringalive
performance.
BeawarethatifyouchangetheorderofPrograms,
thesoundsplayedbyCombinationsmayalsobe
affected.
Asanexamplehere,wewillexplainhowa
CombinationsavedinbankINTFcanbeloadedinto
INTE000.
1. MovetotheBankINTFdirectory,andselectthe
combinationthatyouwanttoload.(.PCG
file/Combinations/BankINTF/)
Theprocedureisasfollows.
1)Performsteps15underLoadingSongs,sounds,
samples,and KARMA GEs togetheronpage 190.
Selectthe.PCGfilecontainingthedatayouwantto
load(itwillbehighlighted),andpresstheOpen
button.
2)PressCombinationstohighlightit,andpress
theOpenbutton.
3)PressBankFtohighlightit,andpresstheOpen
button.
194
4)Pressthescrollbartofindthecombinationyou
wanttoload,andhighlightitinthedisplay.
Alternatively,youcouldselectanyfile,sincethe
desiredfilecanbeselectedlaterfromthedialogbox.
Note:WhenyoupressthekeyboardoftheKRONOS,
theselectedcombinationwillsound.However,the
internalprogramswillbeusedastheprogramofeach
timbre.
2. PressthepagemenubuttonandselecttheLoad
Selectedpagemenucommand.
Thedialogboxwillappear.
3. UsetheCombination(upperline)toselectthe
loadsourcecombination,anduse(To)
Combination(lowerline)tospecifythe
destinationcombination.Forthisexample,select
INTE000.
Asshippedfromthefactory,thisCombilocationis
empty;ithasnoname,andmakesnosound.
4. PresstheOKbuttontoexecuteloading;theloaded
combinationwillbeassignedtoINTE000.
Creating and playing audio CDs Creating audio CDs
195
Creating and playing audio CDs
Requires a USB CD-R/RW drive (not included)
IfyouhaveanexternalUSBCDR/RWdrive,youcan
sampledirectlyfromaudioCDs(aswellassimply
playingthem),andcreateyourownaudioCDs.
Creating audio CDs
InconjunctionwithanexternalUSBCDR/RWdrive,
youcanusetheKRONOStocreateaudioCDsofyour
music.Todothis,youll:
BouncethecompletedSongstoWAVEfiles
ArrangetheWAVEfilesinatracklist,intheorder
thatyoudlikethemtoappearontheCD
BurnthetracklisttoaCD
Part 1: Bouncing to disk
IfyourestartingwithSongsyouvecreatedin
Sequencermode,youllfirstneedtobouncetheSongs
toWAVEfilesontheinternaldisk.
1. InSequencermode,selectthefirstsongthatyou
wanttoburntotheCD.
2. Gotothe08:AudioIn/Samplingpage.
3. SelectthemenucommandBounceAllTracksTo
Disk.
Adialogboxwillappear,showingthefilesystem.
4. UseDriveSelect,Open,andUptoselectthe
directoryinwhichtheWAVEfilewillbesaved.
5. UseNametospecifytheWAVEfilesname.
6. PresstheOKbuttontostartthebounce.
TheSongwillstartplaying.Recordingwillbeginand
endautomatically,andtheresultingstereoWAVEfile
willbesavedtothedisk.
RepeatthestepsaboveforalloftheSongsthatyoud
liketoburntotheCD,andthenproceedtoPart2
below.
Make sure that theres space on the drive
WhenyoucreateanaudioCD,theKRONOSfirst
savesadraftversionoftheCDontothesamedrive
thatcontainstheoriginalWAVfiles,andthenburns
theactualCD.Thismeansthatthedrivemusthave
enoughfreespacetowriteasecond,temporary
copyofalltheCDsWAVEfiles.Makesurethatyou
haveenoughspacebeforeyoustart.
Part 2: Making the CD
2. GototheAudioCDMakeAudioCDpage.
ThispageletsyouselectagroupofWAVEfilestoburn
totheaudioCD.EachWAVEfilewillbecomesatrack
ontheCD,andsowellcallthisgroupofWAVEfiles
thetracklist.Beforeyouaddanyfiles,thetracklist
willshowonly====End====.
3. AddtheWAVEfilesthatyouwanttowritetothe
CD.
Select====End====(itwillbehighlighted),and
presstheInsertbutton.
TheInsertTrackdialogboxwillappear.
Usethedriveselect,OpenandUpbuttonstogoto
thedirectorythatcontainstheWAVEfile,andselect
theWAVEfilethatyouwanttoaddtothelist.
YoucanpressthePlaybuttontoplaybackthe
sampleforauditioning.Alternatively,youcanpress
theSAMPLINGSTART/STOPswitchtoplayit.
IfyouhaveselectedaWAVEfilewithasampling
frequencyotherthan44.1kHzor48kHz,itwillnot
bepossibletopresstheInsertbutton.
48kHzWAVEfileswillbeautomaticallyconverted
to44.1kHzwhenyouusetheWritetoCD
command.
Toaddthefile,presstheInsertbutton.
Youcancontinueaddingfilesuntilyoupressthe
Exitbutton.Thefileswillbeaddedtothetracklist
intheorderinwhichyouselectedthem.Ifyouwant
196
toaddalltheWAVEfilesinthedirectory,pressthe
InsertAllbutton.
Note:IfyouchecktheMultipleSelectoption,youll
beabletoselectmultipleWAVEfilesandinsert
theminasingleoperation.
Whenyouhavefinishedaddingfilestothelist,
presstheExitbuttontoclosethedialogbox.
NoticethattheWAVEfileshavebeenaddedtothe
tracklist.
YoucanalsousethePlaybuttontoplayany44.1kHz
or48kHzWAVEfile.
ToaddotherWAVEfilestothetracklist,pressthe
Insertbuttononceagain.
Ifyouwanttoaddanothertrack,selecttheWAVEfile
thatfollowsthetrackyouwanttoadd.Ifyouwantto
addthetracktotheendofthetracklist,select
====End====.ThenpresstheInsertbutton.
TodeleteaWAVEfilefromthetracklist,selectthe
WAVEfilethatyouwanttodelete,andpresstheCut
button.Subsequenttrackswillbemovedforwardin
thelist.
Note:Formoredetailsonothereditingoperations,
pleasesee11c:DriveSelect,Commandbuttonson
page 824oftheParameterGuide,andSwapTrack
4. InsertablankCDRorCDRWdiskintothedrive.
IntheMakeAudioCDpage,useDriveSelecttoselect
theexternalUSBCDR/RWdrive.TheCDR/RWdrive
isshownasCDD:BlankDisc.
AnaudioCDcannotbecreatedonadiscthat
containsdataotherthanaudio(e.g.,files).Inthis
case,itwillnotbepossibletoselectthemenu
commandsWritetoCDorFinalizeAudioCD.
Note:SincesomeaudioCDplayersareunabletoplay
backCDRWmedia,werecommendthatyouuseCD
RmediaforaudioCDs.
5. SelectthemenucommandWritetoCDtoopenthe
dialogbox,andspecifyhowtheCDwillbe
written.
UseSpeedtosetthewritingspeed.Thiswillindicate
thespeedssupportedbytheCDR/RWdriveyouare
using.Inthisexample,settheSpeedtothelowest
valueavailable(suchas1x).
Insomecases,fasterspeedsmaycausewriteerrors.
UseModetospecifythewritingmethod.
Note:Dependingonthedriveyouareusing,itmaynot
bepossibletowriteatthespecifiedspeed.We
recommendthatthefirsttimeyouwrite,youselect
Testtoperformawritingtestinordertodeterminethe
speedcapabilitiesofyourdrive.Testwillnotwrite
datatotheCDR/RWmedia,butwillperformallother
processingjustaswhendataisactuallywritten.Ifan
erroroccurs,thedisplaywillshowthemessageError
inwritingtomedium.
PresstheOKbuttontoexecutethewritingtest.
Afterverifyingthatdatacanbewrittencorrectlyatthe
specifiedspeed,selectWrite.
ExecutefinalizetoospecifieswhetherFinalizationwill
beexecutedaftertheaudiotrackshavebeenwrittento
theCDR/RWmedia.Iffinalizationhasbeenexecuted,
thedisccanbeplayedbackonaCDplayer,butitwill
nolongerbepossibletoaddmoretracks.
Note:Ifyouonlywanttoexecutefinalization,usethe
FinalizeAudioCDcommand.
6. WhenyouarereadytowritetotheCDR/RW
media,ortoexecuteawritingtest,presstheOK
button.Tocancelwithoutexecuting,pressthe
Cancelbutton.
WhenyoupresstheOKbutton,theObey
CopyrightRulesdialogboxwillappear.
7. CarefullyreadCOPYRIGHTWARNINGon
page 3oftheQuickStartGuide,andifyou
consenttotheterms,presstheOKbuttontobegin
burningtheCD.Ifyoudonotconsenttotheterms,
presstheCancelbuttontocanceltheoperation.
Inordertoavoiderrors,donotsubjectthedriveto
physicalshockorvibrationwhileCDR/RWmedia
isbeingwritten.
Saving Track Lists
Thetracklistwillbelostwhenthepoweristurnedoff.
Ifyouwanttokeepthisdata,youmustsaveit.
1. IntheSavepage,selectthedirectoryinwhichyou
wanttosavethetracklist.
2. SelectthepagemenucommandSaveAudioCD
TrackListtoopenthedialogbox.
3. PresstheOKbuttontosavethedata,orpressthe
Cancelbuttontocancelwithoutsaving.
Creating and playing audio CDs Playing audio CDs
197
Playing audio CDs
YoucanplayaudioCDsincludingCDsyouve
createddirectlyontheKRONOS,inconjunctionwith
anexternalUSBCDR/RWdrive.
Todoso:
1. PressthePlayAudioCDtabtogotothePlay
AudioCDpage.
2. InDriveSelect,selectyourUSBCDR/RWdrive.
DriveSelectwillindicateAudioCD.
3. Toallowmonitoring,settheCDR/RWDrive
AudioInputasfollows.
LEFT:Bus(IFX/Indiv.)L/R,FXCtrlBusOff,REC
BusOff,Send1/Send2000,PanL000,Level127
RIGHT:Bus(IFX/Indiv.)L/R,FXCtrlBusOff,REC
BusOff,Send1/Send2000,PanR127,Level127
Volume:127
4. UseTracktoselectthetrack,andpressthe
SEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitchtobegin
playback.
198
Other disk operations
Setting the date and time
KRONOShasaninternalcalendar,whichisusedto
recordthedateandtimewhenyousavedata.Youcan
setthedateandtimebyusingtheDiskUtilitypages
SetDate/Timemenucommand.
Youwillneedmakethesesettingsafteryoupurchase
theKRONOS,andafterreplacingthecalendarbackup
battery.
2. SelecttheDiskUtilitypage.PresstheFiletab,
andthentheUtilitytab.
3. Openthepagemenu,andselecttheSetDate/Time
command.
Thefollowingdialogboxwillappear.
4. UsetheVALUEcontrollerstosetthecorrectyear,
month,day,hour,minute,andsecond.
Ifthecalendarbackupbatteryrunslow,the
followingmessagewillappearintheLCDscreen:
Theclockbatteryvoltageislow.Pleasereplacethe
battery,andsetthedateandtimeinDiskmode
Ifthecalendarbackupbatteryrunsdown
completely,thecalendarwillbeinitialized,andthe
dateandtimewillnotberecordedcorrectly.Your
KorgDistributorcanhelpyoufindaservicecenter
toreplacethebattery.
199
Using Effects
Effects overview
Effects basics
TheKRONOSprovides12inserteffects,twomaster
effects,andtwototaleffects,togetherwithamixerthat
controlstheroutingoftheseeffects.Alloftheseare
stereoin/out.
Specificparametersoftheseeffectscanalsobe
controlledinrealtimefromtheKRONOScontrollers
orviaMIDImessagesusingDynamicModulation
(Dmod),byMIDI/TempoSync,orbyusingacommon
LFOortheVectorEGtoapplysynchronizedchangeto
differingmodulationeffects.
Effect types
Youcanchoosefrom185differenteffectsinthe
followingcategories:
Effecttypes
Maximum number of effects and
maximum voice polyphony
ForeacheffectIFX112,MFX1and2,andTFX1and2,
youarefreetochooseanduseanyof185typesof
effect.Thereisnolimitationonthemaximumnumber
ortypeofeffectsyoucanuse.DuringSmoothSound
Transitions,theKRONOSmayuseupto34effectsat
once(includingtheSetListEQ).
However,acertainamountofdigitalprocessing
capabilitymustbeusedinordertoproduceeacheffect.
ThePerformanceMeterspageshowstheamountof
processingpowercurrentlybeingused.Youcanfind
thisonthePerfMeterstabofP0inProgram,
Combination,andSequencermodes.
Pleasenotethatpowerusedbytheeffectsmay
sometimeshaveanimpactontheavailablenumberof
voices(althoughgenerallyonlyinextremeconditions).
Formoreinformation,seeAboutpolyphonyon
page 16.
What is REMs * ?
(ResonantstructureandElectroniccircuit
ModelingSystem)isKorgsproprietarytechnologyfor
digitallyrecreatingthenumerousfactorsthatproduce
andinfluenceasound,rangingfromthesound
productionmechanismsofacousticinstrumentsand
electric/electronicmusicalinstruments,tothe
resonancesofaninstrumentbodyorspeakercabinet,
thesoundfieldinwhichtheinstrumentisplayed,the
propagationrouteofthesound,theelectricaland
acousticresponseofmicsandspeakers,andthe
changesproducedbyvacuumtubesandtransistors.
Dynamics:
000010
Effects which control volume, such as
compressors, limiter, and gates
EQ/Filter:
011026
Effects which control frequency content, such
as EQ, multi-mode filter, exciter, and wah
OD/Amp/Mic:
027039
Overdrive and amp modeling effects such as
guitar/bass amps and mic preamps
Cho/Fln/Phs:
040054
Choruses, Flangers, Phasers, and other pitch
and phase modulation effects
Mod/P.Shift:
055076
Other modulation effects such as tremolo and
rotary speaker, and pitch shifters
Delay:
077099
Delays
Reverb/ER:
100108
Reverb and early reflections
Mono-Mono:
109140
Chains of two mono effects in series
Mono/Mono:
141185
Dual Mono parallel effects, with independent
mono effects for the left and right inputs
Using Effects
200
Effect I/O
Insert effects
InsertEffects(IFX112)arestereoin/stereoout.Ifyou
setWet/DrytoDry,theinputsignalwillpassthrough
withoutbeingprocessedbytheeffect.Ifyouset
Wet/DrytoWet,theprocessedsignalwillbeoutputin
oneofthefollowingways:
Master Effects
TheI/OsofMasterEffectsMFX1andMFX2arestereo
in/stereoout.Send1andSend2determinethesend
leveltotheMasterEffects.
MastereffectswillnotoutputtheDry(unprocessed)
signalspecifiedinWet/Dry.OnlytheWet(processed)
signalwillbeoutput.Theoutputsignalsfromthe
MasterEffectsareroutedtotheL/Rbuswiththe
outputlevelspecifiedbyReturn1andReturn2.These
outputsignalsaremixedwiththeoutputsignalsfrom
thebusspecifiedbyBusSelect(P8:Routingpagein
eachmode)L/R,orwiththeoutputsignalsfromthe
busspecifiedbyBusSelect(InsertFXpageineach
mode)L/R,thenroutedtothetotaleffect.
Selecting000:NoEffectwillmutetheoutput.The
processedsignalwillbeoutputinoneofthefollowing
ways,accordingtothetypeofeffects001185.
Total Effects
ThetotaleffectsTFX1andTFX2arestereoin/stereo
out.TheDry(unprocessed)sideoftheWet/Dry
parametersendsthestereoinputsounddirectlytothe
stereooutput.ThewayinwhichtheWet(processed)
sideisoutputdependsonthetypeofeffect,asfollows.
Note:TheParameterGuideincludesblockdiagramsfor
eachindividualeffect,whichincludetheeffects
input/outputstructure.
Set List EQ
SetListshaveanadditionaleffectsslotnotavailablein
theothermodes:adedicatedninebandgraphicEQ
appliedtothesoundafterTFX2,whichtailorsthe
soundfromthemainstereooutputs(includingthe
analogL/Routputs,S/PDIF,andUSB).
Formoreinformation,seeGraphicEQonpage 119.
Effects in each mode
Program mode
ForHD1Programs,youcanuseinserteffectsto
processthefinalsoundinthesamewaythatyouuse
theFilter,Driver,Amplifier,andEQ(equalizer)to
processthesoundfromtheoscillators(OSC1&2).
Thenthemastereffectsareusedtocreateoverall
ambiencesuchasreverb,andusethetotaleffectsto
makefinaladjustments.Allofthesesettingscanbe
madeindependentlyforeachProgram.
EXiProgramsmayhaveadifferentfilterandamp
structureforeachtype,butyoucanalsoapplyinsert
effects,mastereffects,andtotaleffectstoEXi1&2,just
asforOSC1&2anHD1Program.
InbothHD1andEXiPrograms,theDrumTrackalso
hasitsownindependentroutingtotheeffects.
Combination and Sequencer modes
InCombinationandSequencermodes,youcanusethe
trackEQandinserteffectstoprocesstheprogram
sound(andaudiotracksound)ofeachtimbre/track.
Stereo In - Stereo Out
Mono In - Mono Out
Mono In - Stereo Out
Effect
Effect
Effect +
Effect +
Wet
Mono In - Mono Out
Effect
Effect
Effect +
Effect +
Wet
Mono In - Mono Out
Effect
Effect
Effect +
Effect +
Wet
Programmode
Oscillator1 Filter1 Driver1 Amplifer1
Oscillator2 Filter2 Driver2 Amplifer2 EQ Insert Efect 112 Total Efect 112
Master Efect 1, 2
Return
OUTPUT
L/MONO, R
Send
EQ Drum Track
Effects overview Effects in each mode
201
Thenyoucanusethemastereffectstocreateoverall
ambience,andusethetotaleffectstomakefinal
adjustments.
InCombinationmodeyoucanmakethesesettingsfor
eachcombination,andinSequencermodeyoucan
makethemforeachsong.
InSequencermode,youcanswitchbetweeneffectsor
modifytheeffectparametersandrecordthesechanges,
sothateffectswillswitchautomaticallyoreffect
parameterswillbemodifiedautomaticallyasthesong
playsback.
Sampling mode
InSamplingmode,theanalog,S/P DIF,andUSBaudio
inputs,aswellasplaybackfromaUSBCDdrive,can
beprocessedbyinserteffects,mastereffects,andtotal
effects,andthensampled.UsetheP0:Recording
AudioInputpagetomakeaudioinputsettingsfor
Samplingmode.ThesesettingsapplyonlytoSampling
mode.
Samplesthatyouveassignedasamultisamplecan
alsobeprocessedbytheinserteffects,mastereffects,
andtotaleffects,andthenresampled.
Audio Inputs
Youcanalsouseaudiofromtheanalog,S/P DIF,and
USBaudioinputsinPrograms,Combinations,and
Songs.
Youcanapplytheinserteffects,mastereffects,and
totaleffectstoexternalaudiosourcesandsample
them,orusetheKRONOSasa6in(AUDIOINPUT1
2,S/P DIFINL,R,andUSB)6outeffectprocessor.
Youcanalsouseanexternalmicinputtocontrola
vocodereffect(093:Vocoder),andmodulatethe
internalsounds.Forexamples,seeVocoder(Program
mode)onpage 861oftheParameterGuideand
RhythmicVocoder(Combinationmode)onpage 862
InSequencermodeyoucanalsousetheeffectswhen
recordingexternalaudiosourcestoaudiotracks.
UsetheP0AudioInput/Samplingpageofeachmode
tomakeaudioinputsettings.Alternatively,youcan
checkUseGlobalSettingandmakethesesettingsin
theGlobalmodeP0:BasicSetupAudiopage.
NormallyyouwillleaveUseGlobalSettingchecked.
Uncheckthisifyouwantprogramsandcombinations
tousetheirownsettings.Forexamplewhenwriting
theprogramasavocodereffectprogram.
Wheneffectsareappliedtotheaudioinputs,certain
effecttypesorparametersettingsmaycause
oscillationtooccur.Ifthisoccurs,adjusttheinput
level,outputlevel,oreffectparameters.Pleasebe
awareofthisparticularlywhenusinganeffectthat
hasahighgain.
CombinationandSequencer
modes
Timbre 1 /MIDI Track 1 EQ
Timbre 16 /MIDI Track 16 EQ
Audio Track 1 EQ
Audio Track 16 EQ
Insert Efect 112 Total Efect 112
Master Efect 1, 2
Return
OUTPUT
L/MONO, R
Send
Samplingmode
Insert Efect 112 Total Efect 112
Master Efect 1, 2
Return
Sample
Recording
Send
Sampling
AUDIO INPUT (1, 2)
USB B (1, 2)
S/P DIF IN (L, R)
Audio CD
EQ Insert Efect 112 Total Efect 112
Master Efect 1, 2
Return
Resampling
Send
AudioInput
Oscillator1 Filter1 Driver1 Amplifer1
Oscillator2 Filter2 Driver2 Amplifer2 EQ Insert Efect 112 Total Efect 112
Master Efect 1, 2
Return
OUTPUT
L/MONO, R
Send
S/P DIF IN (L, R)
AUDIO INPUT (1, 2)
USB B (1, 2)
Using Effects
202
Effects selection and routing
Theinserteffects,mastereffects,andtotaleffectshave
thesamestructureinallmodes,buttherouting
settingswilldeterminehowtheoscillatorsofa
Program,timbresofaCombination,ortracksofaSong
willbesenttoeachinserteffect,mastereffectortotal
effect.Inthepagesthatfollow,wewillexplainhow
youcanmakeroutingsettingsandeffectsettingsin
eachmode.
Using effects in Programs
Routing to IFX, outputs, and buses
1. GototheProgramP8:InsertEffectRoutingpage.
2. UseBusSelect(IFX/Indiv.OutAssign)tospecify
thebustowhichtheoscillatoroutputwillbesent.
Ifyouwanttheoscillatoroutputtobeinputto
inserteffect1,chooseIFX1.
L/R:Theoutputwillnotbesenttothetotaleffects.
Afterpassingthroughthetotaleffect,thesoundwill
besenttoAUDIOOUTPUT(MAIN)L/MONOand
R.
IFX112:TheoutputwillbesenttoinserteffectIFX
112.
14,1/23/4:TheoutputwillbesenttoAUDIO
OUTPUT(INDIVIDUAL)14.Itwillnotbesentto
theinserteffects,themastereffects,orthetotal
effects.
Off:TheoutputwillnotbesenttoAUDIO
OUTPUT(MAIN)L/MONO,R,orto
(INDIVIDUAL)14.Choosethisifyouwantthe
signaltobeseriesconnectedtothemastereffectsat
thesendlevelsspecifiedbySend1(MFX1)and
Send2(MFX2).
3. OSCMFXSendspecifiesthesendlevelfromeach
oscillatortothemastereffects.
ThiscanbesetonlywhenBusSelect
(IFX/Indiv.OutAssign)iseitherL/RorOff.
IfBusSelect(IFX/Indiv.OutAssign)issettoIFX1
12,thesendleveltothemastereffectsissetby
Send1andSend2(InsertFXpage)afterthesignal
passesthroughtheinserteffects.
4. FXControlBus(AllOSCsto)sendsthe
oscillator1and2outputtotheFXControlbus.Use
thisifyouwanttheaudioinputtotheeffecttobe
controlledbyadifferentsound.
YoucanusethetwoFXControlbusestocontrol
effectsfreely.
5. RECBussendstheoscillator1and2outputtothe
RECbuses.
IntheP0AudioInput/Samplingpage,youcanset
theSamplingSetupSourceBustoaRECbus,and
samplethesignalbeingsenttotheRECbus.
NormallyyouwillturnthisOff,sinceyouwill
usuallysetSourceBustoL/Rwhensamplingthe
outputofoscillator1and2.
Drum Track routing
TheDrumTrackroutingiscontrolledseparatelyfrom
themainProgram.Theoptionsareverysimilarto
thoseforthemainProgram,asdescribedabove.The
DrumTrackroutingparametersareontheProgram
P1:Basic/VectorDrumTrackpage(P4inEXi
Programs).
Insert effects
1. GototheInsertFXpage.
2. Choosetheeffecttypethatyouwanttousefor
eachinserteffectIFX112.
Whenyoupressthepopupbutton,alleffectswillbe
displayed,organizedintoninecategories.Usethe
pageslocatedatthelefttoselectacategory,and
selectaneffectfromthatcategoryontheLCD
screen.
YoucanusetheCopyInsertEffectpagemenu
commandtocopyeffectsettingsfromanother
programetc.Also,youcanuseSwapInsertEffect
toexchange(forexample)IFX1andIFX12.
3. PresstheOn/Offbuttontoturnontheinsert
effect.
Eachtimeyoupressthebutton,theinserteffectwill
beswitchedon/off.WhenOff,theresultwillbethe
sameaswhen000:NoEffectisselected.Theinput
soundwillbeoutputwithoutchange.
Effects selection and routing Using effects in Programs
203
4. MakeChainsettings.
IftheChaincheckboxischecked,theinserteffect
willbeconnectedinseries.Sincetheoutputofthe
oscillatorisbeingsenttoIFX1instep2,making
settingsasshowninthediagramstep6would
connectallfiveinsertioneffectsIFX1IFX2
IFX3IFX4IFX5inseries,sothattheseeffects
wouldbeinsertedintotheoutputoftheoscillator.
5. MakesettingsforPan(CC#8),BusSel.(Bus
Select),Send1,Send2,RECBusandCtrlBusfor
thesoundafterithaspassedthroughtheinsert
effects.
Ifyouvespecifiedachain,thesettingsthatfollow
thelastIFXinthechainwillbevalid(exceptfor
CtrlBus).
Pan:SetsthepanoftheIFXoutput.
BusSel.(BusSelect):Specifiestheoutput
destination.NormallyyouwillsetthistoL/R.Ifyou
wishtosendthesoundthathaspassedthroughthe
inserteffectstoAUDIOOUTPUT(INDIVIDUAL)
14,select14,1/2,or3/4.
Send1,Send2:Setsthesendlevelstothemaster
effects.Forthisexample,setthisto127.
CtrlBus:TheFXControlBusesletsyoucreate
effectssidechains.Sidechainsletyoucontrolan
effectwithoneaudiosignal(thesidechain),while
theeffectprocessesacompletelydifferentaudio
signal.Thisisconvenientforusewithvocoders,
compressorsandlimiters,gates,etc.Formore
information,seeFXControlBusesonpage 860of
theParameterGuide.
RECBus:Thesoundprocessedbytheinserteffect
willbesenttotheRECbus.IntheP0Audio
Input/Samplingpage,youcansettheSampling
SetupSourceBustoaRECbus,andsamplethe
signalthatissenttotheRECbus.Usethisifyou
wanttosampleonlythesoundofanaudioinput
sourcebeingprocessedbyaninserteffect(andnot
samplethesoundoftheoscillatoroutput).
Alternatively,thedirectsoundfromtheaudio
inputscanbemixedwiththesoundprocessedbyan
inserteffect,senttoaRECbus,andsampled.
6. GototheP8:InsertEffectInsertFXpage,andedit
theparametersoftheinserteffectyouselected.
PresstheIFX112tab,usethetabsattheleftto
selectIFX112,andedittheeffectparameters.
Effect1On/Off:Turnstheinserteffecton/off.This
islinkedwiththeon/offsettingintheInsertFX
page.
P(EffectPreset):Selectsaneffectpreset.The
KRONOSinternalmemorycontainseffect
presetswhichareparametersettingsforeacheffect
from001:St.DynaCompressorthrough185:
Mt.BPMDly//Mt.BPMDly.
Effectparametersyoueditaresavedaspartofeach
program,buteffectpresetsallowyoutosave
favoriteparametersettingsforeacheffect.Formore
information,seeEffectPresetsonpage 211.
Fordetailsontheindividualeffects,see:
Dynamicsonpage 889oftheParameterGuide
EQandFiltersonpage 902oftheParameter
Guide
Overdrive,Ampmodels,andMicmodelson
Chorus,Flanger,andPhaseronpage 927ofthe
ParameterGuide
ModulationandPitchShiftonpage 940ofthe
ParameterGuide
Delayonpage 961oftheParameterGuide
ReverbandEarlyReflectionsonpage 983ofthe
ParameterGuide
MonoMonoSerialonpage 988oftheParameter
Guide
Mono/MonoParallelonpage 1004ofthe
ParameterGuide
Master effects
Theinputlevelstothemastereffectsaresetbythe
Send1&2levels.IfSend1&2arezero,themaster
effectswillnotbeheard.Send1goestoMFX1,and
Send2goestoMFX2.
1. GototheProgramP9:Master/TotalEffect
Routingpage.
2. InMFX1andMFX2,selectthetypeofeachmaster
effect.
P (Efect preset) Efect On/Of
Efect Parameters Wet/Dry
Using Effects
204
Theprocedureisthesameaswhenselectingan
inserteffect.
3. PresstheOn/Offbuttontoturnonthemaster
effect.
Eachtimeyoupressthebutton,themastereffect
willbeswitchedon/off.WhenOff,theoutputofthe
mastereffectwillbemuted.
4. UseReturn1andReturn2toadjusttheoutput
levelsofthemastereffects.
Note:Foreacheffect,theWetvalueoftheWet/Dry
parameteristheoutputlevelattheeffect.The
returnvalueismultipliedwiththis(Return=127
willbex1.0)todeterminetheactualoutputlevelof
themastereffect.
5. SelecttheMFX1andMFX2pages,andsetthe
parametersforeachselectedeffectasdesired.
Total Effects
IfyouuseBusSelect(IFX/Indiv.OutAssign)tochoose
L/Rastheoscillatoroutput,orifyousetthepostIFX
BusSelecttoL/R,thesignalwillgothroughthetotal
effect.
Theoutputfromthemastereffectsissenttothetotal
effectsviatheReturn1andReturn2settingsonthe
ProgramP9:Master/TotalEffectRoutingpage.
Afterbeingprocessedthroughthetotaleffects,the
signalgoestotheAUDIOOUTPUT(MAIN)L/MONO
andRoutputs.
1. GototheProgramP9:Master/TotalEffect
Routingpage.
2. ChoosethedesiredtotaleffectforTFX1andTFX2.
Theprocedureisthesameaswhenselectingan
inserteffect.(Seestep7)
3. PresstheOn/Offbuttontoturnthetotaleffectson.
Thetotaleffectwillbeswitchedon/offeachtime
youpressthebutton.IfthisisOff,theresultwillbe
thesameasif000:NoEffectisselected.Theinput
4. AccesstheTFX1orTFX2pages,andeditthe
parametersofeacheffecttoadjustthefinalsound
asdesired.
FordetailsontheUsingeffectsinProgramsstep
11.
Using effects in Combinations and Songs
InCombination,andSequencermodes,youcan
specifytheroutingofeachtimbre/tracktotheinsert
effects,mastereffectsandtotaleffects.Thesesettings
aremadeinthesamewayineachofthesemodes.We
willbeusingtheexampleofCombinationmodeinour
explanationhere.
1. GototheCombinationP8:InsertEffectRouting1
page.
2. UseBusSelect(IFX/Indiv.OutAssign)tospecify
thebustowhicheachtimbrewillbeoutput.
ChooseIFX1ifyouwanttosendtheoutputofa
timbretoinserteffect1.
Therouting,inserteffects,andchainsettingsare
showngraphicallyintheupperpartofthedisplay
screen.Inthisexample,T01(timbre1)usesIFX1and
2.T02usesIFX2,T03usesIFX3and4,T02andT05
useIFX4,andT06andT07useIFX5.
3. UseSend1andSend2tospecifythesendlevelof
eachtimbretothemastereffects.
ThiscanbesetonlyifBusSelect(IFX/Indiv.Out
Assign)issettoL/RorOff.
Note:Theactualsendlevelisdeterminedby
multiplyingthisbytheSend1orSend2
settingsforoscillators1and2withintheprogram
selectedbythetimbre.Iftheprogramparameter
Send1orSend2issetto0,theresultinglevel
willstillbe0evenifyouraisethissendlevel.
IfBusSelect(IFX/Indiv.OutAssign)issettoIFX1
12,thesendlevelstothemastereffectsaresetby
Send1andSend2(InsertFXpage)followingthe
inserteffects.
4. GototheCombinationP8:InsertEffectRouting2
page.
BusSelect(IFX/Indiv.OutAssign)isthesameasin
theRouting1page.Youcansetitfromeitherpage.
FXControlBussendstheoutputofthetimbretoan
FXControlbus.Usethiswhenyouwanttheaudio
inputtoaneffecttobecontrolledbyanothersound.
TherearetwoFXControlbuses,whichgivesyoua
greatdealoffreedomforcontrollingeffectsfreely.
RECBussendstheoutputofthetimbretoaREC
bus.IntheP0AudioInput/Samplingpage,youcan
settheSamplingSetupSourceBustoaRECbus,
andsamplethesignalthatissenttotheRECbus.
Usethisifyouwanttosampleonlythesoundofa
specifictimbre.
Note:SequencermodehassettingsforMIDIRouting
1/2andAudioRouting1/2.Thesespecifytheeffect
routingforMIDItracksandaudiotracks.
InSequencermode,youcanalsochooseaRECbus
astheRECSourceforeachtrackintheP0Audio
Effects selection and routing Using effects in Combinations and Songs
205
TrackMixerpage,sothatthesignalssenttotheREC
bus(es)canberecordedtothedisk.
Insert effects
Continuingfromtheabove:
1. GototheCombinationP8:InsertEffectInsertFX
page.
2. Choosetheeffecttypethatyouwanttousefor
eachinserteffectIFX112.
Pressthepopupbutton,andchooseaneffectfrom
theninecategories.
effect.
willbeconnectedinseries.
MakesettingsforPan(CC#8),BusSel.(Bus
Select),Send1,Send2,RECBusandCtrl
Busforthesoundafterithaspassedthroughthe
inserteffects.
Ifyouvespecifiedachain,thesettingsthatfollow
thelastIFXinthechainwillbevalid(exceptfor
CtrlBus).
Pan:Setsthepan.
14,select14,1/2,or3/4.
CtrlBus:TheFXControlBusesletsyoucreate
effectssidechains.Sidechainsletyoucontrolan
effectwithoneaudiosignal(thesidechain),while
theeffectprocessesacompletelydifferentaudio
signal.Thisisconvenientforusewithvocoders,
theParameterGuide.
RECBus:TheIFXoutputwillgototheRECbus.In
theP0AudioInput/Samplingpage,youcansetthe
SamplingSetupSourceBustoaRECbus,and
samplethesignalthatissenttotheRECbus.Use
thisifyouwanttosampleonlythesoundofan
audioinputsourcebeingprocessedbyaninsert
effect(andnotsamplethesoundoftheoscillator
output).Youcanalsousethisifyouwanttosample
onlyaspecifictimbre.Alternatively,thedirect
soundfromtheaudioinputscanbemixedwiththe
soundprocessedbyaninserteffect,senttoaREC
bus,andsampled.
Note:InSequencermode,youcanalsochooseaREC
busastheRECSourceforeachtrackintheP0
AudioTrackMixerpage,sothatthesignalssentto
theRECbus(es)canberecordedtothedisk.
YoucanuseMIDItocontroldynamicmodulation
(Dmod)foreacheffect,thepostIFXpan(CC#8),
andSend1andSend2.
Anasterisk*isshownattherightofCh01Ch16
forthechannelnumberoftracksroutedtoIFX.If
youveroutedmultipletracksthathavediffering
MIDIchannelsettings,thisspecifiesthechannelon
whichtheywillbecontrolled.
5. GototheIFX112pagestoedittheindividual
effectparameters.
Formoredetails,seestep6underUsingeffectsin
Programs,beginningonpage 202.
Master effects and Total effects
Thesesettingscanbemadeinthesamewayasin
UsingeffectsinPrograms(p.203).
YoucancontroltheseeffectsviaMIDIontheCtrl
Ch.ThespecifiedMIDIchannelwillcontrol
dynamicmodulation(Dmod)fortheMasterand
TotalEffects.
Using Effects
206
Using effects in Sampling mode
InSamplingmode,youcanapplyeffectstoexternal
audiosourcesfromtheAUDIOINPUT12and
S/P DIFINjacks,andsampletheresult.Youcanalso
applyeffectstotheaudiofromaUSBaudioCD,and
sampletheresult.Itsalsopossibletoapplyeffectstoa
multisampleandresampletheresult.
Routing an external input
1. GototheSamplingP0:RecordingAudioInput
page.
2. UseBusSelect(IFX/Indiv.)tospecifythebusto
whicheachaudioinputwillbesent.
Forexampleifyouwantthesignalfromadevice
connectedtoAUDIOINPUT1tobeinputtoinsert
effect1,settheINPUT1BusSelect(IFX/Indiv.)to
IFX1.
ThiscanbesetonlyifBusSelect(IFX/Indiv.)isset
toL/RorOff.
levelstothemastereffectsaresetbySend1and
Send2(InsertFXpage)followingtheinserteffects.
4. SetPLAY/MUTEandSoloOn/Offasdesired.You
canusethecontrolsurfacetomakethesesettings.
5. UsePantosetthepanningoftheaudioinput.
Ifyoureinputtingastereoaudiosource,youwill
normallysettheinputstoL000andR127
respectively.
6. UseLeveltoadjusttheleveloftheaudioinput.
Normallyyouwillleavethisat127.
7. FXControlBussendstheoutputofthetimbreto
anFXControlbus.
TheFXControlBusesletsyoucreateeffects
sidechains.Sidechainsletyoucontrolaneffect
withoneaudiosignal(thesidechain),whilethe
effectprocessesacompletelydifferentaudiosignal.
Thisisconvenientforusewithvocoders,
theParameterGuide.
8. RECBussendstheaudioinputtoaRECbus.
ByselectingaRECbusastheSourceBus,youcan
samplethesignalthatsbeingsenttotheRECbus.
Normallywhensamplinginthismode,youwill
turnthisOff,sincetheSourceBuswillbesettoL
andR.
Insert effects
1. GototheInsertFXpage.
2. Choosetheinserteffectthatyouwanttouseon
theaudioinput.
Pressthepopupbutton,andchooseaneffectfrom
theninecategories.
effect.
willbeconnectedinseries.
5. MakesettingsforPan(CC#8),BusSel.(Bus
Select),Send1,Send2,RECBusandCtrl
Busforthesoundafterithaspassedthroughthe
inserteffects.
Ifeffectsarechained,thesettingsthatfollowthelast
IFXarevalid(exceptforCtrlBus).
Pan:Setsthepan.
14,select14,1/2,or3/4.
CtrlBus:Thesignalprocessedbytheinserteffect
willbesenttotheFXControlbus.Usethisifyou
wanttouseanothersoundtocontroltheaudio
beinginputtoaneffect.YoucanusethetwoFX
Controlbusestocontroleffectsfreely.
Formoreinformation,seeFXControlBuseson
Effects selection and routing Using effects with the audio inputs
207
RECBus:Thesoundprocessedbytheinserteffect
willbesenttotheRECbus.IntheP0AudioInput
page,youcansettheSamplingSetupSourceBusto
aRECbus,andsamplethesignalthatissenttothe
RECbus.NormallyyouwillsamplewithSource
BussettoL/RandRECBusturnedOff.Howeverby
usingtheRECbus,thedirectsoundoftheaudio
inputandthesoundprocessedbytheinserteffect
canbemixedtoaRECbusandsampled.
6. AccesstheIFX112pagesandedittheparameters
ofeacheffect.
Formoredetails,seestep6underUsingeffectsin
Programs,beginningonpage 202.
Fordetailsonapplyinganeffecttoanexternalaudio
inputandsamplingtheresult,seeSamplingexternal
audiothroughinserteffectsonpage 137.
Master effects and Total effects
MastereffectsworkthesameasthedoinProgram
mode,asdescribedunderMastereffectson
page 203.
Sending the output of a multisample to
an effect bus
1. Ifyouwantthesamplesassignedtoamultisample
tobesenttoaneffectbus,gototheSamplingP8:
InsertEffectRoutingpage,andmakesettingsfor
BusSelect(AllOSCsto).
Fordetailsonresamplingthrougheffects,see
Applyinganinserteffecttoasampleandresampling
theresultonpage 138.
Using effects with the audio inputs
JustasyoucaninSamplingmode,theProgram,
Combination,andSequencermodesalsoletyouapply
theKRONOSeffectstothesignalsfromtheanalog,
S/P DIF,orUSBinputsandsampletheresult,ortouse
theKRONOSasa6in(analog,S/P DIF,andUSB)6out
effectprocessor.YoucanalsousetheKRONOSasa
vocodereffect(026:Vocoder)thatusesanexternalmic
inputtocontroltheinternalsounds.
InputrelatedsettingsaremadeintheP0Audio
Input/Samplingpageofeachmode.Normally,youwill
makesettingsintheGlobalmodeP0:BasicSetup
Audiopageandsharethesesettingsinallmodes,but
youcanalsomakeindividualsettingsforaspecific
program(inProgrammode)if,forexample,youwant
tousethatprogramasavocoder.
1. GototheGlobalP0:BasicSetupAudiopage.
Note:YoumustmovetoGlobalmodefromthe
mode(otherthanSamplingmode)inwhichyou
wanttoinputtheexternalaudiosignals.Ifyou
movefromSamplingmodetoGlobalmode,the
AudioInputsettingsofSamplingmodewillbe
maintained,andyouwontbeabletoviewthe
settingsofthispage.
ThesesettingsarenotusedinSamplingmode.
AudioinputsettingsforSamplingmodearemade
intheSamplingP0:RecordingAudioInputpage.
Whenapplyingeffectstothesignalsfromthe
analog,S/P DIF,orUSBinputs,oscillationmay
occurdependingontheeffecttypeandparameter
settings.Ifso,adjusttheinputlevel,outputlevel,
andeffectparameters.Inparticular,usecaution
whenusinghighgaineffects.
2. UseBusSelect(IFX/Indiv.)tospecifythebusto
whicheachaudioinputwillbesent.
Forexampleifyouwantthesignalfromadevice
connectedtoAUDIOINPUT1tobeinputtoinsert
effect1,settheINPUT1BusSelect(IFX/Indiv.)to
IFX1.
ThiscanbesetonlyifBusSelect(IFX/Indiv.)isset
toL/RorOff.
levelstothemastereffectsaresetbySend1and
Send2(InsertFXpage)followingtheinserteffects.
4. SetPLAY/MUTEandSoloOn/Offasdesired.You
canusethecontrolsurfacetomakethesesettings.
Using Effects
208
5. UsePantosetthepanningoftheaudioinput.If
youreinputtingastereoaudiosource,youwill
normallysettheinputstoL000andR127
respectively.
6. UseLeveltoadjusttheleveloftheaudioinput.
Normallyyouwillleavethisat127.
7. FXControlBussendstheoutputofthetimbreto
anFXControlbus.
Usethiswhenyouwanttheaudioinputtoaneffect
tobecontrolledbyanothersound.TherearetwoFX
Controlbuses,whichgivesyouagreatdealof
freedomforcontrollingeffectsfreely.
8. RECBussendstheaudioinputtoaRECbus.
IntheP0AudioInput/Samplingpage,youcan
chooseaRECbusastheSamplingSetupSourceBus
sothatthesignalsenttotheRECbuscanbe
sampledorrecorded(onlyinSequencermode).
NoisecanentertheKRONOSviathesebuses;see
Avoidingextraneousnoiseonpage 91.
Ifyouwanttosavetheeditedsettingsinthe
KRONOS,youmustwritethem.UsetheGlobal
modepagemenucommandWriteGlobalSetting
todothis.
9. IfyouwanttousetheGlobalmodeInputsettings
intheothermodes,checktheUseGlobal
Settingoption.
Ifyouwanttomakeindependentsettingsfor
programs,combinations,andsongs,uncheckthis
setting.
Detailed effects editing Dynamic modulation (Dmod)
209
Detailed effects editing
Dynamic modulation (Dmod)
Dynamicmodulation(Dmod)letsyouuseMIDI
messagesortheKRONOSscontrollerstomodulate
specificeffectparametersinrealtime.
Formoreinformation,seeDynamicModulation
Sources(Dmod)onpage 1101oftheParameterGuide.
Dmod Example
Asanexample,letssetupdynamicmodulationto
controlaneffectparameterinrealtime.
1. AsdescribedintheprocedureforUsingeffectsin
Programsonpage 202,setIFX1to091:L/C/RBPM
Delay.Verifythatyourehearingadelayeffect.
2. GototheProgramP8:InsertEffectIFX1page.
Using Dmod to change the delay level via the
Joystick
3. SetInputLevelDmodto+100.
4. SetSourcetoJS+Y:CC#01.
Thedelaysoundwilldisappear.
Theinputleveltotheeffectcanbecontrolledbythe
joystick.Asyoumovethejoystickawayfromyourself,
thedelaysoundwillgraduallyincrease.
Using Dmod to change the feedback level via
SW1
5. IntheP1:Basic/VectorSetUpControllerspage,
settheSW1functiontoSW1Mod.CC#80,andthe
ModetoToggle.
6. ChooseP8.SettheFeedbackSourcetoSW1Mod.
(CC#80),andsetAmountto+30.
Whenyoumovethejoystickawayfromyourselfand
presstheSW1switch,thefeedbacklevelwillincrease,
andthedelaysoundwillcontinueforalongertime.
TheAmountsettingspecifiesthefeedbacklevelthat
willbeineffectwhentheSW1switchispressed.If
Amountissetto10,pressingtheSW1switchwill
reducethefeedbacklevelto0.
MIDI/Tempo Sync
MIDI/TempoSyncletsyousynchronizeeffectsLFOs
anddelaytimestothesystemtempo.Formore
information,seeTempoSynchronizationon
Using MIDI/Tempo Sync to synchronize
delay time to tempo
1. SetuptheeffectsasdescribedunderDmod
Exampleonpage 209.
2. SetBPMtoMIDI.
3. ForL,C,andR,settheDelayBaseNoteandTimes
asdesired.
Using Effects
210
Forthisexample,setDelayBaseNotetoe andTimes
tox1sothattheeffectwillbeeasilyunderstandable.
Thedelaytimewillrepeatatanintervalofa8thnote.
4. RotatetheTEMPOknob,andthedelaytimewill
change.
Whenyou(pushthejoystickawayfromyourselfand)
presstheSWswitch,thefeedbacklevelwillrise,and
thedelayswillbecomelonger.
5. WhenyouturnontheKARMAON/OFFswitch,
KARMAwillbeginplaying.
SelectanydesiredKARMAGE.Whenyourotatethe
TEMPOknob,thedelaytimewillchangein
synchronizationwiththechangingtempoofthe
KARMA.
Dependingonthespecificdelayeffect,youmay
hearanoiseifyouchangethetempowhilethedelay
issounding.Thisisbecausethedelaysound
becomesdiscontinuous,andisnotamalfunction.
Forsomeeffects,youcansynchronizetheLFO
frequencytothetempo.Settheeffectparameters
MIDI/TEMPOSynctoOn,andBPMtoMIDI.For
moreinformation,seeTempoSynchronizationon
Common FX LFO
TwoCommonFXLFOsareavailableformodulation
effects,suchaschoruses,filters,phasers,etc.IntheP8
CommonFXLFOpageofProgram,Combination,
Sequencer,orSamplingmodes,youcanspecifythe
resetconditionsandspeedofCommonFXLFO1and
2.
Normally,theLFOsoftwoormoremodulationtype
effectsusedsimultaneouslywillnothave
synchronizedphaseevenifyousetthemtothe
identicalFrequency,sincetheLFOsarebeing
generatedindependently.
HoweverifyouselectCommon1orCommon2forthe
LFOTypeparameterofamodulationtypeeffect,the
effectwillusenotitsownindividualLFObutthe
CommonLFOyouspecifyhere.Thisallowsyoutouse
asingleCommonFXLFOtosimultaneouslycontrol
twoormoremodulationtypeeffectssuchasflanger,
phaser,orautopanwiththesamephase.Sinceyoucan
makeindependentsettingsforLFOwaveformand
phaseoffsetforeacheffect,youarefreetocreate
complexcombinationsofeffects.
Stereo Flanger Common FXLFO1
Common FXLFO
Stereo Phaser
Stereo Auto Pan
Waveforem=Triangle
Generate original LFO waveform
Frequency[Hz]
Reset Phase Offset =0 [deg]
Waveforem=Sine
Phase Offset =0 [deg]
Waveforem=Sine
Phase Offset =+90 [deg]
LFO Type =Common1
Detailed effects editing Effect Presets
211
Effect Presets
EffectPresetsletyoueasilystoreandrecallallofthe
settingsforanindividualeffect.Youcanstoreupto16
userpresetsforeacheffecttype,inadditionto15re
writablefactorypresets.
Thesamepresetsappearinallofthemodes(Program,
Combination,Sequence,andSampling),andsetsof
presetscanbesavedtoandloadedfromdisk.
Notethateditstoeffectsparametersareautomatically
storedwiththeProgram,Combination,orSongyou
dontneedtostorethemasanEffectPreset.Presetsjust
makeiteasiertoreuseyourfavoritesettings.
Forinstance,youcansaveanEffectPresetwhile
workingonaparticularProgram,andthenlateruse
thesameEffectPresetinadifferentProgram,Combi,
orSong.
Note:Programs,Combinations,andSongssavethe
effectsparametersettings,buttheydontsavethe
numberoftheselectedEffectPreset.Ifyouselectan
EffectPreset,andthensavetheProgram,theEffect
Presetsettingwillrevertto.
Selecting Effect Presets
1. SelectaneffectintheInsertFXpage.
2. TheP00:InitialSetsettingswillberecalled.
P(EffectPreset)willshow.
3. UseP(EffectPreset)toselectaneffectpreset:
P00P15orU00U15.
Thestoredparameterswillberecalled.Notethatthis
willoverwriteallparametersoftheeffect.
P00:InitialSet:Thesearethedefaultsettingsthatare
recalledwhenyouselectaneffecttypeintheInsertFX
page.Youcantsaveyourownsettingshere.
P01P15:ThesecontainKorgpresetdata.We
recommendthatyoustoreyoursettingsinU00U15.
U00U15:Theseareareasinwhichyoucanstoreyour
ownsettings.
:ThisshowsthatnoEffectPresethasbeen
selected.Youllseethisifyouvejustselectedaneffect,
writtenaProgram,orselectedanewProgram.
Selectingthissettingfromthemenuwillnothaveany
effect.
4. Edittherecalledparametersasdesired.
Saving Effect Presets
Ifyouvecomeupwithsettingsyoulikeandwantto
savethemasanewpreset,youcansavethem.
1. OntheIFX112page,touchthemenubuttonto
openthepagemenu.
2. Inthemenu,selecttheWriteFXPresetcommand.
TheWriteFXPresetdialogwillappear.
3. NamethePresetasdesired.
4. OpentheTopopup,andselectthePreset
numbertosaveto.
Youcansaveintoanyoftheslots,butwerecommend
thatyoustoreyoursettingsinU00U15.
5. PressOKtosavethePreset,orCanceltoexit
withoutsaving.
P (Efect preset) Efect On/Of
Efect Parameters Wet/Dry
Using Effects
212
213
Using KARMA
Overview - What is KARMA?
KARMAstandsforKayAlgorithmicRealtimeMusic
Architecture,namedafteritsinventor,StephenKay.
KARMAgeneratesMIDIdata,usingmanydifferent
algorithmsseamlesslyintegratedtoprovidea
powerfulmusicgenerationengine.Basedonthe
notesandchordsyouplay,KARMAcreatesphrases
andpatternsinrealtime,generatingnotjustnotesbut
MIDIcontroldataaswell.TheKARMAarchitecture
allowsthevariousalgorithmstobereconfiguredand
variedinrealtime,asyouplaythem.
Forexample,youcancreatethedynamictempo
changesthatoccurwithinaharpglissando,the
synchronizedchangesinvolumeandtonethatoccur
aspartofabrassphrase,therandomnesswithina
drumphrase,thecrescendoanddiminuendoofafill
in,changesinphraseortoneofatechnogroove,
complexinterweavingphrasesthatwouldbe
impossibletoplayonakeyboard,guitarstrumming
andfingerpickingsimulationswithnaturalsounding
changes,andbackinggroovesthatfollowyour
keyboardplayinginrealtimeallunderyourcontrol.
KARMAletsyouproducephrasesandpatternsatafar
moremusicalandflexiblelevelthanconventional
arpeggiatorsorpatternplaybackfunctions.
OntheKRONOS,KARMAisdesignedtoworkinclose
conjunctionwiththenumerousotherfunctions,giving
youunbelievableperformancepoweronstageorinthe
studio.
The structure of KARMA
KARMAconsistsofthefollowingmajorparts.
KARMA modules
AKARMAmoduleusesaGE(GeneratedEffect)to
createaphraseorpattern.
InProgrammode,onlyoneKARMAmodule(A)is
used.InCombinationorSequencermodes,four
KARMAmodules(A,B,C,D)canbeused.For
example,eachmodulemightbeusedtogenerate
phrasesandpatternsforaseparatesound,suchas
drums,bass,guitar,andpiano.
InProgrammode,theKARMAmoduletransmits
andreceivesallMIDIdataontheGlobalMIDI
channelspecifiedbyMIDIChannel.
InCombinationandSequencermodes,theMIDI
datafromeachKARMAmoduleistransmittedand
receivedontheInputChannelandOutput
Channelspecifiedforeachmodule.
GE (Generated Effect)
ThephrasesandpatternsproducedbyaKARMA
modulearecreatedbyaGE(GeneratedEffect).
Basedonnotedatafromthekeyboard,theGEuses
variousinternalparameterstocontrolhowthenote
datawillbedeveloped,andhowrhythm,chord
structure,andvelocityetc.willbecontrolledto
generateaphraseorpattern.MIDIcontrolchangesand
pitchbenddatacanalsobegeneratedin
synchronizationwiththephraseorpattern.Asa
capabilityuniquetotheKRONOS,KARMAcan
generateMIDIexclusivemessagestocontrolwave
sequencing,whichswitchesbetweenmultisamplesetc.
ofaprograminrealtime.Thisletsyoucreatephrases
andpatternsinwhichthetonecolorandnotepitches
changeindependently.
TheKRONOSprovidesalargenumberofGEsthatcan
beusedforavarietyofinstruments,performance
techniques,andmusicalstyles.
GE RTP Real Time Parameters
AGEconsistsofovertwohundredinternal
parameters.IneachGE,upto32oftheseinternal
parametersarepreselectedasthemostsuitable
MIDI IN
GE
Tone
generator
KARMA function
(Generated Efect)
KARMA module
parameters
MIDI OUT
Phrases or
patterns
Using KARMA
214
parametersforuseincontrollingthephraseorpattern.
TheseparametersarecalledtheGErealtime
parameters.
Youcancontrolthephraseorpatternbyeditingthese
parameters,orbyassigningthemtotheKARMA
CONTROLSslidersorKARMASWITCHbuttonsand
operatingtheseduringyourperformance.
RTC Model
AllofthepresetGEshaveaninternallyspecifiedRTC
Model.TheRTCModelisacertainstandardizationof
themorethantwohundredinternalparametersofthe
GE,basedonthetypeandpurposeofthatGE.
GEsforwhichthesameRTCModelhasbeenspecified
will(bydefault)havethesameparametersassignedas
theirGErealtimeparameters.Thismeansthatevenif
MIDI IN
KARMA function
KARMA module A
GE (Generated Efect)
01: Rhythm: Swing%
02: Note Series: Interval
03: Note Series: Inversion
. . . .
32: Repeat: Repetitions:
GE parameters

GE RTP, Perf RTP (Real-Time Parameters)
GE Parm 01
(Rhythm: Swing)
Module Parm
(Env1 Trigger)
KARMA module parameters
Key Zone Bottom
Key Zone Top
Receive MIDI Filter
Transmit MIDI Filter
Transpose
Note Trigger
Env1 Trigger
etc . . .
Dynamic MIDI
KARMA REALTIME CONTROLS
Phrases or
patterns
KARMA - Program mode
MASTER
Dynamic MIDI
MIDI IN
KARMA function
KARMA module A
GE : #0010: Drums1
GE Real-Time parameters: 01 ... 32
KARMA
module parameters
KARMA - Combination/ Sequencer mode
Input Ch
= 01ch
Output Ch
= 02ch
Drums Pattern
Bass Rif
E.Guitar Rif
E.Piano Phrase
x x x x
01ch
KARMA module C
KARMA
module parameters
Input Ch
= 01ch
Output Ch
= 04ch
GE : #0200: Funk Guitar2
KARMA module B
KARMA
module parameters
Input Ch
= 01ch
Output Ch
= 03ch
GE : #0100: Bass Rif10
KARMA
module parameters
Input Ch
= 01ch
Output Ch
= 05ch
KARMA module D
GE : #0300: E.P Phrase3
GE RTP, Perf RTP (Real-Time Parameters)
GE Parm 01
(Rhythm: Swing)
Module Parm
(Env1 Trigger)
Overview - What is KARMA? The structure of KARMA
215
youreswitchingthroughvariousGEsthathavethe
sameRTCModel,youwillbeabletocontrolthemina
uniformmannerandmakevalidcomparisonsbetween
them,sincetheirdefaultstatewillbethesame.Of
course,youarefreetoedittheGErealtimeparameters.
Inthepreloadedprogramsandcombinations,the
KARMACONTROLSslidersandswitchesare
assignedinauniformmannerdependingontheRTC
ModelfortheGEusedbyeachmodule.Forexampleif
aKARMAmoduleusedbyaprogramorcombination
usesaGEoftheDrum/Percussioncategory,the
KARMAREALTIMECONTROLSslidersandKARMA
SWITCHESwillbeassignedsothatSlider1controls
theswingandSlider2controlsthepatternvariation.
Ofcourse,youarealsofreetoedittheREALTIME
CONTROLSassignments.
EachGEisassignedoneofthefollowingRTCModels.
DP1Drum/Perc
BL1Bass/Lead
DM1DrumMelodic
GV1GatedVel/Pattern
GC1GatedCCs
CL1Comp/Lead
WS1WaveSeq1
WS2WaveSeq2
EG1DualEnvGen
LF1DualLFOs
MR1MelodicRepeat
MB1MelRpt/Bend
RB1RealTimeBend
CustomafewGEsmayrequirespecialRTC
setups,outsideofthenormalRTCModels.Inthis
case,theassignmentofRTCControlsisleftupto
thesounddesignerofthespecificProgramor
Combination.
Anexampleis2028:VJSMotion.IfyouloadthisGE,
itclearsallRTCModelassignments(whentheGE
LoadOptionsaresettothedefaultsetting).With
suchGEs,itsgenerallybesttocopytheModule
fromanexistingProgram,sothatyouhavean
exampleofhowtomapthecontrols.
Auto RTC Setup
Thisisaconvenientfunctionthatautomaticallymakes
KARMACONTROLSslidersandKARMASWITCH
assignmentsaccordingtotheRTCModelsettingofa
GE.UsetheLoadGEOptionsdialogboxtomakethese
settingsautomatically.Hereyoucanchoosewhether
youwantKARMAcontrollerassignmentstobemade
automaticallywhenyouusetheGESelectparameterto
selectaGE.IfyouvechosenAutoRTCSetupinthis
dialogbox,theassignmentswillbemade
automaticallyeachtimeyouchangetheGE.This
meansthatregardlessofthetypeofGEthatsselected,
youwillimmediatelybeabletousethestandard
KARMACONTROLassignments.
Thesearetheparametersthatcontrolthephrasesand
patternsgeneratedbyaKARMAmodule.
Youcansettheseparametersindependentlyforeach
KARMAmodule.TheseparametersincludetheGE
selection,MIDIinput/outputchannel,keyzone,MIDI
filtering,andtriggering.
GE RTP (GE Real-Time Parameters)
Perf RTP (Perf Real-Time Parameters)
Thesearetheparametersthatyoucancontrolviathe
KARMACONTROLSslidersorKARMASWITCHES.
IfGErealtimeparameters(GERTP)andKARMA
moduleparameters(PerfRTP)areassignedtothe
KARMACONTROLSslidersandKARMA
SWITCHES,youllbeabletocontroltheminrealtime
tomodifythephraseorpatternwhileyouplay.
Dynamic MIDI
DynamicMIDIisafunctionthatusestheKRONOS
controllersorMIDIcontrolmessagestocontrolspecific
functionsofKARMA.
Forexample,thisenablesyoutousethejoystickto
playstrummedguitarchords,useafootswitchto
controltheRun/MutestatusofaKARMAmodule,or
usethedamperpedaltolatchaKARMAmodule.
Youllbeabletocontroltheminrealtimewhileyou
play.
KARMA CONTROLS
ThesearefrontpanelcontrolsusedtocontrolKARMA.
Thesettingsofthesecontrolscanbesaved
independentlyforeachprogram,combination,and
song.
ON/OFF switch
ThisswitchesKARMAon/off.
LATCH switch
Ifthisison,thephraseorpatternwillcontinueplaying
evenafteryouremoveyourhandfromthekeyboard.
MODULE CONTROL switch
InCombinationorSequencermode,thisselectsthe
modulethatwillbecontrolledbytheKARMAsliders
18,KARMASWITCHES18,andKARMASCENE
switches18.
MASTER:Choosethissettingifyouwanttocontrol
modulesA,B,C,andDsimultaneously.Forexample,
thisletsyouuseslider1tocontroltheGErealtime
parameterSwingforallmodulesA,B,C,andD.
A,B,C,D:Chooseoneofthesesettingsifyouwantto
controlthecorrespondingmoduleindividually.
Note:InProgrammodeonlyMASTERcanbeselected,
andmoduleAwillbecontrolled.
Using KARMA
216
KARMA CONTROLS sliders 18
KARMA SWITCHES 18
KARMA SCENES 18
WhenCONTROLASSIGNissettoRTKNOBS/
KARMA,thesecontroltheKARMAmodule(s)selected
byMODULECONTROL.
Byoperatingthesecontrols,youcanadjustGErealtime
parametersandKARMAmoduleparameterstofreely
varythephrasesorpatternsgeneratedbytheKARMA
module.(UseGERTP,PerfRTPtospecifythe
parameterthateachcontrolwillaffect.)
SCENE switches
Theseswitchesletyoustorethesettingsofsliders18
andswitches18aseightdifferentscenes(SCENE1
8).InCombinationorSequencermodes,scenescan
storeseparatesettingsforeachmodule,andyoucan
usetheMODULECONTROLswitchandtheScene
Matrixfunctiontocontrolthis.
Formoreinformation,see75d:ModuleControl
SceneMatrixonpage 479oftheParameterGuide.
Performing with KARMA Performing with KARMA in Program mode
217
Performing with KARMA
Basedonyourkeyboardplayingoronthenotedata
receivedfromMIDIIN,KARMAautomatically
generatesadiversevarietyofphrasesorpatterns,such
asguitarorkeyboardbackingriffs,bassphrases,or
drumpatterns.YoucanusetheKARMACONTROLS
slidersandtheKARMASWITCHEStofreelymodify
thesephrasesorpatterns.
TheKRONOScontainspreloadedprogramsand
combinationsthattakefulladvantageofKARMA,
coveringawiderangeofinstruments,playing
techniques,andmusicalgenres.Intheseprogramsand
combinations,theparametersmostusefulfor
controllingKARMAhavebeenassignedtothe
SWITCHES.
Performing with KARMA in Program mode
InProgrammodeyoucanuseoneKARMAmoduleto
generateaphraseorpatternappropriateforthesound
oftheprogram.
Selecting a Program and switching
KARMA on/off
1. PressthePROGRAMswitchtoenterProgram
mode,andselectthedesiredprogram.(See
SelectingProgramsonpage 27.)
Asyoustepthroughtheprograms,youllfindsome
programsforwhichtheKARMAON/OFFswitchLED
islit.
Pressakeyoronscreenpad(on
theP1:Basic/VectorPadspage),
andKARMAwillbeginplaying.
InotherProgramsaswell,you
canpresstheON/OFFswitch
(LEDlit)toturnKARMAon.
Note:IftheDrumTrackison,
andtheTriggerModeissetto
WaitKBDTrig,theDrumTrack
willstartplaying
simultaneously.
Adjusting the performance tempo
1. UsetheTEMPOknobortheTAP
TEMPOswitchtoadjustthe
performancetempo.
Thiswillchangetheq =valuelocated
intheupperrightofthedisplay.Youcan
adjustthetempoinarangeof40.00
300.00.TheLEDlocatedabovetheTAP
TEMPOswitchwillblinkatintervalsof
aquarternote( q ).
AsanalternativetousingtheTEMPOknobortheTAP
TEMPOswitch,youcanchooseq =inthedisplay,use
numerickeys09toenterthetempo,andthenpress
theENTERswitch.YoucanalsousetheVALUE
controllertosetthetempo.TheLEDwillblinkatthe
tempoyouspecify.
Note:ThesettingoftheTEMPOknobisalsosaved
whenyouwriteaprogram.
IftheGlobalP1:MIDIMIDIpageMIDIClock
parameterissettoExternal,orsettoAutoandMIDI
Clockmessagesarebeingreceived,theTempo
displaywillindicateq =EXT,andtheKRONOS
willbesynchronizedtoanexternalMIDIdevice.In
thiscase,youwontbeabletochangethetempoby
operatingtheKRONOS.
Using KARMA
218
Checking note-on/off and key zone
Thescreenshownbelowisarealtimedisplayofthe
notedatareceivedfromthekeyboard,pads18,and
MIDIIN,andthenoteon/offdatageneratedbythe
KARMAmodule,togetherwiththenameofthechord
thatwasdetected.
1. GototheProgramP0:PlayKARMAGEpage.
Whenyouplaythekeyboard,thenameofthechord
detectedbytheKARMAmodulewillappearinthe
ChordfieldofKARMAModuleInfo.
TheCCs/Notesareashowsthekeyzoneofthe
KARMAmodule,andthestateofthecontroldataand
noteon/offdatageneratedbytheKARMAmodule.
(SeeSettingKARMAskeyboardzoneonpage 224.)
Using the KARMA controllers
Note:ThestateoftheKARMAcontrollersissaved
whenyouwritetheprogram.
KARMA on/off: ON/OFF switch
KARMAwillturnon/offeachtimeyoupressthe
ON/OFFswitch.Ifitison,theswitchLEDwilllight.
Whenyouplaythekeyboard,theGEselectedforthe
KARMAmodulewillstartgeneratingaphraseor
pattern.
Making the performance continue after you
remove your hand from the keyboard: the LATCH
switch
YoucanmakeKARMAcontinueplayingevenafter
youremoveyourhandfromthekeyboard.
LEDlit:Latchison.Theperformancewillcontinue
evenafteryouremoveyourhandfromthekeyboard.
LEDdark:Latchisoff.Theperformancewillstop
whenyouremoveyourhandfromthekeyboard.
Modifying the phrase or pattern generated by
the KARMA module: KARMA CONTROLS 18
sliders, KARMA SWITCHES 18, SCENE 18
switches
Parametersusefulforcontrollingthephraseorpattern
arealreadyassignedtotheKARMACONTROLS18
sliders,KARMASWITCHES18,andSCENE18
switches.Youcanoperatethesecontrollerstocreatea
widerangeofchangesinthephraseorpatternthats
playing.
Thelowerpartofthedisplayshowsthenamesofthe
slidersandswitchesthatareassignedinthisprogram.
Inthepreloadedprograms,theKARMACONTROLS
slidersandKARMASWITCHEShavealreadybeen
assigned.
2. OperatethefrontpanelKARMACONTROLS18
slidersandKARMASWITCHES18.
Thepatternorphrasewillchangeaccordingly.
Youcanalsoturntheswitcheson/offbypressingthem
inthedisplay.Youcanoperatetheslidersbyselecting
themandthenusingtheVALUEcontrollertoadjust
thevalue.
Thetypeorvalueoftheparameterbeingcontrolledby
theslidersandswitchesisshownintheKARMA
ModuleInfoKARMAValuefield.Thisletsyousee
howtheparametersarebeingaffectedbyyourslider
orswitchoperations.
Thesavedvalueisshownatthelowerrightofeach
sliderorswitch.
Performing with KARMA Performing with KARMA in Program mode
219
3. UsethefrontpanelSCENE18switchestochoose
ascene.
Theslidersandswitcheswillchangetothesettings
thatweresavedinthesceneyouchose.
Eachoftheeightscenescontainsthevaluesofsliders
18andswitches18.BypressingaSCENE18switch
tochooseascene,youcaninstantlyrecallsettingsfor
theeightslidersandeightswitches.
Evenifyouswitchscenes,thechangesyoumakeusing
sliders18andswitches18areremembereduntilyou
selectanotherprogram.Whenyouwriteaprogram,
yoursliderandswitchsettingsaresavedinthe
respectivescene18.
Restoring the state of the sliders and switches
Youcandothisbyadjustingthecontrolswhileyou
watchtheslidersandswitchesinthescreen,oryoucan
usethefollowingmethod.
Restoringtheentireprogram
1. PresstheCOMPAREswitch.
Theentireprogramwillreverttothestateinwhichit
waswritten.(SeeUsingCOMPAREonpage 42.)
2. PresstheCOMPAREswitchonceagain.
Theprogramwillreturntotheeditedstate.
Restoring all sliders and switches of the selected
scene
1. Operatetheslidersandswitchestoeditthevalues
savedintheprogram.
TheLEDoftheselectedSCENEswitchwillblink.
2. HolddowntheRESETCONTROLSswitch,and
presstheSCENEswitch.
Allslidersandswitcheswillberesettotheirstored
settings,andtheSCENEswitchLEDwilllight.
3. Onceagain,holddowntheRESETCONTROLS
switchandpresstheSCENEswitch.
Allslidersandswitcheswillreturntotheeditedstate
ofstep1,andtheSCENEswitchLEDwillblink.
Restoringasinglesliderorswitch
1. Operatetheslidersandswitchestoeditthevalues
savedintheprogram.
operatethesliderorswitchthatyouwantto
restore.
Theselectedsliderorswitchwillreturntoitsstored
setting.
Restoringallscenesettings
1. Ineachscene,operatetheslidersandswitchesto
editthevaluessavedintheprogram.
presstheMODULECONTROLswitch.
Allsceneswillreturntotheirstoredsettings.
IfyouveusedtheRESETCONTROLSswitchto
returnallscenestotheiroriginalsetting,thereisno
waytoreturntotheeditedsettingsofstep1.
ResettingtheREALTIMECONTROLknobsettingsfor
allscenes
1. UsetheREALTIMECONTROLknobstoeditthe
soundoftheprogram,andusetheslidersand
switchestomodifythesavedsettingsineach
scene.
presstheCONTROLASSIGNRT
KNOBS/KARMAswitch.
TheRealTimeControlsknobsettingswillbereset(to
thecentervalueof064),andthesettingsofallscenes
willreturntotheirstoredsettings.
IfyouveusedtheRESETCONTROLSswitchto
resettheRealTimeControlsknobsandtoreturnall
scenestotheirsavedsetting,thereisnowayto
returntotheeditedsettingsofstep1.
Selecting a GE (Generated Effect)
WhenKARMAison,theKARMAmoduleusesaGEto
generatephrasesorpatterns.TheKRONOSprovidesa
widerangeofGEsthatyoucanuseforavarietyof
instruments,playingtechniques,andmusicalstyles
(SeeThestructureofKARMAonpage 213).
Foreachofthepreloadedprograms,aGEthats
appropriateforthesoundoftheprogramisalready
selected.IfyouswitchtoadifferentGE,thegenerated
phraseorpatternwillchangedramatically.
2. Inthedisplay,presstheGESelectpopupbutton
toopentheGESelectmenu.
3. SelectaGEfromthelistintherightsideofthe
display.
TheselectedGEwillbehighlightedandwillbecome
active.
Using KARMA
220
Ifyounowplaythekeyboard,thisGEwillgeneratea
phraseorpattern.
Whilethismenuisdisplayed,youcanselectandplay
theseGEswithoutpressingtheOKbutton.
4. Ifyouaresatisfiedwiththeprogramyouselected,
presstheOKbuttontoclosethemenu.
Alternatively,youcanselectaGEbychoosingGE
Selectinthedisplay,andoperatingtheVALUEslider
orVALUEdial.YoucanalsouseGECategorySelect
tochooseaGEbycategory.(SeeGECategorySelect
onpage 10oftheParameterGuide.)
Editing KARMA module parameters
FordetailsoneditingtheparametersofaKARMA
module,seeEditingKARMAonpage 223.
Performing with KARMA in Combination mode
InCombinationmode,uptofourKARMAmodules
canbeoperatingsimultaneously.Youcanusethefour
KARMAmodulestogetherwiththesixteentimbre
programsinawidevarietyofways,forexampleby
usingthemtoindependentlyplayphrasesand
patternsforseparateprogramssuchasdrums,bass,
guitar,andstrings.
Selecting a Combination and turning
KARMA on/off
1. PresstheCOMBIswitchtoenterCombination
mode,andselectthedesiredcombination.(See
SelectingCombinationsonpage 57.)
Asyoustepthroughthecombinations,youwillnotice
thattheKARMAON/OFFswitchLEDislitforsome
combinations.
Withthesecombinations,KARMAwillbeginplaying
whenyouplaythekeyboard.
Note:IftheDrumTrackison,andTriggerModeisset
toWaitKBDTrig,theDrumTrackwillstartplaying
simultaneously.
Evenforothercombinations,youcanpressthe
KARMAON/OFFswitch(LEDlit)toturnonKARMA.
Adjusting the performance tempo
Inthesamewayasforaprogram,youcanusethe
TEMPOknobortheTAPTEMPOswitchtoadjustthe
performancetempo.Changingthetempowillaffect
thetempoofallKARMAmodulesthatareoperating.
(Seep.217)
Youcantadjusttheperformancetempoofeach
KARMAmoduleindividually.
Checking note-on/off and key zone
Thescreenshownbelowisarealtimedisplayofthe
notedatareceivedfromthekeyboard,pads18,and
MIDIIN,andthenoteon/offdatageneratedby
KARMAmodulesA,B,C,andD,togetherwiththe
nameofthechordthatwasdetected.
1. GototheCombinationP0:PlayKARMAGE
page.
Whenyouplaythekeyboard,thenameofthechord
detectedbyeachKARMAmodulewillappearinthe
ChordfieldofKARMAModuleInfo.
Thedisplayedchordnameisthechordthatisdetected
bythemoduleselectedbythefrontpanelMODULE
CONTROLswitch.Thewayinwhichchordsare
detectedwilldependonthesettingsoftheKARMA
module.
TheCCs/Notesareashowsthestatusofthecontrol
dataandnoteon/offdatageneratedbyKARMA
modulesA,B,C,andD,andthekeyzonesettingsof
theKARMAmodules.
Note:ChorddetectionisaffectedbytheKARMA
moduleskeyzonesettings(Combination71b),
Transpose(Combination73b:ModuleParameter
Control),andDynamicMIDIDestination
(Combination78)ChordScanandSmartScan.
Performing with KARMA Performing with KARMA in Combination mode
221
Using the KARMA controllers
YoucanoperatetheKARMAcontrollerstocontrolthe
phraseorpatterngeneratedbyeachKARMAmodule.
InCombinationmode,youcanchoosetheKARMA
modulethatyouwanttocontrol.
Note:ThestateoftheKARMAcontrollersissaved
whenyouwritethecombination.
1. GototheCombinationP0:PlayKARMAGE
page.
Thelowerpartofthedisplayshowsthenamesofthe
slidersandswitchesthatareassignedinthis
combination.
Inthepreloadedcombinations,theKARMA
CONTROLSslidersandKARMASWITCHEShave
alreadybeenassigned.
2. UsethefrontpanelMODULECONTROLswitch
toselectthemodulethatyouwanttocontrol.
IfyouselectMASTER,youwillbecontrollingallfour
KARMAmodulessimultaneously.
IfyouselectAD,youwillbecontrollingthe
correspondingKARMAmodule.
3. OperatethefrontpanelKARMACONTROLS18
slidersandKARMASWITCHES18.
Theslidersandswitcheswillcontrolthepatternor
phrasegeneratedbytheKARMAmoduleselectedby
theMODULECONTROLswitch.Ifyouveselected
MASTER,youllbeabletocontrolthemoduleon/off
statusandvarythepatternsandphrasesgeneratedby
alloftheKARMAmodules.
Youcanalsooperatetheslidersandswitchesinthe
displayorusingtheVALUEcontroller,justasin
Programmode.
TheKARMAmoduleandthetypeorvalueofthe
parameterbeingcontrolledbytheslidersandswitches
isshownintheKARMAModuleInfoKARMA
Valuefield.ThisletsyouseetheKARMAmoduleand
parametersthatarebeingaffectedbyyourslideror
switchoperations.
4. UsethefrontpanelSCENE18switchestochoose
ascene.
ThischangesthescenefortheKARMAmodule(s)
selectedbytheMODULECONTROLswitch.
IfMODULECONTROLissettoMASTER,each
KARMAmodulewillchangetothescenethatissaved
asthemastersetting.
Eachoftheeightscenescontainsthevaluesofsliders
18andswitches18.BypressingaSCENE18switch
tochooseascene,youcaninstantlyrecallsettingsfor
theeightslidersandeightswitches.
Evenifyouswitchscenes,thechangesyoumakeusing
sliders18andswitches18areremembereduntilyou
selectanothercombination.Whenyouwritea
combination,yoursliderandswitchsettingsaresaved
intherespectivescene18.
Name display for the KARMA CONTROLS 18
sliders and KARMA SWITCHES 18
JustasintheequivalentpageofProgrammode,the
CombinationP0:PlayKARMAGEpagedisplaysthe
slidersandswitchesassignedtothecombination,and
theirnames.
Inthecombination,thenameshowninsquarebrackets
[ ]isthecategoryoftheprogramselectedforthe
timbrebeingcontrolledbytheKARMACONTROLS
18slidersandKARMASWITCHES.Thistellsyouthe
timbrewhosephraseisbeingcontrolledbythe
KARMACONTROLS18slidersandKARMA
SWITCHES.
Ifmultipletimbresarebeingcontrolled
simultaneously,thiswillindicate[MLTI].
KARMA module Run and Solo
settings
InCombinationmode,uptofourKARMAmodules
canbeoperatingsimultaneously.
IfKARMAisoff,allKARMAmoduleswillbestopped.
IfKARMAison,theKARMAmodule(s)youspecify
herewilloperate.
1. GototheCombinationP7:KARMAGE
Setup/KeyZonespage.
2. UsetheRunandSolosettingstospecifythe
module(s)thatwilloperatewhenKARMAison.
KARMAmoduleswhoseRunsettingisOn
(checked)willoperate.
KARMA module
Parameter
Value
Using KARMA
222
IfyouturnSoloOn(checked),onlythatKARMA
modulewillsound.Thisisusefulwhenyouare
selectingaGE,orwhenyouwanttoauditionthe
phrasethatamoduleisgenerating.
ModuleswhoseSoloisOn(checked)willsound
evenifRunisOff(unchecked).
TheSolosettingisclearedwhenyouswitchto
anothercombination.Itisnotsavedwhenyouwrite
thecombination.
KARMAmoduleAwillsound.
KARMAmoduleBwillsound.
KARMAmodulesAandBwillsound.
Note:If isnotshowninthedisplay,Run
hasbeenassignedasaperformancerealtime
performance.TheKARMASWITCHESetc.will
controlRUN.
KARMA module MIDI I/O channel
settings
TheMIDIinput/outputchannelsettingforeach
KARMAmoduleandtheMIDIchannelsettingofeach
timbretogetherdeterminehowtheKARMAmodules
willplaythetimbres.
IfaKARMAmodulesMIDIoutputchannelmatches
theMIDIchannelofatimbre,thephraseorpattern
generatedbythatKARMAmodule(ifitsoperating)
willplaythattimbre.Fordetailsonmakingthese
settings,seeEditingKARMAinCombinationmode
onpage 227and71c:MIDII/Oonpage 471ofthe
ParameterGuide.
GE (Generated Effect) selection
Justasforaprogram,youcanusetheGESelectfield
toselecttheGEusedbyeachmodule.(SeeEditing
KARMAinCombinationmodeonpage 227)
KARMA module parameter settings
FordetailsoneditingKARMAmoduleparameters,see
EditingKARMAinCombinationmodeonpage 227.
Editing KARMA Editing KARMA in Program mode
223
Editing KARMA
Thissectionexplainshowtomakesettingsfor
KARMAineachmode.Fordetailsonhowtoperform
usingKARMA,seePerformingwithKARMAon
page 217.
Editing KARMA in Program mode
InProgrammodeyoucanuseonlyoneKARMA
module(moduleA).KARMAsettingsforaprogram
aremadeinthevariouspagesofProgramP7:KARMA.
Herewewillexplainhowtousethemajorparameters,
suchasselectingaGE.Forotherparameters,see
ProgramP7:KARMAonpage 107oftheParameter
Guide.
Switching KARMA on/off
EachtimeyoupresstheKARMAON/OFFswitch,
KARMAwillbeturnedonoroff.Whenon,theswitch
LEDwillbelit.
Theon/offstatusissavedwhenyouwritetheprogram.
Selecting a GE
HereshowtoselecttheGEusedbytheKARMA
module.
1. GototheProgramP7:KARMAGESetup/Key
Zonespage.
2. PressLoadGEOptionstoopenthedialogbox,
turnAutoRTCSetupon,andchecktheUserRTC
ModelandResetScenesoptions.
LoadGEOptionsspecifieswhetherthesettingsof
theKARMACONTROLSslidersandKARMA
SWITCHESsettingswillbeautomaticallyset,
initialized,ormaintainedwhenyouselectaGE.
Inthisexample,weveoptedtoautomaticallysetthe
sliderandswitchfunctionstothestandardsettingsfor
theRTCModeloftheselectedGE,sothatyoullbeable
tocontrolthephraseorpatternimmediately.
3. UseGESelecttoselecttheGEusedbythe
KARMAmodule.
UseTempotosetthetempoofthepatternorphrase
generatedbytheGE.
UseKARMAT.Sigtospecifythetimesignatureof
thepatternorphrasegeneratedbytheGE.Ifyouselect
GE/TSthetimesignaturespecifiedbytheGEwillbe
used;withanyothersetting,thetimesignaturewill
changetemporarily.
TheKRONOSprovidesnumerouspresetGEsthatcan
beusedforawiderangeofinstruments,playing
techniques,andmusicalstyles.
CategorySelectshowsthecategoryoftheGEthats
selectedfortheKARMAmodule.AllGEsare
organizedbycategory.YoucanpressCategorySelect
toopentheCategory/GESelectscreen,andchoosea
GEbycategoryandsubcategory(seeGECategory
Selectonpage 10oftheParameterGuide).
Copying KARMA settings from another
Program
YoucanusetheCopyKARMAModulepagemenu
commandtocopyKARMAsettings(EGselection,
KARMAmoduleparametersettings,etc.)fromanother
program.
1. Pressthepagemenubuttontoopenthepage
menu,andchooseCopyKARMAModule.
Using KARMA
224
2. Specifythecopysourcemode,bank,andnumber.
IfyouwanttocopytheGErealtimeparametersettings
andscenesettingsfromthecopysourceprogram,
choosetheGERTPControlSettings&Scenesoption
(checked).
Ifyouwanttocopyperformancerealtimeparameters
settingsandfrontpanelsettingsfromthecopysource
program,choosethePerf.RTP&PanelSettings
option(checked).
Ifyoutocopythepadsettingsfromthecopysource
program,choosethePadsoption(checked).
3. PressOKtoexecutethecopy,orpressCancelif
youdecidetocancel.
Setting KARMAs keyboard zone
Hereshowtospecifythezoneofkeysthatwilltrigger
KARMA.Forexampleyoumightmakesettingssothat
thekeysatthebottomofthekeyboardwilltrigger
phrases,andkeysabovethisrangecanbeplayed
normally.
1. GototheProgramP7:KARMAGESetup/Key
Zonespage.(Seethediagraminstep1of
SelectingaGE)
2. UsetheKeyZonesBottomandToptospecifythe
keyzone.
Anynotesthatfallwithinthisrangeincludingboth
playingonthelocalkeyboardandnotesreceivedfrom
MIDIINwillbesenttotheKARMAmodule.
Intheexampleshownabove,thenotesfromC1
throughB3arebeinginputtotheKARMAmodule.
WhenyouplayB3oralowernote,KARMAwill
generateaphraseorpattern.
3. IfThruInZoneandThruOutZoneareon
(checked),thenotesyouplayonthekeyboardwill
playinadditiontothephraseorpatterngenerated
byKARMA.
Thesetwofieldsarethesettingsforinsideandoutside
thekeyzone.
YoucanuseTransposeInZoneandTransposeOut
Zonetotransposethenotesplayedonthekeyboard
insemitonesteps.
Intheexampleshownabove,theB3andlowerkeys
willcontrolonlythephraseorpatterngeneratedby
KARMA,andtheC4andhigherkeyswillbeusedfor
manualplayingonthekeyboard.UseTransposeOut
Zonetoadjustthepitchofthemanuallyplayed
region.
KARMA module MIDI filtering and CC
offset
1. GototheProgramP7:KARMAMIDIFilter/CC
Offsetpage.
Receive MIDI Filter
Thisspecifieswhetherfilteringwillbeappliedtothe
MIDIcontroldatareceivedbytheKARMAmodule.If
anitemison(checked),thecorrespondingdatawillbe
received.
WhenKARMAison,MIDIcontroldatareceivedby
theKARMAmoduleissentdirectlytothetone
generator.Ifthissettingisoff(unchecked),thatdata
willnotbesenttothetonegenerator.
Intheexampleshownabove,damperpedalmessages
areenabledwhenKARMAisoff,anddisabledwhenit
ison.
Transmit MIDI filter
Thisspecifieswhetherfilteringwillbeappliedtothe
MIDIcontroldatageneratedbytheGEselectedforthe
KARMAmodule.Ifanitemison(checked),
transmissionisenabled.
Normallyyouwillleavetheseitemson.Ifyoudont
wanttousethepitchbendorothercontrolchangedata
generatedbytheselectedGE,turntheseitemsoff
(unchecked).
Intheexampleshownabove,pitchbenddata
generatedbytheGEwillnotbetransmitted.
CC Offset
Usethisifyouwanttocontroltheeffectsorthesound
oftheprogramwhileKARMAison.Forexample,you
mightusethistodecreasethebrightnessofthesound
orraisetheresonanceofthesoundinconjunctionwith
thephrasethatsbeinggenerated.Alternatively,you
mightusethistocontroleffects,forexampleby
turningonadelayeffectinconjunctionwitha
generatedphrase.
UseCCNumbertospecifytheMIDIcontrolchange
number.ChooseoneoftheCCnumbersinthe70s
whichcontrolthesound,oranAMSorDmodsource
(see72c:CCOffsetonpage 111oftheParameter
Guide).
Intheexampleshownintheprecedingpage,CC#74
andCC#71arecontrollingfiltercutoffandresonance
level.
Editing KARMA Editing KARMA in Program mode
225
IntheProgramP7:KARMAModuleParameters
ControlandTriggerpagesyoucaneditKARMA
moduleparameters.
Herewewilldescribehowtoeditthemostfrequently
usedparameters.Fordetailsontheotherparameters,
referto73a:ProgramNameandTempoon
Control Transpose
Thisletsyoutransposethenotedatabeinginputtothe
KARMAmoduleinsemitonesteps.Thiswillcontrol
thepitchofthephraseorpatterngeneratedbythe
KARMAmodule.Forexampleifyouwanttolowera
bassphrasebyoneoctave,setthisto12.
Control Quantize Trig (Quantize Triggers)
Thisquantizesthetimingofthetriggeringproduced
bythenotedata.(SeeSynchronizingKARMAon
page 235)
Off(unchecked):Triggeringwilloccurthemoment
youplaythekey.
On(checked):Triggertimingwillbequantizedtothe
selectednoteintervalrelativetothebasetempo.
Note Trigger
Thisspecifiesthetriggeringconditionsforthephrase
orpatterngeneratedbytheGE.Trytheseoutandsee
howtheydiffer.
Any:Triggeringwilloccureachtimeyouplayakey,
andthephraseorpatternwillplayfromthebeginning.
AKR:Triggeringwilloccuronlythefirsttimeyouplay
akeyafterhavingreleasedallnotesonthekeyboard.
1st:Triggeringwilloccuronlyatthefirstnoteyouplay
afterturningonKARMA.
Dyn:Playingthekeyboardwillnotcausetriggering.
Triggeringwilloccurwhenyouoperatethecontroller
specifiedbyDynamicMIDI.
GE Real-Time Parameters
HereyoucanedittheGErealtimeparametersthatare
selectedbytheKARMAmodule.Youcanalsoassign
GErealtimeparameterstotheKARMACONTROLS
slidersandKARMASWITCHESsothatyoucanuse
themtocontrolthephraseorpatterninrealtimewhile
youperform.
Note:IfyouusetheAutoRTCSetupfunctionofLoad
GEOptions,thestandardsliderandKARMA
SWITCHassignmentsfortheRTCModelofthatGE
willautomaticallybemadewhenyouselectaGE.(See
SelectingaGEonpage 223)
1. GototheProgramP7:KARMAGERealTime
Parameterspage.
UseGERTCSelecttoswitchthesetofGErealtime
parametersyouwanttosee.
ThesebuttonsdisplayGErealtimeparameters116or
1732.
ThenumberandtypeofGErealtimeparametersyou
caneditherewilldifferdependingontheselectedGE.
(Therewillbeamaximumof32.)IneachGE,the
parametersmostusefulforcontrollingthephraseor
patternareprovidedaspresets.
Note:RTCModel:EveryGEcontainsaninternal
settingthatindicatesitsRTCModel.Basedonthetype
orpurposeoftheGE,theRTCModelprovidesa
certaindegreeofstandardizationtotheover200
internalparametersoftheGE.Bydefault,GEsthat
havethesameRTCModelwillbepresetwiththesame
GErealtimeparameters.
2. UseVALUE,MIN,andMAXtospecifythe
value,minimumvalue,andmaximumvalueof
eachGErealtimeparameter.
WhenyouselectaGE,thedefaultparametervalues
thatarepresetforthatGEwillbeassigned.
Using KARMA
226
Thevaluesyouassignherearecontrolledasfollowsby
theKARMACONTROLSyouspecifyintheASSIGN
field.
3. UseASSIGNtoassigneachGErealtime
parametertothedesiredcontroller.
4. UsePolaritytospecifythepolarityofcontrol.
+:Controltheparameterasshowninthetableabove.
:TherelationshipofMINandMAXwillbeinverted.
Forexampleasyoumoveasliderfrom000to127,the
valuewillbecontrolledfromtheMAXvaluetothe
MINvalue.
HereshowKARMAparameterssuchasKARMAkey
zoneandKARMAmoduleparameters(i.e.,KARMA
parametersotherthanGErealtimeparameters)canbe
assignedtocontrollers.
IfyouveassignedtheseparameterstoKARMA
CONTROLS,youllbeabletocontroltheminrealtime
whileyouperform(seeControlSurfaceknobs,
sliders,&switchesonpage 33,and76b:PerfReal
TimeParametersonpage 123oftheParameter
Guide).
1. GototheProgramP7:PerfRealTimeParameters
page.
Asanexample,wellshowhowyoucanuseaKARMA
CONTROLSslidertocontroltheKARMAmodule
parameterTranspose.
2. UseGroupandParametertoselectthe
parameteryouwanttocontrol.
Forthisexample,setGroup:Mix,andParameter:
Transpose.TurnAon(checked)sothatthesliderwill
controlKARMAmodule[A].
3. Specifytherangeandvaluethatyouwantto
control.
Thesettingoftheparameterwillbeassignedby
default(12inthisexample),asdescribedunder7
3b:ModuleParameterControlonpage 113ofthe
ParameterGuide.
Forthisexample,setMin,Max,andValueto
24,+0,and12respectively.
4. UseAssigntoassignthedesiredcontroller.
Forthisexample,wellassignSlider1.
5. UsePolaritytospecifythepolarityofcontrol.
Forthisexample,specify+.
WhenyousetCONTROLASSIGNtoRT
KNOBS/KARMAandoperateslider1,theTranspose
settingwillchangeinsemitonestepsoverarangeof
24to+0,with12asthecentervalue.
Note:IfyousetParametertoTransposeOctave,the
changewilloccurinstepsofoneoctaveoverarangeof
24to+0,with12asthecentervalue.
IfyouselectTransposeOctave/5th,thechangewill
occurinalternatingstepsofanoctaveorafifth,overa
rangeof24to+0with12asthecentervalue.For
exampleifthisparameterisattheMinsettingandaC3
noteissounding,movingslider1from000toward127
willcauseapitchchangeofC3G3C4G4
C5.
Dynamic MIDI setting
DynamicMIDIletsyouuseaKRONOScontrollerora
MIDIcontrolmessagetocontrolaspecificparameter
ofKARMA.Youcanspecifyuptoeightcontrollers
(Source)andwhattheywilldo(Destination).Formore
information,seeDynamicMIDISources&
Destinationsonpage 1109oftheParameterGuide.
Naming the KARMA RTC sliders 18 and switches
18
1. GototheProgramP7:KARMAName/NoteMap
page.
HereyoucanselectnamesfortheKARMA
CONTROLSslidersandKARMASWITCHES.Youcan
savethesesettingsindependentlyforeachprogram.
TheKRONOSprovidessuitablepresetnamesforthe
SWITCHES.
Auto Assign KARMA RTC Name
AnappropriatenameforeachKARMACONTROLS
sliderandKARMASWITCHwillbedeterminedbased
ontheGERTPorPerfRTPbeingcontrolled,andwill
beassignedautomatically.(SeeAutoAssignKARMA
RTCNameonpage 148oftheParameterGuide.)
Slider 18 000-064-127 =MIN-VALUE-MAX
Slider 18 (SW) 000-063 = MIN, 064-127 = MAX
SW 18 Off = MIN, On = MAX
DynaMIDI 18 Depending on Dynamic MIDI setting
Editing KARMA Editing KARMA in Combination mode
227
Linking KARMA settings to Program changes
KARMAsettingscanbesavedindividuallyforeach
Program.Normally,whenyouselectanewProgram,
itsKARMAsettingswillbeloadedaswell.Insome
cases,however,youmaywishtotryoutdifferent
ProgramswhilekeepingtheKARMAsettingsthe
same.
TheGlobalBasicpageLoadKARMASettingswhen
changingparametersletyouselectbetweenthesetwo
behaviors.ThereareseparatesettingsforPrograms,
Combis,andSongs.Tosetthisup:
1. GototheGlobalBasicpage.
2. UnderLoadKARMAsettingwhenchanging,set
theProgramscheckboxasdesired.
ChecktheboxtoloadtheindividualPrograms
KARMAsettings.
UnchecktheboxtokeepKARMAsettingsthesame,
evenwhenchangingPrograms.
Formoreinformation,seeLoadKARMAsettings
whenchangingonpage 755oftheParameterGuide.
Editing KARMA in Combination mode
InCombinationmode(andSequencermode)youcan
usefourKARMAmodules(modulesA,B,C,andD).
Inacombination,youcanusethefourKARMA
modulesandthesixteentimbreprogramsinavariety
ofways;forexample,separatephrasesorpatternscan
playprogramssuchasdrums,bass,guitar,andstrings.
KARMAsettingsforacombinationaremadeinthe
variouspagesofCombinationP7:KARMA.Herewe
willexplaintheprocedureforsettingthemajor
parameters,suchasRunandSolosettings,the
selectionofaGE,andMIDII/Osettings.Forother
parameters,seeEditingtheparametersofeach
KARMAmoduleonpage 229.and71b:GE
Setup/KeyZonesonpage 471oftheParameterGuide.
Switching KARMA on/off
EachtimeyoupresstheKARMAON/OFFswitch,
KARMAwillbeturnedonoroff.Whenon,theswitch
LEDwillbelit.Thison/offstatusissavedwhenyou
writetheCombination.
WhenKARMAisoff,allKARMAmodulesA,B,C,
andDwillbeoff.WhenKARMAison,theKARMA
moduleswilloperateasspecifiedbytheirRunand
Solosettings.
Run and Solo settings
Setup/KeyZonespage.
Note:Alternatively,youcanmakethesesettingsinthe
CombinationP0:PlayKARMAGEpage.
2. UseRunandSolotoselectthemodule(s)that
willoperatewhenKARMAison.
Formoreinformation,see06b:GESelecton
Note:Forthepreloadedcombinations,whenthe
MODULECONTROLswitchissettoMASTER,
KARMASWITCHES1,2,3,and4willswitchRun
on/offformodulesA,B,C,andD.
Selecting a GE
HereshowtoselecttheGEusedbyeachKARMA
module.(SeeEditingKARMAinProgrammodeon
page 223)
Setup/KeyZonespage.
Note:Alternatively,youcanmakethesesettingsinthe
CombinationP0:PlayKARMAGEpage.
2. PressLoadGEOptionstoopenthedialogbox,
turnAutoRTCSetupon,andchecktheUserRTC
ModelandResetScenesoptions.
LoadGEOptionsspecifieswhetherthesettingsof
theKARMACONTROLSslidersandKARMA
SWITCHESwillbeautomaticallyset,initialized,or
maintainedwhenyouselectaGE.
Forthisexample,wellchoosetosetthesliderand
switchfunctionsforKARMAmodulesA,B,C,andD
tothestandardsettingsfortheRTCModelofthe
selectedGE,sothatyoullbeabletocontrolthephrase
orpatternimmediately.
3. UseGESelecttoselecttheGEusedbythe
KARMAmodule.
UseTempotosetthetempoofthepatternorphrase
generatedbytheGE.
UseKARMAT.Sigtospecifythetimesignatureof
thepatternorphrasegeneratedbytheGE.Ifyouselect
GE/TSthetimesignaturespecifiedbytheGEforeach
modulewillbeused;withanyothersetting,thetime
signatureofallGEswillchangetemporarily.
Using KARMA
228
MIDI I/O channel settings
YoucanspecifytheMIDIinputandoutputchannels
foreachofthefourKARMAmodulesusedbya
combination.
TheMIDIinput/outputchannelsettingforeach
KARMAmoduleandtheMIDIchannelsettingfor
eachtimbrewilldeterminetheroutingthatspecifies
howtheKARMAmodulesplaythetimbres.Theseare
themostimportantsettingswhenusingmultiple
KARMAmodulesinacombination.
Setup/KeyZonespage.
2. SpecifytheInputChannelandOutput
ChannelofeachKARMAmodule.
InputChannel:Foracombination,youwill
normallysetthistoGchsothatyourkeyboardplaying
willcontroltheKARMAmodule.
OutputChannel:SetthistotheMIDIchannelofthe
timbre(s)thatshouldbeplayedbythisKARMA
module.
GchAlso:ThisoptionisavailableifInputChannelis
settootherthanGch.Ifyouselect(check)thisoption,a
modulethatwouldnormallybetriggeredonlybythe
InputChannelwillalsobetriggeredbytheGch.(Gch,
Global11a)
TimbreThru:Ifthisoptionison(checked),timbres
differingfromtheglobalMIDIchannelwillsound
whenKARMAisoff.
Setting example 1
ThisexampleshowshowtheGchAlsooption
works.
1. SetMIDIChannelforthefollowingtimbresas
follows.
Timbre1:Gch
Timbre2:2ch
Timbre3:3ch
Timbre4:4ch
Timbre5:5ch
2. SettheMIDIchannelsforthepadsasfollows.
Pad1:MIDIchannel=2ch
3. ForeachKARMAmodule,setInputChannel
andOutputChannelasfollows.
KARMAmoduleA:InputCh=2ch,OutCh=2ch
KARMAmoduleB:InputCh=3ch,OutCh=3ch
KARMAmoduleC:InputCh=4ch,OutCh=4ch
KARMAmoduleD:InputCh=5ch,OutCh=5ch
4. TurnKARMAoff.
Whenyouplaythekeyboard,timbre1willsound.
Whenyoustrikepads14,timbres25willsound.
5. TurnKARMAon.
Whenyoustrikepads14,KARMAmodulesADwill
eachtriggeradifferentGEwhichwillplayphrasesor
patternsontimbres25.
6. ForKARMAmoduleA,turnGchAlsoon
(checked).
7. TurnoffKARMA.
Whenyoustrikepads14,timbres25willsound.
8. TurnonKARMA.
KARMAmoduleAforwhichyouturnedGchAlso
on(checked)willtriggeritsGEandplayaphraseor
patternontimbre2.
Whenyoustrikepads14,KARMAmodulesADwill
triggertheirrespectiveGEsandplayphrasesor
patternsontimbres25.
Setting example 2
ThisexampleshowshowtheTimbreThruoption
works.
Selectapianoprogramfortimbre1,abassprogramfor
timbre2,andadrumprogramfortimbre3.
Wellplaytimbre1manuallyfromthekeyboard.
KARMAmoduleAwillbeusedtoplayabassphrase
ontimbre2,andKARMAmoduleBtoplayadrum
phraseonKARMAmoduleB.(Makesurethatthe
globalMIDIchannelis01.)
1. SettheMIDIChannelfortimbres1,2,and3.
Forthisexample,settimbre1to01,timbre2to02,and
timbre3to03.Sinceeachtimbreissettoaseparate
channel,theKARMAmodulesettothecorresponding
channelwillplayonlythattimbre.
229
2. SettheInputChannelandOutputChannelof
eachKARMAmoduleasfollows.
KARMAmoduleA:InputCh=Gch,OutCh=02
KARMAmoduleB:InputCh=Gch,OutCh=03
ThetimbresplayedbytheKARMAmodulesare
showninred,asspecifiedbythetimbresMIDI
channelsettingandtheKARMAmodulesOut
Channelsetting.
3. ForKARMAmodulesAandB,turnRunon
(checked),andsetGESelecttoGE.(SeeRun
andSolosettingsonpage 227.)
KARMAmoduleA:selectabassphraseastheGE
KARMAmoduleB:selectadrumphraseastheGE
WhenKARMAison,yourplayingonthekeyboard
willsoundapianoontimbre1,andwill
simultaneouslybesenttoKARMAmodulesAandB.
ThebassphrasegeneratedbymoduleAissenton
MIDIchannel02toplaytimbre2.
ThedrumphrasegeneratedbymoduleBissenton
MIDIchannel03toplaytimbre3.
4. UseTimbreThrutospecifywhatwillsound
whenKARMAisoff.
WhenKARMAisoff,playingthekeyboardwill
normallysoundonlythetimbresthatmatchtheglobal
MIDIchannel(Ch01).
Inthisexample,thiswillbethepianosoundproduced
bytimbre1(Ch01).
IfTimbreThruison(checked),youllbeabletoplay
timbresthatdifferfromtheglobalchannelwhen
KARMAisoff.
ForKARMAmoduleA,turnTimbreThruon
(checked).WhenKARMAisoff,playingthekeyboard
willsoundthepianooftimbre1(Ch01)aswellasthe
bassoftimbre2(Ch02).
Editing the parameters of each KARMA
module
Youcanspecifythekeyboardzoneinwhicheach
KARMAmoduleoperates,makeMIDIfiltersettings,
andeditKARMAmoduleparameters.Justasfora
program,theseparameterscanbespecified
independentlyforeachKARMAmodule.
GE Real-Time Parameters
HereshowtoedittheparametersoftheGEselected
foreachKARMAmodule.
1. GototheCombinationP7:KARMAGEReal
TimeParameterspage.
2. Inthetabsattheleft,selectMasterA.
3. SetMIN,MAX,VALUE,ASSIGN,and
POLARITY.
IntheMastertabs,specifyingASSIGNletsyouedit
theMIN,MAX,VALUE,andPolaritysettings.
4. MakesettingsinthesamewayforMasterB,C,
andD.
ThesettingsyoumakehereareusedwhenMODULE
CONTROLissettoMASTER.
MasterletsyoucontrolanyparametersofmodulesA,
B,C,orD.Youcanalsouseasinglecontrollerto
simultaneouslycontrolmultipleparametersin
differentmodules;forexample,youmightuseSlider1
tocontroltheRhythm:Swing%parameterof
modulesA,B,C,andD.
Using KARMA
230
5. Inthetabsattheleft,selectModuleA.
6. SetMIN,MAX,VALUE,ASSIGN,and
POLARITY.
7. MakesettingsinthesamewayforModuleB,C,
andD.
TheASSIGNsettingsformoduleA,B,C,andDare
usedwhenMODULECONTROLissettoA,B,C,orD
respectively.
WiththeappropriateASSIGNsettings,aGE
realtimeparameterof(forexample)moduleAcan
controlledindependentlybyMasterandModuleA.
Forexampleyoucanmakesettingssothatthe
SwingparameterofadrumGEonmoduleAis
controlledinMASTERbyslider1overarangeof0
50%,andinMODULEAbyslider1overarangeof
50100%.
Master:050%
ModuleA:50100%
Inthiscase,ifyouswitchMODULECONTROL
betweenMASTERandAwhileusingslider1to
controltheparameter,theparameterwilloperatein
itslastcontrolledstate.IfyousetSwingto0%in
MASTER,andthenswitchtomoduleA,Swingwill
remainat0%aslongasyoudontmoveslider1.
HoweverSwingwillchangeonceyoumoveslider1
tocontroltheparameterintherangeof50100%.
1. SetMODULECONTROLtoMASTER,andset
slider1totheminimumposition.Swing
operatesat0%.
2. ChangeMODULECONTROLtoA.Swing
operatesat0%.
3. Moveslider1tothemaximumposition.
Swingoperatesat100%.
Theinternalsettingsareautomaticallycontrolledso
thatthephrasebeinggenerateddoesnotchange
abruptly.IntheaboveexamplewhenyouuseMASTER
tosetSwingto0%andthenswitchtomoduleA,the
displayedindicationis50100%buttheparameteris
actuallyoperatingatavalueof0%.Inthisway,you
needtobeawarethatthedisplayedindicationmaynot
matchtheactualresult.
Inthesamewayasforaprogram,KARMAparameters
otherthanGErealtimeparameters(e.g.,KARMA
moduleparameters)canalsobeassignedto
controllers.
ThesesettingsarevalidwhenMODULECONTROLis
settoMASTER.
1. GototheCombinationP7:KARMAPerfReal
TimeParameterspage.
Inthesamewayasforaprogram,setGroup,
Parameter,Min,Max,Value,Assign,and
Polarity.Inacombination,youcanusethefour
KARMAmodulesA,B,C,andD.
Turnon(check)theA,B,C,and/orDboxesto
selectthemodule(s)youwanttocontrol.
Intheaboveexample,KARMAREALTIME
CONTROLSswitches1,2,3,and4arecontrollingthe
Run/MutesettingofmodulesA,B,C,andD
respectively.
Dynamic MIDI settings
Youcanmakethesesettingsinthesamewayasfora
program.Formoreinformation,seeDynamicMIDI
Sources&Destinationsonpage 1109oftheParameter
Guide.
Naming the KARMA RTC sliders 18 and switches
18 for MASTER and module AD
Inthesamewayasforaprogram,youcanselectnames
fortheKARMACONTROLSslidersandKARMA
SWITCHES.Thesesettingsaresavedaspartofthe
combination.
KARMA SCENES
KARMA SWITCHES
KARMA CONTROLS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
MODULE
CONTROL
MASTER
A
B
C
D
KARMA module [D]
KARMA module [C]
KARMA module [B]
KARMA module [A]
MODULE
CONTROL
MASTER
A
B
C
D
KARMA module [D]
KARMA module [C]
KARMA module [B]
KARMA module [A]
KARMA SCENES
KARMA SWITCHES
KARMA CONTROLS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
231
Inacombination,theareainsquarebrackets[ ]
automaticallyshowsaportionofthecategorynameof
theprogramselectedforeachtimbrecontrolledbythe
SWITCHES.Thisletsyouknowthetimbrewhose
phraseisbeingcontrolledbyeachKARMA
CONTROLSsliderandKARMASWITCH.
Ifmorethanonetimbreisbeingcontrolled,theareain
squarebracketswillindicateMLTI.
AutoAssignKARMARTCName(SeeAutoAssign
KARMARTCNameonpage 148oftheParameter
Guide)
Specifying the random seeds
ForeachGErealtimeparametergroup,youcanspecify
whethertherandomseed(usedtogeneraterandom
values)willbesharedbetweenthefourKARMA
modules.
1. GototheCombinationP7:KARMARandom
Seedspage.
Normally,youwillsetthefourmodulestouseseparate
randomseedsasshownabove;A:1,B:2,C:3,
andD:4.IfyouhaveselectedthesameGEfortwoor
moreKARMAmodulesandwantthemtoplayin
unisonusingtheidenticalrandomvalues,youmust
selectthesamerandomseedforeachofthesemodules.
Formoreinformation,see78:RandomSeedson
Linking KARMA settings to Combi
changes
KARMAsettingscanbesavedindividuallyforeach
Combination.Normally,whenyouselectanew
Combination,itsKARMAsettingswillbeloadedas
well.Insomecases,however,youmaywishtotryout
differentCombinationswhilekeepingtheKARMA
settingsthesame.
TheGlobalBasicpageLoadKARMASettingswhen
changingparametersletyouselectbetweenthesetwo
behaviors.ThereareseparatesettingsforPrograms,
Combis,andSongs.Tosetthisup:
1. GototheGlobalBasicpage.
2. UnderLoadKARMAsettingwhenchanging,set
theCombinationscheckboxasdesired.
ChecktheboxtoloadtheindividualCombinations
KARMAsettings.
UnchecktheboxtokeepKARMAsettingsthesame,
evenwhenchangingCombinations.
Formoreinformation,seeLoadKARMAsettings
whenchangingonpage 755oftheParameterGuide.
Using KARMA
232
Using KARMA in Sequencer mode
InSequencermodeyoucanusefourKARMAmodules
(modulesA,B,C,andD).Asinacombination,youcan
usetheKARMAmodulestogenerateindependent
phrasesorpatternsthatplay(forexample)drum,bass,
guitar,andstringsprograms,oryoucancombinethe
fourKARMAmodulesandthesixteentrackprograms
inawidevarietyofways.
ThestructureoftheKARMArelatedparametersisthe
sameasinCombinationmode.(SeeEditingKARMA
inCombinationmodeonpage 227)
InSequencermode,youcanuseKARMAwhile
realtimerecordingsongtracksorpatterns.
Thenoteon/offdataandMIDIcontroldatagenerated
byaKARMAmodulecanberecordedaseventsina
trackorpattern.Atthistime,youcanusetheKARMA
CONTROLSslidersandKARMASWITCHESto
controlthephraseinrealtimewhileyourecordit.
Youcanalsocopythesettingsfromacombination,and
usemultitrackrecordingtorealtimerecordyour
keyboardperformance.
Datafromtheinternalsequencerisnotinputtothe
KARMAmodule.Also,youcannotusenotedata
fromtheinternalsequencertotriggeraKARMA
modulesothatitgeneratesphrasesetc.
HerewellexplainhowtousetheAutoSongSetup
functiontogetstartedwithrealtimerecording.Wewill
alsodescribetheprocedureforrealtimerecording
(singletrackrecording)usingKARMA,andfor
realtimerecording(multitrackrecording)bycopying
thesettingsfromacombination.
Auto Song Setup
TheAutoSongSetupfunctionautomaticallycopiesthe
settingsofaprogramorcombinationintoasong,and
thenputstheKRONOSinrecordreadymode.Youcan
thenbeginrecordingimmediatelyjustbypressingthe
SEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitch.Thisletsyou
seamlesslymovefromplayingaprogramor
combinationintoproducingasong,sothatphrasesor
ideasforasongthatoccurtoyouwhileusingKARMA
canbeimmediatelyturnedintoasong.
Procedure(usingtheexampleofCombinationmode)
1. EnterCombinationmode.
2. IntheCombinationP0:PlayProgSelect/Mixer
page,selectacombinationandedittheKARMA
RTCparametersetc.asdesired.
Note:Ifyouwanttokeeptheeditedstateofyour
combination,executeUpdateCombinationorWrite
Combination.
3. HolddowntheENTERswitchandpressthe
REC/WRITEswitch.
TheSetuptoRecorddialogboxwillappear.
4. ToexecutetheAutoSongSetupfunction,pressthe
OKbutton.Ifyoudecidetocancel,pressthe
Cancelbutton.
YouwillautomaticallymovetoSequencermode,and
thesettingsofthecombinationwillbecopiedtoa
song.
Thecopydestinationsongwillbethefirstunused
song.
ContentcopiedfromaCombination:
Thesamecontentwillbecopiedaswhenyouexecute
theCopyFromCombipagemenucommandwith
IFXs,MFXs,andTFXschecked,andMultiREC
Standbychecked.Formoreinformation,seeCopy
fromCombinationonpage 626oftheParameter
Guide.
ContentthatiscopiedfromaProgram:
Thesamecontentwillbecopiedaswhenyouexecute
theCopyFromProgrampagemenucommandwith
IFXs,MFXs,andTFXschecked,To:settoMIDI
Track01,withKARMAcheckedandTo:setto
KARMAModuleA,andwithDrumTrackchecked
andTo:tosettoTrack10.
5. TheKRONOSwillautomaticallyenterrecord
readymode,andthemetronomewillbegin
soundingaccordingtotheMetronomesetting
(Sequencer05c).
6. PresstheSTART/STOPswitchtobeginrealtime
recording.Whenyouvefinishedrecording,press
theSTART/STOPswitchonceagain.(See
RecordingMIDIinrealtimeonpage 78.)
Using KARMA in Sequencer mode Recording using KARMA (single-track recording)
233
Recording using KARMA (single-track recording)
Inthefollowingexample,welluseKARMAtorecord
adrumpatternontrack1.
1. Selectthedesireddrumprogramfortrack1as
describedintheprocedureforrealtimerecording
atrackandforpreparingtorecord(seep.78).
Alsomakeanyothernecessarysettingsforrecording,
suchassettingTrackSelecttoT01.
2. GototheSequencerP7:KARMAGESetup/Key
Zonespage.
MakeMIDII/OsettingsfortheKARMAmodulesso
thatKARMAmoduleAwillplaytrack1(SeeEditing
KARMAinCombinationmodeonpage 227).
ForKARMAmoduleA,settheInputChanneland
OutputChannelto01and01respectively.Setting
themtoTchandTchwillhavethesameresult.For
moreinformation,see71c:MIDII/Oonpage 471of
theParameterGuide.
AsspecifiedbytheMIDItracksMIDIChannelsetting
andtheKARMAmodulesOutChannelsetting,the
MIDItrackplayedbytheKARMAmoduleis
displayedinred.
3. SelectaGEforKARMAmoduleA,andsetits
parameters.
YouarefreetoselectaGEandmakesettingsas
desired,butinthisexamplewellusetheCopy
KARMAModulepagemenucommandtocopyallof
theprogramsKARMAsettings.Thisisaneasywayto
setupandrecordthephraseorpatternthatthe
programsKARMAisgenerating.
1. Usethepagemenubuttonlocatedinthetopleftof
thescreentodisplaythepagemenu,andchoose
CopyKARMAModule.
Specifythecopysourceprogram.Turnon(check)GE
RTPControlSettings&ScenesandPerf.RTP&
PanelSettings.PressOKtoexecutethecopy.
ThesettingsoftheKARMAREALTIMECONTROLS
sliders,switches,andsceneswillbecopiedtoModule
ControlA.
2. PresstheKARMAON/OFFswitchtoturnon
KARMA.
Whenyouplaythekeyboard,KARMAwillgeneratea
drumpatternjustasitdidfortheprogram.
3. UsetheSEQUENCERREC/WRITEswitchandthe
START/STOPswitchtorealtimerecordontrack1.
(SeeRecordingMIDIinrealtimeonpage 78)
YoucanoperatetheKARMAREALTIMECONTROLS
sliders/switchesandtheSCENEswitcheswhile
recording,andthechangesinthepatternorsoundthat
occurwillberecordedjustastheyoccur.
ThesongtempoandKARMAtempocannotbeset
independently.
4. IfyouwanttheKARMAmoduletobein
synchronizationwiththesequencerduring
recording,checktheQuantizeTriggeroption.
GototheSequencerP7:KARMAModuleParameters
Triggerpage.
Thetriggertimingwillbesynchronizedtosixteenth
noteintervalsofthesequencerbeat.(See
SynchronizingKARMAonpage 235)
5. YoucansynchronizetheKARMAmoduletothe
starttimingofthesequencer.
Using KARMA
234
WhileKARMAisrunning,presstheSTART/STOP
switch;KARMAwillsynchronizetothesynthesizer
timing.
IfyouagainpresstheSTART/STOPswitch,the
sequencerandKARMAwillbothstop.Ifyouwant
tostoponlyKARMA,pressthe(KARMA)ON/OFF
switchtoturnitoff.
IfyouwantKARMAtostartatthemoment
recordingbegins,pressthe(KARMA)ON/OFF
switchtoturniton,andthenplaythekeyboard
duringtheprecountbeforerecording.The
KARMAmodulewillnotbetriggeredimmediately,
butwillbetriggeredinsynchronizationwiththe
sequencerwhenrecordingbegins.(See
SynchronizingKARMAonpage 235)
Multi-track recording using settings copied froma Combination
Thepreloadedcombinationsincludeadiversearray
ofcombinationsthattakefulladvantageofKARMA.
Youcanplaythesecombinationstostimulateideasfor
songs,andrecordyourplayingtocreatebasictracks.
Manyofthesecombinationsconsistoftimbresand
KARMAmoduleswithdifferingMIDIchannel
settings.
Intheexamplebelow,wellshowhowyoucanuse
multitrackrecordingtorecordaperformance
consistingofmultipleMIDIchannels.
1. Wellstartbycopyingthesettingsofa
combinationintoasong.GototheSequencerP0:
Play/RECMIDITrackProgSelect/Mixerpage.
2. Intheupperleftofthescreen,pressthepage
menubuttontoopenthepagemenu,andchoose
CopyFromCombination.
Selectthecopysourcecombination.TurnIFXAll,
MFXs,TFXs,andMultiRECStandbyon(checked).
PressOKtoexecutethecopy.
3. Thesettingsofthecombinationstimbres116
willbecopiedtoMIDItracks116.Effectsettings,
KARMAsettings,andallothercommon
parameterswillbecopiedtothetracksofthesong.
4. ChooseTrackSelect.SelectatrackwhoseMIDI
channelmatchestheglobalMIDIchannel.
PresstheON/OFFswitchtoturnKARMAon,andplay
thekeyboardand/orpadstomakeKARMAbegin
playinginthesamewayasitdidinthecopysource
combination.(Dependingonthetrackyouselectedin
TrackSource,theperformancemaynotbethesame
aswhenyouwereplayingthecombination.Besureto
selectthetrackwhoseMIDIchannelisthesameasthe
globalMIDIchannel.)
5. Performmultitrackrecording.Makepreparations
forrecordingasdescribedinMulti(multitrack
recording)onpage 80.TurnMultiRECon
(checked).
SetthetracksyourenotrecordingtoeitherPlayor
Mute.Howeverifyourerecordingtheperformanceof
acombination,andnoneofthetrackshavealready
beenrecorded,itsoktoleavealltrackssettoREC.
6. PresstheREC/WRITEswitchandthenthe
START/STOPswitchtobeginrealtimerecording.
(SeeRecordingMIDIinrealtimeonpage 78)
Whileyourecord,youcanoperatetheKARMA
REALTIMECONTROLSsliders,KARMASWITCHES,
andSCENEswitchestovarythepatternorsound.The
changesyoucreatewillberecordedjustasyoumake
them.
ThesongtempoandKARMAtempocannotbeset
independently.
Synchronizing KARMA Synchronization basics
235
Synchronizing KARMA
Synchronization basics
Synchronization with Wave Sequences
IfyouwantaKARMAmoduletosynchronizewith
currentlyplayingWaveSequences(Mode=Tempo),
turnQuantizeTriggeron(checked)sothatitwill
synchronizetotheselectednoteinterval.
Synchronization with the Drum Track
ForinformationonsynchronizingKARMAwiththe
DrumTrack,seeUsingKARMAandtheDrumTrack
togetheronpage 243.
Synchronization with song start/stop
WhileKARMAisrunning,pressingthe
START/STOPswitchwillsynchronizeKARMA
withthesequencer.
KARMAwillbereset,andthephrasesorpatternsit
generateswillstartfromthebeginning.
WhilethesequencerisplayingandKARMAis
stopped,andyouchangethelocationbypressing
theLOCATEswitchetc.,KARMAwillbereset,and
thephrasesorpatternsitgenerateswillstartfrom
thebeginning.
IfyouthenpresstheSTART/STOPswitch,the
sequencerandKARMAwillbothstop.Ifyouwant
tostoponlyKARMA,pressthe(KARMA)ON/OFF
switch.
IfyouwantKARMAtostartthemomentrecording
begins,pressthe(KARMA)ON/OFFswitch,and
thenplaythekeyboardduringtheprecountbefore
recording.TheKARMAmoduleswillnotbe
triggeredimmediately,butwillbetriggeredin
synchronizationwiththesequencerthemoment
recordingstarts.
The Quantize Trigger parameter
ThetriggertimingofaKARMAmodulewilldepend
onthesettingofitsQuantizeTriggerparameter.
On(checked):ThetriggertimingofaKARMAmodule
willbequantizedtotheselectednoteinterval.
Off(unchecked):TheKARMAmodulewillbe
triggeredatthetimingatwhichyouplaythekeyboard.
Formoreinformation,seeQuantizeTriggeron
Note:Ifyouwantawavesequencetosynchronizeto
thecurrentlyplayingKARMA,gototheP2:Track
ParametersWaveSequence/KARMApageandturn
WaveSequenceQuantizeTriggeron.
Synchronization between KARMA
modules A, B, C, and D
InCombinationandSequencermodes,fourKARMA
modulescanberunning.EachmodulehasaQuantize
Triggersettingthatdetermineshowthatmodulewill
synchronizewiththeothermodules.
QuantizeTriggerOff:TheKARMAmodulewillbe
TherewillbenosynchronizationbetweenKARMA
modules;eachwillbetriggeredattheirowntiming.
QuantizeTriggerOn:TheKARMAmodulewill
synchronizetotheselectednoteintervalofthetiming
thefirsttriggeredKARMAmodulethatiscurrently
running.
Ifyouwanttosimultaneouslytriggermultiple
KARMAmodulesfromthekeyboardorpads,turn
QuantizeTriggeronforeachoftheseKARMA
modules.
Synchronization with songs, patterns,
and RPPR performance in Sequencer
mode
IfyouwantaKARMAmoduletoplay(orberecorded)
insynchronizationwiththecurrentlyplayingsong,
pattern,orRPPR,turnQuantizeTriggeron.
QuantizeTrigOff:TheKARMAmodulewillbe
Itwillnotsynchronizetothecurrentlyplayingsong,
pattern,orRPPR.
QuantizeTrigOn:Thetriggertimingofthe
KARMAmodulewillbequantizedtotheselectednote
intervalofthecurrentlyplayingsong,pattern,or
RPPR.
Note:IfyouwantpatternsplayedbyRPPRto
synchronizetothecurrentlyoperatingKARMA,set
Sync(SequencerP5:Pattern/RPPRRPPRSetup
page)toSEQ.
Note:Ifyouwantawavesequencetosynchronizeto
thecurrentlyplayingsong,pattern,RPPR,orthe
currentlyrunningKARMA,gototheP2:Track
ParametersWaveSequence/KARMApageandturnon
WaveSequenceQuantizeTriggeraswell.Formore
information,seeWaveSequenceQuantizeTrigger
Using KARMA
236
Slave operation
ConnecttheMIDIOUTofyourexternalMIDIdevice
totheKRONOSMIDIIN.
SetMIDIClock(Global11a:MIDISetup)toExternal
MIDI.TheKRONOSwillsynchronizetoMIDIrealtime
clockandrealtimecommandmessagesitreceivesfrom
theconnectedMIDIdevice.
Note:IftheKRONOSissettoMIDIClock=Auto,it
willalsosynchronizetotheexternalMIDIdeviceinthe
samewayifMIDIrealtimeclockmessagesarebeing
receivedfromtheexternaldevice.
Synchronization to MIDI clock
KARMAwillsynchronizetoatempobasedonthe
externalMIDIclocktiming.
Synchronization with MIDI realtime
commands
InSequencemode,SongStart,Continue,andStop
messagesthattheKRONOSreceiveswillcontrolsong
playbackandrecordingjustaswhenyouoperatethe
frontpanelSTART/STOPswitch.KARMAalsowillbe
controlledinthesamewayaswhenyouoperatethe
frontpanelSTART/STOPswitch.(See
Synchronizationwithsongstart/stop)
WhentheKRONOSreceivesaSongPositionPointer
message,itwillchangethelocationofthesongjustas
whenyouchangethesonglocationbyoperatingthe
KRONOS,andKARMAwillbecontrolledinthesame
wayaswhenyouchangethelocationontheKRONOS.
InProgramandCombinationmodes,SongStart,
Continue,andStopmessagesthattheKRONOS
receiveswillcontrolKARMA.
WhileKARMAisrunning,SongStart,Continue,
andSongPositionPointermessagesreceivedbythe
KRONOSwillresetKARMA,causingthegenerated
phrasesorpatternstostartfromthebeginning.
IfaSongStopmessageisreceived,KARMAwill
stop.
Master operation
ConnecttheKRONOSMIDIOUTtotheMIDIINof
yourexternalMIDIdevice.
SetMIDIClock(Global11a)toInternal.The
connectedexternalMIDIdevicewillsynchronizetothe
MIDIrealtimeclockandrealtimecommandsit
receives.
Note:ThesameappliesifMIDIClock=AutoandMIDI
realtimeclockmessagesarebeingtransmitted.For
moreinformation,seeMIDIClock(MIDIClock
Source)onpage 772oftheParameterGuide.
Synchronization via MIDI clock
TheconnectedexternalMIDIdevicewillsynchronize
totheMIDIclockoftheKRONOS.
Synchronization via MIDI realtime
commands
Enable Start/Stop Out in Prog/Combi
YoucansetupKRONOSsothatstartingandstopping
KARMAinProgramandCombimodeswillalso
controlstartandstoponexternalMIDIdevices,such
assequencersanddrum/groovemachines(suchasthe
KorgElectribeseries).
Todoso:
1. GototheGlobalMIDIpage.
2. UnderMIDIRoutingSetup,turnonEnable
Start/StopOutinProg/Combi.
InProgramandCombinationmodes,playinga
noteonfromthekeyboardorpadstotriggerthe
GEselectedforaKARMAmodulewillalsocause
theMIDIsystemrealtimemessageStarttobe
sentatthetriggertiming.
AftertheStartmessagehasbeensent,turningoff
KARMAON/OFFwillsendtheMIDIsystem
realtimeStopcommand.
237
Using the Drum Track
Overview
What is the Drum Track?
TheDrumTrackisabuiltindrummachine,fueledby
theKRONOSshighqualitydrumsounds.
Itgivesyouabeattoplayalongwithasyou
experimentwithProgramsandCombinations,oras
youworkouttheoutlineofasong.Ifyoureplaying
withtheDrumTrackandwanttocaptureyour
inspirationquickly,youcanuseAutoSongSetupto
immediatelystartrecordinginSequencermode.
TherearehundredsofpresetDrumTrackpatterns
coveringawiderangeofmusicalstyles,andyoucan
alsocreateyourown(aswellexplorelaterinthis
chapter).
DrumTrackPatterncontents
ThereareoptionstocontrolhowtheDrumTrack
patternstarts,suchasstartingimmediatelywhenyou
presstheDRUMTRACKbutton,orwaitinguntilyou
starttoplaythekeyboard.Ifyourestartingthepattern
byplayingthekeyboard,youhavetheoptionof
startingitbyusingaspecificrangeofnotesor
velocities.
YoucanalsolinktheDrumTrackwithKARMA,so
thattheyplayinsyncandstartandstoptogether.
InProgrammode,theDrumTrackhasitsownmixer
channel(includingEQ)andseparateeffectsrouting,
forindependentcontrolofthesound.InCombinations
andSongs,theDrumTrackplaysnormalTimbresand
Tracks,withallthenormalcontrolsoverProgram
selection,EQ,effectsrouting,andsoon.
Bank Contents
Preset P000697 Factory Drum Track patterns
User U000999 User Drum Track patterns
238
Performing with the Drum Track
Using the Drum Track in Program mode
InProgrammode,theDrumTracklivesalongsidethe
mainProgram,similartoasecondMIDITrackin
Sequencermode.
Herewellexplainhowtomakethemostimportant
settings.Formoredetails,pleasesee13:Drum
Trackonpage 42oftheParameterGuide.
Turning the Drum Track on and off
1. PresstheDRUMTRACKswitch.
TheswitchsLEDwilleitherlightsolidlyorblinkon
andoff,dependingontheProgramsTriggerMode
setting.
IftheLEDissolidlylit:thismeansthattheTrigger
ModeissettoStartImmediately.TheDrumTrack
patternwillstartaccordingtotheSyncsetting(for
moreinformation,seeControllinghowtheDrum
Trackstartsandstopsonpage 241).Whenyouturnit
off,thepatternwillstop.
IftheLEDisblinking:thismeansthattheTrigger
ModeissettoWaitKBDTrig.TheDrumTrackpattern
willstartwhenyouplaythekeyboardorwhenaMIDI
noteonisreceived.IfthefrontpanelLINKEDLED
andKARMAON/OFFswitchesarelit,theKARMA
performancewillstartandstoptogetherwiththe
DrumTrack.
Note:IftheselectedpatterniseitherP000:Offoris
empty(whichcanhappenwithUserpatterns),the
DRUMTRACKswitchwontturnon.
Setting the tempo
1. UsetheTEMPOknobortheTAPTEMPObutton
tosetthetempo.
Thissetsthesystemtempo,asshownin
theq =valuelocatedintheupperright
ofthedisplay.TheTAPTEMPObuttons
LEDalsoshowsthetempo,blinkingat
intervalsofaquarternote( q ).
Youcanalsoeditthetempodirectly
fromthedisplayusingthestandarddata
entrycontrols,includingthenumeric
keypad.Simplyselecttheq =inthedisplay,andthen
enteravalue.
Thetempoisvariablebetween40.00300.00bpm,and
issavedwhenyouwritetheProgram.
External clock
IftheMIDIClockparameter(ontheGlobalMIDI
Basicpage)issettoExternalMIDIorExternalUSB,or
toAutoMIDIorAutoUSBifMIDIClockmessagesare
beingreceived,thetempovaluewilldisplayasq =
EXT,andtheKRONOSwillsynctotheincoming
clocks.Whensyncingtoexternalclock,theTEMPO
knobandTAPTEMPObuttonhavenoeffect.
Selecting the Drum Track pattern &
sound
1. PresstheBasic/Vectortab,andthenpressthe
DrumTracktab.
TheDrumTrackpagewillappear.
2. NotetheDrumPatternsection,intheupperleftof
thedisplay.
ThePatternparameterhastwopopupmenus.Theone
ontheleftselectsbetweenthePresetandUserbanks;
theoneontherightselectsthepatternwithinthebank.
3. Inthepopupmenuontheleft,selectthePreset
bank.
4. Inthepopupmenuontheright,selectpattern
P001:Pop&Ballad[All].
Next,notetheDrumProgramsectionofthepage(to
therightoftheDrumPatternsection).Thisarea
containsafewparametersforadjustingthebasic
soundoftheDrumTrack.
5. PresstheProgrampopupmenu.
TheCategory/ProgramSelectdialogappears.By
default,theDrumcategorywillalreadybeselected.
6. SelectadrumProgramfortheDrumTracktoplay.
Youcanactuallyselectanysound,evenoutsideofthe
Drumcategorybuttheingeneral,thepatternswill
onlymakesensewhenplayingadrumProgram.
7. UseVolumetoadjustthevolumeoftheDrum
TrackProgram.
8. UseDetunetoadjusttheoverallpitchoftheDrum
Programinonecentincrements.
Onecentis1/100thofasemitone.
Youcanadjustthepitchofindividualdrumsamples
byeditingDrumKitsinGlobalmode.
Pattern Bank/No. Drum Track Program
Performing with the Drum Track Using the Drum Track in Program mode
239
Shift
ShiftletsyoutransposetheDrumTrackpatternin
semitonesteps,causingdifferentinstrumentsofthe
drumkittoplay.Thiswillgenerallycauseunexpected
results,whichmayoftenbeinterestingexperiment
andsee!
Linking with KARMA
YoucanlinkKARMAandtheDrumTracksothatthey
startandstoptogether.
1. GototheKARMATriggerpage.
2. IntheModuleParametersTriggersection,inthe
ControlGroup,notetheLinktoDrumTrack
checkbox.
3. TurnonLinktoDrumTrack.
ThefrontpanelLINKEDLEDwilllight.
IfLinktoDrumTrackison,KARMAwillbelinked
withtheDrumTrackstart/stop.
4. TurntheKARMAON/OFFswitchon.
Whenlinked,KARMAwillalwayswaitfortheDrum
Track.So,unlesstheDRUMTRACKswitchison,
KARMAwontstartyet.
5. TurntheDRUMTRACKswitchon.
KARMAwillstarttoplayalongwiththeDrumTrack,
accordingtotheDrumTracksTriggerMode.See
TurningtheDrumTrackonandoff,above,formore
information.
IfyouturnofftheDRUMTRACKswitchwhile
KARMAisoperating,KARMAwillalsostop.
Formoredetails,pleaseseeUsingKARMAandthe
DrumTracktogether,onpage 243.
Drum Track and the Control Surface
YoucanusethecontrolsurfacetocontroltheDrum
Tracksmixparameters,includingvolume,play/mute,
soloon/off,EQ,andeffectssends.
1. PlayaDrumTrackpattern.
SeeTurningtheDrumTrackonandoffonpage 238.
2. PresstheCONTROLASSIGNTIMBRE/TRACK
switch.
3. Onthedisplay,pressthePlaytab,andthenpress
theControlSurfacetab.
TheControlSurfacepagewillappear.
Thispagedisplaysandreflectsthecontrolsurface
settings.Itsconvenienttowatchthispagewhileusing
thecontrolsurface,sinceitshowstheparameternames
andprecisevalues.
Note:Youcanusethecontrolsurfaceregardlessofthe
pagethatscurrentlyshowninthedisplay.
4. Useslider3toadjusttheDrumTrackvolume.
5. UsePlay/Muteswitch3totoggletheDrumTracks
soundonandoff.
NotethatthiscontrolsonlythesoundoftheDrum
TrackProgram,andisindependentofwhetherornot
theDrumTrackpatternisplaying.
6. PresstheMIXERKNOBSbuttonuntil
theCHANNELSTRIPLEDlightsup.
effectssends.
7. PresstheMIXSELECT3buttontoselecttheDrum
TrackontheControlSurface.
8. Useknobs26toadjusttheDrumTracksEQ.
[DRUM TRACK]
Drum Track
Play/Mute,
(SWITCHES [3])
Drum Track
Select,
(SWITCHES [11])
Drum Track Volume
(SLIDERS [3])
KARMA LINKED LED
[MIXER]
T18
240
Using the Drum Track in Combination mode
Turning the Drum Track on and off
YoucanturntheDrumTrackonandoff,andcontrol
thetempo,justasinProgrammode.Formore
information,seeTurningtheDrumTrackonandoff
onpage 238,andSettingthetempoonpage 238.
Selecting a Drum Track pattern and
sound
InProgrammode,theDrumTrackhasaspecial
reservedmixerslot,adedicatedProgramselect
parameter,andsoonandtheDrumTrackpattern
alwaysplaysthatdedicatedProgram.InCombinations
(andSongs),theDrumTracksimplysendsMIDIto
playoneormoreofthe16Timbres/Tracks.
TosetuptheDrumTrackinCombinationmode:
1. GototheCombinationPlaypage.
2. ChooseaTimbretouseastheDrumTrack
Program.
YoucanusetwoormoreTimbresatonce,ifyouwant
togetreallyfancybutingeneral,allyoullneedis
one.Inthiscase,letsuseTimbre10.
3. OpentheTimbresCategorypopup,andselecta
drumProgram.
IF078StandardKitisagoodfirstchoice.
4. GototheTimbreParametersMIDIpage.
5. SetTimbre10(thedrumProgram)toMIDI
channel10.
Note:ifanothertimbreusesthesameMIDIchannel,the
drumpatternwillplaythattimbreaswell.
YoucanuseanyMIDIchannel,butitsbesttouse
somethingotherthantheGlobalMIDIchannel.
Otherwise,theDrumTrackpatternwillplayallofthe
soundsassignedtothekeyboard,withunpredictable
results.
6. GototheEQ/Vector/Controlpage,andselectthe
DrumTracktab.
IntheMIDIChannelsection,settheOutputto10(to
matchtheTimbreschannel,assetinstep5).
7. Intheupperleftofthepage,selectaDrum
Pattern.
Formoredetails,seeSelectingaDrumTrackpattern
andsoundonpage 240.
Note:Ifyouselectanemptypattern,youwontbeable
toturntheDRUMTRACKswitchon.
8. PresstheDRUMTRACKswitchtoverifythatthe
patternsoundscorrectly.
ThemethodoftriggeringwilldependontheTrigger
settings.IfTriggerModeisStartImmediately,the
DrumTrackpatternwillstartwhenyoupressthe
ON/OFFswitch.Formoreinformation,pleasesee
SynchronizingtheDrumTrackonpage 244.
Drum Track settings Drum Track settings in Program mode
241
Drum Track settings
Drum Track settings in Program mode
Controlling how the Drum Track starts
and stops
Youhaveseveraloptionstocontrolhowandwhenthe
DrumTrackstartsandstops.
1. GototheBasic/Vectorpage,andselecttheDrum
Tracktab.
2. IntheTriggersection,settheModetocontrolhow
thepatternwillstartandstop.
StartImmediately:WhenyouturnontheDrumTrack
bypressingtheDRUMTRACKswitch,theLEDwill
lightandtheDrumTrackpatternwillstartaccording
totheSyncsetting.Itwillstopwhenyouturnoffthe
switch.
WaitKBDTrig:WhenyoupresstheDRUMTRACK
switchtoturniton,theLEDwillblinkandtheDrum
Trackpatternwillwaittostart.Whenyouplaythe
keyboardorreceiveaMIDInoteon,theDrumTrack
patternwillstartaccordingtotheSyncsetting.
3. SpecifytheSyncsetting.
Off:TheDrumTrackpatternwillnotsynchronizeto
thecurrentlyrunningKARMA,butwillstart
immediately.
On:TheDrumTrackpatternwillsynchronizetothe
currentlyrunningKARMA.
Formoreinformation,seeTheTriggerSync
parameteronpage 244.
4. IfTriggerModeissettoWaitKBDTrig,specify
theLatchsetting.
LatchcontrolswhethertheDrumTrackpatternwill
continueplayingevenafteryoutakeyourhandsoffof
thekeyboard.
Off:IftheDRUMTRACKswitchison,theLEDwill
blink,andthepatternwillstartwhenyouplaythe
keyboard.Whenyoustopplaying,theDrumTrack
willstopaswell.
On:IftheDRUMTRACKswitchison(theLEDwill
blink),thepatternwillstartwhenyouplaythe
keyboard(noteon).Thepatternwillcontinuewhen
youreleasethekeyboard(noteoff).Thepatternwill
stopwhenyouturntheDRUMTRACKswitchoff(the
LEDwillgodark).
UseKARMALatchSwitch:Theon/offstatusofthe
KARMALATCHswitchwillcorrespondtotheabove
OffandOnmodesofoperation.Youwillprobably
wanttousethisinconjunctionwithKARMAsLatch
operation.
5. IfTriggerModeissettoWaitKBDTrig,specify
theKeyboardZoneandVelocityZone.
Thesesettingsspecifytherangeofkeysandvelocities
thatwilltriggertheDrumTrackpatternwhenyouplay
thekeyboard(orreceiveanoteon).
Storing the on/off setting
IftheTriggerModeissettoWaitKBDTrig,theon/off
statusoftheDRUMTRACKswitchisalsosavedwhen
yousavetheProgram.
IftheTriggerModeissettoStartImmediately,the
switchstatusisalwayssavedasOff,regardlessofthe
whethertheswitchisonoroffwhenyouWrite.
EQ adjustments for the Drum Track
Program
TheDrumTrackProgramhasitsownthreebandEQ,
justliketheProgramsoscillators.Youcancontrolthis
ontheDrumTrackpage,ordirectlyfromtheControl
SurfaceaswiththeoscillatorEQs.
IfyouenableAutoLoadProgramEQ,theEQsettings
storedintheDrumProgramwillbeautomatically
loadedwhenyouswitchDrumTrackPrograms.
Normally,youshouldleavethisenabled.
EvenifAutoLoadProgramEQisenabled,youcanstill
adjusttheEQmanually.
MIDI in and out
TheDrumTrackcaninteractwithMIDIinseveral
differentways.Youcan:
TriggertheDrumTrackpatternviaMIDIin
PlaytheDrumTrackProgramviaMIDIin
TransmittheDrumTrackpatternviaMIDIout
Triggering the Drum Track pattern via MIDI
IfyouretriggeringtheDrumTrackpatternbyplaying
thekeyboard,inputontheGlobalMIDIChannelwill
triggertheDrumTrackaswell.
Playing the Drum Track Program via MIDI
YoucanplaytheDrumTrackProgramviaMIDI,
separatelyfromthemainProgramsound.InProgram
mode,theDrumTracksMIDIchannelissetbythe
GlobalMIDIpagesProgMIDIChparameter.The
defaultischannel10.
(InCombinationandSequencermodes,thisworksa
littledifferently;seeDrumTracksettingsin
Combinationmode,below.)
NotethattheDrumTrackProgramdoesnottransmit
orreceiveProgramchanges.
242
Transmitting the Drum Track pattern via MIDI
Withthefactorysettings,theDrumTrackpatternwill
notbesentviaMIDIout.Ifyoulike,however,youcan
dosoforinstance,youcoulduseittoplayan
externalMIDIdevice,orrecorditintoanexternal
sequencer.Todoso:
1. GototheGlobalMIDIpage.
2. UnderDrumTrackMIDISetup,enableProgMIDI
Out.
3. SettheProgMIDICh.asdesired.
TheDrumTrackpatternwillthentransmitMIDIon
theselectedchannel.
Drum Track settings in Combination mode
UnlikeProgrammode,Combinationmodedoesnot
haveadedicatedtrackfortheDrumTrack.Instead,
youcanassignanyofthe16TimbrestotheDrum
Track.
Todoso,selectadrumProgramforthedesired
Timbre.Then,settheDrumTracksOutputMIDI
channeltomatchthetimbresMIDIchannel.
MIDI in and out
InCombinationmode,MIDIinteractswiththeDrum
TrackdifferentlythaninProgrammode.Youcanstill:
TriggertheDrumTrackpatternviaMIDIin
PlaytheDrumTrackProgramviaMIDIin
TransmittheDrumTrackpatternviaMIDIout
Triggering the Drum Track pattern via MIDI
IfyouretriggeringtheDrumTrackpatternbyplaying
thekeyboard,inputontheGlobalMIDIChannelwill
triggertheDrumTrackaswell.
Playing the Drum Track Program via MIDI
SincetheDrumProgram(s)usestandardCombination
Timbres,youcanplaytheDrumProgramjustasyou
wouldanyotherTimbre.
Transmitting the Drum Track pattern via MIDI
TheDrumTrackwilltransmitontheMIDIchannel
specifiedbytheDrumPatternOutputsettingofeach
Combination.
SetthistomatchtheMIDIchannelofthetimbreyouve
specifiedforthedrumProgram.
IfthetimbresStatusisEXTorEX2,theDrumTrack
patternwillbetransmittedviaMIDIout
Drum Track settings in Sequencer mode
TheDrumTrackworksmuchthesameinSequencer
modeasitdoesinCombinationmode.
However,whileCombinationstriggertheDrumTrack
patternviatheglobalMIDIchannel,Songstriggerthe
DrumTrackpatternontheMIDIchannelspecifiedby
DrumPatternInput.NormallyyoullsetthistoTch.
WiththeTchsetting,theMIDIchannelofthetrack
selectedbyTrackSelectwillautomaticallybeusedas
thetriggerchannel.
Fordetails,pleaseseeSelectingtheDrumTrack
pattern&soundonpage 238.
InSequencermodeyoucanusetheDrumTrackwhile
realtimerecordingasongtrackorpattern.
Thenoteon/offdatatransmittedbytheDrumTrack
patterncanberecordedaseventsinatrackorpattern.
Youcantusenotedatafromtheinternalsequencer
asatriggertostartDrumTrackpatterns.
IfyoureplayingaProgramorCombinationalongwith
theDrumTrackandcomeupwithanideaforasong,
youcanuseAutoSongSetuptoimmediatelystart
recording.Formoreinformation,seeAutoSong
Setuponpage 82.
Drum Track MIDI in and out
InSequencermode,theDrumTracktransmitsand
receivesonthefollowingMIDIchannels.
Receive:TheDrumTrackwillreceiveontheMIDI
channelspecifiedbytheDrumPatternInputsettingof
eachsong.NormallyyoullsetthistoTchandusethe
KRONOSskeyboardtocontrolthetriggering.
Transmit:TheDrumTrackwilltransmitontheMIDI
channelspecifiedbytheDrumPatternOutputsetting
ofeachsong.SetthistomatchtheMIDIchannelofthe
MIDItrackforwhichyouveassignedthedrum
Program.
IfthetracksStatusisBTH,EXT,orEX2,notedataetc.
oftheDrumTrackpatternwillbetransmitted.
Drum Track settings Using KARMA and the Drum Track together
243
Using KARMA and the Drum Track together
IfyoureusingtheDrumTrackandKARMAtogether,
youcanlinkthestart/stopoperationofboth,and
specifywhetherornottheDrumTrackpatternwill
playforeachKARMAscene.
Settings in Program mode
Linking KARMA with Drum Track start/stop
HereshowtostartandstoptheKARMAperformance
alongwiththeDrumTrackpattern:
1. GototheProgramP7:KARMAModule
ParametersTriggerpage.
2. TurnonLinkToDrumTrack.
ThefrontpanelLINKEDLEDwilllight.
IfLinktoDrumTrackison(selected),KARMAwillbe
linkedwiththeDrumTrackstart/stop.
3. TurntheKARMAON/OFFswitchon.
Evenwhenyouplaythekeyboard(orreceiveanote
on),KARMAwillnotbetriggered.
4. WhenyouturntheDRUMTRACKswitchon,the
DrumTrackwillstartatthespecifiedtiming.
IfTriggerModeissettoStartImmediately,KARMA
willbetriggeredandbeginoperatingwhenyouturn
theDRUMTRACKswitchon(ifyoureplayingthe
keyboard,oriftheKARMALATCHswitchison).
IfTriggerModeissettoWaitKBDTrig,operationwill
beginwhenyouplaythekeyboard(orwhenanoteon
isreceived).
IfyouturntheDRUMTRACKswitchoffwhile
KARMAisoperating,KARMAwillalsostop.
Turning Drum Track on and off for each KARMA
scene
ForeachKARMAscene,youcancontrolwhetheror
nottheDrumTrackwillplay.Todoso:
1. GototheProgP7:KARMAGERealTime
Parameters/Scenespage.
2. SelecttheScenestab,onthelefthandsideofthe
page.
TheScenespagewillappear.
3. InDrumTrackRun,clearthecheckboxofeach
sceneforwhichyoudontwanttheDrumTrackto
play.
Forexample,youmightturnthisonforscene1andoff
forscene2.
4. PresstheKARMAON/OFFswitchtoturniton.
OntheControlSurface,selectscene1.
5. PresstheDRUMTRACKswitch.
IfTriggerModeissettoWaitKBDTrig,playthe
keyboard(ortransmitanoteonviaMIDI).
VerifythatKARMAandtheDrumTrackpatternare
playing.
6. OntheControlSurface,selectscene2.
YoullstophearingtheDrumTrackpattern.Ifyou
presstheSCENE1switch,youllheartheDrumTrack
patternagain.
Settings in Combination and Sequencer
modes
Linking the KARMA performance with the Drum
Track pattern start/stop
InCombinationmodeandSequencermode,KARMA
canoperateuptofourKARMAmodules
simultaneously.Start/stopforeachKARMAmodule
canbesynchronizedwiththeDrumTrackpattern
start/stop.
Herewellexplainhowtomakesettingsin
Combinationmode.SettingsforSequencermodeare
thesameasinCombinationmode.
1. GototheCombiP7:KARMAModuleParameters
Triggerpage.
2. UnderControl,turnontheLinktoDrumTrack
settingfortheKARMAmodule(s)thatyouwantto
linkwiththeDrumTrackpatternstart/stop.
WhenyouturnonLinkforatleastoneofthefour
modules,thefrontpanelLINKEDLEDwilllight.
3. WhenyouturntheKARMAON/OFFswitchon
andplaythekeyboard(orreceiveanoteon),the
KARMAmoduleswhoseLinktoDrumTrackis
offwillbetriggered,andwillstart.KARMA
moduleswhoseLinktoDrumTrackisonwillnot
betriggered.
4. WhenyouturntheDRUMTRACKswitchon,the
KARMAmoduleswhoseLinktoDrumTrackison
willstartalongwiththeDrumTrack.
IfTriggerModeissettoStartImmediately,KARMA
willbetriggeredwhenyouturntheDRUMTRACK
switchon,andwillbeginoperating(ifKARMA
LATCHison).
IfTriggerModeissettoWaitKBDTrig,itwillbegin
operatingwhenyouplaythekeyboard(orreceivea
noteon).
IfyouturntheDRUMTRACKswitchoffwhile
KARMAisoperating,KARMAwillalsostopif
KARMALATCHisoff.
5. Makesettingssothatthebeatwillmatch
(synchronizeto)theoperatingKARMAmodules.
IntheTriggersectionoftheDrumTrackpage,turn
Syncon.
6. MakesettingssothattheKARMAmoduleswill
synchronizetothecurrentlyrunningDrumTrack
pattern.
IntheP7:KARMATriggerA/B/C/Dpage,turn
QuantizeTriggeron(selected).
244
Specifying whether the Drum Track will play for
each KARMA scene
JustasyoucaninProgrammode,youcanspecify
whethertheDrumTrackwillplayforeachKARMA
sceneinCombinationmodeandSequencermode.
ThesesettingsaremadebytherespectiveP7:
KARMASceneMatrixpageDrumTrackRun
parameters.Formoreinformation,seeTurningDrum
TrackonandoffforeachKARMAsceneonpage 243.
Synchronizing the Drum Track
The Trigger Sync parameter
ThetriggertimingofaDrumTrackwilldependonthe
settingofitsTriggerSyncparameter.
On(checked):Thetriggertimingwillbequantizedto
thenearestbeatrelativetothebasetempo.
Off(unchecked):IfTriggerModeisStartImmediately,
triggeringwilloccuratthemomentyoupressthe
DRUMTRACKswitch.IfthisissettoWaitKBDTrig,
triggeringwilloccuratthemomentyouplaythe
keyboard.
Synchronizing the Drum Track with KARMA, the
Sequencer, and RPPR performance
IfyouwanttheDrumTrackpatterntoplayinsync
withthecurrentlyoperatingKARMAfunction,
currentlyplayingsong,orRPPRperformance,turn
TriggerSyncon.
TriggerSyncOff:IftheTriggerModesettingisStart
Immediately,theDrumTrackpatternwillbetriggered
themomentyoupresstheDRUMTRACKswitch.If
thisissettoWaitKBDTrig,theDrumTrackpattern
willbetriggeredthemomentyouplaythekeyboard.It
willnotsynchronizetothecurrentlyoperating
KARMAfunctionortothecurrentlyplayingsong,
pattern,orRPPR.
TriggerSyncOn:Triggeringwillsynchronizetothe
currentlyplayingsong,patternorRPPRperformance
inunitsofameasure.Triggeringwillsynchronizeto
thecurrentlyoperatingKARMAfunction(in
Sequencermodeifthesongorpatternisstopped)in
unitsofabeat.
Note:IfyouwanttosynchronizeKARMAtothe
currentlyrunningDrumTrack,enabletheQuantize
Triggerparameter(ProgP7:KARMATrigger,
Combi/SeqP7:KARMATriggerA/B/C/D).
Note:IfyouwanttosynchronizetheRPPRpattern
performancetothecurrentlyrunningDrumTrack,set
theSyncparametertoBeatorMeasure.
Synchronization with Songs
WhenyoupresstheSEQUENCERSTART/STOP
switch,theDrumTrackwillstopalongwiththe
sequencer.
IfyouwanttheDrumTracktostartsimultaneously
withthebeginningofrecording,presstheDRUM
TRACKswitchduringtheprecountbefore
recording(ifTriggerModeisStartImmediately)or
playthekeyboard(ifTriggerModeisWaitKBD
Trig).TheDrumTrackswillnotbetriggered
immediately,butwillbetriggeredin
synchronizationwiththesequencerthemoment
recordingstarts.
Slave operation
ConnecttheKRONOSsMIDIINtoyourexternalMIDI
devicesMIDIOUT,orconnecttheKRONOSsUSBB
connectortoyourcomputersUSBport.Then,setup
theKRONOSasdescribedunderMIDIClock
synchronizationonpage 160.
Synchronization with MIDI real-time commands
InSequencermode,SongStart,Continue,andStop
messagesthattheKRONOSreceiveswillcontrolsong
playbackandrecordingjustaswhenyouoperatethe
frontpanelSTART/STOPswitch.KARMAalsowillbe
controlledinthesamewayaswhenyouoperatethe
frontpanelSTART/STOPswitch.(See
SynchronizationwithSongs,above.)
Master operation
ConnecttheKRONOSsMIDIINtoyourexternalMIDI
devicesMIDIOUT,orconnecttheKRONOSsUSBB
connectortoyourcomputersUSBport.
SettheGlobalMIDIClocktoInternal.Theconnected
externalMIDIdevicewillsynchronizetotheMIDI
realtimeclockandrealtimecommandsitreceives.
Note:YoucanalsouseMIDIClock=AutoMIDIor
AutoUSB,aslongasclockmessagesarenotbeing
received.Fordetails,pleaseseeMIDIClock
synchronizationonpage 160.
Synchronization via MIDI clock
TheconnectedexternalMIDIdevicewillsynchronize
totheMIDIclockoftheKRONOS.
Creating Drum Track patterns Preparing a user pattern
245
Creating Drum Track patterns
TocreateaDrumTrackpattern,youllusethe
SequencermodeP10:Pattern/RPPRPatternEditpage
toconvertauserpatternintoauserDrumTrack
pattern.Onceyouveconvertedthepatterninthisway,
youllbeabletouseitwiththeDrumTrackineach
mode.TheseconvertedDrumTrackpatternsareheld
ininternalmemoryevenafteryouturnoffthepower.
Thismeansyoucanmanagethemtogetherwiththe
ProgramsandCombinations.
Preparing a user pattern
Youllfirstneedtopreparetheuserpatternthatyou
wanttoconverttoaDrumTrackpattern.
Tocreateauserpattern,youcanrecordthepatternin
realtimeintheSequencerPattern/RPPRPatternEdit
page,orsteprecordit.
Alternatively,performancedatafromatrackcanbe
importedintoapattern,meaningthatperformance
datayouvecreatedinatrackorSMFdatayouve
loadedinMediamodecanbeusedasauserpattern.To
dothis,executetheGetFromTrackmenucommandin
theSequencerPattern/RPPRPatternEditpage.
Converting a Sequencer pattern to a DrumTrack pattern
1. PressthefrontpanelSEQswitchtoenter
Sequencermode.
2. GototheSequencerPattern/RPPRPatternEdit
page.
3. Selecttheuserpatternthatyouwanttoconvertto
aDrumTrackpattern.
SetPatterntoUser,andusePatternSelecttoselectthe
desiredpattern.
4. ChoosethemenucommandConverttoDrumTrk
Patterntoopenthedialogbox.
5. UsetheToDrumTrackPatternSelectfieldto
specifytheuserDrumTrackpatternnumberthat
willholdtheconverteddata.Whenyouexecute
thecommand,thedatawillbeoverwrittenonto
thisnumber.
6. IfyouselecttheAllPatternsavailableinSong
***option,allpatternsinthesongthatcontain
notedatawillbeconverted,startingwiththe
numberyouspecifiedinstep4.
7. IfyouexecutethiscommandwithNoteOnly
selected,onlythenoteeventswillbeconverted.
8. PresstheOKbuttonortheENTERswitchto
execute.Ifyoudecidenottoexecute,pressthe
CancelbuttonortheEXITswitch.
9. AsdescribedinUsingtheDrumTrackin
Programmodeonpage 238,settheDrumTrack
PatternBanktoUser,andsetPatternNo.to
theuserDrumTrackpatternyouconverted.Then
playtheDrumTrackpattern.
Internal memory
(saved in RAM)
Song
Drum Track
Track/RPPR
Program
/Combination
Drum Track
Convert to
Drum Track Pattern
100
User
Patterns
522
Preset
Patterns
1,000
User
Drum Track
Patterns
Sequencer memory
(stored on disk)
246
247
Appendices
Troubleshooting
Power supply
Power does not turn on
Isthepowercableconnectedtoanoutlet?Formore
information,seeConnectionsonpage 20.
IsthePOWERswitchturnedon?
TurnontherearpanelPOWERswitch.See
Turningthepoweron/offonpage 20.
Startup does not complete
Insomecases,theKRONOSwillnotstartupproperly
ifcertainUSBstoragedevicesareconnected.Inthis
case,disconnecttheUSBdevicesfromtheKRONOS,
waitabout10seconds,andthenturnonthepower
again.Youmaybeabletosolvetheproblemby
formattingtheUSBdeviceontheKRONOS(see
Formattingmediaonpage 188).
LCD screen
Display is blank or incorrect
The power is turned on, but nothing is shown in
the LCD screen. However, the KRONOS functions
normally when you play the keyboard or perform
other operations.
IstheLCDscreensbacklightbrightnessadjusted
correctly?
1. PresstheGLOBALswitch,andthenpressthe
EXITswitchtwice.
2. HolddowntheENTERswitch,andpressnumeric
key6.
TheLCDSetupdialogwillappear.
3. SelecttheBrightnessparameter,andincreasethe
valueuntilthescreenisbrightenough.
4. PresstheOKbuttontoconfirmthechange.
The power is turned on, but the LCD screen does
not display normally, or an error message is
displayed. There is no sound when you play the
keyboard, and the KRONOS does not function
normally.
Itispossiblethatthesystemhasbeendamaged.Use
theincludedAccessoryDiskstorestoretheKRONOS
toitsfactorystate.
HD-1 Program P0: Play page display
TheHD1sProgramP0:Playpagecandisplayeither
photosorotherimagesrepresentingthesound,orthe
Overview/Jumpgraphicswhichshowthesettingsof
variousimportantparameters(suchasEGs,LFOs,and
soon).
Thechoiceofwhichtodisplayiscontrolledbya
combinationoftheProgramP1:ProgramBasicpages
PlayPageMS/WS/DKitDisplayparameters(onefor
eachOscillator)andtheProgramP0:PlaypagesShow
MS/WS/DKitGraphicsmenucommand.Youcanset
theseasdesired.
Formoreinformation,see11h:PlayPage
MS/WS/DKitDisplayonpage 41oftheParameter
GuideandShowMS/WS/DKitGraphics,on
Problems using the touch-screen
Cant operate the LCD screen correctly
OntheBasicSetuptaboftheGlobalP0page,usethe
TouchPanelCalibrationpagemenucommandto
adjustthetouchpanelresponse.
Note:Ifyouareunabletoselectcommandsfromthe
pagemenu,dothefollowing:
1. PresstheGLOBALswitch.
2. PresstheEXITswitchtwice.
3. HolddowntheENTERswitchandpress3onthe
numerickeypad.
TheTouchPanelCalibrationpagewillappear.Follow
theonscreeninstructionstorecalibratethetouch
panel.
Cant switch modes or pages
IftheKRONOSisdoinganyofthefollowing,youmay
notbeabletochangemodesorswitchtoadifferent
page:
Recordingorplayingbackasongorpattern
Sampling(iftheSamplingRECbuttonislit)
PlayingaCDonaconnectedUSBCDdrive
PlayingaWAVEfile
AmenudialogorselectdialogisontheLCD
display
In Combination or Sequencer modes, cant edit
the value of Timbre/Track parameters such as
MIDI Channel or Status
Someparameterscantbeeditedwhilenotesare
playing,eitherlocallyorfromMIDI.Ifthedamper
pedalishelddown,orifitscalibrationisincorrect,
notesmaybesustainingeveniftheyarentaudible.
Appendices
248
Areyouusingadamperpedalwithapolaritythat
doesnotmatchtheDamperPolaritysetting(Global
P2:Controllers/Scales)?Formoreinformation,see
DamperPolarity,onpage 781oftheParameter
Guide.
Insomecases,thisproblemcanbesolvedbe
executingthepagemenucommandHalfDamper
Calibration(GlobalP0:BasicSetup).Formore
information,seeHalfDamperCalibration,on
No beep sounds when you touch the LCD screen
ChecktheBeepEnablecheckbox(GlobalP0:Basic
Setup).Formoreinformation,seeSoundingabeep
whenyoupresstheLCDscreenonpage 159.
Audio input and output
No sound
Areconnectionsmadecorrectlytoyouramp,mixer,or
headphones?Formoreinformation,seeConnections
onpage 20.
Istheconnectedampormixerpoweredon,andisits
volumeraised?
IsLocalControlturnedon?
InGlobalP1:MIDI,checktheLocalControlOn
checkbox.
IstheMAINVOLUMEknobraised?SeeMAIN
VOLUMEknobonpage 1.
IstheMASTERsliderraised?(SeeMasterVolumeon
page 24oftheParameterGuide.)
CouldMASTERVOLUMEhavebeenassignedtothe
ASSIGNABLEPEDAL,andthepedalsetinthe
minimumposition?
Couldthevectorjoystickbecontrollingthevolume?
Trymovingthevectorjoystickasyouplay.
IfthereisnosoundfromtheAUDIOOUTPUT
(INDIVIDUAL)14jacks,makesurethatBusSelector
BusSel.(BusSelect)followingtheinserteffectissetto
14,or1/23/4.
IfaspecifictimbredoesntsoundinCombination
mode,isitsPlay/MutebuttonsettoPlay?
Alternatively,areallSolosettingsturnedoff?(Ifthe
Solobuttonisblinking,thismeansthatatleastone
timbreisbeingsoloed.)
IfaspecifictrackdoesntsoundinSequencermode,is
itsPlay/Rec/MutebuttonsettoPlay?Alternatively,are
allSolosettingsturnedoff?(IftheSolobuttonis
blinking,thismeansthatatleastonetrackisbeing
soloed.)
MakesurethattheStatusisINTorBTH.(See
Preparationsforrecordingonpage 76.)
AretheKeyZoneandVelocityZonesetsothatsound
willbeproducedwhenyouplay?
IstheGlobalSystemClocksettoS/PDIF?Ifthisisthe
case,andavalid48kHzS/PDIFsourceisnot
connected,thentheKRONOSoutputswillbesilent.
Cant output sound from an audio CD
MakesurethatyouhaveselectedtheDiskmodePlay
AudioCDpageorSamplingmode.
IstheoutputoftheaudioCDbeinginputcorrectly?
IntheDiskmodePlayAudioCDPage,makethe
appropriatesettingsforBusSelect(IFX/Indiv.)and
Level.Alternatively,intheSamplingmodeP5:
AudioCDRippingpage,maketheappropriate
settingsforBusSelect(IFX/Indiv.)andLevel.
IstheDriveSelectsettingcorrect?
IstheMAINVOLUMEknobraised?
IfyoucreatedtheCDusingtheKRONOS,hastheCD
beenfinalized?
ACDR/RWdisccreatedusingtheDiskmode
MakeAudioCDpagecannotbeplayeduntilyou
alsofinalizethedisc.Usethepagemenucommand
FinalizeAudioCDtofinalizethedisc.Formore
information,seeFinalizeAudioCDonpage 855
Audio inputs dont work properly
Aretheappropriatesourcesconnectedtotheanalog,
S/P DIF,orUSBinputs?
IfthereisnosoundinSamplingmode,checkthatBus
Select(IFX/Indiv.),andLevelaresetcorrectlyinthe
SamplingP0:RecordingAudioInputpage.
Alternatively,isSAMPLINGRECturnedon?
IfthereisnosoundinProgram,Combination,and
Sequencermodes,checkthatBusSelect(IFX/Indiv.),
andLevelaresetcorrectlyinGlobalP0:BasicSetup
Audiopage;orintheP0:SamplingpagesofProgram,
Combination,orSequencermodes.
Onthe08:AudioInput/Samplingpage,istheUse
GlobalSettingparametersetcorrectly?
Analog audio inputs
IfyouareusingAUDIOINPUT1and/or2,makesure
thattheAUDIOINPUTLEVELknobsareraised.
IfyouareusingAUDIOINPUT1and/or2,arethe
MIC/LINEswitchessetappropriately?
S/P DIF input
IfyouareusingtheS/P DIFIN,istheinputsignalinan
unsupportedformat?
Pleasemakesurethattheconnecteddigitalaudio
deviceiscompatiblewithCP1201orS/P DIF.
IstheS/P DIFdevicesettoacompatiblesamplerate?
Only48kHzsamplingrateissupported.Ifthe
connecteddeviceisusinganunsupportedrate,you
mayhearnoise,andthemessageCLOCK
ERROR!mayappear.
Troubleshooting Programs and Combinations
249
Noise or distortion on audio inputs or recorded
sound
Ifyouarerecordingfromaudioinputs1and/or2,are
theAUDIOINPUTLEVELknobsandRecording
Levelsettingsappropriate?
IfRecordingLevelshowsADCOVERLOAD !,
adjusttheLEVELknob.IfCLIP!isdisplayed,
adjusttheRecordingLevelslider.
IfyouarerecordingfromtheS/P DIForUSBinputs,
aretheleveloftheoutputdeviceandtheRecording
Levelsetappropriately?
IfCLIP!appears,adjusttheRecordingLevel
slider.
Isthesystemclocksetcorrectly?
Ifcyclicclicknoiseisoccurring,checkthatyou
haveselectedtheSystemClockthatisbeinginput.
After sampling or sample edits
Afterasampleedithasbeenexecuted,orafterastereo
samplehasbeenrecorded,asmallnoisemaybeheard.
Thishasnoeffectontheaudiodatathatwaseditedor
sampled.
Noise or oscillation with effects
Whenusinganeffectonexternalaudioinputs,
oscillationmayoccurdependingonthetypeofeffect
orontheparametersettings.Pleaseadjusttheinput
level,outputlevel,andeffectparameters.Youneedto
beparticularlycarefulwhenusingahighgaineffect.
WhenusingtheMIDI/TempoSyncfunctiontocontrol
thedelaytimeofaneffect,noisemayoccurinthedelay
sound.Thisnoiseisduetodiscontinuitiesinthedelay
sound,andisnotamalfunction.
Someeffects,suchas023:StereoAnalogRecord,
generatenoiseintentionally.Itisalsopossibletocreate
oscillationusingafilterwithresonance.Thesearenot
malfunctions.
Disk access noise is heard in the analog outputs
Checkthattheelectricalgroundingiscorrectforthe
KRONOSandallconnectedaudioequipment,and
removeanygroundloops.
Notes do not stop
InProgramP1:Basic/Vector,selecttheProgramBasic
page,makesurethattheHoldcheckboxisunchecked.
CouldyouhaveusedToneAdjusttoturnHoldon?
InGlobalP2:Controllers/Scales,makesurethat
DamperPolarityorFootSwitchPolarityisset
correctly.
Sound fades in and out
Ifanoptionisindemomode,anysoundwhichuses
theoptionwillfadeinandout.
Programs and Combinations
Program or Combination does not play
correctly
Preloaded programs dont play correctly.
DoestheSamplesNotLoadedmessageappear?If
so,istherequiredEXssampledataloaded?
InGlobalmode,usetheAutoLoadKSCfeatureto
loadthePRELOAD.KSCfile.Formoreinformation,
seeAutomaticallyloadingsampledataon
page 164.
Settings for oscillator 2 are not displayed
MakesurethattheOscillatorMode(ProgramP1:
Basic/Vector)parameterissettoDouble.
EXi2related settings are not displayed
OntheBasic/Vectorpage,isthereanEXiinstrument
selectedforEXi2?Formoreinformation,seeEXi2
InstrumentTypeonpage 169oftheParameterGuide.
Reverse cant be enabled
IfaMultisampleorDrumSampleisloadedusing
VirtualMemory,Reversecannotbeenabled.
UsetheGlobalP0:SampleManagementpageto
changetheMultisampleorDrumSamplesLoad
MethodtoRAM.
EXi programs dont play correctly in a
Combination.
DoestheTimbresnumberhaveagraybackground
color,insteadofblue?And,does[Inactive]appearafter
theProgramnameintheSelectedTimbreInfo?
TheProgramsintheCombinationareaskingfor
morethanthemaximumavailableEXifixed
resources.RemoveoneormoreoftheEXi
Programswhichusesfixedresources.
Formoreinformation,seeCX3&otherEXi:
LimitationsonEXifixedresourcesonpage 420of
theParameterGuide.
Combination does not play correctly
after loading from disk
Inthedialogboxwhenyousavedthedata,didyou
checktheitemsthatyouwantedtosave?
Arethebank/numbersoftheprogramsusedbythe
combinationthesameaswhenthecombinationwas
created?
Ifyouhaveswitchedprogrambanks,youcanuse
theChangeallbankreferencesmenucommandto
Appendices
250
changetheprogrambankforeachtimbreofa
combination.Formoreinformation,seeChangeall
bankreferencesonpage 807oftheParameter
Guide.
Cant write a Program
YoucantwriteHD1programsintobankUSERA.
Conversely,youcantwriteEXiprogramsintobanks
USERBF.HoweverforbanksUSERAG,youcanuse
theGlobalmodepagemenucommandSetProgram
UserBankTypetochangethetypeofeachbank,so
thatitwillaccommodatethedesiredtypeofprograms.
Formoreinformation,seeChangingtheBankType
forUSERbanksonpage 27.
Songs
Song does not play correctly after being
loaded
Inthedialogboxwhenyousavedthedata,didyou
checkalloftheitemsthatyouwantedtosave?
AretheProgramsusedbytheSongthesameaswhen
thesongwascreated?
IfyouhaveswitchedProgrambanks,youcanuse
thepagemenucommandChangeallbank
referencestochangetheProgrambankforeach
trackofaSong.Formoreinformation,seeChange
allbankreferencesonpage 807oftheParameter
Guide.
Whensavingthesong,itisbesttouseSaveAllor
SavePCG&SEQsothattheprogramsaresaved
togetherwiththesong.Thenwhenloading,load
boththe.PCGandthe.SEQdata.
Haveyouloadedthemultisamplesandsamplesused
bytheprogram?
Audio tracks dont play
TheaudiofilesfortheSongmustbestoredwithina
directoryatthesamedirectorylevelasthe.SNGfile,
andthatdirectorymustbehavethesamenameasthe
.SNGfile,followedby_A(forAudio).For
instance,ifthe.SNGfileisnamedWAMOZART.SNG,
itsaudiofoldermustbenamedWAMOZART_A.If
youmoveorrenamethe.SNGfile,makesuretomove
orrenamethemainaudiofolderaswell.
IfthefoldercontainingtheWAVEfilesforthesongyou
loadedhasthewrongname,theiconisshowningray.
Couldyouhavemovedorrenamedthefolder?
Loading OASYS-format Songs
TheKRONOScanplaySongscreatedontheKorg
OASYS.However,thenameoftheaudiodirectorywill
needtobechangedslightly.
OASYSfileswerelimitedto8characters,andsothe
nameoftheaudiofiledirectorywastypically
abbreviated.Forinstance,ifthe.SNGfilewasnamed
WAMOZART.SNG,theOASYSaudiofolderwouldbe
namedWAMOZA_A.
BeforeyouloadanOASYS.SNGfile,editthenameof
thedirectorysothatitmatchestheKRONOSstandard:
thesamenameasthe.SNGfile,followedby_A(for
Audio).Inthecaseabove,youdrename
WAMOZA_AtoWAMOZART_A.
Playback does not start when you press
the SEQUENCER START/STOP switch
IstheMIDIClock(GlobalP1:MIDI)settoInternalor
Auto?
Cant record in Sequencer mode
DidyouuseTrackSelecttoselecttheMIDItrackor
audiotrackthatyouwanttorecord?
IstheMemoryProtectSongcheckbox(GlobalP0)
unchecked?
IstheMIDIClock(GlobalP1:MIDI)settoInternalor
Auto?
EXi programs dont play correctly in a
Song.
DoestheTracksnumberhaveagraybackground
color,insteadofblue?And,does[Inactive]appearafter
theProgramnameintheSelectedTrackInfo?
TheProgramsintheSongareaskingformorethan
themaximumavailableEXifixedresources.
RemoveoneormoreoftheEXiProgramswhich
usesfixedresources.
Formoreinformation,seeCX3&otherEXi:
LimitationsonEXifixedresourcesonpage 420of
theParameterGuide.
KARMA doesnt record properly after
using Copy From Combi
IsMultiREC(SequencerP0:Play/REC)checked?
ArethesettingsintheCopyFromCombinationdialog
boxcorrect?
IntheCopyFromCombinationdialogbox,check
theMultiRECstandbyoptionbeforeyouexecute
thecopy.Thiswillcausethesettingstobeadjusted
automatically.
Cant record your performance using
Tone Adjust
ChangesyoumakeusingToneAdjustarerecordedas
systemexclusivedata.DidyouchecktheGlobalmode
MIDIFilterEnableExclusivecheckbox?
Troubleshooting Set Lists
251
RPPR does not start
IstheSequencerP0:Play/RECRPPRsettingchecked?
(SeeUsingRPPR(RealtimePatternPlay/Record)on
page 106.)
AreAssign,PatternSelect,andTracksetcorrectly?
SeeUsingRPPR(RealtimePatternPlay/Record)on
page 106.
IftheMIDIClock(GlobalP1:MIDI)parametersetto
InternalorAuto?SeeMIDIClock(MIDIClock
Source)onpage 772oftheParameterGuide.
Cant record on an audio track
HaveyouuncheckedtheMemoryProtectInternal
HDDSavecheckbox(GlobalP0)?
HaveyousetTrackSelecttotheaudiotrackyouwant
torecord?
Ifyouwanttoperformmultitrackrecording(Multi
RECchecked),isPlay/Rec/MutesettoREC?
Aretheaudioinputsettingscorrect?
PleaseseeAudioinputandoutput,andAudio
inputsdontworkproperly.
Istherespaceremainingonthedisk?
DeleteunwantedWAVEfiles.
SaveacopyofimportantWAVEfilesonexternal
media,andthendeletethemfromthedisk.
AretheRECSourcesettingscorrect?
AFilealreadyexistsmessageappears,andyoucant
record.
IntheP0:Play/RECPreferencepage,changethe
nameoftheWAVEfilethatyouregoingtorecord.
DeletethefilesintheTEMPfolder.
Cant import WAVE files into a region of
an audio track
IntheImportRegion/WAVEdialogbox,youselecteda
WAVEfilebutcantpresstheOKbutton.
Only44.1kHzand48kHzWAVEfilescanbe
imported.
YoucanonlydirectlyimportWAVEfilesfromthe
internaldisk.TousefilesfromCDsorexternalUSB
devices,youmustfirstcopythemtotheinternal
disk,andthenimportthecopiedfileintotheSong.
Noise in sampled audio
IfyouuseCOMPAREorchangetheEXiInstrument
typeinanEXiProgramwhilerecordingasample,this
cancauseaglitchintheresultingsample.
Set Lists
COMPARE doesnt affect Control Surface
WhenyoureinSetListmode,theCOMPAREbutton
actsoneditstotheSetList,suchasthesoundsselected
foreachSlot,holdtimes,comments,andsoon.
ControlSurfaceeditsinSetListmodeapplytothe
SlotsProgram,Combination,orSong,andnottothe
SetListitself.ThismeansthatpressingCOMPAREin
SetListmodewillnotrevertsuchedits.
TorevertControlSurfaceeditsmadeinSetListmode:
1. Gotothesoundsnativemode.
Forinstance,iftheSlotcontainsaProgram,goto
Programmode.
2. PressCOMPARE.
TheControlSurfaceeditswillbereverted.Youcan
thenreturntoSetListmodeifdesired.
Sampling
Cant sample
Aretheaudioinputsettingscorrect?
SeeAudioinputsdontworkproperlyon
page 248
IsthereenoughfreeRAMmemoryforsampling?
Istherefreespaceinmemory?Formoreinformation,
page 684oftheParameterGuide,and09:Media
Informationonpage 822oftheParameterGuide.
InordertosampletoRAMmemory,youmust
allocatesufficientspaceforsampling.
Ifyouaresamplingtodisk,selectadifferentdisk.
Formoreinformation,seeSelectDirectoryon
Deleteunneededsamples.Formoreinformation,
seeDeleteSampleonpage 726oftheParameter
Guide.
Saveimportantsamplesonexternalmedia,and
thendeletethemfrommemory.
Ifyouresamplingtotheinternaldisk,didyou
unchecktheMemoryProtectInternalHDDSave
dialogbox?(GlobalP0)
IfyouresamplingtoexternalUSBstoragemedia,did
youselectrecordablemedia?
IstheTriggersettingcorrect?Formoreinformation,
seeTriggeronpage 19oftheParameterGuide.
InSamplingmodeifyouareresamplingwith
ResamplesettoAuto,hasthesampletoberesampled
beenassignedtothekeyboard,andselectedforKey?
Applyinganinserteffecttoasampleandresampling
theresultonpage 138.
Appendices
252
IstheSourceBussettingcorrect?
Ifabufferoverrunerroroccurredmessageis
displayedfrequentlywhenyouaresamplingtodisk,
executethepagemenucommandCheckMedium
(DiskUtilitypage)tofindandcorrectanyerrorson
theselectedMSDOSformatmedia.Formore
information,seeCheckMediumonpage 854ofthe
ParameterGuide.
A stereo sample cant be played in stereo
Isthemultisampleactuallystereo?
ExecutethepagemenucommandMSMonoTo
Stereotoconvertthemultisampletostereo.For
moreinformation,seeMSMonoToStereo/MS
StereoToMono(ChangeMultisampleType)on
Isthesamplenameassignedcorrectly?(SeeStereo
onpage 681oftheParameterGuide.)
Volume of a recorded sample is too
low/too high
SamplesthatyouresampledataRecordingLevelof
approximately0.0(dB)havealowervolumethan
whenyouresampledthem.
DidyouturnontheAuto+12dBOnsettingwhen
youresampled?SeeAuto+12dBOnonpage 130.
IfyouresampledwithAuto+12dBOnturnedoff,
turnon+12dB(SamplingmodeLoopEditpage)for
thatsample.
Song or CD playback stops temporarily
when you sample
IsAutoOptimizeRAMchecked?
Ifthisischecked,RAMwillbeoptimized
automaticallywhensamplingends,causingthe
soundtostopatthatpoint.Ifasongisbeingplayed
inSequencermodeorifaCDisbeingplayedback,
theplaybackwillstop.
AIFF file cant be loaded
Makesurethatthefilesuffixisthreecharacters:.AIF.
Somecomputerapplicationscreatefileswithafour
charactersuffix,.AIFF,whichisnotrecognizedbythe
KRONOS.
Time lag between pressing the
SAMPLING REC switch and entering
sampling-standby mode
Thelengthoftimeuntilyouentersamplingstandby
modewilldependonthestateofthefreespaceonthe
disk(i.e.,whetherthefreespaceiscontinuousor
fragmented).
Whensamplingtothedisk,pressingthe
SAMPLINGRECswitchwillcausetheamountof
spacespecifiedbySampleTimetobeallocated
withinthedisk.
SetSampleTimeonlyslightlylongerthanthe
lengththatyouwillactuallysample;avoid
specifyinganexcessivelylongsampletime.
Snap/click noise in recorded sample
Somethingscancausethesystemtopausebrieflyin
themiddleofrecordingasample,creatingasnapor
clicknoise.TheseincludepressingtheCOMPARE
button,changingtheEXitypeparametersontheEXi
ProgramP4:ProgramBasicpage,orreceivingaSystem
Exclusivebulkdump.Avoidthesewhilesampling.
KARMA
KARMA does not start
IstheKARMAON/OFFswitchturnedon(lit)?
IfaKARMAmoduledoesnotstartinCombinationor
Sequencermode,istheRunCheckBoxcheckedfor
thatmodule?Also,aretheInputChannelandOutput
Channelsettingsappropriate?
IsMIDIClock(GlobalP1:MIDI)settoInternalor
Auto?
IntheGlobalP0:BasicSetuppage,couldAllKARMA
Offbechecked?
IstheKARMALINKEDLEDlit?Ifso,KARMAis
linkedwiththeDrumTrack.StarttheDrumTrackto
triggerKARMA.Formoreinformation,seeUsing
KARMAandtheDrumTracktogetheronpage 243.
Troubleshooting Drum Track
253
Drum Track
Drum Track does not start
IstheDRUMTRACKON/OFFswitchturnedon(lit)?
IstheDRUMTRACK[ON/OFF]switchblinking?
TriggerModeissettoWaitKBDTrig.Thedrumtrack
patternwillstartwhenyouplaythekeyboardor
receiveanoteon.SeeTurningtheDrumTrackonand
offonpage 240.
DoesthecurrentDrumTrackpatterncontaindata?If
theresnodatainthepattern,theDrumTrackwont
play.
IfyoureinCombinationmode,istheOutputChannel
settingappropriate?SeeUsingtheDrumTrackin
Combinationmodeonpage 240.
IfyoureinSequencermode,aretheInputChannel
andOutputChannelsettingsappropriate?SeeDrum
TracksettingsinSequencermodeonpage 242.
IstheMIDIClockparametersetcorrectly?SeeMIDI
Clocksynchronizationonpage 160.
IntheGlobalP0:BasicSetuppage,isAllKARMA/DT
Offchecked?SeeGloballydisablingKARMAandthe
DrumTrackonpage 159.
IftheDrumTrackstopswhenyouswitchtheKARMA
Masterscene,haveyoucheckedtheDTRun(Drum
TrackRun)checkboxoftheKARMAMasterscene?
Vector
Cant control the volume
IstheEnableVolumeControlcheckboxchecked?
IstheCombinationorSequencermodeVJSAssign
settingappropriate?
HaveyoucheckedtheEnableProgramVectorVolume
checkboxsothatthevolumecontrolofaprogramcan
bereproducedinCombinationorSequencermode?
CC control does not work
IstheEnableCCControlcheckboxchecked?
AretheVJSXmodeandVJSYmodesettings
appropriate?
InCombinationorSequencermode,aretheEnable
CombiVectorCCorEnableSongVectorCCcheck
boxeschecked?
HaveyoucheckedtheEnableProgramVectorCC
checkboxsothattheCCcontrolofaprogramcanbe
reproducedinCombinationorSequencermode?
An envelope doesnt operate according
to its settings
Isthefrontpanelvectorjoysticksettothecenter
position?Theoperationoftheenvelopeisoffsetbythe
positionofthevectorjoystick.
HolddowntheRESETCONTROLSbuttonand
movethevectorjoysticktoresetittothecenter.
Drum Kits
The drum samples pitch does not change
YouhavelefttheAssigncheckboxunchecked,and
wanttoplaythedrumsampleattheadjacentrighta
semitonelower,butthepitchdoesnotchange.
IfyouhaveselectedadrumprograminProgram
mode,andthenwanttoeditthedrumkitinGlobal
mode,gototheProgramP2:EditPitch,OSC1Pitch
Mod.pageandsetPitchSlopeto+1.0beforeyou
enterGlobalmode.
Wave Sequences
The wave sequence does not advance
IstheRuncheckboxchecked?
Swing does not work properly
IsthewavesequencesModesettoTempo?
IsthewavesequencesSwingResolutionset
appropriately?
Appendices
254
Effects
Effects are not applied
Haveyouselectedeffectprogram000?
Selectaneffectotherthan000:NoEffectforIFX1
12,MFX1,2orTFX1,2.
AretheEffectGlobalSWIFX112Off,MFX1&2Off,
orTFX1&2Off(GlobalP0:BasicSetuppage)settings
checked?
IfyouareinCombinationorSequencermodeand
mastereffectsarenotappliedwhenyouraisethe
timbre/trackSend1orSend2settings,doesReturn1or
Return2fromthemastereffectneedtoberaised?
Alternatively,haveSend1orSend2foreachoscillator
oftheprogramusedbythetimbre/trackbeenlowered?
Note:Theactualsendlevelisdeterminedby
multiplyingthesendsettingofeachoscillatorinthe
programwiththesendsettingofthetimbre/track.
Haveyouroutedtheoutputtoaninserteffect?
MIDI
The KRONOS does not respond at all to
incoming MIDI data
AreallMIDIcablesconnectedcorrectly?
IstheMIDIdatabeingreceivedonthechannelon
whichitisbeingtransmitted?
The KRONOS does not respond correctly
to incoming MIDI data
AretheGlobalP1:MIDIsettingsMIDIFilterEnable
ProgramChange,EnableBankChange,Enable
ControlChange,EnableAfterTouch,andEnable
Exclusiveeachchecked?
DoestheKRONOSsupportthetypesofmessagesthat
arebeingsenttoit?
Incorrect response to program change messages
IstheBankMapsettingcorrect?
Disks, CDs, and USB Media
Internal disk and external USB devices
External USB devices are not recognized
Hasthedrivebeenformatted?
Istheexternaldeviceconnectedcorrectly?
Haveyouwaitedafewsecondsfornewlyconnected
USBdevicestoberecognized?
Error in writing to medium occurs frequently
when saving data
UsethepagemenucommandCheckMedium(Disk
Utilitypage)todetectandrepairerrorsonthemedia.
Formoreinformation,seeCheckMediumon
Save or Load operations cannot be completed
Ifthereisnomoreroomontheinternaldisk(theDisk
modeMediaInfopagesFreeSpaceparameterwill
showzerofreespace),thenWrite,Save,orLoad
operationsmaynotbecompleted.
CD-R/RW
CD-R/RW drive is not recognized, or Cant write
Wasthedrivesubjectedtophysicalshockorvibration
whiledataisbeingwritten?
IfyouareunabletosavedatasuchasPCGorSNG
files,hasthediscbeenformatted?
IfyouarewritingaudiotrackstocreateanaudioCD,it
isnotnecessarytoformatthedisc.
Areyouusingtherecommendedmediaforyourdrive?
IfyouarewritingfromanexternalUSBdrivetoCD
R/RW,itispossiblethatthetransferspeedis
insufficient.
Writingmaybesuccessfulifyoulowerthewriting
speed.
Writingmaybesuccessfulifyoufirstcopythedata
fromtheexternalUSBdrivetotheinternaldisk,
andthenexecutethewritingoperationfromthe
internaldisk.
Areyouusingblankmedia?
IfusingCDR,pleaseusenewmedia.IfusingCD
RW,usethepagemenucommandEraseCDRW
(DiskMakeAudioCD)toerasethecontentsofthe
mediabeforeyouexecuteSave.
A KRONOS CD-R/RW is not recognized by an
external device
ACDR/RWsavedorcopiedontheKRONOSusing
packetwritingisnotrecognizedonacomputer.
IfyouinstallaUDFversion1.5compatibleUDF
readerorpacketwritingsoftwareonyour
computer,itwillbepossibletorecognizethedisc.
InthecaseofaCDR,itmaybepossibletomake
thediscberecognizedbyexecutingthepagemenu
Troubleshooting Other problems
255
commandConverttoISO9660Format(Disk
Utilitypage)toconvertthedisctoISO9660format.
Howeverdependingonthestateinwhichthedisc
wassaved,itmaybeconvertedintoISO9660level3
format,andmaystillnotberecognized.Inthiscase
ifyouinstallISO9660level3compatiblereader
softwareorpacketwritingsoftwareonyour
computer,itwillbepossibletorecognizethedisc.
ACDR/RWthatwassavedorcopiedontheKRONOS
usingpacketwritingisnotrecognizedbythe
TRITON/TRITONpro/TRITONproX/TRITON
Rack/TRITONLe.
ThesemodelsdonotsupportUDFversion1.5,and
thereforewillnotrecognizesuchadisc.
InthecaseofaCDR,itmaybepossibletomake
thediscberecognizedbyexecutingthepagemenu
commandConverttoISO9660Format(Disk
Utilitypage)toconvertthedisctoISO9660format.
Howeverdependingonthestateinwhichthedisc
wassaved,itmaybeconvertedintoISO9660level3
format,andmaystillnotberecognized.
Cant write audio tracks
AdditionalwritingisnotpossibleonaCDR/RWdisc
thathasbeenfinalized.
Cant play back the disc on an audio CD player
Didyoufinalizethedisc?
Ifyouwanttofinalizethediscafterwriting
additionaldata,checktheExecutefinalizetoo
checkboxwhenexecutingthepagemenu
commandWritetoCD(DiskMakeAudioCD),
sothatthediscwillbefinalized.Formore
information,seeWritetoCDonpage 854ofthe
ParameterGuide.
Ifyouonlywanttofinalizethedisc,selectthepage
menucommandFinalizeAudioCD(DiskMake
AudioCD),andpresstheOKbuttontofinalizethe
disc.Formoreinformation,seeFinalizeAudio
CDonpage 855oftheParameterGuide.
AreyouusingCDRmedia?
SincesomeCDplayersareunabletoplayCDRW
media,werecommendthatyouuseCDRmedia.
Haveyoutriedusingadifferenttypeofmedia?
SomeCDR/RWmediacannotbeplayedbysome
CDplayers.Youmaybeabletoplayback
successfullybyusingadifferenttype(brand)of
CDR/RWmedia.
WAVE files
Cant load
IstheWAVEfileinaformatthattheKRONOScan
load?
Only48kHzor44.1kHzWAVEfilescanbe
insertedintoanaudiotrackinaSong,orintothe
TrackCDList.
Cant preview
IstheWAVEfileinaformatthattheKRONOScan
load?
Only48kHzor44.1kHzWAVEfilescanbe
previewedbypressingthePlaybuttoninthe
directorywindow.
Other problems
Power turns off automatically
IftheKRONOSisnotcooledadequately,theinternal
temperaturewillrise.Thepowersupplymayshut
downautomaticallytoprotectthedevicefromhigh
temperatures.
Date and time are incorrect
SavedfilesorsampledWAVEfileshaveanincorrect
dateortime.
UsethepagemenucommandSetDate/Time
(DiskUtilitypage)tosetthecurrentdateandtime.
Formoreinformation,seeSettingthedateand
timeonpage 198.
DoesthemessageTheclockbatteryvoltageislow.
Pleasereplacethebattery,andsetthedateandtimein
Diskmodeappear?Ifso,thecalendarbackupbattery
needstobereplaced.YourKorgDistributorcanhelp
youfindaservicecentertoreplacethebattery.
Appendices
256
Error and confirmation messages
A (ADCAre You Sure)
ADC Overload
Meaning:IftheADCOVERLOAD!indication
appearsabovetheRecordingLevelbar,thesignalis
distortingbecauseofanoverloadattheAUDIO
INPUTstage.Tosolvethisproblem:
AdjusttheMIC/LINEgainselectswitch,theLEVEL
knob,ortheoutputlevelofyourexternalaudio
source.
Are you sure?
Meaning:Thismessageasksyoutoconfirmexecution.
ToexecutepresstheOKbutton.Tocancel,pressthe
Cancelbutton.
B (Buffer)
Buffer overrun error occurred
Meaning:WhensamplingtoexternalUSBmedia,the
processingcouldnotkeepupwiththesampling.To
solvethisproblem:
ExecutetheDiskUtilitypagemenucommand
CheckMedium.Thentrythesamplingoperation
again.Ifthisdoesnotresolvetheproblem,copy
severalfilesfromthatmediatoothermedia,delete
thosefiles,andthentrythesamplingoperation
again.
Note:Samplingmaynotbepossiblebecauseofthe
mediayoureusing.Pleaseusetherecommendedtypes
ofmedia.
Note:IftheBufferoverrunerroroccurrederror
messageappears.thedatauptothepointtheerror
occurredhasbeensampled,butthedataatthepoint
theerroroccurredmaynotplaybackcorrectly.
Buffer underrun error occurred
Meaning:WhenplayingbackaWAVEfilefrom
externalUSBmedia,thedatacouldnotbereadfast
enoughforplaybackprocessing.
Copythefileyouwanttoplayintoanotherfolder,
andthenexecutetheoperationagain.
Note:Playbackmaynotbepossiblebecauseofthe
mediayoureusing.Pleaseusetherecommendedtypes
ofmedia.(MediathatcanbeusedontheKRONOS.)
C (Cant calibrateCompleted)
Cant calibrate
Meaning:Calibrationcouldnotbeperformed
correctly.
Tryagain.
Cant execute Audio Track recording
Meaning:Youattemptedtorecordaudiotrackswhen
RecordingSetupissettoLoopAllTracks
Youcannotperformaudiotrackrecordingwith
LoopAllTracks.ChooseadifferentRecording
Setup,andtryrecordingagain.
Meaning:Youattemptedtorecordaudiotrackswith
theGlobalmodeMIDIClocksettoExternal
MIDI/USBorAutoMIDI/USB,andanexternaldevice
(suchasacomputeroranotherMIDIdevice)isacting
astheMIDIclockmaster
Youcannotperformaudiotrackrecordingwhenan
externaldeviceistheMIDIclockmaster.SetMIDI
ClocktoInternalsothattheKRONOSistheMIDI
clockmaster.
Meaning:IftheGlobalmodeMemoryProtect
parameterInternalHDDSaveischecked,writingto
theinternaldiskisprohibited.Thiserrormessagewill
appearifyouattempttorecordonaudiotracksinthis
state.
UnchecktheInternalHDDSaveitem,andtrythe
recordingagain.
Cant insert event in stereo track
Meaning:InSequencermode,youwereperforming
audioeventeditingonanaudiotrackthatisassigned
asastereopair,andwereunabletoinsertanaudio
eventbecausethepairedtrackcontainedanaudio
event.
Deletetheunwantedaudioeventfromthepaired
audiotrack,andtheninsertthedesiredevent.
Cant load divided PCG file
Meaning:ThepagemenucommandLoadPCG
(RAM)andSamplescannotbeperformedona
dividedPCGfile.
Error and confirmation messages D (DestinationDisk)
257
Cant open pattern
Continue?
Meaning:Whenyoufinishedrecording,itwasnot
possibletoallocateenoughmemorytoopenthe
patternthatwasPutintothetrack.(Whenitmustbe
openedautomatically.)IfyoupresstheOKbutton,the
patterndatawillbedeleted,andtherecordedoredited
contentwillbesaved.IfyoupresstheCancelbutton,
therecordedcontentwillbediscarded.
CLIP!
Meaning:TheCLIP!indicationwillappearifthe
signallevelexceeds0dB.
Thesignalbeingsampledorrecordedtoanaudio
trackhasoverloaded;usetheRecordingLevel
slidertoadjustthelevel.
Note:Whenusingtheanalogaudioinputs,youwill
obtainthewidestpossibledynamicrangeifyouadjust
theMIC/LINEgainselectswitchandtheLEVELknobs
ashighaspossiblewithoutallowingADC
OVERLOAD!toappear.Inaddition,youshouldset
Level(02a)to127,andadjustRecordingLevelas
highaspossiblewithoutallowingCLIP!toappear.
CLOCK ERROR!
Meaning:TheGlobalSystemClockissettoS/P DIF,
buttheclockatthedigitalinputisnotbeingdetected
correctly.
Wheneveryouusedigitalaudioconnections,make
surethatallconnectedsystemsaresetsothatthere
isoneandonlyonewordclockmaster.Youcanset
thewordclockfortheKRONOSusingtheGlobal
pageSystemClockparameter.Formore
information,seeSystemClockonpage 756ofthe
ParameterGuide.
Makesurethatyourexternaldeviceiscorrectly
transmittingadigitalsignal.
Makesurethatthesamplerateoftheexternal
deviceis48kHz.
Makesurethatthereisnoproblemwiththecable.
Completed
Meaning:Executionofthecommandendednormally.
Could not execute Capture Random
Seed, because the selected Start Seed is
assigned as an RTParam
Meaning:IftheKARMAmodulesStartSeed
parameterhasbeenassignedasaperformance
realtimeparameter,thismessagewillappearwhen
youattempttoexecutetheCaptureRandomSeed
command;thecommandcannotbeexecuted.(Press
theOKbuttontoclosethemessage.)
InthePerfRTPpage,canceltheperformance
realtimeparameterassignmentforStartSeed.
D (DestinationDisk)
Destination and source are identical
Meaning:Whencopyingorbouncing,thesamesong,
trackorpatternwasselectedforboththesourceand
destination.Tosolvethisproblem:
Selectadifferentsong,track,orpatternforthe
sourceanddestination.
Destination from-measure within the
limits of source
Meaning:WhenexecutingtheMoveMeasure
commandforalltracksorwithinthesametrack,the
specifieddestinationmeasureiswithinthesource
range.Tosolvethisproblem:
Setadestinationmeasurethatisoutsideofthe
sourcerange.
Destination is empty
Meaning:Whenediting,thetrackorpatternthatwas
specifiedasthedestinationcontainsnomusicaldata.
Tosolvethisproblem:
Selectatrackorpatternthatcontainsmusicaldata.
Destination measure is empty
Meaning:Themeasurethatwasspecifiedasthe
destinationcontainsnodata.
Specifyadestinationmeasurethatcontainsdata.
Destination multisample already exists
Meaning:Amultisamplealreadyexistsatthe
destination(savelocation)multisample.
Eitherdeletethemultisampleatthedestination
(savelocation),orchangethesavedestination
multisamplenumber.
Destination multisample and source
multisample are identical
Meaning:Thesamemultisampleisselectedforthe
sourceanddestination.
Selectdifferentmultisamplesforthesourceand
destination.
Destination sample already exists
Meaning:Asamplealreadyexistsatthedestination
(savelocation).
Appendices
258
Eitherdeletethesampleatthedestination(save
location),orchangethesavedestinationsample
number.
Destination sample data used in source
sample
Cant overwrite
Meaning:Sincethesampledataatthedestination
(savelocation)isalsousedbythesourcesample,it
cannotbeoverwritten.
WithoutusingOverwrite,specifyadifferent
sampleforthedestination(savelocation).
Destination sample is empty
Meaning:Thesampleforeditingisempty.
Directory is not empty Cleanup directory
Are you sure?
Meaning:Whendeletingadirectory,filesor
directoriesexistwithinthatdirectory.
PresstheOKbuttontodeleteallfilesand/or
directorieswithinthatdirectory.
Disc full
Meaning:WhenusingtheWritetoCDcommandin
theDiskmodeMakeAudioCDpage,thereis
insufficientspaceremainingontheCDR/RWforthe
datatobewritten.
Eitherwritetoothermedia,orremoveunneeded
tracks.
Disk not formatted
Meaning:Whenyouattemptedtoperformahighlevel
format(quickformat)ofmedia,themediahadnot
beenphysicallyformattedyet.Tosolvethisproblem:
UsetheDiskmodeUtilitypagemenucommand
Formattophysicallyformatthemedia(fullformat).
E (ErrorExceeded)
Error in formatting medium
Meaning: Anerroroccurredwhileperforminga
physicalformat(fullformat)orhighlevelformat
(quickformat)ofthemedia.Tosolvethisproblem:
Useothermedia.
Meaning: WhenexecutingtheDiskmodeUtilitypage
menucommandConverttoISO9660Format,anerror
occurredwhilerewritingtheUDFarea.Tosolvethis
problem:
Useothermedia.
Error in mount process. Please backup
files
Meaning: AnerrorwasfoundonaUDFformatCD
R/RWorDVDR/RWdisk.Tosolvethisproblem:
Makeabackupofthedata,andstopusingthedisk
whichcausedtheerror.
Error in reading from medium
Meaning: Anerroroccurredwhilereadingdatafrom
media.Thiserrormayalsoappearwhendataisbeing
writtentomediabyaSaveorCopyoperation.Tosolve
thisproblem:
Executethereadingoperationonceagain.Ifthe
sameerroroccurs,itispossiblethatthedataonthe
diskhasbeendamaged.
Error in writing to medium
Meaning: Averificationerroroccurredwhilewriting
datatoamedium.Tosolvethisproblem:
Itispossiblethatthemediahasbeenphysically
damaged.Tryanothermedia.Avoidusingthe
mediathatproducedtheerror.
WhenusingexternalUSBmedia,executetheDisk
modeUtilitypagemenucommandCheck
Medium.
Error: invalid option file
Meaning:Whilepreparingtoinstallanoption(suchas
anEXs),thesystemhasdetectedcorrupteddatainthe
filestobeinstalled.Tosolvethisproblem:
CopythefiletotheUSBmediaagain,orifthatfails,
downloadthedataagain.
Error loading Drumsamples.
Error loading Multisamples.
Meaning: WhenexecutingChangeloadmethod,a
samplecouldnotbeloadedcorrectly.
Error: not enough disk space for the
installation
Meaning:Whilepreparingtoinstallanoption(suchas
anEXs),thesystemhasdeterminedthattheinternal
SSDistoofull.Tosolvethisproblem:
RemovedatafromtheSSD,backingituptoUSB
media,inordertofreeupspace.
Error and confirmation messages F (FileFront)
259
Error unloading Drumsamples.
Error unloading Multisamples.
Error unloading Exs
Error unloading RAM
Meaning: WhenexecutingChangeloadmethodor
Unloadalldatafromselectedbank,asamplecould
notbeunloadedcorrectly.
Exceeded 16 Programs
Meaning: Youexceeded16programswhile
performingAdvancedConversionLoad.Whenan
AKAIProgramisloaded,itwillbeconvertedinto
multipleprogramsandonecombinationaccordingto
itsstructure.Atthistime,themaximumnumberof
KRONOSprogramsresultingfromthisconversionis
limitedto16,whichisthemaximumnumberof
programsthatcanbeusedinacombination.Tosolve
thisproblem:
LoadtheAKAIprogramsindividually,andedit
themontheKRONOS.
InsteadofusingAdvancedConversionLoad,load
themultisamplesorsamples,andeditthemonthe
KRONOS.
F (FileFront)
Failed. Source device not found
Failed. Bad install.info - invalid SOURCE
Failed. Bad install.info - VERSION missing
Failed. Bad install.info - CRC fails
Meaning:WhenexecutingtheGlobalmodeUpdate
SystemSoftwarecommand,thesemessageswill
appeariftheupdatecouldnotbeperformedcorrectly.
Tosolvethisproblem:
Trytheupdateagain.Alternatively,tryagainusing
anotherCD/DVDorUSBflashmemory.
File already exists
Meaning:WhenexecutingaCreateDirectoryorFile
Renameoperation,adirectoryorfileofthesamename
alreadyexistsonthedisk.
Meaning:WhenexecutingtheDiskmodeUtilityCopy
commandwithoutusingwildcards,thecopy
destinationcontainedafileofthesamenameasthe
copysource.
Meaning:WhenyouexecutedtheDiskmodeUtility
SaveSamplingDataforAll,AllMultisamples,All
Samples,orOneMultisample,adirectoryalready
existedonthediskwiththesamenameasthedirectory
thatyouattemptedtocreateontheKRONOS.
Meaning:Whensamplingtothedisk,anidentically
namedfileexistsinthesavedestination.
Eitherdeletetheexistingdirectoryorfile,orspecify
adifferentname.
Meaning:Whenrecordinganaudiotrack,an
identicallynamedWAVEfileexistsinthesave
destinationonthedisk.
Eitherdeletetheexistingfile,orusetheSequencer
P0Preferencepagetospecifyadifferentname.
Meaning:Ifanaudiotrackyourecordedbeforelast
poweringoffwasnotsavedasaSNGfile,the
followingmessagewillappearwhenyouturnonthe
power.
Thereareunsavedaudiofilesfromyourprevious
recordingsession.
Doyouwanttorestorethesefiles,ordeletethem
fromthedisk?
[Restore][Delete]
IfyouchooseRestore,afoldernamedTEMPwill
remainontheinternaldisk.Ifyouthenrecordaudio
tracksinthisstate,andusethedefaultnameinthe
Preferencepage,thenamemaybeidenticaltothe
alreadyexistingWAVEfile,causingthismessageto
appear.
Specifyadifferentname.(SequencerP0Preference
page)
UsetheDiskUtilitypagemenucommandDeleteto
deletetheTEMPfolder.
Meaning:Whensavinga.SNGfile,aseparate
directoryiscreatedfortheSongsaudiofiles.The
directorysnameconsistsofthe.SNGfilename
followedby_A(forAudio).Ifthiserrorappears
whensavinga.SNGfile,itcanmeanthatadirectory
withthisnamealreadyexists.Tosolvethisproblem:
Changethe.SNGfilenametosomethingotherthan
thenameofanexistingdirectory,andthensavethe
dataagain.
File contains unsupported data
Meaning:YouattemptedtoloadanAIFF,WAVE,or
KSFfilethatwasinaformatnotsupportedbythe
KRONOS.
InthecaseofaAIFForWAVEfile,useacomputer
(ifpossible)toconvertthefileintoaformatthatis
supportedontheKRONOS,andthenloadit.
File is read-only protected
Meaning:Youattemptedtowritetoafileortodeletea
filethathadareadonlyattribute.
Meaning:Youattemptedtosaveafiletomediathat
containedareadonlyfileofthesamename.
Savethefilewithadifferentname.
Meaning:Youattemptedtosaveafileordirectoryina
Lockeddirectory.
UsethepagemenucommandLock/Unlockto
unlockthedirectory.
Appendices
260
File name conflicts
Meaning:Whensavinga.SNGfile,thedirectoryin
whichtheWAVEfileusedbytheregionistobesaved
alreadycontainsadirectorywiththesamenameasthe
.SNGfile,followedby_A,andthatdirectory
containsanidenticallynamedWAVEfile.
Meaning:WhensavingaSNGfile,theWAVEfiles
beingsavedaresuchthatsomeofthemwouldhavethe
samefilenamesasfilesinthesavedestination.
UsingthetexteditfieldshownbelowRename,
editthenameoftheWAVEfilebeingsavedsothat
itdoesnotconflict.ThenpressOK.Ifyoupress
Cancel,thatWAVEwillnotbesaved,soyou
shouldnormallyeditthenameandsavethedata.
File unavailable
Meaning:Youattemptedtoloadoropenafilewhose
formatwasincorrect.
File/path not found
Meaning:WhenloadingasamplefileinDiskmode,
thespecifiedfiledoesnotexist.Alternatively,the
specifiedfilenamedoesnotexistinthelocationyou
selectedinadialogboxforchoosinganotherdirectory
levelorothermedia.
Meaning:WhenexecutingtheDeletecommandinthe
DiskmodeUtilitypage,thespecifiedfiledidnotexist.
Meaning:WhenexecutingtheCopycommandinthe
DiskmodeUtilitypage,andyouusedawildcardto
specifythecopyfilename,thespecifiedfilewasnot
found.Alternatively,thelengthofthecopysourcepath
nameexceeded76characters.
Meaning:InDiskmodewhenyouusedtheOpen
buttontoopenadirectory,thepathlengthincluding
theselecteddirectorynameexceeded76characters.
Meaning:WhenexecutingInsertintheDiskmode
MakeAudioCDpage,youattemptedtousetheInsert
AllbuttontoaddaWAVEfile,butnoWAVEfilewitha
samplingfrequencyof44.1kHzor48kHzexistsinthe
selecteddirectory.
Checkthefileordirectory.
Meaning:InDiskmodewhenloadinga.KCDfile,a
WAVEfilelistedintheAudioTrackListcouldnotbe
found.
ThefilewhoseSizeisnotshownintheDiskmode
MakeAudioCDpageistheonethatcouldnotbe
found.Checkthefileordirectory,ordeleteitfrom
theAudioTrackList.
Front sample data used in rear sample
Cant overwrite
Meaning:WhenexecutingLinkintheSamplingmode
SampleEditpage,thesampledataofthefrontsample
isalsobeingusedbytherearsample,andtherefore
cannotbeoverwritten.Tosolvethisproblem:
InsteadofusingOverwrite,specifyadifferent
sampleasthesavedestination.
I (IllegalIndex)
Illegal file description
Meaning:Thefilenamethatyouspecifiedwhensaving
afileorcreatingadirectorycontainedinvalid
characters.Tosolvethisproblem:
Changethefilenameyouarespecifying.Filenames
notpermittedbyMSDOScannotbeusedasa
filename.
Illegal SMF data
Meaning:Youattemptedtoloadafilethatwasnota
StandardMIDIFile.
Illegal SMF division
Meaning:YouattemptedtoloadaStandardMIDIFile
thatwastimecodebased.
Illegal SMF format
Meaning:YouattemptedtoloadaStandardMIDIFile
ofaformatotherthan0or1.
Inconvertible file exists
Meaning:AfilethatcannotbeusedwithISO9660
formatexistsonthemedia.Tosolvethisproblem:
Mediathatwasformattedorwrittenbyadevice
otherthantheKRONOSmaybeimpossibleforthe
KRONOStoconvertintoISO9660format.To
performtheconversion,usethepacketwriting
softwarethatwasusedtoformatorwritethe
media.
Index number over limit
Meaning:WhensamplingintoRAMinCombination,
Program,orSequencermode,therearetoomany
indexestobesimultaneouslyconvertedintoa
multisample.
Eitherconvertthesamplesintoadifferentprogram
ormultisample,oruseSamplingmodetodelete
someoftheindexesbeforeyoucontinuesampling.
Error and confirmation messages H
261
H
HD Protected
Meaning:TheinternalSSDisprotected.Tosolvethis
problem:
OntheGlobalBasictab,underMemoryProtect,
turnoff(uncheck)theInternalHDDSavecheck
box.
K
KRONOS system version ... update
complete. Please restart the system.
Meaning:Thismessagewillappearwhenyouveused
theGlobalP0pagemenucommandUpdateSystem
Software,aftertheupdateiscomplete.Restartthe
systemtousetheupdatedsoftware.
Turnthepowerswitchoff,andthenonagain.
M (MasterMultisample)
Master Track cant be recorded alone
Meaning:Whenrealtimerecordingasingletrack,you
attemptedtobeginrecordingwiththemastertrackas
thecurrenttrack.
SelectaMIDIorAudioTrackforrecording,instead
oftheMasterTrack.
Master Track is empty
Meaning:YoucannotopenAudioEventEditbecause
theMasterTrackisempty.Tosolvethisproblem:
ExecutetheSequencerP4TrackEditpagemenu
commandSetSongLengthetc.withan
appropriatelengthtocreateamastertrack,and
thenopenAudioEventEdit.
Measure number over limit
Meaning:Theattemptededitoperationwouldcause
thetracklengthtoexceed999measures.
Deleteunnecessarymeasures.
Measure size over limit
Meaning:WhenloadingaStandardMIDIFile,the
numberofeventsinameasureexceededthemaximum
(approximately65,535events).
Meaning:Theattemptededitoperationwouldcause
themaximumnumberofeventsinameasure
(approximately65,535)tobeexceeded.
Tosolveeitheroftheseproblems:
Useeventeditingetc.todeleteunwanteddata.
Medium changed
Meaning:WhenexecutingtheCopycommandinthe
DiskmodeUtilitypage,themediawasexchangedor
ejected,anditwasnotpossibletocopybetween
separatemediaonthesamedrive.
Medium unavailable
Meaning:Youselectedamediumthatdoesnotallow
writing.
Medium write protected
Meaning:Theotherwritingdestinationmediais
writeprotected.
Turnoffwriteprotectontheothermedia,and
executethecommandonceagain.
Memory full
Meaning:InSequencermodewheneditingasong,
trackorpattern,thetotaldataofallsongshasusedup
allofthesequencedatamemory,andfurthereditingis
notpossible.Tosolvethisproblem:
Deleteothersongdataetc.toincreasetheamount
offreememory.
Meaning:WhilerealtimerecordinginSequencer
mode,thereisnomorefreememorytoaccommodate
therecordeddata,sorecordinghasbeenforcibly
halted.Tosolvethisproblem:
offreememory.
Appendices
262
Memory overflow
Meaning:WhilereceivingexclusivedatainDiskmode
SaveExclusive,allremaininginternalmemorywas
usedup.Tosolvethisproblem:
Ifyouarereceivingtwoormoresetsofexclusive
data,transmitthemseparatelytotheKRONOS.
Meaning:InDiskmode,youattemptedtoloadmore
samplewaveformdatathantherewasfreememory
capacity.Tosolvethisproblem:
InSamplingmode,executeDeletesampletocreate
freespaceinthesamplewaveformdataarea,and
reloadthedata.
Memory Protected
Meaning:Theinternalprogram,combination,song,
drumkit,wavesequence,KARMAGE,orInternal
HDDSaveisprotected.
Meaning:Thesongwasprotectedwhenyouexecuted.
InGlobalmode,turnoffwriteprotect,andexecute
thewriteorloadoperationonceagain.
MIDI data receiving error
Meaning:WhilereceivingMIDISystemExclusive
data,theformatofthereceiveddatawasinvalid,for
examplebecausethesizeofthedatawasincorrect.
Mount Error
Meaning:Thismessagewillappearwhenyouexecute
theGlobalmodeUpdateSystemSoftwarecommandif
theCDcouldnotbeexecutedsuccessfully.Tosolvethis
problem:
Tryagain.Alternatively,tryagainusingadifferent
CD.
Multisample L and R are identical
Meaning:Sincethedestination(savelocation)LandR
multisamplenumbersarethesame,theediting
operationcouldnotbeexecuted.Tosolvethisproblem:
SelectadifferentmultisamplenumberfortheLand
Rofthedestination(savelocation).
N (No dataNot enough song memory)
No data
Meaning:WhenloadingaStandardMIDIFile,thefile
containednoevents.
Meaning:WhenyouexecutedSamplesinOne
MultisampleintheExportSamplesasAIF/WAV
commandintheDiskmodeSavepage,therewereno
samples.
Createsampledata.
No medium
Meaning:WhenexecutingacommandinDiskmode,
nomediawasinsertedinthedrive.Tosolvethis
problem:
Insertmediasuchasamountthedrive.
No recording track specified
Meaning:Whenperformingrealtimemultitrack
recording,youattemptedtobeginrecordingwithno
trackssettoREC.Tosolvethisproblem:
SetthedesiredtracksforrecordingtoREC.
No Selected Item
Meaning:Whenyouattemptedtosaveasingleeffect
withSaveEffectPreset,therewasnoeffecttobe
saved.
Ifyouwanttosaveasingleeffect,selecteitherthe
PresetortheUsercheckboxbeforeexecutingthe
save.
Meaning:WhenexecutingAddKSContheGlobal
BasicKSCAutoLoadtab,youpressedAddwithout
selectingafile.
FirstselecttheKSCthatyouwanttoadd,andthen
pressAdd.
Meaning:WhenexecutingInsertTrackontheMedia
AudioCDMakeAudioCDtab,youpressedInsert
withoutselectingafile.
FirstselecttheWAVEfilethatyouwanttoadd,
andthenpressInsert.
No space available on medium
Meaning:Whenyouattemptedtosaveorcopyafile,
ortocreateadirectory,therewasnotenoughfree
spaceontheothermedium.Tosolvethisproblem:
Eitherdeleteanexistingfile,orexchangethe
mediumwithonethathassufficientfreespace.
No space available on medium
Do you want to make a divided file?
Meaning:Whensavinga.PCGor.KSFfile,therewas
insufficientfreespaceonthemedia.Pleasespecify
whetheryouwanttosavethefileindividedform.
PresstheOKbuttontosavethefileacrossmultiple
volumesofmedia,orpresstheCancelbuttonto
cancel.
Error and confirmation messages N (No dataNot enough song memory)
263
Not enough Drum Track pattern
locations available
Meaning:Whenconvertingasongsuserpatternsto
userdrumtrackpatterns,theallowablenumberofuser
drumtrackpatternswasexceeded.Tosolvethis
problem:
Asnecessary,usetheDiskmodeSavePCG
commandtosavetheuserdrumtrackpatterns.
TheninSequencermode,usetheEraseDrum
TrackPatternmenucommandtofreeupmore
drumtrackuserpatterns.Afterthat,trythe
conversionagain.
Not enough Drum Track pattern memory
Meaning:Whenconvertingasongsuserpatternsto
userdrumtrackpatterns,therewasnotenoughfree
memory.Tosolvethisproblem:
Asnecessary,usetheMediamodeSavePCG
commandtosavetheuserdrumtrackpatterns.
TheninSequencermode,usetheEraseDrum
TrackPatternmenucommandtodeletetheother
userdrumtrackpatternstofreeupmorememory.
Afterthat,trytheconversionagain.
Not enough empty slot to copy
CopyInsertEffectorCopyFromProgramifthereare
notenoughvacantinserteffectsinthecopy
destination.Tosolvethisproblem:
Setunusedinserteffectsinthecopydestinationto
000:NoEffectsothattherewillbeenoughvacant
inserteffects.
Not enough memory
Meaning:Whenstartingrealtimerecordingin
Sequencermode,theminimumamountoffree
memory(suchasmemoryfortheBAReventsuptothe
recordingstartlocation)couldnotbeallocated.To
solvethisproblem:
offreememory.
Meaning:WhenexecutingLoadExclusive,you
attemptedtoloadan.EXLfilethatrequiredmorethan
1,048,576bytes.Suchafilecannotbeloadedbythe
KRONOS.
Meaning:WheninDiskmodeyouattemptedtoload
anEXLfilefrommediaotherthantheinternaldisk,
memoryfortemporaryusecouldnotbeallocatedon
theinternaldisk.
Ontheinternaldisk,createfreespacethatislarger
thanthe.EXLfile.
Not enough memory to load
Meaning:Whenyouattemptedtoloada.SNGfileora
standardMIDIfileinDiskmode,therewasinsufficient
freememoryinthesequencememory.Tosolvethis
problem:
offreememory.
Not enough memory to open pattern
Meaning:Therewasinsufficientsequencermemoryto
openthepattern,soeditingisnotpossible.
Eitherdeleteunwanteddatasuchasasong,track,
orpattern,ordonotopenthepattern.
Not enough multisample memory
Meaning:Thereisinsufficientmultisamplememory.
(Thenumberofmultisampleswouldexceedthe
maximumof4,000.)Tosolvethisproblem:
Deletemultisamplestoincreasetheamountoffree
memory.
Not enough pattern locations available
Meaning:WhenusingtheLoadDrumTrackPattern
command,youattemptedtoloadmorethanthe
remainingnumberofuserpatternsintheselected
song.Tosolvethisproblem:
Createanewsong,andreloadthepatternsinto
userpatternsofthenewsong.Youcanloadupto
100userpatternsforeachsong.Ifyouneedtoload
morethanthisnumberofdrumtracksorpatterns,
youcandistributethembetweentwoormore
songs.
Meaning:WhenusingAutoSongSetup,thenewsong
couldnotbeautomaticallycreatedbecausetherewas
nosongwiththeinitialsettings.Ifyouexecutedthe
GlobalmodeChangeallbankreferencescommandon
thesong,allsongswilldifferfromtheinitialsettings,
causingthesystemtodeterminethatthereisnosong
withtheinitialsettings.
Not enough region locations available
Meaning:Theallowablenumberofregionswas
exceededduringrealtimerecording,orwhenyou
attemptedtoloadanentireSNGfile,1Song,orTracks
withregionsbeingappended.
InSequencerP4TrackEdit,selecttheaudiotrack
andusethepagemenucommandRegionEditto
createenoughvacantspacefollowingthelast
regionsothattheallowablenumberofregionswill
notbeexceeded.Thentrytheoperationagain.
Not enough relative parameter memory
Meaning:Thereisinsufficientmemoryforrelative
parameters.(Thenumberofsamplesinthe
multisampleswouldexceedthemaximumof16,000.)
Deletemultisamplesorindicesofmultisamplesto
increasetheamountoffreememory.
Appendices
264
Not enough sample memory
Meaning:Thereisinsufficientsamplememory(for
sampleparametersorsamplewaveformdata).
Deletesamplestoincreasetheamountoffree
memory.
Not enough sample/multisample
locations available
Meaning:Thedatayouattemptedtoloadwould
exceedthemaximumnumberofmultisamplesor
samples.Tosolvethisproblem:
InSamplingmode,useDeleteMultisampleor
DeleteSampletofreeasufficientnumber,and
reloadthedata.
Not enough song locations available
Meaning:Whenloadinga.SNGfilewithAppend
specified,youattemptedtoloadmoresongsthancan
beloaded.
Meaning:WhenexecutingAutoSongSetup,anew
songcouldnotbeselectedautomaticallybecausethere
wasnosongwiththedefaultsettings.Thiscanbe
causedbyusingtheGlobalmodeChangeallbank
referencescommandwiththeSongoptionselected,
sincethismodifiesthesettingsofallsongsawayfrom
thedefaults;afterthis,thesystemwillnotrecognize
thosesongsasbeingemptyandavailable.
InSequencermode,usetheInitializeSong
commandtoincreasethenumberofSongsthatcan
beused,andthenloadthesongagain.
Not enough song memory
Meaning:WhenexecutingtheSamplingmodeTime
SliceorSavecommands,thetotaldataforallsongs
occupiesallofthesequencedatamemoryarea,sothat
savingisnotpossible.
Meaning:WhensamplingtoRAMinSequencermode,
itisnotpossibletocreatetrackdataatthesametime.
Increasetheamountoffreememory,forexample
bydeletinganothersong.
No unused WAVE files found
Meaning:WhenyouexecutedtheDiskUtilitypage
menucommandDeleteUnusedWAVEfiles,no
unusedWAVEfileswerefound.
O (Obey copyright rulesOscillator)
Obey Copyright Rules
Meaning:WhenyouexecutetheDiskmodeMake
AudioCDpageWritetoCDcommand,orwhenyou
executeDestinationintheSamplingmodeAudioCD
pageDestinationcommand.
PleasereadCOPYRIGHTWARNINGonpage 3of
theQuickStartGuidebeforeyouusethisdata.
Oscillator Mode conflicts (Check PROG
P1)
Meaning:InSamplingmodewhenyouexecuted
ConvertMSToProgramwithUseDestination
ProgramParameterschecked,theconversion
destinationprogramOscillatorModesettingdidnot
match.
InProgrammode,settheOscillatorModeofthe
conversiondestinationprogram.Ifconvertinga
monauralmultisample,selectSingle.Ifconvertinga
stereomultisample,selectDouble.
P (PatternProgram)
Pattern conflicts with events
Meaning:ItwasnotpossibletoexecutetheBounce
operationbecauseoneofthetrackscontaineda
pattern,andthesamemeasureoftheothertrack
containedeventsorapattern.
Openthepattern.
Pattern exists across destination to-end-
of-measure or source from-measure
Meaning:Whenmovingameasure,theeditoperation
couldnotbeexecutedbecauseapatternhadbeenput
inthedestinationendmeasureorthesourcestart
measure,andhadnotbeenopened.
Openthepattern.
Pattern exists in destination or source
track - Open pattern?
Meaning:Apatternhasbeenplacedinthetrackthat
youspecifiedasadestinationorsourceforediting.If
youwishtoopenthepatternandexecute(theeventsof
thepatternwillbecopied),presstheOKbutton.Ifyou
wishtoexecutewithoutopeningthepattern,pressthe
Cancelbutton.
Pattern used in song - Continue ?
Meaning:Whenediting,thespecifiedpatternhasbeen
placedinatrack.Ifyouwishtoexecute,presstheOK
button.Ifyoudecidenottoexecute,presstheCancel
button.
Error and confirmation messages R (Rear sampleRoot)
265
Program Bank Type conflicts
Meaning:Whenreceivingadumpofanindividual
bankorasingleprogram,theKRONOSreceiveda
programthatdidnotmatchthebanktype.Ifthebank
typedoesnotmatch,theprogramwillnotbereceived.
Meaning:WhenreceivinganAllProgramsdump,the
KRONOSreceivedabankwhosebanktypedidnot
match.Onlybanksofthematchingbanktypewillbe
received.
IfyourereceivingbanksUSERAGorAAGG,
useGlobalSetProgramUserBankTypetochange
thebanktypesothatitsthesameastheonebeing
transmitted.Thentrytheoperationagain.
Program Type conflicts
CopyToneAdjustifthecopysourceandcopy
destinationprogramtypesaredifferent.Youcannot
copybetweenHD1andEXiPrograms,orbetween
differenttypesofEXiPrograms.
R (Rear sampleRoot)
Rear sample is empty
Meaning:WhenyouexecutedLinkintheSampling
modeSampleEditpage,thesamplethatyouspecified
astherearsampleisempty.
Specifyasamplethatcontainsdataastherear
sample,andexecuteonceagain.
Root directory is full
Meaning:Youattemptedtocreateafileordirectoryin
therootdirectoryofthemedia,butthiswouldexceed
themaximumnumberofrootdirectoryentries.
Eitherdeleteanexistingfileordirectory,orOpena
directorytomovedownonelevelbeforeexecuting
onceagain.
S (SampleSource)
Sample data used in other sample(s)
Continue?
Meaning:Othersample(s)usethesamesampledataas
thesamplethatyouareediting.Tocontinueediting,
presstheOKbutton.
Sample L and R are identical
Meaning:Theeditoperationcouldnotbeexecuted
becausethedestination(savelocation)LandRsample
numbersareidentical.
SelectdifferentsamplenumbersforLandRofthe
destination(savelocation).
Sample length is shorter than minimum
Meaning:Youattemptedtoexecuteanediting
operationthatwouldmakethesampledatashorter
than8samples.
Changetheeditingrangesothatthesampledata
willbelongerthan8samples.
Sample used in other multisample(s)
Continue?
Meaning:Thesampleyouareeditingisusedbyother
multisamples.Tocontinueediting,presstheOK
button.
Selected file/path is not correct
Meaning:Whenloadingadivided.PCGfile,you
attemptedtoloada.PCGfileofthesamenamethat
wasnotdividedorhaddifferingcontents.
Loadthecorrect.PCGfile.
Meaning:WhenloadingaKSFfilethatwassplitacross
multiplemedia,theorderinwhichyouattemptedto
loadthefileswasincorrect.
LoadtheKSFfileinthecorrectorder.Toviewthe
filenumberorderinwhichtheKSFfileswere
saved,youcanchecktheTranslationpagemenu
command.(Thesamplenameandnumberofthe
firstKSFfilewillbedisplayed.)
Slice point over limit
Cant divide
Meaning:WhenusingtheSamplingmodeTimeSlice
orTimeStretchcommands,theSlicesettingwould
dividethesampleintomoresamplesthanthe
maximumpossiblenumber(1000),andthusDivide
cannotbeexecuted.
UseLinktoconnectanyIndexthatyoudonot
require,andthenexecuteDivide.
Source file is not 44100Hz or 48000Hz
Cant convert
Meaning:WhenexecutingtheDiskmodeUtilitypage
menucommandRateConvert,youselectedaWAVE
fileofasamplingrateotherthan44.1kHzor48kHz.
YoucannotconvertWAVEfilesotherthan44.1kHz
or48kHz.
Appendices
266
Source IFX is all empty
CopyInsertEffectorCopyFromProgramifthereisno
inserteffecttobecopied.
Source is empty
Meaning:Nodataexistsinthetrackorpatternthat
youspecifiedasthesource.
Specifyatrackorpatternthatcontainsmusical
data.
Source sample is empty
Meaning:WhenexecutingInsert,Mix,orPaste,the
sourcesampleisempty.
ExecutetheCopyoperationbeforeexecutingInsert,
Mix,orPaste.
T (The clockTrack)
The clock battery voltage is low. Please
replace the battery, and set the date and
time in Disk mode.
Meaning:Thebatteryfortheclock/calendarfunction
hasrunlow,andneedstobereplaced.YourKorg
Distributorcanhelpyoufindaservicecentertoreplace
thebattery.
The data on the medium will be lost. Are
You Sure?
Meaning:Whenyouformatadisk,allofthedataon
thediskwillbeerased.Makesurethatyouhaveany
databackedupbeforeproceeding!Toproceedwith
formattingthedisk,pressOK.
There are un-saved audio files from your
previous recording session.
Do you want to restore these files, or
delete them from the disk?
[Restore] [Delete]
Meaning:TheWAVEfilescreatedwhenyourecorded
audiotracksbeforepoweringoffwerenotsavedas
songdata,andremainintheTEMPfolderofthe
internaldisk.Sincethedatawasnotsavedassong
data,allaudioeventsandregiondataweredeleted,
butifnecessaryyoucansavetheseWAVEfilesanduse
themtocreateanewsong.
Ifyouwanttokeepthisdata,pressRestore.Ifyou
wanttodeletethisdata,pressDelete.
There is no readable data
Meaning:Eitherthefilesizeis0orthefiledoesnot
containdatathatcanbeaccessedbytheloadoropen
operation.Alternatively,thedataisdamagedetc.,and
cannotbeloadedoraccessed.
This file is already loaded
Meaning:Whenloadingadivided.PCGfile,you
attemptedtoloadafilethathadalreadybeenloaded.
Loadthe.PCGfilesthathavenotyetbeenloaded.
Track is full
Meaning:IntheDiskmodeMakeAudioCDpage,you
attemptedtoinsertatrackthatwouldmakethetotal
exceed99tracks.
Cutunneededtracks,andthenexecutetheInsert
operationonceagain.
U (Unable to create directoryUSB Hub)
Unable to create directory
Meaning:Youattemptedtocreateadirectorythat
wouldexceedthemaximumpathnamelengthof76
charactersforthefullpathname,includingthenames
ofthedirectoryandallitsparentdirectoriesuptothe
rootlevelofthedisk.
Unable to save file
Meaning:WhenexecutingtheDiskmodeUtility
commandCopy,thecopydestinationpathlength
exceeded76characters.
Meaning:WhensavingafileinDiskmode,thesave
destinationpathexceeded76characters.
Meaning:WhenyouexecutedtheDiskmodeUtility
pagemenucommandCopy,thefilemanagement
dataexceededthesizeofthemanagementarea.
Meaning:Whensamplingtodisk,thesavedestination
pathfortheWAVEfileexceeded76characters.
Renamethefileand/ordirectoriessothatthefile
pathfitswithin76characters.Thisincludesthefile
nameandthenamesofallparentdirectoriesupto
therootlevelofthedisk.
Error and confirmation messages W (Wave)
267
USB HUB Power exceeded
Please disconnect USB device
Meaning:ThepowerconsumptionofyourUSB
deviceshasexceededthecapacityofthehubtowhich
theyareconnected.TheUSBhubwillnotbe
recognizedcorrectlyinthisstate.Tosolvethis
problem:
IfyoureusingaUSBhubordevicethatiscapable
ofbeingselfpowered,useitinselfpoweredmode.
IfyouareusingmorethanoneUSBhub,youmay
beabletosolvetheproblembyreconnectinga
devicetoadifferentUSBhub.Afteryouve
reconnectedyourdevice(s),executeScanUSB
Device.
W (Wave)
.WAV already exists. Overwrite?
Meaning:WhenimportingaWAVEfilethatrequires
conversionto48kHz/mono,afileofthesamename
alreadyexistsonthedisk.Tosolvethisproblem:
Eitherdeletetheexistingfile,orrenameitbefore
importing.
WAVE files on this external medium will
not be played with sequencer audio track
playback. Copy SNG and WAVE Directory
to Internal HDD, and load SNG from
internal HDD
Meaning:TheWAVEfileusedbytheSNGdatayoure
loadinginDiskmodeexistsonexternalmedia,and
willnotplaybackcorrectlywhenloaded.Audiotrack
recordingandplaybackisavailableonlyonthe
internaldisk.Tosolvethisproblem:
Copythe.SNGfileandthedirectoryforthat.SNG
file(thedirectorycontainingtheWAVEfilesit
uses)tothesamedirectoryoftheinternaldisk,and
thenloadthedataagain.
WAVE file size over limit
Meaning:WheneditinganaudiotrackinSequencer
mode,youexceededthemaximumnumberof
230,400,000samples(80minutesatasamplerateof48
kHz,16bit)allowableinaWAVEfile.
Y (You)
You cant undo this operation
Are you sure?
Meaning:Onceyouentereventediting(evenifyou
leaveeventeditingwithoutactuallyeditinganevent),
itwillnolongerbepossibletoexecuteaCompareof
thepreviousedit.Ifyouwishtoentereventediting,
presstheOKbutton.Tocancel,presstheCancel
button.
You cant undo last operation
Are you sure?
Meaning:Whenyouexitrecordingoreventeditingin
Sequencermode,thememoryareaforUndo(Compare
function)isnotallocated.Ifyouwishtokeepthedata
thatwasjustrecordedoredited,presstheOKbutton.
Ifyouwishtoreturntothepreviousdata(i.e.,todelete
thedatathatwasjustrecordedoredited),pressthe
Cancelbutton.
Meaning:WheneditinginSequencermode,memory
areaforUndo(Comparefunction)cannotbeallocated.
Ifyouwishtoexecutetheedit,presstheOKbutton.(It
willnotbepossibletoreturntothestatebefore
editing.)Ifyoudecidenottoexecutetheedit,pressthe
Cancelbutton.
InordertoallocatememoryareaforUndo
(Comparefunction),deleteunneededdatasuchas
songs,tracks,orpatterns.Werecommendthatyou
savedatatomediabeforeyouexecutetheedit
operation.
DiskandMediainformation
Appendices
268
Types of media supported by the KRONOS
Internal disk
Naturally,youcanreadandwritedatausingthebuilt
indisk.
External USB storage media
TheKRONOSsupportsUSBexternalstorageclass
devices,includingharddrives,flashdrives,magneto
opticaldisks,floppydisks,etc.BothMSDOSFAT16
andFAT32formatsaresupported,withthefollowing
capacities:
FAT32:upto2Terabytes(2,000Gigabytes)
FAT16:upto4Gigabytes
Formoreinformation,includingrequirementsfor
externalUSBstoragemediaanddetailsonconnecting
USBdevices,pleasesee5.ConnectingUSBdevices
onpage 23.
USB CD-R/RW and DVD
UsingaUSBCDR/RWdrive,theKRONOScanread
andwriteUDFformatCDR/RWdisks.Formore
information,seeCDR/RWdisksontheKRONOS:
UDF and packetwritingonpage 1153ofthe
ParameterGuide.
TheKRONOScanalsoplayandrecordaudioCDs
(CDDA),readISO9660(level1)CDs,andreadUDF
formatDVDdisks.
Operations that the KRONOS can performon media
Functions available with all media
SavingandLoadingfiles(Diskmode)
Youcansaveandloadanydatastoredinmemory.
FordetailsonKRONOSfiletypes,pleaseseeFiles,
directories,andiconsonpage 815oftheParameter
Guide.Loadingorsavingdividedfilesissupported
forUSBmedia.
Utilityoperations(Diskmode)
Youcancopyorformatmedia.
Sampling/resampling(Program,Combination,
Sequencer,Samplingmodes)
IfSaveto=DISK,sampled/resampledWavefiles
willbewrittendirectlytomedia.
Wavefileplayback(Sequencer,Diskmodes)
Somelimitationsapply.
*2
AudioCDcreation(Diskmode)
YoucancreateaudioCDsfromWAVEfiles,using
eitherinternalorUSBCDR/RWdrives.
ConverttoISO9660Format(Diskmode)
ThenativeKRONOSCDR/RWformatisUDF,
whichallowsyoutowriterepeatedlytothesame
CD.UDFisastandardformat,butyoucanalso
convertsuchdiskstothemorecommon(butless
flexible)ISO9660format.
Functions available only on the internal
disk(s)
Audiorecordingandplayback(Sequencermode)
Youcanrecordandplaybackaudiotracks.
Audiotrackediting(Sequencermode)
YoucanedittheWAVEfilesusedbyaudiotracks.
l:supported
x:notsupported
:notapplicable
*1
:CDDA(audioCDs)canberippedinSampling
mode.
Note:Ifyouhaveanyquestionsregardingthemedia
thatcanbeused,pleasecontactyourlocalKorg
distributor.YoumayalsochecktheKorgwebsite
(http://www.korg.com).
Function
Internal
Disk
USB HD,
Flash
Drives, MO
USB
Floppy
Disks
USB CD-R/RW
(UDF Packet
Write)
USB CD-R/RW
(ISO9660)
USB DVD-ROM
(ISO9660, UDF)
Save l l l l x x
Load l l l l l l
Sampling/Resampling l l x *
1
*
1
x
WAVE File Play l l x x x l
Make Audio CD l (source) l (source) x l l (source) x
Convert to ISO9660 Format l x
Audio Track Recording l x x x x x
Audio Track Edit l x x x x x
Error and confirmation messages Restoring the factory settings
269
Restoring the factory settings
Restoring the original sounds
YoucaneasilyrestorethePrograms,Combinations,
DrumKits,WaveSequences,SetLists,andEXs
samplestotheiroriginalstateasshippedfromthe
factory.ThisisdonebyloadingthePRELOAD.PCG
file,whichisincludedbothonAccessoryDisk2and
theinternaldisk.
Thisoperationwillerasealloftheinternal
KRONOSsounds.Ifthereareanynonfactory
soundsthatyouwanttokeep,savethemtodisk
now!Formoreinformation,seeSavingdataon
page 181.
Make sure that Memory Protect is off
Beforeloading,makesurethatMemoryProtectis
turnedoff:
1. PressthefrontpanelGLOBALbutton.
2. GototheBasictaboftheBasicSetuppage.
3. MakesurethatalloftheMemoryProtectcheck
boxesarenotchecked.
Loading from the internal disk
Generally,itwillbemoreconvenienttoloadsounds
fromtheinternaldisk:
2. GototheLoadtaboftheFilepage.
3. UseDriveSelecttoselectHDD.
TheLCDscreenwillshowthefilesandfoldersonthe
internaldisk.
4. TouchtheFACTORYfoldertoselectit.
5. PresstheonscreenOpenbutton.
TheLCDwillnowshowthecontentsoftheFACTORY
folder.
6. SelectthePRELOAD.PCGfile.
TheLoadPCGdialogboxwillappear.
8. Use.PCGContentstoselectthedatayouwantto
load.Tocompletelyrestorethefactorysounds,
selectAll.
Allwillloadallofthefactorysounds,including
Programs,Combinations,SetLists,DrumKits,Wave
Sequences,andDrumTrackpatterns.
Formoreinformationonthefactorysounds,see
Programbankcontentsonpage 27,Combination
bankcontentsonpage 57,DrumKitmemory
structureonpage 176,andWaveSequencebanks
onpage 168.
9. Set.KSCAllocationtoClearAll.
10.SettheLoadMethodtoKSCSettings.
11.PresstheOKbuttontoloadthedata.
Next,tomakesurethattheKSCloadsautomaticallyat
startup:
12.GototheGlobalBasicKSCAutoLoadpage.
13.InthelistofKSCs,checktheAutoloadboxnext
toPRELOAD.KSC.
14.UncheckalloftheotherKSCs.
Loading from Accessory Disk 2
Ifthesoundshavesomehowbeenerasedfromthe
internaldrive,youcanalsoloadthemfromAccessory
Disk2:
1. InserttheincludedAccessoryDisk2intoa
connectedUSBDVDdrive.
3. Waitforafewseconds,togivetheKRONOStime
torecognizethedisk.
4. GototheLoadtaboftheFilepage.
5. UseDriveSelecttoselectCDD.
TheLCDscreenwillshowthefilesandfoldersonthe
disk.
6. Followtheinstructionsinsteps4through14under
Loadingfromtheinternaldisk,above.
Neverattempttoremovemediawhiledataisbeing
loaded.
Appendices
270
Specifications
Operating
temperature
+5 +35 C (no condensation)
System/Keyboard System KRONOS
Keyboard 88-key RH3 (Real Weighted Hammer Action 3)
*1
73-key RH3 (Real Weighted Hammer Action 3)
*1
61-key Natural Touch Semi Weighted
*1: The key weight of the RH3 keyboard differs in four stages across the pitch range (with low notes
being heavier, and high notes being lighter), delivering a playing feel similar to that of a grand
piano.
Tone Generator Synthesis Types: 9 HD-1 High Definition Synthesizer (PCM) HD-1
AL-1 Analog Synthesizer (Analog Modeling) EXi
(Expansion
Instruments)
CX-3 Tonewheel Organ (Tonewheel Organ Modeling)
STR-1 Plucked String (Physical Modeling)
MS-20EX Component Modeling Technology (Analog Modeling)
PolysixEX Component Modeling Technology (Analog Modeling)
MOD-7 Waveshaping VPM Synthesizer (VPM Synthesis)
SGX-1 Premium Piano (Acoustic Piano)
EP-1 MDS Electric Piano (Electric Piano)
Maximum Polyphony
*2*3
HD-1 140 voices
AL-1 80 voices
CX-3 200 voices
STR-1 40 voices
MS-20EX 40 voices
PolysixEX 180 voices
MOD-7 52 voices
SGX-1 100 voices
*4
EP-1 104 voices
*2: In rare cases, when a large number of processor-intensive effects are active simultaneously (for
instance, more than 14 O-Verbs), polyphony may be slightly reduced.
*3: A portion of the multicore processor in KRONOS is devoted to generating voices, and a
separate portion is devoted to generating effects. KRONOS dynamically allocates the voice
processing power between the engines as necessary. The quoted maximum numbers of voices
apply when 100% of the voice processing power is devoted to a single engine.
*4: 100 dual-stereo notes (equivalent to 400 mono voices)
Preset PCM 314 MB (ROM 1,505 multisamples, 1,388 drum samples)
Build-in Expansion PCM
Libraries
EXs1 ROM Expansion
EXs2 Concert Grand Piano
EXs3 Brass & Woodwinds
EXs4 Vintage Keyboards
EXs5 ROM Expansion 2
EXs6 SGX-1 German D Piano
EXs7 SGX-1 Japanese C Piano
EXs8 Rock Ambience Drums
EXs9 Jazz Ambience Drums
Capacity of PCM RAM KRONOS: About 1GB, expandable to about 2GB
*5
: KRONOS X: About 2GB
*5
*5: The memory available for Sampling Mode will change based on the use of Expansion PCM
libraries and User Sample Banks.
Wave Sequences Preload 165 Wave Sequences
User Memory 598 Wave Sequences
Support for stereo multisamples, synchronization of individual notes, and tempo-based settings.
Specifications HD-1 Program
271
HD-1 Program Advanced Vector Synthesis Control oscillator volumes and synthesis & effects parameters via the Vector Joystick and the
tempo-synchronized Vector Envelope.
Structure Single: only OSC1, Double: OSC1 and OSC2.
Double mode lets you layer two completely separate synth voices, each with their own velocity-
switched oscillator, dual filter, EGs, LFOs, etc.
Drums: One drum kit, Double Drums: Two drum kits.
Oscillator Virtual Memory Technology (VMT) plays large samples directly from the internal SSD.
8 velocity zones per oscillator, with switching, crossfades and layering.
Each zone can play mono or stereo Multisamples or Wave Sequences.
Filters Two multi-mode filters per voices (low-pass, high-pass, band-pass and bandreject),
Four-mode filter routings (single, serial, parallel and 24dB mode).
Driver Per voice non-linear driver and low boost circuit.
EQ Three bands, with sweepable mid.
Modulation Three envelope generators, two LFOs per voice, common LFO, four key tracking generators,
AMS (Alternate Modulation Source), two AMS mixers.
EXi Program
Common
Advanced Vector Synthesis Control oscillator volumes and synthesis & effects parameters via the Vector Joystick and the
Modulation Common Step Sequencer, AMS (Alternate Modulation Source), Common LFO, 2 Key Tracking
Generators.
EQ Three bands, with sweep-able mid
AL-1 Program Oscillators Ultra-low-aliasing oscillators
OSC1, OSC2, Sub-oscillator and noise generator; ring modulation, FM and Sync.
Audio Input External audio can be processed through the ring modulator, filter, driver, amp, and EQ.
Filters Two multi-mode filter (low-pass, high-pass, band-pass and band-reject) with four types of filter
routings (single, serial, parallel and 24dB mode), MultiFilter mode (only Filter-A; modulatable mix of
Low Pass, High Pass, Band Pass, and dry input, for creating a wide variety of unique filter types and
effects).
Driver Per-voice non-linear driver and low boost circuit.
Modulation Five Envelope generators, four per-voice LFOs, two Key Track generators, two AMS Mixers,
Per-voice Step Sequencer.
CX-3 Program Tonewheel Organ Modeling Phase-synchronous tonewheels (clean and vintage modes), percussion, key click, wheel brake.
EX Mode Four additional, user-specified drawbars, and expanded percussion.
Internal Effects Rotary speaker, vibrato/chorus, amp modeling with overdrive, 3-band EQ.
Drawbar Control Controlled via nine front-panel sliders (via Tone Adjust).
Split Upper, Lower
Modulation Two AMS mixers.
STR-1 Program Physically Modeled String Includes physically modeled damping, decay, dispersion, nonlinearity, harmonics, dual pickups,
and more.
Most string parameters can be controlled in realtime.
String Excitation Three independent excitation sources can be used simultaneously: Pluck, Noise, and PCM.
16 preset pluck types, with modulatable width and randomization.
Noise generator with saturation and dedicated lowpass filter.
PCM Oscillator Korgs ultra-low-aliasing technology, as introduced in the HD-1.
4 velocity zones per oscillator.
Uses any mono Multisamples, including ROM, EXs, User Sample Bank, or
Sampling Mode. Supports Virtual Memory.
PCM can either be used as an excitation signal, or layered with the output of
the string.
Excitation Filter Dedicated 2-pole multimode filter for shaping the string excitation.
Filter can be enabled/disabled separately for each excitation source.
Low Pass, High Pass, Band Pass, and Band Reject modes.
Audio Input and Feedback Run real-time audio through the string, including feedback through effects.
Modeled feedback includes modulate-able instrument-to-amp distance and orientation.
Filters Dual multi-mode filters per voice; Single, Serial, Parallel (with split stereo output), and 24dB (4-pole)
configurations. Low Pass, High Pass, and Band Reject modes.
Multi Filter mode (Filter A only).
Modulatable mix of Low Pass, High Pass, Band Pass, and dry input, for creating a wide variety of
unique filter types and effects.
Modulation 5 Envelopes, 4 per-voice LFOs, 2 Key Track generators, String Tracking generators, 4 AMS Mixers.
Appendices
272
MS-20EX Program Oscillators Ultra-low-aliasing oscillators.
VCO1, VCO2, Ring Mod, Pink and White Noise Generator.
Audio Input Run real-time audio through the synthesis engine and ESP (External Signal Processor).
Filters 12dB/octave High Pass and Low Pass self-resonant filters.
ESP section: 24dB/octave Low Cut and High Cut filters, available per voice.
Patch Panel Patchable audio and modulation, at audio rates.
Patch Points
* New patch points not provided
on the original MS-20.
Keyboard: Keyboard CV Out, Keyboard Trigger Out, VCO1+VCO2 CV In, VCO2 CV In
VCO: VCO1+VCO2 External Frequency Control In, VCO1 Out*, VCO2 Out*
VCF: External Signal In, External HP Filter Cutoff Frequency Control In, External LP Filter Cutoff
Frequency Control In, HPF Out*, LPF In*, LPF Out*
VCO+VCF: Total External Modulation In
VCA: External Initial Gain Control In, VCA In*
EG: EG1 Envelope Signal Normal Out, EG1 Envelope Signal Reverse Out, EG1+EG2 Trigger In, EG1
Trigger In, EG2 Envelope Signal Reverse Out
MG: Triangle Out, Rectangle Out
Noise Generator: Pink Noise Out, White Noise Out
Sample and Hold: Clock Trigger In, Sample Signal In, S/H Out
Modulation VCA: Control Voltage In, Signal In, Signal Out
Manual Controller: Control Wheel Out, Momentary Switch
ESP: Signal In, AMP Out, BPF In, BPF Out, F-V CV Out, Envelope Out, Trigger Out
Others: EXi Audio In*, Mixer 1 In*, Mixer 1 Out*, Mixer 2 In*, Mixer 2 Out*
ESP (External Signal
Processor)
Use incoming audio as a trigger and/or CV source.
Modulation MS-20: Original DAR and HADSR EGs 1 & 2, original MG (with MIDI sync), Sample-and-Hold, MVCA.
KRONOS: 4 additional multi-stage Envelopes, 4 additional per-voice LFOs, and 4 AMS Mixers.
PolysixEX
Program
Oscillators VCO: Saw, Pulse, PWM
Sub Oscillator: Off, 1 octave below, 2 octaves below
Filter 24dB (4-Pole) Low Pass self-resonant filter
Effects Integrated Polysix Chorus, Phase, and Ensemble.
Arpeggiator Integrated MIDI-synced arpeggiator, with adjustable Range, Mode, and Latch.
Modulation Polysix: Original ADSR EG and MG (with MIDI sync).
KRONOS: 2 additional multi-stage Envelopes, 2 additional per-voice LFOs, and 4 AMS Mixers.
MOD-7 Program Waveshaping VPM
Synthesizer
Combines Variable Phase Modulation (VPM), waveshaping ring modulation, PCM sample playback,
and subtractive synthesis.
Able to convert-load SYX files.
Oscillators 6
VPM/Waveshaper/Ri
ng Modulation
Oscillators
Phase and modulatable pitch per oscillator.
101 Waveshaper tables plus modulatable Drive and Offset.
Use as oscillators, or as Waveshapers or Ring Modulators for other signals.
PCM Oscillator Korgs ultra-low-aliasing technology, as introduced in the HD-1.
4 velocity zones per oscillator.
Uses any mono Multisamples, including ROM, EXs, User Sample Bank, or
Sampling Mode. Supports Virtual Memory.
PCM can be used as an FM modulator and/or layered with the VPM
Oscillators.
Noise generator with saturation and dedicated low pass filter.
Audio input Run real-time audio through the VPM Oscillators and filters.
Filters Dual multi-mode filters per voice (Low Pass, High Pass, Band Pass, and Band Reject modes).
Two types of filter routing (parallel, 24 dB (4-pole)).
Multi Filter mode (Filter A only):
Modulatable mix of Low Pass, High Pass, Band Pass, and dry input, for creating a wide variety of
unique filter types and effects.
Patch Panel Supports both algorithm (78 types) selection and free patching.
Three 2-in, 1- out mixers for scaling and merging audio, fully modulatable, with phase inversion.
Main 6-input stereo mixer, with modulatable pan and volume, plus phase inversion.
Modulation 10 Envelopes, 4 per-voice LFOs, 9 Key Tracking generators, Per-voice Step Sequencer, 4 standard
AMS Mixers plus 4 simple AMS Mixers.
SGX-1 Program Premium Piano Virtual Memory Technology (VMT) plays large samples directly from the internal SSD.
Chromatically sampled at eight velocity levels, no looping.
Damper resonance and mechanical noise.
PCM EXs6 - SGX-1 German D Piano; EXs7 - SGX-1 Japanese C Piano
Piano Type 32 or more
Oscillator Control Damper Resonance, Damper Noise, Mechanical Noise, Note Release
Specifications EP-1 Program
273
EP-1 Program MDS Electric Piano Tine-type and reed-type electric pianos powered by Multi-Dimensional Synthesis (MDS), and
vintage effects.
Electric Piano Model Types: 6 Tine EP I, Tine EP II, Tone EP V, Tine EP DMP, Reed EP200, Reed EP200A
Oscillator Control Harmonic Sound Level, Attack Noise Level, Release Noise Level, Attack Brightness, Hammer Width
Panel Control Tine Type Preamp Volume, Tone (Treble, Bass), Vibrate (On/Off, Intensity, Speed),
Amp/Cabinet (On/Off, Drive)
Reed Type Preamp Volume, Tone (Treble, Bass), Vibrate (Intensity, Speed), Amp/Cabinet
(On/Off, Drive)
Effect Types: 9 Small Phase, Orange Phase, Clack Phase, Vintage Chorus, Black Chorus, EP Chorus, Vintage Flanger,
Red Comp, VOX Wah
Combination Number of Timbres 16 Maximum
Master Keyboard
Functionality
Keyboard and velocity splits, layers, and crossfades of up to 16 Programs and/or external MIDI
devices.
Advanced Vector Synthesis Control oscillator volumes and synthesis & effects parameters via the Vector Joystick and the
Drum kit Assignable stereo/mono samples with 8 velocity zones per oscillator (with crossfade functions).
Number of
Programs/Combi
nations/Drum kits
User memory programs 2,560 (1,536 or more preloaded [768 or more HD-1+768 or more EXi])
User memory combinations 1,792 (480 or more preloaded)
User memory drum kits 264 (78 or more preloaded)
256 GM Level2 preset programs+ 9 GM Level 2 drum preset programs
Set lists Number of set lists/slots 128 set lists, 128 slots per set list
Each set list provides a 9-band graphic EQ, and a Tone Adjust function that allows program settings to be adjusted.
Hold Time setting of Smooth Sound Transition (SST) supported for each slot.
Sampling System Open Sampling System (resampling, In-Track sampling)
Bit/Frequency RAM: 16bit/48kHz Stereo/Mono Sampling
Disk: 16 or 24 bit/48kHz
Sampling time RAM: Depends on the amount of available PCM RAM
DISK: Maximum of 80 minutes stereo (879 MB: 16bit)
Samples 16,000 samples/4,000 multisamples (128 indexes per multisample)
Ripping Direct sampling (ripping) from audio CD (CD-DA)
Formats Korg format, AKAI S1000/S3000 data (with advanced Program parameter conversion); SoundFont
2.0, AIFF, and WAVE formats
Editing Time Stretch, Time Slice, Crossfade Loop, and other standard editing features.
Effects Insert Effects 12, Stereo in / stereo out
Master Effects 2, Stereo in / stereo out
Total Effects 2, Stereo in / stereo out
Timbre/Track EQ One 3-band EQ for each timbre/track
Effect Types 185 different Effects types (Any Effect type may be used for Insert, Master, or Total Effects.)
Modulation Dynamic Modulation and Common LFO
Effects Control Busses Stereo side-chaining for compressors, gates, vocoders, etc.
Effect Presets 783, Maximum 32 per 1 effect (Preset User)
KARMA KARMA Modules One module in Program mode, four modules in Combination and Sequencer modes.
Generated Effects (GE) 2,048 presets, 1,536 Users (96 come Preload)
Controllers On/Off, Latch, Chord, Assign, Module, Control
KARMA Realtime Control Sliders [1][8], KARMA Scene [1][8], KARMA Switches [1][8], KARMA
Wave-Sequencing, GE Sub Category, Freeze Randomize, Time Signature Control, Tempo
Synchronize
Auto RTC (Real Time Control) setup
Drum Track Preset patterns 697 preset (common with the preset patterns of the MIDI sequencer)
User patterns 1,000 patterns
Patterns created in Sequencer mode can be converted to drum track user patterns.
Trigger Mode/Sync/Zone settings can be specified.
Sequencer/HDR Tracks 16-track MIDI sequencer + 16-track hard disk recorder + master track.
Number of Songs 200 songs
Resolution q /480
Tempo 40.00300.00 (1/100 BPM resolution)
Maximum memory 400,000 MIDI events (with MIDI data only) or 300,000 Audio events (with Audio data only)
MIDI Tracks 16 tracks plus the master track
697 preset/100 user patterns (per song)
18 preset/16 user template songs
Format: Korg (KRONOS, OASYS) format, SMF formats 0 and 1
Audio Tracks 16-track playback, 4-track simultaneous recording, WAV file format 16bit/24bit
Automation: Volume, Pan, EQ, and Send1/2
10,000 regions (max.), Event Anchors, BPM Adjust
Other Functions RPPR (Realtime Pattern Play and Record): 1 Pattern set per song.
Auto Song Setup function
Appendices
274
General Disk Mode Load, save, utility, audio CD burning, audio CD playback, data filer function (save/load MIDI System
Exclusive data), CD-R/RW (UDF format read/write), ISO9660 Level 1
Controllers Vector joystick, joystick, ribbon controller, switches 1 & 2
Control Surface Control Assign Switches: Assigns the Control Surface to Timber/Track, Audio,
External, Realtime Knobs/KARMA, Tone Adjust/EQ
Mixer Knobs Switch: Assigns the Mixer Knobs to either Channel Strip or
Individual Pan, Reset Control Switch, Solo Switch, Knobs 1-8, Switches 1-8
(Upper Row), Switches 1-8 (Lower Row), Sliders 1-8, Master Slider
KARMA Control: On/Off, Latch, Chord Assign, Module Control
KARMA Controller
Section
Switches = ON/OFF, LATCH, MODULE CONTROL
DRUM TRACK
Controller Section
Switches = ON/OFF
Display TouchView graphical user interface, 8 inch TFT, SVGA (800x600 dots), adjustable brightness.
Principal specifications Frequency response 20 Hz22 kHz 1.0 dB, 10 k load
THD+N 20 Hz22 kHz 0.01 %, 10 k load (typical)
Signal to noise ratio 95 dB (typical)
Dynamic range 95 dB (typical)
Crosstalk 95 dB, at 1 kHz (typical)
Audio Outputs (Analog)
(Digital)
AUDIO OUTPUT
(MAIN) L/MONO, R
AUDIO OUTPUT
(INDIVIDUAL) 14
1/4 TRS balanced
Output Impedance: 350 stereo; 175 mono (L/Mono only)
Nominal Level: +4.0 dBu
Maximum Level: +16.0 dBu
Load Impedance: 600 or greater
MAIN VOLUME knob controls only AUDIO OUTPUT (MAIN) L/MONO and R
Headphones 1/4 stereo phone jack
Output Impedance: 33
Maximum Level: 60+60 mW @33
MAIN VOLUME knob (link with AUDIO OUTPUT (MAIN))
Optical S/P DIF Format: 24 bit, S/P DIF IEC60958 EIAJCP-1201
Sample Rate: 48 kHz
Digital output of the same signals as AUDIO OUTPUT (MAIN) L/MONO and R
USB B Format: 24 bit
Sample Rate: 48 kHz
2 channels (Digital output of the same signals as AUDIO OUTPUT (MAIN)
L/MONO and R)
Audio Inputs (Analog)
(Digital)
Audio inputs 1, 2 1/4 TRS balanced
MIC/LINE input level switches, LEVEL knobs
Input Impedance: 10 k
Nominal Level: LINE
+4 dBu (LEVEL knob = min), 36 dBu (LEVEL knob = max)
Nominal Level: MIC
22 dBu (LEVEL knob = min), 62 dBu (LEVEL knob = max)
Maximum Level: LINE
+16 dBu (LEVEL knob = min), 24 dBu (LEVEL knob = max)
Maximum Level: MIC
10 dBu (LEVEL knob = min), 50 dBu (LEVEL knob = max)
Source Impedance: 600
Signal to noise ratio: 95 dB (typical)
Dynamic range: 95 dB (typical)
Crosstalk: 95 dB, at 1 kHz (typical)
Optical S/P DIF Format: 24 bit, S/P DIF IEC60958 EIAJCP-1201
Sample Rate: 48 kHz
USB B Format: 24 bit
Sample Rate: 48 kHz
2 channels
Control Inputs DAMPER (half damper supported)
ASSIGNABLE SWITCH, ASSIGNABLE PEDAL
MIDI IN, OUT, THRU
USB USB A (TYPE A) x 2 For connection to external USB MIDI and storage devices
USB B (TYPE B) x 1 MIDI/audio interface
MIDI: 1 (16 channel) input / 1 (16 channel) output
Audio: 2 channel input / 2 channel output
2 USB 2.0 High-Speed ports (supports 480 Mbps)
Disk Drive KRONOS: 30 GB SSD (2.5"); KRONOS X: 62 GB SSD (2.5); optional installation of second internal SSD
Power AC Power Supply terminal, POWER On/Off switch
Specifications Hardware
275
Options
*Appearanceandspecificationsofthisproductare
subjecttochangewithoutnotice.
Dimensions (W x D x H) 88-key: 57.28" x 16.18" x 5.71" / 1,455 x 411 x 145 mm
73-key: 48.94" x 16.18" x 5.71" / 1,243 x 411 x 145 mm
61-key: 41.42" x 14.25" x 5.28" / 1,052 x 362 x 134 mm
Weight 88-key: 50.71 lbs. / 23.0 kg
73-key: 44.75 lbs. / 20.3 kg
61-key: 27.56 lbs. / 12.5 kg
Power Consumption 60W
Accessories AC cord, Quick Start Guide, Accessory DVD Disc 1, 2 (DVDs include KRONOS Operation Guide,
Parameter Guide, and Voice Name List PDF files; Video Manual; KORG USB-MIDI Driver; System
Restore Data, etc.)
Hardware Expression/Volume Pedal XVP-10
Foot Controller EXP-2
Damper Pedal DS-1H
Pedal Switch PS-1, PS-3
Other MIDI Cable
Software EXs Expansion Samples:Expansion PCM library
Appendices
276
Specifications
277
MIDI Implementation Chart
Date : 2011. 1. 18

KRONOS
*C
*E, *5
*1
*1
*1
*1
*P
Memorized
[Music Workstation]
Polyphonic aftertouch transmitted *A
only as sequence data *A
All note numbers 0127 can be transmitted
by the KARMA function or as sequence data
Sequencer does not record Note Off velocity.
Bank Select (MSB, LSB) *P
Joystick (+Y, Y), Ribbon, Value Slider *C
Pedal, Portamento Time, Volume, IFX pan, Pan *C
Expression, Effect Control 1, 2 *C
Damper, Portamento Sw., Sostenuto, Soft *C
Sound (Realtime Knobs 14: 74, 71, 79, 72) *C
Switch 1, 2, Foot Switch, Controller *C
Send 1, 2, Effect ON/OFF (IFXs, MFXs, TFXs) *C
KARMA Controllers *C, *2
Pad18, Vector Joystick (X, Y) *C, *2
Data Entry, Increment, Decrement *C
NRPN (LSB, MSB), RPN (LSB, MSB) *C, *3
Realtime Knobs 58 VJS Assign *C
Seq. Data, KARMA GE data output *C (Seq when received)
External Mode (Knobs, SWs, Sliders) *C, *4
All Sound Off, Reset All Controllers *C
0, 32
1, 2, 16, 18
4, 5, 7, 8, 10
11, 12, 13
64, 65, 66, 67
70 79
80, 81, 82, 83
93, 91, 92, 94, 95
14, 22 31, 102 109
110 117, 118, 119
6, 38, 96, 97
98, 99, 100, 101
0 119
0 119
0 119
120, 121
Notes *P, *A, *C, *E: Transmitted/received when Global P1: MIDI Filter (Program Change, After Touch, Control Change, Exclusive) is Enable, respectively.
*1: When Global P1: MIDI Clock is Internal, transmitted but not received. The opposite for External MIDI.
*2: Valid if assigned as a MIDI control change in Global P2 Controller. The number shown here is the CC default assignment.
*3: RPN (LSB,MSB)=00,00: Pitch bend range, 01,00: Fine tune, 02,00: Coarse tune
*4: Valid if assigned as a MIDI control change in Global P1: External 1, 2
*5: In addition to Korg exclusive messages, Inquiry, GM System On, Master Volume, Master Balance, Master Fine Tune, and Master Coarse
Tune are supported.
System
Real Time
Clock
Command
Aux
Messages
Local On/Off
All Notes Off
Active Sense
Reset
Function Transmitted Recognized Remarks
Basic
Channel
Default
Changed
Aftertouch
Pitch Bend
Polyphonic (Key)
Monophonic (Channel)
Program
Change
Variable Range
System Exclusive
System
Common
Song Position
Song Select
Tune
Velocity Note On
Note Off
Note
Number:
True Voice
Mode Memorized
Messages
Altered
Control
Change
Mode 1: OMNI ON, POLY
Mode 3: OMNI OFF, POLY
Mode 2: OMNI ON, MONO
Mode 4: OMNI OFF, MONO
0 127
9n, V=1 127
8n, V=1 64
0 127
0 127
1 16
1 16
0 127
0 127
9n, V=1 127
8n, V=0 127
0 127
0 127
0 127
123 127
1 16
1 16
3
For more information, consult
your local Korg Distributor.
: Yes
: No
4015-2 Yanokuchi, Inagi-city, Tokyo 206-0812 Japan
IMPORTANT NOTICE TO CONSUMERS
2011 KORG INC.
This product has been manufactured according to strict specifications and voltage require-
ments that are applicable in the country in which it is intended that this product should be
used. If you have purchased this product via the internet, through mail order, and/or via a
telephone sale, you must verify that this product is intended to be used in the country in
which you reside. WARNING: Use of this product in any country other than that for which
it is intended could be dangerous and could invalidate the manufacturers or distributors
warranty. Please also retain your receipt as proof of purchase otherwise your product may
be disqualified from the manufacturers or distributors warranty.

Kronos Op Guide E5

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Kronos Op Guide E5

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

1

You might also like